Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout171219P z:\council packets\2017\r171219\171219a.docx Last Printed: 12/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 1 of 4 NOTICE OF MEETINGS MEETING AND POSSIBLE EXECUTIVE SESSION AND REGULAR SESSION OF THE FOUNTAIN HILLS TOWN COUNCIL TIME: 4:30 P.M. – MEETING AND POSSIBLE EXECUTIVE SESSION [Executive Session will be held in the Fountain Conference Room - 2nd floor] 5:30 P.M. – REGULAR SESSION WHEN: TUESDAY, DECEMBER 19, 2017 WHERE: FOUNTAIN HILLS COUNCIL CHAMBERS 16705 E. AVENUE OF THE FOUNTAINS, FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ Councilmembers of the Town of Fountain Hills will attend either in person or by telephone conference call; a quorum of the Town’s various Commission, Committee or Board members may be in attendance at the Council meeting. Notice is hereby given that pursuant to A.R.S. § 1-602.A.9, subject to certain specified statutory exceptions, parents have a right to consent before the State or any of its political subdivisions make a video or audio recording of a minor child. Meetings of the Town Council are audio and/or video recorded and, as a result, proceedings in which children are present may be subject to such recording. Parents, in order to exercise their rights may either file written consent with the Town Clerk to such recording, or take personal action to ensure that their child or children are not present when a recording may be made. If a child is present at the time a recording is made, the Town will assume that the rights afforded parents pursuant to A.R.S. § 1-602.A.9 have been waived. PROCEDURE FOR ADDRESSING THE COUNCIL Anyone wishing to speak before the Council must fill out a speaker’s card and submit it to the Town Clerk prior to Council discussion of that Agenda item. Speaker Cards are located in the Council Chamber Lobby and near the Clerk’s position on the dais. Speakers will be called in the order in which the speaker cards were received either by the Clerk or the Mayor. At that time, speakers should stand and approach the podium. Speakers are asked to state their name and whether or not they reside in Fountain Hills (do not provide a home address) prior to commenting and to direct their comments to the Presiding Officer and not to individual Councilmembers. Speakers’ statements should not be repetitive. If a speaker chooses not to speak when called, the speaker will be deemed to have waived his or her opportunity to speak on the matter. Speakers may not (i) reserve a portion of their time for a later time or (ii) transfer any portion of their time to another speaker. If there is a Public Hearing, please submit the speaker card to speak to that issue during the Public Hearing. Individual speakers will be allowed three contiguous minutes to address the Council. Time limits may be waived by (i) discretion of the Town Manager upon request by the speaker not less than 24 hours prior to a Meeting, (ii) consensus of the Council at Meeting or (iii) the Mayor either prior to or during a Meeting. Please be respectful when making your comments. If you do not comply with these rules, you will be asked to leave. Mayor Linda M. Kavanagh Vice Mayor Dennis Brown Councilmember Alan Magazine Councilmember Nick DePorter Councilmember Art Tolis Councilmember Henry Leger Councilmember Cecil A. Yates z:\council packets\2017\r171219\171219a.docx Last Printed: 12/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 2 of 4 NOTICE OF MEETING AND POSSIBLE EXECUTIVE SESSION Pursuant to A.R.S. § 38-431.02, notice is hereby given to the members of the Fountain Hills Town Council and to the general public that the Town Council will hold a meeting open to the public on December 19, 2017, beginning at 4:30 PM, for the purpose of deciding whether to go into Executive Session. If authorized by a majority vote of the Council, the Executive Session will be held immediately after the vote and will not be open to the public.  CALL TO ORDER – Mayor Linda M. Kavanagh  ROLL CALL – Mayor Linda M. Kavanagh  VOTE TO GO INTO EXECUTIVE SESSION: Pursuant to: (i) A.R.S. § 38-431.03(A)(3), discussion or consultation for legal advice with the attorney or attorneys of the public body; and, (ii) A.R.S. § 38-431.03(A)(4), discussion or consultation with the attorneys of the public body in order to consider its position and instruct its attorneys regarding the public body’s position regarding contracts that are the subject of negotiations, in pending or contemplated litigation or in settlement discussion conducted in order to avoid or resolve litigation [Specifically relating to: (i) the Adero Canyon Development Agreement, Eagles Nest Development Agreement, Adero Canyon Phase 2 PAD, General Plan Amendment; and (ii) ethics complaints; and (iii) the Park Place Development Agreement]. 2. ADJOURNMENT. REGULAR SESSION AGENDA  CALL TO ORDER AND PLEDGE OF ALLEGIANCE – Mayor Linda M. Kavanagh  INVOCATION – Pastor Todd Forest, Fountain Hills Christian Center  ROLL CALL – Mayor Linda M. Kavanagh  MAYOR’S REPORT i) None.  SCHEDULED PUBLIC APPEARANCES/PRESENTATIONS i) Mayor Kavanagh and/or Council may review RECENT EVENTS attended relating to Economic Development. ii) The Mayor will read a PROCLAMATION declaring January, 2018, as “SPEAK UP, STAND UP, SAVE A LIFE MONTH” in the Town of Fountain Hills. iii) Presentation by an EPCOR representative relating to scheduled main line replacements in the SunRidge area. Call To The Public Pursuant to A.R.S. §38-431.01(H), public comment is permitted (not required) on matters not listed on the agenda. Any such comment (i) must be within the jurisdiction of the Council and (ii) is subject to reasonable time, place, and manner restrictions. The Council will not discuss or take legal action on matters raised during “Call to the Public” unless the matters are properly noticed for discussion and legal action. At the conclusion of the call to the public, individual Councilmembers may (i) respond to criticism, (ii) ask staff to review a matter or (iii) ask that the matter be placed on a future Council agenda. z:\council packets\2017\r171219\171219a.docx Last Printed: 12/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 3 of 4 Consent Agenda All items listed on the Consent Agenda are considered to be routine, non-controversial matters and will be enacted by one motion and one roll call vote of the Council. All motions and subsequent approvals of consent items will include all recommended staff stipulations unless otherwise stated. There will be no separate discussion of these items unless a Councilmember or member of the public so requests. If a Councilmember or member of the public wishes to discuss an item on the consent agenda, he/she may request so prior to the motion to accept the Consent Agenda or with notification to the Town Manager or Mayor prior to the date of the meeting for which the item was scheduled. The items will be removed from the Consent Agenda and considered in its normal sequence on the Agenda. 1. CONSIDERATION of approving the CANCELLATION of the January 2, 2018 Fountain Hills Town Council meeting. 2. CONSIDERATION of approving a FIRST AMENDMENT to contract C2017-104 with Firework Productions of Arizona, LLC, extending the terms of the contract with up to four one-year renewable options, and increasing the amount of the contract to $20,000.00, not to exceed $95,000.00 in total. 3. CONSIDERATION of approving COOPERATIVE PURCHASING AGREEMENT (2018-080) with Kompan, Inc., in an amount not to exceed $90,000.00, to replace playground equipment at Golden Eagle Park. 4. CONSIDERATION of approving the PROFESSIONAL SERVICES AGREEMENT (C2018-041) with Hunt Design and Associates, Inc., in the amount of $95,500.00, for providing professional services for the assessment and design of the Town-Wide Municipal Wayfinding Sign Program. Regular Agenda 5. PUBLIC HEARING to receive comments on RESOLUTION 2017-33, a Major General Plan Amendment related to the proposed Adero Canyon Phase II residential development proposal to be located at 13300 N. Eagle Ridge Drive. Case# GPA2017-02 6. CONSIDERATION of RESOLUTION 2017-33, a Major General Plan Amendment related to the proposed Adero Canyon Phase II residential development proposal to be located at 13300 N. Eagle Ridge Drive. Case# GPA2017-02 7. CONSIDERATION of COOPERATIVE PURCHASE AGREEMENT #2018-076, with Environmental Planning Group, LLC, in the amount of $100,000.00, for landscape architecture design services for the Plaza Fountainside area located at Fountain Park 8. CONSIDERATION of CONTRACT C2018-08 with Danson Construction LLC, Inc., in the amount of $4,058,000.00, for the construction of Fire Station No. 2 relocation; and authorizing the expenditure of an additional $600,000.00 from existing Capital Funds. 9. DISCUSSION WITH POSSIBLE DIRECTION TO STAFF regarding CUL-DE-SAC CONCEPTS to address the closure of Technology Drive. z:\council packets\2017\r171219\171219a.docx Last Printed: 12/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 4 of 4 10. COUNCIL DISCUSSION/DIRECTION to the Town Manager. Item(s) listed below are related only to the propriety of (i) placing such item(s) on a future agenda for action or (ii) directing staff to conduct further research and report back to the Council: i.) None. 11. SUMMARY OF COUNCIL REQUESTS and REPORT ON RECENT ACTIVITIES by the Mayor, Individual Councilmembers, and the Town Manager. i.) None. 12. ADJOURNMENT. DATED this 12th day of December, 2017. Bevelyn J. Bender, Town Clerk The Town of Fountain Hills endeavors to make all public meetings accessible to persons with disabilities. Please call 480-816-5100 (voice) or 1-800-367-8939 (TDD) 48 hours prior to the meeting to request a reasonable accommodation to participate in this meeting or to obtain agenda information in large print format. Supporting documentation and staff reports furnished the Council with this agenda are available for review in the Clerk’s office. z:\council packets\2017\r171219\171219a.docx Last Printed: 12/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 1 of 4 NOTICE OF MEETINGS MEETING AND POSSIBLE EXECUTIVE SESSION AND REGULAR SESSION OF THE FOUNTAIN HILLS TOWN COUNCIL TIME: 4:30 P.M. – MEETING AND POSSIBLE EXECUTIVE SESSION [Executive Session will be held in the Fountain Conference Room - 2nd floor] 5:30 P.M. – REGULAR SESSION WHEN: TUESDAY, DECEMBER 19, 2017 WHERE: FOUNTAIN HILLS COUNCIL CHAMBERS 16705 E. AVENUE OF THE FOUNTAINS, FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ Councilmembers of the Town of Fountain Hills will attend either in person or by telephone conference call; a quorum of the Town’s various Commission, Committee or Board members may be in attendance at the Council meeting. Notice is hereby given that pursuant to A.R.S. § 1-602.A.9, subject to certain specified statutory exceptions, parents have a right to consent before the State or any of its political subdivisions make a video or audio recording of a minor child. Meetings of the Town Council are audio and/or video recorded and, as a result, proceedings in which children are present may be subject to such recording. Parents, in order to exercise their rights may either file written consent with the Town Clerk to such recording, or take personal action to ensure that their child or children are not present when a recording may be made. If a child is present at the time a recording is made, the Town will assume that the rights afforded parents pursuant to A.R.S. § 1-602.A.9 have been waived. PROCEDURE FOR ADDRESSING THE COUNCIL Anyone wishing to speak before the Council must fill out a speaker’s card and submit it to the Town Clerk prior to Council discussion of that Agenda item. Speaker Cards are located in the Council Chamber Lobby and near the Clerk’s position on the dais. Speakers will be called in the order in which the speaker cards were received either by the Clerk or the Mayor. At that time, speakers should stand and approach the podium. Speakers are asked to state their name and whether or not they reside in Fountain Hills (do not provide a home address) prior to commenting and to direct their comments to the Presiding Officer and not to individual Councilmembers. Speakers’ statements should not be repetitive. If a speaker chooses not to speak when called, the speaker will be deemed to have waived his or her opportunity to speak on the matter. Speakers may not (i) reserve a portion of their time for a later time or (ii) transfer any portion of their time to another speaker. If there is a Public Hearing, please submit the speaker card to speak to that issue during the Public Hearing. Individual speakers will be allowed three contiguous minutes to address the Council. Time limits may be waived by (i) discretion of the Town Manager upon request by the speaker not less than 24 hours prior to a Meeting, (ii) consensus of the Council at Meeting or (iii) the Mayor either prior to or during a Meeting. Please be respectful when making your comments. If you do not comply with these rules, you will be asked to leave. Mayor Linda M. Kavanagh Vice Mayor Dennis Brown Councilmember Alan Magazine Councilmember Nick DePorter Councilmember Art Tolis Councilmember Henry Leger Councilmember Cecil A. Yates z:\council packets\2017\r171219\171219a.docx Last Printed: 12/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 2 of 4 NOTICE OF MEETING AND POSSIBLE EXECUTIVE SESSION Pursuant to A.R.S. § 38-431.02, notice is hereby given to the members of the Fountain Hills Town Council and to the general public that the Town Council will hold a meeting open to the public on December 19, 2017, beginning at 4:30 PM, for the purpose of deciding whether to go into Executive Session. If authorized by a majority vote of the Council, the Executive Session will be held immediately after the vote and will not be open to the public.  CALL TO ORDER – Mayor Linda M. Kavanagh  ROLL CALL – Mayor Linda M. Kavanagh  VOTE TO GO INTO EXECUTIVE SESSION: Pursuant to: (i) A.R.S. § 38-431.03(A)(3), discussion or consultation for legal advice with the attorney or attorneys of the public body; and, (ii) A.R.S. § 38-431.03(A)(4), discussion or consultation with the attorneys of the public body in order to consider its position and instruct its attorneys regarding the public body’s position regarding contracts that are the subject of negotiations, in pending or contemplated litigation or in settlement discussion conducted in order to avoid or resolve litigation [Specifically relating to: (i) the Adero Canyon Development Agreement, Eagles Nest Development Agreement, Adero Canyon Phase 2 PAD, General Plan Amendment; and (ii) ethics complaints; and (iii) the Park Place Development Agreement]. 2. ADJOURNMENT. REGULAR SESSION AGENDA  CALL TO ORDER AND PLEDGE OF ALLEGIANCE – Mayor Linda M. Kavanagh  INVOCATION – Pastor Todd Forest, Fountain Hills Christian Center  ROLL CALL – Mayor Linda M. Kavanagh  MAYOR’S REPORT i) None.  SCHEDULED PUBLIC APPEARANCES/PRESENTATIONS i) Mayor Kavanagh and/or Council may review RECENT EVENTS attended relating to Economic Development. ii) The Mayor will read a PROCLAMATION declaring January, 2018, as “SPEAK UP, STAND UP, SAVE A LIFE MONTH” in the Town of Fountain Hills. iii) Presentation by an EPCOR representative relating to scheduled main line replacements in the SunRidge area. Call To The Public Pursuant to A.R.S. §38-431.01(H), public comment is permitted (not required) on matters not listed on the agenda. Any such comment (i) must be within the jurisdiction of the Council and (ii) is subject to reasonable time, place, and manner restrictions. The Council will not discuss or take legal action on matters raised during “Call to the Public” unless the matters are properly noticed for discussion and legal action. At the conclusion of the call to the public, individual Councilmembers may (i) respond to criticism, (ii) ask staff to review a matter or (iii) ask that the matter be placed on a future Council agenda. z:\council packets\2017\r171219\171219a.docx Last Printed: 12/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 3 of 4 Consent Agenda All items listed on the Consent Agenda are considered to be routine, non-controversial matters and will be enacted by one motion and one roll call vote of the Council. All motions and subsequent approvals of consent items will include all recommended staff stipulations unless otherwise stated. There will be no separate discussion of these items unless a Councilmember or member of the public so requests. If a Councilmember or member of the public wishes to discuss an item on the consent agenda, he/she may request so prior to the motion to accept the Consent Agenda or with notification to the Town Manager or Mayor prior to the date of the meeting for which the item was scheduled. The items will be removed from the Consent Agenda and considered in its normal sequence on the Agenda. 1. CONSIDERATION of approving the CANCELLATION of the January 2, 2018 Fountain Hills Town Council meeting. 2. CONSIDERATION of approving a FIRST AMENDMENT to contract C2017-104 with Firework Productions of Arizona, LLC, extending the terms of the contract with up to four one-year renewable options, and increasing the amount of the contract to $20,000.00, not to exceed $95,000.00 in total. 3. CONSIDERATION of approving COOPERATIVE PURCHASING AGREEMENT (2018-080) with Kompan, Inc., in an amount not to exceed $90,000.00, to replace playground equipment at Golden Eagle Park. 4. CONSIDERATION of approving the PROFESSIONAL SERVICES AGREEMENT (C2018-041) with Hunt Design and Associates, Inc., in the amount of $95,500.00, for providing professional services for the assessment and design of the Town-Wide Municipal Wayfinding Sign Program. Regular Agenda 5. PUBLIC HEARING to receive comments on RESOLUTION 2017-33, a Major General Plan Amendment related to the proposed Adero Canyon Phase II residential development proposal to be located at 13300 N. Eagle Ridge Drive. Case# GPA2017-02 6. CONSIDERATION of RESOLUTION 2017-33, a Major General Plan Amendment related to the proposed Adero Canyon Phase II residential development proposal to be located at 13300 N. Eagle Ridge Drive. Case# GPA2017-02 7. CONSIDERATION of COOPERATIVE PURCHASE AGREEMENT #2018-076, with Environmental Planning Group, LLC, in the amount of $100,000.00, for landscape architecture design services for the Plaza Fountainside area located at Fountain Park 8. CONSIDERATION of CONTRACT C2018-08 with Danson Construction LLC, Inc., in the amount of $4,058,000.00, for the construction of Fire Station No. 2 relocation; and authorizing the expenditure of an additional $600,000.00 from existing Capital Funds. 9. DISCUSSION WITH POSSIBLE DIRECTION TO STAFF regarding CUL-DE-SAC CONCEPTS to address the closure of Technology Drive. z:\council packets\2017\r171219\171219a.docx Last Printed: 12/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 4 of 4 10. COUNCIL DISCUSSION/DIRECTION to the Town Manager. Item(s) listed below are related only to the propriety of (i) placing such item(s) on a future agenda for action or (ii) directing staff to conduct further research and report back to the Council: i.) None. 11. SUMMARY OF COUNCIL REQUESTS and REPORT ON RECENT ACTIVITIES by the Mayor, Individual Councilmembers, and the Town Manager. i.) None. 12. ADJOURNMENT. DATED this 12th day of December, 2017. Bevelyn J. Bender, Town Clerk The Town of Fountain Hills endeavors to make all public meetings accessible to persons with disabilities. Please call 480-816-5100 (voice) or 1-800-367-8939 (TDD) 48 hours prior to the meeting to request a reasonable accommodation to participate in this meeting or to obtain agenda information in large print format. Supporting documentation and staff reports furnished the Council with this agenda are available for review in the Clerk’s office. mmm WJtiSgjmj&S, ~BbT 1Jl mm Mi mtmm eWEea^s I•••..•••; • fill if 7tXYK3V OJ FOUNTAIN JtiLCS T'ROCLJAMJATlON WHEREAS,the Spea/r t/p,Stand Up,Save a Z.//e movement presents an ideal opportunity to help bridge the gap between our local community,government,and law enforcement in a positive way;and WHEREAS,our local schools are facing unnecessary tragedies where warning signs are placed on social media or observed in person,but are not being reported as serious threats or cries for help; and WHEREAS,our youth need to be empowered to report concerning posts or comments to law enforcement or school representatives,and to help spread the message that it is okay to care enough to speak up,stand up and save a life;and WHEREAS,the Text-a-Tip program in Fountain Hills enables our youth and citizens to contact authorities when there is concern about another's safety;and WHEREAS,more than 3,000 students from 300 Arizona schools will learn the message and create communication programs in their schools and communities;and WHEREAS,Arizona schools,students,parents,educators,police departments,and community organizations are encouraged to engage in a variety of awareness and prevention activities designed to make our communities safer for all children and adolescents. NOW,THEREFORE,I, Linda M.Kavanagh,Mayor of Fountain Hills, do hereby proclaim January 2018 as SPEAKUP, STAND UP, SAVEA LIFE MONTH and ask all Fountain Hills residents to join me in encouraging youth to take action when their peers are in need and partnering with local leaders in simple,life-changing interventions. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand and caused to be affixed the official seal of the Town of Fountain Hills,Maricopa County,Arizona this 19th dayof December,2017. H Jm T TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS TOWN COUNCIL AGENDA ACTION FORM Meeting Date:12/19/2017 Meeting Type:Regular Session Agenda Type:Consent Submitting Department:Community Services Staff Contact Information:Rachael Goodwin,Community Services Director,480-816-5135 REQUEST TO COUNCIL (Agenda Language):CONSIDERATION OF approving a COOPERATIVE PURCHASING AGREEMENT (2018-80)with Kompan Play Equipment,in an amount not to exceed $90,000,to replace playground equipment at Golden Eagle Park. Applicant:N/A Applicant Contact Information:N/A Owner:N/A Owner Contact Information:N/A Property Location:Golden Eagle Park,15900 E.Golden Eagle Blvd.,Fountain Hills, AZ 85268 Related Ordinance,Policy or Guiding Principle:N/A Staff Summary (background):The playground equipment at Golden Eagle Park is deteriorating and in need of replacement.Funds are available in the facilities replacement fund for replacing this playground equipment and additional funds can be utilized from the Parks Department. Risk Analysis (options or alternatives with implications):Equipment will continue to deteriorate and become a safety issue. Fiscal Impact (initial and ongoing costs;budget status):Funds would primarily come from the reserve fund and additional funds from the Park's department. Budget Reference (page number):404 Funding Source:Multiple Funds If Multiple Funds utilized,listhere:FRAD,GEPOP Budgeted;if No,attach Budget Adjustment Form:na Recommendation(s)by Board(s)or Commission(s):N/A Staff Recommendation(s):Staff recommends replacement of the playground equipment. List Attachment(s):CPA,quote from Kompan. SUGGESTED MOTION (for council use):Consideration of approving a COOPERATIVE PURCHASING AGREEMENT (2018-80)with Kompan Play Equipment, in an amount not to exceed $90,000, to replace playground equipment at Golden Eagle Park. Page 1 of 2 TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS TOWN COUNCIL AGENDA ACTION FORM Meeting Date:12/19/2017 Meeting Type:Regular Session Agenda Type:Regular Submitting Department:Public Works Staff Contact Information:Justin T. Weldy,Public Works Director 480-816-5133 REQUEST TO COUNCIL (Agenda Language):CONSIDERATION OF Contract C2018-08 with Danson Construction LLC,Inc. in the amount of $4,058,000 for the construction of Fire Station # 2 relocation; and authorizing the expenditure of an additional $600,000.00 from existing Capital Funds. Applicant:NA Applicant Contact Information:NA Owner:Town of Fountain Hills Owner Contact Information:NA Property Location:10650 N.Fountain Hills Blvd. Related Ordinance,Policy or Guiding Principle:NA Staff Summary (background): The Invitation For Bids for the Fire Station #2 project was advertised on November 1,2,8 and 9, in the Fountain Hills Times and Arizona Business Gazette for two consecutive weeks per Arizona State Statute requirements.A prospective bidder's conference was held on August 9, 2017. Due to some minor issues related to design,substitutions,and clarifications,the Town issued 4 addends.On November 16,2017,the Town received sealed bids from two contractors.The bids have been checked for accuracy and for compliance with the contract documents. The bids received were as follows: Sun Eagle Corporation.FireStation,$3,779,000.Driveway/roadway,$150,000.Total $3,929,000 Danson Construction LLC.Fire Station,$3,874,000.Driveway/roadway,$187,000 Total $4,061,000 Sun Eagle Corporation is not in Compliance with Section 2.16 forconstructionofthree similar projects within the past five years,and thus Sun Eagle Corporation's bid is rejected as non-responsive. The Revised Engineers estimate is $3,700,000 forthe FireStation Construction and $346,975 forthe driveway/roadway construction, totaling $4,046,975.The available budget for the fire station project is $3,482,647.42.By selecting bid alternates 4, 5Aand 5B,the Danson Construction bid of$4,061,000,will be reduced by $3,000,for a revised total of $4,058,000.The Town will also be reimbursed for 50%($93,500)of the driveway/roadway construction by Epcor Water. To construct FireStation 2 as designed,staff is requesting and additional $600,000 from the Capital Improvement Program fund account. Page 1 of 2 TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS TOWN COUNCIL AGENDA ACTION FORM Meeting Date:12/19/2017 Meeting Type:Regular Session Agenda Type:Consent Submitting Department:Community Services Staff Contact Information:Marissa Moore,AICP,Senior Planner,mmoore@fh.az.gov REQUEST TO COUNCIL (Agenda Language):CONSIDERATION OF awarding PROFESSIONAL SERVICES AGREEMENT C2018-041 to Hunt Design and Associates,Inc., in the amount of $95,500.00,for providing professional services for the assessment and design of the Town-Wide Municipal Wayfinding Sign Program. Applicant:n/a Applicant Contact Information:n/a Owner:n/a Owner Contact Information:n/a Property Location:Town-wide Related Ordinance,Policy or Guiding Principle: Staff Summary (background):In the Fiscal Year 2017/2018 Budget,the Town approved funding for the design of a town-wide wayfinding program.Staff published a Request for Proposals on October 4,2017.On November 20th,the Town-Wide Wayfinding Review Team reviewed the responses tothe RFPand selected two vendors to do oral interviews.On December 6th,the Review Team selected Hunt Design Associates,Inc. as their choice to recommend that the Town Council award the contract. Risk Analysis (options or alternatives with implications):If rejected,staff would have to contact a different firm who responded to the RFP or would have to re-advertise,which would cause delays in the design and budget-creation process of the wayfinding program. Fiscal Impact (initial and ongoing costs;budget status):$95,500 Budget Reference (page number):Pages 394-397 Funding Source:General Fund If Multiple Funds utilized,list here: Budgeted;if No,attach Budget Adjustment Form:NA Recommendation(s)by Board(s)or Commission(s): Staff Recommendation(s):Staff recommends approval of contract C-2081-41 List Attachment(s):RFP DS2018-01;four (4)Addendums to the RFP;Hunt Design Associates,Inc.Project Proposal and Fee Proposal;contract C-2018-41 Page 1 of 2 37. Has the Town established a budget for either the Design/Planning as requested n this RFP or for the actual implementation of the sign program.Providing a range of anticipated costs for either Phase of work,would be extremely helpful to all firms,so we can understand what your anticipated expectation of deliverables may be. The Town has not established a separate budget for the Scope of Work included in this RFP. However, under Section 2.2(F)of Section A of the RFP, Pricing,price will comprise up to 20 points out of 100 possible points in scoring each proposal, and 10% (20 out of 200)of the possible total pointsfor this RFP. 38. I have a question regarding Subsection 1.10 Vendor Licensing and Registration on page 7. Is there a place in our proposal you would like us to put the Certificate of Good Standing from the ACC and the Town's business license or will just at the end work? You should include these Licensing and Registration documents at the end oftheproposal. 39. Also, these pages count won't count in our page limit will they? If the Certificate of Good Standing and/or the Town Business License are provided with the RFP response, theywill not count towards the maximum page limit. DS2018-01 10 CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT CIVIL CODE §1189 doc^^CImT Ve"'fieS 0nly **identitV of the indiv^al who signed thedocumenttowmchthiscertificateisattached,and not the truthfulness,accuracy,or validity of that document State of California > County of Lo,«5 t^^eJb^} On }ffi>|\\j^jf)yj-before me,Afaf Sheikh,a Notary Publ bate personally appeared ^\e.Yws\Qcor Were /nserf Name and Title of the Officer Ye-S*\ef Name(s)ofSigner® I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws oftheStateof California thatthe foregoing paraaraDh is true and correct.tfft>Aiffw AFAF SHEIKH Commission #2096201 Notary Public -California Los Angeles County ,gomm^b(p]res Feb 4.2019 Place Notary Sea/Above WITNESSmy hand and official Signature •OPTIONALThoughthissectionisoptional,completing this information can deter alteration of the document or fraudulent reattachment of this form to an unintended document Description of Attached Document A __ ^ -.(\CKsS**t »JcWeorTypeofDooumer,,:^f>,,..../)5^'^j^S^^\\ \g&± Capacity(ies)Claimed by Signer(s) Signer's Name: D Corporate Officer -Title(s):_, D Partner-D Limited D General D Individual D Attorney in Fact D Trustee •Guardian or Conservator •Other: SignerIs Representing: Signer's Name:,___ D Corporate Officer ~Tltle(s):__, D Partner-D Limited D General D Individual7 * •Attorney in Fact D Trustee •Guardian or Conservator •Other: Signer Is Representing: ©2014 National Notary Association •www.NationalNotary.org •1-800-US NOTARY (1-800-876-6827)Item #5907 TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS TOWN COUNCIL AGENDA ACTION FORM Meeting Date:December 19,2017 Agenda Type:Regular Meeting Type:Regular Submitting Department:Development Services Staff Contact Information:Bob Rodgers,Development Services Director rrodqers@fh.az.gov REQUEST TO PLANNING &ZONING COMMISSION: PUBLIC HEARING to receive comments on RESOLUTION #2017-33,a Major General Plan Amendment related to the proposed "Adero Canyon Phase II"residential development proposal to be located at 13300 N.Eagle Ridge Drive.If approved,the amendment will refine the residential product mix from larqe custom hillside house lots toa mixture of smaller single-family and two-family lots. (Case #GPA2017-02) CONSIDERATION of RESOLUTION #2017-33,a Major General Plan Amendment related to the proposed "Adero Canyon Phase II"residential development proposal to be located at 13300 N.Eagle Ridge Drive.If approved,the amendment will refine the residential product mix from large custom hillside house lots to a mixture of smaller single-family and two-family lots.(Case#GPA2017-02) Applicant:Jeff Nielsen,Toll Brothers Applicant Contact Information:480-951-0782 Owner:MCO Properties Owner Contact Information:480-837-9660 Property Location:Adero Canyon Phase II 13300 N Eagle Ridge Drive Fountain Hills, AZ 85268 Related Ordinance,Policy or Guiding Principle: 2010 General Plan Chapter3-Land Use Map -(Figure 11) Zoning Ordinance Chapter2- Procedures Zoning Ordinance Chapter 23 -Planned Area Development Subdivision Ordinance Article 2- Section 2.05 -Preliminary Plats Subdivision Ordinance Article 2 - Section 2.06 -Final Plats Subdivision Ordinance Article 5-Section 5.03- Cut&Fill Standards Page 1 of4 SITEPLANADEROCANYON"TollbrothersAmerica'sLuxuryHomeBuilder'WSWABAt'K1'AfU.MlProductType&Yieldii3 d220Units46Units74UnitsEg*Semi-CustomType1:$S "Semi-CustomType2:13oscTownhome:TotalOPENSPACECONSERVATION340UnitsSCALE:1 =300C DRAFT Page 1 of 4 TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS MINUTES OF THE REGULAR SESSION OF THE PLANNING & ZONING COMMISSION DECEMBER 7, 2017 Bob Rodgers opened the meeting at 5:30 p.m. ROLL CALL: The following Commissioners were present: Amberleigh Dabrowski, Susan Dempster, Erik Hansen, and Chris Jones. Also in attendance were Bob Rodgers, Development Services Director, Marissa Moore, Senior Planner and Paula Woodward, Executive Assistant and Recorder of the minutes. CALL TO THE PUBLIC No one wished to speak. AGENDA ITEM #1 ELECTION OF A CHAIRMAN AND VICE-CHAIRMAN FOR A ONE- YEAR TERM BEGINNING DECEMBER 7, 2017 THROUGH SEPTMBER 30, 2019. Mr. Rodgers asked for Chairman Nominations. Commissioner Dabrowski NOMINATED herself for the Planning and Zoning Commission Chairman. Commissioner Dempster SECONDED and a voice vote was taken. Commissioner Dabrowski was UNANIMOUSLY approved and Amberleigh Dabrowski was appointed to the position of Chairman. Chairman Dabrowski’s term began December 7, 2017 and expires on September 30, 2019. AGENDA ITEM #2 ELECTION OF A VICE-CHAIRMAN FOR A ONE-YEAR TERM BEGINNING DECEMBER 7, 2017 THROUGH SEPTMBER 30, 2019. Chairman Dabrowski asked for Vice-Chairman nominations. Commissioner Dempster NOMINATED herself for the Planning and Zoning Commission Vice- Chairman. Chairman Dabrowski SECONDED and a voice vote was taken. Commissioner Dempster was UNANIMOUSLY approved and Susan Dempster was appointed to the position of Vice-Chairman. Vice-Chairman Dempster’s term began December 7, 2017 and expires on September 30, 2019. Chairman Dabrowski requested participation in the Pledge of Allegiance and a moment of silent reflection. AGENDA ITEM #2 - CONSIDERATION OF APPROVING THE PLANNING AND ZONING COMMISSION MEETING MINUTES DATED SEPTEMBER 8, 2016. Vice-Chairman Dempster MOVED to APPROVE the meeting minutes dated Thursday, September 28, 2017 as presented. Commissioner Hansen SECONDED and the MOTION CARRIED UNANIMOUSLY. AGENDA ITEM #3 - PUBLIC HEARING TO RECEIVE COMMENTS ON RESOLUTION #2017-33, A MAJOR GENERAL PLAN AMENDMENT RELATED TO THE PROPOSED “ADERO CANYON PHASE II” RESIDENTIAL DEVELOPMENT PROPOSAL TO BE LOCATED AT 13300 N. EAGLE RIDGE DRIVE. IF APPROVED, THE AMENDMENT WILL REFINE THE RESIDENTIAL PRODUCT MIX FROM LARGE CUSTOM HILLSIDE HOUSE DRAFT Page 2 of 4 LOTS TO A MIXTURE OF SMALLER SINGLE-FAMILY AND TWO-FAMILY LOTS. (CASE # GPA2017-02) Chairman Dabrowski opened the public hearing at 5:35 p.m. Commissioner Jones recused himself from this agenda item due to a conflict of interest. Bob Rodgers, Development Services Director, presented information contained in the staff report regarding the Toll Brothers application for a Major General Plan Amendment along with a Power Point presentation. Mr. Rodgers said the property is currently owned by MCO properties and Toll Brothers will buy it once the entitlement process is completed. Mr. Rodgers explained the General Plan’s Future Land Use Plan as it exists and the proposed. Mr. Rodgers said that the Major General Plan Amendment is being heard separately this month because it must be approved within the same calendar year it was advertised. If the deadline was missed the process would begin all over again in January. The GPA (Major General Plan Amendment) proposal will be presented to the Town Council on December 19, 2017. After the new year the full development proposal will be presented to the Planning and Zoning Commission on January 11, 2018, and then for consideration by the Town Council on January 16, 2017. Two Development Agreements will be presented along with the PAD and Preliminary Plat. Mr. Rodgers concluded with that Staff recommends the Commission vote to forward a recommendation that the Town Council approve the Major General Plan Amendment as presented, subject to the stipulations in the staff report. Wendy Riddell of Berry Riddell LLC, addressed the Commission. Ms. Riddell said that Toll Brothers is a well established, publicly traded luxury home builder. Recently one of the Adero Canyon homes was nationally recognized as Home of the Year and Best Home Design. She explained the purpose behind the GPA application is to reallocate a total of one hundred sixty seven acres of privately held land to open space. There is no increase in residential density for this change, in fact there is a modest decrease. The trail connection at the top of Adero Canyon will continue as planned. Ms. Riddell stated they have letters of support from Copperwynd and Camelot Homes. Vice-Chairman Dempster asked for clarification on the Town Homes. Jeff Nielsen from Toll Brothers replied they are duplex style similar to the Toll Brothers product in Firerock Parcel B. Some will be two story to include a basement. The basements may be necessary dependent on the slope. Chairman Dabrowski commented that the City of Scottsdale and the Sanitary District both confirmed Adero Canyon is within their service areas. Wendy Riddell agreed and said part of the Adero Canyon sewer system is in a small portion of Scottsdale. Chairman Dabrowski asked for more information on the smaller proposed homes. Jeff Nielsen from Toll Brothers said the town homes will range from 1700 sq ft to 2000 sq ft. The smallest single family detached home will range from 1900 square feet to 3000 square feet. The second lot size is 100 by 120. The homes on these lots will range from 2300 square feet to 3000 square feet. If a basement is included the square footage could increase to 4000 square feet. The largest lots are the same as what Toll Brothers is building in Adero Canyon currently. DRAFT Page 3 of 4 Chairman Dabrowski asked if there were any speaker cards and Recorder Paula Woodward answered there were two cards received who were for the proposed project. Wendy Riddell who already spoke and Paul Gilbert. Mr. Gilbert addressed the Commission by saying since Mr. Rodgers did such a wonderful job with the presentation he no longer needed to speak. Chairman Dabrowski closed the public hearing at 5:45 p.m. AGENDA ITEM #4 - CONSIDERATION OF RESOLUTION #2017-33, A MAJOR GENERAL PLAN AMENDMENT RELATED TO THE PROPOSED “ADERO CANYON PHASE II” RESIDENTIAL DEVELOPMENT PROPOSAL TO BE LOCATED AT 13300 N. EAGLE RIDGE DRIVE. IF APPROVED, THE AMENDMENT WILL REFINE THE RESIDENTIAL PRODUCT MIX FROM LARGE CUSTOM HILLSIDE HOUSE LOTS TO A MIXTURE OF SMALLER SINGLE-FAMILY AND TWO-FAMILY LOT. (CASE # GPA2017-02) Commissioner Hansen MOVED to forward a recommendation to Town Council to approve the Major General Plan Amendment as presented and subject to the stipulations outlined in the staff report. Vice- Chairman Dempster SECONDED and MOTION CARRIED UNANIMOUSLY 3/0 (Commissioner Jones recused.) Chairman Dabrowski declared agenda items six, seven and eight have been continued to the January 11, 2018 Planning and Zoning Commission meeting. AGENDA ITEM #9 - COMMISSION DISCUSSION/REQUEST FOR RESEARCH TO STAFF. Items listed below are related only to the propriety of (i) placing items on a future agenda for action or (ii) directing staff to conduct further research and report back to the Commission. None AGENDA ITEM #10 - SUMMARY OF COMMISSION REQUESTS FROM SENIOR PLANNER. None AGENDA ITEM #11 - REPORT FROM Development Services Director. None AGENDA ITEM #11 - ADJOURNMENT. Vice-Chairman Dempster MOVED to adjourn the meeting at 5:50 p.m. and Commissioner Hansen SECONDED and the MOTION CARRIED UNANIMOUSLY. FOUNTAIN HILLS PLANNING & ZONING COMMISSION BY: _______________________________ Chairman Amberleigh Dabrowski ATTEST: _______________________________ Paula Woodward, Executive Assistant DRAFT Page 4 of 4 CERTIFICATION I hereby certify that the foregoing minutes are a true and correct copy of the minutes of the meeting of the Fountain Hills Planning and Zoning Commission held on the 7th day of December 2017, in the Town Council Chambers, 16705 E. Avenue of the Fountains, Fountain Hills, AZ 85268. I further certify that the meeting was duly called and that a quorum was present. Dated this 12th of December 2017 ____________________________________ Paula Woodward, Executive Assistant Town of Fountain Hills Adero Canyon Phase II Major General Plan Amendment & PAD Re-Zone Existing General Plan Land Use Classifications Major General Plan Amendment Land Use Classifications Proposed Proposed Additional Applications P&Z Hearings on January 11, 2017 Adero Canyon Phase II – PAD Rezoning Adero Canyon Phase II – Preliminary Plat ------------------------ Town Council Hearings on January 16, 2017 Adero Canyon Phase II – Development Agreement (Toll Brothers) 2nd Amendment to the Amended and Restated Final Settlement Agreement (MCO) Recommendations to the Town Council: Recommend Approval of the Major General Plan Amendment. As presented and subject to the stipulations listed below: Stipulations: 1.Applicants shall comply with the terms and conditions of Resolution #2017-33. (Major General Plan Amendment) 2.Applicants shall comply with the terms and conditions of Ordinance #2017-10. (PAD Zoning) 3.Applicants shall comply with the terms and conditions outlined in the Adero Canyon Phase II Development Agreement. 4.There shall be no “at risk” grading of any portion of the property prior to town approval of grading plans and/or improvement plans and the issuance of a grading permit. Existing Zoning Proposed Adero Canyon Phase II PAD Zoning Adero Canyon | Request for General Plan Amendment December 7, 2017 | Planning & Zoning Commission America’s Most Trusted Homebuilder (2015) Lifestory Research Builder of the Year (2012) Professional Builder Magazine Builder of the Year (2014) Builder Magazine Adero Canyon Phase I 2017 Home of the Year and Best Home Designs Our Request Convert 167 acres from privately held land to preserved open space Improvement to open space includes trail connections •Preserve more open space •Convert 167 acres from privately held land to preserved open space No increase in density Site plan Approval of request will diversify housing stock by an award winning homebuilder Scenic views are preserved by an increase in contiguous open space and orientation of homes lower in canyon Thank you! RESOLUTION NO. 2017-33 A RESOLUTION OF THE MAYOR AND COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS, ARIZONA, AMENDING THE TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS 2010 GENERAL PLAN LAND USE PLAN. WHEREAS, the Town of Fountain Hills 2010 General Plan (the “General Plan”) was adopted by the Mayor and Council of the Town of Fountain Hills (the “Town Council”) on January 7, 2010 and ratified by the qualified electors of the Town on May 18, 2010; and WHEREAS, Figure 11 of the General Plan, “Land Use Plan”, sets forth the land use designations for all real property within the corporate limits of the Town; and WHEREAS, the Town Council desires to amend the “Land Use Plan” with respect to the privately- owned parcels of land, as depicted in Exhibit A, attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference; and WHEREAS, public hearings were advertised in the November 22, 2017 and November 29, 2017 editions of the Fountain Hills Times pursuant to ARIZ. REV. STAT. § 9-461.06; and WHEREAS, public hearings were held by the Fountain Hills Planning and Zoning Commission on December 7, 2017, and by the Town Council on December 19, 2017. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE MAYOR AND COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS as follows: SECTION 1. That the General Plan “Land Use Plan” is hereby amended with respect to the privately- owned parcels of Adero Canyon, as depicted in Exhibit A. SECTION 2. If any provision of this Resolution is for any reason held by any court of competent jurisdiction to be unenforceable, such provision or portion hereof shall be deemed separate, distinct and independent of all other provision and such holding shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Resolution. PASSED AND ADOPTED BY the Mayor and Council of the Town of Fountain Hills, Arizona, December 19, 2017. FOR THE TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS: ATTESTED TO: Linda M. Kavanagh, Mayor Bevelyn J. Bender, Town Clerk REVIEWED BY: APPROVED AS TO FORM: Grady Miller, Town Manager Fredda J. Bisman, Town Attorney EXHIBIT A TO RESOLUTION NO. 2017-33 [Adero Canyon Phase II Major General Plan Amendment] See following pages. PHOENIX 77018-3 417558v2 "Toll brothers America's LuxuryHomeBuilder" ADERO c a ni y o k PHASE It Major General Plan Amendment August 28,2017 2nd SUBMISSION:September 19,2017 3rd SUBMISSION:September 21,2017 Town of Fountain Hills,Arizona SWABACK PARTNERS pile Archilecluro-Planning.Interior Design TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS TOWN COUNCIL AGENDA ACTION FORM Meeting Date:12/19/2017 Meeting Type:Regular Session Agenda Type:Regular Submitting Department:Community Services Staff Contact Information:Rachael Goodwin,Community Services Director,480-816-5135 REQUEST TO COUNCIL (Agenda Language):CONSIDERATION OF approving a COOPERATIVE PURCHASE AGREEMENT #2018-076 with Environmental Planning Group,LLC, in the amount of $100,000,for Landscape Architecture Design Services for the Plaza Fountainside area located at Fountain Park. Applicant:N/A Applicant Contact Information:N/A Owner:N/A Owner Contact Information:N/A Property Location:Plaza Fountainside area at Fountain Park Related Ordinance,Policy or Guiding Principle:N/A Staff Summary (background):The Plaza Fountainside area at Fountain Park is an area where grass has struggled to grow leaving the area quite barren and brown.A Capital Improvement Project was approved to redevelop the area into a more active space with partial hardscaping to be used for a performance pad or for small events along with an active space for bocce ball and/or corn hole.Several local groups as well as the businesses in the area are interested are vocal stakeholders in this project.This is a preapproved project that has funding in the FY18 budget as well as the FY19 budget year.Additional funding has been committed from several civic organizations as well.The engineering process is estimated to take six to nine months for 100% plans,translating into a late spring,early summer mobilization.As this project is budgeted over two years,this works in our favor to ideally have a seamless transition from concept to construction. Risk Analysis (options or alternatives with implications):N/A Fiscal Impact (initial and ongoing costs;budget status):$100,000 Budget Reference (page number): Funding Source:Capital Projects Fund If Multiple Funds utilized,list here: Budgeted;if No,attach Budget Adjustment Form:NA Recommendation(s)by Board(s)or Commission(s):Community Services Advisory Commission is in support of this recommendation Staff Recommendation(s):Staff supports this recommendation List Attachment(s):Cooperative Purchase Agreement and rendering. Page 1 of 2 TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS TOWN COUNCIL AGENDA ACTION FORM Meeting Date:12/19/2017 Meeting Type:Regular Session Agenda Type:Regular Submitting Department:Public Works Staff Contact Information:Justin T.Weldy,Public Works Director 480-816-5133 REQUEST TO COUNCIL (Agenda Language):CONSIDERATION OF Contract C2018-08 with Danson Construction LLC,Inc. in the amount of $4,058,000 for the constmction of Fire Station # 2 relocation; and authorizing the expenditure of an additional $600,000.00 from existing Capital Funds. Applicant:NA Applicant Contact Information:NA Owner:Town of Fountain Hills Owner Contact Information:NA Property Location:10650 N.Fountain Hills Blvd. Related Ordinance,Policy or Guiding Principle:NA Staff Summary (background):The Invitation For Bids for the Fire Station #2 project was advertised on November 1,2,8 and 9, in the Fountain Hills Times and Arizona Business Gazette for two consecutive weeks per Arizona State Statute requirements.A prospective bidder's conference was held on August 9,2017.Due to some minor issues related to design,substitutions,and clarifications,the Town issued 4 addends.On November 16,2017,the Town received sealed bids from two contractors.The bids have been checked for accuracy and for compliance with the contract documents. The bids received were as follows: Sun Eagle Corporation.Fire Station,$3,779,000.Driveway/roadway,$150,000.Total $3,929,000 Danson Construction LLC.Fire Station,$3,874,000.Driveway/roadway,$187,000 Total $4,061,000 Sun Eagle Corporation is not in Compliance with Section 2.16 for construction of three similar projects within the past five years,and thus Sun Eagle Corporation's bid is rejected as non-responsive. The Revised Engineers estimate is $3,700,000 for the Fire Station Construction and $346,975 for the driveway/roadway construction,totaling $4,046,975.The available budget for the fire station project is $3,482,647.42.By selecting bid alternates 4, 5A and 5B,the Danson Construction bid of $4,061,000,will be reduced by $3,000,for a revised total of $4,058,000.The Town will also be reimbursed for 50%($93,500)of the driveway/roadway construction by Epcor Water. To construct Fire Station 2 as designed,staff is requesting and additional $600,000 from the Capital Improvement Program fund account. Page 1 of 2 2942786.1 TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT INVITATION FOR BIDS FIRE STATION NO. 2 CONSTRUCTION Town of Fountain Hills 16705 East Avenue of the Fountains Fountain Hills, Arizona 85268 SOLICITATION INFORMATION AND SCHEDULE Solicitation Number: PW2017-01 Release Date: July 26, 2017 Advertisement Dates: July 26 and August 2, 2017 – Fountain Hills Times July 27 and August 3, 2017 – Arizona Business Gazette Final Date for Inquires August 17, 2017 MANDATORY Prospective Bidder’s Conference: August 9, 2017 10:00 a.m. (local time, Phoenix, Arizona) Fountain Hills Town Hall Council Chambers 16705 East Avenue of the Fountains Fountain Hills, Arizona 85268 Bid Deadline: September 6, 2017 10:00 a.m. (local time, Phoenix, Arizona) Bid Opening: September 6, 2017 10:00 a.m. (local time, Phoenix, Arizona) Town Representative: Justin Weldy jweldy@fh.az.gov In accordance with the Town of Fountain Hills Procurement Code, competitive sealed Bids for the services specified herein will be received by the Town Clerk at the Town Clerk’s Office at the above- referenced location until the date and time referenced above (the “Bid Deadline”). Bids received by the Bid Deadline shall be publicly opened and the Bid Price read. Bids must be in the actual possession of the Town Clerk on, or prior to, the Bid Deadline. Late Bids shall not be considered, except as provided in the Town Procurement Code. Each Bid shall be submitted in a sealed envelope with the Solicitation Number and the Bidder’s name and address clearly indicated on the front of the envelope. There is no charge for the Plans and Specifications. Plans and Specifications may be obtained at the Town of Fountain Hills website: http://www.fh.az.gov/Bids.aspx * The Town of Fountain Hills reserves the right to amend the solicitation schedule as necessary. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 i OFFER The undersigned (the “Bidder”) hereby offers this Bid as an offer to contract with the Town under the terms and conditions set forth below and certifies that Bidder has read, understands and agrees to fully comply with, and be contractually bound by, all terms and conditions as set forth in this Invitation For Bids (“IFB”), the Contract formed hereby (as defined below) and any amendments thereto, together with all Exhibits, Specifications, Plans and other documents included as part of this Contract (the “Contract Documents”). Town of Fountain Hills Business License Number: _____________________ Arizona Transaction (Sales) Privilege Tax License Number: _________________________ Federal Employer Identification Number: ___________________________________________ ___________________________________________ Contractor Name ___________________________________________ Address ___________________________________________ City State Zip Code For Clarification of this Bid contact: Name: Telephone: Facsimile: Email: Authorized Signature for Contractor Printed Name Title ACCEPTANCE OF OFFER AND NOTICE OF AWARD (FOR TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS USE ONLY) Effective Date: Contract No. Official File: TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS, an Arizona municipal corporation Grady E. Miller, Town Manager ATTEST: APPROVED AS TO FORM: Bevelyn J. Bender, Town Clerk Andrew J. McGuire, Town Attorney TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 1 ARTICLE I - DEFINITIONS For purposes of this Invitation for Bids, the following definitions shall apply: 1.1 “Bid” or “Offer” means a responsive bid or quotation submitted by a Bidder in response to this Invitation for Bids. 1.2 “Bid Deadline” means the date and time set forth on the cover of this IFB for the Town Clerk to be in actual possession of the sealed Bids. 1.3 “Bid Opening” means the date and time set forth on the cover of this Invitation for Bids for opening of sealed Bids. 1.4 “Bidder” means any person or firm submitting a competitive Bid in response to this IFB. 1.5 “Confidential Information” means that portion of a Bid, proposal, Offer, Specification or protest that contains information that the person submitting the information believes should be withheld, provided (i) such person submits a written statement advising the Town of this fact at the time of the submission and (ii) the information is so identified wherever it appears. 1.6 “Contract” means, collectively, the (i) Offer/Bid, (ii) this IFB, including all exhibits, (iii) the Notice of Award, (iv) the Notice to Proceed or Purchase Order(s), (v) any approved Addendum, Change Order or Amendment, (vi) the Contractor’s Certificates of Insurance and a copy of the Declarations Page(s) of the insurance policies, (vii) the Certificate of Completion and (viii) any Plans, Specifications, Reference Documents or other documents attached, appended or incorporated herein by reference. Alternate or optional bid items will become part of the Contract only if they are accepted by the City in writing on the Price Sheet. 1.7 “Contractor” means the individual, partnership, corporation or limited liability company who has submitted a Bid in response to this IFB and who, as a result of the competitive bidding process, is awarded a contract for Materials or Services by the Town. 1.8 “Contract Time” means the time period during which the Contractor must complete all of the Work related to the Project. 1.9 “Day(s)” means calendar day(s) unless otherwise specified. 1.10 “Engineer” means the Town Engineer or authorized designee. 1.11 “Final Completion” shall be defined as set forth in Section 3.16 and shall occur not later than 30 Days from the date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise designated by the Engineer and subject to modification by changes in the Work as provided in Section 3.14 below. 1.12 “Invitation for Bids” or “IFB” means this request by the Town for participation in the competitive bidding process according to all documents, including those attached or incorporated herein by reference, utilized for soliciting Bids for the Materials and/or Services in compliance with the Town’s Procurement Code. 1.13 “MAG Specifications” means, collectively, the “Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction,” current edition as of the date of Contract award and the “Uniform Standard Details for Public Works Construction,” current edition as of the date of Contract award, which are sponsored and distributed by the Maricopa Association of Governments (“MAG”) and any amendments or supplements adopted by the Town. 1.14 “MAG Supplement” means the most current edition of the Town of Fountain Hills Supplement to the MAG Uniform Standard Specifications and Details for Public Works Construction. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 2 1.15 “Materials” means any personal property, including equipment, materials, replacements and supplies provided by the Contractor in conjunction with the Contract and shall include, in addition to Materials incorporated in the Project, equipment and other material used and/or consumed in the performance of the Work. 1.16 “Multiple Award” means an award of an indefinite quantity contract for one or more similar products, commodities or Services to more than one Bidder. 1.17 “Plans” means drawings relating to the Project, prepared by or on behalf of the Town, bearing the seal of the professional who is responsible for their preparation. 1.18 “Price” means the total expenditure for the defined Project, inclusive of all Materials, commodities or Services. 1.19 “Procurement Administrator” means a Town employee, as designated on the cover of this IFB, who has specifically been designated to act as a contact person to the Bidders and/or Contractor relating to their IFB. 1.20 “Procurement Agent” means the Town Manager or authorized designee. 1.21 “Procurement Code” means the Town’s Procurement Code, as amended from time to time. 1.22 “Project” means the purpose and Work described as set forth in Section 2.1, in the “Purpose/Scope of Work” of the IFB. 1.23 “Punch List” means that list of items provided by Town to Contractor at the time of Substantial Completion indicating items to be completed or corrected, including the time for completion or correction by Contractor after Substantial Completion. 1.24 “Reference Documents” means information provided by the Town relating to the Project that must be evaluated by the Contractor and incorporated into its Bid. 1.25 “Services” means the furnishing of labor, time or effort by a Contractor, not involving the delivery of a specific end product other than reports which are merely incidental to the required performance and as further defined in the Contract. This term does not include “professional and technical services” as defined in the Procurement Code. 1.26 “Specification” means any description of the physical characteristics, functional characteristics, or the nature of a commodity, product, supply or Services. The term may include a description of any requirements for inspecting, testing, or preparing a supply or service item for delivery. 1.27 “Subcontractor” means those persons or groups of persons having a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work and those who furnish Materials according to the plans and/or Specifications required by this Contract. 1.28 “Substantial Completion” shall be defined as set forth in Section 3.15 below and shall occur not later than the date set forth in the Schedule, subject to modification by changes in the Work as provided in Section 3.14 below. 1.29 “Substitutions” means Contractor’s proposed changes in products, materials, equipment and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents. 1.30 “Substitutions for Cause” means changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed product conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 3 1.31 “Substitutions for Convenience” means changes proposed by Contractor or Town that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements, but which may offer advantage to Contractor or Town. 1.32 “Town” means the Town of Fountain Hills, an Arizona municipal corporation. 1.33 “Town Representative” means the Town employee who has specifically been designated to act as a contact person to the Town’s Procurement Administrator, and who is responsible for monitoring and overseeing the Contractor’s performance under the Contract and for providing information regarding details pertaining to the Work. 1.34 “Vendor” means any firms, entities or individuals desiring to prepare a responsive Bid in response to this IFB. 1.35 “Work” means all labor, Materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in the Project that are necessary to accomplish the construction required by this Contract. ARTICLE II – BID PROCESS; BID AWARD 2.1 Purpose/Scope of Work. The Work included in this Project consists of the construction of a new 9,400 s.f. fire station, site improvements and driveway/roadway improvements as shown on the Plans and Specifications. The Town is issuing this IFB is to secure a qualified commercial General Contractor to perform the Work and provide Materials as more particularly described in the Specifications attached hereto as Exhibit A, and incorporated herein by reference. Bidders must submit Bids encompassing the entire Project, inclusive of the related Plans, Specifications, related construction drawings and Reference Documents. Failure to do so may result in a determination that the Bid is non-responsive. Due to the constrained nature of the site, one Contractor will be selected to perform the Work. However, two separate bids are required because of the cost sharing arrangement between the Town and EPCOR for a portion of the Project. See additional EPCOR pre-qualification requirements in Exhibit A, Specifications Section 00 31 40. 2.2 Amendment of IFB. Except as set forth in Section 3.56 below, no alteration may be made to this IFB or the resultant Contract without the express, written approval of the Town in the form of an official IFB addendum or Contract amendment. Any attempt to alter this IFB/Contract without such approval is a violation of this IFB/Contract and the Town Procurement Code. Any such action is subject to the legal and contractual remedies available to the Town including, but not limited to, Contract cancellation and suspension and/or debarment of the Bidder or Contractor. 2.3 Preparation/Submission of Bid. Bidders are invited to participate in the competitive bidding process for the Project specified in this IFB. Bidders shall review their Bid submissions to ensure the following requirements are met. A. Irregular/Non-responsive Bids. The Town will consider as “irregular” or “non- responsive” and shall reject any Bid not prepared and submitted in accordance with the IFB and Specifications, or any Bid lacking sufficient information to enable the Town to make a reasonable determination of compliance with the Specifications. Unauthorized or unreasonable exceptions, conditions, limitations, or provisions shall be cause for rejection. Bids may be deemed non-responsive at any time during the evaluation process if, in the sole opinion of the Procurement Agent, any of the following are true: 1. Bidder does not meet the minimum required skill, experience or requirements to perform the Work or provide the Materials. 2. Bidder has a past record of failing to fully perform or fulfill contractual obligations. 3. Bidder cannot demonstrate financial stability. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 4 4. Bid submission contains false, inaccurate or misleading statements that, in the opinion of the Procurement Agent, are intended to mislead the Town in its evaluation of the Bid. B. Specification Minimums. Bidders are reminded that the Specifications in this IFB are the minimum levels required and that Bids submitted must be for products that meet or exceed the minimum level of all features specifically listed in this IFB. Bids offering less than the minimums specified will be deemed not responsive. It shall be the Bidder’s responsibility to carefully examine each item listed in the Specifications. C. Required Submittal. Bidders shall provide all of the following documents to be considered a responsive Bid: 1. Complete, fully executed original of this IFB, with the Offer signed in ink by a person authorized to bind the Bidder. 2. Price Sheet. 3. Bid Bond. 4. Licenses; /DBE & WBE Status. 5. References. 6. Federal Requirements, if applicable. 7. Acknowledgment for each Addendum received, if any. D. Bidder Responsibilities. All Bidders shall (1) examine the entire Bid package, (2) seek clarification of any item or requirement that may not be clear, (3) check all responses for accuracy before submitting a Bid and (4) submit the entire, completed Bid package by the official Bid Deadline. Late Bids shall not be considered. Bids not submitted with an original, signed Offer page by a person authorized to bind the Bidder shall be considered non-responsive. Negligence in preparing a Bid shall not be good cause for withdrawal after the Bid Deadline. E. Sealed Bids. All Bids shall be sealed and clearly marked with the IFB title and number on the lower left hand corner of the mailing envelope. A return address must also appear on the outside of the sealed Bid. F. Address. All Bids shall be directed to the following address: Town Clerk, 16705 East Avenue of the Fountains, Fountain Hills, Arizona 85268, or hand-delivered to the Town Clerk’s office. G. Bid Forms. All Bids shall be on the forms provided in this IFB. It is permissible to copy these forms if required. Telegraphic (facsimile), electronic (email) or mailgram Bids will not be considered. H. Modifications. Erasures, interlineations, or other modifications in the Bid shall be initialed in original ink by the authorized person signing the Bid. I. Withdrawal. At any time prior to the specified Bid Opening, a Bidder (or designated representative) may amend or withdraw its Bid. Facsimile, electronic (email) or mailgram Bid amendments or withdrawals will not be considered. No Bid shall be altered, amended or withdrawn after the specified Bid Deadline, unless otherwise permitted pursuant to the Town Procurement Code. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 5 2.4 Inquiries; Interpretation of Plans, Specifications and Drawings. A. Inquiries. Any question related to the IFB, including any part of the Plans, Specifications, Scope of Work or other Contract Documents, shall be directed to the Town Representative and Procurement Administrator whose names appear on the cover page of this IFB. Questions shall be submitted in writing by the date indicated on the cover page of this IFB; the Town will not respond to any inquiries submitted later than the Final Date for Inquiries. The Vendor submitting such inquiry will be responsible for its prompt delivery to the Town. Any correspondence related to the IFB shall refer to the title and number, page and paragraph. However, the Bidder shall not place the IFB number and title on the outside of any envelope containing questions, because such an envelope may be identified as a sealed Bid and may not be opened until the Bid Opening. Any interpretations or corrections of the proposed Contract Documents will be made only by addenda duly approved and issued by the Town. The Town will not be responsible for any other explanations or interpretations of the Contract Documents. B. Addenda. It shall be the Bidder’s responsibility to check for addenda issued to this IFB. Any addendum issued by the Town with respect to this IFB will be available at: Town of Fountain Hills Town Hall, 16705 East Avenue of the Fountains, Fountain Hills, Arizona 85268 Town of Fountain Hills website at: http://www.fh.az.gov/Bids.aspx C. Approval of Substitutions. The Materials, products, and equipment described in this IFB establish a standard or required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. No substitute will be considered unless written Substitution/Equal Request in the form attached hereto as Exhibit B, has been received by the Town Representative at least 10 Days prior to the Bid Deadline. Each such request shall include the name of the Material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute, including any drawings, performance and test data and any other information necessary for evaluation of the substitute. If a substitute is approved, the approval shall be by written addendum to the IFB. Bidder shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. Substitutions are only permitted prior to bid, unless otherwise noted in Section 4.1 (Post Award Substitution Process) below. D. Use of Equals. When the Specifications for materials, articles, products and equipment include the phrase “or equal,” Bidder may bid upon and use materials, articles, products and equipment that will perform equally the requirements imposed by the general design. The Engineer will have the final approval of all materials, articles, products and equipment proposed to be used as an “equal.” No such “equal” shall be purchased or installed without prior, written approval from the Engineer. No “equal” will be considered unless a written Substitution/Equal Request, in the form attached hereto as Exhibit B, has been received by the Town Representative at least 10 Days prior to the Bid Deadline. The request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which the item is sought to be considered an equal and a complete description of the proposed equal including any drawings, cuts, performance and test data and any other information necessary for evaluation of the equal. All approval of equals shall be issued in the form of written addendum or amendment, as applicable, to this IFB or the Contract. Proposed equals are only permitted prior to bid, unless otherwise noted in Section 4.1 (Post Award Substitution Process) below. E. Bid Quantities. It is expressly understood and agreed by the parties hereto that the quantities of the various classes of Services and/or Materials to be furnished under this Contract, which have been estimated as stated in the Bidders’ Offer, are only approximate and are to be used solely for the purpose of comparing, on a consistent basis, the Bidders’ Offers presented for the Work under this Contract. The selected Contractor agrees that the Town shall not be held responsible if any of the quantities shall be found to be incorrect and the Contractor will not make any claim for damages or for loss of profits because of a difference between the quantities of the various classes of Services and/or Materials as estimated and the Services and/or Materials actually provided. Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all Materials contained in the Plans for TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 6 the project are bid on the Price Sheet. Contractor shall bring any potential discrepancy between the Plans and the Price Sheet to the Town’s attention, either at the Prospective Bidders’ Conference or by written inquiry, as set forth in Subsection 2.4(A) above. If any error, omission or misstatement is found to occur, the same shall not (1) invalidate the Contract or the whole or any part of the Scope of Work, (2) excuse Contractor from any of the obligations or liabilities hereunder or (3) entitle Contractor to any damage or compensation except as may be provided in this Contract. 2.5 Prospective Bidders’ Conference. A Prospective Bidders’ Conference may be held. If scheduled, the date and time of the Prospective Bidders’ Conference will be indicated on the cover page of this IFB. The Prospective Bidders’ Conference may be designated as mandatory or non-mandatory on the cover of this IFB. Bids shall not be accepted from Bidders who do not attend a mandatory Prospective Bidders’ Conference. Bidders are strongly encouraged to attend those Prospective Bidder’s Conferences designated as non-mandatory. The purpose of the Prospective Bidders’ Conference will be to clarify the contents of the IFB in order to prevent any misunderstanding of the Town’s requirements. Any doubt as to the requirements of this IFB or any apparent omission or discrepancy should be presented to the Town at the Prospective Bidders’ Conference. The Town will then determine if any action is necessary and may issue a written amendment or addendum to the IFB. Oral statements or instructions will not constitute an amendment or addendum to the IFB. 2.6 New Materials. All Materials to be provided by the Contractor and included in the Bid shall be new, unless otherwise stated in the Specifications. 2.7 Prices. Work shall be performed at the prices as set forth in the Price Sheet attached hereto as Exhibit C and incorporated herein by reference. Bid prices shall be submitted on a lump sum basis and shall include all applicable sales tax. NOTE: All pricing blanks must be filled in. Empty or unfilled spaces in the Bid Price Sheet shall result in a determination that a Bid is non-responsive. 2.8 Allowances. Allowances, if any, shall be clearly set forth on the Price Sheet. Allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor (less any applicable trade discount) of the Materials including equipment required by the Allowance, delivered at the site, and all applicable taxes, overhead, profit handling and other general conditions costs, unless unit rates are available in the Price Sheet. Unit rates from the Price Sheet shall be used to determine the cost of a change to be paid from an Allowance, when applicable. Any remaining Allowance amount shall be returned to the Town at the end of the Project by deductive change order. 2.9 Payment; Discounts. Any Bid that requires payment in less than 30 Days shall not be considered. Payment discounts of 30 Days or less will not be deducted from the Bid Price in determining the low Bid. The Town shall be entitled to take advantage of any payment discount offered, provided payment is made within the discount period. Payment discounts shall be indicated on Price Sheet. 2.10 Taxes. The Town is exempt from Federal Excise Tax, including the Federal Transportation Tax. Transaction privilege tax, if any, shall be included in the price for each item. It shall not be considered a lump sum payment item. It is the sole responsibility of the Bidder to determine any applicable State tax rates and calculate the tax accordingly. When calculating the tax on the Bid, the Bidder should not include tax on any allowances. Failure to accurately tabulate any applicable taxes may result in a determination that a Bid is non- responsive. The Bidder shall not rely on, and shall independently verify, any tax information provided by the Town. 2.11 Federal Funding. It is the responsibility of the Bidder to verify and comply with federal requirements that may apply to the Work (the “Federal Requirements”). It is also the responsibility of the Bidder to incorporate any necessary amounts in the Bid to accommodate for required federal record-keeping, necessary pay structures or other matters related to the Federal Requirements. Federal Requirements, if any, shall be attached hereto as Exhibit D. In addition to any applicable Federal Requirements, this procurement is subject to a number of state and Town regulations. In general, where these rules conflict, the more stringent law or rule applies. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 7 2.12 Cost of Bid/Proposal Preparation. Bids submitted for consideration should be prepared simply and economically, providing adequate information in a straightforward and concise manner. The Town does not reimburse the cost of developing, presenting or providing any response to this solicitation; the Bidder is responsible for all costs incurred in responding to this IFB. All materials and documents submitted in response to this IFB become the property of the Town and will not be returned. 2.13 Public Record. All Bids shall become the property of the Town. After Contract award, Bids shall become public records and shall be available for public inspection in accordance with the Town’s Procurement Code, except that any portion of a Bid that was designated as confidential pursuant to Section 2.14 below shall remain confidential from and after the time of Bid opening to the extent permitted by Arizona law. 2.14 Confidential Information. If a Vendor/Bidder believes that a Bid, Specification, or protest contains information that should be withheld from the public record, a statement advising the Procurement Agent of this fact shall accompany the submission and the information shall be clearly identified. The information identified by the Vendor or Bidder as confidential shall not be disclosed until the Procurement Agent makes a written determination. The Procurement Agent shall review the statement and information with the Town Attorney and shall determine in writing whether the information shall be withheld. If the Town Attorney determines that it is proper to disclose the information, the Procurement Agent shall inform the Vendor or Bidder in writing of such determination. 2.15 Vendor Licensing and Registration. Prior to the award of the Contract, the successful Bidder shall be registered with the Arizona Corporation Commission and authorized to do business in Arizona. Bidders shall provide license and certification information with the Bid, attached as Exhibit E and incorporated herein by reference. Upon the Town’s request, corporations, limited liability companies, partnerships or other entities shall provide Certificates of Good Standing from the Arizona Corporation Commission. A Town of Fountain Hills business license is also required. 2.16 Bidder Qualifications. A. Experience and References. Bidder must demonstrate successful completion of at least three similar projects within the past 120 months, one of which must have a dollar value of at least 75% of the total bid (including Owner’s Allowance) for this Project as set forth in the Price Sheet, attached as Exhibit C. Total bid price does not include any Town allowances identified. For the purpose of this Solicitation, “successful completion” means completion of a project within the established schedule and budget and “similar projects” resemble this Project in size, nature and scope. References for these three projects shall be listed on the sheet attached hereto as Exhibit F and incorporated herein by reference. These references will be checked, and it is Bidder’s responsibility to ensure that all information is accurate and current. Bidder authorizes the Town’s representative to verify all information from these references and releases all those concerned from any liability in connection with the information they provide. B. Investigation. The Town’s representative may conduct any investigation deemed necessary to determine the Bidder’s ability to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The three lowest Bidders may be requested to submit additional documentation within 72 hours (or as specified) to assist the Town in its evaluation. 2.17 Certification. By submitting a Bid, the Bidder certifies: A. No Collusion. The submission of the Bid did not involve collusion or other anti- competitive practices. B. No Discrimination. It shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment in violation of Federal Executive Order 11246. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 8 C. No Gratuity. It has not given, offered to give, nor intends to give at any time hereafter, any economic opportunity, future employment, gift, loan, gratuity, special discount, trip favor or service to a Town employee, officer, agent or elected official in connection with the submitted Bid or a resultant Contract. In the event that the resultant Contract is canceled pursuant to this provision, the Town shall be entitled, in addition to any other rights and remedies, to recover and withhold from the Contractor an amount equal to 150% of the gratuity. D. Financial Stability. It is financially stable, solvent and has adequate cash reserves to meet all financial obligations including any potential costs resulting from an award of the Contract. E. No Signature/False Statement. The signature on the Bid and the Vendor Information Form is genuine. Failure to sign the Bid or the Vendor Information Form, or signing either with a false statement, shall void the submitted Bid and any resulting Contract, and the Bidder may be debarred from further bidding in the Town. 2.18 Bid Bond. All Vendors desiring to prepare a responsive Bid shall submit a non-revocable bid security payable to the Town in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the total Bid Price. This security shall be in the form of a bid bond, certified check or cashier’s check and must be in the possession of the Town Representative by the Bid Deadline. All bid security from Contractor(s) who have been issued a Notice of Award shall be held until the successful execution of all required Contract Documents and bonds. If the Contractor fails to execute the required contractual documents and bonds within the time specified, or 10 Days after Notice of Award if no period is specified, the Contractor may be found to be in default and the Contract terminated by the Town. In case of default, the Town reserves all rights inclusive of, but not limited to, the right to purchase material and/or to complete the Work and to recover any actual excess costs associated with such completion from the Contractor. All bid bonds shall be executed in the form attached hereto as Exhibit G, duly executed by the Bidder as Principal and having as Surety thereon a Surety company holding a Certificate of Authority from the Arizona Department of Insurance to transact surety business in the State of Arizona. Individual sureties are unacceptable. All insurers and sureties shall have, at the time of submission of the proposal, an A.M. Best’s Key Rating Guide of “A-” or better as currently listed in the most recent Best Key Guide, published by the A.M. Best Company. As soon as is practicable after the completion of the evaluation, the Town will (A) issue a Notice of Award for those Offers accepted by the Town and (B) return all checks or bonds to those Bidders who have not been issued a Notice of Award. 2.19 Award of Contract. A. Multiple Award. The Town may, at its sole discretion, accept Bidder’s Offer as part of a Multiple Award. B. Evaluation. The evaluation of this Bid will be based on, but not limited to, the following: (1) compliance with Specifications, (2) Price, including alternates selected by the Town, if any, and taxes, but excluding “as-needed” services requested by the Town and (3) Bidder qualifications to perform the Work. C. Waiver, Rejection, Reissuance. Notwithstanding any other provision of this IFB, the Town expressly reserves the right to: (1) waive any immaterial defect or informality, (2) reject any or all Bids or portions thereof and (3) cancel or reissue an IFB. D. Offer. A Bid is a binding offer to contract with the Town based upon the terms, conditions and Specifications contained in this IFB and the Bidder’s responsive Bid, unless any of the terms, conditions, or Specifications are modified by a written addendum or Contract amendment. Bids become binding Contracts when the Acceptance of Offer and Notice of Award is executed in writing by the Town. Bidder Offers shall be valid and irrevocable for 90 Days after the Bid Opening. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 9 E. Protests. Any Bidder may protest this IFB, the proposed award of a Contract, or the actual award of a Contract. All protests will be considered in accordance with the process set forth by the Town Manager or qualified designee. ARTICLE III – GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS PART A - GENERAL 3.1 Reference Standards and Reference Documents. The Contractor shall perform the Work required in conformance with MAG Specifications and the MAG Supplement, each of which is incorporated herein by reference. In the event of a conflict between the MAG Specifications and the MAG Supplement, the MAG Supplement shall prevail. The Contractor shall also perform the Work in accordance with the Reference Documents, a list of which is attached hereto as part of Exhibit A. 3.2 Plans and Specifications to Successful Contractor. The successful Contractor shall print their own Plans, Specifications and Reference Documents for this Project from the Town’s website: http://www.fh.az.gov/Bids.aspx. 3.3 Contract Time. The Contract Time for this Project shall be 240 Days from the Notice to Proceed for Substantial Completion and 270 Days from Notice to Proceed for Final Completion. All Work on the Project shall be completed on or before the expiration of the Contract Time. 3.4 Pre-Construction Conference. Within 30 Days of the issuance of the Notice of Award, the Contractor shall attend a pre-construction conference. The Town will contact the Contractor to schedule a specific date, time and location for the pre-construction conference. The purpose of this conference is to outline specific items and procedures and to address items that require special attention on the part of the Contractor. The Contractor may also present proposed variations in procedures that the Contractor believes may (A) improve the Project, (B) reduce cost or (C) reduce inconvenience to the public. Any necessary coordination and procedures for construction inspection and staking will be addressed during the pre-construction conference. The Contractor will be required to provide the following items at, or prior to, the pre-construction conference, each of which is subject to review and approval by the Engineer: A. Key Personnel; Subcontractors. A list of the names and emergency telephone numbers of all proposed Key Personnel, Subcontractors and suppliers that the Contractor intends to utilize on the Project, in the form attached hereto as Exhibit H and incorporated herein by reference. The term “Key Personnel” means individuals who will be directly assigned to this Project and includes, but is not limited to, the owner, principals, project manager, project superintendent, scheduler, construction engineer and supervisory personnel. At least two of the Bidder’s Key Personnel must have a minimum of three years’ experience in similar projects (defined above) and the scheduler must have experience in employing scheduling techniques appropriate for this Project. Resumes of Key Personnel shall be submitted upon request by the Town’s representative. Proposed Subcontractors shall be qualified and have the requisite professional or technical licenses and be licensed to do business in the State of Arizona. The list shall include such information on the professional background of each of the assigned key individuals as may be requested by the Town Representative. Such key personnel and Subcontractors shall be satisfactory to the Engineer and shall not be changed except with the consent of the Engineer. Additionally, the Engineer shall have the right to request that the Contractor personnel and Subcontractors be removed from the Project if, in the Engineer’s sole discretion, such personnel or Subcontractor(s) are detrimental to the Project delivery process. Upon receipt of such request, the Contractor shall remove such personnel or Subcontractor(s) unless the Contractor can provide the Town with sufficient documentation to prove it is commercially impractical to replace the personnel or Subcontractor(s) with substitute personnel possessing similar qualifications. The Engineer’s approval of substituted personnel or Subcontractor(s) shall not be unreasonably withheld. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 10 B. Progress Schedule. A construction progress schedule showing the estimated time for start and completion of the major items of Work in Primavera P6 scheduling software or approved alternate. C. Payment Schedule. A payment schedule showing the estimated dollar volume of Work for each calendar month during the life of the Project. D. Traffic Control. A written proposal, prepared by an individual who is IMSA or ATSSA certified, outlining the intended plans for traffic control and for maintaining continuous access to residences and businesses along the construction site. E. Site Security. A written proposal outlining the intended plans to secure the Project site for public safety and security. F. Drawings, Materials & Equipment. An itemized list of all required shop drawings, material and equipment submittals and a schedule indicating the dates each of these items will be transmitted to the Town for review. 3.5 Notice to Proceed. Within 45 Days of the issuance of the Notice of Award the Town may issue a written Notice to Proceed. The Notice to Proceed shall stipulate the actual Contract start date, the Contract Time and the dates of Substantial Completion and Final Completion. The time required for the Contractor to obtain permits, licenses and easements shall be included in the Contract Time and shall not be justification for a delay claim by the Contractor. The time required for the Contractor to prepare, transmit and obtain approval of applicable submittals shall be included in the Contract Time and shall not be justification for a delay claim by the Contractor. No Work shall be started until after all required permits, licenses, and easements have been obtained. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, at least 72 hours before the following events: A. Commencement. The start of construction. B. Services Shut Down. Shutdown of water, sewer, drainage, irrigation and/or traffic control facilities, including the anticipated length of time for each shut down. C. Well or Pump Shut Down. Intentionally omitted. D. Water Lines. All draining and filling of water lines and irrigation laterals and all operations of existing valves or gauges, which shall also be coordinated with the proper utility agency/company. E. Start-up and Testing. Intentionally omitted. 3.6 Laws and Regulations. The Contractor shall keep fully informed of all rules, regulations, ordinances, statutes or laws affecting the Work herein specified, including existing and future (A) Town and County ordinances and regulations, (B) State and Federal laws and (C) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (“OSHA”) standards. 3.7 Rights-of-Way. The Contractor shall obtain a right-of-way permit for any of the Work completed in the public right-of-way. The Contractor will be responsible for any required Maricopa County permits or other agency permits. The Town will provide any necessary easements for Work specified under this Contract, and the Contractor shall not enter or occupy with workers, tools, equipment or materials any private ground outside the property of the Town without the written consent of the owner thereof. The Contractor, at its own expense, is responsible for the acquisition of any additional easements or rights-of-way. 3.8 Inspection, Safety and Compliance. Each Contractor must inform itself fully of the conditions relating to the construction of the Project and the employment of labor thereon. Failure to do so will not relieve the Contractor of its obligation to furnish all material and labor necessary to carry out the provisions of this Contract. Insofar as possible in carrying out its work, the Contractor must employ such methods or means as will not cause TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 11 any interruption of or interference with the Work of any other contractor. Contractor affirms that it has inspected the jobsite and has thoroughly reviewed the Contract including, without limitation, the Specifications listed on Exhibit A, as the same may be revised by the Town, and is not relying on any opinions or representations of Town. Contractor agrees to perform and complete such Work in strict accordance with the Contract and under the general direction of the Town. Contractor agrees that any exclusions of any Work must be approved in writing by the Town prior to acceptance of this Contract or same shall not be excluded hereunder. Contractor is responsible for all safety precautions and programs and shall provide all protection and necessary supervision to implement said precautions and programs. Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of and provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (A) Town personnel and members of the public, (B) employees or others on the Project, (C) the Work and materials and (D) other property at the Project or adjacent thereto. Contractor shall designate a responsible person on the Project whose duty shall be prevention of accidents. Contractor shall provide all competent supervision necessary to execute all Work and any Work incidental thereto in a thorough, first-class, workmanlike manner. It is Contractor’s responsibility that all of the Work and any Work incidental thereto conforms to, and is performed in accordance with, all applicable Federal, State, County and Town laws, codes, ordinances, regulations (including National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System and air pollution standards) and orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. 3.9 Traffic Regulations. All traffic affected by the Work under this Contract shall be regulated in accordance with the then-current version of the City of Phoenix-Traffic Barricade Manual (the “Barricade Manual”) which is incorporated herein by reference; provided, however, that this Contract shall govern in a conflict with the terms of the Barricade Manual. At the time of the pre-construction conference, the Contractor shall designate an employee who is well qualified and experienced in construction traffic control and safety to be responsible for implementing, monitoring and altering traffic control measures, as necessary. At the same time, the Town will designate a representative who will be responsible to see that all traffic control and any alterations are implemented and monitored to the extent that traffic is carried through the Work area in an effective manner and that motorists, pedestrians, bicyclists and workers are protected from hazard and accidents. A. Major Streets. The following shall be considered major streets: All major parkway, mile (section line), arterial and collector (mid-section line and quarter section line) streets so classified by the Town. B. Traffic Control Devices. All traffic control devices required for the Work under this Contract shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall place advance warning signs (such as REDUCE SPEED, LOOSE GRAVEL, 25 MPH SPEED LIMIT and DO NOT PASS) in accordance with the Barricade Manual. The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain all necessary flashing arrow boards, barricades, suitable and sufficient warning lights, signals and signs and shall take all necessary precautions for the protection of the Work and safety of the public. The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain acceptable and adequate detour signs at all closures and along detour routes. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated at night, and all safety lights shall be illuminated from sunset until sunrise. All barricades and signs used by the Contractor shall conform to the standard design generally accepted for such purposes and payment for all such services and materials shall be considered as included in the other pay items of the Contract. C. Existing Signs. The Contractor shall ensure that all existing traffic signs are erect, clean and in full view of the intended traffic at all times. Street name signs at major street intersections shall be maintained erect at all times. If these signs should interfere with construction, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, at least 48 hours in advance for Town personnel to temporarily relocate or cover said signs. The Engineer will direct the Contractor as to the correct positions to re-set all traffic and street name signs to permanent locations when notified by the Contractor that the interfering construction is complete. D. Manual Traffic Control. Manual traffic control shall be in conformity with the Barricade Manual, except that the designated liaison officer shall be contacted at the Maricopa County Sheriff’s Office, District 7. When construction activities or traffic hazards at the construction site require the use of flagmen, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to provide trained flagmen to direct traffic safely. When traffic hazards at TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 12 construction sites warrant the use of certified police personnel to direct traffic, arrangements must be made with the liaison officer at the Maricopa County Sheriff’s Office, District 7. E. Contractor Equipment. The assembly and turnarounds of the Contractor’s equipment shall be accomplished using adjacent local streets when possible. Equipment used and/or directed by the Contractor shall travel with traffic at all times. Supply trucks shall travel with traffic except when being spotted. Contractor shall provide a flagman or off-duty, uniformed Sheriff’s Deputy to assist with spotting. F. Traffic Alterations. During construction, it may be necessary to alter traffic control. Any such alterations shall be in accordance with the Barricade Manual. No street within the Project area may be closed to through traffic or to local emergency traffic without prior, written approval of the Engineer. Written approval may be given if sufficient time exists to allow for notification of the public at least 72 hours in advance of such closing. Partial closure of streets within the Project shall be done in strict conformity with the Barricade Manual and the Engineer’s written directions. G. Intersections. Caution should be used when excavating near intersections with traffic signal underground cable. Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, 24 hours in advance of any Work at such intersections. The Contractor shall install and maintain temporary overhead traffic signal cable as specified by the Engineer when underground conduit is to be severed by excavations at intersections. The Contractor shall provide an off-duty, uniformed Sheriff’s Deputy to direct traffic while the traffic signal is turned off and the wiring is transferred. All damaged or modified traffic signal overhead and underground items shall be repaired and restored to the Engineer’s satisfaction. Magnetic detector loops shall, under no circumstances, be spliced. H. Adjacent Property Access. The Contractor shall maintain access to all businesses, schools and residences along the Project alignment at all times in accordance with the MAG Supplement, Section 107.7.1 (Access). I. Covered Crossings. Where crossings of existing pavement occurs, no open trenches shall be permitted overnight, but plating may be permitted if conditions allow, as determined by the Engineer in his sole discretion. If plates cannot be used, crossings shall either be back-filled or the Contractor shall provide a detour. 3.10 Indemnification. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Town and each council member, officer, employee or agent thereof (the Town and any such person being herein called an “Indemnified Party”), for, from and against any and all losses, claims, damages, liabilities, costs and expenses (including, but not limited to, reasonable attorneys’ fees, court costs and the costs of appellate proceedings) to which any such Indemnified Party may become subject, under any theory of liability whatsoever (“Claims”) to the extent that such Claims (or actions in respect thereof) are caused by the negligent acts, recklessness or intentional misconduct of the Contractor, its officers, employees, agents, or any tier of subcontractor in connection with Contractor’s work or services in the performance of this Agreement. The amount and type of insurance coverage requirements set forth below will in no way be construed as limiting the scope of the indemnity in this Section. 3.11 Insurance. A. General. 1. Insurer Qualifications. Without limiting any obligations or liabilities of Contractor, Contractor shall purchase and maintain, at its own expense, hereinafter stipulated minimum insurance with insurance companies authorized to do business in the State of Arizona pursuant to ARIZ. REV. STAT. § 20-206, as amended, with an AM Best, Inc. rating of A- or above with policies and forms satisfactory to the Town. Failure to maintain insurance as specified herein may result in termination of this Contract at the Town’s option. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 13 2. No Representation of Coverage Adequacy. By requiring insurance herein, the Town does not represent that coverage and limits will be adequate to protect Contractor. The Town reserves the right to review any and all of the insurance policies and/or endorsements cited in this Contract but has no obligation to do so. Failure to demand such evidence of full compliance with the insurance requirements set forth in this Contract or failure to identify any insurance deficiency shall not relieve Contractor from, nor be construed or deemed a waiver of, its obligation to maintain the required insurance at all times during the performance of this Contract. 3. Additional Insured. All insurance coverage, except Workers’ Compensation insurance and Professional Liability insurance, if applicable, shall name, to the fullest extent permitted by law for claims arising out of the performance of this Contract, the Town, its agents, representatives, officers, directors, officials and employees as Additional Insured as specified under the respective coverage sections of this Contract. 4. Coverage Term. All insurance required herein shall be maintained in full force and effect until all Work or Services required to be performed under the terms of this Contract are satisfactorily performed, completed and formally accepted by the Town, unless specified otherwise in this Contract. 5. Primary Insurance. Contractor’s insurance shall be primary insurance with respect to performance of this Contract and in the protection of the Town as an Additional Insured. 6. Claims Made. In the event any insurance policies required by this Agreement are written on a “claims made” basis, coverage shall extend, either by keeping coverage in force or purchasing an extended reporting option, for three years past completion and acceptance of the services. Such continuing coverage shall be evidenced by submission of annual Certificates of Insurance citing applicable coverage is in force and contains the provisions as required herein for the three-year period. 7. Waiver. All policies, except for Professional Liability, including Workers’ Compensation insurance, shall contain a waiver of rights of recovery (subrogation) against the Town, its agents, representatives, officials, officers and employees for any claims arising out of the Work or Services of Contractor. Contractor shall arrange to have such subrogation waivers incorporated into each policy via formal written endorsement thereto. 8. Policy Deductibles and/or Self-Insured Retentions. The policies set forth in these requirements may provide coverage that contains deductibles or self-insured retention amounts. Such deductibles or self-insured retention shall not be applicable with respect to the policy limits provided to the Town. Contractor shall be solely responsible for any such deductible or self-insured retention amount. 9. Use of Subcontractors. If any Work under this Contract is subcontracted in any way, Contractor shall execute written agreement with its Subcontractors containing the indemnification provisions set forth in this Section and insurance requirements set forth herein protecting the Town and Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for executing any agreements with its Subcontractor and obtaining certificates of insurance verifying the insurance requirements. 10. Evidence of Insurance. Prior to commencing any Work or Services under this Contract, Contractor will provide the Town with suitable evidence of insurance in the form of certificates of insurance and a copy of the declaration page(s) of the insurance policies as required by this Contract, issued by Contractor’s insurance insurer(s) as evidence that policies are placed with acceptable insurers as specified herein and provide the required coverages, conditions and limits of coverage specified in this Contract and that such coverage and provisions are in full force and effect. Confidential information such as the policy premium may be redacted from the declaration page(s) of each insurance policy, provided TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 14 that such redactions do not alter any of the information required by this Contract. The Town shall reasonably rely upon the certificates of insurance and declaration page(s) of the insurance policies as evidence of coverage but such acceptance and reliance shall not waive or alter in any way the insurance requirements or obligations of this Contract. If any of the policies required by this Contract expire during the life of this Contract, it shall be Contractor’s responsibility to forward renewal certificates and declaration page(s) to the Town 30 Days prior to the expiration date. All certificates of insurance and declarations required by this Contract shall be identified by referencing this Contract. A $25.00 administrative fee shall be assessed for all certificates or declarations received without a reference to this Contract. Additionally, certificates of insurance and declaration page(s) of the insurance policies submitted without referencing this Contract will be subject to rejection and may be returned or discarded. Certificates of insurance and declaration page(s) shall specifically include the following provisions: a. The Town, its agents, representatives, officers, directors, officials and employees are Additional Insureds as follows: (i) Commercial General Liability - Under Insurance Services Office, Inc., (“ISO”) Form CG 20 10 03 97 or equivalent. (ii) Auto Liability - Under ISO Form CA 20 48 or equivalent. (iii) Excess Liability - Follow Form to underlying insurance. b. Contractor’s insurance shall be primary insurance with respect to performance of the Contract. c. All policies, except for Professional Liability, including Workers’ Compensation, waive rights of recovery (subrogation) against Town, its agents, representatives, officers, officials and employees for any claims arising out of Work or Services performed by Contractor under this Contract. d. ACORD certificate of insurance form 25 (2014/01) is preferred. If ACORD certificate of insurance form 25 (2001/08) is used, the phrases in the cancellation provision “endeavor to” and “but failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any kind upon the company, its agents or representatives” shall be deleted. Certificate forms other than ACORD form shall have similar restrictive language deleted. B. Required Insurance Coverage. 1. Commercial General Liability. Contractor shall maintain “occurrence” form Commercial General Liability insurance with an unimpaired limit of not less than $1,000,000 for each occurrence, $2,000,000 Products and Completed Operations Annual Aggregate and a $2,000,000 General Aggregate Limit. The policy shall cover liability arising from premises, operations, independent contractors, products-completed operations, personal injury and advertising injury. Coverage under the policy will be at least as broad as ISO policy form CG 00 010 93 or equivalent thereof, including but not limited to, separation of insured’s clause. To the fullest extent allowed by law, for claims arising out of the performance of this Contract, the Town, its agents, representatives, officers, officials and employees shall be cited as an Additional Insured under ISO, Commercial General Liability Additional Insured Endorsement form CG 20 10 03 97, or equivalent, which shall read “Who is an Insured (Section II) is amended to include as an insured the person or organization shown in the Schedule, but only with respect to liability arising out of “your work” for that insured by or for you.” If any Excess insurance is utilized to fulfill the requirements of this subsection, such Excess insurance shall be “follow form” equal or broader in coverage scope than underlying insurance. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 15 2. Vehicle Liability. Contractor shall maintain Business Automobile Liability insurance with a limit of $1,000,000 each occurrence on Contractor’s owned, hired and non-owned vehicles assigned to or used in the performance of the Contractor’s Work or Services under this Contract. Coverage will be at least as broad as ISO coverage code “1” “any auto” policy form CA 00 01 12 93 or equivalent thereof. To the fullest extent allowed by law, for claims arising out of the performance of this Contract, the Town, its agents, representatives, officers, directors, officials and employees shall be cited as an Additional Insured under ISO Business Auto policy Designated Insured Endorsement form CA 20 48 or equivalent. If any Excess insurance is utilized to fulfill the requirements of this subsection, such Excess insurance shall be “follow form” equal or broader in coverage scope than underlying insurance. 3. Professional Liability. If this Contract is the subject of any professional Services or Work, or if the Contractor engages in any professional Services or Work in any way related to performing the Work under this Contract, the Contractor shall maintain Professional Liability insurance covering negligent errors and omissions arising out of the Services performed by the Contractor, or anyone employed by the Contractor, or anyone for whose negligent acts, mistakes, errors and omissions the Contractor is legally liable, with an unimpaired liability insurance limit of $2,000,000 each claim and $2,000,000 annual aggregate. 4. Workers’ Compensation Insurance. Contractor shall maintain Workers’ Compensation insurance to cover obligations imposed by Federal and State statutes having jurisdiction over Contractor’s employees engaged in the performance of Work or Services under this Contract and shall also maintain Employers Liability Insurance of not less than $500,000 for each accident, $500,000 disease for each employee and $1,000,000 disease policy limit. 5. Builder’s Risk Insurance. Unless expressly waived by the Town Manager in a written addendum or amendment to this Contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining insurance to protect the Project from perils of physical loss. The insurance shall provide for the full cost of replacement for the entire Project at the time of any loss. The insurance shall include as named insureds the Town, the Contractor, the Contractor’s Subcontractors and sub-subcontractors and shall insure against loss from the perils of fire and all-risk coverage for physical loss or damage due to theft, vandalism, collapse, malicious mischief, transit, flood, earthquake, testing, resulting loss arising from defective design, negligent workmanship or defective material. The Contractor shall increase the coverage limits as necessary to reflect changes in the estimated replacement cost. C. Cancellation and Expiration Notice. Insurance required herein shall not expire, be canceled, or be materially changed without 30 Days’ prior written notice to the Town. 3.12 Performance Bond. The Contractor shall be required to furnish non-revocable security binding the Contractor to provide faithful performance of this Contract in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract Price payable to the Town. Performance security shall be in the form of a performance bond, certified check, cashier’s check or irrevocable letter of credit. This security must be in the possession of the Engineer within seven Days after execution of this Agreement by the Town. If the Contractor fails to execute and deliver the security instrument as required, the Contractor may be found in default and the Contract terminated by the Town. In case of default the Town reserves all rights. All performance bonds shall be executed in the form attached hereto as Exhibit I, duly executed by the Contractor as Principal and having as Surety thereon a Surety company approved by the Town and holding a Certificate of Authority to transact surety business in the State of Arizona by the Arizona Department of Insurance. Individual sureties are unacceptable. All Insurers and Sureties shall have, at the time of submission of the performance bond, an A.M. Best’s Key Rating Guide of “A-” or better as currently listed in the most recent Best Key Guide, published by the A.M. Best Company. 3.13 Payment Bond. The Contractor shall be required to furnish non-revocable security for the protection of all persons supplying labor and material to the Contractor or any Subcontractor for the performance TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 16 of any Work related to this Contract. Payment security shall be in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract Price and be payable to the Town. Payment security shall be in the form of a payment bond, certified check, cashier’s check or irrevocable letter of credit. This security must be in the possession of the Engineer within seven Days after execution of this Agreement by the Town. If the Contractor fails to execute and deliver the security instrument as required, the Contractor may be found in default and the Contract terminated by the Town. In case of default the Town reserves all rights. All payment bonds shall be executed in the form attached hereto as Exhibit J, duly executed by the Contractor as Principal and having as Surety thereon a Surety company approved by the Town and holding a Certificate of Authority to transact surety business in the State of Arizona by the Arizona Department of Insurance. Individual sureties are unacceptable. All Insurers and Sureties shall have, at the time of submission of the payment bond, an A.M. Best’s Key Rating Guide of “A-” or better as currently listed in the most recent Best Key Guide, published by the A.M. Best Company. 3.14 Changes in the Work. The Town may, without invalidating this Contract, order changes in the Work consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions to the Contract and the Contract Price and the Contract Time shall be adjusted as provided below. The Contract Price and/or the Contract Time may only be changed by the Town’s written approval authorizing said change, and said changes shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract. The Contract Price shall be adjusted as a result of a change in the Work as follows: A. Additions. When the Town increases the scope of the Work, Contractor will perform the increased work pursuant to Contractor’s unit prices set forth on the Price Sheet. B. Deletions. When the Town decreases the Work resulting in a decrease in Contractor’s quantity of the Work, the Town shall be allowed a decrease in the Contract Price amounting to the quantity of the deleted Work multiplied by the Contractor’s unit prices. C. Estimating. Whenever the Town is considering a change to the Work, Contractor shall promptly, and in any event within five business days, estimate the price of the contemplated additional or deleted Work in good faith and as accurately as is then-feasible. The estimate shall show quantities of labor, material and equipment and shall be pursuant to the rates set forth in the Contractor’s Bid. 3.15 Substantial Completion. When the Contractor considers that the Work is Substantially Complete, the Architect shall prepare and submit to the Contractor a comprehensive list of Punch List items, which the Contractor may edit and supplement. The Contractor shall proceed promptly to complete and correct Punch List items. Failure to include an item on the Punch List does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Town shall determine when the Project and the Contractor’s Work is substantially complete. “Substantial Completion” means construction has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents to the extent that the Town can use or occupy the entire Project, or the designated portion of the Project, for the use intended without any outstanding, concurrent construction at the site, except as may be required to complete or correct Punch List items. A prerequisite for Substantial Completion, over and above the extent of construction completion required, is receipt by the Town of acceptable documentation that Contractor has successfully tested and demonstrated all systems for their intended use. The date of Substantial Completion shall be confirmed by a Certificate of Substantial Completion signed by the Town and Contractor. The Certificate of Substantial Completion signed by the Town and Contractor shall state the respective responsibilities of the Town and the Contractor for security, maintenance, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall also include the Punch List as created by the Contractor and modified by the Town and establish the time for completion and correction of all Punch List items. If the Town and the Contractor cannot agree as to the appropriate date of Substantial Completion, such issue shall be submitted for dispute resolution in accordance with the procedures set forth in Article III, Part B below. Notwithstanding such disagreement, the Contractor shall diligently proceed with completion of the Punch List items. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 17 3.16 Final Completion. The Town shall determine when the Project and the Contractor’s Work is finally completed. “Final Completion” means completion of the Project by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents, certified to the Town by the Contractor. Final Completion shall be achieved only upon the Town’s written acceptance of (A) the construction, (B) all testing, (C) demonstration by Contractor that the Work functions as required by the Contract Documents and meets all Contract requirements, (D) resolution of all outstanding system deficiencies and Punch List items, if any, (E) delivery of all as-built documentation, drawings, completed record documents (with revisions made after Substantial Completion), annotated submittals and design document deliverables, (F) submittal, acceptance, and delivery of the one hundred percent (100%) complete O&M manuals, (G) delivery of warranties, inspection certificates, bonds and all other required documents, (H) all pre- requisites for final payment and (I) submittal of Contractor’s request for final payment and acceptance enclosing all required documentation. Upon Final Completion the Engineer shall issue a Certificate of Final Completion to the Contractor on behalf of the Town. Following receipt of payment from the Town, the Contractor shall make all payments due to the Subcontractors. 3.17 Payments to Contractor. Compensation for all Work necessary for the completion of the Project shall be included by the Bidder in the price bid for the items shown in the Bid. Only those items listed in the Bid are pay items. Payment shall be conditioned upon Contractor’s compliance with the payment terms and conditions set forth below. Contractor expressly acknowledges and agrees that (A) the Contract Price is an estimated amount based upon an engineer’s estimate of the quantities of the Materials deemed necessary to perform the Work and (B) the amount of any payment to be made pursuant to this Contract shall be determined by the field-measured quantities of Materials actually installed by Contractor. Material or equipment delivered to the Project by or on behalf of Contractor shall not constitute material or equipment furnished in the performance of the Work until same has been incorporated into the improvements constituting the Project. Payment shall not constitute acceptance by the Town or evidence thereof of any Work performed. A. Progress Payments. 1. On or before the 15th day of each month after construction has commenced, the Contractor shall submit to the Town an application for payment consisting of the cost of the Work performed up to the end of the prior month, including the cost of material stored on the site or at other locations approved by the Town. The application shall be deemed approved and certified for payment seven Days after it is submitted unless before that time the Town prepares and issues a specific written finding setting forth those items in detail that are not approved for payment under the Contract. Prior to submission of the next application for payment, the Contractor shall make available at the request of the Town a statement accounting for the disbursement of funds received under the previous application for purposes of audit. The extent of such statement shall be as agreed upon between the Town and Contractor. 2. Within 14 Days after approval of each monthly application for payment, the Town shall pay directly to the Contractor the appropriate amount for which application for payment is made, less amounts (a) previously paid by the Town, (b) sufficient to pay expenses the Town reasonably expects to incur in correcting deficiencies which are set forth in writing and provided to the Contractor and (c) any retainage as set forth in subsection 3.17(B) below. 3. The Town’s progress payment, occupancy or use of the Project, whether in whole or in part, shall not be deemed as acceptance of any Work not conforming to the requirements of this Contract. 4. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, the Town shall pay the Contractor the unpaid balance of the cost of the Work, less a sum equal to the Contractor’s estimated cost of completing any unfinished items as agreed to between the Town and the Contractor as to extent and time for Final Completion. The Town thereafter shall pay the Contractor monthly the amount retained for unfinished items as each item is completed. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 18 B. Retainage. With respect to the Work, the Town shall retain ten percent (10%) of the amount of each estimate until Final Completion and acceptance of all Material, equipment and Work covered by this Contract. 1. Any securities submitted by Contractor in lieu of retainage as may be allowed by law, shall be deposited in an escrow account by the Town. The Town shall be listed as payee or multiple payees with Contractor on all such securities. 2. When the Work is fifty percent (50%) completed, one-half of the amount retained including any securities substituted pursuant to subsection 3.17 (B)(1) shall be paid to the Contractor upon the Contractor’s request, provided the Contractor is making satisfactory progress on the Work and there is no specific cause or claim requiring a greater amount to be retained. After the construction Work is fifty percent (50%) completed, no more than five percent (5%) of the amount of any subsequent progress payments made under this Contract may be retained, provided the Contractor is making satisfactory progress on the Project. If, at any time, the Town determines satisfactory progress is not being made, ten percent (10%) retention shall be reinstated for all progress payments made under this Contract after the determination. C. Payment for On-site and Off-site Stored Materials. Payment shall be made on account of Materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. Payment may similarly be made for Materials and equipment suitably stored off the site, conditioned upon the Contractor furnishing evidence to the Town that (1) title to the Materials and equipment will pass to the Town upon payment therefore, (2) the Materials and equipment are adequately safeguarded and insured, including during transit from the off-site location to the Project site and (3) such other matters as the Town may reasonably request in order to protect its interests. With the prior, written approval of the Town, Contractor may advance order the bulk delivery of Materials to be incorporated into the Work over the course of this Contract. Upon delivery and receipt of supplier invoice, the Town shall pay for the bulk delivery, either directly to the Contractor or to the vendor or by joint check to Contractor and vendor, and shall receive a full release for the amount paid from vendor and Contractor. Contractor agrees to assume full responsibility for the safekeeping of all such Materials and shall guarantee to the Town that such Materials shall remain safe from theft or damage from any and all causes (unless caused by the sole negligence of the Town). Contractor shall immediately replace, repair or restore said Materials to their original condition so as to not cause any delay in the Work, and Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Town for, from and against any and all loss, cost, liability or expense resulting from any loss or damage to any of the Materials described herein from any cause unless due to the Town’s sole negligence. Should the Town have reason to believe Contractor is not properly safeguarding any of the Materials, the Town shall have the right, but not the affirmative duty, to immediately take such steps as it deems necessary to do so, including removing Contractor from the job, replacing any Materials or expending any sums to properly carry out Contractor’s responsibility hereunder, and any amounts so expended shall be billed back to Contractor or deducted from any sums then or thereafter due to Contractor. Contractor shall fully insure all Materials stored on site as required by the Town, and if such insurance is not obtained due to a lack of insurable interest, the Town shall have the right to obtain such insurance and charge the amount thereof back to Contractor or deduct said amount from any funds then or thereafter due to Contractor. D. Title to Construction Work. The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an application for payment shall pass to the Town no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an application for payment, all Work for which applications for payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Town shall be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, Materials and equipment relating to the Work. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 19 E. Final Payment. 1. Final payment, consisting of the unpaid balance of the cost of the Work shall be due and payable at Final Completion and acceptance by the Town. Before issuance of final payment, the Town may request satisfactory evidence that all payrolls, Materials bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work have been paid or otherwise satisfied. 2. Simultaneously with Contractor’s request for final payment, Contractor shall submit the following items to the Town Representative: a. Red-line construction record drawings. b. Warranties. c. Two sets of documentation completely covering the operation and maintenance of the mechanical and electrical installation and all other equipment. The documentation shall include charts, diagrams, performance curves, catalog information, lubrication manuals, and details pertaining to the functioning of various items of equipment. The documentation shall be divided logically into “systems” on the basis of operation, without respect to trades, subcontractors or arbitrary specifications sections. The relationship of the “systems” shall be clearly and concisely detailed. d. Affidavit Regarding Settlement of Claims. e. Other items reasonably required by the Town Representative. 3. In making final payment the Town waives all claims except for: a. Outstanding liens. b. Improper workmanship or defective Materials. c. Work not in conformance with this Contract or Work not completed. d. Terms of any special warranties required by this Contract. e. Delivery to Town of all warranties, operation and maintenance manuals, “AS-BUILT” record drawings and other documents as required by this Contract. f. Right to audit Contractor records for a period of three years. g. Claims previously made in writing and which remain unsettled. 4. Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor shall constitute a waiver of affirmative claims by the Contractor, except those previously made in writing and identified as unsettled at the time of final payment. F. Warranty. Contractor or its assignee shall give to the Town a one-year warranty against deficiencies in material and workmanship for all Work on the Project or other such warranty as required by the Town Engineer, which warranty shall begin on the date that the Town accepts the Work as provided in this Section. Any material deficiencies in material or workmanship identified by Town staff during the one-year warranty period shall be brought to the attention of the Contractor or its assignee that provided the warranty, which shall promptly remedy or cause to be remedied such deficiencies to the reasonable satisfaction of the TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 20 Town Engineer. Continuing material deficiencies in a particular portion of the Work shall be sufficient grounds for the Town to require (1) an extension of the warranty for an additional one-year period and (2) the proper repair of or the removal and reinstallation of, that portion of the Work that is subject to such continuing deficiencies. Regardless of whether the applicable warranty period has expired, the Contractor agrees to repair any damage to the Work caused by Contractor’s construction activities on the Property. Nothing contained herein shall prevent the Town or Contractor from seeking recourse against any other third party for damage to the Work caused by such third party. 3.18 Offset. A. Offset for Damages. In addition to all other remedies at law or equity, the Town may offset from any money due to the Contractor any amounts Contractor owes to the Town for damages resulting from breach or deficiencies in performance or breach of any obligation under this Contract. B. Offset for Delinquent Fees or Taxes. The Town may offset from any money due to the Contractor any amounts Contractor owes to the Town for delinquent fees, transaction privilege taxes and property taxes, including any interest or penalties. PART B - PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK 3.19 Project Videotape. The Contractor shall produce and provide a project videotape to the Engineer as required by MAG Supplement Section 105.5.3. All costs associated with the Project videotape produced in accordance with this Section shall be deemed incidental. 3.20 Soil and Subsurface Conditions. In addition to conformance to MAG Specifications, Section 102.4 (Examination of Plans, Special Provisions and Site Work), the Contractor shall make its own determinations as to the soil and subsurface conditions, including rock, caliche and ground water and shall complete the Work in whatever material and under whatever conditions may be encountered or created, without extra cost to the Town pursuant to the provisions of the MAG Supplement Section 102.4.1. 3.21 Work Scheduling. Time is of the essence for this Contract. Contractor shall provide the Engineer with any requested scheduling information and a proposed schedule for performance of the Work within the Contract Time in a form acceptable to the Engineer and approved by the Engineer, in his sole and absolute discretion, providing for commencement and completion of the Work (the “Schedule”). The Schedule shall include the date for Substantial Completion of the Work. The Engineer may revise the Schedule during the course of the Work. Contractor, to induce the Town to enter into this Contract, has and does hereby agree to fully perform and complete the Work for the Contract Price within the Schedule. 3.22 Contractor’s Representative. The Contractor or his authorized representative shall be present at the Work site at all times during working hours. Instructions and information provided by the Engineer to the Contractor’s representative shall be considered as having been given to the Contractor, per MAG Supplement Section 105.5.2. 3.23 Prosecution of the Work. The Contractor shall prosecute the Work so that the portion of the Work completed at any point in time shall be not less than as required by the Schedule. If the delay is an Inexcusable Delay, as defined below, the Contractor shall prepare a recovery schedule for the Engineer’s review and approval, showing how the Contractor will compensate for the delays and achieve Substantial Completion by the date(s) shown on the Schedule. If the Contractor is unable to demonstrate how it will overcome Inexcusable Delays, the Engineer may order the Contractor to employ such extraordinary measures as are necessary to bring the Work into conformity with the Substantial Completion date(s) set forth therein, the costs of which shall be included as part of the Cost of the Work. If the delay is an Excusable Delay, as defined below, the Engineer shall either (A) authorize an equitable extension in the Schedule to account for such delay, and equitably adjust the contract sum on account of such delay or (B) request that the Contractor prepare a recovery schedule showing how (if possible) the TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 21 Contractor can achieve Substantial Completion by the applicable date shown on the Schedule, and equitably adjust the Contract Price in accordance with the provisions of this Contract on account of any extraordinary activities required of the Contractor on account of such recovery schedule. 3.24 Extensions of Time. A. Allowable Extensions. An extension in the scheduled date of Substantial Completion will only be granted in the event of Excusable Delays affecting the Schedule for the Work. The Contractor shall be entitled to general condition costs and extra costs related to the Excusable Delay for idle labor, equipment inefficiency and lost productivity of the performance of the Work. The Contractor must submit evidence reasonably satisfactory to the Town substantiating such costs. Such adjustment to the Price and Substantial Completion date shall be issued in a Change Order or Contract amendment, as applicable. B. Excusable Delay. To the extent any of the following events results in an actual delay in the Work, such shall constitute an “Excusable Delay” (to the extent not set forth below, a delay will be considered an “Inexcusable Delay”): 1. Delays resulting from Force Majeure. 2. Differing, unusual or concealed site conditions that could not reasonably have been anticipated by the Contractor in preparing the Schedule, including, without limitation, archaeological finds and unusual soil conditions (including rock or other geological conditions), underground foundations, abandoned utility lines and water conditions. 3. Delays resulting from the existence or discovery of Hazardous Materials on the Site not brought to the Site by the Contractor. 4. Delays resulting from changes in Applicable Laws occurring after the date of execution of this Contract. 5. Delays occurring due to the acts or omissions of the Town and those within the control of the Town. 6. Delays occurring due to the acts or omissions of a utility, so long as Contractor has coordinated with the utility causing the delay and the delay occurs despite reasonable steps taken by Contractor to avoid the delay. 7. Delays resulting from weather conditions that make it unreasonable to perform the Work in accordance with the Schedule; provided, however, that Contractor’s Schedule shall be deemed to include 14 Days for weather delays (the “Expected Delay Days”), regardless of whether such weather delays are specifically set forth in the Schedule. Contractor shall notify the Town within 24 hours in writing of a weather related delay. If Contractor fails to give the required 24-hour notice, no such weather delay will be subtracted from the Expected Delay Days. Weather delays shall not be deemed “Excusable” unless all of the Expected Delay Days have been exhausted. 8. Delays resulting from Additional Work (defined below) that cannot be performed concurrently with the Work on the Schedule. C. Required Notice. In order to obtain an extension of time due to an Excusable Delay, the Contractor shall comply with the following requirements. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of the Excusable Delay as soon as practicable, but in no event more than seven Days after the Contractor becomes aware of the occurrence of the Excusable Delay. Such notice shall describe the Excusable Delay and shall state the approximate number of Days the Contractor expects to be delayed. After the cessation of the Excusable Delay, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the number of Days the Contractor believes that its activities were in fact TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 22 delayed by the Excusable Delay. In the event that the delay arises as a result of a Change Order request by the Town, the request for an extension of time contained in the resulting Change Order proposal shall be deemed sufficient for purposes of this subsection. D. Determination. Within 10 Days after cessation of an event giving rise to either an Excusable Delay or Inexcusable Delay, the parties will use good faith efforts to agree on the extent to which the Work has been delayed and whether the delay is an Excusable Delay or an Inexcusable Delay. In the absence of agreement between the parties as to the then-current status of Excusable Delays and Inexcusable Delays, the Engineer will provide the Contractor with written notice of Engineer’s determination of the respective number of Days of Excusable Delay and/or Inexcusable Delay. The Engineer’s determination may be issued at such time as the Engineer deems reasonable, but not later than 10 Days after receipt by the Engineer of the Contractor’s written request for such determination. The Contractor shall not, however, deem an issuance by the Engineer of such a determination to be a concurrence of the matters set forth in the Contractor’s request. The Contractor may invoke the dispute resolution procedures set forth in Part D below with respect to such determination. E. Concurrent Delay. To the extent the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time due to an Excusable Delay, but the performance of the Work would have been suspended, delayed or interrupted by the fault or neglect of the Contractor or by an Inexcusable Delay, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional costs for the period of such concurrency. 3.25 Liquidated Damages. It is expressly understood that should Contractor fail to complete the Work covered hereby within the Contract Time, the Contractor agrees to pay and shall pay to the Town upon request therefore for each Day of delay beyond the original or revised scheduled time of completion of Contractor’s Work as liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, in the amount per Day as set forth in MAG Specifications for each Day of delay. A. Prior to Termination. If the Contract is not terminated, the Contractor shall continue performance and be liable to the Town for the liquidated damages until the Work is complete. B. After Termination. In the event the Town exercises its right of termination, the Contractor shall be liable to the Town for any excess costs and, in addition, for liquidated damages until such time as the Town may reasonably obtain delivery or performance of similar Services. 3.26 Suspension by the Town for Convenience. A. Town Determination. The Town may order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt all or any part of the Work without cause for such period of time as the Town may determine to be appropriate for its convenience. B. Contract Adjustments. Adjustments caused by suspension, delay or interruption shall be made for increases in the applicable contract sum and/or the date(s) of Substantial Completion. No adjustment shall be made if the Contractor is or otherwise would have been responsible for the suspension, delay or interruption of the Work, or if another provision of this Contract is applied to render an equitable adjustment. 3.27 Termination by the Town for Convenience. The Town may, upon 30 Days’ written notice to the Contractor, terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, for the convenience of the Town without prejudice to any right or remedy otherwise available to the Town. Upon receipt of such notice, the Contractor shall immediately discontinue all Services affected unless such notice directs otherwise. In the event of a termination for convenience of the Town, the Contractor’s sole and exclusive right and remedy shall be payment for all Work performed through the date of termination. The Contractor shall not be entitled to be paid any amount as profit for unperformed Services or consideration for the Town’s termination by convenience. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 23 3.28 Termination by the Town for Cause. A. Default; Cure. If the Contractor refuses or fails to supply sufficient properly skilled staff or proper Materials, or disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority jurisdiction, or otherwise substantially violates or materially breaches any term or provision of this Contract, and such nonperformance or violation continues without cure for 15 Days after the Contractor receives written notice of such nonperformance or violation from the Town, then the Town may, without prejudice to any right or remedy otherwise available to the Town, terminate this Contract. B. Substitute Performance. Upon termination of this Contract by the Town, the Town shall be entitled to furnish or have furnished the Services to be performed hereunder by the Contractor by whatever method the Town may deem expedient. Also, in such case, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until completion of the Work, and the total compensation to the Contractor under this Contract shall be the amount that is equitable under the circumstances. If the Town and the Contractor are unable to agree on the amount to be paid under the foregoing sentence, the Town shall fix an amount, if any, that it deems appropriate in consideration of all of the circumstances surrounding such termination, and shall make payment accordingly. The Contractor may dispute the Town’s assessment of the termination amount pursuant to the dispute resolution process set forth in in Part D of this Contract. C. Contractor Insolvency. Upon the appointment of a receiver for the Contractor, or if the Contractor makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, the Town may terminate this Contract, without prejudice to any right or remedy otherwise available to the Town, upon giving three business days’ written notice to the Contractor. If an order for relief is entered under the bankruptcy code with respect to the Contractor, the Town may terminate this Contract by giving three business days’ written notice to the Contractor unless the Contractor or the trustee completes all of the following: 1. Promptly cures all breaches within such three-day period. 2. Provides adequate assurances of future performance. 3. Compensates the Town for actual pecuniary loss resulting from such breaches. 4. Assumes the obligations of the Contractor within the established time limits. 3.29 Contract Subject to Appropriation. The Town is obligated only to pay its obligations set forth in this Agreement as may lawfully be made from funds appropriated and budgeted for that purpose during the Town’s then current fiscal year. The Town’s obligations under this Agreement are current expenses subject to the “budget law” and the unfettered legislative discretion of the Town concerning budgeted purposes and appropriation of funds. Should the Town elect not to appropriate and budget funds to pay its Agreement obligations, this Agreement shall be deemed terminated at the end of the then-current fiscal year term for which such funds were appropriated and budgeted for such purpose and the Town shall be relieved of any subsequent obligation under this Agreement. The parties agree that the Town has no obligation or duty of good faith to budget or appropriate the payment of the Town’s obligations set forth in this Agreement in any budget in any fiscal year other than the fiscal year in which this Agreement is executed and delivered. The Town shall be the sole judge and authority in determining the availability of funds for its obligations under this Agreement. The Town shall keep Contractor informed as to the availability of funds for this Agreement. The obligation of the Town to make any payment pursuant to this Agreement is not a general obligation or indebtedness of the Town. Contractor hereby waives any and all rights to bring any claim against the Town from or relating in any way to the Town's termination of this Agreement pursuant to this section. 3.30 Additional Work, Materials and/or Overtime. Contractor expressly agrees that if overtime or additional workers or materials are necessary to meet the Schedule, that such overtime will be performed or additional workers or materials will be procured by the Contractor, and the additional expense thereof shall be TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 24 borne by Contractor unless the delay requiring overtime was directly caused by the Town, in which event Contractor shall be entitled to compensation for such overtime Work. If the Town requests Contractor to perform additional Work in connection with the Project (“Additional Work”), Contractor shall charge the Town a negotiated fixed amount for the Additional Work. In the event a fixed amount cannot be negotiated, Contractor shall invoice the Town on a time and materials basis for the Additional Work at the unit prices set forth in the price sheet. 3.31 No Damage for Delay or Additional Work by the Town. Contractor shall adjust its operations to conform to any progress schedule changes and hereby waives and releases the Town from any liability for damages or expenses that may be caused to or sustained by Contractor by reason of such changes or by reason of delays in the Work, whether caused in whole or in part by conduct on the part of the Town, including without limitation, any breach of this Contract or delays by other contractors or Subcontractors. Contractor’s exclusive remedy in event of delay or Additional Work by the Town shall be an extension of time hereunder to complete the Work. 3.32 Risk of Loss. Contractor shall assume the risk of loss occasioned by fire, theft or other damage to Materials, machinery, apparatus, tools and equipment relating to the Work prior to actual installation in final place on the Project and acceptance by the Town. Contractor shall be responsible for damage to the Materials, machinery, apparatus, tools, equipment and property of the Town and other contractors resulting from the acts or omissions of its Subcontractors, employees, agents, representatives Subcontractors, and for payment of the full costs of repair or replacement of any said damage. 3.33 Protection of Finished or Partially Finished Work. The Contractor shall properly guard and protect all finished or partially finished Work and shall be responsible for the same until the entire Contract is completed and accepted by the Engineer. The Contractor shall turn over the entire Work in full accordance with this Contract before final settlement shall be made. 3.34 Character and Status of Workers. Only skilled foremen and workers shall be employed on portions of the Work requiring special qualifications. When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall discharge any person who is, in the opinion of the Engineer, disorderly, dangerous, insubordinate, incompetent or otherwise objectionable. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Town from and against damages or claims for compensation that may occur in the enforcement of this Section. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the legal working status of its employees and its Subcontractor’s employees. The Contractor agrees that once assigned to Work under this Contract, key personnel shall not be removed or replaced without written notice to the Town. If key personnel are not available for Work under this Contract for a continuous period exceeding 30 Days, or are expected to devote substantially less effort to the Work than initially anticipated, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Town and shall, subject to the concurrence of the Town, replace such personnel with personnel of substantially equal ability and qualifications. 3.35 Work Methods. The methods, equipment and appliances used on the Work shall be such as will produce a satisfactory quality of Work, and shall be adequate to complete the Contract within the Contract Time. Except as is otherwise specified in this Contract, the Contractor’s procedure and methods of construction may, in general, be of its own choosing, provided such methods (A) follow best general practice and (B) are calculated to secure results which will satisfy the requirements of this Contract. The Work covered by this Contract shall be carefully laid out in advance and performed in a manner to minimize interference with normal operation and utilization of the Town’s right-of-way. The Contractor shall exercise caution during the course of this Work to avoid damage to all known existing or possible unknown existing underground utilities. It shall conduct its operations in such a manner as to avoid injury to its personnel and to avoid damage to all utilities. Any damage done will be repaired without delay and at the expense of the Contractor. 3.36 Safety Fencing Requirement for Trenches and Excavations. The Contractor shall provide safety construction fencing around all open trenches and excavations during all non-working hours. In addition, the TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 25 Contractor shall provide safety fencing around the Project site during working hours in order to ensure public safety. The Contractor shall provide for the safety and welfare of the general public by adequately fencing all excavations and trenches that are permitted by the Engineer to remain open when construction is not in progress. Fencing shall be securely anchored to approved steel posts located not less than six feet on center, having a minimum height of six feet, and shall consist of wire mesh fabric of sufficient weight and rigidity to adequately span a maximum supporting post separation of six feet. The fencing, when installed about the periphery of excavations and trenches, shall form an effective barrier against intrusion by the general public into areas of construction. The Contractor, at all times when construction is not in progress, shall be responsible for maintaining the fencing in good repair, and upon notification by the Engineer, shall take immediate action to rectify any deficiency. Prior to the start of any excavation or trenching required for the execution of the proposed Work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, detailed plans showing types of materials and methods of fabrication for the protective fencing. There will be no separate measurement or payment for furnishing, installing, or maintaining protective fencing. The cost shall be considered incidental to the cost of any other structures for which trenching is necessary. 3.37 Plans and Shop Drawings, Samples and Substitution of Materials. All submittals shall conform to MAG Specifications, Section 105.2 (Plans and Drawings) as modified by the MAG Supplement. Contractor shall furnish, within three business days following request therefore by the Town, detailed drawings of the Work, samples of Materials and other submittals required for the performance or coordination of the Work. Substitutions shall be equal or superior to Materials specified in the Contract Documents, shall be clearly identified on submittals as “proposed substitutions” and shall be approved by the Town in accordance with Section 2.4 above. Contractor shall be fully responsible for the adequacy, completeness and promptness of all such submittals. Materials shall not be furnished to the jobsite unless same is in strict compliance with the Specifications or otherwise approved in writing by the Town. Approval by the Town shall not relieve Contractor of full responsibility for compliance with scope, intent and performance in accordance with this Contract. 3.38 Utilities. A. Cooperation. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of MAG Specifications 105.6, as modified by the MAG Supplement. B. Utilities Shown on the Plans. 1. Regardless of what utilities are shown on the plans, it shall be Contractor's responsibility to verify these locations and any additional lines which may exist through consulting with the Town, utility companies and "Blue Stake." 2. Existing utilities are indicated on Project plans in accordance with the best information available. Contractor shall notify all owners of utilities when its Work is in progress and shall make such arrangements as are necessary to make any emergency repair to any utility, in a manner satisfactory to the Town of a damaged utility line, including individual or house service utility lines. 3. No extra compensation will be made for the repair of any individual or house service utility or utility lines damaged by Contractor's labor forces or equipment, nor for any damage incurred through neglect or failure to provide protective barriers, lights and other devices or means required to protect such existing utilities. 4. Contractor shall expose all sanitary and storm sewers, water, gas, electric, telephone utility lines, and other underground structures that might interfere with the Work, in order to permit survey location prior to construction. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 26 5. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for damages to any underground facility/utility properly shown on the Plans or properly located by the Utility owner, as a result of failing to obtain information as to its location, failing to excavate in a careful and prudent manner (as defined in MAG Specifications), or failing to take measures for protection of the facilities/utilities. The Contractor is liable to the owner of the underground facility/utility for the total cost of the repair. C. Utilities Not Shown on the Plans. 1. If utility lines are encountered that are not shown on the plans, and not located, or incorrectly located by the utility owner, other than individual or house service utility lines, and these lines are damaged or work is required to clear same, then MAG Specifications, Section 109.8 and ARIZ. REV. STAT. § 40-360.21 et seq. shall apply. 2. The work necessary for the raising, lowering, or relocating of any such utility shall be at the utility owner’s expense. The necessary Work may be done by the utility owner or by Contractor, or as a collaborative effort, at the option of the utility owner. All Work shall be in accordance with the standards of the Town and the utility owner. 3. In most cases, individual or house service utility lines are not shown on the Plans. It shall be Contractor’s responsibility to locate and protect these individual or house services. If, due to Contractor’s operations, any of these lines are damaged, it shall repair or replace these lines in a manner satisfactory to the owner of the utility at no extra cost to the Town. In addition, the cost of location, protection, and working around these individual or house service utility lines shall be included in Contractor’s bid for the Work under this Contract. 3.39 Sampling and Testing. Sampling and testing shall conform to the requirements of the MAG Specifications, Section 106, as modified by the MAG Supplement. The Contractor shall obtain an independent laboratory or testing company and pay all costs of testing required by the Contract Documents, including testing required by MAG, the Specifications, the Town and other jurisdictional bodies. A copy of all test results shall be furnished to the Engineer in a summary report submitted at the subsequent construction progress meeting (time and date to be set upon Contract award) for tests performed. At Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall submit a final test report containing all test results which certifies the Work complies with the Specifications. This report shall be sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Arizona who was responsible for overseeing the testing and sampling. 3.40 Cooperation between Contractors. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of MAG Specifications, Section 105.7, as modified by the MAG Supplement. 3.41 Outdoor Construction Time Restrictions. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, construction will be restricted as listed in the following table: May 15 – September 15 September 16 – May 14 5:30 a.m. to 6:30 p.m. 6:00 a.m. to 6:30 p.m. Construction Work shall not begin Work prior to 7:00 a.m. and shall stop by 5:00 p.m. on Saturdays. There shall be no Construction Work on Sundays and all Town, State and Federal holidays. 3.42 Construction Survey. Construction survey and as-built record drawings shall conform to the requirements of the MAG Specifications, Section 105.8 (Construction Stakes, Lines and Grades), as modified by the MAG Supplement. Contractor shall provide and pay for all building layout staking, including elevations and all other Project staking. Replacement of construction stakes that have been knocked out due to TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 27 Contractor's Work or lack of Work, weather conditions, traffic, vandalism or utility contractors will be done at Contractor's expense. 3.43 Survey Control Points. Existing survey markers (either brass caps or iron pipes) shall be protected by the Contractor or removed and replaced under direct supervision of the Engineer. Survey monuments shall be constructed to the requirements of MAG Specifications, Section 405. Lot corners shall not be disturbed without knowledge and consent of the property owner. The Contractor shall replace benchmarks, monuments or lot corners moved or destroyed during construction at no expense to the Town. Contractor and its sureties shall be liable for correct replacement of disturbed survey benchmarks except where the Town elects to replace survey benchmarks using its own forces. 3.44 Stockpile of Materials. A. Engineer Approval. The Contractor may, if approved by the Engineer, place or stockpile Materials in the public right-of-way provided such Materials do not prevent access to adjacent properties or prevent compliance with traffic regulations. An encroachment permit shall be required. Any applicable cost shall be paid by the Contractor and shall be presumed to be part of the Contractor’s bid. B. No Traffic Interference. Traffic shall not be required to travel over stockpiled Materials and proper dust control shall be maintained. 3.45 Excess Materials. When excavations are made, resultant loose earth shall be (A) utilized for filling by compacting in place or (B) disposed of off-site. Excess or unsuitable material, broken asphaltic concrete and broken portland cement concrete excavated from the right-of-way shall be removed from the Project Site and disposed of by the Contractor. Waste material shall not be placed on private property without express permission of the property owner. The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by its operations. At the completion of the Work, Contractor shall remove all equipment, tools and surplus materials, and shall completely clean the premises, removing and disposing of all debris and rubbish and cleaning all stains, spots, marks, dirt, smears or other blemishes. When the Work premises are turned over to the Town, they shall be thoroughly clean and ready for immediate use. Clean-up shall include removal of all excess pointing mortar materials within pipes and removal of oversized rocks and boulders left after finish grading. The Contractor shall provide for the legal disposal of all waste products and debris and shall make necessary arrangements for such disposal. 3.46 Dust Control and Water. Contractor shall implement dust control measures in accordance with MAG Specifications, Section 104.1, and the MAG Supplement. Installation and removal of fire hydrant meters should be scheduled at least three business days in advance through the Chaparral City Water Company. Watering shall conform to the provisions of MAG Specifications, Section 225. A deposit and installation fee in amounts set forth in the Chaparral City Water Company’s fee schedule is required for each meter. The cost of the water is at the prevailing rate. 3.47 Storm Water. Contractor shall obtain all local, county, state and federal storm water permits. 3.48 Temporary Sanitary Facilities. The Contractor shall provide ample toilet facilities with proper enclosures for the use of workers employed on the Work site. Toilet facilities shall be installed and maintained in conformity with all applicable State and local laws, codes, regulations and ordinances and shall be properly lit and ventilated, and kept clean at all times. Adequate and satisfactory drinking water shall be provided at all times and under no circumstances and under no conditions will the use of common cups be permitted. The Contractor must supply sanitary drinking cups for the benefit of all employees. 3.49 Electric Power, Water and Telephone. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall make its own arrangements for electric power, water and telephone as needed. Subject to the convenience of the utility, it TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 28 may be permitted to connect to existing facilities where available, but Contractor shall meter and bear the cost of such power or water, and installation and disconnect of such power, water and telephone services. 3.50 Energized Aerial Electrical Power Lines. Utility companies may maintain energized aerial electrical power lines in the immediate vicinity of this Project. Contractor shall not presume any such lines to be insulated. Construction personnel working in proximity to these lines may be exposed to an extreme hazard from electrical shock. Contractor shall ensure that its employees and all other construction personnel working on this Project are warned of the danger and instructed to take adequate protective measures, including maintaining a minimum ten feet of clearance between the lines and all construction equipment and personnel. (see: OSHA Std. 1926.550 (a) 15, as amended). As an additional safety precaution, Contractor shall call the affected utility companies to arrange, if possible, to have these lines de-energized or relocated when the Work reaches their immediate vicinity. The cost of such temporary arrangements shall be borne by the Contractor. Contractor shall account for the time necessary to cause such utility disconnection in the preparation of its Bid. Electrical utility companies may maintain energized underground electrical power lines in the immediate vicinity of this Project. These power lines represent an extreme hazard of electrical shock to any construction personnel or equipment coming in contact with them. Arizona law requires all parties planning excavations in public rights-of-way to contact all utility firms for locations of their underground facilities. Contractor shall ensure that its employees and all other personnel working near any underground power lines must be warned to take adequate protective measure. (see: OSHA Std. 1926-651 (A), as amended). 3.51 Site Clean Up. Contractor shall at all times, but not less than daily unless otherwise agreed by Town Representative, keep the premises on which the Work is being performed clean and free from accumulation of any waste materials, trash, debris and excess dirt, and at all times shall remove Contractor’s implements, machinery, tools, apparatus and equipment from the jobsite when not needed on the jobsite. Should the Town Representative find it necessary in his/her opinion to employ help to clean up, remove or store any of the foregoing due to failure of Contractor to do so, the expense thereof shall be charged to Contractor. Verbal notice from the Town Representative on clean-up or removal is considered adequate notice hereunder, and failure to conform with his/her request within 24 hours thereof will be construed as a breach of this Contract by the Contractor and such charges will be made against Contractor’s account as are necessary to accomplish the clean-up or removal. The cost of cleanup, removal or storage by the Town, if not deducted by the Town from monies due Contractor, shall be paid by Contractor within five business days of written demand by the Town. 3.52 Use of the Site. Contractor shall at all times comply fully with all laws, orders, citations, rules, regulations, standards and statutes with respect to occupational health and safety, the handling and storage of hazardous materials, accident prevention and safety equipment and practices, including any accident prevention and safety program of the Town; provided, however, that the Town shall not be required to impose any safety requirements or administer any such programs and the review or requirement of any safety plan by the Town shall not be deemed to release Contractor or in any way diminish its liability, by way of indemnity or otherwise, as assumed by it under this Contract. Contractor shall conduct inspections regularly to determine that safe working conditions and equipment exist and accepts sole responsibility for providing a safe place to Work for its employees and employees of its Subcontractors, laborers, suppliers of material and equipment and any other person visiting the Site, for adequacy of and required use of all safety equipment and for compliance herewith. When so ordered, Contractor shall stop any part of the Work that the Town deems unsafe until corrective measures satisfactory to the Town have been taken. Should Contractor neglect to adopt such corrective measures, the Town may do so and deduct the cost from payments due Contractor. Contractor shall timely submit copies of all accident or injury reports to the Town. 3.53 Public Information and Notification. The Contractor shall submit a public information and notification plan for this Project (the “Notification Plan”) to the Town Representative at the first pre-construction meeting held prior to start of construction. The Notification Plan shall include, at a minimum, the items set forth in this Section 3.53; provided, however, that the Engineer may waive any portion of the requirements of this Section upon a written determination that the Project scope does not warrant such notification. Contractor shall provide TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 29 Project information to affected residents and homeowners’ associations prior to and throughout the Project’s duration. The Contractor shall use the Notification Plan to inform the local citizens, businesses and Town officials, not less than five business days in advance, of (A) necessary operations that create high noise levels, (B) street closures, (C) detour locations, (D) haul routes and material delivery routes and (E) disruption of bus routes, mail routes and other delivery/pick-up routes. A. Neighborhood Notification. Prior to the start of any Work on the Project, the Contractor shall distribute a preliminary “Dear Neighbor” letter (8-1/2” x 11”), as submitted to and subject to the approval of the Engineer, to all businesses, property owners and residents within 1,000 feet of any portion of this Project. This “Dear Neighbor” letter shall include, at a minimum, the following information: 1. Contractor’s name, business telephone number and the 24-hour “Hot Line” telephone number for this Project. 2. Name of Contractor’s Project Manager. 3. Name of Contractor’s Project Superintendent. 4. Brief description of the Project. 5. Construction schedule, including anticipated Work hours. 6. Anticipated lane restrictions, including the expected duration thereof. 7. Name of Town’s Project Manager. 8. Name of the Engineer. The Town Manager or authorized designee shall provide the Contractor with a distribution list for this “Dear Neighbor” letter. Contractor shall (1) ensure that the letter is distributed to all persons and businesses indicated on the list provided by the Town Manager or authorized designee and (2) provide the Town Manager or authorized designee with a copy of the letter sent and sufficient proof of mailing. Subsequent to delivery of the “Dear Neighbor” letter, the Contractor shall distribute bi-monthly construction progress updates, including construction schedule and any additional information the Engineer deems important as a result of construction activities, to all persons and businesses included on the aforementioned distribution list. At the request of the Town Manager or authorized designee, Contractor may be required to distribute additional public notifications. At the end of construction a final “Dear Neighbor” letter shall be distributed to the persons and businesses on the aforementioned distribution list highlighting the Contractor’s and the Town’s appreciation for their patience during construction of the Project. B. 24-Hour Project Hotline. Intentionally omitted. C. Public Meetings. The Contractor shall attend such public meetings as deemed necessary by the Town Manager or authorized designee. D. Press Releases. Intentionally omitted. E. Payment for Public Notification. Intentionally omitted. PART C - MISCELLANEOUS 3.54 Applicable Law; Venue. This Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Arizona and suit pertaining to this Contract may be brought only in courts in Maricopa County, Arizona. 3.55 Conflict of Interest. This Contract is subject to the provisions of ARIZ. REV. STAT. § 38-511. The Town may cancel this Contract without penalty or further obligations by the Town or any of its departments or TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 30 agencies if any person significantly involved in initiating, negotiating, securing, drafting or creating this Contract on behalf of the Town or any of its departments or agencies is, at any time while the Contract or any extension of the Contract is in effect, an employee of any other party to the Contract in any capacity or a consultant to any other party of the Contract with respect to the subject matter of the Contract. 3.56 Contract Amendments. This Contract may be modified only by a written amendment signed by persons duly authorized to enter into contracts on behalf of the Town and the Contractor; provided, however, that Change Orders may be issued and approved administratively by the Town when such changes do not alter the Contract Price. 3.57 Provisions Required by Law. Each and every provision of law and any clause required by law to be in the Contract will be read and enforced as though it were included herein and, if through mistake or otherwise any such provision is not inserted, or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract will promptly be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. 3.58 Severability. The provisions of this Contract are severable to the extent that any provision or application held to be invalid by a Court of competent jurisdiction shall not affect any other provision or application of the Contract which may remain in effect without the invalid provision or application. 3.59 Independent Contractor. It is clearly understood that each party will act in its individual capacity and not as an agent, employee, partner, joint venturer, or associate of the other. An employee or agent of one party shall not be deemed or construed to be the employee or agent of the other for any purpose whatsoever. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that the Services provided under this Agreement are being provided as an independent contractor, not as an employee or agent of the Town. Contractor, its employees and subcontractors are not entitled to workers’ compensation benefits from the Town. The Town does not have the authority to supervise or control the actual work of Contractor, its employees or subcontractors. The Contractor, and not the Town, shall determine the time of its performance of the services provided under this Agreement so long as Contractor meets the requirements of its agreed scope of work and the Specifications, Plans/construction drawings and Reference Documents as set forth in Section 2.1 above and Exhibit A. Contractor is neither prohibited from entering into other contracts nor prohibited from practicing its profession elsewhere. Town and Contractor do not intend to nor will they combine business operations under this Agreement. 3.60 Entire Agreement; Interpretation-Parol Evidence. This Contract represents the entire agreement of the parties with respect to its subject matter, and all previous agreements, whether oral or written, entered into prior to this Contract are hereby revoked and superseded by this Contract. No representations, warranties, inducements or oral agreements have been made by any of the parties except as expressly set forth herein, or in any other contemporaneous written agreement executed for the purposes of carrying out the provisions of this Contract. This Contract shall be construed and interpreted according to its plain meaning, and no presumption shall be deemed to apply in favor of, or against the party drafting the Contract. The parties acknowledge and agree that each has had the opportunity to seek and utilize legal counsel in the drafting of, review of, and entry into this Contract. 3.61 Assignment; Delegation. No right or interest in this Contract shall be assigned or delegated by Contractor without prior, written permission of the Town, signed by the Town Manager. Any attempted assignment or delegation by Contractor in violation of this provision shall be a breach of this Contract by Contractor. 3.62 Subcontracts. No subcontract shall be entered into by the Contractor with any other party to furnish any of the Materials, Services or construction specified herein without the prior, written approval of the Town. The Contractor is responsible for performance under this Contract whether or not Subcontractors are used. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 31 3.63 Rights and Remedies. No provision in this Contract shall be construed, expressly or by implication, as waiver by the Town of any existing or future right and/or remedy available by law in the event of any claim of default or breach of this Contract. The failure of the Town to insist upon the strict performance of any term or condition of this Contract or to exercise or delay the exercise of any right or remedy provided in this Contract, or by law, or the Town’s acceptance of and payment for Materials or Services, shall not release the Contractor from any responsibilities or obligations imposed by this Contract or by law, and shall not be deemed a waiver of any right of the Town to insist upon the strict performance of this Contract. 3.64 Attorneys’ Fees. In the event either party brings any action for any relief, declaratory or otherwise, arising out of this Contract or on account of any breach or default hereof, the prevailing party shall be entitled to receive from the other party reasonable attorneys’ fees and reasonable costs and expenses, determined by the court sitting without a jury, which shall be deemed to have accrued on the commencement of such action and shall be enforced whether or not such action is prosecuted through judgment. 3.65 Notices and Requests. Any notice or other communication required or permitted to be given under this Contract shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly given if (A) delivered to the party at the address set forth below, (B) deposited in the U.S. Mail, registered or certified, return receipt requested, to the address set forth below or (C) given to a recognized and reputable overnight delivery service, to the address set forth below: If to the Town: Town of Fountain Hills 16705 East Avenue of the Fountains Fountain Hills, Arizona 85268 Attn: Grady E. Miller, Town Manager With copy to: GUST ROSENFELD P.L.C. One East Washington Street, Suite 1600 Phoenix, Arizona 85004-2553 Attn: Andrew J. McGuire If to Contractor: _________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________ Attn: ____________________________ or at such other address, and to the attention of such other person or officer, as any party may designate in writing by notice duly given pursuant to this Section. Notices shall be deemed received (A) when delivered to the party, (B) three business days after being placed in the U.S. Mail, properly addressed, with sufficient postage or (C) the following business day after being given to a recognized overnight delivery service, with the person giving the notice paying all required charges and instructing the delivery service to deliver on the following business day. If a copy of a notice is also given to a party’s counsel or other recipient, the provisions above governing the date on which a notice is deemed to have been received by a party shall mean and refer to the date on which the party, and not its counsel or other recipient to which a copy of the notice may be sent, is deemed to have received the notice. 3.66 Overcharges by Antitrust Violations. The Town maintains that, in practice, overcharges resulting from antitrust violations are borne by the purchaser. Therefore, to the extent permitted by law, the Contractor hereby assigns to the Town any and all claims for such overcharges as to the goods and services used to fulfill the Contract. 3.67 Force Majeure. Except for payment for sums due, neither party shall be liable to the other nor deemed in default under this Contract if and to the extent that such party’s performance of this Contract is prevented by reason of force majeure. The term “force majeure” means an occurrence that is beyond the control of the party affected and occurs without its fault or negligence. Without limiting the foregoing, force majeure TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 32 includes acts of God; acts of the public enemy; war; riots; strikes; mobilization; labor disputes; civil disorders; fire; floods; lockouts, injunctions-intervention-acts, or failures or refusals to act by government authority; and other similar occurrences beyond the control of the party declaring force majeure which such party is unable to prevent by exercising reasonable diligence. The force majeure shall be deemed to commence when the party declaring force majeure notifies the other party, in accordance with Section 3.65, of the existence of the force majeure and shall be deemed to continue as long as the results or effects of the force majeure prevent the party from resuming performance in accordance with this Contract. Force majeure shall not include the following occurrences: A. Late Delivery. Late delivery of equipment or materials caused by congestion at a manufacturer’s plant or elsewhere, an oversold condition of the market, inefficiencies or similar occurrences. B. Late Performance. Late performance by a Subcontractor unless the delay arises out of a force majeure occurrence in accordance with this Section 3.67. Any delay or failure in performance by either party hereto shall not constitute default hereunder or give rise to any claim for damages or loss of anticipated profits if, and to the extent that such delay or failure is caused by force majeure. If either party is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by force majeure, then the delayed party shall notify the other party in accordance with Section 3.65 and shall make a specific reference to this Section, thereby invoking its provisions. The delayed party shall cause such delay to cease as soon as practicable and shall notify the other party in writing. The time of Substantial Completion or Final Completion shall be extended by written Contract amendment for a period of time equal to the time that the results or effects of such delay prevent the delayed party from performing in accordance with this Contract. 3.68 Confidentiality of Records. The Contractor shall establish and maintain procedures and controls that are acceptable to the Town for the purpose of ensuring that information contained in its records or obtained from the Town or from others in carrying out its obligations under this Contract shall not be used or disclosed by it, its agents, officers, or employees, except as required to perform Contractor’s duties under this Contract. Persons requesting such information should be referred to the Town. Contractor also agrees that any information pertaining to individual persons shall not be divulged other than to employees or officers of Contractor as needed for the performance of duties under this Contract. 3.69 Records and Audit Rights. To ensure that the Contractor and its Subcontractors are complying with the warranty under Section 3.70 below, Contractor’s and its Subcontractors’ books, records, correspondence, accounting procedures and practices, and any other supporting evidence relating to this Contract, including the papers of any Contractor and its Subcontractors’ employees who perform any Work or Services pursuant to this Contract (all of the foregoing hereinafter referred to as “Records”), shall be open to inspection and subject to audit and/or reproduction during normal working hours by the Town, to the extent necessary to adequately permit (1) evaluation and verification of any invoices, payments or claims based on Contractor’s and its Subcontractors’ actual costs (including direct and indirect costs and overhead allocations) incurred, or units expended directly in the performance of Work under this Contract and (2) evaluation of the Contractor’s and its Subcontractors’ compliance with the Arizona employer sanctions laws referenced in Section 3.70 below. To the extent necessary for the Town to audit Records as set forth in this Section, Contractor and its Subcontractors hereby waive any rights to keep such Records confidential. For the purpose of evaluating or verifying such actual or claimed costs or units expended, the Town shall have access to said Records, even if located at its Subcontractors’ facilities, from the effective date of this Contract for the duration of the Work and until three years after the date of final payment by the Town to Contractor pursuant to this Contract. Contractor and its Subcontractors shall provide the Town with adequate and appropriate workspace so that the Town can conduct audits in compliance with the provisions of this Section. The Town shall give Contractor or its Subcontractors reasonable advance notice of intended audits. Contractor shall require its Subcontractors to comply with the provisions of this Section by insertion of the requirements hereof in any subcontract pursuant to this Contract. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 33 3.70 E-verify Requirements. To the extent applicable under ARIZ. REV. STAT. § 41-4401, the Contractor and its Subcontractors warrant compliance with all Federal immigration laws and regulations that relate to their employees and their compliance with the E-verify requirements under ARIZ. REV. STAT.§ 23-214(A). Contractor’s or its Subcontractors’ failure to comply with such warranty shall be deemed a material breach of this Contract and may result in the termination of this Contract by the Town. 3.71 Israel. Contractor certifies that it is not currently engaged in, and agrees for the duration of this Agreement that it will not engage in a “boycott,” as that term is defined in ARIZ. REV. STAT. § 35-393, of Israel. 3.72 Right to Inspect Plant. The Town may, at reasonable times, inspect the part of the plant or place of business of the Contractor or Subcontractor that is related to the performance of this Contract. 3.73 Warranties. Contractor warrants to the Town that all Materials and equipment furnished shall be new unless otherwise specified and agreed by the Town and that all Work shall be of first class quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract. If at any time within one year following the date of Final Completion and acceptance of the entire Project (or such longer period as may be provided under warranties for equipment or Materials): (A) any part of the Materials furnished in connection with the Work shall be or become defective due to defects in either labor or Materials, or both, or (B) Contractor’s Work or Materials, or both, are or were not in conformance with original or amended Plans and Specifications, or supplementary shop drawings, then the Contractor shall upon written notice from the Town immediately replace or repair such defective or non- conforming Material or workmanship at no cost to the Town. Contractor further agrees to execute any special guarantees as provided by the Contract or required by law. Contractor shall require similar guarantees from all vendors and from all its Subcontractors. Contractor further agrees, upon written demand of the Town and during the course of construction, to immediately re-execute, repair or replace any Work that fails to conform to the requirements of the Contract, whether caused by faulty Materials or workmanship, or both. In the event Contractor shall fail or refuse to make such change upon the Town’s written demand, the Town shall have the right to have such Work re-executed, repaired or replaced, to withhold from or back charge to Contractor all costs incurred thereby. 3.74 Inspection. All Materials and/or Services are subject to final inspection and acceptance by the Town. Materials and/or Services failing to conform to the Specifications of this Contract will be held at Contractor’s risk and may be returned to the Contractor. If so returned, all costs are the responsibility of the Contractor. Upon discovery of non-conforming Materials or Services, the Town may elect to do any or all of the following by written notice to the Contractor: (A) waive the non-conformance; (B) stop the Work immediately; or (C) bring material or service into compliance and withhold the cost of same from any payments due to the Contractor. 3.75 No Replacement of Defective Tender. Every tender of Materials shall fully comply with all provisions of the Contract. If a tender is made which does not fully conform, this shall constitute a breach of the Contract as a whole. 3.76 Shipment Under Reservation Prohibited. Contractor is not authorized to ship Materials under reservation and no tender of a bill of lading will operate as a tender of the Materials. 3.77 Liens. All Materials, Service or construction shall be free of all liens and, if the Town requests, a formal release of all liens shall be delivered to the Town. 3.78 Licenses. Contractor shall maintain in current status all Federal, State and Local licenses and permits required for the operation of the business conducted by the Contractor as applicable to this Contract. 3.79 Patents and Copyrights. All Services, information, computer program elements, reports and other deliverables, which may be patented or copyrighted and created under this Contract are the property of the Town TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 34 and shall not be used or released by the Contractor or any other person except with the prior written permission of the Town. 3.80 Preparation of Specifications by Persons other than Town Personnel. All Specifications shall seek to promote overall economy for the purposes intended and encourage competition and not be unduly restrictive in satisfying the Town’s needs. No person preparing Specifications shall receive any direct or indirect benefit from the utilization of Specifications, other than fees paid for the preparation of Specifications. 3.81 Advertising. Contractor shall not advertise or publish information concerning this Contract without prior, written consent of the Town. 3.82 Conflicting Terms. In the event of any inconsistency, conflict or ambiguity among the terms of the Contract, the IFB, the Scope of Work, any Town-approved Purchase Order, the Price Sheet, any Town- approved Work Orders, invoices and the Contractor’s response to the IFB, the documents shall govern in the order listed herein. PART D - ALTERNATIVE DISPUTE RESOLUTION 3.83 Scope. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents, except for subsection 3.86(G) below, the alternative dispute resolution (“ADR”) process provided for herein shall be the exclusive means for resolution of claims or disputes arising under, relating to or touching upon the Contract, the interpretation thereof or the performance or breach by any party thereto, including but not limited to original claims or disputes asserted as cross claims, counterclaims, third party claims or claims for indemnity or subrogation, in any threatened or ongoing litigation or arbitration with third parties, if such disputes involve parties to contracts containing this ADR provision. 3.84 Neutral Evaluator, Arbitrators. The Town will select a Neutral Evaluator to serve as set forth in this ADR process, subject to the Contractor’s approval, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld. In the event that the Town and the Contractor are unable to agree upon a Neutral Evaluator, the neutral evaluation process shall be eliminated and the parties shall proceed with the binding arbitration process set forth in Section 3.86 below. The Town and Contractor shall each select an arbitrator to serve as set forth in this ADR process. Each arbitrator selected shall be a member of the State Bar of the State of Arizona and shall have experience in the field of construction law. None of the arbitrators nor any of the arbitrator’s firms shall have presently, or in the past, represented any party to the arbitration. 3.85 Neutral Evaluation Process. If the parties have been unable to resolve the disputes after discussions and partnering, but the parties have agreed to a Neutral Evaluator, the following neutral evaluation process shall be used to resolve any such dispute. A. Notification of Dispute. The Town through its Engineer shall notify the Neutral Evaluator in writing of the existence of a dispute within 10 Days of the Town or the Contractor declaring need to commence the neutral evaluation process. B. Non-Binding Informal Hearing. The Neutral Evaluator shall schedule a non-binding informal hearing of the matter to be held within seven Days from receipt of notification of the existence of a dispute. The Neutral Evaluator may conduct the hearing in such manner as he deems appropriate and shall notify each party of the hearing and of its opportunity to present evidence it believes will resolve the dispute. Each party to the dispute shall be notified by the Neutral Evaluator that it shall submit a written outline of the issues and evidence intended to be introduced at the hearing and the proposed resolution of the dispute to the Neutral Evaluator before the hearing commences. Arbitrators shall not participate in such informal hearing or proceedings process. The Neutral Evaluator is not bound by the rules of evidence when admitting evidence in the hearing and may limit the length of the hearing, the number of witnesses or any evidence introduced to the extent deemed relevant and efficient. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 35 C. Non-Binding Decision. The Neutral Evaluator shall render a non-binding written decision as soon as possible, but not later than five Days after the hearing. 3.86 Binding Arbitration Procedure. The following binding arbitration procedure, except as provided in subsection 3.86(G) below, shall serve as the exclusive method to resolve a dispute if (A) the parties cannot agree to a Neutral Evaluator as set forth in Section 3.84 above or (B) any party chooses not to accept the decision of the Neutral Evaluator. The party requesting binding arbitration shall notify the Neutral Evaluator of a request for arbitration in writing within three business days’ of receipt of the Neutral Evaluator’s decision. If the Contractor requests arbitration or if Contractor rejects the Town’s selection of a Neutral Evaluator, it shall post a cash bond with the Neutral Evaluator in an amount agreed upon by the parties or, in the event of no agreement, the Neutral Evaluator shall establish the amount of the cash bond to defray the cost of the arbitration as set forth in subsection 3.86(M) and the proceeds from the bond shall be allocated in accordance with subsection 3.86(M) by the Arbitration Panel. A. Arbitration Panel. The Arbitration Panel shall consist of three arbitrators: the Town’s appointed arbitrator, the Contractor’s appointed arbitrator and a third arbitrator (or “Neutral Arbitrator”) who shall be selected by the parties’ arbitrators as set forth in subsection 3.86(B) If more than one consultant or contractor is involved in a dispute, the consultants and/or contractors shall agree on an appointee to serve as arbitrator. The Neutral Evaluator shall not participate in the proceedings. B. Selection of Neutral Arbitrator. The parties’ arbitrators shall choose the Neutral Arbitrator within five business days of receipt of notification of a dispute from the Neutral Evaluator. The Neutral Arbitrator shall have the same qualifications as those of the arbitrators set forth in subsection 3.84. In the event that the selected arbitrators cannot agree on the Neutral Arbitrator as set forth above, the Neutral Arbitrator shall be the “Default Neutral Arbitrator,” a person or entity jointly selected by the Town and the Contractor. If the Town and the Contractor cannot agree on a Default Neutral Arbitrator, the Town and the Contractor shall each submit two names to an appropriate judge who shall select one person to serve as the Default Neutral Arbitrator. C. Expedited Hearing. The parties have structured this procedure with the goal of providing for the prompt, efficient and final resolution of all disputes falling within the purview of this ADR process. To that end, any party can petition the Neutral Evaluator to set an expedited hearing. If the Neutral Evaluator determines that the circumstances justify it, the Neutral Evaluator shall contact the selected Arbitration Panel and arrange for scheduling of the arbitration at the earliest possible date. In any event, the hearing of any dispute not expedited will commence as soon as practical but in no event later than 20 Days after notification of request for arbitration having been submitted. This deadline can be extended only with the consent of all the parties to the dispute, or by decision of the Arbitration Panel upon a showing of emergency circumstances. D. Procedure. The Arbitration Panel will select a Chairman and will conduct the hearing in such a manner that will resolve disputes in a prompt, cost efficient manner giving regard to the rights of all parties. Each party shall supply to the Arbitration Panel a written pre-hearing statement which shall contain a brief statement of the nature of the claim or defense, a list of witnesses and exhibits, a brief description of the subject matter of the testimony of each witness who will be called to testify, and an estimate as to the length of time that will be required for the arbitration hearing. The Arbitration Panel shall review and consider the Neutral Evaluator decision, if any. The Chairman shall determine the nature and scope of discovery, if any, and the manner of presentation of relevant evidence consistent with deadlines provided herein and the parties’ objective that disputes be resolved in a prompt and efficient manner. No discovery may be had of any materials or information for which a privilege is recognized by Arizona law. The Chairman upon proper application shall issue such orders as may be necessary and permissible under law to protect confidential, proprietary or sensitive materials or information from public disclosure or other misuse. Any party may make application to the Maricopa County Superior Court to have a protective order entered as may be appropriate to confirm such orders of the Chairman. TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 36 E. Hearing Days. In order to effectuate parties’ goals, the hearing once commenced, will proceed from business day to business day until concluded, absent a showing of emergency circumstances. F. Award. The Arbitration Panel shall, within 10 Days from the conclusion of any hearing, by majority vote issue its award. The award shall include an allocation of fees and costs pursuant to subsection 3.86(M) herein. The award is to be rendered in accordance with this Contract and the laws of the State of Arizona. G. Scope of Award. The Arbitration Panel shall be without authority to award punitive damages, and any such punitive damage award shall be void. The Arbitration Panel shall be without any authority to issue an award against any individual party in excess of twenty percent (20%) of the original Contract amount, but in no event shall any award exceed $2,000,000, exclusive of interest, arbitration fees, costs and attorneys’ fees. If an award is made against any individual party in excess of $100,000, exclusive of interest, arbitration fees, costs and attorneys’ fees, it must be supported by written findings of fact, conclusions of law and a statement as to how damages were calculated. Any claim in excess of twenty percent (20%) of the original Contract amount or in excess $2,000,000 shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the Superior Court of Arizona, Maricopa County. Any party can contest the validity of the amount claimed if an action is filed in the Superior Court. H. Jurisdiction. The Arbitration Panel shall not be bound for jurisdictional purposes by the amount asserted in any party’s claim, but shall conduct a preliminary hearing into the question of jurisdiction upon application of any party at the earliest convenient time, but not later than the commencement of the arbitration hearing. I. Entry of Judgment. Any party can make application to the Maricopa County Superior Court for confirmation of an award, and for entry of judgment on it. J. Severance and Joinder. To reduce the possibility of inconsistent adjudications: (1) the Neutral Evaluator or the Arbitration Panel may, at the request of any party, join and/or sever parties, and/or claims arising under other contracts containing this ADR provision, and (2) the Neutral Evaluator, on his own authority, or the Arbitration Panel may, on its own authority, join or sever parties and/or claims subject to this ADR process as they deem necessary for a just resolution of the dispute, consistent with the parties’ goal of the prompt and efficient resolution of disputes, provided, however, that the Contractor, Architect/Engineer and Project professionals shall not be joined as a party to any claim made by a Contractor. Nothing herein shall create the right by any party to assert claims against another party not germane to the Contract or not recognized under the substantive law applicable to the dispute. Neither the Neutral Evaluator nor the Arbitration Panel are authorized to join to the proceeding parties not in privity with the Town. Contractor cannot be joined to any pending arbitration proceeding, without Contractor’s express written consent, unless Contractor is given the opportunity to participate in the selection of the non-Town appointed arbitrator. K. Appeal. Any party may appeal (1) errors of law by the Arbitration Panel if, but only if, the errors arise in an award in excess of $100,000, (2) the exercise by the Chairman or Arbitration Panel of any powers contrary to or inconsistent with the Contract or (3) on the basis of any of the grounds provided in ARIZ. REV. STAT. § 12-1512, as amended. Appeals shall be to the Maricopa County Superior Court within 15 Days of entry of the award. The standard of review in such cases shall be that applicable to the consideration of a motion for judgment notwithstanding the verdict, and the Maricopa County Superior Court shall have the authority to confirm, vacate, modify or remand an award appealed under this Section, but not to conduct a trial, entertain the introduction of new evidence or conduct a hearing de novo. L. Uniform Arbitration Act. Except as otherwise provided herein, binding arbitration pursued under this provision shall be governed by the Uniform Arbitration Act as codified in Arizona in ARIZ. REV. STAT. § 12-1501, et seq. M. Fees and Costs. Each party shall bear its own fees and costs in connection with any informal hearing before the Neutral Evaluator. All fees and costs associated with any arbitration before the TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PW2017-01 2942786.1 37 Arbitration Panel, including without limitation the Arbitration Panelists’ fee, and the prevailing party’s reasonable attorneys’ fees, expert witness fees and costs, will be paid by the non-prevailing party, except as provided for herein. In no event shall any Arbitrator’s hourly fees be awarded in an amount in excess of $200 per hour and (1) costs shall not include any travel expenses in excess of mileage at the rate paid by the Town, not to exceed a one way trip of 150 miles, and (2) all travel expenses, including meals, shall be reimbursed pursuant to the travel policy of the Town in effect at the time of the hearing. The determination of prevailing and non-prevailing parties, and the appropriate allocation of fees and costs, will be included in the award by the Arbitration Panel. Fees for the Neutral Evaluator shall be divided evenly between the Town and the Contractor. N. Confidentiality. Any proceeding initiated under ADR shall be deemed confidential to the maximum extent allowed by Arizona law and no party shall, except for disclosures to a party’s attorneys or accountants, make any disclosure related to the disputed matter or to the outcome of any proceeding except to the extent required by law, or to seek interim equitable relief, or to enforce an agreement reached by the parties or an award made hereunder. O. Equitable Litigation. Notwithstanding any other provision of ADR to the contrary, any party can petition the Maricopa County Superior Court for interim equitable relief as necessary to preserve the status quo and prevent immediate and irreparable harm to a party or to the Program pending resolution of a dispute pursuant to ADR provided herein. No court may order any permanent injunctive relief except as may be necessary to enforce an order entered by the Arbitration Panel. The fees and costs incurred in connection with any such equitable proceeding shall be determined and assessed in ADR. P. Change Order. Any award in favor of the Contractor against the Town or in favor of the Town against the Contractor shall be reduced to a Change Order and executed by the parties in accordance with the award and the provisions of this Contract. Q. Merger and Bar. Any claim asserted pursuant to this ADR process shall be deemed to include all claims, demands, and requests for compensation for costs and losses or other relief, including the extension of the Contract performance period which reasonably should or could have been brought against any party that was or could have been brought into this ADR process, with respect to the subject claim. The Arbitration Panel shall apply legal principles commonly known as merger and bar to deny any claim or claims against any party regarding which claim or claims recovery has been sought or should have been sought in a previously adjudicated claim for an alleged cost, loss, breach, error, or omission. R. Inclusion in Other Contracts. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Town in efforts to include this ADR provision in all other Project contracts. Subject to Contractor’s reasonable agreement, the Contractor agrees that any modification to this ADR provision that is included in the construction or other contracts shall also apply to the Contractor. It is the intent of the parties that any changes to this ADR provision in later contracts will be evolutionary and designed to incorporate the terms of this ADR provision without material changes to the substance or procedure of this ADR provision. ARTICLE IV – SPECIAL CONDITIONS 4.1 Post-Award Substitution Process. See Exhibit A, Specifications Section 01 25 00 (Substitution Procedures). [REMAINDER OF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK] 2942786.1 EXHIBIT A TO INVITATION FOR BIDS NO. PW2017-01 [Specifications, Plans/Construction Drawings/Reference Documents] See following pages. Specifications and Special Bidding Instructions June 13, 2017 New Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 VOLUME 1 H&C #: 2016-003 For: Town of Fountain Hills HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1 SPECIFICATIONS GROUP General Requirements Subgroup VOLUME 1 DIVISION 00 – SPECIAL BIDDING INSTRUCTIONS 00 31 40 EPCOR PRE-QUALIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 SUMMARY 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES 01 23 00 ALTERNATES 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 42 00 REFERENCES 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Facility Construction Subgroup DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 21 13 CONSTRUCTION STAKING 02 41 00 DEMOLITION DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 05 59 03 20 00 PENETRATING COLLOIDAL CONCRETE TREATMENT CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 35 00 POLISHED CONCRETE DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 05 15 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 04 05 23 MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04 05 26 CMU INTEGRAL WATER REPELLANT 04 22 00 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT 04 70 00 MASONRY SIMULATED BRICK AND STONE DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 10 00 STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-2 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 16 00 SHEATHING 06 41 16 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 11 10 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 18 16 VEHICULAR TRAFFIC COATING 07 19 00 WATER REPELLENTS 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 19 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 07 24 00 DIRECT FINISH SYSTEM FOR SOFFITS AND CEILINGS 07 24 19 WATER DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIER 07 32 16 CONCRETE ROOF TILES 07 52 16 SBS – MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 57 00 COATED FOAMED ROOFING 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 11 13 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 35 13 FOLDING GLASS DOORS 08 36 00 OVERHEAD SECTIONAL GARAGE DOOR 08 37 00 BI-FOLD ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATED DOORS 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 08 80 00 GLAZING DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 24 53 STUCCO SYSTEM 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 30 00 TILING 09 30 13 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD 09 51 23 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 66 00 PROTECT-ALL® COMMERCIAL FLOORING SPECIFICATION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-3 09 77 33 FRP WALL PANELS 09 91 00 PAINTING VOLUME 2 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 00 00 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 26 00 CORNER GUARDS 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 40 00 SIGNAGE 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 52 13 PROJECTION SCREEN DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 17 10 FLASHING BEACON TRANSMITTER CONTROL 13 17 15 PHOTOVALTAIC POWERED FIRE STATION SENSOR 13 17 20 PHOTOVALTAIC-POWERED FLASHING BEACON DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 27 20 00 FIRE STATION ALERTING SYSTEM DIVISION 28 - ELECTRICAL 28 31 00 FIRE ALARM DESCRIPTION DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 00 00 SITE PREPARATION 31 01 00 EARTHWORK 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 31 16 TERMITE CONTROL DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 12 16 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 CONCRETE FIRE LANE AND CONCRETE PAVING 32 16 00 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS, SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 32 31 19 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 84 00 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 32 90 00 LANDSCAPE PLANTING DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 33 10 00 WATER LINE & FIRE LINE CONSTRUCTION 33 30 00 SEWER LINE CONSTRUCTION H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-4 33 40 00 STORM DRAIN CONSTRUCTION APPENDIX END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENT 00 31 40 EPCOR PRE-QUALIFICATIONS The attached instructions for pre-qualifications with EPCOR has been prepared for the use of the Contractor and its sub-contractors for the construction of the Project. The following Contractors are Prequalified per the instructions provided herein: • Kinkaid Civil Construction • Degan Construction • Markham Contracting • Carume Contracting • Talis Construction • J Wise Corporation • T&T Construction If a different underground waterline subcontractor is selected, said subcontractor will required to be approved prior to bid submission by submitting the following items: • Company Biography, • List of previously completed and similar projects with reference contact information (name, phone number and email), and • One-page resume for key personnel. Please be advised that the following HSE form must be submitted for any underground waterline subcontractor selected for the project. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 EPCOR PRE-QUALIFICATION 00 31 40-1 Page 1 of 2                 Contractor Pre‐Qualification Overview   Pre-qualification for High-Risk Work at EPCOR EPCOR’s Contractor Registry Provider EPCOR’s contractor approval process helps us manage the health, safety and environmental impacts of our business for our employees, customers, contractors, vendors and the communities in which we work. To support this, EPCOR has engaged PICS to help manage the approval process of contractors and vendors who may perform high-risk work. PICS will not only help you efficiently gather the information required to maintain your qualified status, it will also help you enhance your own HSE programs, and add your firm to its inventory of pre- qualified contractors and suppliers for potential business with other like-minded companies. PICS is a centralized online contractor registration and pre-qualification system for many industries in all provinces across Canada and globally. PICS provides a dedicated customer service representative who will educate and support you to efficiently gather the information and documents required to determine and maintain your qualified status. Other companies searching for your specific type of goods or services will be able to find business information and contact you for potential opportunities. Registration Process If you are an existing or potential contractor performing high-risk work for EPCOR, our Procurement department will ask you to complete the following steps to obtain or maintain your approval status with us: 1. Register Online — Start by registering on the PICS web page: www.picsauditing.com. Please indicate that you would like EPCOR to access your prequalification information by selecting EPCOR as your client site (if you are already registered in PICS, log in to your account and add EPCOR as a client site). Questions related to the registration process can be directed to a PICS Registration Specialist at (877) 725-3022 ext. 1. Page 2 of 2                 Contractor Pre‐Qualification Overview   2. Complete the Pre-Qualification Form — The first item of the Contractor Safety Review process requires a contractor/subcontractor to complete and submit a Pre-Qualification Form (PQF) and complete the Annual Update sections (or update your PQF if you are already a member of PICS). 3. Insurance — PICS will verify insurance certificates to EPCOR’s minimum insurance criteria and work with the contractor and/or the contractors’ agents to correct gaps in coverage and maintain documentation. PICS will also notify contractors of expiring certificates. 4. Complete audits if required — HSE High Risk contractors may be manually audited. If you are already a member of PICS, you should log into your account to add the appropriate EPCOR account as a client site, and update your company’s information.                         Health, Safety, & Environment   Bidder Information Form  Healthy, Safety, & Environment Bidder Information Health, Safety, & Environment (HSE) Bidder Information A. ACCREDITATIONS 1. Have any of your H&S audits come under review by a regulator (OSHA, EPA, etc…) in the jurisdiction where the work is to be performed?  Yes  No Have additional H&S audits ever been ordered by the regulator due to OH&S infractions?  Yes  No B. WORKER’S COMPENSATION List your workers’ compensation experience modifier rate (EMR) for the previous four years starting with the current year (If your industry is exempt from the requirement to participate in a Workers’ Compensation jurisdiction, please attach the supporting documentation to establish this exemption.) INDUSTRY CODE: ____________________ INDUSTRY CLASSIFICATION: _____________________________________________________________________________ YEAR Current Year Previous Year 1 Previous Year 2 Previous Year 3 INDUSTRY RATE _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ CORPORATE RATE _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ % DISCOUNT (or) _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ % SURCHARGE _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ If the Proponent Rate is higher than the Industry Rate, please attach additional information explaining why this has occurred and what measures have been taken by the Proponent to reduce the rate, if any. C. HEALTH AND SAFETY PERFORMANCE 2. Please use the previous four years’ injury and illness records to complete the following (starting with the current year): Year Current Year Previous Year 1 Previous Year 2 Previous Year 3 a) NUMBER OF EMPLOYEE HOURS WORKED _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ b) NUMBER OF FATALITIES _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ c) NUMBER OF LOST TIME INCIDENTS (cases resulting in time loss beyond the date of injury) _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ d) NUMBER OF MEDICAL TREATMENT INJURIES (cases resulting in care of a medical practitioner beyond first aid treatment) _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ e) NUMBER OF OTHER RECORDABLE CASES/RESTRICTED DUTY CASES (cases not classified as medical treatment or lost time but resulting in worker unable to perform routine functions) _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ TOTAL RECORDABLE INJURIES (FATALITY + LOST TIME + MEDICAL TREATMENT + RESTRICTED DUTY INJURIES) _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ OSHA RECORDABLE INCIDENT RATE (ORIR): TOTAL RECORDABLE INJURIES X 200,000 TOTAL EMPLOYEE HOURS WORKED _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ NUMBER OF LOST WORK DAYS _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ LOST WORK SEVERITY RATE: LOST WORK DAYS X 200,000 _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ Healthy, Safety, & Environment Bidder Information TOTAL EMPLOYEE HOURS WORKED NUMBER OF RESTRICTED WORK DAYS _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ RESTRICTED WORK SEVERITY RATE: RESTRICTED WORK DAYS X 200,000 TOTAL EMPLOYEE HOURS WORKED _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ NUMBER OF RECORDABLE VEHICLE INCIDENTS (vehicle incidents resulting in injuries or damage >$1000) _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ NUMBER OF MILES DRIVEN _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________  Reference standards for statistical reporting are:  OSHA 29 CFR Part 1904 D. POLICIES & PROCEDURES Do you have a written Health and Safety (H&S) Management Program? If yes, provide copy of your Health & Safety Management Program.  Yes  No 1. Management Leadership and Organizational Commitment Does your H&S Management Program contain a written declaration of your commitment to health and safety signed and dated by the Senior Officer or Director of the Proponent?  Yes  No Does your H&S Management Program state the overall goals and objectives of your health and safety program(s)?  Yes  No Does your H&S Management Program outline responsibilities of management, workers and contractors regarding health and safety at the work site?  Yes  No Does the Proponent have dedicated safety personnel whose sole responsibility is to ensure compliance with OH & S legislation and related regulations?  Yes  No 2. Hazard Identification and Assessment Does your H&S Management Program have a process to identify health and safety hazards encountered in your industry?  Yes  No Are all the hazards documented in writing and periodically updated?  Yes  No Are the hazards evaluated according to risk?  Yes  No 3. Hazard Control Does your H&S Management Program establish measures to control health and safety hazards encountered in your Industry?  Yes  No Do you have written safe work practices and procedures for hazardous jobs and operations?  Yes  No Do you provide the necessary personnel protective equipment?  Yes  No Does your H&S Management Program establish a process for maintaining tools and equipment and preventing the use of defective tools and equipment?  Yes  No 4. Ongoing Inspections Does your H&S Management Program establish requirements to perform routine job site safety inspections?  Yes  No If Yes, who conducts the job site inspections? ________________________________ What is the inspection frequency? _________________________________________ Healthy, Safety, & Environment Bidder Information Do you have a written inspection checklist?  Yes  No 5. Qualifications, Orientation and Training Does your H&S Management Program establish requirements for worker training and qualifications?  Yes  No Do you have an orientation program to train to new employees?  Yes  No Do you provide training for dedicated safety personnel?  Yes  No Do you provide employees with jurisdiction approved first aid training  Yes  No Do you provide training to employees on fire protection and prevention?  Yes  No Do you provide training to employees on confined space entry?  Yes  No Do you provide training to employees on WHMIS?  Yes  No Do you provide training to employees on the selection, use and care of personal protective equipment?  Yes  No Do you provide training to employees on hazard identification assessment and control?  Yes  No 6. Emergency Response Do you have a written emergency response plan for each work site appropriate for the hazards at the site?  Yes  No Do you provide training to employees on emergency procedures?  Yes  No 7. Accident and Incident Investigation Do you have a written procedure that requires the reporting of all incidents, illness and near misses? Please note that a “near miss” is classified as an incident that could have, but did not, result in unintended harm or damage.  Yes  No Do you have a written procedure for the investigation of incidents, illnesses and near misses?  Yes  No 8. Program Administration Do you have a system for communicating health and safety issues to the employees?  Yes  No Do you hold job site safety meetings for all employees?  Yes  No If Yes, how often? _______________________________________ Are records of health and safety meetings kept?  Yes  No Has your H&S Management Program ever been audited internally?  Yes  No If Yes, when was the most recent audit and by who? __________________________________________________________________ Has your H&S Management Program ever been audited by an external party?  Yes  No If Yes, when was the most recent audit and by who? __________________________________________________________________ E. GENERAL 1. Regulatory Has the Proponent received a regulatory agency stop work order or been investigated by a regulatory body in the last three years in respect of its OH&S record or conduct? If yes, attach details and state whether all actions required by the regulatory body are completed. Are there any HSE related judgments, claims or suits outstanding against you?   Yes Yes   No No 2. Drug and Alcohol Do you have an alcohol and drug policy?  Yes  No Healthy, Safety, & Environment Bidder Information 3. Incident Reporting Is the Proponent able to provide immediate incident notification and follow-up written investigation reports to EPCOR for all incidents involving the Contractor which occur on EPCOR projects? Is the Proponent able to report monthly and at job completion of the contract, all incidents, recordable injuries, injury duration and hours worked for both the Proponent’s employees and sub-contractors which occurred on EPCOR projects?   Yes Yes   No No 4. Competency & Training Are you able to provide copies of individual employee certification and training records upon request?  Yes  No 5. Subcontractors: Do you evaluate the ability of subcontractors to comply with applicable health and safety requirements as part of the selection process?  Yes  No Do you include your subcontractors in: Audits  Yes  No Health and Safety Meetings  Yes  No Health and Safety Orientation  Yes  No Inspections  Yes  No Do your subcontractors have a written H&S Management Program?  Yes  No Do you use health and safety performance criteria in the selection of subcontractors?  Yes  No 6. Are you able to show documented evidence of equipment inspection and maintenance?  Yes  No Are you able to show documented evidence of non-destructive testing where required by legislation?  Yes  No  N/A 7. What is your discipline policy for non-compliance with any parts of the H&S Management Program? ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ F. ENVIRONMENT 1. SPILLS – release of liquid pollutants to land or water that is reportable to government authorities, regulators, or other agencies. Provide the number of reportable spills within the: Current Year Previous Year 1 Previous Year 2 Previous Year 3 2. COMPLIANCE INCIDENTS – non-compliance to legislation that is reportable to government authorities, regulators, or other agencies. Provide the number of reportable non-compliances within the: Current Year Previous Year 1 Previous Year 2 Previous Year 3 3. Do you have an Environmental Policy and supporting Management Program? If yes, is it certified and audited? List standard to which it is certified (e.g. ISO 14001, etc.): ______________________________________________________________________  Yes  No Healthy, Safety, & Environment Bidder Information Provide copy of the policy and overview of the Environmental Management Program. 4. Do you have a Waste Management Program?  Yes  No H&C SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1 SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Access to site. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 1. Project Location: B. Owner: C. Architect: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue, Suite 306 Phoenix, AZ 85020 D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1. Structural Engineering: Broderick Engineering 2. Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Engineering: Maven Engineering 3. Landscape Architect: Campbell Collaborative 4. Civil Engineering: Montgomery Engineering E. Contractor: H&C SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 2 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: B. A new 9,500 square foot, fire station for the Town of Fountain Hills. END OF SECTION 01 10 00 H&C ALLOWANCES 01 21 00 - 1 SECTION 01 21 00 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Lump-sum allowances. 2. Contingency allowances. 3. Testing and inspecting allowances. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting. 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date (30 days after Notice to Proceed) after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. H&C ALLOWANCES 01 21 00 - 2 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. 1.7 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES A. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials selected by Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. B. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed. 1.8 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. B. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins. C. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.9 TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCES A. Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost of engaging testing agencies, actual tests and inspections, and reporting results. B. Costs of services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the allowance. C. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the testing and inspecting allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.10 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. END OF SECTION 01 21 00 H&C ADD ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 1 SECTION 01 23 00 – ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. H&C ADD ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 2 1.5 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Add Alternate No. 1 1. Alternate Bid: Provide Synthetic Stone Veneer as indicated on drawings and specifications. 2. Base Bid: Include synthetic stone veneer at front entry elevation along Fountain Hills Blvd and entry sign. Include synthetic stucco system Color P6 as indicated on the interior elevations. B. Add Alternate No. 2 1. Alternate Bid: Include faux painted tube steel accent outriggers rafter tails and outlookers as indicated on drawings and specifications. 2. Base Bid: Exterior grade Faux Wood Square Cut Outlookers and Square Rafter Tails with sizes and style as indicated on drawings. a. Manufacturer: Faux Wood Beams or approved equal b. Material: Polyurethane c. Texture: Rough Sawn C. Add Alternate No. 3 1. Alternate Bid: Bi-folding apparatus bay doors with full light as indicated on the specifications. 2. Base Bid: Overhead sectional doors with vision panel as indicated on drawings and specifications. D. Add Alternate No. 4 1. Alternate Bid: Full height interior ceramic tile walls as indicated on drawings. 2. Base Bid: Five foot 4 inch height interior ceramic tile walls with accent bands located as approved by Architect. E. Add Alternate No. 5 1. Alternate Bid: Tube steel window awning cover as indicated on drawings. 2. Base Bid: Aluminum prefabricated awning system as indicated within specification. F. Add Alternate No. 5 1. Alternate Bid: Tube steel base patio awning cover and CMU base accent with synthetic stone veneer as indicated on drawings. 2. Base Bid: Aluminum patio cover system to match existing design. G. Deductive Alternate No. 6 1. Alternate Bid: 6’-0” maximum height VERSA-LOK retaining wall system or approved equal. a. Engineering: To be included b. Style: As selected by Architect. c. Base Wash Wall: Concrete rip-wrap and concrete water protection system to be engineered to comply with current drawing and specification requirements. H&C ADD ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 3 2. Base Bid: Retaining wall as indicated on drawings and specifications. H. Add Alternate No. 7 1. Alternate Bid: Goodmans Furniture design as indicated in the drawings and specifications. 2. Base Bid: Owner selected equipment and built-in casework. a. Built-In Casework: 1) Dorm Lockers 2) Dorm Work Desk 3) Dorm Captain Bed 4) Tackboard & Marker Board 5) Storage Workbench 6) SCBA Workbench 7) Office Desk 8) Bio-Hazard Stainless Steel Wash Sink and Board I. Add Alternate No. 8 1. Alternate Bid: Air VAC-911 exhaust removal system with filters as indicated on drawings. 2. Base Bid: Plymovent Under Carriage Rail System w/ Magnetic Grabber Source Capture system at each vehicle tailpipe or approved equal. Plymovent Vertical Stack Rail System to be located at overhead exhaust vehicles with Magnetic Grabber Source Capture system at each vehicle exhaust or approved equal. END OF SECTION 01 23 00 H&C SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 1 SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form bound in Project Manual. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. H&C SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 2 d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from FM, UL and local codes. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within fifteen days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 30 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. H&C SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 3 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. END OF SECTION 01 25 00 H&C SUBSTITUTION REQUEST DOCUMENT 00 43 25 – SUBSTITUTION REQUEST kjhkjhkjhjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjl;sdfjl;kasjdlgsjafklajsdflkjsadlfjaklsjdfkljasdlkjfsadljfklsfjweoipqurlasdvmklasjdfklasjdfilaj;seijfrkasljfklsdjflkjasldjfl;asdjf;kjasfjsldjfeikjflsdkmvkasljfdklasjdklfjsdkljfklsjdfkljslkdjflakjd;lfj;adlfjklsdjflkjsldkfjlkasjlfsdjlkfsdflsdjlfkjsdkfjasdkfjadjfsdjfjsdfjlsdf;lsakdfjklasdfjksldjflksdjfkljsdlkfjslkdjfklasjdflkjsdlkjflakjalksfdjaklsjdfklshjadflkjasdlfj klaajsdfkajsdkjfk kfjaslkdjfklajskfjaksjdfklj kfljakljf jlkasjal; Project: ____________________________ Substitution Request Number: ______________________ ____________________________ From: ________________________________________ To: ____________________________ Date: ________________________________________ ____________________________ A/E Project Number: ____________ ;asldfjksl;dfjkls;ldjf l;asjdfalskjdfklasjdf lzks;djlkfjsd;lfakj;flkj jlaksjdfklasjdfklajsdflk alksjdfklasjdfklajsdflkj klajsdfkajsdfkjasdfjaskjfdkasljdfklsjdf;lsajdflklsdaf;jf Specification Title: ____________________ Description: ____________________________________ Section: __________ Page: ___________ Article/Paragraph: _______________________________ Lkjalksjdflkasjdflkjas;dlfjas;ldk jalksjdflaksjdfklajsdlkfjasklfjasldjf lkajdfklasjdflkjasdfkjasljdfasklj kjsdals;dfjg Proposed Substitution: ___________________________________________________________________ Manufacturer: _________________ Address: _________________________ Phone: ______________ Trade Name: ____________________________________________________ Model No.: ____________ Attached data includes sufficient information, descriptive brochures, drawings, performance and test data, samples or other data as is necessary for complete evaluation and indicates by direct comparison how the proposed substitution differs from that specified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The Contractor shall provide for redesign necessitated by the substitution. alskjdflk;asjdflkjasdljakf ;lkasjdlf;kjasdljfalksjdfklajsdflkjasdlfjalskfj a;lskjdflaksjdflkajsdfljk jasjfas;djf The Undersigned certifies: • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. • Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. • Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. • Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs by the substitution. alskjdflk;asjdflkjasdljakf ;lkasjdlf;kjasdljfalksjdfklajsdflkjasdlfjalskfj a;lskjdflaksjdflkajsdfljk jasjfas;djf Submitted by: ________________________________________________________________________ Signed by: ________________________________________________________________________ Firm: ________________________________________________________________________ Address: ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ Telephone: ________________________________________________________________________ alskjdflk;asjdflkjasdljakf ;lkasjdlf;kjasdljfalksjdfklajsdflkjasdlfjalskfj a;lskjdflaksjdflkajsdfljk jasjfas;djf Supporting Data Attached: Drawings Product Data Samples Tests Reports _______ alskjdflk;asjdflkjasdljakf ;lkasjdlf;kjasdljfalksjdfklajsdflkjasdlfjalskfj a;lskjdflaksjdflkajsdfljk jasjfas;djf A/E’s REVIEW AND ACT ION Substitution approved (Include in Addendum). Substitution approved as noted (Include in Addendum with notation). Substitution rejected due to lack of information. Substitution rejected due to evaluation that it is not equivalent to specified product. Substitution Request received too late. Signed by: Date: alskjdflk;asjdflkjasdljakf ;lkasjdlf;kjasdljfalksjdfklajsdflkjasdlfjalskfj a;lskjdflaksjdflkajsdfljk jasjfas;djf H&C PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1 SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project Web site. 5. Project meetings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. H&C PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 2 B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. c. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. d. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. H&C PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 3 B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items. 6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. 7. Electrical Work: Show the following: a. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire- alarm locations. b. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations. 8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following: a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. 9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements: 1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings. 2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File (PDF) format. H&C PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 4 3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in AutoCAD 2015 and Autodesk Revit 2015. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of agreement form acceptable to Owner and Architect. 1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: Form bound in Project Manual. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven (7) working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. H&C PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 5 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal. a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log at weekly construction meetings. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct weekly construction progress meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 30 days after execution of the Agreement. H&C PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 6 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal process and procedures. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. END OF SECTION 01 31 00 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION / INTERPRETATION Project: R.F.I Number: __________________________ From: _________________________________ To: Hunt & Caraway Architects, Ltd Date: _________________________________ Specification Section: Paragraph: Drawing Reference: Detail Request: * Requested Date/Time for Response: Signed by: Response: Attachments Response From: To: * Date Rec’d: * Date Ret’d: Signed by: Copies: Owner Consultants _________ _________ _________ File • Contractor shall allow up to 5 working days review and response time for RFI'S, unless review is required of multiple consultants, then the review and response period shall be 7 working days. (See Section 01 26 13. H&C CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1 SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 2. Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect. C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. H&C CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 2 D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. 2. As one (1) file. B. Startup construction schedule. 1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. D. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. E. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. F. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. H&C CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final completion. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 30 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's Substantial Completion walk-thru and administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 5. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. H&C CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 4 2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. B. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 45 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time. C. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. H&C CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 5 i. Testing. j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. 5. Cost- and Resource-Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain Architect's approval prior to assigning costs to fabrication and delivery activities. Assign costs under main subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project record documents, and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. a. Each activity cost shall reflect an appropriate value subject to approval by Architect. b. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum. D. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values). F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. H&C CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 6 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. 2.4 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Architect within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. H&C CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule 2 days before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01 32 00 H&C SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1 SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, H&C SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 2 fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. H&C SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 3 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 6. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor. a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following information: 1) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Destination (To:). 4) Source (From:). 5) Name and address of Architect. 6) Name of Construction Manager. 7) Name of Contractor. 8) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 9) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 10) Category and type of submittal. 11) Submittal purpose and description. 12) Specification Section number and title. 13) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. 14) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 15) Indication of full or partial submittal. 16) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. 17) Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 18) Remarks. 19) Signature of transmitter. D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. H&C SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 4 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks. 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. e. Date E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. H&C SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 5 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of all approved submittals filed by specification group divisions on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. Subcontractors to review approved submittals on site prior to starting work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect's FTP site specifically established for Project. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 3. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 4. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. H&C SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 6 B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. H&C SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 7 D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Contractor shall maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit three original printed full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: reduced scale mock-ups, partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample sets; remainder will be returned to Contractor to retain. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. H&C SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 8 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. F. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. G. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. H. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. I. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. K. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. L. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. M. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note deviations from project specifications or details, corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp and Project Superintendent signature and date before submitting to Architect. H&C SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 9 B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. END OF SECTION 01 33 00 H&C QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1 SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for testing and inspecting allowances. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General Contractor Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with contract document requirements. B. General Contractor Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. H&C QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 2 1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies. 2. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling MP&E rough-in. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria and manufacturer warranties. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects in this local area similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. H&C QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 3 1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting. B. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: Submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. H&C QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 4 F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTME 329 and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect 14 days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. J. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup as required for systems coordination. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting materials. K. Room Mockups: Construct room mockups incorporating required materials and assemblies, finished according to requirements. Provide required lighting and additional lighting where required to enable Architect to evaluate quality of the Work. Provide room mockups as required for systems coordination. H&C QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 5 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. B. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency and special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and re-inspecting corrected work. 7. Contractor shall coordinate site visits with testing agency and special inspector for all special tests and special inspection. 8. Contractor shall keep on site hard copies of all special inspection reports and special test data. H&C QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 6 PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 00 "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 01 40 00 H&C REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1 SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. H&C REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 2 B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabc.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (202) 624-5800 www.transportation.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.americanbearings.org ACI American Concrete Institute (248) 848-3700 (Formerly: ACI International) www.concrete.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The) (703) 524-8800 www.ahrinet.org H&C REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 3 AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (607) 256-3313 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (See AHRI) ARI American Refrigeration Institute (See AHRI) ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE) H&C REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 4 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- Conditioning Engineers (800) 527-4723 www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Safety Engineers (The) (847) 699-2929 www.asse.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9500 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (202) 628-6380 www.atis.org AWEA American Wind Energy Association (202) 383-2500 www.awea.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636 www.awinet.org AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (403) 453-7387 www.awmac.com AWPA American Wood Protection Association (205) 733-4077 (Formerly: American Wood-Preservers' Association) www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.gobrick.com BICSI BICSI, Inc. (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 H&C REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 5 BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association) www.bifma.com BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org BOCA BOCA (Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.) (See ICC) BWF Badminton World Federation 60 3 9283 7155 (Formerly: International Badminton Federation) www.bwfbadminton.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 www.electricity.ca CEA Consumer Electronics Association (866) 858-1555 www.ce.org (703) 907-7600 CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CFSEI Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute (866) 465-4732 www.cfsei.org (202) 263-4488 CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (404) 622-0073 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (703) 724-1128 www.pbmdf.com H&C REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 6 CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) (706) 278-3176 www.carpet-rug.org CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523 www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (800) 328-6306 www.crsi.org (847) 517-1200 CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) 463-6727 www.csa.ca (416) 747-4000 CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 www.csa-international.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org CWC Composite Wood Council (See CPA) DASMA Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.dasma.com DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org ECA Electronic Components Association (703) 907-8024 www.ec-central.org ECAMA Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association (See ECA) EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (See TIA) EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (703) 538-1616 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org H&C REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 7 ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 (Electrostatic Discharge Association) www.esda.org ESTA Entertainment Services and Technology Association (See PLASA) EVO Efficiency Valuation Organization (415) 367-3643 www.evo-world.org 44 20 88 167 857 FIBA Fédération Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00 (The International Basketball Federation) www.fiba.com FIVB Fédération Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 45 (The International Volleyball Federation) www.fivb.org FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC (781) 762-4300 www.fmglobal.com FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) www.fmglobal.com FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. (407) 671-3772 www.floridaroof.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council U.S. (612) 353-4511 www.fscus.org GA Gypsum Association (301) 277-8686 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org HI Hydraulic Institute (973) 267-9700 www.pumps.org HI/GAMA Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association (See AHRI) H&C REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 8 HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IAPSC International Association of Professional Security Consultants (415) 536-0288 www.iapsc.org IAS International Approval Services (See CSA) ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org (202) 370-1800 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICPA International Cast Polymer Alliance (703) 525-0511 www.icpa-hq.org ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IES Illuminating Engineering Society (212) 248-5000 (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America) www.ies.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (See IES) IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 981-0100 www.iest.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org H&C REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 9 IGSHPA International Ground Source Heat Pump Association (405) 744-5175 www.igshpa.okstate.edu ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com Intertek Intertek Group (800) 967-5352 (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA) www.intertek.com ISA International Society of Automation (The) (919) 549-8411 (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society) www.isa.org ISAS Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The) (See ISA) ISFA International Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 (Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association) (801) 341-7360 www.isfanow.org ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (See ISFA) ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (See CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MCA Metal Construction Association (847) 375-4718 www.metalconstruction.org MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (888) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org H&C REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 10 MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MMPA Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 (Formerly: Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association) (530) 661-9591 www.wmmpa.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com (604) 298-7578 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. (703) 281-6613 www.mss-hq.org NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (630) 942-6591 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6223 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org H&C REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 11 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (269) 488-6382 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFPA NFPA International (See NFPA) NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.nhla.com (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (See NWFA) NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association (888) 516-8585 www.nomma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSPE National Society of Professional Engineers (703) 684-2800 www.nspe.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com H&C REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 12 NWFA National Wood Flooring Association (800) 422-4556 www.nwfa.org (636) 519-9663 PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PLASA PLASA (212) 244-1505 (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association) www.plasa.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (706) 882-3833 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (925) 935-1499 www.redwoodinspection.com SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 (Society of Automotive Engineers) (724) 776-4841 www.sae.org SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC) SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (800) 542-5040 www.scte.org (610) 363-6888 SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (877) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com (516) 294-5424 SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE) SIA Security Industry Association (866) 817-8888 www.siaonline.org (703) 683-2075 SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 293-1995 www.steeljoist.org H&C REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 13 SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (773) 636-0672 www.smainfo.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (703) 803-2980 www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SRCC Solar Rating and Certification Corporation (321) 638-1537 www.solar-rating.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association (847) 681-1868 www.swpa.org TCA Tilt-Up Concrete Association (319) 895-6911 www.tilt-up.org TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 (Formerly: Tile Council of America) www.tileusa.com TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.tema.org TIA Telecommunications Industry Association (703) 907-7700 (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance) www.tiaonline.org H&C REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 14 TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance (See TIA) TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 649-5555 TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC) UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539 www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (800) 795-1747 www.usgbc.org USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488 www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.wcmanet.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 www.wdma.com (312) 321-6802 WI Woodwork Institute (916) 372-9943 (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) www.wicnet.org H&C REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 15 WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (See MMPA) WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 938-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org END OF SECTION 01 42 00 H&C TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1 SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. H&C TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 2 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts[, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails. B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, Construction Manager, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of [12] twelve individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. H&C TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 3 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes. H&C TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 4 F. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated. G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. H. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas as indicated within construction limits indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. H&C TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 5 E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 01 73 00 "Execution." H. Temporary Elevator Use: Use of elevators is not permitted I. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. J. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with[ requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent and requirements specified in Section 31 11 00 "Clearing and Grubbing." D. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent and comply with requirements specified in Civil plans and specs E. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. H&C TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 6 F. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 56 39 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection." G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. H&C TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 7 a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective. b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect. c. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns, including over - compacted turf on playfield areas. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01 50 00 H&C PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1 SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Section 01 23 00 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 4. Section 01 42 00 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. H&C PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 2 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration or high temperatures, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. H&C PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 3 C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. H&C PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 4 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. H&C PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 5 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. END OF SECTION 01 60 00 H&C APPENDIX "F" 01 77 00 - 1 01 77 00 - APPENDIX “F” LIST OF EXTRA MATERIALS FURNISHED TO OWNER A. Contractor to verify material quantity and item selection with Owner before acceptable of extra material furnished to Owner. Specification Section Material Quantity 07 11 10 Water Proofing Paint One gallon of each type and color. 07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing One gallon of each type and color. 07 19 00 Water Repellant One gallon of each type and color. 08 71 0 0 Finish Hardware Per hardware spec. owner stock set 09 30 00 Ceramic & Porcelain One carton of each Tile type, size & color. 09 51 23 Acoustical Ceiling Four cartons of each Tile type and size. 09 68 13 Flooring Tiles: 5% of amount installed Carpet, Vinyl, Rubber of each type and color. 09 91 00 Paint Five gallons of each type and color. 10 21 13 Toilet Partition Panels One finished panel per panel type based on configuration. 10 26 00 Corner Guards 5% of amount installed of each type and color. 10 28 00 Bathroom Accessories 5% of amount installed of each type and color. Delivered by Date (Contractor) Received by Date (Owner) H&C CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1 SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 2. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. H&C CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 2 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete and scheduled completion date listed for each item with the request for Substantial Completion Inspection B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 14 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 14 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training." 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. H&C CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 3 D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 14 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is verified by the Contractor as completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 14 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will process a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification by room number of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. H&C CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 4 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the spec section number, name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. Include list of all cleaning agents used in O&M Manuals. B. Extra Materials: Upon Substantial Completion of the work, submit to the Architect the “List of Extra Materials Furnished to Owner” form included in Appendix “F”. This form shall be signed by the owner’s representative acknowledging receipt of the required extra materials. H&C CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, screws, nails, small metallic objects and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits including tire track marks. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean and remove stainsin unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure and remove stickers from fixtures. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. p. Clean interior and exterior light fixtures, lamps, globes, lenses, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. H&C CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 6 C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report. D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 01 77 00 H&C OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1 SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. H&C OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 2 B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory. b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals. 2. One paper copy. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return one copy. C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. H&C OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 3 E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. H&C OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 4 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11 paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross- reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, subject matter of contents and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manuals. 2.3 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. H&C OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 5 B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. H&C OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 6 D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. H&C OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 7 E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. H&C OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 8 E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents." F. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 01 78 23 H&C PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1 SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints. 3) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit two paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. Verify sizes prior to printing. 2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints. 3) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. H&C PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 2 C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made following Architect's written orders. k. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. l. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. H&C PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 3 B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. 2. Format: DWG, AutoCAD 2012, Microsoft Windows operating system. 3. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file. 4. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 5. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 6. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. a. See Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files. b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers. C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications B. Format: Submit record Specifications as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications. H&C PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 4 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01 78 39 H&C CONSTRUCTION STAKING 02 21 13 - 1 SECTION 02 21 13 - CONSTRUCTION STAKING PART 1 - GENERAL A. All construction staking shall be performed by a licensed Civil Engineer or Surveyor acceptable to the Architect and Owner. B. Stakes: A minimum one set of construction grade stakes or “blue-tops” if possible of the following kind and at the stated interval shall be set by the Civil Engineer/Surveyor. 1.1 INITIAL CONTROL AND VERIFICATION A. HILGARTWILSON will utilize the prior project survey control established by our team for the construction staking services for this project. B. HILGARTWILSON will set a site benchmark and verify its elevation by running a level loop to the benchmark listed on the plans. C. Saw cut limits for removals will be staked as identified by the plans. D. Staking Calculations of design improvements included herein 1.2 ROUGH GRADE A. Rough Grade stakes for parking areas, driveways, and amenities will be set at major angle points, & grade breaks or intervals not to exceed 100 ft. B. Building pad corners will be staked and graded with offsets at all major angle points of the buildings. C. Retention areas will be staked and graded at all major horizontal angle points in the alignment, plus 100 ft. intervals. A story board will be provided with offsets and cuts to the toe of the channels and basins. 1.3 SANITARY SEWER A. Set cut stakes at 25 ft. intervals with cuts to flow line of pipe; stakes to be set at contractor requested offset. B. Stake the location of manholes, cleanouts, and sewer services to include one offset stake and at the end of each service tap. 1.4 WATER (DOMESTIC & FIRE LINE) A. Provide offset stakes for the fire line improvements located at the northeast corner of the new parking structure. (Approximately 100 lf of water/fire line). H&C CONSTRUCTION STAKING 02 21 13 - 2 1.5 STORM DRAINAGE A. Storm drain lines, structures, and retention pipe will be staked at 50 ft. intervals with cut to flow line provided. Storm structures will be staked and graded with two offset stakes. 1.6 DRY UTILITES A. Electric transformer and parking light poles will be located and a blue top set for the pole base grade or as requested by the contractor. B. Electric trench line will be staked at 50 ft. intervals and angle points. 1.7 FINISH GRADES A. Building pad blue tops will be set (2 per pad). B. Building Finished Floor grades will be collected; a finish floor elevation certification letter will be provided. C. Building Gridline stakes (4 gridlines per building) will be set for each of the buildings. D. Curb/pavement edge in the parking area will be staked at angle points, grade breaks and intervals not to exceed 35 ft. E. Blue tops will be set in the parking area for S/G and subsequently ABC along the perimeter and on grade break including 50 ft. interval staking. F. Blue tops will be set for the bottom of the Retention Basin / Sports Fields on a 50 ft. grid. G. Interior Sidewalks & decorative concrete areas, courtyard areas, playground area, will be staked at all corners, angle points, radius points, and grade breaks including intervals not to exceed 100 ft. Offset stakes with Grades will be provided at an offset as requested by the client. H. Perimeter Fencing, & / or Screen Walls will be staked at all major angle points with interval staking provided at not to exceed 100 ft. intervals. 1.8 AS-BUILT PLANS A. HILGARTWILSON will collect and provide to client the as-built information relative to the location of the Building, Paving, Utility, & Drainage improvements upon completion of construction for the above listed staking items. Notification shall be a minimum 48 hours (excluding Saturdays, Sundays and Holidays) before the start of staking for the requested construction stakes. At the time of submittal of the Work schedule or within 24 hours after notification of request for stakes, the Engineer will give the Contractor an estimated time for completion of the staking. The Engineer or his representative will notify the Contractor upon completion of the requested staking. If the stakes are not used H&C CONSTRUCTION STAKING 02 21 13 - 3 for construction within 72 hours or a reasonable time thereafter as approved by the Engineer, they shall be checked by the Engineer or his representative for accuracy at the expense of the Contractor at the rate and requirements as stated below. The Contractor shall schedule his Work to coordinate with the completion of staking. The Contractor agrees to reimburse all of the Owner's costs of additional re-staking and re- inspection caused by the Contractor (i.e. unnecessary delays, removal and replacement of defective Work, etc.) per the Rate Schedule of Surveyor and such additional costs shall be deducted from the final Contract payment, if not paid earlier by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 02 21 13 H&C DEMOLITION 02 41 00 - 1 SECTION 02 41 00 - DEMOLITION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Complete Demolition Work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Procure and pay for necessary permits or certificates required to complete the Work specified. Make required notifications and comply with applicable Federal, State and Local ordinances. 1.3 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Visit the site and examine the existing site and structures. Note conditions as to character and extent of Work involved. PART 2 – PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protection: Execute Demolition Work in an orderly and careful manner with due consideration for existing structures, including parts of the surrounding areas which are to remain. Barricade and cover as necessary to protect pedestrians, workmen, and adjacent properties. Periodically sprinkle to allay dust. Protect existing active service line, indicated or not. B. Disconnect electric, telephone, gas, water, or other lines servicing the structure per rule and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, as specified, or as directed by the Architect. 3.2 DEMOLITION A. Keep through lanes and drives clean and clear. B. Conduct operations so as to not interfere with adjacent roads, streets, drives, walks, service lines and the like. H&C DEMOLITION 02 41 00 - 2 C. Avoid encroachment on adjacent properties. Repair and make good damage to adjoining properties or improvements caused by operations, including damage or loss to adjoining tenants or property owners, whether to buildings, trade fixtures or existing services at no expense to Owner. D. Backfill and compact soils used to fill in trenches and holes resulting from demolition Work. E. Disposition of Removed Material: Material removed under this Contract, which is not to be salvaged or reused, shall become the property of the Contractor and be promptly removed from the site. Do not store or permit debris to accumulate on the site. 3.3 SALVAGE MATERIALS A. Certain materials shall be carefully removed, protected and turned over to the Owner. These, if any, are shown on the Drawings. B. Items considered for salvage and not indicated to be reused shall be placed in a holding area designated by the Owner, for a minimum of 30 days, during which time the Owner may select items to be retained. Items not salvaged by the Owner, will become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site and disposed of legally. No sale of salvage materials will be allowed from the site. Extreme care shall be exercised to prevent chipping, breakage, bending and mishandling of salvaged materials. 3.4 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on competition of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and legally dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. B. On completion of Demolition Work, leave the property and adjacent areas clean and satisfactory to local authorities and the Architect. END OF SECTION 02 41 00 H&C PENETRATING COLLOIDAL CONCRETE TREATMENT 03 05 29 - 1 SECTION 03 05 59 PENETRATING COLLOIDAL CONCRETE TREATMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work of this Section consists of spray-applied, penetrating, colloidal concrete treatments and includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Time of placement spray-applied, penetrating, colloidal concrete treatment for installation on to concrete slabs. 2. Substrate preparation for concrete slabs. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ISO/IEC Standard 17025 General Requirements for the Competence to Carry Out Tests and/or Calibrations. 2. ASTM E 699 Standard Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing, Quality Assurance, and Evaluating of Building Components. 3. ASTM E 329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 302.2R-06 Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s printed descriptions of materials, components and systems; performance criteria; use limitations; preparation instructions and recommendations; storage and handling requirements and recommendations; and installation methods. B. Quality Assurance Submittals: Certificates, and Test and Evaluation Reports. C. Closeout Submittals: Operation and Maintenance Data, and Record Documents. 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Including, but not limited to, methods for maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning materials with methods detrimental to finishes and performance. H&C PENETRATING COLLOIDAL CONCRETE TREATMENT 03 05 29 - 2 2. Record Documents: Drawings, Specifications, and Product Data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Material Requirements: Concrete mixes shall be designed in accordance with ACI 211 Standard Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Concrete. B. Structural Requirements: Concrete shall be “fit for use” per the applicable Guides, Manuals, Specifications, and/or Standards of the following ACI Manual of Concrete Practice series: 1. ACI 300 Series (Design & Construction Practices) 2. ACI 500 Series (Special Products & Processes) C. Qualifications: ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer with a minimum 15 years experience and capable of providing field service representation; Applicator to have a minimum three (3) years successful experience and/or SCP confirmation of successful application training; and a Testing Agency per ISO/IEC Standard 17025 or ASTM E699 and ASTM E329. D. Source Limitations: Obtain penetrating colloidal concrete treatment through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Sustainability Standards and Certifications: 1. VOC Limits: As tested using a Gas Chromatograph/Mass Spectroscopy as defined by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rules: In areas where exposure to freeze/thaw conditions and direct exposure to moisture will not occur. a. SCAQMD Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings F. Mockups: Provide full-scale three-dimensional concrete slab, wall assembly, and/or other mockup(s) utilizing final specified materials, approved mix design, and final production techniques. 1. Fully test constructed mockup(s), either in the field or off-site, verifying that the product application meets the performance requirements of this Specification. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery, storage, and handling shall be according to the manufacturer’s written recommendations, industry guidelines, and/or DIVISION 01 requirements whichever is more stringent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers List: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide spray-applied products by one of the following: 1. Spray-Lock Concrete Protection, LLC, 5959 Shallowford Road, Suite 405, Chattanooga, TN 37421; (office) 423.305.6151 / (fax) 423.305.6150; www.spraylockcp.com 2. Substitution: Manufacturers of equivalent products beyond those listed above shall be considered when submitted per DIVISION 01, using Substitution Request Form. H&C PENETRATING COLLOIDAL CONCRETE TREATMENT 03 05 29 - 3 B. Product Options: 1. Acceptable hydraulic cement leveling underlayments: Refer to SECTION 03 5416 2. Acceptable Primers / Paint Systems: Acrylic-based or equivalent approved by the Architect. 3. Acceptable Coatings: As approved by the Architect. 4. Acceptable Adhesives: Spray-Lock™ Premium Eco Adhesives or equivalent approved by the Architect. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Materials shall be new, of uniform quality, suitable and without defects affecting the strength or service of the structure. B. Penetrating spray products: 1. NEW CONCRETE: SCP 327 – Time of Placement is a green-tinted (dries clear), odorless, nontoxic, and non-flammable penetrant in a colloidal liquid base. SCP 327 penetrates concrete and masonry substrates to chemically react with free alkali components in the concrete resulting in: a. Superior cure at time of placement b. A surface ready to accept adhesives, coatings, and/or underlayments when applied according to the respective manufacturer’s recommendations. c. Reduced or eliminated shrinkage cracking and slab curl. d. Minimizes scaling and spalling. e. Enhanced durability. 2. CONCRETE REMEDIATION: SCP 743 – Concrete Remediation is a blue-tinted (dries clear), odorless, non-toxic, and non-flammable penetrant in a colloidal liquid base. SCP 743 deeply penetrates concrete and masonry substrates to chemically react with free alkali components in the concrete. In addition to the benefits of SCP 327 and SCP 578, SCP 743 also provides: a. Protection of reinforcing steel b. Rejuvenation of concrete capillary and pore structure c. Stabilizes concrete chemistry 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Large Surface Areas and/or Volumes: Low to medium pressure less than or equal to 1,500 PSI airless sprayer. B. Small to Medium Surface Areas and/or Volumes: Pump or backpack sprayer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements per manufacturer’s written recommendations, DIVISION 01, and as follows: H&C PENETRATING COLLOIDAL CONCRETE TREATMENT 03 05 29 - 4 1. Allow surfaces and product to attain a temperature of 36 deg F (2 deg C) and rising before proceeding with product application. 2. Do not apply unprotected during periods of exposure to high winds. 3. Ensure that frost or frozen surfaces are thawed with no standing water. 4. Very Hot Weather and Direct Sunlight Conditions: Apply a fine mist spray of water on the surface after application of SCPTM treatment to help alleviate premature chemical reaction and/or drying from taking place prior to achieving maximum penetration. 3.2 EXAMINATION, PREPARATION, AND APPLICATION A. Examination, preparation, and application per SCP’sTM written instructions, industry guidelines, DIVISION 01, and as follows: 1. Acceptance of Conditions: Carefully examine installation areas with Installer/Applicator present for compliance with requirements affecting Work performance. a. Verify that surfaces, substrates, tolerances, levelness, plumbness, temperature, humidity, cleanliness, and other applicable conditions are as required by product manufacturers, and are ready to receive Work. b. Test substrates as required by SCPTM to verify proper conditions. NOTE: Penetrating colloidal technology is dependent upon water penetration/absorption into the concrete. If water does not penetrate the concrete, then treatment will also not penetrate. c. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Provide or prepare substrates to ensure proper application of SCPTM treatment. a. Protect in-place assets from overspray. b. NEW CONCRETE: As soon after concrete placement, floating, and/or trowelling so that it is hard enough for foot traffic or other surface loading without causing damage to the surface. 1) Concrete mixes shall not use internal curing compounds or other membrane forming chemical additives, such as crystalline silicate sealers (i.e. – sodium, potassium, lithium, etc. silicate sealers) that can inhibit penetration of colloidal concrete treatment. 2) Remove standing water. 3) Do not hard trowel or over-float the surface. c. EXISTING CONCRETE & CONCRETE REMEDIATION: Physically remove curing membranes, laitance, plaster, oil, adhesive residue, crystalline silicate hardeners, or other contaminants from the substrate surface (i.e. – sand or shot blast, high-pressure wash, etc.) then vacuum and/or pressure wash surface clean, removing all standing water prior to application. 3. SCPTM Application to NEW CONCRETE: a. Apply SCPTM treatment as soon as the concrete is hard enough for foot traffic or other surface loading without damage to the surface. Use a low to medium pressure air less sprayer [i.e. - ≤ 1,500 psi (10 MPa)] set to a pressure that will not damage the surface [i.e. – approximately 300 to 600 psi (2.1 to 4.1 MPa)]. Apply at a rate of approximately 140-180 ft2 per gallon. b. If necessary, spray a second application of SCPTM for porous concrete at a rate of approximately 140-180 ft2 per gallon. c. After 24 to 48 hours, apply leveling cements, acrylic primers, applicable Spray- LockTM adhesive, and/or the final surface finish materials according to the respective manufacturer recommendations. 4. SCPTM Application to EXISTING CONCRETE and for CONCRETE REMEDIATION: H&C PENETRATING COLLOIDAL CONCRETE TREATMENT 03 05 29 - 5 a. Apply SCPTM using a low to medium pressure air less sprayer [i.e. - ≤ 1,500 psi (10 MPa)] onto existing concrete as soon as the application surface has been properly prepared. Apply at a rate of approximately 70-180 ft2 per gallon depending on the product and application. b. If necessary, spray a second application of SCPTM for porous concrete at a rate of approximately 140-180 ft2 per gallon. c. After a minimum of 24 hrs, lightly sand & vacuum, or pressure wash, to remove any left over contaminants and excess materials. d. After 24 to 48 hours, apply leveling cements, acrylic primers, applicable Spray- LockTM adhesive, and/or the final surface finish materials according to the respective manufacturer published recommendations. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests and Inspections per DIVISION 01, and as follows: 1. Inspect substrate for non-conforming work including, but not limited to: a. Curing compounds b. Other barrier forming compounds (i.e. – crystalline silicates, epoxies, urethanes, etc.) c. Excessive or hard troweling (i.e. – burnished surface) d. Dried SCPTM treatment material on the concrete substrate due to slab not being wetted during very hot, direct sunlight, and/or windy conditions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Immediately clean overspray or splash off glass and metal with soap and water, and dry. B. Waste Management per DIVISION 01, and as follows: Store and recycle shipping cartons and empty bucket containers. END OF SECTION 03 05 29 H&C CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00-1 SECTION 03 20 00 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Concrete reinforcement as shown on the Drawings and as specified. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ACI-301, Chapter 5, except where more exacting requirements are specified. B. Comply with requirements in AWS-D12.1, except where more exacting requirements are specified in the Contract Documents. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing bending and placing of reinforcing. Include diagrammatic elevations of walls at a scale sufficiently large to show clearly the position and erection marks of marginal bars and their dowels and splices and bar arrangement for more than one layer of reinforcing steel in concrete sections. B. Certificates: Submit certified mill test reports for review prior to fabrication. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Shipping: Deliver reinforcement to the Project site bundled, tagged and marked to facilitate sorting and placing. Tags shall indicate bar sizes, lengths, grade and other information corresponding to markings shown on placement diagrams. B. Storage and Protection: Store reinforcement at the site off the ground and in a manner to prevent damage to the materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel: New bullet-steel, deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60, with a minimum yield of 60,000 psi for bars #5 and larger and ASTM A615, Grade 40, with a minimum yield of 40,000 psi for bars #4 and smaller, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 using bright steel wire meeting the requirements of ASTM A82. Gauges and dimensions as noted on the Drawings. H&C CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00-2 C. Chairs: Galvanized steel or plastic tipped. D. Tie Wire: ASTM A82, 16 gauge or heavier, black annealed. E. Welding Rods: E-70 Series for A615 Grade 40 (ASTM A615M, Grade 300) reinforcing and E- 90 Series for A706 reinforcing; low hydrogen conforming to AWS A-5.1. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate bars as far as is practical. Bend bars cold. Make bends for stirrups and ties around pins having diameters at least 2 times the thickness of the bars; for other bars 1 inch diameter and smaller, 6 times the thickness; for larger bars 8 times the thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Determine weldability of reinforcing steel by laboratory chemical analysis of steel. Only steel conforming to chemical requirements specified in AWS D12.1 may be welded. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: 1. Place in accordance with ACI 318 and as shown. 2. Accurately place reinforcement and securely tie at intersections with 16 gauge black annealed wire. 3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position by chairs, bar supports or other approved devices. 4. Bars in footings shall be supported on precast concrete blocks. 5. The bending or field cutting of bars around openings or sleeves will not be permitted. 6. Reinforcing steel in beams and slabs shall not be placed until after concrete in walls and columns has been poured. B. Bars shall lap in accordance with General Structural Notes. C. Concrete protection of reinforcing shall be not less than the following: 1. Concrete is poured against and permanently exposed to ground: 3 inches. 2. Concrete is poured against forms but may be in contact with ground: a. #5 and under: 1-1/2 inches. b. #6 and larger: 2 inches. 3. Exterior face of exterior walls (exposed to weather but not in contact with ground): 1- 1/2 inches minimum. H&C CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00-3 4. Interior walls and interior face of exterior walls: 3/4 inch minimum. 5. Beams, girders and columns: 1-1/2 inches. 6. Interior Slabs: 1 inch. D. Clear distance between bars shall be not less than 1-1/2 times the maximum size of coarse aggregate unless noted otherwise. E. Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits or embedded items. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter or enough to exceed code tolerances, resulting arrangement of bars shall be subject to review of Architect. F. Bars with kinks or bends not indicated shall not be used. Reinforcement shall not be bent or be straightened in a manner that will weaken the material, or be bent after being partially embedded in hardened concrete. G. Wire mesh in slabs: 1. Lap welded wire fabric at least 1-1/2 meshes plus end extension of wires but not less than 12 inches in structural slabs. 2. Lap fabric at least 1/2 mesh plus end extension of wires but not less than 6 inches in slabs on ground. 3. Extend mesh across supporting beams and walls. 3.3 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of off premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 03 20 00 H&C CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-1 SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Cast-in-place concrete including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Building foundations and slabs on grade. 2. Sidewalks and driveways. 3. Site structures including, but not limited to, site lighting supports, electrical and mechanical equipment support pads, and other site furnishing and equipment requiring cast-in-place concrete items. 4. Concrete fill for metal pan steel stairs as specified in Section 05 51 00. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 16 00 – Concrete Curbs and Gutters 2. Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Formwork 3. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcement 4. Section 03 35 36 – Ground Concrete 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Interior slabs on grade scheduled to received applied floor finishes (VCT, carpet, etc.) shall be tested as specified herein under Field Quality Control Relative Humidity test requirements. RH in concrete must be less than the maximum value required by the floor finish manufacturer. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Mix Design: 1. Submit mix design for each class of concrete to the Architect for review. Review of mix designs by Architect and/or Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the performance of the concrete. B. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's Specifications and performance data for accessory products C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawing showing proposed location of construction joints, expansion/contraction joints and control joints and obtain approval of same from Architect prior to construction. D. Samples: Submit 4 inch long samples of expansion/contraction joint and control joint. H&C CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Standard for measuring, mixing, transporting and placing of concrete shall be ACI-301 and ACI-304R. 2. Standard for measuring, mixing and delivery of ready mixed shall be ASTM C94, except that time in mixer after water has been added at batch plant is limited to 1-1/2 hours. 3. Job-mixed concrete shall be subject to Architect's review of design, mixing and handling procedures. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Rain protection: Do not place concrete during rain unless adequate protection has been provided. B. Cold weather protection: Comply with ACI-306R. C. Hot weather protection: Comply with ACI-305R. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Materials shall be new, of uniform quality, suitable and without defects affecting the strength or service of the structure. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II, alkali content not to exceed 0.6 percent. Use one brand and type of cement throughout Project unless otherwise specified. C. Aggregate: 1. Structural Concrete: Clean, coarse aggregate and gravel, free from foreign matter, conforming to ASTM C33. Aggregate shall be graded from coarse to fine in accordance with ASTM C33, Size 57. 2. Exposed Aggregate Concrete: Clean, river run crushed course aggregate and gravel, free from foreign matter conforming to ASTM C 33, Class 5S. Gradation to be ASTM C 33, Size 8, except that the aggregate shall be "gap-graded". D. Admixtures: 1. Air entraining admixture: ASTM C260. 2. Use of calcium chloride is not permitted. 3. Fly ash admixture: In accordance with Section 03 05 05. 4. Use set-retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect. E. Water: Potable. H&C CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-3 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: 1. Interior Only (PVA): L&M Construction Chemicals EVERWELD www.lmcc.com, US Spec "Bondcoat" www.usspec.com, or Larsens' Weld Crete www.larsenproducts.com 2. Interior Only for Bonding Existing Concrete to Fresh Concrete (Epoxy): Sika Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod www.sikausa.com, US spec Maxi-Bond 2500 www.usspec.com,, or W.R. Meadows Rezi-Weld www.wrmeadows.com. 3. Exterior and Interior (acrylic latex): Euclid Eucobond www.euclidchemical.com, W.R. Meadows Intralok www.wrmeadows.com, US Spec Acylcoat www.usspec.com, or Dayton Bond J40 www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com. B. Non-Shrink Grout: 1. Premixed or prepackaged, non-metallic, non-gaseous, bleed free compound; non-shrink when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1107, Grade B at a fluid (flow cone) consistency of 20 to 30 seconds. 2. Attain minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi in 28 days at above fluid consistency. 3. Fluid grouts: Remain workable, flow through flow cone after 20 minutes with slight agitation, in temperatures from 40 to 90 degrees F. 4. Acceptable manufacturer and products: Dayton Superior (Suregrip High Performance) www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com, Sika (Sikagrout 212) www.sikausa.com, Master Builders (Masterflow 713) www.masterbuilders.com, W.R. Meadows No. 588 Grout www.wrmeadows.com, L&M Construction Chemicals (DURAGROUT) www.lmcc.com, US Spec "MP Grout" www.usspec.com, and Euclid N-S Grout www.euclidchemical.com. C. Formed Construction Joint: Standard design plastikey, tongue and groove key joint; 3-1/2 inch vertical dimension for 4 inch slabs. D. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D1751. E. Expansion Joint Filler (Sidewalks and Drives): MAG Section 729. F. Liquid Curing Compound: Provide acrylic resin or dissipating hydrocarbon resin type as applicable to final floor finish as recommended by curing compound manufacturer. 1. Acrylic Resin Type: a. VOC compliant, ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B; acrylic type. b. W. R. Meadows Sealtight VOCOMP-20, L&M Construction Chemicals Dress & Seal WB, US Spec Hydrasheen 15%, or Dayton Superior J-18 are acceptable products. 2. Dissipating Hydrocarbon Resin Type: US Spec Maxcure Resin Clear HS, water-based, high solid, dissipating resin curing compound. H&C CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-4 3. Verify that specified curing compound is compatible with the floor finish material(s) and adhesive(s) that will be applied to floor surface prior to delivery of curing compound to jobsite. If it is determined that the curing compound is not compatible with the floor finish material(s) and adhesive(s) that will be applied to floor surface, Contractor shall immediately notify Architect. G. Sealer: VOC compliant, acrylic copolymer type. 1. Interior: ASTM C1315, Class B. Provide one of the following: W. R. Meadows VOCOMP-30, Euclid Super Aqua Cure VOX, L&M Construction Chemicals Dress & Seal WB #30 or Dayton Superior J-19 are acceptable products. 2. Exterior: ASTM C1315, Class A. Provide one of the following: Euclid Super Diamond Clear VOX, L&M Construction Chemicals Lumiseal WB, W. R. Meadows VOCOMP- 30 or US Spec “Radiance UV-25” Class A are acceptable products. H. Liquid Hardener: 1. Siliconate solution to reduce abrasion per ASTM C779 by 56%, independent test data required, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. SEAL HARD. 2. Ashford Formula 3. W. R. Meadows Liquihard 4. Dayton-Superior J-17 Surehard 5. US Spec "Industraseal" I. Leveling Agent: Sonneborn Sonoflow, Euclid Flo-Top, Ardex K-15, L&M Construction Chemicals Levelex, US Spec "Self-Leveling Underlayment, or Dayton-Superior Levelayer 1 are acceptable products. J. Concrete Accessories: Gateway Engineering Company, Dayton-Superior Corporation, or Burke Concrete Accessories. K. Evaporation Retarder: 1. Type: Monomolecular film, compatible with subsequent coatings and floor finishes. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer and Products: L&M Construction Chemicals (E-Con), Master Builders (Confilm), Sika (Sika Film), W.R. Meadows (Evapre), US Spec (Monofilm ER), or Dayton Superior (Surefilm J-74). U.S. Spec “Top-Etch.” 2.3 MIXES A. Design of Mixes: ACI 301 and ACI 304R, except as otherwise specified. B. Selection of proportions for normal weight concrete: ACI 301. C. Mix and deliver ready-mixed concrete in accordance with requirements of ASTM C94, Option A. 1. Not more than 90 minutes shall elapse from time water is introduced into the concrete mixture until completion of placement. H&C CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-5 2. Do not add water to mix that has stiffened to increase its workability. 3. At no time shall concrete mix exceed temperature of over 90 degrees F. 4. Use ice or other method as reviewed by Architect, to keep concrete below 91 degrees F. temperature. D. Water-cement ratio for concrete used for interior slab on grade construction: 0.40 to 0.45. E. Concrete for Sidewalks: Class B, complying with applicable requirements of MAG Section 725. F. Concrete for Drives: Comply with Section 1006 of the ADOT Standard Specifications and Soils Report. G. Use of water reducing admixture, if needed, shall be submitted for approval. Proportion water reducing admixture in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. Delivery tickets shall state the amount and kind of admixture. H. Air Entraining Admixture: 1. Limit air content for lightweight concrete to 4-6% I. Compressive strength (28 day): As shown on Drawings. J. Slump: 1. For consolidation by vibration: As shown on Drawings. 2. For exposed aggregate concrete: 7 inches to 8 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prior to placing concrete: 1. Clean equipment involved. 2. Remove debris and foreign material from the forms. 3. Remove concrete laitance from reinforcing steel. 4. Wet wood forms and masonry units in contact with concrete. B. No wood other than built-in bucks or nailing blocks will be permitted to remain permanently inside the forms. C. Coordinate the necessary Trades as required to provide the sleeves, bolts, anchors, holes, etc., to be built in. H&C CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-6 D. Remove soft or unsuitable material to a depth of not less than 18 inches below subgrade under access drives and truck parking areas, and 12 inches below subgrade under automobile parking areas. Replace with approved materials. E. Remove concrete sidewalks and driveways, which are necessarily disturbed by construction to a distance, required to maintain a slope as indicated by Standard Details or not to exceed one inch per foot where sidewalks are concerned. 3.2 PLACING OF CONCRETE A. Concrete Work shall be performed in accordance with ACI-301 except as amended by this Section. B. Convey concrete from the mixer to place of final deposit by methods which will prevent segregation of aggregate or loss of material. Place concrete at such a rate that concrete is at all times plastic and to insure a practically continuous flow of concrete. Concrete not in place 1- 1/2 hours after water has been added at batch plant may be rejected by Architect. C. Place concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not deposit concrete that has partially hardened or been retempered. D. Do not place concrete during rain unless adequate protection has been provided. E. Thoroughly compact concrete by suitable means during the placing, and work around the reinforcement and embedded items into the corners of the forms. 1. Use vibrators to aid in the placement of the concrete, operated by experienced personnel. 2. Keep at least one spare operating vibrator on the job at all times during the concrete operations. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, EXPANSION/CONTRACTION JOINTS AND CONTROL JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Provide as required to facilitate construction in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. B. Expansion/Contraction and Control Joints: Place expansion/contraction joints and control joints where required to ensure that undesirable thermal and shrinkage cracking of slabs is minimized. 1. See Drawings for locations of expansion/contraction joints and control joints in slabs-on- grade and in topping pours. 2. If drawings do not indicate locations, verify with Architect prior to placement of slabs- on-grade and topping pours. 3. At exterior slabs-on-grade provide a 1/2 inch wide expansion/contraction joint wherever slabs abut vertical construction elements whether indicated or not. 4. Unless otherwise noted or directed by Architect, locate joints at mid-span of structural beam and slab pours. H&C CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-7 C. Additional reinforcing may be required at some construction, expansion/contraction and control joints, and shall be supplied and installed at no additional cost. D. Reinforcing shall be continuous through construction joints. No concrete pour shall be longer than 100 feet or more than 4,000 square feet in area. Provide shear keys as detailed. E. Provide waterstop at joint of vertical wall surface and precast concrete beneath topping slab as indicated. F. Provide support of formed construction joint materials by means that does not puncture or otherwise damage under floor vapor retarder at interior floor slabs on grade. 3.4 FINISHING VERTICAL (FORMED) SURFACES A. Formed surface finishes: 1. Pits, tunnels, mechanical rooms and concealed surfaces: Remove fins, patch tie holes. 2. Interior exposed surfaces and exterior exposed surfaces: Remove fins, patch tie holes, stone joint marks and out-of-plane surfaces to within 1/16 inch of flush, to produce uniformity, dense and smooth concrete. 3.5 FINISHING HORIZONTAL SURFACES A. Rake concrete into place, screed and compact with a light tamp, except do not tamp topping and slabs not on grade. Screed with sawing motion and float surface to bring fines to the top. B. Mix and apply evaporation retarder in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions immediately after floating. In extreme drying conditions, apply additional material as needed. Apply lightly on hard to trowel floor areas. C. When concrete has hardened sufficiently so that excess fines will not be brought to the surface, trowel slab with a steel trowel to a smooth surface free of pinholes and other imperfections. A mechanical trowel with rotating steel blades, approved by Architect, may be used for this operation. D. After the surface has hardened sufficiently to ring under a trowel, trowel again with a steel trowel to a hard, burnished surface free of blemishes. A mechanical rotating trowel will not be permitted for this operation. E. Concrete slabs scheduled to receive ceramic tile or similar finishes shall have a screeded finish but true and even to plane with no sharp projections or ridges. F. Use a small radius edger on edges of exposed Work. Use a deep cutting, scoring tool or sawcutting to provide scoring for control joints as indicated unless otherwise noted or directed. H&C CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-8 G. Exterior flatwork to receive medium broom finish unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. H. Finished floors to meet 1/4 inch in 10 feet tolerance unless noted otherwise. Floors scheduled to receive thin-set tile applications shall meet 1/8 inch in 10'-0" tolerance. 3.6 SLABS A. Saw cut or score control joint pattern indicated on Drawings. Use 3/16 inch thick blade or scoring tool, cutting 1/4 of depth of slab thickness. B. Slope to drains 1/4 inch per foot nominal across entire room or area to be drained. 3.7 SPECIAL FINISHES A. Ground Concrete – Reference Section 03 35 36. 3.8 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS A. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, detail and elevations. B. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed, resulting in excessive honeycombing and other defects. Do not patch, repair or replace exposed architectural concrete except upon express direction of Architect. C. After forms are removed, fill tie rod holes, correct honeycomb spots, remove fins and clean and finish damaged surfaces. Wipe off excess mortar and rub to match adjoining surfaces. D. When excessive honeycombing is revealed, remove the defective material immediately after stripping forms to a depth of 3/4 inch to 1 inch. Cut edge of area perpendicular to surface to avoid feathered edges. Saturate with water for several inches beyond cutout and brush-in a grout consisting of equal parts Portland cement and sand. Follow immediately with the patching mortar. Leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface. After an hour or two, finish flush with the adjoining surface. Wipe and rub patch to match adjoining surfaces. Keep patches moist for 7 days. E. Patching mortar shall consist of the same materials and proportions as the original concrete except that the coarse aggregate shall be omitted. When color match is required, adjust mixture to produce a finished color to match the adjoining concrete surfaces. F. Cracks caused by expansion, shrinkage and the like that occur in natural color concrete up through final acceptance of building shall be carefully patched with floorstone, epoxy grouting mortar or other method acceptable to the Architect. H&C CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-9 3.9 CURING A. Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for the hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete. B. Curing Methods: Cure concrete surfaces receiving finish materials, including, but not limited to; cementitious toppings, paint, and flooring, using one of the following two methods immediately after finishing operations. Consideration shall be given to the construction schedule impact and the compatibility of finish materials with the concrete when selecting a method. 1. Keep concrete continuously moist for at least 7 days using polyethylene film or other acceptable covering. Interior floor slabs on grade shall be continuously moist cured for a minimum of 7 days in accordance with ACI standards. 2. Apply liquid curing compound in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Remove curing compound before finish materials are applied unless it has been demonstrated that the curing compound can satisfactorily serve as a base for finish materials. Method of removal shall result in a satisfactory base for finish materials. C. Prevent rapid drying of the concrete at the end of the curing period. D. During the curing period, protect the concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances, particularly load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibrations. Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage caused by construction equipment, materials or methods. 3.10 LEVELING AGENT A. Apply leveling agent to correct unsatisfactory floor surface due to undue settlement, shrinkage or cracking. B. Apply material when, in the opinion of Architect, it is necessary to provide an acceptable surface. C. Application to be in accordance with Manufacturer's directions. 3.11 FLOOR SEALER A. At areas indicated on Drawings, provide 2 coats of sealer. B. Surface must be clean, dry and free of loose dirt, oil, wax, curing and parting compounds and other foreign matter. C. Apply each coat in accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions. H&C CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-10 3.12 FLOOR HARDENER A. Where indicated on Drawings, provide one coat of hardener, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. B. Surface must be clean, dry and free of loose dirt, oil, wax, sealers, curing and parting compounds, and other foreign matter. C. Apply each coat in strict accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed by a testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01 45 00. 1. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. 2. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. 3. Four concrete test cylinders shall be taken for every 100 or less cubic yards of concrete placed. One cylinder shall be tested after 7 days for information. Test two cylinders after 28 days. Hold one cylinder for additional information, as required. 4. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, and cure on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 5. Take one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken. 6. Concrete which does not meet the compressive strength requirement at 28 days will be rejected and removed from the Project, and disposed of in a legal manner. B. Relative Humidity(RH) test requirements: 1. Two weeks before installation of the ceramic tile, VCT, vinyl, wood, carpet, epoxy flooring and/or other finish flooring systems over the interior concrete slabs, provide RH test to determine the level of relative humidity in the slab. 2. Conduct testing in accordance with ASTM F2170. 3. Conduct tests after HVAC system has been in continuous use for 48 hours with a minimum ambient temperature of 72 degrees F. RH transmission levels are directly affected by ambient room temperature and readings conducted without a sustained ambient temperature is NOT acceptable. 4. Document test results and provide copy to Architect with a marked up floor finish plan showing test results. 5. Provide a written clarification on status of HVAC system before and during the test and the length of time the ambient air temperature was maintained before the tests. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Protect finished surfaces from stains or abrasions. Protect surfaces or edges by leaving forms in place or by providing temporary covers. Protect concrete from rain, flowing water or mechanical injury. H&C CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-11 B. Protect floor slabs from the droppings of plaster, paint, dirt, and other marring by covering with polyethylene plastic sheet, or other acceptable floor protection covering, well lapped and sealed. 1. Where concrete slabs are scheduled to be the finished floor surface, or where slab is treated with a special concrete finish serving as the finished floor surface, provide a continuous covering of 1/2 inch particle board, joints tightly butted and cut to sizes tight to wall construction, over entire floor area over polyethylene plastic sheet, or other acceptable floor protection sheeting. Maintain covering (polyethylene and particleboard) in good condition until danger of damage is past. 3.15 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. END OF SECTION 03 30 00 H&C POLISHED CONCRETE 03 35 00 - 1 SECTION 03 35 00 – POLISHED CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes polished concrete finish for interior concrete flatwork. Polished concrete finishes for precast concrete, vertical cast-in-place concrete, and exterior concrete are specified in the sections for those types of concrete. B. Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for the dry diamond grinding and polishing of concrete floors. C. Applying densifying impregnator/sealer and polishing to specified sheen level and aggregate exposure. D. Applying cementitious concrete patch skimcoat to problem areas. E. Applying dye/stain and joint filler to pattern areas. F. Concrete must be cured a minimum of 28 days prior to polishing. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI302.1R-89, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM C779, Standard Test Method for Abrasion of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces. 2. ASTM C805, Impact Strength. 3. ASTM G23-81, Ultraviolet Light & Water Spray. 4. ASTM 1028, Co-efficient of Friction. 5. ASTM C 150, Type I, II Portland cement conformity, depending on soil conditions. 6. ASTM C 33, Aggregate conformity. C. Other Tests: 1. Reflectivity. H&C POLISHED CONCRETE 03 35 00 - 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Division 01, Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Proce- dures”. B. Product data for each grinding machine, including all types of grinding heads, dust extraction system, joint filler, concrete densifying impregnator, penetrating sealer, and any other chemi- cals used in the process. C. Applicators qualification data. D. Polished concrete samples: size 24” x 24”, for each Polished Concrete finish required. E. Maintenance procedures using the concrete densifier manufacturer specifications. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Basis of design: Polished Concrete using dry polishing method - Prosoco Consolideck B. Prosoco Certified Applicators or pre-approved equal C. Pre Installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site prior to approval of mix design. This conference shall include all parties concerned. D. Provide project names, addresses, contact names, phone numbers of at least (3) three projects of similar scope completed by the installer. E. Installer/applicator shall be certified by concrete finish equipment and chemical manufacturer and shall provide adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experi- enced in the necessary craft. F. Manufacturer’s Certification: Provide a letter of certification from both the equipment and chemical manufacturer stating that the installer is a certified applicator and is familiar with proper procedures and installation requirements recommended by the manufacturer. G. Mock-ups: 1. General Contractor to notify applicator 7 days prior to pour to schedule finish of mock- up. 2. Reserve 100 square feet for each color and finish at location adjacent to floor that will re- ceive polish, but will be covered with another flooring material. Mock-up floor shall be placed on the same day, preferably the same pour as the floors to receive polish. 3. Install mock-ups to verify selections made under sample submittal and to demonstrate methods and workmanship proposed for the project. If mock-up not possible, submitted samples will be accepted as demonstrated methods & workmanship. 4. Aggregate selected must be tested to ensure it will accept polish. 5. If stand alone mockup required, form should be clean and free from extraneous substance and be at least a 12’ x 12’ with a level plywood bottom on level ground with unobstruct- ed access around all four sides. H&C POLISHED CONCRETE 03 35 00 - 3 6. Control joints should be included in mock-up. Sawing performed by General Contractor can begin as soon as the surface is firm enough not to displace any of the aggregate. 7. Edges should be included in mock-up. 8. Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at time of substantial completion. H. Protection: General Contractor shall protect areas to receive polished concrete finish at all times during construction to prevent oils, dirt, metal, excessive water and other potentially damaging materials from affecting the finished concrete surface. Protection measures listed below shall begin immediately after the concrete slab is poured: 1. All hydraulic powered equipment shall be diapered to avoid staining of the concrete. 2. All vehicle parking shall be prohibited on the finish slab area. If necessary to complete their scope of work, drop cloths shall be placed under vehicles at all times. 3. No pipe cutting machine shall be used on the finish floor slab. 4. Steel shall not be placed on the finish slab to avoid rusting. 5. Acids and acidic detergents will not come in contact with slab. 6. All painters will use drop cloths on the concrete. If paint gets on the concrete, it must be immediately removed. 7. All trades will be informed that the slab must be protected at all times. I. Environmental Limitations 1. Core samples must be taken to ensure concrete substrate is suitable for concrete Polishing application 2. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation and other conditions affecting chemical performance. 3. Flatness and levelness a. Finish Concrete shall have a minimum Floor Flatness rating of at least 40. b. Finish Concrete shall have a minimum Floor Levelness rating of at least 30. c. Finish Concrete shall be cured a minimum of 28 days or at which point equipment can be put on the slab and does not displace aggregate. 4. Application of finish system shall take place a minimum of 21 days prior to fixture & trim installation and/or substantial completion. 5. Finish Concrete area shall be closed to traffic during finish floor application and after ap- plication, for the time as recommended by manufacturer. J. Concrete Mix Design: comply with approved concrete specifications. H&C POLISHED CONCRETE 03 35 00 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POLISHING MATERIALS A. Three-phase 480 Volt generator and step down transformer. B. 3 head or 4 head counter rotating variable speed approved floor grinder with at least 600 pounds down pressure. Floor Grinder must be planetary type. Non planetary type machines including Prep Master will not be allowed. C. Dust extraction system, pre-separator, and squeegee attachments with minimum flow rating of 322 cubic feet per minute. D. Grinding Heads: 1. Metal bonded diamonds 40, 60, 80, and 150 grits. 2. Resin bonded, phenolic diamonds, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1500 and 3000 grits. E. Grinding Pads for Edges 1. 40, 60, 100, and 120 grits. 2. 200,400, 800, 1500 and 3000 grits. F. Hand Grinder with dust extraction attachment and pads. G. Penetrating Liquid Sealer Hardener Densifying Impregnator or as specified by construction manager with the following performance criteria: chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless which hardens and densifies concrete surfaces to protect against abrasion, dusting, and absorption of liquids. 1. Prosoco Chemical – LS Lithium based concrete densifier/sealer 2. Prosoco Chemical – LS Guard lithium H. Cementitious Patching material compatible with polishing process. 1. Ardex or Mapei I. Control Joint and Saw Cut Filler, two part filler or polyurea as specified by construction man- ager. 1. Euco 700 Semi Rigid Floor Joint Filler– Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland OH, Jason Savage (602) 432-5670 J. (If specified) Floor striping material and layout to specified by owner/architect. H&C POLISHED CONCRETE 03 35 00 - 5 K. If specified, a ready to use, penetrating dye that is formulated using extremely fine molecules to produce permanent, variegated or translucent color effects. 1. Ameripolish Concrete Dye System – American Decorative Concrete, Springdale AR Skip Edwards (619) 201-5987 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine and approve concrete substrate for conditions affecting performance of finish. General Contractor shall correct conditions that are found to be out of compliance with the requirements of this section. Repairs are not acceptable unless specifically approved on a case-by-case basis by the Architect. B. Verify that base slab meet finish and surface profile requirements listed in Division 3, Section “Cast in Place Concrete”. C. Provide floor clean of materials and debris. D. Protect adjacent surfaces as required to prevent damage by the concrete polishing procedure. F. Setup grinding machine, dust extraction system, tooling, and generator. G. Ensure floor cured to accept polishing application. 3.2 POLISHED CONCRETE APPLICATION A. Applicator shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be pro- vided and the General Contractor shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the work and the Applicator shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. B. Grind the concrete floor to within 2 -3 inches of walls with 25, 40, 60, 80 and/or 150 grit, re- moving construction debris, floor slab imperfections and until there is a uniform scratch pattern and desired concrete aggregate exposure is achieved. Vacuum the floor thoroughly using a squeegee vacuum attachment. C. Apply material approved by architect for color effects in accordance with the architectural drawings and the manufacturers recommended guidelines. D. Fill construction joints and cracks with filler products as specified in accordance with manufac- turers instructions colored to match (or contrast) with concrete color as specified by architect. E. (If specified) Bull float cementitious grout coat onto surface to fill all voids, cement grout to match (or contrast) color of concrete, allow to cure overnight. (If specified) Apply epoxy grout coat onto surface; allow to cure overnight, as specified by architect or construction manager. H&C POLISHED CONCRETE 03 35 00 - 6 F. Apply densifying impregnator undiluted at approximately 200 square feet per gallon using a stiff, long bristled broom. Cover the entire work area liberally and allow to sit for 10 minutes. Apply again to areas where the densifying impregnator has soaked in and allow to sit for an ad- ditional 30 minutes. Squeegee excess material off the floor. Allow 12 to 24 hours for full cure. G. Grind the floor to within 2 - 3 inches of walls with metal bonded diamond grits of 150 and 300, grinding 90 degrees from each previous grind and removing all the scratches from the previous grit. Vacuum the floor thoroughly after each grind, using a squeegee vacuum attachment. H. (If specified) Grind the edges with25, 40, 60, 120 and 220 grit grinding pads, removing all of the scratches from the previous grit. Vacuum the floor thoroughly after each grind, using a squeegee vacuum attachment. I. Polish the floor with phenolic resin bonded diamond grits of 100, 400, and 800, first polishing the edges (If specified) with pads of the same grit and then the field of the floor, removing all scratches from the previous grit. After each polish, clean the floor thoroughly using clean water and an autoscrubber or a mop and a wet vacuum. J. Apply Dye/Color in desired patterns. Remove excess dye residue with an autoscrubber. K. Polish the floor to desired sheen level with phenolic resin bonded diamond grits of 1500, and 3000, first polishing the edges (If specified) with pads of the same grit and then the field of the floor, removing all scratches from the previous grit. After each polish, clean the floor thorough- ly using clean water and an autoscrubber or a mop and a wet vacuum. L. Apply LS Guard Lithium densifier to concrete using microfiber applicator. After densifier has dried, burnish floor using high speed burnisher and a diamond impregnated pad. M. Upon completion, the work shall be ready for final inspection and acceptance by the customer. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect the floors from damage until substantial completion. PART 4 - SCHEDULES 4.1 SHEEN A. Finished floor shall have a minimum gloss reading of 30 lumens with an average of 40 lumens measured at an incident angle of 60%. 1. Level 1, Matte Finish: 100 grit. H&C POLISHED CONCRETE 03 35 00 - 7 4.2 EXPOSED AGGREGATE A. Exposure rate per Architect/Owner selection. 4.3 EDGES A. All edges shall be polished to the wall. END OF SECTION 03 35 00 H&C MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT 04 05 15-1 SECTION 04 05 15 - MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Mix Designs: 1. Submit mix designs and samples to the Architect for review prior to delivering materials to the site or commencing the Work. a. Mortar Mix Design: Furnish in accordance with ASTM C270. b. Grout Mix Design: Furnished by either the grout supplier or an independent testing laboratory. Submit comprehensive strength data with mix design submittals when pozzolans are used. 2. Submit written colored mortar proportions for each color of mortar to be supplied for review by the Architect. B. Samples: Submit mortar channels for color selection. C. Product Data: If alternative mortar materials are to be provided, submit current instructions stating the actual quantities and mixing instructions for alternative mortar materials to conform to specified requirements. 1. Submit test report data substantiating compliance with specified performance requirements. 2. Submit current ICC Evaluation Report. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: Cementitious materials shall be stored off the ground, under cover and shall be kept dry. B. Pre-blended Mortar Mix Delivery System: The use of dry pre-blended mortar silos and bulk bags shall be acceptable. Bulk bags and silos shall be sealed to prohibit contamination of the ingredients and to keep the materials dry until mixed. 1.3 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Hot Weather Requirements: Wet mortar board before loading and cover mortar to retard drying when not being used. H&C MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT 04 05 15-2 2. Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with "Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction" by IMIAC; provide adequate equipment for heating the mortar and grout materials, when air temperature is below 40 degrees F.. Temperatures of the separate materials, including water, shall not exceed 140 degrees F. when placed in the mixer. When air temperature is below 32 degrees F., maintain mortar temperature on boards above freezing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Mortar: 1. Cement: Type II Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. 3. Water: Clean and potable. 4. Admixtures: a. Chemical: The use of accelerator admixtures, water reducing plasticizers and other chemical admixtures shall not be allowed. b. Mineral: Pozzolans must conform to ASTM C 618, Type C or F. c. Water-Repellent Admixture: In accordance with Section 04 05 26. d. Alternative Plasticizer: Pozzolanic formulation consisting of a combination of hydroxy aluminum silicates and diatomite: 1) Alternative Plasticizer Manufacturer: Engaged in producing materials with a satisfactory performance record for at least 5 years. 2) Mortar mix design shall be in accordance with ICC Evaluation Report, in accordance with the mortar type specified elsewhere in this specification. 3) Provide alternative plasticizer in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, including specific mixing instruction. 4) No other admixtures shall be used in conjunction with the alternative plasticizer unless approved in writing by the alternative plasticizer manufacturer. 5) Packing and Shipping: Mortar admixture(s) shall be delivered to the job site in manufacturer's original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's batch number. 5. Mortar Color: a. Provide limeproof, inorganic compounds which shall not exceed 15% by weight of the cement, unless otherwise directed by Manufacturer. b. Carbon black shall not exceed 3% by weight of the cement. c. Factory blend color for full color saturation of mortar joint and factory package for unitized jobsite mixing at a ratio of one unit of color per sack of cementitious material, (portland cement, lime, or masonry cement). H&C MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT 04 05 15-3 B. Grout: 1. Cement: Type II Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150. 2. Aggregate: ASTM C404 and as follows: a. Sand: Size No. 1 for fine aggregate. b. Pea Gravel: Size No. 8 for coarse aggregate. 3. Water: Clean and potable. 2.2 MIXES A. Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type S, M, N & O. 1. Measurement: Accurately measure materials by ASTM C270 by the Property Method per Table 23. 2. Mix cementitious materials and aggregates 3 to 5 minutes in a mechanical mixer. Small amounts of mortar may be mixed by hand. Adjust consistency of the mortar depending on the absorptive quality of the units being laid, and to the satisfaction of the mason. 3. If mortar begins to stiffen, it may be retempered by adding water within a basin formed by the mortar, and remixing. 4. Use within 2-1/2 hours of initial mixing and no mortar shall be used after it has begun to set or after is has become harsh or non-plastic. 5. Mix color in a specific and exacting ratio in accordance with the Architect's reviewed submittals. 6. Water-Repellent Admixture: In accordance with Section 04 05 26. 7. Mortar used for historic, rehabilitation, and/or remodel Projects, as applicable, shall conform to the following: a. Portland cement content of the repointing mortar shall not exceed 20% by volume of the combined content of cement and lime unless it can be determined by chemical analysis that the original mortar contained a high content of Portland cement. b. Verify this requirement with the Architect prior to proceeding with the Work. 8. Preblended Mortar Mix: Provide mortar as specified herein, except that dry ingredients may be preblended and bulk packaged for delivery to a jobsite silo (which loads into batch mixer) or bagged for hand loading into mixer. Moisture shall be extracted from sands. Digital printouts displaying the proportions of each batch shall be submitted to the Architect upon request. Mixing shall be accomplished by mechanical mixer in accordance with instructions provided by Preblended Mortar Mix Distributor. 9. Evaluation: Provide preconstruction and construction evaluation by ASTM C 780 for Evaluation for Mortars for Unit Masonry. B. Grout: 1. Job-Site Mixed: In accordance with ASTM C476. 2. Transit-Mixed: H&C MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT 04 05 15-4 a. Designed by the supplier or an independent testing laboratory with a minimum compressive strength of 2000 psi (140mPa) in 28 days, unless higher strength is required by the Structural Drawings and Notes. b. Slump: Not to exceed 8 inches, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. c. Use within 1-1/2 hours of initial mixing and use no grout after it has begun to set or after it has become harsh or non-plastic. d. Course grout may be used in cavity walls with a horizontal dimension of 2 inches or more, and in hollow cell construction 4 inches or more in both horizontal directions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation of mortar and grout shall be as specified under each of the following Sections and in accordance with AMG Standard 108: 1. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Unit Masonry B. Colored Mortar: Consistency of appearance shall be maintained throughout the Project. C. Temperature: Mortar and grout shall have a temperature between 50 degrees F. and 90 degrees F while being used. D. Grout may be poured by hand bucket, concrete hopper or though a grout pump. Grout spaces shall not be wet down prior to pouring grout. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Tests and inspections as necessary to verify quality and strength of mortar and grout. Laboratory tests shall conform to applicable ASTM standards and tests. B. Tests: 1. Frequency: As determined by the Architect based upon total time for construction of masonry with not less than two tests per each level of masonry construction, foundation to roof or floors. 2. Testing Laboratory: Inspection and testing of mortar and grout will be performed by a testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01 45 00. The testing laboratory, in addition to meeting requirements of ASTM E329, must be an approved laboratory competent to perform cement physical testing. 3. Distribution of Results of Tests: Within 24 hours of results of tests, copies of the results shall be submitted to the Architect, Contractor, masonry contractor, and the grout supplier if applicable. H&C MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT 04 05 15-5 C. Mortar: 1. Property Specification (ASTM C270): Testing in accordance with ASTM C 780. 2. For determining hardened mortar properties, prepare 3 test specimens for each test age and property. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of the specimens tested at the age specified. Specimens shall be tested at 7 and 28 days. D. Grout: 1. Testing per ASTM C1019. 2. Three test specimens shall constitute one sample. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of the specimen tested at the age specified. 3. The compression strength will be considered satisfactory if the average of three consecutive tests of the grout is equal to or greater than the specified strength and no individual strength test falls below the specified strength by more than 500 psi. 3.3 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. END OF SECTION 04 05 15 H&C MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04 05 23-1 SECTION 04 05 23 - MASONRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Furnishing the following items for installation under Section 04 22 00: 1. Ties. 2. Anchors. 3. Control joints. 4. Through wall flashings. 5. Weep holes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's brochures depicting each of the masonry accessories which will be used prior to delivering materials to the site or commencing the Work in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Arizona Masonry Guild Standard 108-95 - Standard Practices 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: Store metal items at the site off the ground and in a manner to prevent damage to the materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, subject to compliance with Specification requirements. 1. Dur-O-Wall Inc. www.dur-o-wal.com 2. Heckmann Building Products, Inc. www.heckmannbuildingprods.com 3. Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. www.h-b.com H&C MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04 05 23-2 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Wire: ASTM A82, diameter as specified for accessory. B. Flat and Corrugated Sheet Steel: ASTM A653 or ASTM A568. C. Bar Anchor Material: ASTM A36. D. Galvanized Finish: ASTM A641, Class 1, mill galvanized for interior walls, or ASTM A153, Class B-2, hot dip galvanized for exterior walls. E. Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03 20 00. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Anchors and ties shall be steel with zinc coated finish or shall be of other non- corrosive metal. B. Ties: 1. Adjustable Wall Ties (Facing over CMU): a. 3/16 inch diameter steel wire of approved shape, machine fabricated. b. Provide 2 piece "rectangular" strut compression and tension, eye and pin tie as required by Code. 2. Veneer Anchors (Facing over Framing): a. 3/16 inch diameter steel wire of approved shape, machine fabricated, designed to be screw fastened. b. Provide 2 piece "Rectangular" or "Triangular" strut, compression and tension, eye and pin tie. c. Screws shall have a copolymer corrosion resistant coating or be Type 304 stainless steel, suitable for attachment of veneer anchors, length as required. 3. Sheet Metal Ties: 22 gauge corrosion resistant corrugated sheet metal, not less than 7/8 inch wide by 7 inches long, pre-punched for wire ties to horizontal steel. 4. Metal Lath Ties: 3.4 lb. (1.5kg) copper-bearing expanded plaster lath. C. Joint Reinforcing: Ladder type, galvanized steel rods of width 2 inches less than wall thickness conforming to UBC Standard 21-10, Part 1, [ASTM A951, corrosion protective finish with longitudinal wires not less than 0.148 inch (3.75mm) or more than one half the mortar joint thickness and cross wires not less than 0.148 inch (3.75mm) nor more than the diameter of the longitudinal wires with cross wires projecting nor more than 1/8 inch (3.2mm) beyond the outside longitudinal wires]. H&C MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04 05 23-3 D. Anchors: 1. Dovetail Anchor: 16 gauge flat sheet steel, one inch wide, 5-1/2 inch length, designed for use with embedded slot or inserts. 2. Bar Anchors: Machine made corrosion protected metal with cross section area not less than .25 square inch with ends turned up 2 inches, not less than 16 inches long for 8 inch walls nor less than 24 inches long for 12 inch walls. E. Control Joints: 1. Rubber: Extruded, solid section, ASTM D2000 2AA-805 with a durometer hardness of 70 or 80 when tested per ASTM D2240. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): ASTM D2287, Type PVC 654-4 with a durometer hardness of 85 (+5) when tested per ASTM D2240, minimum tensile strength of 1750 psi with minimum 300 percent elongation per ASTM D638, and cold crack brittleness of 50 degrees F per ASTM D746. 3. Sizes and Profiles: As indicated on Drawings. F. Joint Filler: Closed cell neoprene rubber conforming to ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1, oversized 50 percent, self expanding, 2-3/4 or 3 inch width by maximum length. G. Through-Wall Flashing: 1. Granular surfaced Self-adhering, flexible flashing consisting of pliable and highly adhesive rubberized asphalt compound overall 60 mil thickness; protected from contamination from dust or dirt by a silicone-coated release sheet, to be removed immediately before installation. 2. Vycor Basik as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Co. - Conn., Cambridge, MA. (800) 558-7066. 3. Provide wall flashing accessories (surface conditioner, termination mastic) as required to provide a complete installation. H. Weep Holes: Round plastic tubing, 3/8 inch diameter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Installation of masonry accessories shall be as specified under each of the following Sections and in accordance with AMG Standard 108. 1. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Masonry Units B. Control Joints: Provide control joints as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section for the masonry units. H&C MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04 05 23-4 C. Through Wall Flashing: 1. Provide through-wall flashings as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section for the masonry units. 2. Specified flashing and accessories are not designed for use as a finished surface or for use in areas where they will be exposed to sunlight. Prevent contact with products containing fresh coal tar or coal tar pitch. Prevent contact with sealant products containing polysulfide polymers due to incompatibility. 3. Remove deleterious materials from surfaces to be flashed. 4. Apply surface conditioner by spray, brush or roller at the rate recommended by manufacturer to dirty or dusty surfaces or surfaces having an irregular or rough texture before installing flashing membrane. 5. Remove silicone-coated release paper and position flashing carefully before placing it against the surface. When properly positioned, place against surface by pressing firmly into place by hand roller or blunt object, such as the backside of a utility knife. Fully adhere flashing to substrate to prevent water from migrating under flashing. 6. Overlap adjacent pieces 2 inches and roll overlaps with a steel hand roller or a blunt object. Fully seal overlaps to prevent water leakage through laps. Trim bottom edge 1/2 inch back from exposed face of the building. 7. At heads and sill where flashing is indicated to be placed, turn up ends a minimum of 2 inches and make careful folds to form a pan, with the pan seams sealed with compatible mastic acceptable to flashing manufacturer. 8. Apply a bead or trowel coat of compatible mastic acceptable to flashing manufacturer along top edge, seams, cuts and penetrations. Seal penetrations through flashing with compatible mastic acceptable to flashing manufacturer. D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section for the masonry units. 3.2 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. END OF SECTION 04 05 23 H&C CMU INTEGRAL WATER REPELLANT 04 05 26-1 SECTION 04 05 26 - CMU INTEGRAL WATER REPELLENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Water repellent admixture shall be provided in both the masonry units and mortar used in all above grade exterior CMU wall construction, including parapets, and shall constitute a complete integral water repellent system for exterior above grade walls meeting the following requirements: 1. Admixture shall leave the finished surfaces water repellent and shall not alter the natural texture or color of the masonry units. 2. Admixture shall provide wind driven rain resistance equivalent to Class E Rating as measured by ASTM E514-74. 3. Bond strength as determined by ASTM E72 shall not be reduced by the use of the water repellent admixture. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Integrally Water Repellent Concrete Masonry Unit Samples: Unit manufacturer shall submit samples of the masonry units to be used in the structure which will be reviewed by the Architect for both aesthetics and effectiveness. B. Product Data: Indicate methods of fabrication and installation for the following materials: 1. Submit current instructions stating the actual quantities of water repellent material required to meet the guarantee requirements. 2. Submit test report data substantiating compliance with specified performance requirements. 3. Detail Drawings (Water Repellent Units): Submit manufacturer's flashing and weep hole diagrams. C. Submit warranties for integral water repellent concrete masonry wall system as specified herein and in accordance with Section 01 77 00. D. Unit manufacturer shall submit copy of current Certificate of Qualification issued by water repellent manufacturer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Water Repellent Manufacturer: Engaged in producing materials with a satisfactory performance record for at least 5 years. H&C CMU INTEGRAL WATER REPELLANT 04 05 26-2 2. Masonry Unit Fabricator/Manufacturer: Trained, approved and accepted by the manufacturer. B. Mock-Ups: In accordance with Section 04 22 00 and as follows: 1. Admixture shall be used in materials used to construct the masonry sample wall mock-up located at the job site. 2. The purpose of this sample will be to observe color uniformity and intensity in the mortar, methods used to incorporate admixture into mortar, and workmanship techniques. C. Regulatory Requirements: Use of water repellent admixtures shall be in strict accordance with applicable Federal, State and local requirements, including, but not limited to, environmental regulations. D. Preconstruction Meeting: 1. Prior to fabrication or installation of components of the masonry wall system, a jobsite meeting shall be conducted with the Architect, Contractor, masonry subcontractor, installers of related work, the integral water repellent manufacturer's representative, the CMU fabricator representative, and other involved entities. 2. The purpose of this meeting is to ensure that individuals involved in the erection of masonry understand the procedures of erection to achieve a water-repellent masonry assembly system. E. Pre-Installation Conference: A representative of the water repellent manufacturer shall be present prior to and at the beginning of wall construction to review the work with the Architect and the Contractor. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Mortar admixture shall be delivered to the job site in manufacturer's original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's batch number. B. Do not store in areas where temperature will fall below 20 degrees F. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Water Repellent Manufacturer: Water-repellent shall be warranted by Admixture manufacturer to be free of defects and to meet manufacturer’s published physical and chemical properties. B. CMU producer shall warrant that Integral Polymeric CMU Water-repellent has been provided at appropriate dosage rate in all units shipped to this project for use in exterior walls. C. Masonry Installer shall warrant that only CMUs and mortar containing Integral Polymeric CMU Water-repellent have been placed in exterior walls and that admixture was included in the mortar mix in accordance with water repellent manufacturer’s printed instructions. H&C CMU INTEGRAL WATER REPELLANT 04 05 26-3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Water-Repellent Admixture: The following shall be included in exterior masonry units. 1. Liquid polymeric admixture(s) formulated for mixing with mortar mix and formulated for mixing with concrete during production of concrete masonry units to cross link and provide resistance to water penetration to achieve a Class E Rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E514. 2. Admixture shall not reduce flexural and compressive strength of mortar when tested in accordance with ASTM C1072 and C780. 3. Concrete Masonry Unit Manufacturer: Acceptable to integral water repellent manufacturer and qualified by integral water repellent manufacturer to comply with ASTM E514 for water permeance testing. 4. Acceptable Product and Manufacturer: Dry Block Mortar Admixture as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Co. - Conn., Cambridge, MA (800) 558-7066. www.grace.com PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION A. In accordance with Section 04 22 00. END OF SECTION 04 05 26 H&C CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04 22 00-1 SECTION 04 22 00 - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples to Architect for review prior to constructing job-site mock-ups, delivering materials to Site or commencing Work in this Section. 1. Provide 2 samples of each type and weight classification of concrete masonry units, (stretcher units), to be used on Project showing range of texture and/or color variations of exposed surfaces for units. 2. Units provided to Project shall match these samples. B. Certificates: Submit certification to the Architect prior to delivery of concrete masonry units to jobsite, signed by Concrete Masonry Unit Manufacturer, stating that the concrete masonry units to be supplied: 1) shall meet the specified requirements for concrete masonry units for exterior building wall construction, and; 2) are suitable for proposed usage. C. Test Reports: 1. Submit test results for concrete masonry units for exterior building wall construction to be used to Architect in accordance with Section 01 45 00. 2. Test results shall clearly indicate: a. Types of materials and composition. b. Classification of concrete masonry unit in accordance with ASTM C90 requirements. c. Water penetration and leakage in accordance with testing specified under Source Quality Control specified in this section. D. Testing laboratory shall notify Architect of non-conforming material submittals. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. The "Levels of Quality", Standard 107 of Arizona Masonry Guild (AMG) shall apply and by reference is hereby made a part of this Specification. Reference to Custom, Standard or Economy in this Specification shall be as defined in latest edition of AMG Standard 107. 2. Comply with the requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 "Specifications for Masonry Structures", except as otherwise indicated. H&C CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04 22 00-2 B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Masonry materials and workmanship shall meet requirements of building codes which are applicable to jurisdiction in which Project is located. C. Certifications: Concrete masonry units shall be supplied by a manufacturer participating in the Certified Block Program of the Arizona Masonry Guild. D. Installer Qualifications: The Masonry Subcontractor shall have a supervisor on the jobsite, whenever masonry work is being performed, who is Certified by the Arizona Masonry Contractors Association. Proof of certification shall be submitted to the Architect prior to start of masonry work. E. Mock-Ups: Prior to start of Work, construct a fully representative sample wall of masonry units 8 feet high by 12 feet long, with a 90 degree corner, including reinforcing and accessories, on a poured footing for Architect’s review. Construct sample wall in ample time to allow evaluation of mortar color after drying. Sample wall will not be conditionally approved. Construct successive samples as required until acceptable to the Architect. When accepted, sample wall will be the standard of comparison for the remainder of the work. Do not remove sample wall until authorized in writing by the Architect. 1. Sample wall shall provide a standard of workmanship, bond, thickness and tooling of joints. 2. Construct successive sample panels until standard is approved. 3. When accepted, sample wall shall be standard of comparison for remainder of masonry Work. 4. This sample, when accepted by the Architect, will function as a reference base for acceptance or rejection of final work. 5. Sample wall shall be reviewed by the specification writer or Architect's contract administrator for acceptance. 6. Sample wall shall receive water repellent as specified in Section 07 19 00. 7. Upon completion of Project, remove sample wall from site and dispose of in a legal manner. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle masonry units in such a manner as to prevent chipping and breakage. B. Deliver and store materials in dry, protected areas. C. Keep free of stain or other damage. D. Locate storage piles, pallets, stacks or bins to avoid or protect material from heavy or unnecessary traffic. E. Segregate storage piles, pallets, stacks or bins of fire-rated units from non-rated units and maintain clear identification of the rating of the units. F. Replace damaged material at no cost to Owner. H&C CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04 22 00-3 1.4 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Hot Weather Requirements: 1. When ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees F., or when ambient air temperature exceeds 90 degrees F. and wind velocity is greater than 8 mph, Masonry Contractor shall implement hot weather protection procedures as submitted to Architect. 2. Do not spread mortar beds more than 4 feet ahead of placing block units. 3. Place block units within one minute of spreading mortar. B. Cold Weather Requirements: 1. Fully protect concrete masonry units against freezing by a weather-tight covering which shall also prevent accumulation of ice. 2. Do not lay concrete masonry units when temperature of surrounding atmosphere is below 40 degrees F. or is likely to fall below 40 degrees F. in the 24 hour period after laying, unless adequate protection is provided. C. Field Measurements: 1. Verify measurements shown on Drawings by taking field measurements. 2. Proper fit and attachment of concrete masonry units is required. 1.5 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING A. Coordination: Coordinate with other Trades whose Work relates to concrete masonry unit installation for placing required blocking, backing, furring, conduits and other items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Concrete masonry units as manufactured by the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Western Block, 4021 South 19th Ave., Phoenix, AZ 85041. 602-243-3975. 2. Quality Block, Inc., 3035 South 35th Ave., Phoenix, AZ 85009. 602-269-7691. 3. Superlite Block, Inc. 4. As approved by Architect. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Materials shall be new, of uniform quality, suitable and without defects affecting the strength or service of the structure. H&C CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04 22 00-4 B. General Requirements for Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Concrete masonry units shall meet ASTM C90 requirements except that when CMU will be exposed in final construction, ASTM C90-00, paragraph 7.2.1 shall be modified to read: "Three percent of a shipment containing chips not larger than 1/2 inch in any dimension, or cracks not wider than 0.02 in. and not longer than 10% of the nominal height of the unit is permitted." Linear shrinkage of units of units shall not exceed 0.065 percent. 2. Units shall be in the same condition in wall as they were upon delivery. 3. Unit sizes shall be as shown on Drawings. 4. Texture and color shall be consistent for all units provided for exposed walls. Range of texture and color shall be within that shown by samples reviewed by Architect. 5. Surface of units shall be clean and free from dirt when laid in walls. 6. Units not complying with the appropriate ASTM Standards and AMG Standard 107 shall not be laid in the wall where exposed to view. Any unit that is chipped in excess of the requirements of AMG Standard 107 will be rejected and shall be removed and replaced. 7. Provide special block sizes and shapes required or as shown on Drawings. 8. CMU may be used for construction of building walls exposed to the exterior if they comply with requirements specified under Source Quality Control. 9. Water-Repellent Admixture: In accordance with Section 04 05 26. Concrete masonry units used to construct exterior building walls shall contain the recommended amount of integral water repellent admixture, as per manufacturer’s certification program. 10. Provide units of uniform color and appearance where the completed CMU wall is indicated to be stained with water repellent and masonry stain specified in Section 07 19 00. C. Hollow CMU Classifications: The following requirements shall apply to all shapes, colors, textures and sizes of CMU provided. 1. Size: a. 4 in. x 8 in. x 16 in. b. 8 in. x 8 in. x 16 in. c. 12 in. x 8 in. x 16 in. 2. Lightweight units: Weighing less than 105 lbs. per cubic foot and manufactured from volcanic scoria aggregate per ASTM C331. 3. Medium weight units: Weighing 105 lbs. per cubic foot to less than 125 lbs. per cubic foot and manufactured from a combination of volcanic scoria aggregate conforming to ASTM C331 and sand conforming to ASTM C33. 4. Normal weight units: Weighing 125 lbs. per cubic foot or more and manufactured with sand conforming to ASTM C33. 5. Score Pattern: Running Bond. 6. Fire-resistant Rated Lightweight Units: a. Provide units manufactured and certified to comply with UL 618 – Standards of Concrete Masonry Units for the fire-resistance rating required. b. Weighing less than 105 lbs per cubic foot and manufactured with sand and gravel, cinders, blast furnace slag, expanded clay or shale, pumice, or other proprietary aggregates complying with ASTM C331 7. Color: Masonry stain color as selected by Architect. H&C CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04 22 00-5 D. Hollow Sandblasted CMU Classifications: The following shall apply to all shapes, colors, textures and sizes of CMU provided. 1. Size: a. 4 in. x 4 in. x 16 in. b. 8 in. x 4 in. x 16 in. c. 12 in. x 4 in. x 16 in. 2. Lightweight units: Weighing less than 105 lbs. per cubic foot and manufactured from volcanic scoria aggregate per ASTM C331. 3. Medium weight units: Weighing 105 lbs. per cubic foot to less than 125 lbs. per cubic foot and manufactured from a combination of volcanic scoria aggregate conforming to ASTM C331 and sand conforming to ASTM C33. 4. Normal weight units: Weighing 125 lbs. per cubic foot or more and manufactured with sand conforming to ASTM C33. 5. Score Pattern: Running Bond. 6. Fire-resistant Rated Lightweight Units: a. Provide units manufactured and certified to comply with UL 618 – Standards of Concrete Masonry Units for the fire-resistance rating required. b. Weighing less than 105 lbs per cubic foot and manufactured with sand and gravel, cinders, blast furnace slag, expanded clay or shale, pumice, or other proprietary aggregates complying with ASTM C331 7. Color: Manufacturer’s standard integral color block with clear sealer. 8. Finish: Sandblasted surface on exterior and interior faces. 9. Location: (4) Four accent bands at all masonry locations. Reference drawings for locations. E. Accessory Units: Provide units as required for window sills and jambs, doors, control joints, bond beams, lintels, pilaster, caps and other locations as indicated on Drawings with a minimum of block cutting. Accessory units shall match adjacent unit color and texture unless noted otherwise. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Reinforcing: In accordance with Section 04 05 23. B. Reinforcing Steel: As specified under Section 03 20 00. C. Mortar and Grout: As specified under Section 04 05 15. Provide water repellent admixture in accordance with Section 04 05 26. D. Masonry Wall Insulation: As specified under Section 04 21 19. E. Sheet Metal Flashings: See Section 07 60 00. Furnish shapes in accordance with project requirements and NCMA TEK 19-2A, 19-4A and 19-5A. F. Steel Lintels: As indicated or scheduled on Structural Drawings. H&C CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04 22 00-6 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete masonry units to be provided for exterior exposed building wall construction shall be tested by manufacturer using a spray bar test as follows: 1. Testing shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Individual concrete masonry units shall be placed on a rack where water is sprayed at a rate of 140 gallons per hour for a minimum of 4 hours. 3. Testing shall be made upon concrete masonry units prior to application of post-applied water repellent. 4. Test results for units regularly manufactured using a standard mix design within the previous 6 months shall be acceptable. 5. Test results shall meet or exceed the following: Location Results Inside front face shell <20% damp (no running water or sheen) Center web Dry Inside outer web <10% damp Inside of back face shell Dry Outside of back face shell Dry 6. Submit test reports as specified herein under "Submittals." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Installer shall examine supporting structure and conditions under which unit masonry is to be installed, and notify Contractor, in writing, conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. Do not proceed with the installation of unit masonry Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. B. Do not use units with chips, cracks, or other defects which might be visible in the finished Work unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. C. Do not build on frozen Work; remove and replace unit masonry Work damaged by frost or freezing. D. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not lower freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or anti-freeze agents, and do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 3.2 PREPARATION H&C CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04 22 00-7 A. Protection: Protect sills, ledges, offsets and other projections from dropping of mortar and grout. 3.3 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION A. General Requirements for Concrete Masonry Walls: 1. Workmanship: a. Provide Standard Level workmanship as defined by AMG Standard 107. b. Concrete masonry units which will be exposed in the finished work shall be treated as an architectural finish and shall be handled carefully to ensure that chippages do not occur during handling and laying. Handling shall be minimized on the jobsite to eliminate chances for chippage. 2. Lay units in uniform and true courses, level and plumb to height indicated on Drawings. 3. Lay concrete unit masonry in such a way that cracks are not formed at time unit is placed in wall. 4. Units shall not be wetted before being used and shall be laid dry. 5. Adjusting Units: a. Units shall be adjusted to be level, plumb and straightened into final position in wall while mortar is still soft and plastic enough to ensure a good bond. b. Avoid over-plumbing and pounding of corners and jambs to fit stretcher units after they are set in position. c. If position of unit is shifted after mortar has stiffened, or bond is broken or cracks are formed, re-lay unit in new mortar. 6. Bearings on Walls: Provide 3 courses of solid units or grouted hollow masonry units below steel bearing plates or beams bearing on walls. Extend bearings each side of contact with load as required to properly transfer loads into wall. 7. Openings: Provide openings in masonry walls where required or indicated. Steel lintels shall be provided unless otherwise noted. 8. Cutting of masonry: When required, exposed block units shall be cut with a power driven Carborundum or diamond disc blade saw. When using "wet" cutting methods, clean water shall be used on exposed units. 9. Anchor masonry units facing against or abutting concrete members to concrete by use of dovetailed flat bar anchors inserted in slots built into concrete. a. Space anchors not more than 16 inches vertically and 24 inches horizontally. b. Maintain a space not less than 1/2 inch width between masonry and concrete members, keeping space free of mortar or other rigid materials so as to permit differential movement. B. Bonding: 1. Bond pattern shall be regular running bond unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. H&C CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04 22 00-8 2. Bond shall be plumb throughout face of wall. C. Bearing Wall Intersections: 1. Intersecting block bearing walls shall not be tied together in a masonry bond, except at corners. 2. One wall shall terminate at face of other wall with a control joint at intersection. 3. Tie intersecting wall together with reinforcing bars as shown on structural drawings. 4. Bends at ends of tie bars shall be embedded in grouted cells. 5. Rake out vertical joint between intersecting walls to a depth of 3/4 inch after mortar has stiffened. 6. Provide sealing of control joint as specified in Section 07 92 00. D. Non-Bearing Wall Intersections: 1. Tie non-bearing wall together with reinforcing bars as shown on structural drawings. 2. Rake out vertical joint between intersecting walls to a depth of 3/4 inch after mortar has stiffened. 3. Provide sealing of control joint as specified in Section 07 92 00. E. Joining of Work: 1. Where fresh masonry joins partially set masonry the exposed surface of the set masonry shall be cleaned and lightly wetted so as to obtain the best possible bond. 2. Remove loose concrete block and mortar. 3. Stop-off a horizontal run of masonry by racking back 1/2 brick length in each course and, if grout is used, stopping the grout 4 inches back of the rack. 4. Toothing will not be permitted, except upon written approval of the Architect. F. Mortar Joints: 1. Joints shall be straight, clean and a uniform 3/8 inch thickness on exposed wall face and in accordance with NCMA TEK 19-2A. 2. Exposed vertical and horizontal joints shall be tooled when mortar is “thumbprint” hard with round or other approved jointer, slightly larger than the width of the joints to produce a dense, slightly concave or "V" tooled surface (as indicated on Drawings) which is well bonded to block at edges. Raked joints shall not be used on single wythe exterior building wall construction. 3. Joints shall be tooled flush at: a. Below grade and planter surfaces to receive dampproofing or waterproofing, b. Interior or exterior surfaces to receive ceramic tile, stucco, plaster or other finishes requiring flush joints that are to be concealed. 4. Solidly fill joints from face of unit to depth of face shell, except where specified otherwise. 5. Full bedding to be provided for first course on foundation and wherever maximum strength is required. 6. Butter vertical head joints well and shove these joints tight so that mortar bonds well to H&C CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04 22 00-9 both units. 7. Full coverage to be provided on bed of face shells and webs surrounding cells to be filled. 8. Bee-holes or other open joints shall be filled and tooled with mortar while mortar is still fresh. G. Control Joints: 1. Provide control joints, as detailed, at vertical masonry walls where such walls exceed 40 feet in length. In long length of walls, provide joints at approximately 20 feet on center or as detailed. 2. Control joints shall be continuous full height of walls. 3. At bond beams, control joints shall separate both block and grout; however, steel reinforcing shall be continuous. 4. Horizontal wire reinforcing shall not run through control joint. 5. Control joints shall not occur at wall corners, intersections, ends, within 24 inches of concentrated points of bearing or jambs or over openings unless specifically indicated on Structural Drawings. 6. Control joint materials shall be held back from finished surface as required to allow for sealant and back-up materials. H. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing: 1. Place horizontal joint reinforcing every 16 inches vertically throughout wall construction. 2. Continuously reinforce first bed joint immediately above and below openings. Provide reinforcing in second bed joint above and below openings which extends 2 feet beyond each side of opening. 3. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches at splices. 4. Cut and bend reinforcing at corners. I. Vertical Reinforcing and Bond Beam Reinforcing: 1. Place in accordance with requirements of Drawings. 2. Vertical Reinforcement: Provide continuous reinforcing full height of wall at wall ends, corners, intersections, jambs of openings and each side of control joints. Vertical reinforcing shall match and lap dowels which are at top of foundation walls and precast concrete beams. 3. Bond Beams: Provide horizontal reinforcing of 2 bars in minimum 8 inch deep grouted continuous bond beam at roof and elevated floor lines. 4. Parapets: Provide horizontal reinforcing of 1 bar in minimum 8 inch deep grouted continuous bond beam at top of parapets. 5. Bond Beam and Parapet Reinforcing at Vertical Control Joints: Place bars continuous through control joint and wrap mastic tape around bars for 18 inches each side of control joint. 6. Bond Beam and Parapet Reinforcing at Corners and Wall Intersections: Provide bent bars to match reinforcing at corners and wall intersections. 7. Lap splices in reinforcing not less than 48 bar diameters add 6 inches to minimum lap at vertical bars. 8. Use spacers to position reinforcing steel in center of grout at center of wall as required H&C CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04 22 00-10 by code. J. Grouting: 1. Reinforcing steel is to be in place and inspected before grouting starts. 2. Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alignment to maintain a continuous cell area. 3. Keep cell to be grouted free from mortar. 4. Fill cells solidly with grout in lifts not to exceed 5 feet. 5. Grout may be poured by hand bucket, concrete hopper or through a grout pump. 6. Do not wet down grout space prior to pouring of grout. 7. Stop pours 1-1/2 inches below top of cell to form a key at pour points. 8. Grout shall be consolidated by mechanical vibration during placing before loss of plasticity in a manner to fill grout space. Grout pours greater than 12 inches shall be reconsolidated by mechanical vibration to minimize voids due to water loss. Grout pours 12 inches or less in height shall be mechanically vibrated, or rodded. 9. Grout barrier below bond beams shall be continuous wire lath or other approved material. 10. Grout beams over openings and bond beams in a continuous operation. 11. Solidly grout in place bolts, anchors and other items within wall construction. 12. Fully grout jambs and head of metal door frames connected to masonry. Filling of frames shall be done as each 2 feet of masonry is laid. 13. Use extreme care to prevent grout or mortar from staining face of the masonry. 14. Immediately remove grout or mortar which is visible on face of masonry. K. Provisions for Other Trades and Built-in Items: 1. Build in items required and indicated, including; but not limited to, reinforcing steel, anchors, flashings, sleeves, frames, structural steel, loose lintels, anchor bolts, nailing blocks, door and window frames and miscellaneous iron. 2. Enclosures for pipes, stacks, ducts and conduits: a. Construct slots, chases, cavities, and similar spaces as required. b. Where masonry is to enclose conduit or piping, bring it to proper level indicated and as directed. c. Cover no pipe, conduit chases or enclosures until advised that Work has been inspected and approved. 3. Insulation: Fill open block cavities in exterior masonry walls with masonry wall insulating fill, as specified in Section 04 05 23 and 04 22 19.13. Complete filling of loose fill type insulation must be assured by rodding where there are mortar constrictions. L. Tolerances: 1. Standard Level of Quality: In accordance with AMG Standard 107. 2. Custom Level of Quality: a. External corners and other conspicuous lines and levels: +/- 1/4 inch in any 10’-0” section. b. Line of sealant filled movement joints (allowable deviation from specified or H&C CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04 22 00-11 indicated): +/- 3/8 inch in any 10’-0” section. c. Actual cross sectional dimension of columns and walls (allowable deviation from specified or indicated): - 1/4 inch, + 1/2 inch. d. Adjacent unit faces in plane (allowable deviation from specified or indicated): +/- 1/8 inch. e. Mortar bed joint thickness (allowable deviation from specified or indicated): -1/8 inch, +1/8 inch. f. Mortar head joint thickness (allowable deviation from specified or indicated): - 1/8 inch, + 1/4 inch. g. Vertical alignment of the centerline of corresponding head joints in alternate courses when using other than stack bond (allowable deviation from specified or indicated): +/- 3/8 inch. h. Vertical alignment of the centerline of all head joints in a total wall height not to exceed 30’-0” when using other than stack bond (allowable deviation from specified or indicated): +/- one inch. i. Vertical alignment of the centerline of all head joints in total wall height not to exceed 30’-0” when using stack bond: (allowable deviation from specified or indicated): +/- 1/2 inch. M. Joint and Crack Control: In accordance with NCMA TEK 10-1. N. Flashing: In accordance with NCMA TEK 19-2A, 19-4A and 19-5A.and 19-4. O. Weep holes shall be provided above lintels and vertical obstructions as per manufacturer's flashing and weep hole diagrams. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Masonry Tests: Inspection and testing of masonry will be performed by a testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01 45 00. 1. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. 2. A set of 3 masonry prisms shall be built and tested in accordance with ASTM C1314 (formerly E447) Method B for each 5,000 square feet of wall area, but not less than one set of 3 masonry prisms for the Project. 3. Water testing of CMU exterior building walls shall be provided as specified in Section 07 19 00. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Pointing of Mortar Joints: 1. Point and fill holes and cracks in exposed mortar joints. 2. Cut out defective mortar joints to a depth of at least 1/4 inch. 3. When cutting is complete, remove dust and loose material by brushing or vacuuming. 4. Prehydrate mortar for pointing by mixing dry ingredients with only sufficient water to produce a damp mass of such consistency that it will retain its form when it is pressed into a ball with hands, but will not flow under trowel. H&C CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04 22 00-12 5. Allow mortar to stand for a period of not less than one hour nor more than 2 hours, after which remix with addition of sufficient water to produce satisfactory workability. 6. Pointing mortars shall be identical to adjacent mortar in similar joints and finish results shall match and be indistinguishable from original mortar used. 7. Premoisten joint and apply mortar tightly. 8. Tool to match adjacent joints. 9. Moist cure for 72 hours. B. Patching: If approved by Architect, patching of exposed masonry walls shall be done at conclusion of general Work and shall conform as closely as possible to similar surrounding or adjoining Work. 3.6 CLEANING A. Daily Cleaning: Keep walls clean. Soiled masonry from mortar and grout spills which will be exposed to view at completion of Project shall be cleaned immediately with stiff fiber brushes until wall is free of dropped or spattered mortar. B. Remove scaffolding and equipment used in Work. C. Clean up debris, refuse and surplus material and remove from premises. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Furnish temporary protection for exposed masonry corners subject to injury. B. Carefully cover tops of walls left incomplete at conclusion of day's Work with tarpaulins or other approved covering. C. In hot and dry weather, protect masonry against too rapid drying. D. Protect finished Work against freezing for a period of not less than 48 hours by means of enclosures, artificial heat, or such other protective methods as may be required. END OF SECTION 04 22 00 H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 VENEER STONE 04 70 00 #-1 SECTION 04 70 00 MASONRY SIMULATED BRICK AND STONE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Waterproof coatings, setting materials, grouting materials and methods of installation for veneer and dimension stone. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry C. Section 04 70 00 – Masonry - Simulated Brick and Stone Masonry 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108.01 General Requirements: Subsurfaces and Preparations by Other Trades. B. ANSI A108.02 General Requirements: Materials, Environmental, and Workmanship. C. ANSI A108.10 Installation of Grout in Stonework. D. ANSI A108.13 Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Stone and Dimension Stone. E. ANSI A118.4 Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. F. ANSI A118.6 Specifications for Ceramic Stone Grouts. G. ANSI A118.10 Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile And Dimension Stone Installations 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Description: 1. Waterproof coating, setting materials, grouting materials and methods of installation for veneer and dimension stone over cement board. Cement board is installed over an approved sheathing and a code approved water resistant barrier B. Functional Criteria: 1. Performance Requirements a. Shall meet the testing requirements of the manufacturer’s Product Performance Sheet. 2. Substrate Systems: a. Shall be engineered to withstand applicable design loads including required safety factor. b. Maximum deflection of substrate system shall be as required by the veneer masonry manufacturer c. Substrate dimensional tolerance: Flat within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) in any 4 ft (122 cm) radius. d. Surface irregularities: Sheathing not over 1/8 in (3 mm); masonry not over 3/16 in (4.8 mm). 3. Install control joints and expansion joints in adhered masonry veneer work in accordance with TCNA Detail EJ171. 4. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and veneer units. Do not saw-cut joints after installing units. a. Locate joints in veneer surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. b. Joint width and spacing depends on application - follow TCA “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation” Detail "EJ-171 Expansion Joints" or consult sealant manufacturer for recommendation based on project parameters. c. Remove all contaminants and foreign material from joint spaces/surfaces, such as dirt, H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 VENEER STONE 04 70 00 #-2 dust, oil, water, frost, setting/grouting materials, sealers and old sealant/backer. Install appropriate Backing Material (e.g. closed cell backer rod) based on expansion joint design and as specified in Section 07920. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit Samples, and Certificates in accordance with Division 1 General Requirements Submittal Section. B. Samples: Submit samples for approval. Samples shall be of materials specified and of suitable size as required to accurately represent each color and texture used on project. Prepare each sample using same tools and techniques for actual project application. Maintain and make available, at job site, approved samples. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Shall have manufactured waterproofing products in United States for at least ten years. 2. Applicator: Completed veneer stone installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver manufacturer products in original packaging with manufacturer's identification. B. Storage: Store materials supplied by manufacturer in a cool, dry location, out of sunlight, protected from weather and other harmful environment, and at a temperature above 40 °F (4 °C) and below 110 °F (43 °C) in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.8 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS A. Installation Ambient Air Temperature: Minimum of 50 °F (10 °C) and rising, and remain so for 72 hours thereafter B. Substrate Temperature: Do not apply manufacturer materials to substrates whose temperature are below 40 °F (4 °C) or contain frost or ice. C. Inclement Weather: Do not apply manufacturer materials during inclement weather, unless appropriate protection is employed. D. Prior to installation, the wall shall be inspected for surface contamination, or other defects that may adversely affect the performance of the manufacturer materials and shall be free of residual moisture. E. Vent temporary heaters to outside to avoid carbon dioxide damage to new stonework. 1.9 WARRANTY Warranty: 5 year warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Eldorado Stone, LLC, 1370 Grand Avenue, San Marcos, CA 92078 or approved equal 1. Obtain components of manufacturer products from authorized distributors. No substitutions or additions of other materials are permitted without prior written permission from manufacturer for this project. 2. Source Limitations for: Obtain each Veneer Stone color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of stone from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 VENEER STONE 04 70 00 #-3 2.2 MATERIALS A. Veneer Materials 1. Veneer, Type B: Veneer Stone; as follows: a. Manufacturer: Eldorado Stone b. Thickness: 1-5/8”. c. Pattern: Shadow Rock. d. Color: Somerset, to match approved sample range. B. Cement Board Waterproofing: Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membrane For Thin-Set Ceramic Tile And Dimension Stone Installations; ANSI A118.10: 1. SP1 HydroGuard Waterproofing Membrane; an elastomeric waterproofing and crack isolation membrane. C. Specialty Adhesive Mortar Latex-Portland Cement Stone Setting Mortar ANSI A118.4. 1. Mer-Lite 820; a lightweight medium bed latex modified Portland cement dry set mortar for installations requiring a medium bed mortar to compensate for irregularities in the substrate or veneer stone. D. Sanded Portland Cement Grout; ANSI A118.6 1. Sanded PaverGrout or approved equal; a sanded Portland cement grout, color as selected by Architect, a dense matrix grout for veneer stone with widths 1/4 inch to 1 inch. 2.3 RELATED MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Cement Board 1. Minimum ½ inch (13 mm) thick PermaBase® Brand Cement Board complying with ASTM C1325 or Cement Board complying with ASTM C1325 with fiber- mat reinforced edges other approved by manufacturer. B. Substrate Materials: 1. Sheathing shall be installed in accordance with its industry standards and applicable building code. 2. Gypsum Sheathing shall conform to ASTM C79, C1396, or C1177 glass mat gypsum sheathing, minimum thickness 1/2" (12.7 mm). 3. Plywood shall be not less than 15/32" (11 mm) thick, PS-1 Exposure 1 or Exterior grade. 4. Oriented strand board (OSB) shall be not less than 7/16" thick (11.1 mm), PS-2 Exposure 1. 5. For wood-based sheathing (Plywood and OSB), comply with APA-The Engineered Wood Association spacing recommendations for edge and end joints. Gap wood sheathing panels minimum 1/8". 6. Sheathing shall be protected from weather before, during and after application of Teifs NuTech Stucco. C. Water-resistive Barrier (applied over the substrate materials): 1. Water Resistive Barrier Coating a. Keyguard water resistive barrier coating (2 coats required on OSB and Plywood) 1) Treat all sheathing joints with 495 KeyGuard roll on water- resistive barrier and embed Parex 396 Sheathing Tape. 2) Apply 495 KeyGuard roll on Water-resistive barrier to the surface of the appropriate substrate ( Minimum 2 coats on plywood, concrete and masonry). H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 VENEER STONE 04 70 00 #-4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify project site conditions under provisions of Section 01 00 00. B. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's instructions C. Substrate Examination: Examine prior to manufacturer product installation as follows: 1. Substrate shall be of a type approved by manufacturer. 2. Substrate shall be examined for soundness, and other harmful conditions. 3. Substrate shall be free of dust, dirt, laitance, efflorescence, and other harmful contaminants. 4. Substrate construction in accordance with substrate material manufacturer's specifications and applicable building codes. D. Sealants and Backer Rod: To be installed, where required, in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's specifications and published literature, and using the sealant manufacturer's recommended primers. E. Advise Contractor of discrepancies preventing installation of the manufacturer products. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect surrounding material surfaces and areas during installation of system. B. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Installation shall conform to this specification and manufacturer written instructions and drawing details. 1. Comply with applicable ANSI 108 series of the "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile." 2. Comply with TCA installation methods indicated or, if not other otherwise indicated, as applicable to installation conditions shown. 3. Extend stone work into recesses an under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown. 4. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of stone without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of stone abutting trim, finish or built-in items for straight aligned joints. 5. Unless otherwise shown, lay stone in grid pattern. Layout stone work and center stone fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize stone cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown. 6. Locate expansion joints and other sealant filled joints, including control, contraction and isolation joints, where indicated and approved by Architect. 7. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with referenced installation standards and sealant manufacturer's instructions. B. Cement Board Sheathing Joints, Cracks and Protrusions 1. Pre fill all substrate cracks, cold and control joints with Latex Modified Thinset’s or PUC caulking. 2. Fill all voids with Latex Modified Thin set’s to within a minimum of 1/8”. 3. Apply a liberal coat of SP1 HydroGuard Waterproofing Membrane liquid around joints, crack and protrusions. 4. Embed 8” reinforcing fabric into the wet SP1 HydroGuard Waterproofing Membrane, cover with a second coat of SP1 HydroGuard Waterproofing Membrane, “sandwiching” the reinforcing fabric. When the membrane has dried to an emerald green color, apply an additional application to prevent pinholes. C. Waterproof Membrane: 1. Install SP1 HydroGuard waterproof membrane, where required, to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install waterproof membrane in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.1 (A-1 through A-3) and ANSI A108.13. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 VENEER STONE 04 70 00 #-5 3. Review the installation and plan the application sequence. D. Expansion joints: 1. SP1 HydroGuard must not be applied unsupported to bridge across expansion joints. The joint must be cleaned to remove an loose debris and an opened or closed – cell backer rod is installed to the joint to the proper depth as specified by designer. 2. PUC sealant or manufacturer approved equal is pressed into the joint, coating the sides and leaving the joint flush with the surface. After the sealant is dry, the SP1 HydroGuard membrane is applied following the “Membrane application” instructions above. E. Veneer Stone 1. Install stone to comply with referenced TCA and ANSI installation standards, using setting materials indicated. 2. Install Mer-Lite 820 latex Portland cement mortar or approved equal in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.1 (A-1 through A-3) and ANSI A108.5 (A-4.3). 3. Use the appropriate trowel notch size to ensure proper bedding of the tile, brick or stone selected. Work the latex Portland cement mortar into good contact with the substrate and comb with notched side of trowel. 4. Spread only as much latex Portland cement mortar as can be covered while the mortar surface is still wet and tacky. 5. Fit thin brick units around corners, fitments, fixtures, drains and other built-in objects to maintain uniform joint appearance. 6. Make cut edges smooth, even and free from chipping. Do not split veneer units 7. Expansion Joints: The veneer brick or stones are installed over the membrane, leaving a gap over the joint as specified by the designer. After the veneer is set, the joint must be filled as specified by the designer. F. Curing set veneer brick/stone: 1. 72 hours before grouting when the temperature is low or the humidity is high. 2. 48 hours before grouting when hot, dry conditions exist. 3. Check the bond strength carefully before grouting. G. Grouting 1. Grout thin brick to comply with the requirements of the Cement Grout (ANSI A118.7) standards. 2. Verify grout joints are free of dirt, debris or tile spacers. Sponge or wipe dust/dirt off veneer face and remove any water standing in joints. Surface temperature must be between 40-90°F (4-32°C). 3. Measure the specified amount of clean potable water. Pack joints full and free of voids/pits. Initial cleaning can begin as soon as grout has become firm, typically 20-30 minutes after grouting depending on temperature. 4. Drag a clean towel dampened with water, or wipe a clean, dampened sponge, diagonally over the veneer face to remove any grout haze left after “squeegeeing.” Rinse towel/sponge frequently and change rinse water at least every 200 ft2 (19 m2). Repeat this cleaning sequence again if grout haze is still present. 5. Allow grout joints to become firm. Buff surface of grout with clean coarse cloth. Inspect joint for pinholes/voids and repair them with freshly mixed grout. 6. Within 24 hours, check for remaining haze and remove it with warm soapy water and a nylon scrubbing pad, using a circular motion, to lightly scrub surfaces and dissolve haze/film. Do not use acid cleaners on latex Portland cement mortar grout less than 7 days old. 7. Apply masking tape to face of tile, brick or stone veneer. Use caulking gun, or other applicator, to completely fill joints with sealant. Within 5-10 minutes of filling joint, ‘tool’ sealant surface to a smooth finish. Remove masking tape immediately after tooling joint. Wipe smears or excess sealant off the face of non- glazed tile, brick, stone or other absorptive surfaces immediately. 8. Keep all control and expansion joints free of setting materials. 3.5 CLEAN-UP A. Removal: Remove and legally dispose of manufacturer and Veneer component debris material from job site. B. Clean exposed surfaces using materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer of the material or product being cleaned. Remove and replace work that cannot be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Project Designer/Owner. C. Clean work area of foreign materials resulting from operations. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 VENEER STONE 04 70 00 #-6 D. Acid Cleaning: Stone may be cleaned with sulfamic acid solutions complying with the following: 1. Only if permitted by stone and grout manufacturer’s printed instructions. 2. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. 3. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning 3.6 PROTECTION A. Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them. B. Upon completion of setting and grouting, clean all stone surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. C. Provide protection of installed finish from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing and continuous high humidity until fully cured and dry. D. When recommended by veneer stone manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner. Protect installed stone work with heavy covering during construction period to prevent damage. E. Protective Coatings: Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from stone surfaces. F. Finished Veneer Stone Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective stone work. END OF SECTION H&C STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 05 10 00-1 SECTION 05 10 00 - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Structural steel framing including, but not limited to: 1. Columns 2. Beams 3. Lintels 4. Anchor Bolts 5. Shelf Angles 6. Bearing Plates, 7. Miscellaneous Structural steel items. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop and erection Drawings clearly showing each piece required for fabrication and erection. Drawings shall include material grade, camber, holes and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols showing size, length, and type of each weld. B. Test Reports: Submit reports for welded connection tests. C. Submit anchor setting drawings clearly showing location of all anchor bolts and embedded plates to be anchored in concrete and masonry construction. Provide templates for anchor bolts. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: 1. Performed by certified welders in compliance with AWS D.1 Structural Welding Code. 2. Welders shall be duly qualified within the last 12 months in the position in which they are to weld and the qualifications and Specifications for workmanship shall comply with the AWS requirements "AWS Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Certifications: 1. Prior to fabrication or shipment of material to the job site, furnish certification of the Manufacturer of the structural steel that material furnished meets or exceeds requirements of ASTM standards specified or noted on Drawings, for each type of material. 2. Prior to site welding operation, submit welders' written certifications and qualifications. H&C STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 05 10 00-2 C. Tolerances: All steel exposed to view shall be architectural steel, and tolerances as a minimum shall comply with section 10 of AISC code of standard practice. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Exercise care during unloading, storage and erection to avoid damage. Dumping on the ground is not permitted. B. Support material stored at the site completely free of the ground, and cover to avoid damage from the elements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Materials shall be new, of uniform quality, suitable and without defects affecting the strength or service of the structure. B. Structural Steel: ASTM A572 or A992, except angles, channels and plates shall be Grade 50 (Fy = 50ksi). C. Steel Pipe Columns: ASTM A53 Grade B or ASTM A501 (Fy = 36,000 psi). D. Steel Tube Columns: ASTM A500, Grade B (Fy = 46 ksi). E. Bolts: 1. Machine Bolts: ASTM A307, unless otherwise indicated. 2. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325. F. Welded Anchors and Shear Connectors: ICC approved, as manufactured by KSM or Nelson. G. Welding Rods: AWS A5.0, E70 series, low hydrogen type. H. Metal Primer: VOC compliant. 1. Interior Steel: Tnemec HS88-0559 Gray www.tnemec.com. 2. Exterior Steel: Tnemec Tneme-Zinc 90-97 (organic). H&C STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 05 10 00-3 2.2 FABRICATION A. Workmanship and details of construction (except as otherwise indicated or specified) shall be in conformity with applicable articles of the latest AISC Manual, Parts 1 through 4; AISC Specifications; except Section A7 (Design Documents) and Chapter N (Plastic Design); and the applicable building codes. Sections 3.1, 3.4 and 4.2 of AISC code of Standard Practice are specifically excluded from this work. 1. Sections shall be of dimensions, weight and design as indicated, assembled complete at the shop, with base plates and other detailed materials attached. 3. Furnish 1/4 inch thick leveling plates at columns where base plates are shop fabricated to columns. 4. Make connections as indicated or detailed on the drawings and the reviewed shop and erection Drawings. 5. Exposed steel shall have smooth, clean surfaces with no identifying trade marks, names etc., exposed to view. 6. Leave in condition for finish painting. B. Bolted connections shall be as detailed or shall conform to AISC standard bolted connections with maximum number of 3/4-inch diameter bolts. See Framed Beam Connections Tables II, III, or IV of AISC Manual of Steel Construction. C. No slotted holes permitted at steel connections unless shown on drawings or approved by Structural Engineer. D. Where bolt holes in steel members are enlarged to more than 1/16 inch diameter oversize, provide 3/16 inch x 2-1/2 inch x 2-1/2 inch plate washers to steel members with 3/16 inch fillet weld all around. E. Loose Steel Lintels: Provide loose structural steel shape lintels for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions, as shown. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit. Provide not less than 4 inch bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise shown. F. Shelf Angles: Provide structural steel shelf angles of sizes shown for attachment to concrete framing. Provide slotted holes to receive 3/4 inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and not more than 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise shown. G. Loose Bearing Plates: Provide loose bearing plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. 2.3 SHOP FABRICATION FOR USE OF HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS A. Joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the bolt heads, nuts or washers, shall be free of loose mill scale, burrs, or any foreign material (including paint). Field paint these areas with the specific shop paint after erection and completion. H&C STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 05 10 00-4 B. Joints using high strength bolts shall be inspected by a representative of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Owner’s Representative. 1. Inspection shall be accomplished by the use of a properly calibrated torque wrench. 2. Calibration shall be by the procedure specified in the Specifications for structural joints using ASTM A325 or A490 bolts, under Section 9, inspections (pp. 6-276) Ninth Edition, AISC Manual of Steel Construction. 3. Check a minimum of 20 percent of the bolts in each connection. 4. If one or more of the bolts checked in any connection is below the minimum tension, check all of the bolts in that connection. 5. Bolts which cannot be properly tensioned will be rejected. C. Check calibrated wrenches individually for accuracy at least once daily for actual conditions of application. D. The Inspector shall check to insure that bolt threads are eliminated from the shear planes. Submit copies of the torque reading for each connection directly to the Architect in the form of a report, along with the minimum torque values required to reach the specified tensions and the calibration procedures. E. The use of load indicator washers or twist-off spline type of fastener requires specific prior approval of the Architect. 2.4 SHOP WELDING A. Make welds by the electric-arc process. B. Grind exposed welds smooth. C. Where weld size is not indicated, it shall develop full strength of member and connection. 2.5 PAINTING - SHOP COAT A. Items of steel and iron Work indicated or specified to be encased in concrete shall not be painted. B. Primer applied to members to receive spray fireproofing shall have been tested and certified as acceptable for application and shall be approved by fireproofing manufacturer. C. Clean steel Work by wire brushing, or by other means selected by the fabricator, of loose mill scale, loose rust, accessible weld slag, or flux deposit, dirt and other matter. Remove oil and grease deposits by solvent. D. After cleaning, give steel Work one coat of metal primer. Apply primer thoroughly and evenly to dry surfaces by brush, spray, roller coating, flow coating or dipping at the selection of the fabricator. H&C STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 05 10 00-5 E. Apply primer at a rate of 350 sq. ft. per gallon to provide a wet film of 4.5 mils. F. Paint erection marks on painted surfaces. Touch-up surfaces where welding, grinding of welds, joints, etc. are done in the field. G. The paint shall be thoroughly dry before the members are handled or loaded. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: Where a welded splice is fabricated in beams or columns other than those detailed, fabricator shall have splice connection tested using one of the following methods: magnetic particle, radiographic, or ultrasonic. Testing shall be conducted by an independent testing laboratory and a report submitted to the Architect. The costs of this testing shall be borne by the fabricator. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify anchor bolt locations, grouting and elevation of base and setting plates, and other material set by other Trades before commencing Work. 2. Notify Architect of Work set by others which does not comply with specified tolerances. Do not erect material upon such Work until it has been satisfactorily corrected. 3. Start of Work implies acceptance of Work of other Trades affecting structural frame erection. 3.2 ERECTION A. Erect Work to the proper lines and levels, plumb and true, and in correct relation to other Work maintain this condition to completion. B. Connections: 1. Machine Bolting: a. Fair-up holes with pins to align holes before bolting. b. Ream unfair holes to obtain alignment or drill new holes. c. Enlargement of holes with drift pins or burning of new holes is not permitted. d. Draw bolts up tight after members are aligned and leveled, and set or deform threads to prevent loosening. H&C STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 05 10 00-6 2. Welding: a. Weld by shielding arc method per AWS standard code for arc and gas welding in building construction. b. Submit certification that welders have passed AWS code qualification tests. c. Refer to Shop Drawings for weld size and dimensions. d. Close joints exposed to weathering with continuous 1/8 inch weather welds. e. Grind smooth exposed welds, but grinding shall not reduce weld strength or required cross section. f. Protect finish material from damage due to welding. g. Remove unsatisfactory welds by chipping or arc air method. 3. Connect members temporarily and align completely before making permanent connections. a. Temporary conditions shall consist of bolts in no less than 1/3 of the holes and in no case less than 3 bolts in any single connection. b. Surfaces in contact shall be thoroughly clean when assembled. c. Provide necessary temporary bracing and guying to align the structure properly for permanent connections, and safely resist erection, dead load and wind stress. d. Take particular care to have the Work plumb and level (maximum slope ratio tolerance 1 to 500 for interior members, 0 to 1000 for exterior members) before making permanent connections. e. Remove bracing and guys only after permanent alignment and assembly and structure is capable of completely sustaining design and temporary construction loads. C. Exposed Steel: 1. Verify the condition of exposed steel after erection. 2. Exert particular care to provide a neat, accurate installation with members straight and true, corners and edges square, sharp and free from burrs and irregularities, adjacent members perfectly matched and no bolts or rivets exposed. 3. Remove erection bolts and seats and plug weld and grind holes smooth. D. Touch-up Painting: 1. Remove temporary guys, bracing and bracing clips, and grind flush remaining burrs, before painting. Remove welding slag, spatter, rust and burnt paint and wire brush clean welds before touch-up. 2. Touch-up Painting: Touch-up welds, abrasions, bolted connections, and other areas where shop prime paint has been removed or is damaged with specified prime paint or galvanizing repair paint. H&C STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 05 10 00-7 3.3 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. B. Leave Work ready to receive fireproofing when applicable. END OF SECTION 05 10 00 H&C COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-1 SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Where this Specification conflicts with the Engineer’s Structural Notes, the Structural Notes shall take preference. B. Section Includes: Load-bearing metal stud system for interior framing and load-bearing and non-load bearing exterior framing as shown on Drawings and as specified. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Design structural members in accordance with AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Structural Steel." 1. Maximum allowable deflection: a. Walls receiving gypsum wallboard finishes: L/240. b. Walls receiving plaster and brittle finishes, including EIFS and stucco: L/240. c. Walls receiving ceramic tile finishes: L/360. d. Walls receiving brick veneer: L/600. 2. Design system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. 3. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's Specifications, design data and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing layout, dimensions and construction details. C. Certificates: 1. Submit Mill Certification with shipment to verify chemical composition, yield strength, tensile strength, elongation and coating thickness. Include listing of applicable ASTM standards specified in this section and comparison of ASTM requirements to actual materials provided to jobsite. 2. Submit Manufacturer's certification that products furnished meet or exceed the specified design requirements. H&C COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Performed by certified welders in compliance with AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel. B. Regulatory Requirements: Manufacturers shall have current ICC or CABO evaluation report. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Exercise care during unloading, storage and erection to avoid damage. Dumping on the ground is not permitted. B. Support material stored at the site completely free of the ground, and cover to avoid damage from the elements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products as manufactured by a manufacturing member of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA) www.ssma.com, subject to compliance with Specification requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Studs, Track, Bracing and Bridging: Conform to ASTM A611, Grade C. 1. ASTM A653, G60 hot-dip galvanized coating. 2. Minimum structural properties: In accordance with General Structural Notes. B. Track: Refer to structural specifications and drawings C. Track: Refer to structural specifications and drawings D. Plates: Track: Refer to structural specifications and drawings E. Fasteners and Attachments: 1. Sheet metal: Self-drilling self-tapping screws, type appropriate for attachment detail requirements with penetration through joined materials not less than 3 exposed threads. 2. Anchorage devices to structural components: Power driven or powder actuated, drilled expansion bolts, or screws, with sleeves. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards and as indicated on General Structural Notes on Drawings. H&C COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-3 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections of sizes and profiles required, with framing members fitted, reinforced and braced to suit design requirements. B. Fasten metal studs by welding or screw-fastening as indicated. Do not fasten framing members by wire tying. C. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.2 ERECTION A. Install components in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall and partition layout. Secure in place with fasteners or welding at maximum 24 inches. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks. C. Refer to Structural specifications and drawings for stud spacing. D. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Double stud at wall opening, door and window jambs. E. Erect load bearing studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs is not permitted. F. Erect load bearing studs, brace and reinforce to develop full strength to meet design requirements. G. Extend stud framing to underside of floor or roof structure above. H. Fasten metal studs by welding or screw-fastening as indicated. Do not fasten framing members by wire tying. I. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection. H&C COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-4 J. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing. K. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing for non- load bearing framing. L. Attach cross studs or furring channels to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. M. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation. N. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: At Owner's request, Contractor shall provide spot testing of actual properties of steel framing to verify compliance with specifications. 3.4 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 05 40 00 H&C METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-1 SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Metal fabrications, including items fabricated from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems in other Sections of these Specifications. Types of metal items include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Carpenter's ironwork. 2. Steel gratings and frames. 3. Steel pipe guards and bollards. 4. Miscellaneous framing and supports. 5. Miscellaneous steel trim. 6. Support for overhead suspended toilet partitions 7. Other items as indicated. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings for the fabrication and erection of assemblies of items which are not completely shown by the Manufacturer's data sheets. 1. Include plans and elevations at not less than 1 inch to 1'-0" scale, and include details of sections and connections at not less than 3 inches to 1'-0" scale. 2. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with the following, except as otherwise shown and specified: 1. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings." 2. AISI "Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." 3. AWS "Structural Welding Code-Steel." 4. ASTM A6 "General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates Shapes, Sheet Piping and Bars for Structural Use." B. Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure." H&C METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-2 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Exercise care during unloading, storage and erection to avoid damage. Dumping on the ground is not permitted. B. Support material stored at the site completely free of the ground, and cover to avoid damage from the elements. 1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of the Work. Allow for trimming and fitting wherever the taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Materials shall be new, of uniform quality, suitable and without defects affecting the strength or service of the structure. B. Wide Flange Steel Sections: ASTM A572 or A992 (Fy = 50 ksi). C. Steel Shapes, Plates, Rod, Bars and Bar-size Shapes: ASTM A36. D. Steel Tubing (Cold-formed Welded and Seamless): ASTM A500, Grade b (Fy = 42 ksi). E. Steel Tubing (Hot Formed Welded and Seamless): ASTM A501, (Fy = 36ksi). F. Cold-Finished Carbon Steel Bars: ASTM A108, Grade as selected by fabricator. G. Hot-rolled Carbon Steel Sheets and Strips: ASTM A568 and ASTM A1011, pickled and oiled. H. Cold-rolled Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A1008. I. Hot-dip Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A653, with G90 zinc coating. J. Perforated Steel Sheet/B-deck: Perforated steel sheet as manufactured by ATAS International, Inc. www.atas.com, McNichols Co. www.mcnichols.com, or McMaster Carr www.mcmaster.com. 1. Panel No. 1: McNicholas Quality Perforated Metal, Round Hole, Plain Steel Hot Rolled, 18 Gauge, ¼” round on 3/8” Centers, Factory Paint finish, Staggered Pattern, 40% open area. K. Ribbed Steel Deck: ASTM A653 steel, 16 gauge ribbed deck comparable to Vulcraft Type 3N, with G90 zinc coating. H&C METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-3 L. Cold-drawn Steel Tubing: ASTM A512, sunk drawn, butt welded, cold-finished and stress- relieved. M. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, type as selected; Grade A. Black finish unless galvanizing is required. Standard weight, Schedule 40, unless otherwise shown or specified. N. Anchors: 1. Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shield, FS FF-S-325. 2. Toggle bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588; type, class and style as required. 3. Chemical Type Anchors: 2-component chemically curing anchors for concrete or masonry construction, capsule or injection type, designed to accept manufacturer’s galvanized anchor rod. 4. Threaded-type concrete inserts: Galvanized ferrous castings, internally threaded to receive 3/4 inch diameter machine bolts; either malleable iron complying with ASTM A47 or cast steel complying with ASTM A27; hot-dip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A153. 5. Wedge-type concrete inserts: Galvanized box-type ferrous castings, designed to accept 3/4 inch diameter bolts having special wedge-shaped heads, either malleable iron complying with ASTM A47 or cast steel complying with ASTM A27; hot-dip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A153. 6. Provide carbon steel bolts having special wedge-shaped heads, nuts washers and shims; all galvanized in compliance with ASTM A153. 7. Slotted-type concrete inserts: Galvanized 1/8 inch thick pressed steel plate complying with ASTM A283. Box-type welded construction with slot designed to receive 3/4 inch diameter square head bolt and with knockout cover. Hot-dip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A123. O. Fasteners: Provide zinc-coated fasteners with galvanizing complying with ASTM A153 for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required for the installation of miscellaneous metal items. 1. Bolts and nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular hexagon head. 2. Bolts, hexagon and square: ANSI B-18.2.1. 3. Bolts, round head: ANSI B-18.5. 4. Lag bolts: Square head type. 5. Wood screws: ANSI B-18.6.1, flat head carbon steel. 6. Plain washers: ASTM F844 helical spring type carbon steel. P. Gratings: Grating shall be electro-pressure welded construction type as shown on Drawings. Exterior gratings shall be hot-dipped galvanized, after fabrication. Furnish perimeter support angles with welded anchors as detailed. Q. Wire Rope: ASTM A 603, Class A, Zinc-coated steel, Prestretched, , 1 x 19 structural multiple wire rope. H&C METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-4 1. Nominal Diameter: 1/4-inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Turnbuckles and Fittings: a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Feeney Wire Rope and Rigging, Oakland, CA (800) 888-2418 2) Hayn Enterprises, LL, Middletown, CT (800) 346-4296 3) Johnson Architectural Hardware, East Haddam, CT b. Products: As selected by Architect R. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 for steel plates, bars and strips. S. Metal Primer: VOC compliant. 1. Interior Steel: Tnemec HS88-0559 Gray www.tnemec.com. 2. Exterior Steel: Tnemec Tneme-Zinc 90-97 (organic). 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices to be set in concrete or built into masonry for installation of Miscellaneous Metal Work. Provide setting Drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. B. Concrete Fill (for concrete filled pipe bollards): Comply with requirements of Section 03 30 00 for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: For fabrication of Miscellaneous Metal Work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of surface finishes, including zinc coatings. B. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop, when possible, to minimize field splicing and assembly of units at the site. Disassemble units only to extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. H&C METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-5 C. Workmanship: 1. Use materials of the size and thickness shown, or if not shown, of the required size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability of the finished product for the intended use. Work to the dimensions of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of Work. 2. Form exposed Work true to line and level with accurate angles, surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise shown. Form bent-metal corners to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work. 3. Weld corners and seam continuously and in accordance with the recommendations of AWS. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. 4. Form exposed connections with hairline joints which are flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of the type shown, or if not shown, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. 5. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure and the progress schedule. Fabricate as required to provide adequate support for the intended use of the Work. 6. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap Miscellaneous Metal Work as may be required to receive finish hardware and similar items of Work. 7. Use hot-rolled steel bars for Work fabricated from bar stock, unless Work is indicated to be fabricated from cold-rolled, or cold-finished stock. D. Carpenter's Iron Work: 1. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware are specified in Division 6 Sections. 2. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. E. Loose Bearing Plates: Provide loose bearing plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. F. Loose Steel Lintels: provide loose structural steel shape lintels for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions, as shown. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit. Provide not less than 4 inch bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise shown. G. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: H&C METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-6 1. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of the structural steel framework, as required to complete Work. 2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown, or if not shown, of the dimensions required to receive adjacent grating, plates, doors or other Work to be retained by the framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars of all welded construction using mitered corners, welded brackets and splice plates, and a minimum number of joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items to be anchored to the Work. 3. Equip units with integrally welded anchor straps for casting into concrete or building into masonry wherever possible. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is poured. Except as otherwise shown, space anchors 24 inches o.c., and provide minimum anchor units of 1-1/4 inch x 1/3 inch x 8 inch steel straps. H. Toilet Partition Ceiling Suspension: 1. Steel channels with threaded rod hangers and nuts as required. 2. Coordinate locations of hanger channels and spacing of holes in channels for installation of partition hanger bolts with toilet partition submittals. I. Fabricate pipe bollards from steel pipe of diameter indicated on Drawings. J. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Provide shapes and sizes as required for the profiles shown. Except as otherwise noted, fabricate units from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other Work. 2.4 FINISHING A. Galvanizing: Comply with ASTM A123 and A153 for the hot-dip process after fabrication. B. Shop Painting: 1. Shop paint Miscellaneous Metal Work, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before shop coat of paint is applied. Clean in accordance with SSPC SP-2, SP-3, or SP-7, as required. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1. 3. Apply one shop coat of metal primer paint to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. 4. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on metal primer paint in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions, and to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2 mils for each coat. H&C METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to appropriate Trades. C. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations. Protect sleeves from water and concrete entry. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on Shop Drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Install pipe bollards in concrete footings plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. Provide adequate bracing as required to hold bollard in position until concrete has been placed and cured. F. Obtain Architect approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. G. Touch-up Painting: Touch-up welds, abrasions, and other areas where shop prime paint has been removed or is damaged with specified prime paint or galvanizing repair paint. H&C METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-8 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch 3.5 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. END OF SECTION 05 50 00 H&C ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1 SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 3. Concealed wood blocking. 4. Telephone and electrical equipment mounting panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing." 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. PS 20 – American Softwood Lumber Standard. B. FS TT-W-550 - Wood Preservative, Chromated Copper Arsenate Mixture C. FS TT-W-571 - Wood Preservation: Treating Practices. D. AWPA C2 Pressure Treatment of Lumber, Timber; above ground, water use. E. AWPA C9 Pressure Treatment of Plywood; above ground, water use. F. AWPA M4 Field Application of Preservative. G. AWPA P5 Wood Preservative, waterborne salts. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire treated wood shall have a U.L. label certifying specified classification and Factory Mutual Diamond. Lab shall contain a statement: "No increase in the listed classification when subjected to the standard rain test". H&C ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 2 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store dressed or treated lumber or plywood outdoors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Lumber: PS 20, graded in accordance with WWPA Grading Rules; S-Dry; S4S Douglas Fir species; No. 2 grade unless otherwise indicated or specified in the General Structural Notes. B. Softwood Plywood: PS 1; APA BB INT with exterior glue where used for backing panels. C. Wood Treatment Materials: 1. Wood Preservative: AWPA Standard P5 and FS TT-W-550; CCA types A, B or C. 2. Fire-Retardant: Material used for fire-retardant treated materials shall provide a UL classification of FRS, a 25 or less flame spread and ICBO approval. "NCX" as manufactured by Koppers is an acceptable product. 2.2 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS A. Shop pressure treat wood materials requiring UL fire rating and pressure impregnated preservatives to FS TT-W-571, Table 3. B. Shop pressure treat materials requiring treatment in closed cylinder in accordance with AWPA Standard C2 for lumber and AWPA Standard C9 for plywood. Retention of CCA dry salts shall be .23 pounds per cubic foot (oxide basis) for moderate service conditions (weather exposure), and .40 pounds per cubic foot (oxide basis) for severe conditions (constant contact with ground or water). C. Locations which require painted or stained finishes shall have treatments compatible with finish. Plywood shall have a penetration of pentachlorophenol of 0.40 for above-ground exposures and 0.60 in-ground exposures using pcf Penta tested method. Lumber shall have penetration of treatment retentions as published in AWPA standards for sizes and types of each piece of material. D. Fabrication, cutting, boring, precutting, etc., possible should be performed before treatment. "Strip and stock" treat material and cover with waterproof membranes. E. Redry wood to an average moisture content of 19% or less. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware, Connectors and Fasteners: Provide anchors, connectors and fastenings, of type indicated and required to suit conditions encountered. Provide zinc-coated connectors unless specified otherwise. H&C ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine all parts of the supporting structure to which carpentry work is to be attached for conditions that will adversely affect execution or quality of work. B. Do not commence work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 SITE TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS A. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment for wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashings. B. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Redry to 19 percent moisture content. C. Treat site-sawn ends in accordance with AWPA M4. Allow preservative to cure prior to placing members. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Use materials free from warp which cannot be easily corrected by anchoring and attachment. Sort out and discard warped material and material with other defects which would impair the quality of the work. B. Fit lumber and other carpentry closely, set accurately to required lines and levels, and secure in place in rigid and substantial manner. C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. Shear Wall Panels: Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 ROUGH CARPENTRY ITEMS A. Blocking: Provide fire treated nailers, plates, blocking and furring as indicated or required to install work firmly in place and provide firm mounting of accessories. Provide solid blocking behind wall mounted hardware, door stops, grab bars and fixtures. Coordinate location with other work involved; refer to shop drawings of such work. B. Roof Edge Strips and Nailers: Provide in indicated widths, and of same thickness as insulation at open eaves and gable roof ends, as stop for insulation and for nailing sheet metal. Provide 6" wide wood nailers in thickness of insulation at walls, curbs and other vertical surfaces, for nailing of roofing and base flashings. Wood in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing (except plywood sheathing), or wood in contact with masonry or concrete or below grade, shall be treated with wood preservative. H&C ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 4 C. Curbs and Blocking: Provide treated wood curbs or blocking as required for complete installation of roof scuttle, ventilators, skylights, or mechanical equipment. D. Backing Panels: Provide fire treated plywood panels as required for electrical or telephone equipment. END OF SECTION 06 10 00 H&C SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 1 SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Building Paper 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SHEATHING A. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 79/C 79M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, gypsum sheathing: with water-resistant treated core and with water-repellent paper bonded to core’s face, back, and long edges. 1. Available Manufacturer’s: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Gypsum b. LaFarge North America, Inc. c. G-P Gypsum Company d. National Gypsum Company e. Temple-Inland Forest Products Corporation f. United States Gypsum Co. H&C SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 2 B. Type and thickness: 1. Regular, 5/8 inch thick. 2. Type “X”, 5/8 inch thick. 3. Flex, 1/4 inch thick. C. Edge and End Configuration: Square. D. Size: 48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm) for vertical installation. 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. B. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. 1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch (0.835 mm) thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C 1002. 2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C 954. 2.3 WEATHER- RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated. B. Building Paper: UBC Standard 14-1, Grade D (water-vapor-permeable, kraft building paper). Retain paragraph above or first paragraph and applicable subparagraphs below. Note that ASTM standard referenced below is for air retarders for low-rise buildings. See Evaluations. 2.4 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing Board: Elastomeric, medium-modulus, neutral- curing silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and other materials, recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application indicated, and complying with requirements for elastomeric sealants specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. H&C SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 3 B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." 3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and Two- Family Dwellings." D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with screws. 2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 3. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 4. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. H&C SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 4 D. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. E. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. 3.3 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER INSTALLATION A. Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows: 1. Cut back barrier ½ inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion or control-joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100 mm) overlap, unless otherwise indicated. B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch (50 mm) overlap and a 6-inch (150 mm) end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing; Protect sheathing by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper securely fastened to framing. Apply covering immediately after sheathing is installed. END OF SECTION 06 16 00 H&C ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16-1 SECTION 06 41 16 – PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Architectural woodwork as shown on drawings and as specified herein, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Non-modular plastic laminate faced cabinets and countertops. 2. Plastic laminate faced countertops. 3. Other items as indicated. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing layout, elevations, dimensions, hardware, construction details, and schedule of finishes. B. Samples: 1. Submit two 12 inch x 12 inch samples of each wood species to receive transparent finish at job site and at mill. 2. Submit two 6 inch x 6 inch samples of type or color of plastic laminate. C. Mock-up: Provide 30 inch high by 12inch wide by 24 inch deep base cabinet mock-up with countertop for inspection of construction and materials for approval prior to starting the work. D. Product Data: Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated" 8th Edition, Version 1.0 (2003). 2. ANSI/NEMA LD3 for laminates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Applicable Standard: Perform work in accordance with AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated 1. Provide Custom when not otherwise indicated. 2. Affix Quality Grade Stamp to each unit of product (e.g. each case; each panel; each bundle of trim, etc.). H&C ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16-2 B. Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Flame Spread Index: Where fire-retardant treated wood is specified or required by Code requirements, provide materials that have been tested in accordance with ASTM E84 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Fire-retardant treated materials shall be identified with appropriate classification markings indicating rating on surfaces that will be concealed from view in the finished work or by separate removable label applied by the treated wood manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage and moisture while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Provide humidity conditions which will prevent damage to woodwork. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS - PLASTIC LAMINATE A. Furnish plastic products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Formica www.formica.com 2. Wilsonart www.wilsonart.com 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Hardwood Lumber: Custom Grade in accordance with applicable standard specified herein under "Quality Assurance," average moisture content of 6 percent species and cut as indicated on Drawings H&C ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16-3 2.3 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pr-finished Plywood: KorTron/EB as manufactured by Willamette Industries, Inc., KorPINE Division, Bend, OR, 97709 (503) 382-7296. B. Hardwood Plywood: Core materials of MDF type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cuts as indicated on Drawings C. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, MDO (Medium Density Overlay), or other overlay plywood product suitable for application of plastic laminate as approved by the Architect. D. Wood Particleboard: Standard in accordance with applicable standard specified herein under "Quality Assurance," for grade of work specified, composed of wood chips, 45 lb. density, made with water resistant adhesive; of grade to suit application; sanded faces for drawer construction and shelving. E. Hardboard: Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, 1/4 inch thick, smooth one side, for drawer bottoms, gables and backs. F. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): Medite II as manufactured by Medite Corporation, Medford, OR, 503-773-2522 complying with the following: 1. Fabricate from 90% pre-consumer wood residuals. 2. Fabricate without formaldehyde. 2.4 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: High pressure decorative type. 1. Horizontal Grade: NEMA LD-3, Grade GP50, .050 inch thickness. 2. Horizontal Grade (Color-Thru): NEMA LD-3, Grade GP50 with color extending through material thickness. 3. Horizontal Grade (High Wear): Exceeding NEMA LD-3, Grade GP50, 0.048 inch thickness. Wear resistance: 3.1 at 3500 cycles in accordance with NEMA LD-3 test method. 4. Vertical Grade: NEMA LD-3, Grade GP28, (.028 inch thickness). This grade of laminate shall be counterbalanced. 5. Fire-Rated Horizontal Grade: NEMA LD-3, Grade FR50; 0.050 inch thickness. 6. Fire Rated Vertical Grade: NEMA LD-3, Grade FR32, 0.032 inch thickness. 7. Post Forming Grade: NEMA LD-3, Grade PF 42. 8. Cabinet Liner Grade: NEMA LD-3, Grade CL-20, (.020 inch thickness). This grade of laminate shall be counterbalanced. 9. Melamine: Cold rolled (80 g.), tested to meet NEMA Test LD-3. This grade of laminate shall be counterbalanced. 10. Backer: NEMA LD-3, Grade BK-20 (.020 inch thickness). 11. Finishes, Colors and Patterns: As selected from manufacturer’s full range of colors. 2.5 ACCESSORIES H&C ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16-4 A. Adhesive: Type recommended by Laminate Manufacturer to suit application. B. Wall Adhesive: Cartridge type compatible with paneling and wall substrate. C. Edge Trim: High pressure decorative plastic laminate. NEMA LD-3, Grade GP50, .050 inch thickness. Color to match cabinet face. D. Glass: As specified in Section 08 80 00. E. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application. Threaded steel for concealed joints. 2.6 HARDWARE A. Shelf Standards and Supports for Cabinet Mounted Shelving: K&V 255 pilasters and KV256ZC supports, finish as approved by Architect. B. Shelf Standard and Brackets for Wall Mounted Shelving: K&V 83 Double-Slot Wall Standard and No. 183 Double-Flange Wall Brackets, or as approved by Architect. C. Shelf Support Pins: K&V 333, 7/32 inch diameter shelf pins or dual 5mm pin polycarbonate for European style cabinets. D. Drawer and Door Pulls: Heavy Duty, edge pull, 2mm thickness, fastened with screws. Color to be determined as site specific and approved by architect. 1. EPCO Model DP44 edge pull or approved equal. E. Sliding Door Pulls: Johnson Hardware 15US3. F. Catches: Ives IV2 - aluminum, K&V 984 KA. G. Drawer Slides: Conforming to ANSI/BIFMA X5.6, UL 1678 and UL 1286. 1. Light and medium duty drawers -24 inch wide or less: Accuride 3832 ball bearing, rail mount, full extension slides with 100 lb./pr. load rating. Provide Accuride 7434 overtravel slides where drawers require full access. 2. Heavy duty drawers - 42 in wide or less: Accuride 3832 ball bearing, rail mount, full extension slides plus 1 inch (25mm) overtravel with 200 lb./pr. load rating. 3. Finish: Clear zinc. H. Cabinet Hinges: Heavy duty, concealed hinge, Sugatsune J95-24/25T, J95-C24/25T or approved equal, overlay type, self-closing, steel institutional type hinge with edges eased and adjustable screw holes. Hinge shall have a minimum of six No. 10 screws, 2 pcs for each hinge, and 4 pcs for each mounting plate. Door shall swing 270 degrees. Finish shall be dull chrome. Install spacer block behind frame at each hinge. I. Sliding Door Track Assemblies: Johnson Hardware 1160 track and hanger set complete with H&C ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16-5 track, hangers, track stops, bypass door guides, door stops, recessed pulls, and installation hardware. J. Sliding Glass Door Track Assemblies: Knape & Vogt P992 ZC assembly, or approved. K. Sliding Glass Door Locks: Knape & Vogt 965 NP, or approved L. Locks: Olympus 200DW for drawers; Olympus 100DR for doors. M. Elbow Catches: Epco EP1018N or Ives IV2AM. N. Grommets: Doug Mockett & Co. molded plastic with matching cap with slot for cable passage. Diameter as indicated on Drawings. Color to match plastic laminate as selected by Architect. O. Provide other hardware to fulfill function of architectural woodwork and cabinets as shown on Drawings. Subject to approval by Architect. P. Finish: As selected by Architect. 2.7 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Finishing Materials: As specified in Section 09 91 00. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate architectural woodwork and cabinets in conformance with Custom Grade Standards in accordance with applicable standard specified herein under "Quality Assurance." B. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit C. Cap shelves, doors, and other exposed edges with 3mm PVC edging. Use one piece for full length only. D. Cap semi-exposed edges with matching plastic laminate edging. Use one piece for full length only. E. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4 inch thick overlay flush style. F. Drawer bottoms: ½ inch thick particleboard with melamine finish. G. Shelves: Fabricate shelves with 3/4 1 inch thick wood particleboard cores with melamine finish, all sides and edges, unless otherwise indicated. H. Shelf Standards within Casework: Set shelf standards within recessed groove of same width and depth as shelf standard. H&C ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16-6 I. Plastic Laminate Faced Countertops: Fabricated plastic laminate faced countertops with integral post formed back splash and separate side splashes with integral scribe for fitting to wall. 1. Countertop Edge Treatment: Post-formed full 180 degree bullnose edge. J. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. K. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. L. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. M. Provide cutouts for appliances, outlet boxes, fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges. 2.9 SHOP FINISHING A. Sand Work smooth and set exposed fasteners; apply wood filler. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and fastener indentations. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and types recommended for applied finishes. C. Finish work in the factory in accordance with AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated" Section 1500 D. Seal surfaces in contact with cementitious materials. E. Seal internal surfaces of cabinets with two coats of sealer, except where cabinets are finished internally with cabinet liner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. H&C ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16-7 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure cabinetry and other woodwork in place; rigid, plumb and level, and in accordance with applicable standard specified herein under "Quality Assurance" for grade of work specified. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Secure and align adjoining cabinet units and counter tops with concealed joint fasteners. D. Scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (0.03125 inch). Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinet and bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. F. Where exposed anchors or fasteners are unavoidable in the finish Work, countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations and conceal with plastic or laminate faced plugs to match surrounding plastic laminate; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. G. Install trim in single lengths without splices where possible. Miter external corners and cope internal corners. H. Sand Work smooth and set exposed fasteners. I. Prime, fill, and finish Work of this Section in accordance with Section 09 91 00. 3.3 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 06 41 16 H&C ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 07 11 10 - 1 SECTION 07 11 10 – ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install elastic sheet waterproof membrane and protection board at exterior walls where earth grade is above finished floor (raised planter) or where interior slab on grade is more than 12" above exterior finish grade, including elevator pit. 1.3 APPLICATOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Minimum three years of experience with projects of similar scope and complexity. Applicator shall be approved by membrane manufacturer. 1.4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered in original packages bearing manufacturer's label. B. Materials shall be protected from rain and physical damage. Store materials away from sparks or flames. Store membrane where it will not exceed 90 degrees F. for extended periods. Outdoors, place cartons on raised pallets and cover completely. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Components of the membrane waterproofing systems are to be applied at surface and ambient temperatures of 40 degrees F. or above with fair, dry weather conditions. For any applications below 40 degrees F., consult membrane waterproofing manufacturer. Surface coatings and adhesives shall not be applied when rain is expected within 2 hours. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warranty shall provide for materials to repair, within period of 5 years, at no cost to Owner, failures of waterproofing to resist penetration of water, except where such failures are result of structural failures of building. Labor shall be warranted for 2 years. Hairline cracking due to temperature or shrinkage is not considered as structural failure. Repair waterproofing membrane and pay for and repair or replace all affected or damaged materials or surfaces at no cost to Owner. H&C ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 07 11 10 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Waterproof Membrane: Bituthene 3,000 or 4000, nominal .060" self-adhering membrane of rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to polyethylene sheeting. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Liquid Membrane: Bituthene "Liquid Membrane", 2-component elastomeric with 100% solids content. B. Surface Conditioner: Bituthene "Surface Conditioner" packaged with membrane. C. Elastomeric Mastic: Bituthene "Mastic", black rubberized asphalt mastic. D. Specified products are a compatible system. Substitutes for individual components will not give satisfactory results. E. Sealant: In accordance with Section 07900. No polysulfide polymer joint sealants. F. Protection Material: Bituthene PB-3000, 1 pound/cubic foot density, one inch thick expanded polystyrene board. Adhesive to be Bituthene PBA-300, fast drying rubber-based cement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that all penetrations of pipes, conduits, etc. through walls or foundations, are ridgid, true, tight and sealed per waterproofing manufacturer’s recommendations before proceeding. Protect from movement after preparation of wall is complete. B. Do not proceed with application of waterproofing system until defects are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove fill against subject area down and out sufficient distance to allow room to clean wall and footing, prepare surface and install new membrane waterproofing. B. Remove existing protection board and clean wall area to receive new membrane, of all soil, organic material and original waterproofing to facilitate receiving new wall preparation and waterproofing materials. H&C ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 07 11 10 - 3 C. Smooth, monolithic surfaces are required for proper membrane adhesion. Surfaces must be free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and sharp protrusions, with no coarse aggregate visible. Allow concrete to thoroughly dry following rain. Remove grease, oil, or other contaminants. Clean surface with a broom, vacuum cleaner, or compressed air to remove dust, loose stones, and debris. D. Provide proper pitch for base and topping over foundation footing. Apply membrane from low point to the high point across the wall line so that laps shed water. Wall design must include expansion, construction, and control joints sealed in accordance with standard practices. Apply membrane in double thickness over properly sealed expansion, construction and control joints. Seal joints with sealant as required. Prestrip wall cracks over 1/16" in width with 8" wide membrane. E. Install cant strip at all inside corners to prevent air pockets. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply surface conditioner to all concrete or masonry with roller or brush at a coverage rate of 800 to 1000 square feet per gallon depending upon the porosity of the concrete surface. Allow surface conditioner to dry for 30 minutes. Surface condition only the area which will be covered with membrane within four hours. C. Dry conditioned surfaces shall be covered immediately where contaminants from the air are accumulating on the surface. Metal or other dense surfaces shall not require conditioning but shall be clean, dry, free of loose paint, rust or other contaminants. D. The specified products are incompatible with fresh tars, creosote, pitches, and certain liquid waterproofing products and sealants containing tar or polysulfide polymer. Avoid direct contact of the adhesive layer of membrane or elastomeric mastic with such products. 3.4 SHEET PLACEMENT SEQUENCE A. Begin sheet placement, after surface is tackfree, along the lowest portion of the fooing and wall and overlap successive sheet shingle style. B. Terminate membrane on vertical surfaces with a reglet or counterflashing. C. Trowel applies a 20 mil application two inches to either side of sheet terminations with mastic. Press edges with a metal or hardwood tool. Failure to use heavy pressure at terminations can result in a poor seal. Finish all terminations on horizontal applications with 120 mil application of mastic two inches to either side of termination. D. For all applications overlap all edge and end seams at least 2 inches. Roll the entire membrane firmly and completely as soon as possible to minimize bubble caused by outgassing of air or water vapor from the concrete. Misaligned or inadequately lapped seams must be patched with mastic. Slit all fishmouths and overlap the flaps. Repair with a patch, press and roll to make the seal. Seal edges with mastic. H&C ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 07 11 10 - 4 E. If the use of nails is required, large head nails at 12" intervals must be covered with an 8" wide strip of Bituthene membrane. F. Follow instruction of product labels. Do not expose to flames, sparks or temperatures above 150 degrees F. Double cover all inside and outside corners with an initial strip a minimum of 11 inches wide. G. Apply a double layer of membrane around projections at least 6" wide and seal with mastic. H. Do not apply elastomeric mastic where it will be covered with membrane. I. Membrane waterproofing shall not be applied to any areas where permanently exposed to sunlight. J. Temporary Water Cutoffs: At the end of each working day, water cutoffs must be installed to protect against water penetration under installed membrane. These temporary water cutoffs must be cleanly removed before work is resumed. Seal daily terminations with a trowelled bead of elastomeric membrane. K. Sheet Metal Work: At top line of membrane waterproofing provide continuous flashing spring lock set into saw cut joint in masonry. Between foundation wall and decorative CMU (split- face block) saw cut shall be maximum ¾" deep x 1/8" wide to receive flashing per detail on drawings. Sheet metal flashing shall cover and include top of protection material. Provide soldered 90 degree inside and outside corners running 24" on each face. Overlap running piece minimum 6". L. Sealant: Provide continuous sealant bead into saw cut joint on top of flashing. M. Protection Material: The material shall be installed the same day the membrane is applied. Protection material shall be secured in place by an approved method until backfill is placed. Nails or other fasteners shall not penetrate through the membrane 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Apply to the following areas: Vertical wall, below grade where shown on drawings at sump pit, recessed flooring areas such as Telco & Server rooms and raised planter areas. END OF SECTION 07 11 10 H&C BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13-1 SECTION 07 11 13 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's data, installation instructions, limitations and recommendations. Include certification of data indicating VOC content of components. B. Samples: Submit samples of membrane and protection board. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish and install bituminous dampproofing membrane and protection board at retaining walls where earth grade is above adjacent finished grade. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum 3 years experience with Projects of similar scope and complexity. Applicator shall be approved by Manufacturer. B. Pre-Installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to commencement of field operations to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this Work with related and adjacent Work. Agenda for meeting shall include review of special details and flashing. C. Manufacturer's Representative: Make arrangements necessary to have a trained employee of the Manufacturer on-site periodically during dampproofing work to review installation procedures. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered in Manufacturer's original unopened packages with Manufacturer's labels intact. B. Material shall be protected from rain and physical damage. Store materials away from sparks or flames. Store membrane where it will not exceed 90 degrees F. for extended periods. C. Outdoors, place cartons on raised pallets and cover completely. Follow Manufacturer's directions. 1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Perform Work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the limits H&C BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13-2 established by the Manufacturer of the materials and products used. B. Proceed with installation only when substrate construction and preparation Work is complete and in condition to receive dampproofing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Dampproofing Membrane: Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt damproofing complying with ASTM D1227, Type III, Class 1, spray applied. Provide one of the products by one of the following manufacturers, subject to compliance with specification requirements: 1. HE788 - Non-Fbr Asph Emul Dmpprfng, Henry Company www.henry.com 2. Karnak #100 Non-Fibered Emulsion Dampproofing, Karnak Corporation www.karnakcorp.com 3. Hydrocide 600, Sonneborn, Div. Of ChemRex, Inc. www.masterbuilders.com 4. Dehydratine 75, Tamms Industries www.tamms.com 5. Sealmastic Emulsion Type I, W.R. Meadows, Inc. www.wrmeadows.com B. Protection Material: One inch thick expanded polystyrene. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. The installer shall examine conditions of substrates and other conditions under which this Work is to be performed and notify Contractor, in writing, of circumstances detrimental to the proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES A. Surface Preparation: All surfaces to be coated shall be structural sound, clean, free of dust, dirt, mortar, residue, curing and parting compounds, and other contaminates. 1. Clean surfaces by use of wire brush, sandblasting or mechanical means as recommended by the dampproofing manufacturer. 2. Seal voids and cracks in surface as recommended by dampproofing manufacturer. Use cement mortar, Fibered emulsion mastic, or other fillers and sealants compatible with asphalt emulsion dampproofing and approved by dampproofing manufacturer. 3. Dampen dry surfaces with water and keep damp prior to application as recommended by dampproofing manufacturer. 4. Dampproofing may be applied to damp or green concrete surfaces as approved by the manufacturer. H&C BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13-3 5. Masonry Substrates: Assure mortar joints are smooth and flush with masonry surface. Apply parge coat as recommended by dampproofing manufacturer to achieve smooth acceptable surface and forming a cove at the joint between wall and footing. B. Related Materials: Treat joints and install flashings as recommended by Dampproofing Manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Application, General: Comply with Manufacturer's literature for recommendations on installation, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Apply by spray application at rate recommended by manufacturer in continuous unbroken film, free of pinholes, filling and spreading around all joints, slots, grooves and penetrating into all crevices, chases, reveals, soffits, and corners. 2. Carry coating over exposed footing's top and outside edges and up vertical wall to finished grade line. 3. Recoat areas not dampproofed if contaminated by dust. 4. Mask and protect adjoining exposed finish surfaces. B. Concrete and Other Dense Surfaces: Apply dampproofing in single coat application at rate recommended by manufacturer. C. Concrete Masonry Surfaces: Apply dampproofing in two coat application. 1. Apply prime coat of asphalt emulsion dampproofing diluted with clean, cool water at rate recommended by manufacturer. 2. Allow prime coat to dry to the point where it is tacky to the touch prior to application of second coat. 3. Apply dampproofing top or second coat at rate recommended by manufacturer. D. Protection Materials: Apply protection board or sheet and related materials in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. E. Allow dampproofing to cure minimum time as recommended by manufacturer prior to backfilling. 3.4 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. END OF SECTION 07 11 13 H&C BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13-4 H&C VEHICULAR TRAFFIC COATING 07 18 16-1 SECTION 07 18 16 - VEHICULAR TRAFFIC COATING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Perform work employing a factory-authorized installer. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the Work. B. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to commencement of the traffic coating work, schedule a meeting at a mutually agreeable time to include the Architect, Contractor, Contractor's field superintendent, traffic coating installer, coating materials manufacturer's representative, and other appropriate interested parties to review methods and procedures to be used. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with VOC regulations. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings and manufacturer's data for the following items: 1. Outline of area to receive traffic coating. 2. Locations, details and types of penetrations. 3. Perimeter and vertical details. 4. Perimeter and expansion joint locations. B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's standard colors. C. Certificates: Submit certification from the manufacturer indicating approval of the applicator and submit certifications from both the manufacturer and applicator that the substrate and the details are proper and adequate for the materials being furnished. D. Installation Report: At completion of Work, manufacturer's representative shall write report on installation summarizing installation and certifying that installation meets manufacturer's requirements for properly functioning system with no leaks. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. H&C VEHICULAR TRAFFIC COATING 07 18 16-2 B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty that traffic coating system will remain watertight for a period of 5 years. Upon notification of defects within warranty period, make necessary repairs and replacements at the convenience of the Owner. Repairs and replacements shall include resultant damage to adjacent materials, systems and equipment. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Apply components of the traffic coating system at surface and ambient temperatures of 40 degrees F. or above with fair, dry weather conditions. For applications below 40 degrees F., follow traffic coating manufacturers written instructions. Do not apply surface coatings and adhesives when rain is expected within two hours. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products as manufactured by one of the following or approved equal, subject to conformance with specfications: 1. Gaco Western (800) 456-4226 www.gaco.com 2. Neogard, (214) 353-1689 www.neogard.com 2.2 MATERIALS A. Gaco Western GacoDeck GW-15U: 1. Primer: As recommended by manufacturer. 2. Sheet Flashing; Gaco Western NF-621 elastomeric sheet flashing material having a minimum thickness of 60 mils. 3. Liquid Flashing: Gaco Western U-68 polyurethane coating. 4. Aggregate: Shelfil 12/20. 5. Coating: Gaco Western U-68, color to be as selected by Architect. 6. Sealant: Sonneborn NP-1 or SikaFlex A-1. 7. Reinforcing Tape: Gaco Western 66-B H&C VEHICULAR TRAFFIC COATING 07 18 16-3 B. Neogard Auto Gard II. 1. Primer: As recommended by manufacturer. 2. Sheet Flashing; Elastomeric sheet flashing material having a minimum thickness of 60 mils. 3. Liquid Flashing: Neogard 7430 polyurethane coating. 4. Aggregate: Uniformly Graded 16/30 mesh silica sand with 6.5 +.5 MOH hardness as approved by manufacturer. 5. Coating: Neogard 7430 polyurethane coating, color to be as selected by Architect. 6. Sealant: Neogard 70991 Sealant. 7. Reinforcing Tape: As recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 1. Verify that work of all other trades which penetrates walls and decking or requires men and equipment to transverse area prior to installation of coating system. 2. Surfaces: Verify that surfaces meet the requirements of the manufacturer's written specifications, as applicable, regarding concrete finishing and curing. Inspect to ensure that surfaces to receive coating system are dry, smooth, rigid, clean, frost-free, and free of voids, dirt, debris, sharp projections, grease, oil, or other contaminants. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Remove dust from the surface immediately before application of primer. Repair defects prior to primer application. B. Verify that penetrations through the surfaces to be treated are completed prior to the application of the traffic coating system. C. Concrete: If required by manufacturer's published instructions, treat concrete surfaces with 10% to 15% solution of muriatic acid to remove laitance and impurities. Rinse in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Following thorough drying of the surface, apply primer and sealer coats as required by the manufacturer. H&C VEHICULAR TRAFFIC COATING 07 18 16-4 D. Cracks and Cold Joints: Visible cracks, up to 1/16” in width shall be cleaned, primed and treated with polyurethane deck coating material a minimum distance of 2” on each side of the crack to yield a total thickness of 30 dry mils. Large cracks shall be routed and sealed with Gaco Western UB-64 and 66-B tape or Neogard 70991 and reinforcing tape. E. Metal surfaces: Mechanically clean and wipe with Xylol, then prime with manufacturer's recommended primer. F. Exposed metal projections: Prepare in accordance with manufacturer's printed details. G. Joints and Edge Detailing: Apply 10 mil by 6 inch wide detail coat of specified Coating at all joints. Allow to tack. Place specified Reinforcing Fabric in Coating as shown in manufacturer's details. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install the work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Provide nominal 53 mil system, including aggregate. B. Apply primer at rate recommended by manufacturer to produce shiny surface. Primer may be re-coated when material has slight tack, but can no longer be lifted from surface. Allow to cure overnight. Reprime if left exposed for 24 hours. C. Apply reinforcing in detail coat of coating over control joints and cracks exceeding 1/16 inch. Allow to tack prior to placing reinforcing fabric. D. Apply base coat of traffic coating membrane at 1-1/4 to 1-1/2 gallons per 100 square feet. Allow to cure. E. Apply wearing surface coat over cured base coat at 1-1/4 to 1-1/2 gallons per 100 square feet. Broadcast aggregate to fluid material. (Approximately 20 lbs. per 100 square feet for silica sand; 8 to 10 lbs. per 100 square feet for Shelfil.) Broadcast aggregate within 30 minutes of applying coating. Allow to cure. F. Apply one additional coat of wearing coating and aggregate at ramps and turning radius areas. G. Apply lock coat of coating at a rate of 1-1/4 to 1-1/2 gallons per 100 square feet. Allow minimum of 24 hour cure before subjecting system to traffic. H&C VEHICULAR TRAFFIC COATING 07 18 16-5 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Arrange for manufacturer's representative to inspect membrane thoroughly before covering. Make necessary corrections immediately. B. Provide for at least one interim inspection by the manufacturer's representative prior to application of aggregate. C. Completed traffic coating system shall be inspected by manufacturer's representative and accompanied by Contractor who shall assist as required to provide inspection of system. 3.5 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 07 18 16 H&C WATER REPELLENTS 07 19 00-1 SECTION 07 19 00 - WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes application of water repellent materials to masonry substrates. B. Application procedures and coverage rates to be employed in application of the treatment are dependent upon the condition of the substrate and results of testing conducted at the jobsite prior to beginning general application. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Water repellent shall penetrate into and chemically bond with substrate. Treated surface shall resist penetration by water and water-borne salts, ions, and other contaminants for the warranty period specified herein. B. Water repellent shall not change surface texture, appearance, or vapor permeability. Slight changes (darkening) of substrates after application are subject to approval by Architect prior to acceptance and general application. C. Masonry walls treated with water repellent shall show no evidence of moisture penetration when field tested on sample wall panel prior to general application and after field quality control testing after application. 1.3 SUPERVISION A. Field testing and general application of water repellent shall be conducted under supervision of the water repellent manufacturer to ensure that work is carried out in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations to comply with performance requirements and manufacturer’s warranty requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product description and specifications, surface preparation and application instructions, recommendations for each surface to receive water repellent, coverage rates, protection and cleaning requirements. Submit copies of test reports from independent laboratories. B. Submit manufacturer and applicator qualifications. C. Submit sample of manufacturer’s warranty and any special procedures required to obtain warranty. H&C WATER REPELLENTS 07 19 00-2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be able to show evidence that the firm has been engaged in producing such material for at least 5 years and that the product has maintained water repellency for over 5 years of continuous field exposure. B. Applicator Qualifications: Applicators shall be trained, approved and accepted by the Manufacturer and have a minimum of 2 years experience in successful application of water repellent products. C. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Conduct a pre-installation conference at the Project Site prior to field testing of water repellent. 2. Attendees: Representatives of Owner, Contractor, Manufacturers proposing use of water repellents in the work, and Architect. 3. Representatives of Owner, Contractor, and Architect shall be notified a minimum of 72 hours prior to pre-installation conference. 4. Review substrate and weather conditions. Arrange for protective measure necessary for protection of substrates during and after installation. 5. Discuss performance requirements and proposed application rates and procedures. D. Field Testing - General: 1. Purpose of Field Testing: Field testing of water repellents is to successfully demonstrate the water repellent performance of the proposed water repellent product and for acceptance of product for general application. Acceptance of product at time of field testing for general application does not provide for final approval of the product in the Work. 2. General application of the water repellent on building(s) will be subject to the Field Quality Control Testing specified in Part 3 of this Section. 3. Field testing of the water repellent does not guarantee use of the product for general application. Acceptance for use and general application is subject to successful field testing and evaluation by the Architect. E. Field Testing – Procedures: Conduct field testing of water repellent on Mock-up specified in Section 04220 prior to general application of water repellent and in presence of Architect and water repellent manufacturer. 1. Sample wall panel shall be cured minimum of 30 days prior to field application and testing of proposed water repellent. 2. Provide minimum 72 hour notice to Architect and manufacturer prior to application and testing. 3. Clean and prepare masonry substrates employing procedures proposed for use on the project. 4. Apply water repellent to minimum 100 square foot area of each type of masonry surface to be treated and allow to react with substrate and cure minimum time recommended by the water repellent manufacturer prior to water testing. H&C WATER REPELLENTS 07 19 00-3 5. Apply water repellent as specified and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations at specified coverage rates and employing procedures and equipment proposed for use on the project. 6. Test for pH level, according to water repellent manufacturer’s written instructions, to ensure successful performance of materials on proposed masonry substrates. 7. Perform water penetration tests on treated and untreated surfaces to determine relative effectiveness of treatment. 8. Water Penetration Testing: Perform water penetration test as specified under Field Quality Control to Sample wall panel. 9. Successful application of water repellent will show no evidence of moisture penetration on the interior surface of the wall after four hour period. 10. Corrective Procedures: Corrective procedures as necessary to produce acceptable performance shall be established by the water repellent manufacturer during field testing to correct areas where evidence of moisture penetration is found after initial application and testing of water repellent. 11. Perform corrective procedures on portion of sample wall panel as directed by the Architect to show compliance with performance requirements. 12. Provide additional sample wall panels and continue testing, at no additional cost to Owner, until suitable product and application procedures are provided with successful field testing achieved. F. Field Color Samples: 1. Apply water repellent and masonry stain to Mock-up wall panel. 2. The purpose of this sample will be to observe color uniformity and intensity, method of application, and workmanship techniques. 3. Equipment to be used for actual application to building walls shall be used to apply materials to sample wall. 4. The sample, when approved by the Architect, will function as a reference base for acceptance or rejection of color. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Delivery shall be made to the job site in Manufacturer's original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with Manufacturer's batch number. B. Storage and Protection: Store materials in original, unopened containers in compliance with Manufacturer's printed instructions and protect from damage. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Temperature and relative humidity conditions for a period before, during, and after application shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer. If rain occurs, allow surfaces to dry a minimum of 5 days before application. H&C WATER REPELLENTS 07 19 00-4 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall provide a written warranty for a period of 5 years from date of project completion. 1. Written warranty shall include the following provisions: a. Walls where water repellent has been applied shall show no evidence of moisture penetration on the interior surface of the wall for the full warranty period. b. Coating will not cause changes in surface texture and color for the full warranty period, regardless of number of applications required to comply with performance requirements. 2. Upon satisfactory completion of the installation, and as a condition of its acceptance, the warranty shall be delivered to the Owner. 3. If at any time during the warranty period, any such failure occurs resulting from ordinary weather conditions in any area to which the coating has been properly applied, the manufacturer shall agree to supply all material needed to repair such affected areas at no additional cost. B. The applicator shall guarantee the installation against poor workmanship for a period of 2 years from the date of Substantial Completion. Applicator shall make necessary repairs without charge to Owner during that period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Water Repellent Sealer: 1. Clear, penetrating, single or multi-component product formulated for application to vertical and horizontal masonry surfaces. 2. Treatment shall comply with applicable volatile organic compound emission regulations and shall be non-flammable. 3. Water-repellent, including masonry stain, shall be produced by a single manufacturer, and shall be eligible for the specified warranty. B. Stain: H&C WATER REPELLENTS 07 19 00-5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Carefully inspect the installed Work of other Trades, and verify that such Work is complete to the point where water repellent application may commence. 2. The Manufacturer's representative shall verify that the water repellent can be applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and additional procedures established during field testing. 3. Verify that cracks which exceed 1/64 inch (0.40mm) wide have been filled with pointing mortar or sealant material. Defective mortar joints shall be routed out, pointed with mortar and tooled. 4. Verify that flashing and sealant materials have been installed properly. 5. Verify that masonry has been cleaned as specified in Section 04 01 20.52. 6. Verify sealants have been installed and are properly cured. 7. Advise Architect in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not apply water repellent until conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Use all means necessary to protect clear water repellent before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed Work of other Trades. 2. Metal, glass and other such items shall be protected by suitable masking materials to protect against overspray. 3. In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary as acceptable to the Architect. 4. Protect concrete sidewalks from runoff by soaking with water immediately prior to application on adjacent walls. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Allow walls to cure at least 30 days before clear water repellent is applied. 2. Walls shall be free of excess mortar. 3. Follow Manufacturer's instructions regarding allowable moisture level. 4. Clean surface in accordance with water repellent manufacturer’s recommendations to remove all loose and foreign matter that could interfere with application and performance of water repellent. H&C WATER REPELLENTS 07 19 00-6 3.3 APPLICATION A. Water Repellent Application - General: Follow Manufacturer's instructions for application and coverage, and procedures established during field testing and acceptance. Do not apply water repellent until successful field testing is achieved and proposed product is approved for general application to the building(s). B. Mixing: Strictly observe all mix ratios and consistently measure field mixes with containers calibrated in standard volume units. C. Surfaces to be coated: 1. All exposed exterior surfaces of concrete masonry unit walls, including surfaces not exposed to view such as backs of parapet walls, horizontal projections, etc. and not covered by another finish material or paint system. 2. All exposed exterior surfaces of concrete masonry unit planter and site walls. 3. Other locations as indicated on Drawings. D. Application: 1. Apply water repellent to dry surfaces using airless spray equipment as recommended by the manufacturer at consistent minimum rate. 2. Apply product in saturating one or two coat application allowing time between coats as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Apply product from bottom of the vertical surface to the top, saturating the surface but avoiding excessive rundown. 4. At no time shall rate of coverage be less than required by Manufacturer's written instructions and additional procedures established during field testing and acceptance. E. Protect surfaces where water repellent has been applied from rain, dirt, dust, traffic, wind-blown debris and other materials that could harm performance of material for a period of not less than 4 hours after application, but not less than protective time recommended by the manufacturer. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Water Penetration Tests: 1. Twenty days after completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, demonstrate by running water test that the Work of this Section will successfully repel water. 2. Notify the Architect and Manufacturer at least 72 hours in advance and conduct the test in the presence of Architect and manufacturer's representative. 3. Clean and prepare masonry substrates employing procedures proposed for use on the project. H&C WATER REPELLENTS 07 19 00-7 4. By means of an outrigger or similar acceptable equipment, place 3/4 inch garden hose with garden type spray nozzle, at a point designated by the Architect, 8 feet to 10 feet away from the wall, aiming the nozzle so that water will strike the wall at a 45 degree downward angle. 5. Run the water onto the wall at full available force for not less than 4 hours. Provisions shall be made to collect the run off water into a container, and if possible to reuse it in the test 6. Upon completion of the four hour period, inspect the interior surface of the wall for evidence of moisture penetration. 7. If evidence of moisture penetration is discovered, perform corrective procedures established during initial field testing to the areas where leakage occurred. 8. Successful application of water repellent will show no evidence of moisture penetration on the interior surface of the wall after four hour period. 9. An additional area or areas designated by the Architect shall be tested and corrected if leakage occurs, at no additional cost to Owner. 10. Application of water repellent is subject to rejection upon failing field quality control testing after corrective procedures have been performed at areas failing initial field quality control testing. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean spillage and overspray as recommended by the Manufacturer. B. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. END OF SECTION 07 19 00 H&C THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-1 SECTION 07 21 00- THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's data, installation instructions, limitations and recommendations. Include certification and test data substantiating R-Values and combustibility of each type of insulation. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. B. Provide certificate of compliance acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating conformance to fire-resistance requirements. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Deliver materials to job in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging. Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. Deliver so that stocks of materials on the site will permit uninterrupted progress of the Work. B. Materials shall be properly identified on each package with the Manufacturer's name and R value. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Batt and Blanket Insulation: a. Johns-Manville www.jm.com b. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. www.owenscorning.com c. Certainteed www.certainteed.com H&C THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-2 2. Board Insulation: a. The Dow Chemical Co. www.dow.com/styrofoam/na/ b. Amoco Foam Products Co. www.bp.com/chemicals/who/units c. UCI B. Materials designated for a specific application shall be the products of one Manufacturer. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Materials shall be new, of uniform quality, suitable and without defects affecting the strength or service of the structure. B. Batt Insulation: ASTM C665, Type III, Class A, Category 1 faced with nailing flanges at wood framing, Type I, unfaced glass fiber batts. Batts shall be a single thickness to meet the required R value, multiple layers of batts will not be accepted. 1. Thickness: Provide minimum thickness as required to provide the resistance values as indicated on Drawings, for various locations. C. Fire Safing Insulation: ASTM C24, E119 and E136. Thickness shall be as required by the Manufacturer to provide a fire rating equal to that of the assembly of which it is a part. Where smoke stop protection also is required, install Thermafiber SmokeSeal Caulking Compound as needed to meet UL Standard 1479 and ASTM E814 procedure. D. Acoustical Batt Insulation: As specified in Section 09 81 00. E. Board Insulation: Rigid extruded polystyrene board, thickness and R value as shown on Drawings, meeting ASTM C578, Type IV. F. Separate Vapor Barrier/Cover Sheet: Lamtec WMP-10 Polypropylene cover sheet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. H&C THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-3 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Batt Insulation: 1. Apply no insulation until such time as the Construction has progressed to the point that inclement weather will not damage or wet the insulation material. 2. Fully insulate small areas between closely spaced framing members, pipes, conduits or other obstruction by cutting and fitting insulation material as required to maintain the integrity of the insulation. 3. At wood framing nail or staple flanges of faced batts and friction fit unfaced batts between wood members. 4. Batt insulation at metal studs, concrete tees, and other non-nailable members shall be installed with vapor barriers in and flanges continuously tight against framing members. a. Secure in place with string wire or other method as approved by Architect. b. Insulation at concrete tees shall be installed with 5 adhesive applied pins per each 2'-0" x 4'-0" batt. 5. Place insulation tight to exterior wall or roof substrate without voids. 6. End match neatly with ends fitting snugly. B. Fire Safing Insulation: Install in proper sizes on safing clips as needed but not to exceed 24 inches O.C. Leave no voids between walls and edges of slabs. C. Foundation Board Insulation: 1. Install perimeter polystyrene board insulation continuously to a depth of 2'-0" below the exterior grade level around the perimeter of the building on the inside face to form a continuous thermal barrier from the floor slab down. Backfilling against the insulation shall ensure a snug fit. 2. Insulate small areas between closely spaced framing members, pipe, conduit or other obstruction by cutting and fitting insulation materials as required to maintain the integrity of the insulation. 3. Fit ends snugly or overlap. D. Interior Board Insulation: 1. Install board insulation at locations as indicated on Drawings. 2. Insulate small areas between closely spaced framing members, pipe, conduit or other obstruction by cutting and fitting insulation materials as required to maintain the integrity of the insulation. 3. Fit ends snugly or overlap. 4. Under Refrigerators/Freezers: Install under slab and turn up at edge to match adjacent panels. Coordinate installation with equipment manufacturer. H&C THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-4 E. Separate Vapor Barrier/Cover Sheet: 1. Adhesive apply over exposed surfaces of insulation with joints lapped and glued. 2. No insulation shall be left exposed. 3. Install friction washers over pins to hold cover sheet and insulation in place. 4. Membrane shall be closely fitted around pipes, conduits, columns, and other protrusions." 3.3 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. B. Protection: Take precautions to protect insulation, both during and after installation, from damage of any kind until covered. END OF SECTION 07 21 00 H&C FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 07 21 19 - 1 SECTION 07 21 19 – FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data indicating methods of application and insulating values. B. Mock-up: Provide sample as part of mock-up construction per section 04 22 00. Coordinate with General Contractor and install all necessary finish accessories for exterior purposes. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in their original container marked with the name of the manufacturer and brand. Store products on the site in a dry area, protected from the weather. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Insulation: Furnish one of the following, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. PolyMaster, Inc., Knoxville, TN 37932 (800) 580-3626 as distributed in Arizona by Thermal Advantage, Chandler, AZ 85226 (480) 705-5757 www.polymaster.com. R-501 or R-505 foam, a 2nd generation amino-plast polymer which produces a non-toxic and odor-free material that is environmentally friendly. a. Foaming process shall incorporate a 2-components system consisting of a solid water-soluble plastic resin and an aqueous based foaming agent/catalyst. b. Compressed air or nitrogen shall be used to generate a dense closed-cell foam, which is physically coated with the plastic resin. c. The catalyst contained in the foam shall harden the resin within 10-30 seconds. d. The finished product shall be inert, non-corrosive and lightweight. H&C FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 07 21 19 - 2 2. “Core-Fill 500” as manufactured by Tailored Chemical Products, P.O. Drawer 4186, Hickory, N.C. 28603, (800) 627-1687. Two-component thermal insulation produced by combing a plastic resin and catalyst foaming agent surfactant, with compressed air, to product a cold-setting foam insulation in the hollow cores of hollow unit masonry walls. a. Fire Resistance Ratings: Minimum four (4) hour fire resistance wall rating (ASTM E-119) for 8” and 12” concrete masonry units when used in standard two (2) hour rated CMU’s b. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread, smoke developed and fuel contributed of 15, 75 and 0 respectively. c. Combustion Characteristics: Must be noncombustible, Class A building material. d. Thermal Values: “R” Value of 4.91/inch @ 32 degrees F mean; ASTM C-177. “R” values for block as follows: 8” CMU – 14.2, 12” CMU – 20 (values based on 60 lb. density block). e. Sound Abatement: Minimum Sound Transmissions Class (“STC”) rating of 53 and a minimum Outdoor Indoor Transmission Class (“OITC”) rating of 44 for 8” wall assembly (ASTM E 90-90). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting structure and conditions under which masonry wall insulating fill will be installed and notify Contractor, in writing, any conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. Do not proceed with the installation of masonry insulation fill work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Wall preparation: 1. Plug holes in the walls through which insulation can escape with permanent materials. 2. Prior to the installation of the insulation, permanently seal electrical outlets, and other apertures through which insulation could escape. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and the following. Where specified requirements conflict with the manufacturer’s instructions, manufacturer’s printed instructions shall govern: 1. In building walls around interior spaces, completely fill ungrouted cells solid with foam material under pressure to prevent voids. 2. Place foam as recommended by the manufacturer, only after conduits, and other items within masonry cavities are in place in walls. H&C FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 07 21 19 - 3 3. Top fill applications (installation simultaneous with masonry erection): a. Insert application hose into each core of CMU and push hose to bottom of cavity. Slowly withdraw application hose while foaming core full. b. To avoid conflicts with masons, leave last course empty until next lift is completed. c. Fill wall sections under doors and windows before sills are placed. 4. Pressure fill (side) applications (installation upon completion of masonry erection)(Provide only where approved by Architect): a. Provide holes 5/8 inch to 2 inch in diameter drilled directly into the masonry cell. b. Foam shall flow and fill the cavity up to 12’-0” in either vertical direction form the hole. c. Pressure filling shall generate a complete fill of the core and head joints. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean-up: Upon completion of insulating fill work, clean exposed masonry. 1. Remove surplus insulation from block faces at the time insulation is installed. 2. Do no use abrasive cleaners (steel wool, wire brush, or acid) in conjunction with removing insulation or dirt from the faces of block. END OF SECTION 07 21 19 H&C DIRECT FINISH SYSTEM FOR SOFFITS AND CEILINGS 07 24 00- 1 SECTION 07 24 00 – DIRECT FINISH SYSTEM FOR SOFFITS AND CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Senergy Direct Finish System: Soffit and ceiling direct finish system consisting of Base Coat, Reinforcing Mesh and Finish Coat. 2. Schedule of Senergy Finish Coat. B. Related Sections: 1. Products installed, but not supplied under this section: concrete substrate; masonry substrate; cold-formed metal framing; sheet metal flashing and trim; perimeter flashings; sealants; metal support systems and gypsum board. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Submit product data on Senergy Direct Finish System components, shop drawings, system samples, system manufacturer's certificate of approval of applicator, system manufacturer’s letter that materials meet or exceed specified requirements, and system manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: More than 10 years in the EIFS industry, with more than 1000 completed EIFS projects. B. Applicator: Approved by Senergy in performing work of this Section. C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code requirements for finish system. H&C DIRECT FINISH SYSTEM FOR SOFFITS AND CEILINGS 07 24 00- 2 D. Field Samples 1. Construct one field sample panel for each color and texture, illustrating method of attachment, surface finish, color and texture, prepared using the same tools and techniques to be used for the actual application. 2. Locate sample panel where directed. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations regarding environmental conditions for its materials.. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate and schedule installation of Senergy Direct Finish System with related work of other sections. B. Coordinate and schedule installation of trim, flashing, and joint sealers to prevent water infiltration behind the System. 1.7 WARRANTY A. A. Provide Senergy one year direct finish materials coating replacement warranty for Senergy Direct Finish System installations. B. Comply with Senergy project review requirements and notification procedures to assure qualification for warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. BASIS OF DESIGN: Senergy Direct Finish System manufactured by the Wall Systems operating unit of BASF Corporation (herein referred to as “BASF Wall Systems”), or approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Senergy Adhesives/Base Coats: 1. Senerflex ALPHA BASE COAT: 100% acrylic base coat, field-mixed with Portland cement, manufactured by BASF Wall Systems. -OR- 2. ALPHA DRY BASE COAT: dry-mix base coat containing Portland cement, manufactured by BASF Wall Systems. H&C DIRECT FINISH SYSTEM FOR SOFFITS AND CEILINGS 07 24 00- 3 B. Water: Clean and potable without foreign matter. C. Senergy Reinforcing Mesh: MIL-Y-1140G; Balanced, open weave glass fiber reinforcing mesh; twisted multi-end strands treated for compatibility with Senergy Direct Finish System components. 1. FLEXGUARD 4: standard weight. D. Senergy Finish Coat: SENERFLEX 100% acrylic resin finish; air cured, compatible with Base Coat; Finish color factory-mixed; color as selected; Finish texture FINE as scheduled. Check product bulletins for complete application instructions and for the use of Senergy Coatings for priming sealant joints and priming of the Base Coat in certain applications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify project site conditions. B. Acceptable substrates must be securely fastened per applicable building code requirements. C. Examine surfaces to receive Senergy Direct Finish System and verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry, clean, cured, sound and free of releasing agents, paint, or other residue or coatings. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of fins or planar irregularities greater than 6.4 mm in 3 m (1/4" in 10'). D. Acceptable substrates are PermaBase® brand cement board (or other ASTM C1325 Type A Exterior approved cement boards); ASTM C1177 type sheathings including DensGlass™ exterior sheathing, e2XP™ sheathing, GlasRoc® sheathing, Securock™ glass-mat sheathing, Weather Defense™ Platinum sheathing and GreenGlass® sheathing; poured concrete/unit masonry; stucco or exterior gypsum soffit board (ASTM C931).Control/Expansion joint type and placement shall be the responsibility of the architect/engineer and substrate manufacturer. E. Unsatisfactory conditions shall be reported to the general contractor and corrected before application of the Senergy Direct Finish System. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect all surrounding areas and surfaces from damage and staining during application of Senergy Direct Finish System. B. Protect finished work at end of each day to prevent water penetration. H&C DIRECT FINISH SYSTEM FOR SOFFITS AND CEILINGS 07 24 00- 4 3.3 MIXING A. General: No additives are permitted unless specified in product mixing instructions. Close containers when not in use. Prepare in a container that is clean and free of foreign substances. Do not use a container which has contained or been cleaned with a petroleum-based product. Clean tools with soap and water immediately after use. Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. 3.4 APPLICATION A. General: Apply Direct Applied Finish System materials in accordance with Specifications. B. Senerflex Base Coat/Reinforcing Mesh: Base Coat shall be applied so as to achieve Reinforcing Mesh embedment with no Reinforcing Mesh color visible. 1. Sheathed substrates: a. Apply mixed ALPHA Base Coat to entire surface of substrate with a stainless steel trowel to embed the Reinforcing Mesh. b. Immediately place FLEXGUARD 4 Reinforcing Mesh against wet Base Coat and embed the Reinforcing Mesh into the Base Coat by troweling from the center to the edges. c. Lap Reinforcing Mesh 64 mm (2 - 1/2") minimum at edges. d. Ensure Reinforcing Mesh is continuous at corners, void of wrinkles and embedded in Base Coat so that no mesh color is visible. e. If required, apply a second layer of Base Coat to achieve full Reinforcing Mesh embedment and specified Base Coat thickness.] C. Senergy Finish Coat 1. FINE a. Apply and level Finish Coat during same operation to minimum obtainable thickness consistent with uniform coverage. b. Maintain a wet edge on Finish Coat by applying and texturing continually over the wall surface. c. Work Finish Coat to corners, joints, or natural breaks and do not allow material to set up within an uninterrupted wall area. d. Float Finish Coat to achieve final texture. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces and remove excess material, droppings, and debris. B. Protect finished work. END OF SECTION 07 24 00 H&C WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION 07 24 19 - 1 AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) SECTION 07 24 19 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. EIFS -clad drainage-wall assemblies that are field applied over substrate. 2. Water-resistive coatings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 072413 "Polymer-Based Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS)" for EIFS- clad barrier-wall assemblies. 2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in EIFS with elastomeric joint sealants and for perimeter joints between system and other materials. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASTM E 2110 apply to Work of this Section. B. EIFS: Exterior insulation and finish system(s). C. IBC: International Building Code. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each EIFS component, trim, and accessories. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. C. Include a typical control joint filled with sealant of color selected, as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on Senerflex Channeled Adhesive Design materials, product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and durability. H&C WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION 07 24 19 - 2 AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) B. Code Compliance: Provide manufacturer’s applicable code compliance report. C. Samples: Submit samples of Senerflex Channeled Adhesive Design illustrating Finish Coat color and texture range. D. Certificate: System manufacturer’s approval of applicator. E. Sealant: Sealant manufacturer’s certificate of compliance with ASTM C1382. F. System manufacturer’s current specifications, typical details, system design guide and related product literature which indicate preparation required, storage, installation techniques, jointing requirements and finishing techniques. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For EIFS to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: More than 10 years in the EIFS industry, with more than 1000 completed EIFS projects. B. Applicator: Approved by BASF Wall Systems in performing work of this section. C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code requirements for exterior insulation and finish system. D. Field Samples 1. Construct one field sample panel for each color and texture, materials illustrating method of attachment, surface Finish color and texture. 2. Prepare each sample panel using the same tools and techniques to be used for the actual application. 3. Locate sample panel where directed. 4. Accepted sample panel may not remain as part of the work. 5. Field samples shall be comprised of all wall assembly components including substrate, Air/Water Resistive barrier, insulation board, Base Coat, Reinforcing Mesh, primer (if specified), Finish Coat, and typical sealant/flashing conditions. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver Senerflex Channeled Adhesive Design materials in original unopened packages with manufacturer’s labels intact. B. Protect Senerflex Channeled Adhesive Design materials during transportation and installation to avoid physical damage. H&C WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION 07 24 19 - 3 AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) C. Store Senerflex Channeled Adhesive Design materials in cool, dry place protected from freezing. Store at no less than 4°C/40°F (10°C/50°F for BASF Wall Systems’ AURORA STONE, AURORA TC-100, ALUMINA™ and BOREALIS Finish). D. Store insulation boards flat and protected from direct sunlight and extreme heat. E. Store Senerflex Channeled Adhesive Design Reinforcing Mesh, SHEATHING FABRIC and SENERFLASH™/SENERWRAP flexible flashing in cool, dry place protected from exposure to moisture. 1.9 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Do not apply Senerflex Channeled Adhesive Design in ambient temperatures below 4°C/40°F (10°C/50°F for BASF Wall Systems’ AURORA STONE, AURORA TC-100, ALUMINA™ and BOREALIS Finish). Provide properly vented, supplementary heat during installation and drying period when temperatures less than 4°C/40°F (10°C/50°F for BASF Wall Systems’ AURORA STONE, AURORA TC-100, ALUMINA™ and BOREALIS Finish) prevail. B. Do not apply Senerflex Channeled Adhesive Design materials to frozen surfaces. C. Maintain ambient temperature at or above 4°C/40°F (10°C/50°F for BASF Wall Systems’ AURORA STONE, AURORA TC-100, ALUMINA™ and BOREALIS Finish) during and at least 24 hours after Senerflex Channeled Adhesive Design installation and until dry. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate and schedule installation of Senerflex Channeled Adhesive Design with related work of other sections. B. Coordinate and schedule installation of trim, flashing, and joint sealers to prevent water infiltration behind the system. 1.11 WARRANTY A. When warranties are required, verify with Owner's counsel that warranties stated in this article are not less than remedies available to Owner under prevailing local laws. 1. Comply with BASF Wall Systems project review requirements and notification procedures to assure qualification for warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Senerflex® Channeled Adhesive Design (Class PB System) manufactured by BASF Corporation.or comparable product. H&C WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION 07 24 19 - 4 AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 2.2 EIFS MATERIALS A. Air/Water-Resistive Barrier: 1. SENERSHIELD-R®: ready-mixed, flexible Air/Water Resistive Barrier. a. 4” SHEATHING FABRIC: 100 mm (4") spunbonded non-woven reinforced polyester web for use with SENERSHIELD-R. B. Adhesives/Base Coats 1. ALPHA Base Coat: 100% acrylic base coat, field-mixed with Portland cement; manufactured by BASF Corp. C. Water: Clean and potable without foreign matter. E. Insulation Board: Expanded polystyrene; ASTM C578, Type I; Flame spread less than 25, smoke developed less than 450 per ASTM E84, UL 723; minimum density 15.22 kg/m3 (0.95 lb/ft3; K=6.09 per mm (0.24 per inch); minimum thickness as indicated on drawings [minimum 19 mm (3/4")]; meeting the following: 1. Air-dried (aged) six weeks, or equivalent, prior to installation. 2. Edges: square within 0.8 mm per meter (1/32" per foot). 3. Thickness: tolerance of plus or minus 1.6 mm (1/16"). 4. Size: 0.6 m x 1.22 m (2' x 4'). 5. Length and width: tolerance of plus or minus 1.6 mm (1/16"). F. Senergy Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, open weave glass fiber reinforcing mesh; twisted multi- end strands treated for compatibility with Senerflex Channeled Adhesive Design components. 1. FLEXGUARD 4: standard weight, 4 oz. 2. HI-IMPACT 20: heavy weight, 20 oz. used only in combination with Flexguard 4 or Intermediate 6. 3. SENERFLEX 100% acrylic polymer based finish; air cured, compatible with Base Coat; Finish texture FINE as scheduled; as manufactured by BASF Corp. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Window/Door Drip Edge: Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC), UV resistant for exterior use, with a drip edge, as furnished by Plastic Components, Inc. or equal. Accessories shall conform to ASTM D1784-97, C1063-99 and D4216-99. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. H&C WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION 07 24 19 - 5 AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) B. Walls 1. Substrates a. Trowel applied Air/Water Resistive barrier acceptable substrates: PermaBase® Cement Board and other cement-boards conforming with ASTM C1325 (Type A- exterior); poured concrete/unit masonry; ASTM C1177 type sheathings, including, Weather Defense™ Platinum sheathing, GreenGlass® sheathing, e²XP™ sheathing, GlasRoc® sheathing, Securock™ glass-mat sheathing, and DensGlass® exterior sheathing; gypsum sheathing (ASTM C79/C1396). Consult the BASF Wall Systems Technical Services Department for all other applications. b. Roller applied Air/Water Resistive barrier acceptable substrates: Acceptable substrates are: PermaBase® Cement Board and other cement-boards conforming with ASTM C1325 (Type A-exterior); poured concrete/unit masonry; ASTM C1177 type sheathings, including, Weather Defense™ Platinum sheathing, GreenGlass® sheathing, e²XP™ sheathing, GlasRoc® sheathing, Securock™ glass-mat sheathing, and DensGlass® exterior sheathing; gypsum sheathing (ASTM C79/C1396); Exposure I or exterior plywood (Grade C/D or better); or Exposure I OSB. Consult the BASF Wall Systems Technical Services Department for all other applications. c. Wall sheathing must be securely fastened per applicable building code and sheathing manufacturer’s requirements. d. Examine surfaces to receive Senerflex Channeled Adhesive Design and verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry, clean, sound, and free of releasing agents, paint, or other residue or coatings. Verify substrate is flat, free of fins or planar irregularities greater than 6.4 mm in 3 m (1/4" in 10'). 2. Roof a. Verify that all roof flashings have been installed in accordance with the guidelines set by the Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (ARMA). 3. Kick-out flashing a. Kick-out flashing must be installed leak-proof and angled (min 100°) to allow for proper drainage and water diversion. 4. Do not proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry. 2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. H&C WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION 07 24 19 - 6 AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect all surrounding areas and surfaces from damage and staining during application of Senerflex® Channeled Adhesive Design. B. Protect finished work at end of each day to prevent water penetration. C. Substrate preparation: Prepare substrates in accordance with Senergy instructions. 3.3 MIXING A. General: No additives are permitted unless specified in product mixing instructions. Close containers when not in use. Prepare in a container that is clean and free of foreign substances. Do not use a container which has contained or been cleaned with a petroleum-based product. Clean tools and equipment with water immediately after use. Dried material can only be removed mechanically. B. Air/Water Resistive Barrier 1. SENERSHIELD-R a. Mix SENERSHIELD-R with a clean, rust-free paddle and drill until thoroughly blended. Do not add water. C. Senergy Base Coat 1. ALPHA Base Coat a. Mix Base Coat with a clean, rust-free paddle and drill until thoroughly blended, before adding Portland cement. b. Mix one part (by weight) Portland cement with one part Base Coat. Add Portland cement in small increments, mixing until thoroughly blended after each additional increment. c. Clean, potable water may be added to adjust workability. D. Senergy SENERFLEX Finish Coats 1. Mix the factory-prepared material with a clean, rust-free paddle and drill until thoroughly blended. 2. A small amount of clean, potable water may be added to adjust workability. Do not overwater. 3. Additives are not permitted. 4. Close container when not in use. 5. Clean tools and equipment with water immediately after use. Dried material can only be removed mechanically. H&C WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION 07 24 19 - 7 AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 3.4 APPLICATION A. General: Apply Senerflex® Channeled Adhesive Design materials in accordance with Senerflex Channeled Adhesive Design Specifications. B. Accessories: 1. Attach Window/Door Drip Edge level and per manufacturer’s instructions. C. Air/Water Resistive Barrier 1. All sheathing joints and windows/openings must be protected and the Air/Water Resistive barrier applied in accordance with Senergy® Moisture Protection Guidelines bulletin. 2. Substrate shall be dry, clean, sound, and free of releasing agents, paint, or other residue or coatings. Verify substrate is flat, free of fins or planar irregularities greater than 6.4 mm in 3 m (¼" in 10'). 3. Unsatisfactory conditions shall be corrected before application of the SENERSHIELD-R. 4. Unsatisfactory conditions shall be corrected before application of the SENERSHIELD-R. Apply the 4" SHEATHING FABRIC/SENERSHIELD-R in accordance with the SENERSHIELD-R product bulletin. 5. Installed materials should be checked before continuing system application. 6. Ensure 4" SHEATHING FABRIC/SENERSHIELD-R overlaps the top flange of the starter track. D. Insulation Board: 1. Vertical surfaces: begin at base of wall with firm, temporary support or spacer. 2. Apply horizontally in a running bond pattern. 3. Pre-cut insulation board to fit openings and projections. Insulation board must be a single piece around corners of openings. Stagger vertical joints and corners. Stagger insulation and sheathing board joints. 4. Apply mixed ALPHA Base Coat to entire surface of insulation board using a stainless steel trowel with 13 mm x 13 mm (1/2"x 1/2") notches spaced 50 mm (2") apart. Ribbons of adhesive must be applied parallel to the 2’ dimension of the EPS insulation board to ensure they are vertical when the EPS insulation board is applied to the substrate. 5. Immediately set board into place and apply pressure over entire surface of board to ensure positive uniform contact and high initial grab. Do not slide board into place. Do not allow Base Coat to dry prior to installing. 6. Abut all joints tightly and ensure overall flush level surface. 7. Check adhesion periodically by removing a board prior to set. Properly installed insulation board will be difficult to remove and Senerflex Adhesive/Base Coat will be adhered to both the SENERSHIELD-R and the insulation board. 8. Fill 1/16" and larger gaps between insulation boards with slivers of insulation board. 9. Allow application of insulation board to dry (normally 8 to 10 hours) prior to application of Base Coat/Reinforcing Mesh. 10. Rasp flush any irregularities of the insulation board greater than 1.6 mm (1/16"). 11. Install expansion joints and aesthetic grooves as indicated on drawings. Do not align aesthetic grooves with insulation board joints. H&C WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION 07 24 19 - 8 AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) E. Senergy® Base Coat/Reinforcing Mesh: Base Coat shall be applied so as to achieve Reinforcing Mesh embedment with no Reinforcing Mesh color visible. 1. Senergy CORNER MESH a. Install CORNER MESH at corners. b. Apply CORNER MESH prior to application of Reinforcing Mesh. c. Cut CORNER MESH to workable lengths. d. Apply mixed ALPHA Base Coat to insulation board at outside corners using a stainless steel trowel. e. Immediately place CORNER MESH against the wet Base Coat and embed the CORNER MESH into the Base Coat by troweling from the corner; butt edges and avoid wrinkles. f. After Base Coat is dry and hard, apply a layer of FLEXGUARD 4, INTERMEDIATE 6 or 12 Reinforcing Mesh over the entire surface of the CORNER MESH in accordance with 3.04 C.2.] 2. Standard Impact or Medium Impact Resistance Reinforcing Mesh. a. Install FLEXGUARD 4 where indicated on drawings. b. Apply mixed ALPHA Base Coat to entire surface of insulation board with a stainless steel trowel to embed the Reinforcing Mesh. c. Immediately place FLEXGUARD 4 Reinforcing Mesh against wet Base Coat and embed the Reinforcing Mesh into the Base Coat by troweling from the center to the edges. d. Lap Reinforcing Mesh 64 mm (2 ½") minimum at edges. e. Ensure Reinforcing Mesh is continuous at corners, void of wrinkles and embedded in Base Coat so that no Reinforcing Mesh color is visible. f. If required, apply a second layer of Base Coat to achieve total nominal Base Coat/Reinforcing Mesh thickness of 1.6 mm (1/16"). g. Allow Base Coat with embedded Reinforcing Mesh to dry hard (normally 8 to 10 hours). 3. High Impact or Ultra High Impact Resistance Reinforcing Mesh a. Install HI-IMPACT 20 & FLEXGUARD 4 Reinforcing Mesh where indicated on drawings. b. Apply mixed ALPHA Base Coat to entire surface of insulation board with a stainless steel trowel to embed the Reinforcing Mesh. c. Immediately place HI-IMPACT 20 Reinforcing Mesh against wet Base Coat and embed the Reinforcing Mesh into the Base Coat by troweling from the center to the edges. d. Butt HI-IMPACT 20 Reinforcing Mesh at all adjoining edges; do not use to backwrap or bend around corners. e. Butt HI-IMPACT 20 Reinforcing Mesh at adjoining edges of CORNER MESH. f. Ensure Reinforcing Mesh is free of wrinkles and embedded in Base Coat so that no Reinforcing Mesh color is visible. g. After Base Coat with embedded Reinforcing Mesh is dry and hard (normally 8 to 10 hours), apply a layer of FLEXGUARD 4 Reinforcing Mesh over the entire surface in accordance with 3.04 C.2 to achieve total nominal Base Coat/ Reinforcing Mesh thickness of 2.4 mm (3/32").] H&C WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION 07 24 19 - 9 AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) F. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints and elsewhere as indicated. Coordinate with installation of insulation. 1. Weep Screed/Track: Use at bottom termination edges, at window and door heads and at floor line expansion joints of water-drainage EIFS unless otherwise indicated. 2. Windowsill Flashing: Use at windows unless otherwise indicated. 3. Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings. 4. Casing Bead: Use at other locations. 5. Parapet Cap Flashing: Use where indicated on Drawings. 3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Board Insulation: Adhesively attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397 and the following: 1. Apply adhesive to insulation by notched-trowel method, with notches oriented vertically to produce drainage channels that remain functional after the insulation is adhered to substrate. 2. Apply adhesive to insulation by notched-trowel method in a manner that results in coating the entire surface of drainage mat with adhesive once insulation is adhered to drainage mat. 3. Apply adhesive to ridges on back of channeled insulation by notched-trowel method in a manner that results in full adhesive contact over the entire surface of ridges, leaving channels free of adhesive once insulation is adhered to substrate. 4. Press and slide insulation into place. Apply pressure over the entire surface of insulation to accomplish uniform contact, high initial grab, and overall level surface. 5. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for not less than 24 hours, before beginning rasping and sanding insulation or applying base coat and reinforcing mesh. 6. Mechanically attach insulation to substrate. Install top surface of fastener heads flush with plane of insulation. Install fasteners into or through substrates with the following minimum penetration: a. Steel Framing: 5/16 inch (8 mm). b. Wood Framing: 1 inch (25 mm). c. Concrete and Masonry: 1 inch (25 mm). 7. Apply insulation over substrates in courses with long edges of boards oriented horizontally. 8. Begin first course of insulation from a level base line and work upward. 9. Begin first course of insulation from screed/track and work upward. Work from perimeter casing beads toward interior of panels if possible. 10. Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide or 6 inches (150 mm) high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from corners of window and door openings and not less than 4 inches (100 mm) from aesthetic reveals. a. Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from horizontal and 4 inches (100 mm) from vertical joints in sheathing. b. Mechanical Attachment: Offset joints of insulation from horizontal joints in sheathing. H&C WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION 07 24 19 - 10 AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 11. Apply channeled insulation with drainage channels aligned vertically. 12. Interlock ends at internal and external corners. 13. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps greater than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without using adhesive or other material. 14. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes complying with details indicated. 15. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than [1/32 inch (0.8 mm)] [1/16 inch (1.6 mm)] from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Prevent airborne dispersal and immediately collect insulation raspings or sandings. 16. Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit configured to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with profiles and locations indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at aesthetic reveals to less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). 17. Install foam build-outs and attach to sheathing. 18. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated. 19. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges and between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh. 20. Form joints for sealant application with back-to-back casing beads for joints within EIFS and with perimeter casing beads at dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps between casing beads and between perimeter casing beads and adjoining surfaces of width indicated. 21. After installing insulation and before applying field-applied reinforcing mesh, fully wrap board edges. Cover edges of board and extend encapsulating mesh not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) over front and back face unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 22. Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows: a. Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat. b. Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or between EIFS and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh. c. At edges trimmed by accessories, extend base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat over face leg of accessories. 23. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and water-resistive barrier. B. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, and as follows: 1. At expansion joints in substrates behind EIFS. 2. Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction, including other EIFS. 3. At floor lines in multilevel wood-framed construction. 4. Where wall height or building shape changes. 5. Where EIFS manufacturer requires joints in long continuous elevations. H&C WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION 07 24 19 - 11 AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 3.6 BASE-COAT INSTALLATION A. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than dry-coat thickness. B. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed reinforcing mesh in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free installation with mesh continuous at corners, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Do not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches (204 mm) of corners. Completely embed mesh, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are invisible. C. Double-Layer Reinforcing-Mesh Application: Where indicated or required, apply second base coat and second layer of reinforcing mesh, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions in same manner as first application. Do not apply until first base coat has cured. D. Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings, extending 4 inches (100 mm) beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch (230-by-300-mm) strip reinforcing mesh diagonally at corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch- (200- mm-) wide, strip reinforcing mesh at both inside and outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped not less than 4 inches (100 mm) on each side of corners. 1. At aesthetic reveals, apply strip reinforcing mesh not less than 8 inches (200 mm) wide. 2. Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh. E. Foam Build-Outs: Fully embed reinforcing mesh in base coat. F. Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and thickness as first application, except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat has cured. 3.7 FINISH-COAT INSTALLATION A. Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. B. Finish Coat: Apply over dry base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations. 1. Embed aggregate in finish coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform applied-aggregate finish of color and texture matching approved sample. C. Sealer Coat: Apply over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by EIFS manufacturer. H&C WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION 07 24 19 - 12 AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. As stipulated in Ch. 17 of the IBC. 2. According to [ICC-ES AC24] [ICC-ES AC235]. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. EIFS Tests and Inspections: According to [ASTM E 2359] [ICC-ES AC24] [ICC- ES AC219]. See Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work. D. EIFS will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS coatings. END OF SECTION 07 24 19 H&C WEATHER BARRIER 07 25 00-1 SECTION 07 25 00 - WEATHER BARRIER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sheet applied weather barrier and related accessories for wall air/moisture barrier system. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing and bracing. B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Sheathing. C. Section 07210 - Insulation: Exterior wall insulation. D. Section 07460 - Siding: Wall finish and primary weather barrier. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC) 127 - Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E-96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D1117 - Standard Guide for Evaluating Nonwoven Fabrics. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D3330 - Standard Test Method for Peel Adhesion of Pressure-Sensitive Tape1. E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D3759 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength and Elongation of Pressure-Sensitive Tapes. F. PSTC-1 - Peel Adhesion of Single Coated Pressure-Sensitive Tapes at 180 Degree Angle. G. TAPPI T-460 - Porosity - Gurley. H&C WEATHER BARRIER 07 25 00-2 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The airtight components and secondary moisture protection of the building enclosure and the joints, junctures and transitions between materials, products, and assemblies forming the air-tightness and moisture barrier of the building enclosure are called "the air/moisture barrier system". Services include coordination between the trades, the proper scheduling and sequencing of the work, preconstruction meetings, inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect. B. Air Barrier Penetrations: All penetrations of the air/moisture barrier and paths of air infiltration / exfiltration through the air/moisture barrier system shall be made air-tight. C. Moisture Barrier Penetrations: All penetrations of the air/moisture barrier and paths of water migration through the air/moisture barrier system shall be made water shedding. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 2 years experience with installation of similar products. B. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation and sealing techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by Architect. 3. Repair mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Do not store in direct sunlight. Weather barrier shall be stored in a covered area. Do not expose to building site chemicals. C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. H&C WEATHER BARRIER 07 25 00-3 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Anticipate environmental conditions and schedule installation when conditions are within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Product Warranty: Limited product warranty against manufacturing defects. 1. HardieWrap Weather Barrier and related products for 10 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: James Hardie Building Products, Inc. B. Substitutions: Or approved equal C. Requests for approval of equal substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 WEATHER BARRIER SYSTEM A. Moisture Air Barrier Sheet: 1. Product: HardieWrap Weather Barrier as manufactured by James Hardie Building Systems. 2. Composition: Non-woven, non-perforated polyolefin. 3. Film: MicroTech Coating with micropores to balance water holdout and breathability. 4. Thickness: 11 mil (0.28 mm). 5. UV Stability: Up to 180 days. 6. Water Holdout (AATCC127): 128 inches (3250 mm). 7. Breathability/Water Vapor Permeance (ÅSTM E-96A): 15 perms. 8. Air Resistance (TAPPI T-460): >1800 sec/100 cc. 9. Tear Strength (ÅSTM D1117): 15 to 18 lb (6.8 to 8.2 kg). 10. Basis Weight: 19.4 lbs/1000 sf (9.5 kgs/100 sm). 11. Sizes: 3 feet by 195 feet (914 mm by 59.4 m), 9 feet by 100 feet (2743 mm by 30.5 m), 9 feet by 150 feet (2743 mm by 45.7 m), 10 feet by 100 feet (3048 mm by 30.5 m), 10 feet by 150 feet (3048 mm by 45.7 m). H&C WEATHER BARRIER 07 25 00-4 B. Self-adhering Flashing: Designed for peel and stick application. 1. Product: HardieWrap Flashing as manufactured by James Hardie Building Systems. 2. Composition: Butyl rubber adhesive non-woven polyolefin backing; coated Kraft paper release. 3. Total Thickness: 25 mil (0.64 mm). 4. UV Stability: Up to 180 days. 5. Application Temperature: 30 degree F to 180 degree F (-1 degree C to 82 degree C). 6. Operating Temperature: -30 degree F to 200 degree F (-34 degree C to 93 degree C). 7. Packaging: Individually shrink-wrapped. 8. Roll Weight: 4 inch (102 mm) = 4.6 lb (2 kg)/roll, 6 inches (152 mm) = 6.9 lb (3 kg) /roll, 9 inches (229 mm) = 9.9 lb (4.5 kg)/roll. 9. Provide Width for Application Required: 4 inches by 100 feet (102 mm by 30.5 m) (2x4 construction), 6 inches by 100 feet (152 mm by 30.5 m) (2x4 construction), 9 inches by 100 feet (229 mm by 30.5) (2x6 construction). C. Flexible Flashing: 1. Product: HardieWrap Flex Flashing as manufactured by James Hardie Building Systems. 2. Composition: Butyl rubber adhesive; creped cross-laminated polyolefin backing; polyethylene film release. 3. Total Thickness: 60 mil (1.5 mm). 4. Tensile Strength (ÅSTM D3759): 18 lb/inch (3.2kg/cm). 5. UV Stability: Up to 180 days. 6. Water Vapor Transfer Rate (ÅSTM E96-94): <.2g/100 square inches/24hrs. 7. Application Temperature: 30 degree F to 180 degree F (-1 degree C to 82 degree C). 8. Operating Temperature: -30 degree F to 200 degree F (-34 degree C to 93 degree C). 9. Packaging: Each roll is packed in a convenient dispenser box 10. Roll Weight: 6 inches (152 mm) = 22.2 lb (10kg)/roll, 9 inches (229 mm) = 33.3 lb (15 kg)/roll. 11. Provide Width for Application Required: 6 inches by 75 feet (152 mm by 23.9 m) (2x4 construction), 9 inches by 75 feet (229 mm by 23.9) (2x6 construction). D. Seam Tape: 1. HardieWrap Seam Tape as manufactured by James Hardie Building Systems. 2. Composition: Polypropylene film coated with acrylic adhesive Total Thickness: 3.0 mil (.08 mm). 3. Adhesion Peel to HardieWrap (PSTC-1): 22 oz/inch (25 N/100 mm). 4. Tensile Strength (ÅSTM D3759): 32 lb/in (.58 kg/mm). 5. Elongation: 136 percent. 6. UV Stability: Up to 90 days. 7. Application Temperature: 30 degree F to 180 degree F (-1 degree C to 82 degree C). 8. Operating Temperature: -30 degree F to 200 degree F (-34 degree C to 93 degree C). 9. Packaging: Individually shrink-wrapped. 10. Roll Weight: 1 lb(0.5 kg)/roll. 11. Roll Size: 1-7/8 inches (43 mm) by 165 feet (50 m). H&C WEATHER BARRIER 07 25 00-5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If framing preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Weather barrier shall be installed before window and door installation. Do not install on saturated sheathing. Weather barrier can become slippery and should not be used in any application where it may be walked on. D. Weather barrier shall be installed on vertical wall applications only. E. Manufacturer warrants weather barrier sheet only when covered within 180 days of its installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Moisture Air Barrier Sheet: 1. Weather barrier shall be installed before window and door installation. Do not install on saturated sheathing. Weather barrier can become slippery and should not be used in any application where it may be walked on. 2. Begin by affixing weather barrier extending at least 6 inches (152 mm) around a building corner. Unroll horizontally (with print side facing out) around the building covering rough window and door openings. 3. Fasten to studs or nailable sheathing material with galvanized construction grade staples a maximum of 18 inches (457 mm) in the vertical and horizontal direction. 4. Attach weather barrier so that it is taut and flat. The vertical overlap shall have a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) and the vertical seam shall be taped. 5. Assure that the bottom edge of the weather barrier extends over the sill plate and foundation interface by at least 1 inch (25 mm). 6. Overlap upper layers of weather barrier (in shingle lap fashion) by a minimum of 6 inches below the horizontal edge, and tape the horizontal seam line. 7. At roof to wall intersection (or wall to deck), affix wrap to the wall such that it overlaps any step flashing already in place on the wall by at least 2 inches (51 mm). H&C WEATHER BARRIER 07 25 00-6 B. Flexible Flashing: 1. Windows and Doors: Weather barrier is not designed nor guaranteed as a flashing material to prevent moisture or air from intruding behind weather barrier. Verify that flashing has previously been installed around all windows and door openings. Install flexible flashing per manufacturer's instructions. a. Use the inverted "Y" cut method at rough window and door openings. Do not place fasteners within 9 inches (229 mm) of the rough opening, door or window heads. This area shall not be fastened to allow for proper head flashing installation. At the top corners of the rough opening, cut the weather barrier at 45 degree to extend 9 inches (229 mm) past the joint. b. Fold the top flap up and out of the way and fasten temporarily. c. Fold the remaining three flaps in through the opening fastening them inside the opening with staples. 2. Rough Electrical and Plumbing Penetrations: Seal with a double layer of flashing. Install the top flashing piece over the bottom flashing piece overlapping flashing layers to cover flashing cut-out necessary for placement around penetration. C. Repairs: For minor punctures or tears, less than 3 inches (76 mm), cover and completely seal with seam tape. For larger holes, greater than 3 inches (76 mm), use slit flashing technique. 1. Slit flashing requires making a horizontal slit above the damaged area and placing a cut piece of weather barrier into the slit, covering the damaged area. Tape the perimeter of the patched area. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07 25 00 H&C 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 CONCRETE ROOF TILES 073216 - 1 SECTION 073216 - CONCRETE ROOF TILES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete roof tiles. 2. Underlayment. 3. Snow guards. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 061516 "Wood Roof Decking" for solid-wood roof decking. 2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for roof sheathing. 3. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for ridge vents. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079, glossaries in TRI/WSRCA's "Concrete and Clay Roof Tile Design Criteria Installation Manual for Moderate Climate Regions," and NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of concrete roof tile and accessory tile indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes: 1. Concrete Roof Tile: Full size. 2. Accessory Tile: Full size, each type. 3. Fastenings: Wire-tie system components, 12 inches (305 mm) long. H&C 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 CONCRETE ROOF TILES 073216 - 2 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Test Reports: For each type of concrete roof tile. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For concrete roof tiles, fasteners, and fastener systems, from the ICC. C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For roofing to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Concrete Roof Tiles: 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) of each type, in unbroken bundles. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain concrete roof tiles and accessory tiles from single source from single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide concrete roof tiles and related roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; UL 790 or ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for concrete roof tiles including related roofing materials. a. Size: 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) wide 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. H&C 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 CONCRETE ROOF TILES 073216 - 3 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store underlayment rolls on end, on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double stack rolls. 1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members. B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace concrete roof tiles that fail in materials within specified warranty period. 1. Materials-Only Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Project Warranty: Roofing Installer's Warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by roofing Installer, covering Work of this Section, in which roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE ROOF TILES A. Concrete Roof Tiles: ASTM C 1492, molded- or extruded-concrete roof tile units of shape and configuration indicated, with integral color, and free of surface imperfections. Provide with fastening holes prepunched at factory. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] Eagle Roofing Products; product name or designation or comparable product by one of the following: H&C 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 CONCRETE ROOF TILES 073216 - 4 a. Bartile. b. Dectile. c. Eagle Roofing Products. d. Entegra Sales, Inc. e. Hanson Roof Tile. f. MonierLifetile LLC. g. Staco Architectural Roof Tile. h. Vande Hey-Raleigh Mfg., Inc. i. Westile Roofing Products. 3. Weight: Standard 4. Profile Shape: Boosted Capistrano 5. Side Configuration: Interlocking 6. Size: 6.5” Wide X 13.5” 7. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 29 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing of identical products by a qualified testing agency. 8. Colors, Blends, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 9. Color: As selected by Architect. 10. Profile-Shape Accessory Tiles: Ridge, ridge end, hip and hip starter, header course, L-shaped rake edge, roll rake edge, starter, end band, and terminal <Insert accessory> units, in color matching concrete roof tiles. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. B. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied. C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone-based joint sealant; Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. D. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type IV. E. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one- or two-part, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with underlayments. F. Foam Adhesive: Two-component, polyurethane expanding adhesive recommended for application by concrete roof tile manufacturer. G. Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type M, natural color. H. Eave Closure: Manufacturer's standard pre-finish aluminum eave closure formed to shape of concrete roof tiles. I. Ridge Closure: Manufacturer's standard EPDM ridge closure, formed to shape of concrete roof tiles. H&C 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 CONCRETE ROOF TILES 073216 - 5 J. Wood Nailers, Beveled Cant Strips: Comply with requirements for pressure-preservative- treated wood in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry." K. Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 (1.1-by-1.4-mm) mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber thread. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667, [copper, 0.135-inch- (3.4-mm-)] [aluminum, 0.1055-inch- (2.7-mm-)] [hot-dip galvanized-steel, 0.1055-inch- (2.7-mm-)] diameter shank, sharp-pointed, conventional roofing nails with barbed shanks; minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) diameter head; of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm) into roof-deck sheathing. 1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing. B. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire with low- profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch (25-mm) minimum diameter. C. Wood Batten Nails: ASTM F 1667; common or box, steel wire, flat head, and smooth shank. D. Wire Ties: Stainless steel, 0.083-inch (2.1-mm) minimum diameter. E. Twisted-Wire-Tie System: Continuously twisted, two-wire unit with loops formed 6 inches (152 mm) apart, minimum 0.083-inch- (2.1-mm-) diameter stainless-steel wire and 0.037- inch- (0.94-mm-) diameter stainless-steel tie wires] [0.083-inch- (2.1-mm-) diameter galvanized-steel wire and 0.037-inch- (0.94-mm-) diameter galvanized-steel tie wires, with matching-metal folding clip anchors. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: a. Newport Tool & Fastener Company, Inc. b. Wire Works, Inc. F. Hook Nails: One-piece wind lock and concrete roof tile fastener system, minimum 0.09-inch- (2.3-mm-) diameter galvanized-steel wire, for direct deck nailing. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Newport Tool & Fastener Company, Inc. b. Wire Works, Inc. G. Tile Locks: Hot-dip galvanized-steel, 0.1-inch- (2.5-mm-) diameter wire device designed to secure butt edges of overlaid concrete roof tiles. H&C 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 CONCRETE ROOF TILES 073216 - 6 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Newport Tool & Fastener Company, Inc. H. Storm Clips: Hot-dip galvanized-steel strap-type, 0.04-by-1/2-inch (1.0-by-13-mm), L-shaped retainer clips designed to secure side edges of concrete roof tiles. Provide with two fastener holes in base flange. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Newport Tool & Fastener Company, Inc. b. Wire Works, Inc. 2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II, asphalt-saturated organic felt, unperforated. B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 2626, asphalt-saturated and -coated organic felt, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides, unperforated. C. Roll Roofing Underlayment: ASTM D 6380, Class M, Type II, asphalt-saturated and -coated organic felt, mineral-granule surfaced. D. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Granular Surfaced: ASTM D 1970, a minimum of 55-mil- (1.4-mm-) thick sheet; glass-fiber-mat-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt; mineral-granule surfaced; with release paper backing; cold applied.[ Provide primer for adjoining concrete or masonry surfaces to receive underlayment.] 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ALCO-NVC Inc. b. Atlas Roofing Corporation. c. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc. d. CertainTeed Corporation. e. GAF Materials Corporation. f. Henry Company. g. IKO. h. Johns Manville. i. Owens Corning. j. <Insert manufacturer's name>. H&C 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 CONCRETE ROOF TILES 073216 - 7 E. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40-mil- (1.0-mm-) thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS- modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc. b. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. c. Henry Company. d. Johns Manville. e. Owens Corning. f. Polyguard Products, Inc. g. Protecto Wrap Company. 2.5 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. General: Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Sheet Metal: Pre-finished Aluminum B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 1. Apron Flashings: Fabricate with lower flange extending a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) over and 4 inches (100 mm) beyond each side of downslope tile roofing and 6 inches (152 mm) up the vertical surface. 2. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a head lap of 3 inches (75 mm) and a minimum extension of 5 inches (127 mm) both horizontally and vertically. 3. Channel Flashings: Fabricate with vertical surface extending a minimum of 5 inches (127 mm) above the concrete roof tile and 6 inches (152 mm) beneath the tile roofing, with a [1-inch- (25-mm-)] high vertical return to form a runoff channel. 4. Rake Pan Flashings: Fabricate with vertical surface extending over fasciae and 6 inches (152 mm) beneath the tile roofing, with a 1-inch- (25-mm-) high vertical return to form a runoff channel. 5. Cricket Flashings: Fabricate with concealed flange extending a minimum of [18 inches (455 mm)] [24 inches (610 mm)] beneath upslope tile roofing, 6 inches (152 mm) beyond each side of parapet wall, and 6 inches (152 mm) above the roof plane. 6. Open-Valley Flashings: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet (3 m), with 1-inch- (25-mm-) high, inverted-V profile at center of valley and with equal flange widths of 12 inches (305 mm)]. 7. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet (3 m), with 2-inch (50-mm) roof- deck flange and 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) fascia flange with 3/8-inch (10-mm) drip at lower edge. C. Vent-Pipe Flashings: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, at least 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. Provide lead sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt at slope of roof and extending at least 4 inches (100 mm) from pipe onto roof. H&C 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 CONCRETE ROOF TILES 073216 - 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through roofing. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with concrete roof tile manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." 1. Cover ridge and hip wood nailers with underlayment strips. B. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten with felt underlayment nails. 1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches (75 mm) in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches (152 mm) over self- adhering sheet underlayment. C. Double-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Install a 19-inch- (485-mm-) wide starter course at eaves and completely cover with full-width second course. Install succeeding courses lapping previous courses 19 inches (485 mm) in shingle fashion. Lap ends a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten with felt underlayment nails. 1. Apply a continuous layer of asphalt roofing cement over starter course and on felt underlayment surface to be concealed by succeeding courses as each felt course is installed. Apply over entire roof. 2. Install felt underlayment on roof sheathing not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap edges over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches (75 mm) in direction to shed water. D. Double-Layer Felt/Roll Roofing Underlayment: H&C 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 CONCRETE ROOF TILES 073216 - 9 1. Install single layer of felt underlayment on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten with felt underlayment nails. 2. Install roll roofing underlayment, in parallel courses, in same direction as felt underlayment. Lap ends a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm). a. Mechanically fasten over felt underlayment. b. Adhere to felt underlayment with [solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of uniform coating of cold-applied adhesive. 3. Terminate felt underlayment extended up not less than 4 inches (100 mm) against chimneys, sidewalls, curbs, and other projections. E. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install wrinkle free; comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated below, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm). Lap ends not less than 6 inches (152 mm), staggered 24 inches (610 mm) between succeeding courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1. Prime concrete and masonry surfaces to receive self-adhering sheet underlayment. 2. Extend self-adhering sheet underlayment over entire roof deck. 3. Extend self-adhering sheet underlayment over roof deck as follows: a. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 24 inches (610 mm) beyond interior face of exterior wall. b. Rakes: Extend from edges of rakes 24 inches (610 mm) beyond interior face of exterior wall. c. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches (455 mm) on each side. d. Hips: Extend 18 inches (455 mm) on each side. e. Ridges: Extend 36 inches (914 mm) on each side[ without obstructing continuous ridge vent slot]. f. Sidewalls: Extend 18 inches (455 mm) beyond sidewalls and return vertically against sidewalls not less than 4 inches (100 mm). g. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and Other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend 18 inches (455 mm) beyond penetrating elements and return vertically against penetrating elements not less than 4 inches (100 mm). h. Roof-Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches (455 mm) on each roof slope. F. Double-Layer Felt/Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: 1. Install single layer of felt underlayment on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten with felt underlayment nails. 2. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on felt underlayment. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) in direction to shed water. Lap ends not H&C 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 CONCRETE ROOF TILES 073216 - 10 less than 6 inches (152 mm), staggered 24 inches (610 mm) between succeeding courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. G. Metal-Flashed, Open-Valley Underlayment: Install two layers of 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide felt underlayment centered in valley. Stagger end laps between layers at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Lap ends of each layer at least 12 inches (305 mm) in direction to shed water, and seal with asphalt roofing cement. Fasten each layer to roof deck with felt underlayment nails. 1. Lap roof-deck felt underlayment over first layer of valley felt underlayment at least 6 inches (152 mm). 3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Install metal flashings according to concrete roof tile manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Apron Flashings: Extend lower flange over and beyond each side of downslope tile roofing and up the vertical surface. C. Step Flashings: Install with a head lap of 3 inches (75 mm) and extend both horizontally and vertically. Install with lower edge of flashing just upslope of, and concealed by, butt of overlying tile. Fasten to roof deck only. D. Cricket and Backer Flashings: Install against roof-penetrating elements, extending concealed flange beneath upslope tile roofing and beyond each side. E. Open-Valley Flashings: Install centrally in valleys, lapping ends at least 8 inches (205 mm) in direction to shed water. Fasten upper end of each length to roof deck beneath overlap. 1. Secure hemmed flange edges into metal cleats spaced 12 inches (305 mm) apart and fastened to roof deck. 2. Adhere 9-inch- (230-mm-) wide strips of self-adhering sheet to metal flanges and to self- adhering sheet underlayment. F. Channel Flashings: Install over underlayment and fasten to roof deck. G. Rake Pan Flashings: Install over underlayment and fasten to roof deck. H. Rake Drip Edges: Install over underlayment and fasten to roof deck. I. Eave Drip Edges: Install beneath underlayment and fasten to roof deck. J. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and tile roofing. Fasten and seal to tile roofing. K. Sheet Metal Ridge Vents: Install centrally, and mechanically fasten to wood ridge. Adhere each side to concrete roof tile with elastomeric sealant. H&C 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 CONCRETE ROOF TILES 073216 - 11 1. Install fabric mesh over roof-deck air ventilation gaps to prevent insect entry. 3.4 WOOD NAILERS[ AND BATTENS] A. Install wood nailers at [ridges] [hips] [rakes] and securely fasten to roof deck. B. Install beveled wood cant at eaves and securely fasten to roof deck. C. Install nominal 1-by-2-inch (25-by-50-mm) <Insert dimensions> wood battens horizontally over 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high, pressure-preservative-treated wood lath strips, at spacing required by concrete roof tile manufacturer, and securely fasten to roof deck. 1. Install nominal 1-by-2-inch (25-by-50-mm) wood counter battens vertically spaced 24 inches (610 mm) apart and securely fasten to roof deck. 3.5 CONCRETE ROOF TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install concrete roof tiles according to manufacturer's written instructions, to recommendations in TRI/WSRCA's "Concrete and Clay Roof Tile Design Criteria Installation Manual for Moderate Climate Regions," and to NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." 1. Maintain uniform exposure and coursing of concrete roof tiles throughout roof. 2. Extend tiles 2 inches (50 mm) over eave fasciae. 3. Nail Fastening: Drive nails to clear the concrete roof tile so the tile hangs from the nail and is not drawn up. a. Install wire through nail holes of cut tiles that cannot be nailed directly to roof deck, and fasten to nails driven into deck. 4. Wire-Tie Fastening: Install wire-tie systems and fasten concrete roof tiles according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Foam-Adhesive Setting: Install concrete roof tiles according to TRI/FRSA's "Concrete and Clay Roof Tile Installation Manual." 6. Install storm clips to capture edges of longitudinal sides of concrete roof tiles and securely fasten to roof deck. 7. Install concrete roof tile locks to support and lock overlying tile butts to underlying tiles. 8. Cut and fit concrete roof tiles neatly around roof vents, pipes, ventilators, and other projections through roof. Fill voids with mortar. 9. Install concrete roof tiles with color blend approved by Architect. B. Flat Shingle Concrete Roof Tile Installation: 1. Maintain 2-inch (50-mm) head lap between succeeding courses of concrete roof tiles. 2. Offset joints by half the concrete roof tile width in succeeding courses. 3. Extend concrete roof tiles 1 inch (25 mm) over fasciae at rakes. 4. Install ridge tiles in mitered configuration with laps facing away from prevailing wind. Seal laps with asphalt roofing cement. H&C 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 CONCRETE ROOF TILES 073216 - 12 a. Close voids where ridge tiles meet concrete roof tiles with [ridge closure tiles] [mortar struck with face of ridge cover tiles]. 5. Install hip tiles in [V-ridge] [saddle] [mitered] configuration. Seal laps with [asphalt roofing cement] [butyl sealant] [elastomeric sealant]. a. Fill voids with mortar where hip tiles meet concrete roof tiles, and strike mortar flush with face of hip cover tiles. C. Flat Interlocking Concrete Roof Tile Installation: 1. Provide minimum 3-inch (75-mm) lap between succeeding courses of concrete roof tiles. 2. Offset joints by half the concrete roof tile width in succeeding courses. 3. Install L-shaped rake tiles. 4. Install ridge tiles in mitered configuration with laps facing away from prevailing wind. Seal laps with asphalt roofing cement. a. Close voids where ridge tiles meet concrete roof tiles with [ridge closure tiles] [mortar struck with face of ridge cover tiles]. 5. Install hip tiles in mitered configuration. Seal laps with asphalt roofing cement. a. Fill voids with mortar where hip tiles meets concrete roof tiles, and strike mortar flush with face of hip cover tiles. D. Low-Profile, Interlocking Concrete Roof Tile Installation: 1. Provide minimum 3-inch (75-mm) lap between succeeding courses of concrete roof tiles. 2. Install L-shaped rake tiles. 3. Install ridge tiles with laps facing away from prevailing wind. Seal laps with asphalt roofing cement. E. High-Profile Concrete Roof Tile Installation: 1. Install pre-finished aluminum eave closure. 2. Provide minimum 3-inch (75-mm) lap between succeeding courses of concrete roof tiles. 3. Install L-shaped rake tiles. 4. Install ridge tiles with laps facing away from prevailing wind. Seal laps with asphalt roofing cement. F. Open Valleys: Cut concrete roof tiles at open valleys to form straight lines. Widen exposed portion of open valley 1/8 inch in 12 inches (1:96) from highest to lowest point. 1. Drill or notch cut valley tiles and wire-tie to fastener placed clear of valley metal flashings. 2. Do not nail tiles to metal flashings. G. Closed Valleys: Cut concrete roof tiles at closed valleys to form straight lines, trimming upper concealed corners of tiles. Maintain uniform gap at centerline of valley of 3/4 to 1 inch (19 to 25 mm). H&C 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 CONCRETE ROOF TILES 073216 - 13 1. Drill or notch cut valley tiles and wire-tie to fastener placed clear of valley metal flashings. 2. Do not nail tiles to metal flashings. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or broken concrete roof tiles. B. Remove excess concrete roof tiles and debris from Project site. 3.7 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. WHEREAS Owner of <Insert address>, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. Lightning; b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding 90 mph (m/sec); c. Fire; d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When work has been damaged by any of the foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with H&C 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 CONCRETE ROOF TILES 073216 - 14 penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this ___________ day of ____________, 2017. 1. Authorized Signature: _________________________________ 2. Name: ______________________________________________ 3. Title: _______________________________________________ END OF SECTION 073216 H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 1 SECTION 07 52 16 - SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general prov1s1ons of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS) modified bituminous membrane roofing system on metal deck, including but not limited to: a. Roof insulation. b. Roof membrane and membrane base flashings. c. Roof surfacing consisting of SBS granulated sheet d. Reflective protective acrylic roof surface coating B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry & Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, cants, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for custom metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counterflashings. 3. Division 07 Section "Roof Specialties" for manufactured copings, roof edge flashings, roof edge drainage systems, counterflashings, and reglets. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight. 1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155. 2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM 0 3746 or ASTM 0 4272. H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 2 B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. ASTM D 5147: Provide a roofing system that meets or exceeds the performance requirements for the SBS Modified Surface Sheet for Tensile Strength, Elongation, and Tear Strength in both Machine Direction and Cross Machine Direction as stated in PART 2 of this Specification. D. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Corner Uplift Pressure: 84.6 lbf/sq. ft., located within 8.0 feet of roof outside corner. 2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 56.1 lbf/sq. ft., located within 8.0 feet of roof perimeter. 3. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 33.6 lbf/sq. ft. E. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency. 1. Roof Surface Coating 1.5 REFERENCES A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. ASCE 7-05, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 14025 1. ASTM 041 Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damp-proofing and Waterproofing 2. ASTM D312 Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing 3. ASTM 451 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Granular Mineral Surfacing for Asphalt Roofing Products. 4. ASTM D1079 Standard Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing and Bituminous Materials. 5. ASTM D1227 Standard for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing. 6. ASTM D1863 Standard Specification for Mineral Aggregate Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing. 7. ASTM 02178 Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing 8. ASTM D2822 Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement 9. ASTM D2824 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Pigmented Asphalt Roof Coating. 10. ASTM D4601 Standard Specification for Asphalt Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in Roofing. 11. ASTM D5147 Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials. H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 3 12. ASTM D6162 Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using a combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber Reinforcements. 13. ASTM D6163 Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcement. 14. ASTM D2523 Standard Practice for Testing Load-Strain Properties of Roofing Membranes. 15. ASTM E108 Standard Test Methods for Fire Test of Roof Coverings. C. Factory Mutual Research (FM): 1. Roof Assembly Classifications. D. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): 1. Roofing and Waterproofing Manual E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. Fire Hazard Classifications F. Warnock Hersey (WH): 1. Fire Hazard Classifications 1.6 ACTION SUBMITI ALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's technical product data for each type of roofing product specified. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. B. Specimen Warranty: Provide an unexecuted copy of the warranty specified for this project, identifying the terms and conditions required of the Manufacturer and the Owner. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions and recommendations indicating special precautions required for installing the membrane. 1. Manufactures Published: Field Reference Manuel 2. Or Manufactures Published: a. Contractor Installation Handbook b. Contractor Installation Guidelines D. Load Strain Requirements: System submitted must meet ASTM D 2523 tensile strength requirements. A supporting ASTM D 2523 report signed and stamped by a professional engineer must be provided as part of the submittal package. Substitution requests submitted without an ASTM D 2523 report signed and stamped by a licensed engineer will be rejected for non-conformance. 1. The ASTM D 2523 test results must meet or exceed the Tensile Strength and Elongation at Break performance requirements stated in PART 2 of this specification. H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 4 E. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Provide roof plan showing orientation and types of roof deck, orientation of membrane roofing, and fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened components. 1. Base flashings and built-up terminations. a. Indicate details meet requirements of NRCA and FMG required by this Section. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes. 4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations. F. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. 8-by-1 0-inch (254-by-254-mm) of sheet roofing materials, including roofing membrane sheet , membrane cap sheet and flashing sheet, of color specified. 2. 8-by-10-inch (254:...by-254-mm) square of roof insulation. 1.7 SUBMITIALS FOR INFORMATION A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Roof system furnished is approved by Factory Mutual, Underwriters Laboratories in accordance with ASTM E1 08, Class (A) for external fire and meets local or nationally recognized building codes. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that materials are manufactured in the United States or Canada and conform to requirements specified herein, are chemically and physically compatible with each other, and are suitable for inclusion within the total roof system specified herein. C. Manufacturer's Certification: Submit a certified copy of the roofing manufacturer's ISO 9001 compliance certificate. D. Test Reports: Submit test reports, prepared by an independent testing agency, for all modified bituminous sheets roofing, indicating compliance with ASTM D5147. E. Written certification from the roofing system manufacturer certifying the applicator is currently authorized for the installation of the specified roof system. F. Qualifications data for firms and individuals identified in Quality Assurance Article Below. 1.8 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTAL A. Provide Two (2) copies of a "Close-out Book" and access to an electronic copy of the "Close- out Book. The Close out book must included: 1. Project Specification 2. Any addendums issued prior to bid 3. Drawing of the roof sections included in project H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 5 4. Copies of all detail drawings 5. Copies of As-Built detail Drawings 6. Project Photos showing installation and completion pictures 7. Completed job site inspections documents 8. Completed job site inspection documents 9. Completed Final Inspection documents 10. Copy of Manufacturers Warranty 11. Copy of Contractor Labor Warranty 12. Manufacturers Roof System "Owner's Manual" 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with not less than 15 years documented experience and have ISO 9001 certifications. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in modified bituminous roofing installation with not less than 5 years experience and authorized by roofing system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's roofing materials. 1. Contractor must be licensed in the State of Arizona 2. Contractor must have a current City of Mesa Business License at the time bid is submitted 3. Contractor must have an established staffed business office and or yard within 50 miles of the Mesa Unified School District boundaries at the time bid is submitted. (this is to assure quick response to leaks and other emergencies that might arise during installation and or after project completion). 1.10 MANUFACTURER'S QUALITY ASSURANCE INSPECTIONS A. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized full-time employee representative of manufacturer experienced in the installation and maintenance of the specified roofing system and qualified to determine Installer's compliance with the requirements of this Project. B. Roof System Manufacture must supply a manufacturer's technical representative to perform job site quality assurance inspections in accordance with Part 3.12 of this specification. 1. If manufacturer can not provide authorized full-time employee as described above in part 1.9 A, the system manufacturer shall hire a qualified Register Roof Observer to monitor the project as per Part 3.12 of this specification. C. Inspections: When the project is in progress the roof inspector as described above will provide the following: 1. Report progress and quality of the work as observed. 2. Provided job site inspections a minimum of three days a week. H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 6 3. Report to the Owner in writing any failure or refusal of the Contractor to correct unacceptable practices called to the Contractor's attention. 4. See also Part 3.12 of this specification. D. Quality Assurance Inspections shall be provided as part the roof installation and any fees or costs associated with Job Site Inspections must be included in the installers bid to the owner. 1.11 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Pre-Installation Roofing Conference: Convene a pre-roofing conference at a time and location convenient to the Owner prior to the scheduled commencement of staging materials, equipment, or performing any work on site. B. Required attendance of installer of each component or phase of work, roof system manufacturer's representative, Manufacturer's Technical Representative that will be performing job site inspections, all sub-contractors, and Owners Representatives. Objectives of the conference include: 1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work, including set up and mobilization areas for stored materials and work areas. 2. Review structural loading limitations of deck and inspect deck for loss of flatness and for required attachment. 3. Review Roofing system requirements (drawings, specifications, and other contract documents). 4. Review required submittals 5. Review schedule, start dates, estimated completion dates, work days, and work hours 6. Record discussion of conference including decisions and agreements reached and furnish copy of record to each party attending. 7. Review notifications procedures for weather or non-working days. C. The Owner's Representative will designate one of the conference participants to record the proceedings and promptly distribute them to the participants for record. D. The intent of the conference is to resolve issues affection the installation and performance of the roofing work. Do not proceed with roofing work until such issues are resolved to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storage. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 7 C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturers written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. All materials must be covered with tarps and protected from dew, rain or other moisture at all times prior to installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Roofing Contractor I Installer to assure that all materials are stored according to manufactures product guidelines and recommendations. 1.13 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Existing Roof Removal: Do not tear-off roofing if rain is likely. Only remove existing roofing membrane in sections that can be covered with new roofing before the end of each workday. Building must be left in a watertight condition at the end of each workday. 1.14 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's Warranty and Service Agreement in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. 1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane accessories, roof insulation, all sheet metal-related details, and termination details. 2. Manufacturer will provide, at no cost to owner, the following services in Years 2, 5, 10 and 15: a. Inspection by a Technical Representative and delivery of a written inspection report documenting roof conditions. b. General rooftop housekeeping and clean up, subject to limits, but generally including removal of incidental debris. 3. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: C. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 8 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer/Product: The roof system specified in this section is based upon Tremco, Inc. products named in other Part 2 articles. The "Basis of Design" materials, manufacturers products designations, and/or manufacturer's names specified herein shall be regarded as the minimum standard for quality required for work of this Section. Comply with all manufacturer and contractor/fabricator quality and performance criteria specified in Part1 . 1. SBS-Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing: a. Tremco Incorporated, Cleveland, OH 216-292-5000/520-240-5690 b. The Garland Company, Inc., OH 216-641-0633 2.2 ROOFING MEMBRANE SHEETS A. Roofing Membrane Sheet: Basis of design product: Tremco, POWERply 300 Smooth: ASTM D 6162, GradeS, Type Ill, glass-fiber reinforced, SBS/SEBSmodified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified with the following properties: 1. Tensile Strength at 0 deg. F (-18 deg. C), minimum, ASTM D 5147: Machine direction, 450 lbf/inch; cross machine direction, 375 lbf/inch. 2. Tear Strength at 73 deg. F (23 deg . C), minimum, ASTM D 5147: machine direction, 590 lbf; cross machine direction, 600 lbf. 3. Elongation at 0 deg. F (-18 deg. C), minimum, ASTM D 5147: machine direction, 8.0 percent; cross machine direction, 7.0 percent. 4. Low Temperature Flexibility, minimum, ASTM D 5147: -25 deg. F (-32 deg. C). 5. Thickness, minimum, ASTM D 5147: 100 mils 2.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE SURFACE SHEETS, SBS-MODIFIED BITUMEN A. Roofing Membrane Cap Sheet: Basis of design product: Tremco, POWERply Premium FR: ASTM D 6162, Grade G, Type Ill, composite polyester and glass fiber reinforced, SBS/SIS/SEBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure, ASTM E 108: Class A. 2. Tensile Strength at 0 deg. F (-18 deg. C), minimum, ASTM D 5147: machine direction 750 lbf/in; cross machine direction 800 lbf/in. 3. Tensile Strength at 73 deg. F (23 deg. C), minimum, ASTM D 5147: machine direction 750 lbf/in; cross machine direction 800 lbf/in. 4. Tear Strength at 73 deg. F 23 deg. C), m1mmum, ASTM D 5147: machine direction, 1,400 lbf cross machine direction 1,410 lbf. 5. Elongation at 73 deg. F (23 deg. C), minimum, ASTM D 5147: machine direction, 8 percent; cross machine direction, 6 percent. 6. Low Temperature Flex, maximum, ASTM D 5147: -40 deg. F (-40 deg. C). 7. Thickness, minimum, ASTM D 5147: 0.155 inch (3.95 mm). H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 9 2.4 ROOFING MEMBRANE SURFACE SHEET ADHESIVE A. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Basis of design product: Tremco, POWERply Standard Cold Adhesive: One-part, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with specified roofing membranes and flashings, with the following physical properties: 1. Asbestos Content, EPA 600 R-93/116: None. 2. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum, ASTM D 6511: 250 g/L. 3. Nonvolatile Content, minimum, ASTM D 6511: 65 percent. 4. Flash Point, minimum, ASTM D 93: 100 deg. F (38 deg. C). 5. Density at 77 deg. F (25 deg. C), minimum, ASTM D 6511: 8.0 lb/gal (970 g/L). 6. Uniformity and Consistency, ASTM D 6511: Pass. 7. Asphalt Content, minimum, ASTM D 6511: 40 percent. 2.5 BASE FLASHING SHEETS (Hypalon) A. Flashing Sheet: Basis of design product: Tremco, Hypalon Elastomeric Sheeting: ASTM D 5019, Type I, Grade II, CSPE sheet with the following physical properties: 1. Breaking Strength, minimum, ASTM D 751: 2251bf (1000 N). 2. Tear Resistance: ASTM D 751 : 90 lbf (400 N). 3. Elongation at Fabric Break, minimum, ASTM D 751: 25 percent. 4. Low Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 2136: -40 deg F (-40 deg. C). 5. Thickness, minimum, ASTM D 751 : 0.045 inch (1.14 mm). 6. Color: White. B. Solvent-Free Elastomeric Roofing Mastic: Tremco, POL Yroof SF: One-part, solvent-free, asbestos-free, low-odor elastomeric roof mastic specially formulated for compatibility and use with specified roofing membranes and flashings, with the following properties: 1. Asbestos Content, EPA 600/R13/116: None. 2. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum, ASTM D 3960: 300 g/L. 3. Nonvolatile Matter, minimum, ASTM D 4586: 70 percent. 4. Elongation at 77 deg. F (25 deg. C), minimum, ASTM D 412: 1000 percent. 5. Recovery from 500% Elongation, minimum, ASTM D 412: 500 percent. 6. Flexibility at -40 deg. F (-40 deg. C), ASTM D 3111: No Cracking. 2.6 BASE FLASHING SHEETS (TPA I PVC SINGLE PLY) A. Base Flashing Membrane: TPA or PVC Single Ply, a white thermoplastic single ply roofing membrane that is comprised of an elastormeric tri-polymer alloy based on Elvaloy and blended with CPE and PVC. TPA or PVC Roof Membrane is reinforced with a high strength, wick resistant polyester fabric and backed with a wick resistant non-woven polyester fleece. 1. Exposed Face Color: White 2. Thickness: 0.060 in., ASTM D751-98 3. Tensile Strength: 3001bf, ASTM D751-98 H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 10 4. Tear Strength: 1001bf, ASTM 751-98 5. Elongation: 17% MD, 19% XMD, ASTM D1204-94 6. Dimensional Stability: 0.3%@ 6hrs., ASTM D1204-94 7. Low temperature flexibility: -40 F, ASTM D2136-94 (1998) 8. Thermal emittance (adhesive plus aggregate), ASTM C 1371: 85 percent B. Elastomeric Base Flashing Wall & Lap Adhesive: Tremco, Sheeting Bond: Onepart, asbestos- free, cold-applied, butyl rubber-based, elastomeric trowel-grade adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with specified roofing membranes and flashings, with the following properties: 1. Adhesion in peel, minimum, ASTM D 1876: 3 lbf/in (0.5 N/mm) 2. Lap Shear Adhesion, minimum, ASTM D816: 18 psi (124 kPa). 3. Asbestos Content: ASTM D 276: None 4. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum, ASTM D 3960: 250 g/L 5. Color: White 2.7 BASE FLASHING COATING MATERIAL A. White Roof Coating: Basis of design product: Tremco, Solargard 6083: An Elastomeric reflective roof coating that meets or exceeds the performance requirements of the ASTM D 6063, with the following physical properties: 1. Weight per Gallon, ASTM D 1475, 12.181bs 2. Specific Gravity, ASTM D 1475, 1.46 3. Solids by Weight, ASTM D 1644, <60% 4. Solids by Volume, ASTM D 2697, <50% 5. Elongation @ 73 degrees F, ASTM D 2370, +390% 6. Flexibility @ -15 degrees F, ASTM D 522, Passes % inch mandrel bend after 1,000 h accelerated weathering 7. Tensile Strength@ 73 degrees F, ASTM D 2370, 250 psi 8. Dry Time, ASTM D 1640, 6 hours to touch, min. 24 hours to recoat 9. Flashpoint, ASTM D 3278, NONE 10. Solar Reflectance, 0.85 initial 11. Solar Reflectance Index, SRI, 107 initial, 101 aged, B. Clean Up, WaterAcrylic Coating Primer: Basis of design product: Tremco, SP Primer: Asbestos-free, acrylic-based primer formulated for use with acrylic latex coatings, with the following physical properties: 1. Asbestos Content, EPA 600 R-93/116: None. 2. Non-volatile Content (by weight), minimum, ASTM D 1644: 32 percent. 3. Percent Solids (by volume), minimum, ASTM D 5201 : 31 percent. 4. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum, ASTM D 3960: 115 g/L. 5. Density at 77 deg. F (25 deg. C), minimum, ASTM D 1875: 8.41b/gal (1 .0 kg/L). H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 11 2.8 HOT-APPLIED ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Roofing Asphalt: Basis of design product: Trumbull, Type IV: ASTM D 312, Type IV, hot- melt asphalt, with the following physical properties: 1. Softening Point, min/max, ASTM D 36:215-225 deg F (102-107 deg C). 2. Penetration at 77 deg. F (25 deg. C), min/max, ASTM D 5: 15-30 dmm. 3. Flash point, minimum, ASTM D 92: 525 deg F (274 deg C). 4. Ductility at 77 deg. F (25 deg. C), minimum, ASTM D 113: 2.5 em. 2.9 COATING MATERIAL: A. Water-Based Asphalt Primer: Basis of design product: Tremco, Improved Tremprime WB: Water-based, polymer modified, asphalt primer with the following physical properties: 1. Asbestos Content, EPA 600/R13/116: None. 2. Non-Volatile Content, minimum, ASTM D 2823: 32 percent. 3. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum, ASTM D 3960: 65 g/L. B. White Roof Coating: Basis of design product: Tremco, Solargard 6063: An Elastomeric reflective roof coating that meets or exceeds the performance requirements of the ASTM D 6063, with the following physical properties: 1. Weight per Gallon, ASTM D 1475, 12.181bs 2. Specific Gravity, ASTM D 1475, 1.46 3. Solids by Weight, ASTM D 1644, <60% 4. Solids by Volume, ASTM D 2697, <50% 5. Elongation @ 73 degrees F, ASTM D 2370, +390% 6. Flexibility @ -15 degrees F, ASTM D 522, Passes % inch mandrel bend after 1000h accelerated weathering 7. Tensile Strength@ 73 degrees F, ASTM D 2370, 250 psi 8. Dry Time, ASTM D 1640, 6 hours to touch, min. 24 hours to recoat 9. Flashpoint, ASTM D 3278, NONE 10. Solar Reflectance, 0.85 initial 11. Solar Reflectance Index, SRI, 107 initial, 101 aged, 12. Clean Up, Water 2.10 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Low-VOC Asphalt Primer (metal primer): Basis of design product: Tremco, TREMprime LV: ASTM D 41, low-VOC, solvent-based asphalt primer with the following physical properties: 1. Asbestos Content, EPA 600 R-93/116: None. 2. Non-Volatile Content, minimum, ASTM D 1644: 60 percent. 3. Volatile Organic Compounds, maximum, ASTM D 3960: 350 g/L. 4. Flash Point, minimum, ASTM D 3278: 100 deg. F (38 deg. C). H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 12 B. Water-Based Asphalt Primer: Basis of design product: Tremco, Improved Tremprime WB: Water-based, polymer modified, asphalt primer with the following physical properties: 1. Asbestos Content, EPA 600/R13/116: None. 2. Non-Volatile Content, minimum, ASTM D 2823: 32 percent. 3. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum, ASTM D 3960: 65 g/L. 2.11 ROOF MASTIC A. Asphalt Roofing Mastic (Seal curb corners, pitch pans, 3 course laps): Tremco, ELS: ASTM D 4586, Type II, Class 1, one-part, asbestos-free, cold-applied mastic specially formulated for compatibility and use with specified roofing membranes and flashings, with the following properties: 1. Asbestos Content, EPA 600/R13/116: None. 2. Nonvolatile Matter, minimum, ASTM D 4586: 80 percent. 3. Density at 77 deg F (25 deg C), ASTM D 1475: 9.3 lb/gal (1.11 kg/L). B. Elastomeric Roofing Mastic (Strip-in of base flashings): Tremco, POLYroof LV: One-part, asbestos-free, trowel-grade, elastomeric roof mastic specially formulated for compatibility and use with specified roofing membranes and flashings, with the following properties: 1. Asbestos Content, EPA 600/R131116: None. 2. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum, ASTM D 3960: 300 g/L. 3. Nonvolatile Matter, minimum, ASTM D 4586: 70 percent. 4. Elongation at 77 deg. F (25 deg. C), minimum, ASTM D 412: 1000 percent. 5. Recovery from 500% Elongation, minimum, ASTM D 412: 500 percent. 6. Flexibility at -40 deg. F (-40 deg. C), ASTM D 3111: No Cracking. 2.12 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing membrane. B. Caulking: Polyurethane Sealant: Tremco Inc., TremSEAL D, One component Polyurethane Sealant Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen, nonhardening, nonmigrating, nonskinning, and nondrying. C. 3-course reinforcement: Tremco BURMesh D. Insulation Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. E. Butyl Tape: 100% solids, asbestos free and compressive tape designed to seal as recommended and or furnished by the membrane manufacturer. H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 13 F. Non-Shrink Grout: Use an all weather fast setting chemical action concrete material to fill pitch pans. 1. Flexural Strength (ASTM C78 (modified)) 7 days 11 OOpse 2. High Strength (ASTM C1 09 (modified)) 24 days 84001bs G. Pitch Pocket Sealer: Two part, 100% solids, self leveling, ELS mastic for filling pitch pans as recommended and furnished by basis of design manufacture or prior approved equal. H. Pitch pans, Rain Collar 24 gauge stainless or 41b lead. All joints should be welded/soldered watertight. I. Drain Flashing Should be 41b sheet of lead formed and rolled J. Plumbing stacks should be 41b sheet lead formed and rolled K. Aluminum Termination/Flashing bar. L. Metal Flashing Sheet: Metal flashing sheet is specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." M. Roofing Granules: Ceramic-coated roofing granules, No. 11 screen size with 100 percent passing No.8 (2.36-mm) sieve and 98 percent of mass retained on No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve, color to match roofing membrane. N. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide miscellaneous accessories recommended by roofing system manufacturer. 2.13 SHEET METAL: A. Concealed Sheet metal flashings: 24 ga 0.635 mm galvanized steel. Meet requirements of ASTM A 653, for 1.25 oz commercial. B. Exposed Sheet metal flashing and parapet wall coping metal 1. Finish: a. Metal exposed to view shall have face coating of polyvinyledene Fluoride (PVF2) Resin-base finish (Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000) containing 70 percent minimum PVF2 in resin portion of formula. Thermo-cured two coat system consisting of corrosion inhibiting epoxy primer and topcoat factory applied over properly pre- treated metal. Reverse side coating shall be thermo-cured system consisting of corrosion inhibiting epoxy primer applied over properly pre-treated metal. b. Color as selected by Owner Manufacturer's standard colors. c. All Sheet metal must meet the following standard: 24 ga. 0.635 mm H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 14 2.14 ROOF INSULATION I COVERBOARD A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated. B. Rigid Polyisocyanurate Roof Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, HCFC-free, with felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. Insulation boar shall meet the following requirements: R-30 Required. 1. Dimensional Stability, ASTM D2126, 2% Max. 2. Compressive Strength, ASTM D1621, 25psi min. 3. Vapor Permeability, ASTM E96, 1 perm Max. 4. Foam Core Density, ASTM D1622, <1% 5. R-Factor HR per inch thickness, ASTM C518, 5.6 (Design Value) 6. Minimum L TIR -Value: 20 7. Thickness: 3.5 in (88.9 mm) C. Tapered Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, HCFC- free, with felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. 1. Where needed to create slope 2. As shown on project drawings D. Cover Board: USG Corporation; Securock: ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, cellulosicfiber- reinforced, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick. E. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where needed for sloping to drain. 1. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board. 2. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board. 2.15 COVER BOARD AND TAPERED INSULATION ADHESIVE: A. Roofing Asphalt: Basis of design product: Trumbull, Type IV: ASTM D 312, Type IV, hot- melt asphalt, with the following physical properties: 1. Softening Point, min/max, ASTM D 36: 215-225 deg F (102-107 deg C). 2. Penetration at 77 deg. F (25 deg. C), min/max, ASTM D 5: 15-30 dmm. 3. Flash point, minimum, ASTM D 92: 525 deg F (274 deg C). 4. Ductility at 77 deg. F (25 deg. C), minimum, ASTM D 113: 2.5 em. H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 15 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that cants, wood blocking, curbs, and wood nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Division 05 Section "Steel Decking." 4. Verify that deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no adjacent units in excess of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) out of plane relative to adjoining deck. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install roofing system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.4 POLYISOCYANURATE RIGID INSULATION BOARD A. Install specified Polyisocyanurate where shown on project drawing or as directed by purchase order to Roofing Contractor. B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. 1. Specified Polyiscyanurate Insulation board to be installed in 1 layer and shall be mechanically attached. 2. Specified Coverboard shall be installed directly over rigid insulation board in Hot Asphalt. H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 16 C. Rigid Insulation Board: Mechanically Fastened one (1) Layer of Specified Polyisocyanurate Rigid Insulation Board: Install insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding X inch with insulation: 1. Install specified rigid roof insulation over deck using mechanical fasteners. 2. #14 Screws designed for deck type 3. 3" round Steel TriRib Insulation Plates 4. Field Fasting: Fasten insulation to roof deck using 16 fasteners per 4' X 8' board. 5. Perimeter Fasting: Fasten insulation to roof deck using 24 fasteners per 4' X 8' board. a. Perimeter is defined as 4' from edge of roof or 4' from exterior parapet walls. 6. Corners: Fasten insulation to roof deck using 32 fasteners per 4' X 8' board. 7. Roof System Manufacturer prior to start of project must approve fastener lengths to be used. 8. Use mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening board-type roof insulation to deck type. D. Coverboard: Adhere specified coverboard in Hot Asphalt with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations. 2. Install specified coverboard insulation board in full and continuous application of hot asphalt. 3. Hot adhesives rely on temperature for their adhesion: 4. See EVT listed on Asphalt carton label for EVT. 5. Coverage rate: 25 lbs. to 30 lbs. per 100 sq. ft. E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. F. Wood Nailers: Wood nailers must be installed to the appropriate height for the specified insulation. 1. See Tremco installation guidelines for installation requirements for wood nailers at pitch pans and other penetrations. G. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips at junctures of built-up roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees. 3.5 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing." H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 17 B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Coordinate installing roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. 1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement with joints and edges sealed. 2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system. 3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. D. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. 3.6 BASE SHEET INSTALLATION A. Install one lapped course of specified base sheet, extending sheet over and terminating beyond cants. Attach base sheet as follows: 1. Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax 2. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt at a rate of 27 lbs/1 00 sq ft. 3. Always broom in base sheet and plies immediately to expel entrapped gas and to ensure contact with hot adhesive. 4. Correct Fishmouths and other defects as soon as surface is cool. 5. Do not adjust off line roll - Cut and reset 3.7 SBS MODIFIED SURFACE SHEET INSTALLATION A. Install specified modified bituminous surface sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Offset laps from laps of preceding ply sheets and align cap sheet without stretching. Lap in direction to shed water. Extend cap sheet over and terminate beyond cants. 1. Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period required by manufacturer. 2. Embed cap sheet in a solid application of specified cold adhesive applied at rate required by roofing system manufacturer. a. Surface Sheet adhesive rate: Minimum of 2 gallons per 100 sq. ft. b. Press the membrane into the adhesive using a minimum 75 pound weighted roller to assure full contact of the back of the membrane into the adhesive. 3. Side laps 4" minimum 4. End laps 6" minimum 5. Offset base laps from membrane laps 6. Stagger ends 36" minimum 7. To assure complete and uniform adhesion, adhesive should exude past lap edges. H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 18 8. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids, 9. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed. 10. Apply roofing granules to cover exuded bead of cold adhesive immediately to avoid tracking of cold adhesive. 11. Avoid Walking on newly applied surface sheet for 24 hours 12. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids. 13. Roll all field SBS Surface Sheets using appropriate roller as recommended by roof system manufacturer. a. This is a must to assure good adhesion. 14. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed. 15. Apply roofing granules to cover exuded bead of cold adhesive immediately to avoid tracking of cold adhesive. 16. Avoid walking on newly applied surface sheet for 24 hours 3.8 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer. 2. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in cold-applied adhesive at rate required by roofing system manufacturer. a. Apply adhesive in a uniform and continuous application to prepared area. 3. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in adhesive. B. Extend base flashing up walls a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 6 inches onto field of roofing membrane. 1. Seal base of flashing to roof membrane with two stripping plies embedded between alternate applications of stripping ply and asphalt mastic. 2. Seal lap edges with an application of lap edge sealant. 3. Baseflashings must be coated with Specified Primer and Coating a. Coverage Rate: 2.5 gallons specified coating in a two coat application C. Install stripping, according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, where metal flanges and edgings are set on built-up roofing. 1. Flashing-Sheet Stripping: Install flashing-sheet stripping in a continuous coating of asphalt roofing cement and extend onto roofing membrane. H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 19 D. Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30-inch lead flashing in bed of asphalt roofing cement on completed roofing membrane. Cover metal flashing with stripping and extend a minimum of 4 inches beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane. Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring. 1. Install stripping of not less than two roofing membrane ply sheets, each set in a continuous coating of asphalt roofing cement. E. Pipe penetrations: Install lead flashing and strip in edges same as metal edges. F. Install all edge metal, metal counterflashing, and metal coping according to details and industry standards. 1. All metal details to be installed by roofing contractor. G. Scuppers: Custom fabricate and install new scuppers at each scupper location. 1. Install scuppers according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.9 SHEET METAL INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch (75-mm) centers. C. Custom fabrication (where needed only): The contractor shall be responsible for custom fabrication of metal edging and coping metals that will conform to required details on this project. Where custom fabrication is required, design of detail metals such as drip edge, edge metal, copings, wall flashings, counter flashings, etc. must be approved by manufacturers Technical Representative. 1. Written detail approval should be obtained prior to custom fabrication and installation. 2. Custom fabricate new tops for each curb. 3. Custom fabricate pitch pans and pitch pan tops. Base of pitch pans must be 41b lead. 3.10 COATING INSTALLATION: A. Allow all fresh applications of mastic, and cold process roof adhesive to cure for a minimum of 30 days. Remove all dust, dirt, water and other contaminants before applying coatings. Area to be coated must be a clean, sound, and dry surface. H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 20 B. Apply coatings according to coating manufacturer's written instructions, by brush, roller, or spray method. 1. Apply primers and prepare roof as per coating manufacturers written instructions to assure good adhesion. 2. Roof system manufacturer warranty will not cover coating application. C. Application: Mix each container thoroughly prior to application. Two coats are recommended. Apply the second coat after the first coat will support foot traffic without tracking. Avoid foot traffic on final coating for 24 hours. 1. Drying time will vary based on weather conditions during application. Drying times will be longer under cool temperature, high humidity, and /or overcast conditions. Drying time will improve under sunny or breezy conditions. 2. For best results, apply the second coat in a direction that is perpendicular to the first coat. 3. For spray application, take necessary precautions to avoid overspray. D. Apply base coat and one or more finish coats to obtain a uniform, seamless membrane free of blisters and pinholes. Apply each coat at right angles to preceding coat. 1. Coverage Rate: 2.5 gallons per 100 sq. ft. applied in a two-coat application. Manufacturer technical inspector will take test samples at random locations to verify coverage. a. 151 coat 1.5 gallons per 100 sq. ft. b. 2"d coat 1 gallons per 100 sq. ft. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Technical Representative: a qualified manufacturer's technical representative will perform regular inspections visiting site and physically walking and inspecting roof a minimum of 3 days per week. The Manufacturer's Technical Representative must spend a minimum of 3 half-days on site each week inspecting and observing roofing membrane installation and to prepare inspection reports that will be provided to the owners project manager weekly. 1. This reports shall also be included as part of the close out documents. B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to project manager. 1. Notify Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. C. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. H&C SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE 07 52 16 - 21 3.12 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Project manager and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07 52 16 H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 COATED FOAMED ROOFING 07 57 00 - 1 SECTION 07 57 00 - COATED FOAMED ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Spray-applied, coated, polyurethane foam roofing. 2. Walkways. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking, curbs, cants, and nailers. 2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for foam stops, roof penetration flashings, and counterflashings. 3. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, fillers, and preparation. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to coated foamed roofing including, but not limited to, the following: a. Load limitations on in-place roofing. b. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. c. Surface preparation specified in other Sections. d. Minimum curing period. e. Forecasted weather conditions. f. Special details and sheet flashings. g. Repairs. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 COATED FOAMED ROOFING 07 57 00 - 2 B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed product, finish, and color. 1. Include Samples of auxiliary materials and accessories involving color and finish selection. C. Samples for Verification: For coated foamed roofing, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Samples, 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm), on rigid backing, showing polyurethane foam of thickness required and stepped coatings in colors required to illustrate buildup of coated foamed roofing. 2. Include Samples of auxiliary materials and accessories to verify color and finish selected. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For SPFA-qualified Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of coated foam roofing. C. Evaluation Reports: For coated foamed roofing, from ICC-ES. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For coated foamed roofing to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is approved, authorized, or licensed by coating manufacturer for installation of manufacturer's product over polyurethane foam. 1. Engage an installer who participates in and who has fulfilled requirements of the SPFA Accreditation Program for company accreditation. B. Comply with recommendations in SPFA AY-104, "Spray Polyurethane Foam Systems for New and Remedial Roofing." 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by manufacturer. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 COATED FOAMED ROOFING 07 57 00 - 3 C. Remove and replace material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace coated foamed roofing that does not comply with requirements or that does not remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Twenty [20] years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide polyurethane foam, coatings, substrate board, and auxiliary materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Source Limitations for Coated Foamed Roofing System: Obtain coating from single source from single manufacturer and polyurethane foam from single manufacturer acceptable in writing to coating manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Coated foamed roofing shall withstand exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing shall remain watertight. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide coated foamed roofing with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical systems according to test methods below for deck type and slopes indicated by a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Class A roof covering according to ASTM E 108 or UL 790. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less. 3. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119 or UL 263; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. C. Roofing-System Design: Provide a coated foamed roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7. D. FM Approvals Listing: Provide roofing system and component materials that comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4470 for roof covers as part of a foamed roofing system and that H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 COATED FOAMED ROOFING 07 57 00 - 4 are listed in FM Global's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Global markings. E. Energy Performance: Initial Solar Reflectance Index of not less than [78] when calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based on the testing of identical products by a qualified testing agency. F. Energy Performance: Provide coated foam roofing that is listed on the EPA/DOE's "ENERGY STAR Roof Product List" for low-slope roof products. G. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system or top coating with an initial Solar Reflectance Index of not less than 0.70 and emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1. 2.3 POLYURETHANE FOAM A. Polyurethane Foam: Rigid, cellular polyurethane; complying with ASTM C 1029, Type III; spray applied, with fire retardants as required, and acceptable to coating manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Polyurethane Foam Enterprises LLC. b. BaySystems North America; a subsidiary of Bayer MaterialScience AG. c. Elastomeric Roofing Systems, Inc.; an ITW company. d. Gaco Western LLC. e. HydroSeal Polymers, Inc. f. National Coatings Corporation. g. NCFI Polyurethanes; Div. of Barnhardt Mfg. Co. h. SWD Urethane. i. Volatile Free, Inc. 2. In -Place Density: 2.8 to 3.0 lb/cu. ft. (44.9 to 48.1 kg/cu. m); ASTM D 1622. 3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less. 2.4 URETHANE COATINGS A. Urethane Coating: Liquid urethane elastomeric coating system specifically formulated for coating sprayed polyurethane-foam roofing. One-component urethanes shall comply with ASTM D 6947. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 COATED FOAMED ROOFING 07 57 00 - 5 a. Elastomeric Roofing Systems, Inc.; an ITW company. b. Gaco Western LLC. c. HydroSeal Polymers, Inc. d. Neogard; Div. of Jones-Blair Company. e. United Coatings; a subsidiary of Quest Specialty Chemicals. f. Volatile Free, Inc. 2. Base Coat: One- or two-component urethane, color contrasting with topcoat. 3. Topcoat: One- or two-component urethane. a. Color: White b. Color at Walkways: White 4. Tensile Strength: 600 psi (4.1 MPa) minimum according to ASTM D 2370. 5. Elongation: 350 percent minimum according to ASTM D 412 after 1000 hours accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 4798/D 4798M. 6. Water Absorption: 3 percent maximum by weight according to ASTM D 471. 7. Fungal Resistance: Zero rating according to ASTM G 21. 8. Tear Resistance: 100 lbf/inch (17.5 kN/m) minimum according to ASTM D 624. 9. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass 0.5-inch (12.5-mm) mandrel at minus 15 deg F (minus 26 deg C) according to ASTM D 522. 10. Permeance: Minimum [0.7 perm (40.2 ng/Pa x s x sq. m)] [5.0 perms (286 ng/Pa x s x sq. m)] at 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick according to ASTM E 96/E 96M. 2.5 SILICONE COATINGS A. Silicone Coating: Liquid silicone elastomeric coating system[ complying with ASTM D 6694 and] specifically formulated for coating sprayed polyurethane-foam roofing. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: a. BASF Polyurethane Foam Enterprises LLC. b. BaySystems North America; a subsidiary of Bayer MaterialScience AG. c. Elastomeric Roofing Systems, Inc.; an ITW company. d. Gaco Western LLC. e. United Coatings; a subsidiary of Quest Specialty Chemicals. f. <Insert manufacturer's name>. 3. Composition: One- or two-component silicone. 4. Base-Coat Color: Contrasting with topcoat. 5. Topcoat Color: White 6. Topcoat Color at Walkways: White 7. Permeance: Minimum [5.0 perms (286 ng/Pa x s x sq. m)] at 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick according to ASTM E 96/E 96M. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 COATED FOAMED ROOFING 07 57 00 - 6 2.6 ACRYLIC COATINGS A. Acrylic Coating: Liquid acrylic elastomeric emulsion coating system[ complying with ASTM D 6083 and] specifically formulated for coating sprayed polyurethane-foam roofing. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. BASF Polyurethane Foam Enterprises LLC. b. BaySystems North America; a subsidiary of Bayer MaterialScience AG. c. Conklin Company Inc.; Building Products Division. d. Elastomeric Roofing Systems, Inc.; an ITW company. e. Gaco Western LLC. f. HydroSeal Polymers, Inc. g. Isothermal Protective Coatings, Inc. h. National Coatings Corporation. NCFI Polyurethanes; Div. of Barnhardt Mfg. Co. i. NCFI Polyurethanes; Div. of Barnhardt Mfg. Co. j. Neogard; Div. of Jones-Blair Company. k. SWD Urethane. l. United Coatings; a subsidiary of Quest Specialty Chemicals. m. Volatile Free, Inc. 2. Base-Coat Color: Contrasting with topcoat. 3. Topcoat Color: White 4. Topcoat Color at Walkways: White 5. Permeance: Minimum [5.0 perms (286 ng/Pa x s x sq. m)] <Insert value> at 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick according to ASTM E 96/E 96M. 2.7 SUBSTRATE BOARD A. Thermal Barrier: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, Type X gypsum board, 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick. B. Thermal Barrier: Water-resistant gypsum board with fiberglass mat laminated to both sides, ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, [1/2 inch (13 mm)]. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Sheathing. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; [DensDeck] [DensDeck Prime] [DensDeck DuraGuard] [DensGlass Gold]. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond, e(2)XP. d. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Sheathing. C. Recover Board and Fasteners: As recommended by polyurethane foam manufacturer, and complying with the requirements in Section 070150.19 "Preparation for Re-Roofing." H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 COATED FOAMED ROOFING 07 57 00 - 7 D. Thermal-Barrier Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, and designed and sized for fastening thermal barrier to substrate. 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Primer: Polyurethane foam manufacturer's standard factory-formulated primer. B. Vapor Retarder: As recommended by coated foamed roofing manufacturer. C. Mineral Granules: Ceramic-coated roofing granules, No. 11 screen size with 100 percent passing No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and 98 percent of mass retained by No. 40 (0.42-mm) sieve. 1. Color: Buff white D. Aggregate: Coarse mineral aggregate, 3/4 inch (19 mm) maximum, ASTM D 1863, No. 7 or No. 67 gradation. E. Reinforcement: Flexible polyester or fiberglass mat of weight, type, and composition recommended by coating manufacturer for embedment in liquid coating. F. Walkway Pads: Factory formed of nonwoven PVC strands, porous, UV stabilized, of 5/16-inch (8-mm) nominal thickness, and approved by coating manufacturer. Provide pad sizes indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Western Plastics, Inc.; Yellow Spaghetti. b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. 2. Color: Gray G. Sealant: ASTM C 920, Class 25, Use NT, Grade NS, Type M, multicomponent urethane as recommended by coated foamed roofing manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions and for compatibility with roofing materials. 1. Sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall have VOC content of [250] <Insert value> g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." H. Sheet Flashing and Accessories: Types recommended by coated foamed roofing manufacturer, provided at locations indicated and as recommended by coated foamed roofing manufacturer. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 COATED FOAMED ROOFING 07 57 00 - 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that related work is complete. Do not install coated foamed roofing until roof openings, curbs, and parapets, if any, are complete and roof drains, vents, and other roof penetrations are in place. B. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which coated foamed roofing will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and substrates are dry. D. Proceed with installation only after minimum concrete curing and drying period recommended by coated foamed roofing manufacturer. E. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test concrete substrate for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263 at start of each roof area or plane. Do not proceed with roofing work if moisture condenses under the plastic sheet. F. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1. Apply materials within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by material manufacturers, but not below 50 deg F (10 deg C). 2. Apply materials within range of relative humidity recommended by manufacturer of each component, but not when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above dew point. 3. Do not apply materials to damp or wet surfaces. 4. Do not apply primers, polyurethane foam, or coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during the application and curing period. 5. Do not apply polyurethane foam when wind conditions result in surface finish textures not complying with requirements. 6. Do not apply coatings when wind conditions prevent uniform coating application. 3.2 SUBSTRATE BOARD A. General: Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. B. Thermal Barrier: Fasten to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FM Global's "Approval Guide" and its FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. C. Thermal Barrier: Fasten to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof according to coated foamed roofing manufacturer's written instructions. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 COATED FOAMED ROOFING 07 57 00 - 9 D. Recover Board: Install according to coated foamed roofing manufacturer's written instructions and the requirements in Section 070150.19 "Preparation for Re-Roofing." Fasten through existing roofing to roof structure as indicated. Space fasteners for wind-uplift conditions at Project site. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Clean and prepare substrate according to coated foamed roofing manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, dew-free, and dry substrate for coated foamed roofing application. B. Remove grease, oil, form-release agents, curing compounds, and other contaminants from substrate. C. Prepare substrate for re-covering according to Section 070150.19 "Preparation for Re-Roofing" and to coated foamed roofing manufacturer's written instructions. D. Cover and mask adjoining surfaces not receiving coated foamed roofing to prevent overspray or spillage affecting other construction. Temporarily close off roof drains, removing roof-drain plugs when not doing coated foamed roofing work or when rain is forecast. 1. Remove masking after polyurethane foam application; cover and re-mask adjoining surfaces before coating polyurethane foam. E. Prime substrate as recommended by coated foamed roofing manufacturer. F. Fill, cover, or tape joints and cracks in substrate that exceed a width of 1/4 inch (6 mm). Remove dust and dirt from narrower joints and cracks before applying polyurethane foam. G. Install vapor retarder according to coated foamed roofing manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 POLYURETHANE FOAM APPLICATION A. General: Mix and apply polyurethane foam according to ASTM D 5469 and coated foamed roofing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fill irregularities and depressions to prevent ponding water. 2. Apply the required full thickness of polyurethane foam in any specific area on same day. 3. Apply only the area of polyurethane foam that can be covered with required base coating on same day or within 24 hours. 4. Apply polyurethane foam to avoid overspray beyond immediate area of work. B. Apply polyurethane foam in lift thicknesses not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) and not more than 1- 1/2 inches (38 mm). C. Uniformly apply total thickness of polyurethane foam indicated, but not less than 1 inch (25 mm), to a surface tolerance of plus 1/4 inch (6 mm) and no minus. 1. Slope to Drain: Vary thickness uniformly and fill low spots to achieve minimum 1/4 inch per foot (1:48) slope to drain unless otherwise indicated. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 COATED FOAMED ROOFING 07 57 00 - 10 D. Apply polyurethane foam to roof penetrations, terminations, and vertical surfaces as indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, extend polyurethane foam at least 4 inches (100 mm) above elevation of adjacent roof field. E. Surface Finish: Provide finished surface of polyurethane foam within the following range of surface textures as defined by ASTM D 5469: 1. Texture: Smooth to orange peel. F. Remove and replace polyurethane foam not complying with surface-texture limitations. Remove defective thickness and prepare and reapply polyurethane foam with acceptable, uniform results. 3.5 COATING APPLICATION A. Allow polyurethane foam substrate to cure for a minimum of two hours before coating, and apply coating system to polyurethane foam no later than 24 hours after the application of the foam. Remove dust, dirt, water, and other contaminants before applying coating system. B. Apply coating system to polyurethane foam by spray, roller, or other suitable application method according to coating manufacturer's written instructions. C. Apply base coat and one or more topcoats to obtain a uniform, seamless membrane free of blisters and pinholes. Apply each coat at right angles to preceding coat, using contrasting color tints for successive coats. 1. Apply topcoat(s) after removing dust, dirt, water, and other contaminants from base coat. 2. Urethane Coating: Apply coating system to a minimum dry film thickness recommended by coated foamed roofing manufacturer. 3. Silicone Coating: Apply coating system to a minimum dry film thickness recommended by coated foamed roofing manufacturer. 4. Acrylic Coating: Apply coating system to a minimum dry film thickness recommended by coated foamed roofing manufacturer. D. Height at Terminations: Apply coating system at wall terminations and other vertical surfaces to extend vertically beyond polyurethane foam by a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). E. Mineral Granules: Apply mineral granules over wet topcoat using pressure equipment at the rate of [0.5 lb/sq. ft. (2.45 kg/sq. m)]. Remove excess granules after topcoat has cured. F. Sealant: Apply sealant to perimeter and other terminations where indicated on Drawings or required by coated foamed roofing manufacturer. G. Walkways: Install roof walkways in pattern and locations indicated and as follows: 1. Granule-Coated Walkways: Mask off completed coating adjacent to walkways, and apply one or two additional topcoats to achieve a minimum dry film thickness recommended by coated foamed roofing manufacturer. Spread mineral granules uniformly at a rate of 0.5 lb/sq. ft. (2.45 kg/sq. m) into final wet coating. Remove masking and excess granules after topcoat has cured. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 COATED FOAMED ROOFING 07 57 00 - 11 2. Fabric-Reinforced, Granule-Coated Walkways: Mask off completed coating adjacent to walkways, and apply one additional topcoat to achieve a minimum dry film thickness recommended by coated foamed roofing manufacturer. Lay reinforcing fabric into wet coating and apply another topcoat, completely filling fabric. Spread mineral granules uniformly at a rate of 0.5 lb/sq. ft. (2.45 kg/sq. m) into final wet coating. Remove masking and excess granules after topcoat has cured. 3. Preformed Walkway-Pad Walkways: Adhere walkway pads to substrate with compatible adhesive according to coated foamed roofing manufacturer's written instructions. H. Aggregate: Apply aggregate uniformly over coated polyurethane foam at coated foamed roofing manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 6 lb/sq. ft. (29 kg/sq. m) and a minimum thickness of 3/4 inch (19 mm). Spread with care to prevent puncturing coating and to minimize damage to substrate foam. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. Testing agency will identify, seal, and certify samples of materials taken from Project site, with Contractor present. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for product characteristics specified or cited in manufacturer's product data. a. Two core samples will be required for roof areas up to 10,000 sq. ft. (929 sq. m), and one core sample will be required for each additional 10,000 sq. ft. (929 sq. m) or part thereof. b. Six slit-test samples will be required for each 10,000 sq. ft. (929 sq. m) of roof area to determine, as a minimum, the number of coats applied and dry film thickness of coating. 3. Testing agency will verify that surfaces slope to drain. B. Coated foamed roofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Refill cores, repair slits, and re-coat test areas. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.7 REPAIR AND RE-COATING A. Correct deficiencies in, or remove, foam or coatings that do not comply with requirements; fill and repair substrates and reapply materials. B. Repair and re-coat coated foamed roofing according to ASTM D 6705 and manufacturer's written instructions. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 COATED FOAMED ROOFING 07 57 00 - 12 3.8 CURING, PROTECTING, AND CLEANING A. Cure coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing. Do not permit traffic on uncured coatings. B. Protect coated foamed roofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 075700 H&C FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 60 00-1 SECTION 07 60 00 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Flashings, sheet metal work and related items including, but not limited to: 1. Counterflashing at vertical surfaces. 2. Flashing at roof penetrations. 3. Edge flashing. 4. Sheet metal scuppers, gutters and downspouts. 5. Metal copings. 6. Louvers 7. Sump pans. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings indicating type of material, gauge, dimensions, profiles, locations where used, fastening and anchoring methods, joints, and provisions of expansion and contraction. B. Samples: Submit samples of each type of prefinished metal in selected color. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Comply with design and installation methods of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 2. Comply with The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual installation details. 3. Comply with ANSI/SPRI, ES I-98. B. Performance Requirements: Designed and installed to withstand Wind Zone 2 wind pressures in compliance with FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. Do not store materials on ground. H&C FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 60 00-2 C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. Handle with care so as not to buckle or warp metal, or damage solder joints. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Furnish 5 year warranty against flashing and sheet metal failure, in which contractor agrees to repair or replace flashing and sheet metal as necessary to maintain work in watertight condition during the warranty period. Warranty to cover workmanship, materials and repair or replacement of same, at no cost to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Prefinished Metal: 1. Hot-dipped galvanized, ASTM A653 Structural Quality, Grade 40, G90 coating 24 gauge core steel, or prefinished Galvalume - ASTM A792. 2. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14. 3. Finish: Full strength Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 Fluorocarbon coating, applied by the Manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line, with top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.90 mil over 0.25 to 0.35 mil prime coat, to provide a total dry film thickness of 0.95 to 1.25 mil. a. Bottom side: Coated with primer with a dry film thickness of 0.25 mil. b. Finish: Conform to all tests for adhesion flexibility, and longevity as specified by the Kynar 500 finish supplier. c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors. 4. Strippable film: Liquid applied to top side of painted coil to protect finish during fabrication, shipping and field handling. B. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653, 24 gauge minimum and as indicated, with G-60 coating. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Reglets and Counterflashings: Fry Reglet Corporation, Type STX at stucco, Type SM at masonry and Concrete, or fabricated as indicated on Drawings. Provide prefabricated inside and outside reglet and counterflashing corners. B. Solder: ASTM B32, 50/50 type. C. Flux: FS O-F-506. H&C FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 60 00-3 D. Sealant: As specified in Section 07 92 00. E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586. F. Roofing Felt: ASTM D226, 15 pound type or 30 pound type. G. Bituminous Coating: FS TT-C-494 or SSPC paint - 12, dry film 15 mils per coat. H. Polyethylene: Black, 6 mil. I. Sheet Metal Fasteners: Pre-finished galvanized steel with soft neoprene washers at exposed fasteners. Where exposed in the finished work of prefinished metal, provide fasteners with prefinished heads matching prefinished metal. J. Prefinished Metal Seam Sealers and Adhesives: As recommended by prefinished metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather-resistant seaming and adhesive applications of flashing and sheet metal work. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate sheet metal with lines, arris, and angles sharp and true, and plane surfaces free from objectionable wave, warp or buckle. Hem exposed edges to form a 1/2 inch wide hem on the side concealed from view. 1. Provide concealed stiffeners and reinforcements as necessary to provide surfaces free of objectionable wave, warp or buckle. B. Fabricate scuppers, gutters and downspouts in accordance with the following Figure(s) and Table(s) from the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and as indicated on drawings. 1. Scuppers: Figures 1-26A through 1-30C, as applicable to design indicated. 2. Gutters: Figures 1-1 through 1-24D and Tables 1-5, 1-7 and 1-8, as applicable to design indicated. 3. Downspouts: Figures 1-31 through 1-36 and Table 1-9, as applicable to design indicated. C. Forming, anchoring, expansion and contraction details shall conform to referenced quality standards. D. Provide for thermal expansion of running trim, flashing, expansion joints, and other items exposed for more than 15 feet continuous length. E. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet. F. Form pieces in longest practical lengths, except form flashing and fascia in 8 to 10 foot units. G. Fabricate coping covers with butt seam with backup plate, fastened one side seams (item 19, figure 3-3 per SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual). H&C FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 60 00-4 H. Solder and seal metal joints or use seam sealer/adhesive as recommended by prefinished metal manufacturer. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. I. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs, with mitered corners; solder for rigidity, seal with sealant. J. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing. Return and brake edges. K. Where prefabricated counterflashing and reglet system is used, form upper edge of counterflashing with an approved snap lock flange to engage reglet receiver and to provide a spring action at bottom edge against built-up flashing. L. Flashing Pans: Form sheet metal pans 6 inch nominal square size, with 3 inch upstand, and 4 inch flanges. Fill pans watertight with plastic cement. 2.4 FINISH A. Shop prepare and prime exposed ferrous metal surfaces. B. Backpaint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mil. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 1. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located. 2. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall conform to NRCA and SMACNA manuals. H&C FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 60 00-5 B. Expansion Seams: Maintain a watertight installation at expansion seams. Locate expansion seams as shown or if not shown, at the following maximum spacing for each general flashing use: 1. Flashing, expansion joints, gravel stops, and trim: At 10 foot intervals, 24 inches on each side of corners and intersections. 2. Sealant-type expansion joints: Where sealant-filled expansion joints are used, embed the hooked flanges of the joint members not less than 1 inch into the sealant. Form joints to completely conceal the sealant. When ambient temperature is moderate at the time of installation (40 to 70 degrees F.), set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant type joints at temperatures below 40 degrees F. Installation of sealant is specified in Section 07 92 00. C. Where dissimilar materials abut, provide proper separation or protection to minimize the possibility of galvanic action. D. Soldering: 1. Solder joints at corner fabrications. 2. Except where other methods of joining are indicated or specified, solder joints and connections of Sheet Metal Work. 3. Remove grease and dirt from metal surfaces to be joined. 4. Remove flux residue by scrubbing, neutralizing with ammonia or a 5 to 10 percent solution of washing soda, followed by a clear water rinse. 5. Assemble parts and solder using regular non-corrosive resin flux. Heat metal thoroughly to completely sweat solder through full contact area. E. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable joints in metal with flat lapped seams to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA Standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. 1. Seal joints at copings and at other movable, non-expansion type joints. F. Reglets: Install reglets in masonry, concrete or stucco to receive flashings. G. Counterflashing: 1. Provide metal counterflashing at top edges of built-up base flashings and at other locations indicated. 2. Lap end joints a minimum of 3 inches. Do not solder or weld joints. Make flashing continuous at angles. Counterflashing shall overlap base flashing a minimum of 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Where counterflashing terminates in reglets, fasten flashing with lead wedges every 12 inches. Fill reglets continuously with synthetic rubber type sealant. H&C FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 60 00-6 H. Fascia: 1. Provide fascia at exposed edges of roofs. Fabricate from 24 gauge galvanized metal. 2. Form expansion joints between units with 6 inch wide back-up plate and cover plates formed to exact profile of gravel stop. Fill space between units and plates with sealant. 3. Extend flanges of gravel stop out on top of built-up roofing not less than 4 inches. Set in full bed of plastic cement. Spread full bed of plastic cement between sheets of lap. Nail 1 inch from back edge at 6 inches o.c. into wood nailer. I. Copings: 1. Cover top of parapet walls where indicated with 24 gauge galvanized metal coping formed to design shown. Before applying metal, cover top of wall or wood blocking with polyethylene. 2. Extend front edge of coping covering down over the lock into a previously placed continuous edge strip. Secure edge strips with nails spaced 12 inches apart. 3. Join rear edge of coping covering to adjacent flashings as indicated. J. Metal Edgings: 1. Provide metal edgings at exposed edges of built-up roofs. Fabricate from 24 gauge galvanized iron, profile indicated. 2. Extend flanges of metal edgings out on top of built-up roofing or base flashing (as applicable) not less than 4 inches. Set in full bed of plastic cement. Spread full bed of plastic cement between sheets at laps. Nail flanges to wood nailer when nailers are under the membrane or flashing (as at roof edge or gravel stops). Nail as shown in the referenced quality standards. 3.3 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 07 60 00 SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Sheet metal roofing panels, metal trim, accessories, fasteners, closures, and sealants. [Specifier Note: Edit paragraph below to suit project requirements.] B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05120 Structural Steel 2. Section 05310 Steel Deck 3. Section 05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 4. Section 06150 Wood Decking 5. Section 07210 Building Insulation 6. Section 07220 Roof and Deck Insulation 7. Section 07260 Vapor Retarders 8. Section 07410 Metal Roof and Wall Panels 9. Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 10. Section 07920 Joint Sealants 11. Section 13120 Pre-engineered Structures 1.2 REFERENCES A. General: Reference latest edition of applicable codes and standards. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A792/A792M-Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc-Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM E1592-Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 3. ASTM E1646-Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 4. ASTM E1680-Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems C. AISI Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual, American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). D. AISC Manual of Steel Construction, American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). E. UL Roofing Materials Directory, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1. UL Standard 580-Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. [Specifier Note: Edit paragraphs below to suit project requirements] SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING F. FM Approval Guide, Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM). 1. FM Approval Standard 4471 for Class 1 Panel Roofs. G. Building Codes and Design Standards: 1. ASCE-7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). 2. BOCA National Building Code, Building Officials and Code Administrators, International (BOCA). 3. Uniform Building Code (UBC), International Conference of Building Code Officials (ICBO). 4. Standard Building Code (SBC), Southern Building Code Congress International (SBCC). 5. International Building Code (IBC), International Code Council (ICC). 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Provide structural standing seam metal roof system with a min. 2" high "vertical" seam side joint, mechanically seamed, with factory applied sealant. 2. Attach roof panels to support substrate with concealed anchor clips designed to allow for thermal movement of the panels. There shall be no exposed fasteners except at panel fixing line and flashing details or as indicated on approved panel drawings. 3. Roll-forming of the panels at the job site must be performed with manufacturer owned and relocatable industrial type roll-forming mill having a minimum of (12) stands to gradually shape the sheet metal. Installer owned or rented roll-formers are not acceptable. 4. Provide metal roof panel system which has been manufactured and installed to withstand specified design loads and maintains performance requirements without defects, damage, or failure. B. Performance Requirements: [Specifier Note: Edit Paragraphs below to suit project requirements.] 1. Design Loads: Design loads shall be as specified below or as indicated on the contract drawings. a. The structural standing seam metal roof system shall be designed to safely resist the positive and negative wind loads as specified below or as indicated on the contract drawings: SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING 2. Deflection Criteria: Roof panel deflection shall be limited to L/240 for positive loading. 3. Roof panels shall be free to move in response to the expansion and contraction forces resulting from a total temperature range of 120 degrees F during the life of the structure. 4. Roof systems that incorporate foam plastic insulation must be tested by the foam plastic manufacturer in accordance with NFPA-285. C. Performance Testing: Tests shall have been conducted or witnessed by a recognized independent laboratory or independent professional engineer. 1. Allowable uniform uplift load capacity shall be determined in accordance with ASTM E1592. a. The factor of safety against ultimate failure of panel, batten, or clip shall be 1.65, with no increase due to wind. b. Allowable uplift capacity for conditions of gage, span, or loading other than those tested may be determined by interpolation of the test results. Extrapolation of conditions outside the range of the tests is not acceptable. 2. Roof panel system shall be tested for resistance to water penetration in accordance with ASTM E 1646, at a static pressure of 12.0 psf. There shall be no uncontrolled water penetration through the panel side joints. 3. Roof panel system shall be tested for resistance to air leakage in accordance with ASTM E1680, at a static air pressure of 12.0 psf. Air infiltration shall not exceed .02 cfm per sq ft of panel area. 4. Roof panel system shall be tested in accordance with UL Standard 580 and have a Class 90 rating. 5. Roof panels shall withstand a 300 lb concentrated load applied to mid-span between supports with no panel deformation, rib buckling, or panel side joint separation which will adversely affect the weather tightness of the system. 6. Roof panel system shall be tested in accordance with FM Approval Standard 4471 and achieve a windstorm classification of I-90. SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data sheet and/or product design and installation manual. B. Shop Drawings: Submit panel shop drawings consisting of design and erection drawings, finish specifications, and other data necessary to clearly describe design, materials, sizes, layouts, construction details, fasteners, and erection. Submit small scale layouts of panels and large scale details of edge conditions, joints, fastener and sealant placement, flashings, penetrations and curbs, and special details. Distinction must be made between factory and field assembled work. Drawings must be approved and field verification of all dimensions must occur prior to fabrication. C. Samples: 1. Panel: Two (2) required, Full panel width by 12" long. 2. Anchor Clips: Two (2) required. 3. Fasteners: Two (2) of each type with a statement of intended use. 4. Closure: One metal closure with foam insert. 5. Sealants: One (1) sample of each type, with a statement of intended use. D. Warranties: Submit manufacturer's applicable sample warranties of products. E. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Calculations: Submit structural design calculations certified by a registered professional engineer to verify load carrying capacity of the panel system. 2. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing that the roof system has been tested and conforms to the specified performance testing requirements. 3. Certificates: a. A written statement from the manufacturer certifying conformance with the specified manufacturer’s qualifications listed in article1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE. b. A written statement from the installer certifying conformance with the specified installer qualifications listed in article 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall have had at least fifteen (15) years in architectural metal roofing design and installation. The manufacturer shall have a permanent, stationary, indoor, production facility. SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING 2. Installer Qualifications: a. The installer shall have had a minimum of five (5) years experience in the installation of metal roofing. b. The installer shall be manufacturer certified. B. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and manufacturer's warranty requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Material shall be delivered to the site in a dry and undamaged condition and unloaded per the manufacturers instructions. The installer shall inspect materials for damage and stains upon arrival at the site. B. Storage: Materials shall be stored out of contact with the ground in weather tight coverings to keep them dry per the manufacturer's recommendations. Storage accommodations shall provide good air circulation and protection from surface staining. C. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and handling of panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, or surface damage. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for material handling. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer's Warranties 1. Material Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant that the material furnished will remain free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from date of shipment. 2. Metal Substrate Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant that the metal roof panel substrate will not rupture or perforate due to corrosion within a period of twenty (20) years from date of shipment. 3. Finish Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant against fading, chalking, peeling, cracking, checking, chipping, or erosion to base metal of the roof panel paint finish for a period of twenty (20) years from date of shipment. 4. Weather Tight Warranty: a. Premium Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant against water penetration of the metal roof panel system, including panel side joint and trim conditions for a period of 20 years from date of substantial completion. During the first two (2) years of the warranty, the roofing contractor shall be liable for all such costs and expenses of repair, refinishing, or replacement of the roofing system as covered by the warranty. Coverage shall be limited to material and installation. Liability shall be limited to repair of the metal panel roof system. SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. The CENTRIA SDP 200 structural standing seam metal roof system as manufactured by CENTRIA, 1099 US Highway 421 South, Frankfort, KY 40601. B. Approved Equal. 1. Requests to use alternate systems must be submitted in writing at least ten (10) days prior to the bid date. Product data, samples, test reports, and required certificates shall be included for product review and approval. C. Being listed as a pre-qualified manufacturer does not release the manufacturer from providing complete and acceptable submittal requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Metal Panels: SDP 200 structural standing seam panel as manufactured by CENTRIA. 1. Fabricate metal panels from aluminum-zinc coated steel conforming to ASTM A792 Grade 50B with AZ50 coating when painted AZ50 coating when painted or AZ55 coating when unpainted. Thickness shall be minimum 22 gage. 2. Panels shall be a min. of 18" wide with a 2" vertical seam height. 3. Panels shall have longitudinal stiffening ribs in the pan to minimize "oil canning" effect, or be flat in the pan with no minor ribs. B. Concealed Anchor Panel Clips: Fasten metal roof panels to support substrate with concealed anchor clips eliminating all through fastener penetrations. 1. Panel Clips shall be one piece fixed clip, 22ga. 2.3 FINISHES A. Galvalume Plus: Aluminum-zinc coated steel conforming to ASTM A792, Grade 50B with AZ55 coating plus a thin acrylic coating applied to both sides. B. Texture: Panel finish shall be smooth . SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Use only high quality fasteners as recommended or approved by the roof system manufacturer. Follow fastener manufacturer's recommendations for fastener installation. 1. Screws: Self-drilling screws shall be min. #12 diameter. Self-tapping screws shall be min. #14 diameter. a. Exposed self-drilling and self-tapping screws shall have a zinc die-cast head with neoprene washer or be 300 series stainless steel with neoprene washer. All exposed fasteners shall be painted to match panel color. b. Concealed screws shall be carbon steel with corrosion resistant coating or 300 series stainless steel as required. 2. Rivets: a. Structural bulbed rivets shall be min.3/16" diameter, standard dome head, aluminum rivet and mandrel, with a weather tight EPDM washer under the head. Min. 5/16" diameter, large flange head, aluminum rivet and mandrel, with a weather tight EPDM washer under the head is required at panel endlaps. b. Trim rivets shall be min. 5/32" diameter, stainless steel body and stem with open end or aluminum body and stem with closed end. c. Rivets shall be painted to match panel color. B. Closures: 1. Pre-cut profile closure shall be cut from cross-linked, closed-cell foam. 2. All foam closures shall be protected and supported by a formed metal closure manufactured from the same material, color, and finish as the roofing. C. Sealants: Use only high quality sealants as recommended or approved by the roof system manufacturer. Sealants must not contain oils, asbestos, or asphalts. 1. Non-Curing Butyl: One-part, non-skinning, non-drying, synthetic butyl elastomer. Used for metal-to-metal sealing or bedding of panel and flashing seams or joints. 2. Butyl Tape (Webbed Mastic): Extruded polymeric butyl tape, non-skinning and not easily displaced under compression. Used for critical sealing of panel ends, endlaps, penetrations, closures, and flashings. SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING 3. Urethane: One-part moisture curing, gun grade polyurethane sealant. Used for sealing in all exposed conditions. Color to be coordinated with that of panel. 2.5 FLASHING A. All flashing shall be of the same material, gage, finish, color, and texture as the panels unless otherwise noted. B. Flashing design shall conform to details submitted and approved by the Architect and, if required, the panel manufacturer. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Where possible panels shall be manufactured in continuous lengths, full length of panel runs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. The installer shall inspect the building to verify that the structure is ready for roofing installation. 1. All supports shall be in place with all bracing and connections tightened before work proceeds. 2. Field-check dimensions and check support alignment with a taut string or wire; panel misalignment may induce "oil canning" and potentially restrict panel movement. a. Panel/purlin erection tolerances: * Maximum out-of-plane deviation shall be limited to +/-3/16" from control. * Maximum deviation of 1/8" between adjacent purlins or L/500 which ever is less. 3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install metal roofing system in accordance with approved erection drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install metal roofing system so that it is weather-tight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stress or distortion. C. Hand-crimp at end of panels and any panel end lap(s) prior to seaming. Do not hand-crimp at each panel clip prior to seaming. Do not walk on panels until panels are mechanically seamed together. SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING D. Seam panels together with electric powered seaming machine supplied by the manufacturer. E. Protect installed panels from abuse by other trades. The general contractor shall be responsible for protecting the roofing from wet cement, plaster, and paint operations. The installer shall provide walk boards in heavy traffic areas to prevent damage to the panels. 3.3 DAMAGED MATERIAL AND CLEANING A. Replace panels and other components of work which have been damaged beyond repair. B. To prevent rust staining, remove immediately from finished surfaces any filings caused by drilling or cutting. C. Wipe down each area after erection is complete for final acceptance. END OF SECTION H&C ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-1 SECTION 07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's Specifications, design data and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing layout, dimensions and construction details. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurements; proper fit and attachment of parts is required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specifications requirements: 1. Bilco Co. www.bilco.com 2. Bristolite www.bristolite.com 3. Cierra Products www.cierraproducts.com 4. J.L. Industries www.jlindustries.com 5. Pate Co. www.patecurbs.com 6. Milcor, Inc. www.milcorinc.com 7. Nystrom Building Products www.nystrom.com 8. O'Keeffe's Inc. www.okeefes.com 9. Acralight International; Div. Of International Skylights (Roof Hatches) www.acralight.com H&C ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-2 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Roof Hatch: Bilco Type S-20, or as approved. www.bilco.com Galvanized steel, 14 gauge cover and curb, 22 gauge cover liner. 1 inch thick rigid insulation in curb and cover, 12 inch high curb. 1. Provide heavy duty padlock hasp. 2. Provide vandal resistant features as available. 3. Finish: Powder coat; standard color as selected. B. Roof Hatch Safety Railing System: 1. Regulatory requirements: a. Local building code. b. OSHA Standards CFR 29 1910.23 and CFR 29 1910.27. 2. Manufacturer(s), model(s) and description(s): a. Bilco model B-Guard RL-XX, top rail, mid rail, and self closing gate, 42 inch railing height. Bilco Co. www.bilco.com b. Nystrom Model No. RHSR-SS, Top rail, mid rail, and chain gate, with the hatch curb acting as the toe plate, 200-lb test load, 42 inch railing height (minimum). www.nystrom.com c. Nesea Corporation, Mt. Laurel, NJ (856) 235-3111, model as applicable to hatchway ladder mounting location. www.nesea-safetyproducts.com d. KeeHatch Railing System, top rail, mid rail, and chain gate designed for permanent bolt-on curb installation; The Safety Rail Source, Harleysville, PA www.thesafetyrailcource.com e. RailingReady, top rail, mid rail, and chain gate, 42 inch railing height. Acralight International www.acralight.com 3. Materials: a. Pipe: Galvanized, 1-1/4 inch ID, A53 Grade B seamed pipe or galvanized, 1-5/8 inch OD A500 seamed tube with weather-resistant plugged ends. b. Flat bar: 2 x 3/8 inch thickness A36 mild steel. c. Weld filler: Metal NR211 E70XX (AWS). d. Chain system: 3/16-inch proof coil ASTM specification, zinc plated with quick link on fixed end. e. Pipe caps: Weather and light resistant vinyl, 1-1/2 inch deep and to fit snugly over pipe ends. f. Bolts and washers: 3/8 x 2-1/2 inch grade Z, zinc plated. Fender washers for inside of hatch curb and standard flat washers outside. g. Railing Clamps: Kee Klamp manufactured model 10-7 and 45-7 for 1-1/4 inch pipe. h. Sealant: As recommended by manufacturer. Brackets shall be sealed per roof manufacturer's approved methods. i. Factory finish: Hot dipped galvanized. H&C ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-3 4. Labels: Safety no hoisting warning label, model and serial # label, manufacturer identification label, patent or patent pending label. C. Curbs: Pate Style pc-1b, or as approved, box section design, heavy gauge galvanized steel construction, continuous mitered and welded corner seams, integral base plate, factory installed wood nailer, and insulated with 1-1/2 inch thick rigid fiberglass board insulation. D. Equipment Supports: Pate Style es-1 monolithic construction, heavy gauge galvanized steel, continuous mitered and welded corner seams, integral base plate, factory installed 2 inch x 4 inch wood nailer, and heavy gauge galvanized steel counterflashing. E. Pipe Curb Assemblies: Pate Style pca-1, with curb constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel with continuous welded corner seams, factory installed wood nailer insulated with 1-1/2 inch thick rigid fiberglass board insulation, cover of acrylic clad ABS thermoplastic, including graduated step PVC, boots, adjustable stainless steel clamps and cap fastening screws. Each assembly shall include curb, cap, boots and clamps. See Drawings for size and quantity of pipe penetrations. F. Ladder extension (for roof hatches): Bilco Model 1 LadderUP safety post, or Bristolite Grab Bar. G. Curb & Curb Frame: 14 gauge galvanized iron. 1. Lids and Lid Liner: 1 gauge aluminum. 2. Hinges: Heavy Duty aluminum 3/16 inch pivot hinges. 3. Insulation: Lid and curb to have glass fiber insulation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install roof specialties at locations shown or required in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and as detailed on Drawings. B. Install roof hatches, fire (smoke) vents, equipment supports and bases, curbs and curb assemblies, at locations indicated, fastening securely to deck through curb flange. H&C ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-4 C. Set railing brackets in full bed of sealant and securely fasten to roof hatch curbs in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. D Manufactured Elastic Roof Expansion Joint Covers: Nail flanges of elastic expansion joint units to curb nailers, at maximum spacing of 6 inches o.c. Fabricate seams at joints between units with minimum 3-inch overlap, to form a continuous, waterproof system. 1. Install prefabricated corners at inside and outside corners. 2. Install prefabricated terminus units at ends of expansion joints. 3. Transition expansion joints to vertical wall expansion joint covers with prefabricated units designed to connect with such work. 3.3 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 07 72 00 H&C FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-1 SECTION 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide UL Classified or Warnock Hersey Listed firestopping system to prevent the spread of fire, smoke and gasses through penetrations in fire resistive walls, floors and partitions, including; but not limited to; the following areas: 1. Unprotected openings and openings accommodating penetrating items such as cables, cable trays, pipes, ducts, boxes and conduits through fire rated floors, walls and smoke barriers. 2. Head of wall openings between wall and connecting floor or roof deck assemblies. a. Meet requirements for exposure to hose stream test. b. Applicable for use with steel fluted deck floor assemblies. c. Allow deflection of floor or roof above. 3. Openings at curtainwalls between exterior walls and connecting floor slab perimeters, equal to the fire resistance of the floor assembly. B. Firestop systems shall not be intended to support live loads and traffic unless specifically approved by Testing Agency. C. Firestop systems shall be approved by Code Authority. D. Firestop products shall remain flexible where subject to movement without affecting the integrity of the product. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's Specifications, performance criteria, Drawings and instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Manufacturer's complete Shop Drawings showing proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings method of installation and UL or Warnock Hersey listing number. C. Test Reports: Submit UL or Warnock Hersey test report description for firestopping system. D. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of firestop systems. H&C FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-2 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Applicator with minimum of 5 years experience and approved by the materials manufacturer. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics: 1. ASTM E 136, ASTM E 119 and ASTM E 814, as applicable. 2. UL 1479 fire test to achieve required fire-rating as noted on Drawings. 3. Listing: a. UL Fire Resistance Directory (current edition). b. WH International Listings C. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Convene a pre-installation conference to review specifications and procedures with the Architect, Contractor, installer, manufacturer's representative, Owner and other trades relevant to the work, prior to ordering materials. 2. Notify Architect at least 48 hours prior to starting Work. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish firestop systems acceptable to governing Code Authority from one of the following Manufacturers, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. U.S. Gypsum Co. www.usg.com 2. Johns-Manville www.jm.com or www.jmfirestopping.com 3. Tremco, Inc. www.tremcosealants.com or www.tremcofirestop.com 4. RectorSeal Corporation www.rectorseal.com 5. 3M Fire Protection Products www.3m.com 6. Specified Technologies, Inc. www.stifirestop.com 7. HILTI Firestop Systems www.hilti.com 8. Nelson Firestop Products www.nelsonfirestop.com 9. Grace Construction Products – Flamesafe www.grace.com H&C FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-3 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Materials shall be new, of uniform quality, suitable and without defects affecting the strength or service of the structure. B. Firestop System Materials - General: 1. Appropriate for penetration. 2. Include every component required for code approved installation, including; but not limited to: a. Firestopping putties or compound. b. Backing material. c. Wrap strips. d. Primers, clips and collars. e. Forming and damming materials. f. Sealant and solvent cleaner. C. Properties: 1. Free of asbestos, halogens and volatile components after curing and shall not slump or sag, (except for self-leveling products). 2. Capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flames, heat and smoke in compliance with the requirements of ASTM E814, UL 1479 and U.B.C. Standard 7-5. 3. Non-combustible per ASTM E 136. 4. UV resistant where exposed to sunlight. 5. Water resistant where exposed to moisture. 6. Firestop system shall accommodate movement without adversely affecting fire rating of wall/floor assembly. 7. Shrink resistant. 8. Paintable or capable of receiving finish materials in those areas which are exposed to view and which are scheduled to receive finishes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. H&C FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-4 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials which affect bond. C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage, if required. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall conform to requirements of qualified designs or manufacturer approved modifications as supported by engineering reports, and shall be approved and accepted by the authority having jurisdiction. 1. Apply primer and firestop materials in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with the appropriate UL Fire Resistance Directory or with the appropriate Warnock Hersey International Listing. 2. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating, to ensure against the passage of flames, smoke and toxic gases, and to a uniform density and texture. 3. Protect materials from damage on surface subjected to traffic and install cover plates as required on firestop system that will or may be subject to traffic. 4. Tool surfaces of firestop products to provide a smooth and clean appearance. B. Provide firestopping for conditions specified whether or not firestopping is indicated, and, if indicated, whether such material is designated as insulation, safing or otherwise. Insulation types specified in other sections shall not be installed in lieu of firestopping materials. C. Building Exterior Perimeters: 1. Where exterior facing construction is continuous past a structural floor, and a space (i.e. construction joint) would otherwise remain open between the inner face of the wall construction and the outer perimeter edge of the structural floor, provide firestopping to equal the fire resistance of the floor assembly. 2. Mineral wool by itself shall not constitute an acceptable firestop. If mineral wool is part of firestop system, the mineral wool shall be completely covered by appropriate thickness of UL or Warnock Hersey listed firestop sealant. 3. Firestopping shall be provided whether or not there are any clips, angles, plates, or other members bridging or interconnecting the facing and floor systems, and whether or not such items are continuous. 4. Provide firestopping to continuously fill open spaces where an exterior wall of composite type construction passes a perimeter structural member, such as a girder, beam or strut, and the finish on the interior wall face does not continue up to close with the underside of the structural floor above, thus interrupting the fire-resistive integrity of the wall system, and creating a space that would otherwise remain open between the interior face of the wall and lower edge of the structural members. H&C FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-5 D. Interior Walls and Partitions: 1. Construction joints between top of fire rated walls and underside of floors above shall be firestopped. 2. Firestop systems installed shall have been tested by either UL or Warnock Hersey, including exposure to hose stream test and including test for use with steel fluted deck floor assemblies. 3. Firestop system used shall allow for deflection of floor or roof above. E. Penetrations: 1. Penetrations include conduit, cable, wire, pipe, duct or other elements which pass through one or both outer surfaces of a fire rated floor, wall, or partition. 2. Provide firestopping to fill spaces in accordance with ASTM E 814 (UL 1479) where a penetration occurs through a structural floor or roof and a space would otherwise remain open between the surfaces of the penetration and the edge of the adjoining structural floor or roof, except at floors on grade. 3. Requirements for penetrations shall apply whether or not sleeves have been provided. Firestop the annular space between sleeve and surrounding surfaces. 3.4 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 07 84 00 H&C JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-1 SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 84 00: Sealants at fire penetrations. 2. Section 08 80 00: Sealant for butt glazing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's current specifications and recommended installation procedures. 2. Submit sample warranty to be signed jointly by applicator and manufacturer. 3. Submit manufacturer's standard color chart. B. Shop Drawings: Illustrations in sufficient detail to show installation and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades. C. Mock-up: Provide sample as part of mock-up construction per section 04 22 00. Coordinate with General Contractor and install all necessary finish accessories for exterior purposes. D. Contract Closeout: Submit Manufacturer's Warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Installers shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary skills and shall be thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. Maintain product in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations with proper precautions to ensure fitness of material when installed. C. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. H&C JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-2 1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Observe manufacturer's temperature service range. Do not apply sealant when weather conditions will inhibit bonding and curing. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty, in writing and signed jointly by the installer and sealant manufacturer, to replace sealants which fail at no additional cost to the Owner because of loss of cohesion or adhesion, or do not cure, and which fail to achieve air-tight and water-tight seal as follows: 1. Sealant Types "A" and "B": 5 years. 2. Sealant Types "C1" and "C2": 20 years. 3. Sealant Types "D," "E" and "F": 2 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following manufacturers subject to compliance with specifications requirements: 1. Pecora www.pecora.com 2. Tremco Vulkem Paraseal www.tremcosealants.com 3. Dow Corning Corp. www.dowcorning.com 4. General Electric www.ge.com 5. Sika Corp. www.sika.com 6. Sonneborn / Chemrex www.chemrex.com B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: 1. Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 2. If sealants from separate manufacturers must be used and could come in contact with each other, provide written certification from every manufacturer involved that the sealants are compatible and will adhere to each other. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Sealants, primers, back-up materials, preformed joint fillers, bond breakers and related materials shall be compatible with adjoining materials. Materials shall be new, of uniform quality, suitable and without defects affecting the strength or service of the structure. H&C JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-3 B. Sealant: 1. General: The selection of proper sealant for a particular joint shall be in accordance with current published recommendations of the manufacturer. 2. Types: See Schedule in Part 3 for the location where each type of sealant is to be provided. a. Type "A": 2-part or 3-part (self-leveling) urethane, conforming to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T; Pecora NR-200 Urexpan Sealant or Dynatred, Tremco THC-900/901, Vulkem 45/245, Sikaflex 2c SL (self-leveling) Dow Corning Parking Structure Sealant (FC, NS or SL as applicable) and Sonneborn SL-2. b. Type "B": 3-part chemically curing polyurethane sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, A, O, and capable of withstanding movement of 50% in extension and compression, and sustained temperatures of 250 degrees F in service. Tremco Dymeric 240 FC Sealant, Pecora Dynatrol II, Vulkem 922, Sikaflex 2c NS (non-sag) and Sonneborn NP-2. c. Type "C-1": One-part low modulus moisture cure silicone rubber sealant conforming to FS TT-S-001543A, Class A, FS TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A and ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G,A, and O, and capable of withstanding movement of 100% in extension and 50% in compression in service. Dow Corning 790 Silicone Glazing Sealant, Tremco Spectrem 1 and Pecora 890. d. Type "C-2": One-part medium modulus neutral cure silicone rubber sealant conforming to FS TT-S-001543A, Class A, FS TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A and ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G,A, and O, and capable of withstanding movement of 50% in extension and 50% in compression in service. Tremco Spectrem 2, Pecora 895, Dow Corning 795, Dow Corning 791, and GE Silpruf. e. Type "D": ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M,A,O. Sika Sikaflex 1A, Pecora Dynatrol 1, Tremco DyMonic FC, Pecora 345 and Sonneborn NP-1. f. Type "E": Silicone rubber sealant with mold inhibitor. General Electric Sanitary 1700, Tremco Tremsil 200, Dow Corning 786, Pecora 898, Sonneborn Omni-Plus. g. Type "F": Tremco Acoustical Sealant and Pecora BA-98. 3. Sealants at fire penetrations: As specified in Section 07 84 00 4. Color: Provide standard or custom colors as selected by Architect. In general, colors shall match adjacent materials. C. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. D. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. E. Joint Filler (Backer): 1. Buildings: ASTM C1330, Type B; round bi-cellular or closed cell polyethylene, urethane or neoprene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent; "SofRod" as manufactured by Nomaco. H&C JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-4 2. Pavement: ASTM D5249, Type 3, round bi-cellular or closed cell polyethylene, urethane or neoprene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent; "SofRod" as manufactured by Nomaco. F. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. G. Gloss Reducer: Silica sand No. 20, color to match adjacent surface. Gloss reducer shall be provided at traffic sealant applications. H. Other Materials: Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor and approved by the sealant manufacturer as compatible, subject to the review of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. Verify, before proceeding with this Work that required inspections of existing conditions have been completed. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove loose materials and other foreign matter which may impair adhesion of sealant. B. Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant. C. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. D. Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths, to allow sealants to perform properly. E. Use bond breaker where required. F. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by masking when necessary. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H&C JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-5 2. In general, seal openings and other locations which normally require sealant to seal against infiltration from air, water and most insects, including; but not limited to: a. Construction and expansion joints. b. Joints between dissimilar materials. c. Joints around windows, door frames, louvers and other penetrations and openings in the exterior wall. d. Interior wall openings. e. Other locations indicated on drawings. 3. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges. B. Joints: 1. Free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. 2. Tool joints concave. C. Apply sealant under pressure with hand or power actuated gun or other appropriate means. Gun shall have nozzle of proper size and provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints as detailed. D. Neatly point or tool joint surfaces to provide slightly concave surfaces, free of wrinkles and skips, uniformly smooth and with perfect adhesion along both sides of joint. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of sealant as work progresses. B. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by sealant manufacturer. C. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Expansion and Control Joints: 1. Horizontal traffic: Type "A". Provide gloss reducer. 2. Masonry, concrete to concrete, stucco, steel and wood: Type "B". 3. Glass (except insulating glass or special coated glass), aluminum, E.I.F.S., Natural Stone, and plastics: Type "C-1". 4. Glass (including insulating glass or special coated glass), aluminum and plastics: Type "C-2". H&C JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-6 B. Non-expanding Joints: 1. Glass (except insulating glass or special coated glass), aluminum, E.I.F.S., Natural Stone, and plastics: Type "C-1". 2. Glass (including insulating glass or special coated glass), aluminum and plastics: Type "C-2". 3. Concrete to concrete, stucco, masonry, aluminum, steel, and wood: Type "D". C. Mechanical (ductwork and air conditioning): Type "D". D. Plumbing Fixtures (around toilet, bath, kitchen fixtures, and food service equipment): Type "E". E. Acoustical (acoustical applications where sealant is required): Type "F". END OF SECTION 07 92 00 H&C STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-1 SECTION 08 11 13 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing elevations of each door and frame type, typical and details of construction, location and installation requirements for hardware, size and thickness of material. B. Fire Rated Doors and Frames: 1. Installation Instructions: Door and frame manufacturer shall clearly identify the hardware products, other materials and work requirements necessary to maintain compliance with UL 10(c) (positive pressure testing) as required by 2003 IBC Section 714. 2. Certification: Submit certification that fire rated doors (including frames and hardware as a unit) will comply with UL 10(c) (positive pressure testing) as required by 2003 IBC Section 714. C. Mock-up: Provide sample as part of mock-up construction per section 04 22 00. Coordinate with General Contractor and install all necessary finish accessories for exterior purposes. D. Furnish recognized independent test lab certification that products comply with ANSI A250.4, 1.2 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver welded frames with spreaders and doors with wrappers. B. Store doors and frames under protective cover in dry, enclosed spaces at the site. Place doors and frames on non-staining blocking Raise bottoms of doors at least 4 inches high and provide 1/4 inch air space between stacked doors to avoid metal to metal contact and permit air circulation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Doors and frames shall be certified to comply with ANSI A250.4, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcing, and ANSI A250.8, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. H&C STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish steel doors and frames from one of the following Manufacturers subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. http://us.allegion.com/brands/steelcraft/pages/default.aspx 2. Curries Company www.curries.com 3. The Ceco Corporation www.cecodoor.com B. Doors and frames shall be furnished by the same Manufacturer. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Doors: Furnish Level, Model and Physical Performance level in accordance with ANSI A250.8/SDI-100. 1. Level: Level 1, 16 gauge. 2. Physical Performance: Level A. 3. Model: Model 1, Full Flush. B. Core: Honeycomb core. Core shall be as allowed by UL 10(c) for fire rated doors. Beveled hinge and beveled lock door edges. C. Frames: ANSI A250.8/SDI 100, 14 gauge steel. Fully grout at masonry walls. D. Glazing Beads: Minimum 20 gauge steel. E. Steel: ASTM A1008 cold-rolled or ASTM A1011 hot-rolled. A-60 Galvannealed. F. Paint: Non-lifting, rust-inhibitive grey primer meeting ANSI A224.1, compatible with field finish specified in Section 09 91 00, applied after bonderizing. G. U-Factor Minimum: 0.70. 2.3 FABRICATION- DOORS A. Construct hollow metal doors, flush and vision lite types as scheduled on Drawings, in accordance with ANSI A250.8/SDI-100 with core as specified above. Full height mechanical interlock hinge and lock edges with epoxy. 14 gauge end channels, 16 gauge steel top filler cap, 12 gauge channel reinforcement for closers, 14 gauge channel reinforcement for panic exit devices, 16 gauge reinforcement for level handle locks. Reinforce top and bottom of doors horizontally by 16 gauge steel channels, full width, spot welded to each face at least 3 inches on center. Bevel edge of lock stile. H&C STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-3 B. Door Edge Joint and Treatment: Joints at the edges of doors shall have manufacturer’s standard edge construction with seam edge filled, dressed smooth. C. Provide 7 gauge reinforcing at hinge cut outs on all doors. Coordinate with hardware schedule. D. Exterior Doors: Close top and bottom edges of all exterior doors flush as an integral part of the door construction, or by placing end closure channel with web of channel flush with top and bottom edge of door (not inverted), or by addition of end cap at top and bottom of door, spot welded to each face at least 3 inches on center, filled and dressed smooth. E. Reinforce openings in doors for lites and vents on all sides with 14 gauge steel channel. F. Provide non-egress double doors with one-piece astragals of 14 gauge steel unless otherwise indicated or scheduled. Provide solid drip cap at top of exterior out-swinging doors. G. Accurately mortise doors for locks and hinges. Provide adequate box type reinforcement with steel plates welded to the interior reinforcing channels and drilled and tapped. Provide reinforcement for all other items of hardware. H. Doors with glass lite openings shall have trim recessed from the face of the door, beveled and attached with screws. I. Louvers: Provide sightproof louvers inserted into the panels. Form louver frames of minimum 20-gauge steel. Weld or tenon minimum 24 gauge blades to frame and fasten the entire assembly to the door with moldings. The moldings, when used, shall be an integral part of the louver. J. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide fire rated doors investigated and tested as fire door doors, complete with type of hardware to be used. Identify each fire door with recognized testing laboratory labels, indicating applicable fire rating of steel doors. Doors required to meet smoke and draft control assembly requirements shall have labels that identify that the door has been tested and approved for smoke and draft control assemblies (S-label). Construct doors to comply with NFPA Standard No. 80 and UL-10(c). K. Minimum 3 standard weight hinges per door. 2.4 FABRICATION - FRAMES A. Construct to shapes and sizes shown, meeting various wall thicknesses in accordance with ANSI/SDI-100. B. Welded Frames: Weld, fill, grind and dress smooth face frame miters. C. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap for standard weight, full mortise template hinges and template strike. D. Provide not less than three 18 gauge anchors per jamb, or as shown on Drawings, spaced for maximum stiffness. Provide adjustable 18 gauge floor clips at each jamb, welded to back face of jamb, punched for securing to floor with two spaced anchors. H&C STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-4 E. Make cutouts for required hardware specified under Section 08 71 00, from templates furnished. Reinforce butt cutouts with minimum 8 gauge thick steel plate drilled and tapped and welded in place. When heavy duty hinges are specified, provide high frequency reinforcing at frames for hinges. Coordinate with hardware vendor. Provide strike stops of frames with holes for three rubber door silencers; on double door frames, provide for two silencers per door at head. F. For openings over 42 inches wide and at double openings, reinforce head members full length with a matching profile of 12 gauge steel. Provide anchor at midpoint of door, if practical. G. Construct frames for UL labeled doors in accordance with UL requirements and label as scheduled. Frames required to meet smoke and draft control assembly requirements shall have labels that identify that the frame has been tested and approved for smoke and draft control assemblies (S-label). 2.5 FABRICATION - GLAZING FRAMES A. Construct in accordance with applicable parts of door frame Specification and as detailed. Extend partition frames around all four sides of openings. B. Provide glazing stops, removable one side and integral from the other side, secured with countersunk flat head Phillips screws spaced at not more than 16 inches on center and 2 inches from corners. Miter stops at corners. 2.6 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Allowable Tolerances for Fabrication: As specified in ANSI/SDI-117, Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2.7 PAINTING A. Bonderize and prime doors and frames with one shop coat of rust inhibitive primer. Final field paint to be pre-approved lead free, semi-gloss oil enamel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install metal door frames plumb, level, rigid and in true alignment as recommended in SDI 105 and ANSI/DHI A115.IG. H&C STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-5 B. Install doors and fasten to maintain alignment with frames to achieve maximum operational effectiveness and appearance. 1. Maintain clearances as specified in ANSI A250.8, 2.1.8. 2. Shim as required per NFPA 80, ANSI/A115.IG and SDI 122. C. Fill backs of frames solid with mortar at concrete and masonry construction. D. Install fire doors and frames to comply with NFPA 80 and in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. E. Prepare and install doors in accordance with ANSI A115 and SDI 122. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's representative shall inspect fire rated doors (including frames and hardware as a unit) and verify compliance with UL 10C (positive pressure testing) as required by 2003 IBC Section 714. Fire rated doors (including frames and hardware as a unit) which do not comply with UL 10C (positive pressure testing) as required by 2003 IBC Section 714 shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to Owner. 3.3 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 08 11 13 H&C WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-1 SECTION 08 14 00 - WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing schedule of door sizes and types, door details and elevations. Note discrepancies between the Drawings and door schedules, and the requirements of regulatory and testing agencies. B. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's data showing door construction. C. Samples: Before fabrication, submit sample of each type of door to be furnished, showing face, edge, core construction and factory finish for each type specified. D. Fire Rated Doors: 1. Installation Instructions: Door manufacturer shall clearly identify the frame, hardware products, other materials and work requirements necessary to maintain compliance with UL 10(c) (positive pressure testing) as required by 2003 IBC Section 714. 2. Certification: Submit certification that fire rated doors (including doors, frames and hardware as a unit) will comply with UL 10(c) (positive pressure testing) as required by 2003 IBC Section 714. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordination: Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and obtaining necessary information from Hardware and Metal Frame Manufacturers. Door Manufacturer shall be responsible for coordinating necessary information received by Contractor from Hardware and Metal Frame Manufacturers in order that doors shall be properly prepared to receive hinges and hardware. Contractor shall provide door supplier with approved frame schedule, hardware schedule, and hardware templates. Furnish to door supplier 60 days prior to desired delivery date of doors. B. Regulatory Requirements: Fire doors shall be listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing and certification agency, in accordance with applicable building codes. Doors required to meet smoke and draft control assembly requirements shall have labels that identify that the door has been tested and approved for smoke and draft control assemblies (S-label). The listed doors shall meet or exceed ASTM E2074, UL-10(b), UL-10(c) (positive pressure testing), Category A and NFPA 252 (September 1999) with all requirements as part of door construction (no additional edge sealing required). Provide fire labels from Warnock-Hersey International (WHI), or Underwriters Laboratories (UL). C. Certification: Provide each fire rated and sound rated door with a label permanently attached at eye level, to the hinge stile or, where interfering hardware such as full length hinges are applied, in a location acceptable to the local Code Authority, indicating the testing agency's approval for the rating required. Do not cover or conceal label. H&C WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-2 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to delivery, seal door edges with an approved clear sealer, compatible with finish specified. B. Delivery: 1. Deliver doors to the jobsite only when proper storage site is available. 2. Store doors in an area having controlled temperature and humidity as recommended by NWWDA, AWI and the door manufacturer. 3. Store doors flat on factory pallets, or three full 2 x 4's, one centered and the other two 12 inches from each end. Do not stack doors on end, or on their vertical edge. 4. Protect wood doors from construction activity, dirt, and exposure to sunlight. C. Handling: 1. Always handle doors with clean hands or gloves. 2. Do not drag doors across one another. 3. Maintain factory packaging or other means of protection on doors, until date of Substantial Completion. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Furnish the following warranty to Owner: 1. Warrant doors from the date of installation against defects in materials and workmanship. Periods of warranty after date of installation: a. Interior solid core and mineral core: Life of installation. b. Interior hollow core: 5 years. 2. Replacement under warranty shall include removal of the defective door, hanging, installation of hardware, and finishing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. General: Materials shall be new, of uniform quality, suitable and without defects affecting the strength or service of the structure. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Doors shall be products of one of the following Manufacturers: 1. Algoma www.algomahardwoods.com 2. Buell Door Company www.buelldoor.com 3. Eggers Industries www.eggersindustries.com H&C WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-3 4. Marshfield Door Systems www.marshfielddoors.com 5. Lambton www.lambtondoors.com 6. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company www.oshkoshdoor.com 7. Graham www.grahamdoors.com 2.2 PANELIZED DOORS A. Cores: 1. Solid Core: Shall conform to ANSI A208.1 1LD2, 32 lbs. per cubic foot density. For doors scheduled to receive closers, provide minimum 5 inch solid wood top rail. 2. Hollow Core: Expanded honeycomb made of corrugated fiberboard. Meet or exceed the requirements of NWWDA Industry Standards I.S.1 Series. 3. Transom Panels: Match door construction. B. Edge Bandings: 1. Stiles (Dimensions given are minimum sizes allowed after factory trimming to booksize or prefitting). a. Particleboard Core: 1-3/8 inch double banded laminated hardwood stile, laminated strand lumber or structural composite lumber (no finger joints allowed) in inner and outer band to be at least 1/2 inch wide same species lumber as face veneer with the exception of birch doors which will have hard maple stiles. b. Hollow Core: Stile shall be 1-3/8 inch minimum. 2. Rails (Dimensions given are minimum sizes allowed after factory trimming to booksize or prefitting). a. Particleboard Core: 1-3/8 inch minimum mill option hardwood rail. b. Hollow Core: 1-3/8 inch minimum mill option wood. C. Face Veneers, Crossbands and Backers: When wood veneer faces are specified, doors shall be 7 ply (AWI PC-5) made up of a premium grade face veneer, crossbanding and a core unit, all securely bonded together utilizing type 1 (fully waterproof) adhesive and the hot press assembly technique. All plies must be placed at right angles to adjacent plies. Face veneers shall have a minimum thickness of 1/50 inch after factory sanding and the individual pieces of veneer forming the face veneer must be spliced or edge glued together. Doors manufactured by cold-pressing 2 or 3-ply pre-manufactured door skins to multiple cores in the same press shall not be acceptable. 1. Veneer: a. Face veneer: Premium A Grade veneers as selected by the Architect. b. Veneer cut: Plain sliced. c. Veneer match: Book match. d. Assembly: Balanced match. H&C WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-4 2. Cross banding shall be thoroughly dried hardwood extending full width and height of door with grain at right angles to face and back veneer. D. Glue: Type 1 per NWWDA/WDMA T.M.-6 for interior and exterior doors. 2.3 LABELED PANELIZED DOORS A. Mineral core flush veneered doors, 7-ply, shall be made up of premium grade face veneers, crossbanding, and a core unit securely bonded together utilizing Type I (fully waterproof) adhesive and the hot press assembly technique. Provide matching transom panels where scheduled. B. Face Veneers and Crossbanding: Same as specified for non-labeled doors. C. Core Unit: Asbestos free, noncombustible mineral composite with a minimum of 28 pounds per cubic foot ) density when tested in accordance with ASTM C303, with 10 percent maximum absorption by weight with core in equilibrium at 90 percent relative humidity and 70 degrees F.. Provide flame resistant blocking as required by the hardware schedule. The door listing shall not limit the size or location of such blocking. 1. Provide one lock block 5 inches x 12 inches when a bored unit or mortise lock is to be used and two lock blocks when the door is equipped with an exit device. 2. For doors with closers include 6 inch top rail. Provide wide bottom rails for exit, manual and automatic flush bolts and automatic door bottoms. D. Rails: Top 1-3/8” inch, bottom 1-3/8 inches rail (one or two piece) of flame resistant material - salt free. Securely glue rails to core. E. Stiles: Manufacturer's standard for receiving a full mortise hinge. No salt treated components shall be used. UL or WH approved for labeled doors meeting the following performance criteria: 1. Split Resistance: Average of ten test samples shall be not less than 900 load pounds when tested in accordance with "Test Method to Determine Split Resistance of Hinge Edges of Composite Type Fire Doors." 2. Direct Screw Withdrawal: Average of ten test samples shall be not less than 650 load pounds when tested for direct screw withdrawal in accordance with ASTM D1037; using a No. 12 x 1-1/4 inch steel thread-to-the-head wood screw of the cadmium plated or rust- resistant type. Drill 5/32 inch pilot hole, approximately 1/8 inch beyond the length of the screw. 3. Cycle/Slam: 200,000 cycles with no loose hinge screws or other visible signs of failure when tested in accordance with the requirements of ANSI A151.1, Section 2.5. F. Vision Frames: Provide one of the following. 1. Furnish metal vision frames factory finished per Architects color selection for doors with lites. Frames shall meet AWI standard, UL, or WHI approved. H&C WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-5 2. Furnish Marshfield Door Systems "Trim-lite" 20 minute wood molding system with flush or lipped bead molding profile as selected by Architect, or Algoma Veneer wrapped wood bead, fire-rated for 45, 60 and 90 minutes. G. Manufacture labeled doors to the required size so as to provide proper clearances without field trimming. Machining of labeled doors must be completed before label is applied to assure the full thickness of the edge bands. Machine fire doors to meet NFPA 80 requirements. Provide channels for concealed exit devices specified in Section 08 71 00 and in conformance with UL requirements. H. Meeting edges on pairs of labeled doors: 1. Treated stiles at pairs of 20 minute doors. 2. Metal edge and astragal at pairs of 45, 60 and 90 minute doors not used in conjunction with surface mounted vertical rods on each leaf. 3. Metal edge at pairs of 45, 60 or 90 minute door used in conjunction with surface mounted vertical rods on each leaf. 4. No metal edge or astragal at pairs of 45, 60 or 90 minute door. Furnish "Pair Guard" door as manufactured by Marshfield Door Systems with surface mounted vertical rods on each leaf, or as approved. 2.4 LOUVERS A. Material: Match face veneer species, with round edge, flat slat blade and 50 percent free area. 2.5 FIELD FINISHED (No factory prefinished doors) A. Clear Finish: AWI Section 1500 System TR-6 Catalyzed Polyurethane, in 10 gloss, applied using the following steps. 1. Finish sanding. 2. Burnish. 3. Sealer application. Sealer to be catalyzed polyurethane coating or modified catalyzed polyurethane coating. 4. Curing. 5. Sealer denibbing. 6. Topcoat application. Topcoat to be catalyzed polyurethane coating or modified catalyzed polyurethane coating. 7. Curing. B. Stain Finish: AWI Section 1500 System TR-6 Catalyzed Polyurethane applied using the following steps. 1. Finish sanding. 2. Burnish. 3. Stain application. Stain to color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard and custom colors. H&C WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-6 4. Curing. 5. Sealer application. Sealer to be thermosetting polyester amino modified conversion coating. 6. Curing. 7. Sealer denibbing. 8. Topcoat application. Topcoat to be catalyzed polyurethane coating or modified catalyzed polyurethane coating. 9. Curing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine door frames to assure that jambs are true and plumb. Correct frames which are not true and plumb before doors are hung. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Doors shall be hung true and plumb with standard bevel and with uniform 3/32 inch clearance at jambs and head, and 1/2 inch bottom clearance, unless otherwise required. Mortise, drill or otherwise prepare doors for finish hardware specified in Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. B. Doors that are cut or planed for fitting shall be immediately resealed with a transparent wood sealer. Doors shall operate freely without sticking or binding, without hinge-bound conditions and with hardware installed, properly adjusted and functioning. C. Install fire doors and frames to comply with NFPA 80 and in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. D. Repair of Field Finish: 1. Clear and Stain: Minor handling marks or scratches (not through the seal coat) shall be repaired by sanding the damaged area, then topcoating again with polyurethane with a matching gloss. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's representative shall inspect fire rated doors (including frames and hardware as a unit) and verify compliance with UL 10C (positive pressure testing) as required by 2003 IBC Section 714. Fire rated doors (including frames and hardware as a unit) which do not comply with UL 10C (positive pressure testing) as required by 2003 IBC Section 714 shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to Owner. H&C WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-7 3.4 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 08 14 00 H&C ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 31 13-1 SECTION 08 31 13 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing sizes, construction and installation details. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage and Protection: Deliver and store items in dry, protected areas. Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Babcock-Davis (Cierra Products) www.babcockdavis.com 2. Nystrom Building Products www.nystrom.com 3. Karp Associates www.karpinc.com 4. J.L. Industries www.jlindustries.com 5. Milcor Inc. www.milcorinc.com 2.02 ACCESS DOORS A. Doors: Sizes as shown on the Drawings. Units shall be prime painted steel at painted wall construction and stainless steel in tile and other locations as indicated, in types as required by wall construction, as follows (based on Babcock-Davis): 1. Non-Rated Access Panels: a. Drywall Walls and Ceilings: Babcock-Davis B-NW access panel. b. Masonry, Tile Walls, Etc.: Babcock-Davis B-NT access panel. c. Acoustical Tile: Babcock-Davis B-RA access panel. 2. Fire-Rated Access Panels: H&C ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 31 13-2 a. Drywall Walls and Ceilings: Babcock-Davis B-IW, Insulated, Fire-Rated access panel. b. Masonry, Tile Walls, Etc.: Babcock-Davis B-UT, Insulated, Fire-Rated access panel. B. Door and Frame: 16 gauge steel. Provide key operated cylinder lock with additional screw driver operated cam locks in sufficient quantity as recommended by manufacturer to hold door in flush closed position. 16 gauge steel shall be used for door and frame. Type K door shall have concealed spring hinges to allow door to open a minimum of 175 degrees. Size as required or as indicated on the Drawings. C. Access Doors in Fire Rated Construction: 1. Doors shall be UL or Warnock Hersey labeled and meet self-closing and self-latching requirements for fire rated ceiling assembly. 2. Doors shall be UL 1-1/2 hour fire rated when located in a fire rated wall assembly. D. U-Factor Minimum: 0.70. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install access doors in accordance with Manufacturer's directions at locations shown on Drawings or necessary for access to valves, dampers and other devices or equipment requiring periodic access. Do not install panels in locations where frame will extend over transition between two separate wall or ceiling finish materials (i.e. tile to gypsum board). B. Install plumb and level, true to line. 3.02 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 08 31 13 H&C 16-003 FOLDING GLASS DOORS FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 08 35 13 - 1 SECTION 08 35 13 FOLDING GLASS DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes furnishing and installing a top-hung sliding-folding aluminum-framed glass door or storefront system that includes: 1. Aluminum frame 2. Threshold 3. Panels 4. Sliding-folding and locking hardware 5. Weatherstripping 6. Glass and glazing 7. Insect screen 8. Accessories as required for a complete working installation. B. Related Documents and Sections: Contractor to examine Contract Documents for requirements that directly affect or are affected by Work of this Section. A list of those Documents and Sections include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 General Requirements, Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry: Wood framing R.O. and blocking. 3. Section 07 27 00, Air Barriers: Building wrap 4. Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashing and other sheet metal work. 5. Section 07 90 00, Joint Protection 6. Section 08 42 23, Glass Entrance Swing Doors 7. Section 08 43 29, Sliding Glass Storefronts: NanaWall LS160 8. Section 08 51 13, Aluminum Windows: NanaWall SL48, tilt-turn, casement window. 9. Section 09 22 16, Non-Structural Metal Framing: Metal framing R.O. and reinforcement. 10. Section 10 22 39, Folding Glass Partitions: NanaWall SL45. 11. Section 10 22 43, Sliding Glass Partitions: NanaWall LS160 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards in accordance with Division 01 and current editions from the following: 1. AAMA. American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org a. AAMA 503, Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems b. AAMA 611, Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum c. AAMA 920, Operation / Cycling Performance d. AAMA 1303.5, Voluntary Specification for Forced Entry Resistant Aluminum Sliding Glass Doors e. AAMA 2604, Voluntary Specifications, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels f. AAMA 2605, Voluntary Specifications, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures H&C 16-003 FOLDING GLASS DOORS FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 08 35 13 - 2 for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels 2. ANSI. American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org a. ANSI Z97.1, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used In Buildings 3. ASTM. ASTM International; www.astm.org a. ASTM C1036, Standard Specification for Flat Glass b. ASTM C1048, Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass c. ASTM E283, Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. d. ASTM E330, Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. e. ASTM E331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference f. ASTM E413, Classification for Rating Sound Insulation g. ASTM E547, Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential. h. ASTM E1332, Standard Classification for Rating Outdoor-Indoor Sound Attenuation 4. CPSC. Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov a. CPSC 16CFR-1201, Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials 5. DIN. "Deutsches Institut für Normung" (German institute for standardization); www.en- standard.eu/din-standards a. DIN 52210-3, Testing of acoustics in buildings - Airborne and impact sound insulation - Laboratory measurements of sound insulation of building elements and field measurements between rooms b. DIN 52210-4, Tests In Building Acoustics - Airborne And Impact Sound 6. FL. Florida Building Commission - Product Approval; https://floridabuilding.org/pr/pr_app_srch.aspx 7. NFRC. National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org a. NFRC 100, Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate Folding Glass Storefront system and framing R.O. B. Preinstallation Meetings: See Section 01 30 00. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. For Contractor submittal procedures see Section 01 30 00. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s printed product literature for each Folding Glass Storefront system to be incorporated into the Work. Show performance test results and details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles and colors. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate Folding Glass Storefront system component sizes, dimensions and framing R.O., configuration, swing panels, direction of swing, stacking layout, typical head jamb, side jambs and sill details, type of glazing material, handle height and field measurements. D. Manufacturers' Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit Owner’s Manual from manufacturer. Identify with project name, location and completion date, and type and size of unit installed. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing complete, precision built, engineered, pre-fitted units with a minimum twenty-five (25) years’ experience in the sale of H&C 16-003 FOLDING GLASS DOORS FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 08 35 13 - 3 folding-sliding door systems for large openings in the North American market. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in the installation of manufacturer’s products or other similar products for large openings. Installer to provide reference list of at least three (3) projects of similar scale and complexity successfully completed in the last three (3) years. 1. Installer to be trained and certified by manufacturer. C. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish Folding Glass Storefront system materials from one manufacturer for entire Project. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, Section 01 60 00 requirements, and as follows: 1. Deliver materials to job site in sealed, unopened cartons or crates. a. Upon receipt, inspect the shipment to ensure it is complete, in good condition and meets project requirements. 2. Store material under cover in a clean and dry location, protecting units against weather and defacement or damage from construction activities, especially to the edges of panels. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Contractor to field verify dimensions of rough openings (R.O.) and threshold depressions to receive sill. Mark field measurements on shop drawing submittal. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide Folding Glass Storefront system manufacturer’s standard limited warranty as per manufacturer’s published warranty document in force at time of purchase, subject to change, against defects in materials and workmanship. 1. Warranty Period beginning with the earliest of 120 days from Date of Delivery or Date of Substantial Completion: a. Rollers and Glass Seal Failure: Ten (10) years b. All Other Components Except Screens: Ten (10) years 1). Exception: Five (5) years if NOT installed by manufacturer's certified trained H&C 16-003 FOLDING GLASS DOORS FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 08 35 13 - 4 installer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product by Manufacturer: NanaWall SL60 by NANA WALL SYSTEMS, INC. B. Approved Equal 1. Substitution Procedures: See Section 01 20 00; Submit completed and signed: a. Document 00 43 25, Substitution Request Form (During Procurement), or b. Document 00 63 25, Substitution Request Form (During Construction) 2.02 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Performance Criteria (Lab Tested): 1. Air Infiltration (ASTM E283) - Flush Sill: a. 0.25 cfm/ft2 (1.28 L/s/m2) at a static air pressure difference: of 1.57 psf (75 Pa) b. 0.78 cfm/ft2 (6.66 L/s/m2) at 6.24 psf (300 Pa) 2. Water Penetration (ASTM E331, ASTM E547) - Flesh Profile: a. No uncontrolled water leakage at a static test pressure of 3.76 psf (180 Pa). 3. Structural Loading (ASTM E330): a. Load Structure: At 1.5 times design wind pressure with no glass breakage or permanent damage to fasteners or storefront components. b. Design Pressure w/ Reinforced Locking Unit: Positive and Negative at 35 psf (1675 Pa) 4. Forced Entry (AAMA 1303.5 and AAMA CAWM 300): Meets requirements. 5. Swing Panel - Operation / Cycling Performance (AAMA 920): 500,000 cycles 6. Thermal Performance U-factor: NFRC 100 rated NOTE: Use Performance Method for California's Title 24. 8. Mounting Type: Top hung 9. Panel Type: Hinged 10. Panel Pairing Configuration: See drawings. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Sliding-Folding Glass Storefront Description: Monumental top-hung system designed for straight runs, segmented angle changes, center pivot, and capable of folding flat against adjacent walls. Manufacturer’s standard frame and panel profiles, with head and floor tracks, side jambs and H&C 16-003 FOLDING GLASS DOORS FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 08 35 13 - 5 panels with dimensions as shown on Drawings. 1. Panels: a. Single lite. b. Simulated divided lites in pattern as shown on Drawings. 2. Panel Size (W x H): As indicated. 3. Rail Depth: 1-3/4 inch (45 mm) 4. Head Width: 4-7/8 inch (124 mm) 5. Head and Jamb Rail Width: 2-1/8 inch (53 mm) 6. Bottom Rail Width: a. 3-9/16 inch (90 mm) overall with 2-1/16 inch (53 mm) rail for standard sill b. 2-1/16 inch (53 mm) for Flush Sill c. Manufacturer’s standard kickplate with height indicated. 7. Aluminum Extrusion: AIMgSi0.5 alloy, 6063-T5 (F-22 - European standard) a. Thickness: 0.078 inch (2.0 mm) nominal 8. Aluminum Finish (including head track covers): a. Anodized (AAMA 611): 1). Clear b. Powder Coat (AAMA 2604): 1). Color as chosen from manufacturer's powder coating finish chart from a). manufacturer's standard selection of 50 colors - matte. c. PVDF Coat (AAMA 2605): Fluoropolymer Kynar with color to match custom finish. B. Glass and Glazing: 1. Safety Glazing: In compliance with ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR 1201. NOTE: Unlike wet glazing, NanaWall's standard dry glazing method helps reduce instances of seal failure. 2. Manufacturer’s tempered glass lites in double insulated glazing units, dry glazed with glass stops on the inside. NOTE: Select and edit glass type(s) to meet building code, wind-load design, acoustic, bullet resistant and/or security, and other project requirements with other glass available from manufacturer. Anti-fall glazing available where required. IGU glazing is capable of meeting 2010 Energy Star requirements of a U-factor < 0.32 and SHGC < 0.30 for all climate zones. Custom layouts with horizontal mullions, simulated divided lites, inserts, and high bottom rails are possible. Contact NanaWall for availability of other commercial glass types. a. Glass Lite / Insulated Glass Unit (IGU): 1). Double IGU: 3/4 inch (20 mm) thick. a). IGU Fill: < insert IGU fill > i. Low-E ii. Argon filled b). Glass Spacers: Manufacturer’s standard gray finish; without capillary H&C 16-003 FOLDING GLASS DOORS FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 08 35 13 - 6 tubes. b. Glass Treatment: < insert glass type > 1). Provide glazing to match Section 08 80 00. C. Locking Hardware and Handles: NOTE: Select one of the below Main Entry Panel paragraphs WITH or WITHOUT Swing Panels, deleting all others. Edit to suit project requirements. 1. Main Entry Pair of Panel(s) for Models WITH Swing Panel(s): Provide manufacturer’s standard lever handles on the inside and outside and a lockset with a lockable latch and multi-point locking with a dead bolt and rods at the top and bottom on primary panel only. a. Rods to be concealed and not edge mounted. b. After turn of key or thumbturn, depression of handles withdraws latch. c. Lifting of handles engages rods and turn of key or thumb turn engages deadbolt and operates lock. d. Secondary Swing Panel: Provide two-point locking with flat handles on inside only for secondary swing panel. e. Lever Handle - Finish: 1). Brushed satin stainless steel f. Locking: 1). Standard profile cylinder to match hardware manufacturer and style. 2). Adapter for Small Format Interchangeable Core (SFIC) NOTE: Note that with the option above, the main entry panel is operable from inside only and that there is no latch. Other compatible lever, L-shaped and push-pull handle styles and finishes are available from other suppliers. 2. Secondary Swing Panels and Pairs of Folding Panels: Provide manufacturer’s removable custodial handles and concealed one or two-point locking hardware operated by 180º turn of handle. a. Face applied flush bolt locking not acceptable (except for units with paired panels). 3. Flat Handle - Finish: a. Brushed satin stainless steel 4. Handle Height: 41-3/8 inch (105 cm) centered from bottom of panel or as otherwise indicated. 5. Stainless steel (impact) locking rods with standard fiberglass reinforced polyamide end caps at the top and bottom. Rods to have a stroke of 15/16 inch (24 mm). 6. Additional profile cylinders to be keyed alike. D. Sliding- Folding Hardware: Provide manufacturer’s standard combination sliding and folding hardware with top and bottom tracks. 1. For each pair of folding panels, provide independent cardanic suspension for four (4) wheeled rollers coated with fiberglass reinforced polyamide upper running carriage and lower guide carriage. 2. Swing Panel Hinges: a. Stainless steel hinges and security hinge pins with set-screws. 3. Adjustment: Provide 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in width per hinge adjustments without removing H&C 16-003 FOLDING GLASS DOORS FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 08 35 13 - 7 panels from tracks and without needing to remove panels from tracks. NOTE: Select from the following Sill types, edit to suit and delete those not meeting project requirements. 4. Sill Type: < insert sill type > a. Standard flush sill (thermally broken) b. Finish: Aluminum with 1). a clear anodized finish. c. Cover plate over sill NOT acceptable. E. Weatherstripping: Manufacturer’s double layer EPDM between panels, EPDM gasket and Q-lon gasket, or brush seal between panel and frame, or brush seals with a two-layer fiberglass reinforced polyamide fin attached at both inner and outer edge of bottom of door panels with a recessed sill or on frame for sealing between panels and between panel and frame. F. Fasteners: Stainless steel screws for connecting frame components. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Extruded aluminum frame and panel profiles, corner connectors and hinges, sliding and folding hardware, locking hardware and handles, glass and glazing and weatherstripping components needed to construct a folding glass wall. 1. Each unit factory pre-assembled and shipped with all components and installation instructions. 2. Exposed work to be carefully matched to produce continuity of line and design with all joints. 3. No raw edges visible at joints. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Provide sidelights, transoms, corner posts, or single or double doors as indicated. B. Insect Screen Panels: Fully retractable non-pleated screen made of ultra-strong, UV resistant fiberglass mesh housed in a single cartridge riding on a single track. 1. Basis of Design Product by Manufacturer: Screen ONE or an Architect acceptable equivalent subject to project requirements. 2. Finish - Aluminum Top Track, Side Jambs and Vertical Struts: a. White powder coated b. Clear anodized NOTE: Above options are standard. Check with NanaWall regarding other available finishes, which may require an upcharge. C. Insect Screen Panels: A series of top-hung collapsible pleated UV resistant fiberglass mesh screen panels riding on a single narrow ADA compliant 1/4 inch (5 mm) floor track. Each 4 inch (10 cm) wide vertical cassette can expand to 3’-3” (1 m) wide. 1. Basis of Design Product by Manufacturer: Screen Classic or an Architect acceptable equivalent subject to project requirements. 2. Finish - Aluminum Top Track, Side Jambs and Vertical Struts: a. Clear anodized b. [ Powder coated with color as selected by architect. ] 3. Screen Track Stacking: Within opening PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions per Section 01 70 00 and as follows: 1. Carefully examine rough openings with Installer present, for compliance with requirements H&C 16-003 FOLDING GLASS DOORS FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION #2 08 35 13 - 8 affecting Work performance. a. Examine surfaces of openings and verify dimensions; verify rough openings are level, plumb, and square with no unevenness, bowing, or bumps on the floor; and other conditions as required by the manufacturer to receive Work. b. Verify the structural integrity of the header for deflection with live and dead loads limited to the lesser of L/720 of the span or 1/4 inch (6 mm). Provide structural support for lateral loads, and both wind load and eccentric load when the panels are stacked open. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install Folding Glass Storefront system in accordance with the Drawings, approved submittals, manufacturer’s recommendations and installation instructions, and as follows: 1. Properly flash, waterproof and seal around opening perimeter. 2. Securely attach anchorage devices to rigidly fit frame in place, level, straight, plumb and square. Install frame in proper elevation, plane and location, and in proper alignment with other work 3. When lower track is designed to drain, provide connections to allow for drainage. 4. Install panels, handles, lockset, screens and other accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections per Section 01 40 00 of the following: 1. Verify the Folding Glass Storefront system operates and functions properly. Adjust hardware for proper operation. B. Non-Conforming Work: Repair or replace non-conforming work as directed by the Architect; see General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01, General Requirements. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Keep units closed and protect Folding Glass Storefront installation against damage from construction activities. B. Remove protective coatings and use manufacturer recommended methods to clean exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION H&C OVERHEAD SECTIONAL GARAGE DOORS 08 36 00 - 1 SECTION 08 36 00 – OVERHEAD SECTIONAL GARAGE DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and Install: Aluminum sectional overhead garage doors- motor operated. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Concrete Unit Masonry B. Support Framing C. Electrical 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A 653/A653M – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanization) by the Hot-Dip Process. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 3 00 B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings 1. Provide drawings indicating track details, head and jamb conditions, spring shafts, anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures, operator mounts and other related information. 2. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals: Provide shop drawings in compliance with local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). D. Certifications: 1. Submit manufacturer’s certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. Submit installer qualifications. E. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer’s full range of available colors and patterns. H&C OVERHEAD SECTIONAL GARAGE DOORS 08 36 00 - 2 F. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two color samples, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity. And trained and authorized by the door dealer to perform the work of this section. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorization having jurisdiction. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Raynor Garage Doors B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Submit comparable products and manufacturing per provisions for prior approval. 2.2 Sectional Doors A. AlumaView AV175: 1. Material: 1-3/4 inches (44mm) thickl, 6063-T6 aluminum alloy stiles and rails joined together with a 5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter screws. Aluminum panels 0.50 inch (1.3 mm) thick or glazing (when specified) fill the spaces between stiles and rails. Combined dimension of two adjoining intermediate meeting rails 3-1/4 inches (83 mm). Bottom rail and top rail height 3-3/8 inches (86 mm) or 5-3/16 inches (132 mm) as determined by overall door width. End stiles 3-3/8 inches (86 mm) or 6-1/2 inches (165 mm) wide as determined by overall door width. Center stiles 1-7/16 (36 mm), 2 inches (51 mm), or 3- 5/8 (92 mm) wide. 2. Finish: Aluminum frame extrusions and filler panels finish coated. a. Color: Clear anodized finish. H&C OVERHEAD SECTIONAL GARAGE DOORS 08 36 00 - 3 b. Seals: Bottom of door to have flexible U-shaped vinyl seal retained in aluminum rail. 1) Bulb-type joint seal between sections. 2) Blade seal on top section to prevent airflow above header. 3. Windows: Provide door sections with windows in lieu of 0.050 inch (1.3mm) aluminum filler panels. Locations to comply with door elevation drawings. a. Glazing: Windows to be provided as follows: 1) ½ inch (12.69 mm) Insulated Clear Glass consisting of two panes of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) DSB insulated glass. 4. Mounting: Sections mounted in door opening using: a. Between-Jamb bracket Mounting: sections mounted between door jambs, seal against exterior perimeter seal installed along vertical and top horizontal edges of jambs. 5. Track: a. Material: Hot-dipped galvanized steel (ASTM A 653), fully adjustable for adequate sealing of door to jamb or weatherseal. b. Configuration Type: c. Track Size: 1) Size: 2 inches (51 mm) d. Mounting: 1) Floor-To-Header Angle Mount consisting of continuous angle extending from the floor up to the door header for use with steel, wood, or masonry jambs. Continuous angle size not less than 2-5/16 inches by 4 inches by 3/32 inch (59 by 102 by 2.5 mm) on 2-inch track and 3-1/2 inches by 5 inches by 1/8 inches (89 by 127 by 3.2 mm) on 3-inch track. e. Finish 1) White Powdercoat. 6. Counterbalance: a. Counterbalance System: Provided with aircraft-type, galvanized steel lifting cables with minimum safety factor of 5. Torsion Springs consisting of heavy-duty oil- tempered wire torsion springs on a continuous ball-bearing cross-header shaft. 1) Spring-Cycle Requirements: Standard 10,000 cycles. H&C OVERHEAD SECTIONAL GARAGE DOORS 08 36 00 - 4 7. Hardware: a. Hinges and Brackets:Fabricated from galvanized steel. b. Track Rollers: 2 inches (50.8 mm) diameter consistent with track size, with hardened steel ball bearings. c. Perimeter Seal: Provide complete weather stripping system to reduce air infiltration. Weather stripping shall be replaceable. 1) For bracket mounted doors provide climate seal or vinyl seal with aluminum retainer. 2) For angle mounted doors provide angle clip-on seal. d. Furnish door system with locks. Interior lock with dead bolt provided with hole to receive padlock provided by Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be by factory trained and authorized installers. B. Fit, align and adjust complete door assemblies level and plumb and tightly sealed. Test for smooth operation, including safety edge. END OF SECTION 08 36 00 H&C BI-FOLD ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATED DOORS 08 37 00 1 of 8 SECTION 08 37 00 BI-FOLD ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATED DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. A complete system of special folding doors including all supporting tracks, operators and custom controls specially designed and engineered by the manufacturer. 1. Doors are bi-parting and bi-folding referred to by some manufacturers as a "four-fold" doors. 2. Door manufacturer shall supply controls. a. Work includes the manufacturer/Installer of these doors providing a universal remote (radio-frequency) controller to operate not only the bi-fold doors specified in this section, but upward acting sectional overhead doors and electrically operated fence gates; both of which are specified in other sections. 3. Door Manufacturer shall provide electrical-magnetic detection detection loop cast in the concrete driveway slabs as part of the door control system in lieu of a photo electrical control sensor. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02825 - Ornamental Steel Fences : Gates controlled by same remote control as doors specified in this Section. B. Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Site Concrete Pavement for cat-in-place detection loop. C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications; supporting elements. D. Section 08360 - Overhead Doors: Doors controlled by remote control units specified in this Section 08370. E. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass materials factory glazed into the doors specified in this Section 08370. F. Division 16 - Electrical: Conduit, and power to the Components. 1. Electrical contractor shall install controls and furnish and install conduits and wiring for jobsite power and control wiring. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrically driven, electronically controlled hinged, side-folding assembly designed for dependable use in fire apparatus bays. B. Door operator and motor control shall be mounted above door opening. 1. Operator shall consist of a motor, gear reducing and clutching devices, and mechanisms, that allow for safe interruption of the opening or closing of the doors. 2. Door operator shall have the sufficient horsepower to operate in the specified performance and wind resistance criteria. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Operation: Electrically operated with manual emergency operation. B. Operating Speed: Doors shall have proven smooth, and quick opening, and closing. 1. Speed of Operation: One (1) foot-per-second C. Resist adverse conditions including, but not limited to resistance to seismic forces, lateral (wind) forces, and high usage. D. System has no floor guides, tracks or rails. H&C BI-FOLD ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATED DOORS 08 37 00 2 of 8 E. Energy Efficient: Insulated panels and fully gasketed for weather resistance. 1. Doors hall have an insulation R-value of 6. F. Doors shall be of the style and design as indicated on the Drawings. G. Provide for emergency, manual operation in the event of electrical power, or electrical operator/controller failure. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide UL labels on applicable devices. B. System including doors, supporting components and operating mechanism shall be "fast” operating, "driver friendly" and dependable for use in Fire Stations to assure rapid and trouble- free deployment of emergency apparatus in all operating conditions. 1. Doors, supporting components and hardware shall be repairable such as when damaged by contact with vehicles. 2. Doors shall be operate in, and sustain, specified wind load. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product literature supporting compliance of the product with specified requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate door design, all supports, all operating mechanisms, track, attachment devices, motors, and controls.. D. Design Data: Indicate electrical motor and controls characteristics and requirements. E. Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation requirements. G. Erection Drawings: Indicate dimensions of components and system in relation to surrounding building materials and elements. H. Maintenance Data: Provide digital and printed information on necessary maintenance to assure specified dependable operation. I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City of Phoenix's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel frames shall be designed in accordance with the AISC "Steel Construction Manual". B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than five (5) recent consecutive years of documented experience in acceptable installations and operation of the specified product. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five (5) years of experience. D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver all components of the system to project site in protective factory-applied wrappings with al components clearly labeled. H&C BI-FOLD ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATED DOORS 08 37 00 3 of 8 B. Store all components of the system in a secure location, under cover and elevated above grade. C. Protect all components from damage prior to, during, and following installation. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Inspect upon delivery and promptly replace any defective or damaged components to assure timely installation. B. Store all components in a manner that assures they remain secure, free from damage or loss of pieces/components. C. Sequence installation to ensure supporting and interfacing building elements are in place, ready for an orderly and expeditious installation. 1.11 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Warranty period shall be for thirty (30) years following date of Substantial Completion. 1. Warranty shall cover replacement of defective components/parts and the labor to both remove defective components/parts, and install replacements. 1.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Provide service parts always stored with a manufacturer's authorized service representative in Phoenix at no additional cost to the City of Phoenix. B. Provide an authorized service representative available to the Phoenix Fire Department Field Services Unit for dispatch to, and arrival at, a non-working door location within 4 hours of notice. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Doors: Provide doors manufactured by either one of the following: 1. Door Engineering and Manufacturing Co.; Kasota, MN www.doorengineering.com 2. Electric Power Door (EPD) division of Broncho Company; Hibbing, MN www.electricpowerdoor.com or www.epd4doors.com B. Inductive Loop Detector. 1. Detector Systems Inc. - Model: 613 2. Delta Scientific. C. Radio-Frequency Remote Controllers 1. Multi-code - Model: 3028 2. Advance Industries - Model: 1020-HD D. Radio-Frequency Transmitter: 1. Multi-Elmac: Four Channel Transmitter 2. Advance Industrial - Model: Magikey Touch and GO Two Channel Transmitter. E. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. B. Steel Tubing, Electric Welded: ASTM A513. C. Steel Tubing, Structural Welded: ASTM A500 Grade B D. Black Pipe and Steel: ASTM 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot- Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2000 H&C BI-FOLD ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATED DOORS 08 37 00 4 of 8 E. Misc. Steel: ASTM A 108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished. Standard Quality; 1999. F. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. G. Vision Glass: Factory glazed with materials specified in Section 08800 - Glazing. 2.03 DOOR COMPONENTS A. System Mounting: Interior B. Doors: Flush 14 gauge steel sheet both inside and exterior over structural steel internal frame with smooth welded seamed steel edging of the same gage as the facing panel. 1. Panels shall be constructed of structural steel tubing welded together to form a structural inner frame with both horizontal and vertical members. a. Pan style panels with laminated, or similar to laminated, construction are not acceptable. 2. Vision Glass: Low-E, energy efficient type having a solar coefficient of 16% maximum reflectance and 19% energy. 3. Glass Frame: Integral with the door facing and vandal resistant interior glazing stops. C. Operation: Electro-Mechanical 1. Each bi-fold door shall be operated by an overhead mounted electro-mechanical drive unit. a. Operator consists of an electric motor, gear reducer, and rotating drive arm. 2. The door shall be operated with connecting rods attached to the rotating drive arm on the operator and to control arms attached to the jamb door section and to the door lintel. a. The connecting rods shall be positive drive, keeping the door under firm control at all times. b. The connecting rods shall be fitted with spherical bearings and control arms shall be equipped with oil impregnated bronze bearings on polished shafts. 3. Operator shall be instantly reversible, open and close rapidly and start and stop gradually. Operator shall be adjustable to allow door to clear the opening. a. Operator shall automatically lock the door in the closed position. b. Operator shall be equipped with disengaging mechanism to convert to free wheeling mode for manual operation. 4. Electric motor shall be of sufficient size to operate doors under normal operating conditions at no more than 75 percent of rated capacity. a. The motor shall be wound for three phase 230/460 VAC., 60 Hertz operation. D. Construction: Exposed welds and welds which interfere with the installation of various parts shall be ground smooth and flush. 1. Welds shall be either continuous or as otherwise specified below. a. If construction does not have continuous welds, provide welds at intervals sufficient to provide strength to meet specified performance and wind resistance criteria, and prevent panel deformation of any kind or amount. b. Fill any voids between "spot" welds with durable sealant. E. Insulation: Fiberglass (or polyisocyanurate) as standard with the manufacturer. F. Actuators: Damage-resistant, jamb mounted G. Wind Resistance: Doors and the operating system shall be designed to withstand external or internal horizontal wind loads of 20 pounds per square foot. 1. The maximum allowable deflection shall not exceed 1/120 of the span. 2. Fiber stresses in main members shall be limited to 27,000 pounds per square inch. 2.04 OPERATING HARDWARE A. Hardware shall include guide tracks and brackets, trolleys, center guides, not less than three pairs of jamb and fold hinges per opening, and all bolts, nuts, fasteners, etc. necessary for H&C BI-FOLD ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATED DOORS 08 37 00 5 of 8 complete installation and operation. B. Jamb hinges: strap-type hot formed fabricated of a minimum 1/2" x 3" bar, to fit a 1" solid steel pintle. 1. Jamb hinges shall be assembled with two Timken thrust bearings. 2. Hinges shall be bolted through panel construction and involve a steel tube sub-frame member in the attachment. 3. Hinge may, at manufacturer's option, use a continuous steel pintle the full height of the opening: jamb hinge 7/8-inch diameter and fold hinge 5/8-inch diameter. 4. All hinges shall be formed of one piece with no welds. 5. Grease zerk fittings shall be provided on hinges for greasing hinge pintles. C. All trolleys: equip with nylon, bronze or ball bearing rollers. 1. Number and type of bearing shall be determined by the manufacturer and provide the specified performance and wind resistance criteria. 2. Size of trolley and material of roller shall provide the specified performance and wind resistance criteria. D. Door guides shall be supported by strap or other adiquate steel bracketing, and mounted within 6-inches of headroom. 2.05 WEATHERSTRIPPING A. Material shall be adjustable and readily replaceable and provide a substantially weather tight installation. B. Weather stripping at center and bottom shall be 1/16" cloth insert neoprene. 1. Weather stripping shall be retained continuously. a. Option: Provide Perimeter Weather stripping jamb and head weather stripping of 1/16" cloth-inserted neoprene bulb or closed cell neoprene. C. Monorail Cutout: Provide monorail cutout, if required by the door manufacturer, as required by the door manufacturer. 2.06 DOOR ACCESSORIES A. Door Controllers: Wall-mounted controls for each four-door unit clearly marked for the four-door unit that is controled . 1. Controls shall be furnished by the door manufacturer and shall be complete for each door, and built in accordance with the latest NEMA standards. a. Control circuits shall not exceed a nominal 110 volts. 2. Provide four-button programmable secure radio frequency remote control operators that are compatible with the other overhead-acting doors in the Apparatus Bay. 3. Pushbuttons for each door shall have one momentary pressure three-button push-button station marked "OPEN", "CLOSE" and "STOP". a. Push button enclosure shall be in (choose applicable option - NEMA 1 standard; NEMA 4, weatherproof; NEMA 7, gas explosion proof, NEMA 9, dust explosion proof; NEMA 12 JIC) enclosure. 4. Motor starters shall be magnetic reversing, factory wired with overload and under voltage protection, and equipped with mechanical interlocks; and, with the transformer for the control circuits, shall be enclosed in one enclosure with a wiring diagram placed on the inside of the cover. a. Enclosures shall be (choose applicable option - NEMA 1 standard; NEMA 4, weatherproof; NEMA 7, gas explosion proof; NEMA 9, dust explosion proof; NEMA 12, JIC standard) with disconnect switch. 5. Limit switches shall be provided to stop the travel of the door in its fully open or fully closed position. 6. Provide pneumatic safety edges on leading edge of all doors to reverse door upon contact with obstruction. H&C BI-FOLD ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATED DOORS 08 37 00 6 of 8 2.07 DOOR FABRICATION A. Fabricate using high quality craftsmanship according to the manufacturer's standards to assure the specified requirements. 2.08 DOOR SHOP FINISHING A. Provide premium-grade prime coating. 1. Door Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied red oxide primer. 2.09 DOOR SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Installation Tolerances: 1. Variation of bi-fold door unit from plumb: 1/8-inch in 20-feet. 2. Variation of bi-fold door unit from level: 1/8-inch in 20-feet. 3. Variation of the door-to-door spacing, top-to-bottom of the bi-fold door unit: within 1/8-inch. 4. Fit tight to adjacent materials of the opening by use of adjusting weather-barrier material; space not permitted. B. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Dimensional variation from square: Must be square in all directions. 2. From dimension: Not more than 1/8-inch in 20-feet. 3. Top-to-bottom of the meeting pairs: Not more than 1/8-inch in 20-feet. 2.10 RADIO-FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROLLERS A. Digital system consisting of code-compatible universal coaxial receiver, remote antenna with coaxial cable and mounting brackets with four (4) portable transmitters per receiver designed to operate the following components. 1. Bi-Fold Bay Doors. 2. Upward Acting Sectional Overhead Doors 3. Gates in Ornamental Steel Fences. B. Provide easily programmable transmitter with multiple-code capability permitting validating or voiding of not less than 1000 codes per channel configured for the following functions. 1. Controllers: Four-Button operated with open, close and stop functions and fourth for future features. 2. Transmitters: Provide device with four independent channel settings controlling separate receivers for operating more than one gate, a Four-Fold door and an Upward Acting Sectional Overhead door from each transmitter. 2.11 VEHICLE LOOP DETECTION SYSTEM: A. System shall include automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay before closing and loop detector designed to open and close any or all of the following components. 1. Bi-Fold Bay Doors. 2. Upward Acting Sectional Overhead Doors 3. Gates in Ornamental Steel Fences. B. Provide electronic detector with adjustable detection patterns, adjustable sensitivity patterns, and frequency settings with panel indicator light designed to detect presence of transit of a vehicle over an embedded loop of wire and to emit a signal activating the device ( bi-fold door, sectional overhead door or gate) operator. C. Provide number of loops consisting of multiple strands of wire, number of turns, loop size, and method of placement as recommended by the detection system manufacturer for function required for a Fire Station, and at the location shown on the Drawings. 1. Loop: Factory preformed in size indicated on the drawings; set in polyvinylchloride (PVC) sleeve installed in concrete paving. PART 3 EXECUTION H&C BI-FOLD ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATED DOORS 08 37 00 7 of 8 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that 1/8-inch in 20-feet. B. Verify that all supporting elements and substrate are in good condition and suitable for proper support of the door units to meet specified requirements. C. Any and all conditions that are not suitable shall be promptly brought to the attention of the Architect and the Construction Manager and the Construction Manager shall promptly correct any unsuitable, or unsatisfactory conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Locate all anchor points that must be blocked or otherwise secured into the building walls and structural systems. B. Layout all components, study manufacturer's printed instructions and shop drawings to determine and resolve any installation issues that might prevent successful installation. 1. Starting work indicates the Contractor's acceptance of conditions and responsibility for the quality as the result. C. Prior to placing concrete slabs, verify layout of the loop detection to be cast in the concrete with sufficient planning and preparation that the concrete work is not delayed. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with latest printed instructions and shop drawings provided by the manufacturer. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK A. Deliver to the jobsite in a timely manner all components, parts, or materials that require embedment, casting-into, or otherwise requiring work into the supporting substrate. 3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/8-inch in 20-feet. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/8-inch in 20-fee. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in presence of the Architect, Construction Manager, and City Representatives. B. Inspect for dimensional tolerances. C. Test for operation smoothness speed and alignment of components to specified tolerances. D. Test for reliability by testing complete opening and closing cycle in a continuous operating period of one-hour without failure to operate as specified. 3.07 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door system for smooth operation. 3.08 CLEANING and PROTECTION A. Clean all surfaces including but not limited to the steel panels, gaskets, actuators, vision glass and other components prior to owner's occupancy. B. Protect installed door system and operating controls from damage resulting from any cause including, but not limited to, subsequent construction operations. 3.09 CLEAN UP A. Remove construction waste, rubbish from packing or protection materials, and other trash H&C BI-FOLD ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATED DOORS 08 37 00 8 of 8 related to this Work, and dispose of according to the waste plan specified in Section 01732. 3.10 SCHEDULES A. See Drawings for Schedule and sizes. END OF SECTION H&C ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 1 SECTION 08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Kawneer Architectural Aluminum Storefront Systems, including perimeter trims, stools, accessories, shims and anchors, and perimeter sealing of storefront units. Types of Kawneer Aluminum Storefront Systems include: 1. Trifab® VG 451T Storefront System – 2" x 4-1/2" (50.8 x 114.3) nominal dimension; Thermal; Front, Center, Back, Multi-Plane, Structural Silicone or Weatherseal Glazed (Type B); Screw Spline, Shear Block, Stick or Punched Opening Fabrication.If needed, insert list of conference participants not mentioned in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM B221- Aluminum alloy extruded bars, rods, wier, shapes, and tubes. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for aluminum windows. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified. D. Mock-up: Provide sample as part of mock-up construction per section 04 22 00. Coordinate with General Contractor and install all necessary finish accessories for exterior purposes. E. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer. H&C ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 2 B. Product Test Reports: For each type of aluminum window, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing structural calculations, applicable independent product test reports, installation instructions, a review of the application method, customer approval and periodic field service representation during construction. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced (as determined by contractor) to perform work of this section who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project and who is acceptable to product manufacturer.Coordinate "Mockups" Paragraph below with air barrier Sections for building and preconstruction testing of integrated wall mockups that include windows; insert additional requirements if applicable. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, condensation, and air infiltration. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by Kawneer. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays. B. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle storefront material and components to avoid damage. Protect storefront material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after storefront installation. H&C ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Trifab® VG 451T (thermal) Storefront System or approved equal. 1. Framing Member Profile: 2" x 4-1/2" (50.8 x 114.3) nominal dimension 2. Front, Center, Back, Multi-Plane, Structural Silicone or Weatherseal Glazed (Type B) 3. Screw Spline, Shear Block, Stick or Punched Opening Fabrication 4. Finish/Color: Clear anodized aluminum B. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows from single source from single manufacturer. C. U-Factor Minimum: 0.29. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures per structural. The design pressures are based on the IBC; 2006 Edition. B. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 l/s • m2) at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf (300 Pa). C. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a minimum static air pressure differential of 8 psf (383 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501. D. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 20 psf (958 Pa) shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Aluminum (Framing and Components): 1. Material Standard: ASTM B 221; 6063-T6 alloy and temper 2. Member Wall Thickness: Each framing member shall provide structural strength to meet specified performance requirements. 3. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of storefront members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and Data. H&C ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 4 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Where exposed, shall be Stainless Steel. B. Gaskets: Glazing gaskets shall be extruded EPDM rubber. C. Perimeter Anchors: Aluminum. When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action. D. Thermal Barrier (Trifab® VG 451T): 1. Kawneer IsoLock® Thermal Break with a 1/4" (6.4) separation consisting of a two-part chemically curing, high-density polyurethane, which is mechanically and adhesively joined to aluminum storefront sections. Thermal Break shall be designed in accordance with AAMA TIR-A8 and tested in accordance with AAMA 505. E. Trifab® SunShade: An aluminum sunshade (consisting of outriggers, louvers, and fascia which may be selected from standard configurations), that is anchored directly to the vertical mullions. Outriggers shall be painted (Select from Kawneer's standard paints and colors. Custom colors are available upon request). Louvers and fascia shall be painted or anodized (Select from Kawneer's standard paints and colors, custom colors are available upon request, or Kawneer's anodized finishes). 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Sealants: Refer to Joint Treatment (Sealants) Section. B. Glass: Refer to Glass and Glazing Section. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components per manufacturer's installation instructions and with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Factory Finishing: Kawneer Permanodic® AA-M12C22A31, AAMA 611, Architectural Class II Clear Anodic Coating (Color #17 Clear) (Standard). H&C ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 5 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Source Quality: Provide aluminum storefront specified herein from a single source. B. Building Enclosure System: When aluminum storefront is part of a building enclosure system, including entrances, entrance hardware, windows, curtain wall system and related products, provide building enclosure system products from a single source manufacturer. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate aluminum storefront in accordance with framing manufacturer's prescribed tolerances. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements, fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install framing system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AAMA storefront and entrance guide specifications manual. B. Dissimilar Materials: Provide separation of aluminum materials from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action contact points. C. Weathertight Construction: Install sill members and other members in a bed of sealant or with joint filler or gaskets, to provide weathertight construction. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of construction. D. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. E. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. F. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp and twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances aligning with adjacent work. H&C ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 6 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: Architect shall select storefront units to be tested as soon as a representative portion of the project has been installed, glazed, perimeter caulked and cured. Conduct tests for air infiltration and water penetration with manufacturer's representative present. Tests not meeting specified performance requirements and units having deficiencies shall be corrected as part of the contract amount. B. Testing: Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Refer to Testing Section for payment of testing and testing requirements. Testing Standard per AAMA 503, including reference to ASTM E 783 for Air Infiltration Test and ASTM E 1105 Water Infiltration Test. 1. Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 783. Allowable air infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated in the performance requirements or 0.09 cfm/ft2, whichever is greater. 2. Water Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 1105. No uncontrolled water leakage is permitted when tested at a static test pressure of two-thirds the specified water penetration pressure but not less than 6.24 psf (300 Pa). C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner’s written request, provide periodic site visit by manufacturer’s field service representative. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08 51 13 FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Other doors to the extent indicated. B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware. 3. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”. 2. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 3. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”. 4. Division 08 Section “Access Control Hardware”. D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 5. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards: 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams. c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein. 2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings. D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores. E. Informational Submittals: 1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency. F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. E. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards. F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. G. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures H. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems. C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Five years for standard duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches. 3. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies. 4. Two years for electromechanical door hardware. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under. B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: C. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants. 2.2 HANGING DEVICES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on Drawings: a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products (MK). 2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES A. Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products (MK) - QC (# wires) Option. B. Concealed Quick Connect Electric Power Transfers: Provide concealed wiring pathway housing mortised into the door and frame for low voltage electrified door hardware. Furnish with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Securitron (SU) - EL-EPT Series. C. Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric/data transfer wiring harnesses with standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly to through- door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number and type of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from hinge to junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction, minimum of two per electrified opening. 1. Provide one each of the following tools as part of the base bid contract: a. McKinney Products (MK) - Electrical Connecting Kit: QC-R001. b. McKinney Products (MK) - Connector Hand Tool: QC-R003. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products (MK) – QC-C Series. FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 D. Provide mortar guard enclosure on steel frames installed at masonry openings for each electrical hinge specified. 2.4 DOOR OPERATING TRIM A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified. 1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device location approximately six feet from the floor. 2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. 3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. 4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). B. Coordinators: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 certified door coordinators consisting of active-leaf, hold- open lever and inactive-leaf release trigger. Model as indicated in hardware sets. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). C. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. 1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated. 3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated. 4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). 2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9 B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated. C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard. D. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. 1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. 3. Existing System: Key locks to Owner's existing system. E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10). F. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders. G. Key Registration List (Bitting List): 1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. 2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner. 2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 8200 Series. b. No Substitution. B. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 2 (Standard Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 2 certified. FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 1. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 5300LN Series. b. No Substitution. 2.7 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKING DEVICES A. Electromechanical Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical mortise locksets, electrified locksets to be of type and design as specified below. 1. Electrified Lock Options: Where indicated in the Hardware Sets, provide electrified options including: outside door lock/unlock trim control, latchbolt and lock/unlock status monitoring, deadbolt monitoring, and request-to-exit signaling. Support end-of-line resistors contained within the lock case. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified locksets standard as fail secure. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) – 8800FL Series. b. No Substitution. 2.8 STAND ALONE ACCESS CONTROL LOCKING DEVICES A. Stand Alone Electronic Keypad Locksets: Internal, battery-powered, self-contained ANSI Grade 1 mortise or cylindrical lock consisting of electronically motor driven locking mechanism and integrated keypad without requirements for separate electronic programming devices. Locks to accept standard, interchangeable (removable) core, security and high security override cylinders. Provide keypad locks with a minimum 100 user codes furnished standard with 6 "AA" batteries and non-volatile memory. 1. Energy Efficient Design: Provide lock bodies which have a holding current draw of 15mA maximum, and can operate on either 12 or 24 volts. Locks are to be field configurable for fail safe or fail secure operation. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - KP Series. b. No Substitution. 2.9 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. 2.10 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets. 2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements. 3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets. 4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration. 5. Electromechanical Options: Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and design as specified in hardware sets. Include any specific controllers when conventional power supplies are not sufficient to provide the proper inrush current. 6. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts. a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets. FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12 7. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor. 8. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles. 9. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 10. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application. 11. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets. B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Mounting rails and push rail assembly to be formed from high grade, non- ferrous, architectural steel materials. Provide heavy duty, one-piece chassis covers matching the material and finish of the mounting and push rails, and steel latchbolts incorporating a deadlocking feature. Exit devices and trims to be available in standard architectural finishes. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 2100 Series. b. No Substitution. C. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Fabricate latchbolts from cast stainless steel, Pullman type, incorporating a deadlocking feature. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 6000 Series. b. No Substitution. 2.11 DOOR CLOSERS A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover. 2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors. 3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL. FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13 4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1. 5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets. 6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. 7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets. B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 certified surface mounted, institutional grade door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide non-handed units standard. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 1431 Series. b. No Substitution. 2.12 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications. 4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following: a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick. FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 14 5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). 2.13 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rixson Door Controls (RF). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA). 2.14 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings. FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 15 C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C. 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 2.15 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 2.16 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 16 B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series. B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 17 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations: 1. MK - McKinney 2. PE - Pemko 3. AD - Adams Rite FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 18 4. RO - Rockwood 5. SA - Sargent 6. YA - Yale 7. RF - Rixson 8. SU - Securitron Hardware Schedule Set: 1.0 Doors: 117A 5 Hinge TA2314 x NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Electric Hinge TA2314-QC12 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 2 Flush Bolt 2842 US32D RO 2 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Fail Secure Lock x REX PBR 8891FL REX 2196 CMK 626 YA 1 Coordinator 2600 Black RO 2 Mounting Bracket 2601AB/C Black RO 2 Concealed Overhead Stop 1-X36 630 RF 2 Door Closer 1431 P10 EN SA 1 Threshold 272A MSES25 PE 1 Rain Guard 346C PE 1 Gasketing S88BL (Head & Jamb) PE 2 Sweep 315CN PE 1 Astragal 357SP PE 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500 MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C___ LENGTH AS REQUIRED MK 2 Position Switch DPS-M-CAS SU 1 Card Reader SUPPLIED BY DIVISION 28 OT 1 Power Supply SUPPLIED BY DIVISION 28 OT Set: 2.0 Doors: 100A, 110A, 127A 2 Hinge TA2314 x NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Electric Hinge TA2314-QC12 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Fail Secure Lock x REX PBR 8891FL REX 2196 CMK 626 YA 1 Concealed Overhead Stop 1-X36 630 RF 1 Door Closer 1431 P10 EN SA 1 Threshold 272A MSES25 PE 1 Rain Guard 346C PE 1 Gasketing S88BL (Head & Jamb) PE 1 Sweep 315CN PE 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500 MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C___ LENGTH AS REQUIRED MK 1 Position Switch DPS-M-CAS SU FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 19 1 Card Reader SUPPLIED BY DIVISION 28 OT 1 Power Supply SUPPLIED BY DIVISION 28 OT Set: 3.0 Doors: 107A 3 Hinge TA2314 x NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Storeroom Lock PB 5305LN 1210 CMK 626 YA 1 Surface Overhead Stop 9-X36 630 RF 1 Threshold 272A MSES25 PE 1 Rain Guard 346C PE 1 Gasketing S88BL (Head & Jamb) PE 1 Sweep 315CN PE Set: 4.0 Doors: 136A 3 Hinge TA2314 x NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Exit Device 2100 121NL 1193 x 6-Pin CMK 630 YA 1 Flush Pull BF97L US32D RO 1 Door Closer 1431 P10 EN SA 1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO 1 Threshold 272A MSES25 PE 1 Rain Guard 346C PE 1 Gasketing S88BL (Head & Jamb) PE 1 Sweep 315CN PE Set: 4.1 Doors: 134A 3 Hinge TA2314 x NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Rim Exit Device (FSE-REX) 6100 B P 121NL 1193 x 6-Pin CMK 630 YA 1 Flush Pull BF97L US32D RO 1 Door Closer 1431 P10 EN SA 1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO 1 Threshold 272A MSES25 PE 1 Rain Guard 346C PE 1 Gasketing S88BL (Head & Jamb) PE 1 Sweep 315CN PE 1 Electric Power Transfer EL-EPT SU 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500 MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C006 MK 1 Position Switch DPS-M-CAS SU 1 Card Reader SUPPLIED BY DIVISION 28 OT 1 Power Supply SUPPLIED BY DIVISION 28 OT 1 Controller 782 YA Set: 5.0 Doors: 113B FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 20 3 Hinge TA2314 x NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Classroom Lock PBR 8808FL 2196 CMK 626 YA 1 Door Closer 1431 P10 EN SA 1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO 1 Threshold 272A MSES25 PE 1 Rain Guard 346C PE 1 Gasketing S88BL (Head & Jamb) PE 1 Sweep 315CN PE Set: 6.0 Doors: 137B 6 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 2 Surface Bolt 580-8 US32D RO 1 Storeroom Lock PB 5305LN 1210 CMK 626 YA 2 Door Stop 445 US26D RO 1 Astragal 357SP PE 2 Silencer 608 RO Set: 7.0 Doors: 138A 6 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Flush Bolt 2842 US32D RO 1 Classroom Lock PB 5308LN 1210 CMK 626 YA 1 Coordinator 2600 Black RO 2 Door Closer 1431 O EN SA 2 Door Stop 445 US26D RO 1 Astragal 357SP PE 2 Silencer 608 RO Set: 8.0 Doors: 101A, 105A, 128A, 129A, 131A 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Privacy Latch PB 5302LN 626 YA 1 Door Closer 1431 O EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Mop Plate K1050 4" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 9.0 Doors: 101B 2 Hinge TA2714 x NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Electric Hinge TA2714-QC12 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 21 1 Fail Secure Lock x REX PBR 8891FL REX 2196 CMK 626 YA 1 Door Closer 1431 P10 EN SA 1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500 MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C___ LENGTH AS REQUIRED MK 1 Position Switch DPS-M-CAS SU 1 Card Reader SUPPLIED BY DIVISION 28 OT 1 Power Supply SUPPLIED BY DIVISION 28 OT Set: 10.0 Doors: 104A, 114A, 115A, 116A 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Office Lock PB 5307LN 1210 CMK 626 YA 1 Door Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 10.1 Doors: 102A 2 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Electric Hinge TA2714-QC12 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Fail Secure Lock x REX PBR 8891FL REX 2196 CMK 626 YA 1 Door Closer 1431 O EN SA 1 Door Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500 MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C___ LENGTH AS REQUIRED MK 1 Position Switch DPS-M-CAS SU 1 Card Reader SUPPLIED BY DIVISION 28 OT 1 Power Supply SUPPLIED BY DIVISION 28 OT Set: 11.0 Doors: 110B, 111A, 112A, 112B, 113A 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Passage Latch PB 5301LN 626 YA 1 Door Closer 1431 O EN SA 1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 12.0 Doors: 103A, 127B 3 Hinge TA2714 x NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Classroom Lock PB 5308LN 1210 CMK 626 YA 1 Door Closer 1431 P10 EN SA 1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 22 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 13.0 Doors: 108A, 109A 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Storeroom Lock PB 5305LN 1210 CMK 626 YA 1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO 1 Threshold 272A MSES25 PE 1 Gasketing S88BL (Head & Jamb) PE 1 Sweep 315CN PE Set: 14.0 Doors: 111B 3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Passage Latch PB 5301LN 626 YA 1 Door Closer 1431 O EN SA 1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 15.0 Doors: 117B 3 Hinge TA2714 x NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Exit Device 2100 PB626F 1193 x 6-Pin CMK 630 YA 1 Door Closer 1431 P10 EN SA 1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 16.0 Doors: 118A, 119A, 120A, 121A, 122A, 123A 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Privacy Latch PB 5302LN 626 YA 1 Door Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 17.0 Doors: 124A, 125A, 126A 3 Hinge TA2714 x NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Deadbolt D112 1210 CMK 626 YA 1 Pull 853 Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Surface Overhead Stop 9-X36 630 RF 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 18.0 Doors: 130A FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION 2 16-003 FOUNTAIN HILLS, AZ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 23 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Classroom Lock PB 5308LN 1210 CMK 626 YA 1 Door Closer 1431 O EN SA 1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 19.0 Doors: 132A, 132B 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Classroom Lock PB 5308LN 1210 CMK 626 YA 1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 20.0 Doors: 137A 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Classroom Lock PB 5308LN 1210 CMK 626 YA 1 Door Closer 1431 O EN SA 1 Door Stop 445 US26D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 21.0 Doors: 139A 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Storeroom Lock PB 5305LN 1210 CMK 626 YA 1 Door Closer 1431 O EN SA 1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO END OF SECTION 087100 H&C GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1 SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Glazed curtain walls. 4. Storefront framing. 5. Glazed entrances. 6. Sloped glazing. 7. Skylights. 8. Interior borrowed lites. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 73 00 "Decorative Metal Railings" for glass panels in railings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. H&C GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glass Samples: 1. Two samples 8 x 8 inch in size, illustrating glass units, coloration and design. 2. Four inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Submit Manufacturer's certification that sealed insulated glass meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to IBC Chapter 24, to local requirements and to State law. B. Standards: 1. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 2. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings. 3. GANA'S - Glazing Manual and Laminated Glass Design Guide. C. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual, and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for Glazing Installation Methods. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. H&C GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide 5 year Manufacturer's warranty for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. Possibly insert glazier's warranty covering labor to replace insulating-glass units or, as an alternative, a maintenance contract that incorporates unit prices for replacement labor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Basis of Design: IG Vision Unit float glass as manufactured by Oldcastle Glass or approved equal with the following characteristics: 1. ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Exterior Lite: ¼” Clear w/ Low-E on surface #2 3. Interior Lite: ¼” Clear 4. ½” Cavity: Air (Standard) B. Thermal Characteristics 1. Winter U-factor/ U-Value (Btu/hr-ft2-F°): 0.29 2. Summer U-factor/ U-Value (Btu/hr-ft2-F°): 0.27 3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.38 4. Shading Coefficient: 0.44 5. Relative Heat Gain: 92 6. Light to Solar Gain: 1.84 C. Optical Characteristics 1. Visible Light Transmittance: 70% 2. Visible Light Reflectance (outside): 11% 3. Visible Light Reflectance (inside): 12% 4. Total Solar Transmittance: 33% 5. Total Solar Reflectance (outside): 29% 6. Ultraviolet Transmittance: 19% 2.2 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or other resilient blocks of 70 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness tested for compatibility with glazing sealant, minimum length 4 inches.Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. B. Spacers: Neoprene blocks of 40 to 50 Shore A durometer hardness, adhesive backed on one face only and tested for compatibility with specified glazing sealant. H&C GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4 C. Glazing Gaskets D. Interior Glazing Compound: Polymerized Butyl Rubber and Inert Fillers (pigments), solvent based with minimum 75% solids, non-sag consistency, tack-free time of 24 hours or less, paintable non-staining. E. Exterior Glazing Compound: Conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Use G. Compound shall be paintable, or colored to match frame. F. Glazing Tape: Preshimmed 10 percent solids, non-shrinking, butyl rubber tape compatible with sealants. If exposed, tape shall be paintable, or colored to match frame.Retain first paragraph below if applicable for glazing channels. G. Butt Glazing Sealant: GE 1200 Series Silicone, clear.Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated. 2.3 MARKINGS A. Tempered glass shall have each light permanently etched with Manufacturer's name and his compliance with ANSI Z-97.1. 2.4 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Examine framing or glazing channel surfaces, backing, removable stop design, and conditions under which glazing is to be performed. C. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. H&C GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with combined recommendations of Glass Manufacturer, aluminum frame manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. B. Clean the glazing, channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate. C. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip, or abrade glass which is tempered or heat strengthened. D. Comply with "Glazing Manual" by GANA, except as shown and specified otherwise by Manufacturers of glass and glazing materials. E. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and discard those which have observable edge damage or face imperfections. F. Install setting blocks of proper size at quarter points of sill rabbet. G. Provide spacers inside and out, and of proper size and spacing, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches. Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. H. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as possible. Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in the same direction as other pieces. I. Miter cut and bond ends together at corners where gaskets are used for channel glazing, so that gaskets will not pull away from corners and result in voids or leaks in the glazing system. 3.4 EXTERIOR COMBINATION METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent. B. Cut glazing tape to proper length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch below sightline. Weld corners together by butting tape and dabbing with sealant. C. Apply bed of sealant along exterior void ensuring full contact with glass. H&C GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6 D. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points. E. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against tape (and heel bead of sealant) with sufficient pressure to ensure full contact and adhesion at perimeter. F. Install removable stops, spacer strips inserted between glass, and applied stops at 2-foot intervals, 1/4 inch below sightline. Place glazing tape on glass with tape flush with sightline. G. Fill gap between glass and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glass but not more than 3/8 inch below sightline. H. Apply cap bead of sealant along exterior void, to uniform and level line, flush with sightline. Tool or wipe cap bead surface with solvent for smooth appearance. 3.5 INTERIOR COMBINATION METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to proper length and install against permanent stop, projecting 1/16 inch above sightline. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 point. C. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against tape with sufficient pressure to ensure full contact and adhesion at perimeter. D. Install removable stops; spacer strips inserted between glass and applied stops at 2 foot intervals, 1/4 inch below sightline. E. Fill gap between glass and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glass to uniform and level line. F. Neatly trim off excess tape to sightline. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. H&C GLAZING 08 80 00 - 7 D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08 80 00 H&C NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16-1 SECTION 09 22 16 – NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Formed metal stud framing, furring, suspension systems and accessories as shown on Drawings and as specified. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data describing standard framing member materials and finish, product criteria, load charts, limitations, and installation instructions. B. Certificates: Mill Certification shall be provided with shipment to verify chemical composition, yield strength, tensile strength, elongation and coating thickness. Include listing of applicable ASTM standards specified in this section and comparison of ASTM requirements to actual materials provided to jobsite. C. Manufacturer's letter: Manufacturer shall provide letter stating that the material supplied to the specific project meets or exceed the performance standards listed in these specifications. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C 754 requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products as manufactured by a manufacturing member of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA), subject to compliance with Specification requirements. 2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS A. General: Materials shall be new, of uniform quality, suitable and without defects affecting the strength or service of the structure. H&C NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16-2 B. Studs, Runners and Furring Channels: 1. ASTM C 645, electro-galvanized to meet ASTM A 591, manufactured from steel supplied in accordance with ASTM A 653, Structural Quality Grade 33; G60 designation galvanized sheet steel. 2. Thickness: In accordance with stud schedule provided herein. 3. Deflection Track: a. Slottted Top Track (non-fire rated and fire-rated, as applicable): SLP-TRK® as manufactured by Sliptrack Systems (888) 475-7875 www.BradyInnovations.com, as distributed by Cemco *800) 775-2362 (western U.S) and Unimast Inc. (800) 654-7883 (eastern U.S.), gauge as per ICBO ER-5344, Table 2. Provide fire rated assemblies in accordance with manufacturer's literature, where applicable. b. Non-Fire Rated Slotted Top Track - Single Track Slip System for Interior Partitions: As manufactured by Metal Lite, Inc., 3070 E. Miraloma Avenue, Anaheim, CA 92806 (800) 886-6824. Provide for partitions that are not required to be fire rated. c. Fire Rated Shadowline Top Track - Single Track Slip System for Interior Partitions: Applicable configuration as required for fire rating as manufactured by Fire Trak Corporation, 111 Hazel Avenue East, Kimball, MN 55353 (800) 394- 9875. Provide for partitions that are required to be fire rated. 4. Curved Stud and Track Components: Custom curved stud and track components as manufactured by RadiusTrack Corporation, 6612 Lyndale Avenue So., Suite 2, Richfield, MN 55423 (888) 872-3487. C. Studs: C-shaped, non-load bearing rolled steel, punched for utility access, of size shown on Drawings. D. Ceiling Runners: Cold or hot-rolled steel, meet ASTM C 754. E. Hanger and Tie Wire: Meet ASTM C 754. F. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same gauge, material and finish as studs, thickness to suit purpose. G. Clips, Brackets: Galvanized wire or sheet metal designed for attachment of framing, furring and bridging members. 1. Deflection Clips: If acceptable to Building Official, VertiClip™ as manufactured by Signature Industries, LLC, P.O. Box 68005, Raleigh, NC 27613 (919) 844-0789 may be provided for attachment of framing to roof and floor construction at head and slide conditions. Provide sizes as required for stud depth(s). Clips shall be manufactured of steel conforming to ASTM A 653 Prime Certified G60 galvanized material or better, 50 ksi yield strength and 65 ksi ultimate strength. Deflection clips to have positive attachment to structure and stud material while allowing for frictionless movement. 2. Bridging Clips: If acceptable to Building Official, BridgeClip™ as manufactured by Signature Industries, LLC, P. O. Box 68005, Raleigh, NC 27613 (919) 844-0789 may be provided for attachment of bridging to studs. H&C NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16-3 H. Fasteners: GA 203, self-drilling, self-tapping screws. I. Anchorage Devices: Power driven, powder actuated, drilled expansion bolts or screws with sleeves as required for positive anchorage. J. Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 09 29 00. K. Primer: FS TT-P-645, for touch-up of galvanized surfaces. L. Backing: "Notch-Tite" and "Flush Mount" as manufactured by Metal Lite, Inc., 3070 E. Miraloma Avenue, Anaheim, CA 92806 (800) 886-6824. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are ready to receive Work. B. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings. C. Verify that rough-in utilities are in proper location. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.2 METAL STUD ERECTION A. Install stud framing in accordance with ASTM C 754. B. Align and secure top and bottom runners at 24 inches o.c. Place two beads of acoustic sealant between runners and substrate. C. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs at spacing of wall studs. D. Install studs vertically at 16 inches on center; unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Place two beads of acoustic sealant between studs and adjacent vertical surfaces. Install felt strips between wall and stud where studs abut exterior walls. E. Connect studs to tracks using fastener method. F. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs. G. Backing and Blocking: Provide backing and blocking attached to studs. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. Install backing and blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, and hardware. If proprietary system is used, install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. H&C NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16-4 H. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical Work placed in or behind partition framing. I. Splice studs with 8 inch nested lap. Secure each stud flange with flush head screw. J. Construct corners using minimum three studs. K. Brace stud framing system and make rigid. L. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door and window frame supports and attachments. M. Align stud web openings. N. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to ceiling only and for partitions extending through ceiling to structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide nested extended leg ceiling runners, deflection clips or proprietary slip track. Install fire rated proprietary slip track at fire rated partitions in accordance with applicable UL assembly and coordinate installation of additional gypsum board strips to comply with assembly requirements. O. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after stud framing erection. 3.3 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION A. Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete, brick masonry and concrete walls. B. Erect furring channels vertically. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches. C. Space furring channels maximum 16 inches on center, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines, and butting walls. D. Install furring channels directly attached to concrete, brick masonry and concrete walls, as applicable in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. E. Erect free-standing metal stud framing tight to concrete, concrete and brick masonry walls, attached by adjustable furring brackets in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 ACOUSTICAL AND FIRE RATINGS A. Install framing and furring as required for indicated acoustical and fire ratings. H&C NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16-5 3.5 CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with ASTM C 754. B. Coordinate location of hangers with other Work. C. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns and above-ceiling Work. D. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches beyond each end of openings. E. Laterally brace entire suspension system. F. No hanger support shall be allowed from roof deck. G. At steel beams, joists or other steel construction wrap hangers around, inset through, or clip or bolt to the supports, so as to develop the full strength of the hangers. H. For cast-in-place concrete install hanger wires in the formwork using double looped hangers. Special insets, at least equivalent in strength to the hangers, to which the hangers can later be attached, may be inserted through or attached to the top of the forms in lieu of anchoring the hangers directly in the concrete. I. Grout hangers into cell of hollow core slab units or mechanical fasteners must be used to attach hangers. J. Attach hanger wires at concrete tee units by ram-set method only on the sides of the tee stems, at least 6 inches above the bottom of the stem. Attach with drilled stud type fasteners at other areas of tee units. Where tees receive conventional concrete topping hanger wires may be placed between joints of units provided double looped hangers are used. K. At lights or other openings that interrupt the main runner or furring channels reinforce grillage with 3/4 inch cold-rolled channels, wire tied atop and parallel to the main runner channels. L. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with metal furring. Provide separate supports on each side of joint. M. Fabricate and bend curved furring to required curves and radii in the shop. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: At Owner's request, Contractor shall provide spot testing of actual properties of steel framing to verify compliance with specifications. H&C NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16-6 3.7 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. 3.8 STUD SCHEDULE A. Stud Table: Maximum limits based upon 5 psf deflection limit, 33 ksi yield stress, and composite wall sheathed both sides full height with 1/2 inch thick gypsum wallboard attached with No. 6 screws at 12 inches on center minimum, from the SSMA "Product Technical Information" - "Wall Height Tables for Composite Allowable Wall Heights." Maximum allowable deflection as follows: 1. Walls receiving gypsum wallboard finishes: L/240. 2. Walls receiving plaster and brittle finishes, including stucco, stone masonry, and mirrors: L/360. 3. Walls receiving ceramic and stone tile finishes: L/360. H&C NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16-7 STUD WIDTH DESIGN THICKNESS (Gauge) STUD SPACING PARTITION HEIGHT BRACING SPACING WHERE OCCURS L/240 L/360 1 5/8” 18 mils .0188 in. (25) 16 8’ – 4” --- 4’ – 0” O.C. 24 7’ – 11” --- 4’ – 0” O.C. 33 mils .0346 in. (20) 16 9' – 8" 8’-5” 4’ – 0” O.C. 24 8' – 9" 7’-8” 4’ – 0” O.C. 2-1/2” 18 mils .0188 in. (25) 16 11’ – 3” 9’-10” 6’ – 0” O.C 24 10’ – 7” 9’-3” 6’ – 0” O.C 33 mils .0346 in. (20) 16 12’ – 10” 11’-2” 6’ – 0” O.C 24 11’ – 7” 10’-0” 6’ – 0” O.C 3-1/2” 18 mils .0188 in. (25) 16 14’ – 4” 12’-4” 8’ – 0” O.C 24 13’ – 5” 11’-7” 8’ – 0” O.C 33 mils .0346 in. (20) 16 16’ – 5” 14’-3” 8’ – 0” O.C 24 14’ – 9” 12’-9” 8’ – 0” O.C 4” 18 mils .0188 in. (25) 16 15’ – 4” 13’-4” 8’ – 0” O.C 24 14’ – 2” 12’-4” 8’ – 0” O.C 33 mils .0346 in. (20) 16 18’ – 4” 15’-11” 8’ – 0” O.C 24 16’ – 5” 14’-3” 8’ – 0” O.C 6” 18 mils .0188 in. (25) 16 19’ – 9” 17’-11” 10’ – 0” O.C 24 16’ – 9” 16’-9” 10’ – 0” O.C 33 mils .0346 in. (20) 16 24’ – 6” 21’-4” 10’ – 0” O.C 24 21’ – 7” 18’-10” 10’ – 0” O.C END OF SECTION 09 22 16 H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No. 2 09 24 53-1 One-Coat Stucco System SECTION 09 24 53 ONE-COAT STUCCO SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide Manufacturer's data on stucco materials, and installation instructions. B. Samples: Submit Manufacturer's samples of available colors and textures. Submit sample of specified color and texture. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Stucco system shall be installed by an applicator approved by the Manufacturer. B. Mock-up Panel: Prior to installation of Stucco Work, provide 4 x 4 foot sample mock-up panel using materials specified for final W ork. Construct sample as directed, and of full thickness. Demonstrate the proposed range of color, texture and workmanship to be expected in the completed Work. Obtain Architect's acceptance of visual qualities of the sample panel. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Installer must examine surfaces to receive the stucco system and shall notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage during installation of stucco system. C. Stucco systems are applied at ambient air temperatures from 43 degrees F. to 120 degrees F. D. Do not apply to frozen surfaces or surfaces containing frost. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURING COMPANIES A. Western 1-Kote, West Sacramento, www.sacstucco.com CA 95691 • Tel: (916) 372-7442 • Fax: (916) 372-4836 . H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No. 2 09 24 53-2 One-Coat Stucco System B. STO Industries, Atlanta, GA. www.stocorp.com :Sacramento Stucco 860 Riske Lane West Sacramento, CA 95691 Phone: 916-372-7442 www.sacstucco.com per ESR 1607 or Equal 2.02 MATERIALS (STUCCO PRODUCTS) A. Base Coat(s): STO One-Coat Stucco in compliance with ICBO Report No. 3804. B. Primer: STO Primer C. Finish Coat: STO Flexfinish; color and texture as selected by Architect. D. Water shall be clean, fresh, suitable for domestic consumption and free from such amounts of mineral and organic substances as would affect the stucco. E. Sand must be clean and free from deleterious amounts of silt, loam, soluble salts, clay and organic matter. Sampling and testing must comply with ASTM C897. 2.03 MATERIALS (LATH PRODUCTS) A. Weather Resistive Barrier: Minimum Grade D Kraft Building Paper complying with UBC Standard No. 17-1 or asphalt saturated rag felt complying with UBC Standard No. 32-1. B. Insulation Board: Minimum 1" thick tongue and groove rigid insulation board with a nominal density of 1.0 lb. per cubic foot. Class 1 flame rating and smoke density less than 450. C. Lath: Minimum 20 gauge, 1 inch galvanized steel wire fabric or 3.4 pounds/square yard expanded metal lath fabricated from copper bearing steel and painted, or zinc alloy. Lath must be self furred when applied over all substrates except polystyrene insulation board. Self furring lath must have sufficient clearance between the wire and substrate to allow embedment in the Base Coat. All lath and lath attachments shall be of corrosion resistant materials. D. Accessories: Coordinate depth of accessories with thickness and number of coats required. All trims to be either fabricated from galvanized metal, zinc coated, or plastic. 1. Corner Reinforcement: Pre-formed corners with expanded flanges having either small nose or radius corners or expanded metal lath reinforcement extending minimum of 3 inches in either direction for large radius corners. 2. Casing Beads: Pre-formed "J" trim for stucco terminations. Perforated for weep screed when required. 3. Control Joints: One piece "M" type trim with expanded flanges when required. 4. Expansion Joints: Two piece, adjustable width slip joint or pair casing beads installed back to back to allow for excessive movement between dissimilar substrates. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No. 2 09 24 53-3 One-Coat Stucco System 1. Examine subsurfaces and supports to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing, with a copy to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 2. Verify, before proceeding with this Work, that required inspections of existing conditions have been completed. B. Coordination with other Work: Coordinate with other work and trades which affect, connect with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02 LATH INSTALLATION A. Weather Resistive Barrier: Install weather resistive barrier directly to framing using adhesive or other approved method to hold in place. Lap sides and ends a minimum of 1-1/2 inches. B. Insulation Board: Rigid insulation shall be applied directly over weather resistive barrier and studs. The insulation boards shall be placed horizontally with tongues upward to prevent water penetration. All vertical butt joints must be tight, staggered and occur on studs. The insulation boards shall be temporarily held in place with galvanized staples, roofing nails, or self tapping screws. C. Lath: Over insulation board, install lath beginning at bottom of wall and apply with long dimension across supports. Lap sides and ends a m inimum of 1-1/2 inches. Make end laps of lath only over supports and stagger end laps in adjacent courses. Bend lath around all corners, both internal and external, or provide additional reinforcing lath. D. Fastening: Fasten lath through sheathing and into steel studs using No. 8 x 1- 5/8", Type S Wafer Head Screws installed a minimum of 6 inches on center, and penetrating a minimum of 1/4 inch into the steel stud. E. Accessories: 1. Install corner beads or corner reinforcement at all external corners. 2. Install casing beads where stucco stops and at all stucco terminations. 3. Install weep screed at base. 4. Install control joints at corners of doors, windows or wall openings, and in the stucco field to create panels no larger than 144 square feet. Distance between control joints should not exceed 12 feet in any direction. 5. Install expansion joints where dissimilar substrates meet and at structural expansion joints. 3.03 STUCCO APPLICATION A. Proportioning and Mixing: Mix in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. B. Application of Base Coat: Apply by hand trowel or machine spray to a minimum thickness of 3/8 inch. Bring surface to a true and even plane using rod or darby as required for desired finish. Float surface to remove irregularities and leave ready to receive finish coat. C. Primer Application: Primer may be applied, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, as soon as base coat has sufficiently set. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No. 2 09 24 53-4 One-Coat Stucco System D. Application of Finish: The thickness of the finish coat shall be sufficient to achieve the texture specified. When applying the finish, plan Work so that the entire wall can be completed at one time in order to eliminate joining lines. If not practical, use a corner, door or window as a breaking point. 3.04 ADJUST AND REPAIR A. Upon completion, point-up stucco around trim and other locations where stucco meets dissimilar materials. B. Cut out and patch damaged stucco. C. Match patch of damaged stucco to existing Work in form, texture and color. 3.05 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION H&C GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1 SECTION 09 29 00 – GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data on gypsum board, joint, finish and accessories. B. Samples: Submit sample of textured finish prior to application. C. Reports: Submit fire test report for fire rated assemblies, and acoustical performance test reports for acoustically-rated assemblies. Provide certificates stating all material is asbestos free. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in Gypsum Board Systems Work with 2 years documented experience and approved by Manufacturer. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies as shown on the Drawings. C. Comply with applicable specification recommendations of GA-216 and GA-600 as published by the Gypsum Association. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with GA-216 and Manufacturer's directions. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Maintain temperature of installed gypsum board spaces in range of 55 degrees F. to 90 degrees F. until building is entirely closed. 2. Ventilate as required to eliminate excessive moisture. H&C GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, or approved equal, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. G-P Gypsum 2. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. 3. United States Gypsum Co. 4. BPB Gypsom 5. Pabco Gypsum 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. General: Materials shall be new, of uniform quality, suitable and without defects affecting the strength or service of the structure. B. Standard Gypsum Board: ANSI/ASTM C36 or ASTM C1396; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. C. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ANSI/ASTM C36 or ASTM C1396; fire resistive type, UL rated 5/8 inch maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. D. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ANSI/ASTM C630 or ASTM C1396; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut. E. Insulating Gypsum Board: ANSI/ASTM C36 or ASTM C1396; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length; back surface laminated with aluminum foil; ends square cut; tapered and beveled edges. F. Gypsum Backing Board: ANSI/ASTM C442 or ASTM C1396; standard type; 5/8 inch thick; square edges, ends square cut, maximum permissible length. G. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing Board: ANSI/ASTM C79 or ASTM C1396; moisture resistant and fire resistant type; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, square edges; water repellent paper faces. H. Gypsum Core Board: ASTM C1396, one inch thick, maximum permissible length; square edges, ends square cut. I. Exterior Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C1396, Fire rated type, 1/2 inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered and beveled edges. J. Acoustical Backing Board: 1/4 inch thick G-P Gypsum Pyrosonic Sound Deadening Board. K. Gypsum Liner Board: ASTM C1396, one inch thick, beveled edges. L. Ceramic Tile Backer Board: As specified in Section 09 30 00 - Ceramic Tile. H&C GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 3 M. Impact Resistant Gypsum Board: Level 3 - Heavy Duty in accordance with ASTM C 1629, 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. N. Sound Absorbing Gypsum Board: Quiet Rock – 525 series in accordance with manufacturers specifications achieving an STC of 49. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: ASTM C557. B. Acoustical Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board, as recommended by Board Manufacturer. C. Corner Beads: GA216; Type CB; electro-galvanized steel; as manufactured by Beadex, Clark Western or approved equal. D. Edge Trim: GA216; Type L bead; electro-galvanized steel; Type LC rolled-formed zinc; as manufactured by Beadex, Clark Western or approved equal. E. Control Joint: No. 093, roll-formed zinc, as manufactured by U.S.Gypsum, Unimast, Dietrich or approved equal. F. Joint Materials: ANSI/ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, water, and fasteners. For coated board and gypsum sheathing, use material recommended by Board Manufacturer. Acceptable manufacturers include Murco Wall Products or approved equal. G. Screws: ASTM C1002 for steel drill screws. Type G for fastening to gypsum board, Type S for fastening to light gauge steel framing and Type W for fastening to wood framing. H. Wall Texture: As manufactured by USG, multi-purpose, pre-packaged, non-asbestos type. I. Drywall Primer: 1. Paint material specifically formulated to fill the pores and equalize the suction difference between gypsum board surface paper and the compound used on finished joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories and over skim coatings. 2. Drywall primer which is applied to the finished surface of the work specified in this section shall be provided as specified under Sections 09 91 00 and 09 72 00 as applicable. 3. A good quality, white latex drywall primer formulated with high binder solids, applied undiluted, and shall be applied to gypsum board surfaces prior to the application of texture materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive Work and opening dimensions are as instructed by the Manufacturer. H&C GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 4 B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.2 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA-201 and GA-216, and Manufacturer's instructions as applicable. B. Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. D. Exterior Sheathing: 1. Install sheathing to comply with GA-253, ASTM C1280 and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of the work; fit tightly against abutting construction, except provide a 3/8-inch setback where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint sealant installation so these materials are installed in the sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior wall assembly. 4. Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing. 5. Do not bridge building expansion joints with sheathing; cut and space edges to match spacing of structural support elements. 6. Joints: Remain untreated unless otherwise required for weather-resistive barrier, finish and/or cladding. E. Ceiling Boards: 1. Install gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. F. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal and wood furring or framing. G. Double Layer Applications: 1. Use gypsum backing board for first layer, placed perpendicular to framing or furring members. 2. Use fire rated gypsum backing board for fire rated partitions. 3. Place second layer perpendicular to first layer. 4. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. 5. Secure second layer to first with adhesive and sufficient support to hold in place. Apply adhesive in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. H&C GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 5 H. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum ceiling board with sealant. I. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as indicated on Drawings and as recommended by Board Manufacturer. J. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 3.3 JOINT TREATMENT A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. C. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind ceramic tile. 3.4 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT A. Install acoustical sealant in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at: 1. Metal framing: Two beads. 2. Base layer of double layer applications, if applicable. 3. Face layer. 4. Caulk partition penetrations by conduit, pipe, ductwork, and rough-in boxes. C. Install acoustical sealant where gypsum board joins other walls or surfaces at sound control partitions. 3.5 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD SURFACES A. Provide finish of gypsum board surfaces in accordance with the Gypsum Association "Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish" as follows as noted on Room Finish Schedule: 1. Level 0 (Temporary Construction): No taping, finishing, or accessories required. 2. Level 1 (Fire Taping at plenum areas above ceiling, in attics, in areas where the assembly will be concealed or in building service corridors and other areas not normally open to public view): a. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound. b. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. c. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. H&C GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 6 3. Level 2 (Water resistant gypsum backing for tile): a. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating joint compound over joints and interior angles. b. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with a coat of joint compound. c. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. d. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. e. Joint compound applied over the body of the tape at the time of tape embedment shall be considered a separate coat of joint compound and shall satisfy the conditions of this level. 4. Level 3 (Appearance areas to receive heavy or medium texture (spray or hand applied) finishes before final painting, or where heavy grade wallcoverings are to be applied as final decoration. This level of finish is not to be used where smooth painted surface or light to medium wallcoverings are to be applied.): a. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one additional coat of joint compound applied over joints and interior angles. b. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with 2 separate coats of joint compound. c. Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. d. Surface to be coated with Drywall Primer as specified herein prior to application of texture. e. Untextured surfaces to be coated with Drywall Primer prior to application of final finishes. 5. Level 4 (Appearance areas to receive flat paints, light texture, or where backed wallcoverings are to be applied. This level of finish is not to be used where gloss, semi- gloss and enamel paints are to be applied.): a. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and 2 separate coats of joint compound applied over flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound applied over interior angles. b. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with 3 separate coats of joint compound. c. Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. d. Surface to be coated with Drywall Primer as specified herein prior to application of texture. e. Untextured surfaces to be coated with Drywall Primer prior to application of final finishes. 6. Level 5 (Appearance areas to receive gloss, semi-gloss, enamel, or nontextured flat paints or where severe lighting conditions occur.): a. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and 2 separate coats of joint compound applied over flat joints and one separate coat applied over interior angles. b. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with 3 separate coats of joint compound. H&C GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 7 c. A thin skim coat of joint compound, or a material manufactured especially for this purpose, shall be applied to the entire surface to fill imperfections in the joint work, smooth the paper texture and provide a uniform surface for decorating. Excess compound shall be immediately sheared off, leaving a film of skim coating compound completely covering the paper. d. The surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. e. Surface to be coated with Drywall Primer as specified herein prior to application of texture. f. Untextured surfaces to be coated with Drywall Primer prior to application of final finishes B. Surfaces shall be free of dust, dirt and oil and shall received Drywall Primer before application of texture or skim coat as required by the manufacturer of the texture or skim coat materials. C. Surface Finish: Produce surface finish to match approved sample, type as indicated below. 1. Orange Peel 3.6 CLEANING A. After completion of wallboard installation, taping and texturing, remove rubbish, excess material and equipment from building and job site, leaving floors and other surfaces clean. B. Remove overspray from adjoining construction. C. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect Work from damage until acceptance. B. Repair or replace damaged Work. END OF SECTION 09 29 00 H&C TILING 09 30 00 - 1 SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic tile. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108.1 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Portland Cement Mortar. C. ANSI A108.5 - Ceramic Tile Installed in the Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. D. ANSI A108.6 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile - Setting and Grouting Epoxy. E. ANSI A118.1 - Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar. F. ANSI A118.3 - Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile - Setting and Grouting Epoxy. G. ANSI A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. H. TCA 137.1 - Recommended Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. I. Tile Council of America - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced specifications and standards, insofar as any portions are applicable, are hereby made a direct part of this specification as though repeated herein. Materials, preparation and installation shall conform to referenced standards and the detailed installation instructions of the material manufacturer insofar as applicable. H&C TILING 09 30 00 - 2 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Slip Resistance: ADA requires that static coefficient of friction shall be 0.6 for accessible routes and 0.8 for ramps, however, laws for specific jurisdictions may vary. B. Changes in level: ADA required that changes in level up to a 1/4 inch (6mm) may be vertical and without edge treatment. Changes in level between 1/4 inch and 1/2 inch (6mm and 13mm) shall be beveled with a slope no greater than 1:2. Change in level greater than 1/2 inch (13 mm) shall be accomplished by means of a ramp. Again, laws for specific jurisdictions may vary. C. Slip resistance of floor surfaces and changes in level shall be in accordance with applicable law. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. When work is completed, deliver stock of replacement tile to the Owner in an amount shown in Section 01700, Project Closeout. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. H&C TILING 09 30 00 - 3 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide sufficient heat and ventilation in areas where work of this section is being performed, so as to allow ceramic tile to properly set. Take all precautionary measures necessary to ensure that excessive temperature changes do not occur. C. Set and grout tile in portland cement mortar when surface temperature is at least 50 degrees F. and rising. D. Comply with minimum temperature recommendations of manufacturer's for bonding and grouting materials in other than portland cement mortar. E. Protect adjoining work surfaces before tile work begins. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thinset: (TCA Methods W243 and W244) cementitious mortar with latex additive; ANSI A118.4 Keralastic as manufactured by Mapei is an acceptable product (or approved equal). B. Epoxy Grout: Chemical-resistant per ANSI 118.3, water-cleanable during installation, by an approved manufacturer. C. Colors shall be as selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s standard colors. D. Grout: Latex Portland cement type; ANSI A118.6, color selected by Architect, (except color shall be lighter than tile); uniform in color and resistant to shrinking. Keracolor Wall with Plastijoints acrylic latex additive as manufactured by Mapei is an acceptable product (or approved equal). E. Thresholds: Marble Institute of America, Class A, color selected by the Architect from standard colors of the approved manufacturer, shaped to provide a comfortable transition between tile and other floor finishes, with smooth matte surface finish and in the dimensions and thicknesses shown on the drawings. 1. General: Provide marble thresholds that are uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes and profiles indicated to provide transition between tile surfaces and adjoining finished floor surfaces. F. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C503 requirements for exterior use and with a minimum abrasive-hardness value of 10 per ASTM C241. G. Match Architect’s sample for color and finish, comply with the Marble Institute of America’s Group A requirements for soundness. H&C TILING 09 30 00 - 4 H. Water: Clean, fresh and free of deleterious substances. 2.2 MATERIALS FOR EXPANSION JOINTS: A. Sealant: Two component complying with ASTM C-920, Type M, Class 25, Grade NS for joint in vertical surfaces; Grade P, Use T for joints in horizontal surfaces. B. Back-Up: Flexible compressible type of closed-cell foam polyethylene or butyl rubber, rounded at surface to contact sealant, as shown in TCA details, and as recommended by sealant manufacturer. It shall fit neatly into the joint without compacting and to such a height to allow a sealant depth of 1/2 the width of the joint. Sealant shall not bond to the back-up material. 2.3 MIXING A. Mix and proportion cementitious materials for site made mortar beds, and grout as recommended by the Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. B. Mix and proportion pre-mix mortar and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.4 TILE PRODUCTS A. Tile Type [CT-1, Field]: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: DAL Tile (or approved equal) a. Style: Modern Dimensions b. Size: 4”x12” c. Color: As selected by Architect B. Tile Type [CT-2, Accent]: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: DAL Tile (or approved equal) a. Style: Semi-Gloss b. Size: 4”x12” c. Color: As selected by Architect C. Tile Type [CT-3, Accent]: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: DAL Tile (or approved equal) a. Style: Semi-Gloss b. Size: 4”x12” c. Color: As selected by Architect H&C TILING 09 30 00 - 5 2.5 SETTING BED AND GROUT MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Custom Building Products 2. Bostik Chemical Group, The Upco Company 3. Laticrete International, Inc. 4. Mapei PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Close areas in which tile is being set to traffic and other work. Keep closed until tile is firmly set, minimum time of 3 days. Protect tile work from damage until acceptance. D. Prior to installing wall tile, ensure surfaces are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/4 inch in 10 feet. E. Ensure surfaces are clean and well cured. F. Do not commence until surface conditions are within tolerances required for proper installation. 3.2 TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. H&C TILING 09 30 00 - 6 B. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. C. Place tile in accordance with pattern(s) shown on Room Elevations. Carefully plan tile layouts. Ensure pattern is uninterrupted from one wall and/or floor surface to the next. Where pattern is not shown, lay out tiles lengthwise on walls so that no tile less than one-half size occurs. Align all joints in wall tile vertically and horizontal. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, trim and walls are the same size. D. Grout all tile with specified grout in accordance with ANSI A108.6. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. E. Neatly cut tile around fixtures and drains. Accurately form corners, base, intersections and returns. F. Ensure tile joints are uniform in width, subject to normal variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Ensure joints are watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or grout. G. Form internal wall angles coved and external angles bullnosed. Trim pieces shall be provided. H. Sound tile after setting. Remove and replace hollow sounding units. 3.3 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Provide expansion joints in all ceramic tile surfaces in accordance with TCA method EJ-171. B. Expansion joint width shall be 1/4" minimum. Joints through tile and mortar directly over structural joints in the backing must be at least the width of the structural joints. C. Tile edges to which the sealant will bond must be clean and dry. Sand or grind as necessary to obtain optimum sealant bond. D. Prime tile edges when recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Take care to keep primer off tile faces. E. Set back-up when mortar is placed or utilize removable wood strip to provide space for back-up after mortar has cured. F. Install sealant after tile work and grout are dry. Follow sealant manufacturer's recommendations. G. Keep expansion/contraction joint(s) free of mortar or grout. H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. I. Completed installation to be free of broken, damaged or faulty tile. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING H&C TILING 09 30 00 - 7 A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging. B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION 09 30 00 H&C CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD 09 30 13-1 SECTION 09 30 13 - CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiber cement backer board panels. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05400 - Light Gage Metal Framing: wall framing and bracing. B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: wood framing and bracing. C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board: Vapor barrier material and installation requirements. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI 108/A118/A136 - American National Standards for the Installation of Ceramic Tile. B. ANSI A108.11 - Installation of Cementitious Backer Units. C. ANSl A118.4 - Specifications for Latex Portland Cement Mortar D. ANSI A118.9- Cementitous Baker Units. E. ANSl A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile F. ASTM C1288 - Discrete Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement Interior Substrate Sheets. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 4 by 6 inches (100 by 150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. H&C CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD 09 30 13-2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 2 years experience with installation of similar products. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store boards flat on a smooth level surface. Protect edges and corners from chipping. Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Product Warranty: limited product warranty against manufacturing defects: 1. HardieBacker 1/2 inch (13 mm) nominal cement board for 20 years. 2. HardieBacker 1/4 inch (6 mm) nominal cement board for 20 years. B. Workmanship Warranty: application limited warranty for 2 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: James Hardie Building Products, Inc., B. Substitutions: Or approved equal C. Requests for approval of equal substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 BACKERBOARD A. Type: HardieBacker 1/2 inch (13 mm) nominal cement board as manufactured by James Hardie Building Products, Inc. B. Type: HardieBacker 1/4 inch (6 mm) nominal cement board as manufactured by James Hardie Building Products, Inc. H&C CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD 09 30 13-3 C. Material shall meet the following building code compliance: 1. Non-asbestos fiber-cement board to comply with ÅSTM C1288 and ANSl A118.9. 2. Board shall meet the building code compliance National Evaluation Report No. NER 405. 3. US Department of Housing and Urban Development Materials Release 1268C. 4. California DSA PA-019. 5. City of Los Angeles, Research Report No. 24862. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Wood Framing fasteners 1. Wood framing: 1-1/2 inches (32 mm) corrosion resistant (galvanized or stainless steel) roofing nails. 2. Wood framing: 1-1/2 inches (32 mm) No. 8 by 0.375 inch (9.5 mm) HD self-drilling, corrosion resistant ribbed wafer head screws. B. Metal Framing: 1. Metal framing: 1-1/2 inches (32 mm) No. 8 by 0.375 inch (9.5 mm) HD self-drilling, corrosion resistant ribbed wafer head screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If framing preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 WALL FRAMING A. Either vertical or horizontal, nominal 2 inches by 4 inches ( 51 mm by 102 mm) wood framing spaced a maximum of 24 inches (610 mm) on center with end joints staggered from adjacent courses in both vertical and horizontal applications. B. To comply with ANSI A108.11, either vertical or horizontal, nominal 2 inches by 4 inches ( 51 mm by 102 mm) wood framing spaced a maximum of 16 inches (406 mm) on center with end joints staggered from adjacent courses in both vertical and horizontal applications. C. Either vertical or horizontal, minimum 20 gauge 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) C-Stud 24 inches (610 mm) maximum on center metal framing complying with local building codes with end joints staggered from adjacent courses in both vertical and horizontal applications. H&C CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD 09 30 13-4 D. Comply with ANSl A108.11, either vertical or horizontal, minimum 20 gauge 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) C-Stud 16 inches (406 mm) maximum on center metal framing complying with local building codes with end joints staggered from adjacent courses in both vertical and horizontal applications. E. Install a vapor barrier. Refer to Section 09260 for material and installation requirements. 1. Comply with building code regarding vapor barrier requirements. 2. Repair any punctures or tears in vapor barrier prior to the installation of the board. 3.3 FLOOR FRAMING A. Design: Maximum deflection (dead and live load combined) for floor framing shall not exceed the following: 1. Typical: L/360. 2. Natural stone: L/270. 3.4 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install sheets with 1/8 inch (3 mm) gap between sheets. B. Place fasteners 8 inches (152 mm) on center no closer than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from board edges and 2 inches (51 mm) from board corners. C. Boards shall be placed with a minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) clearance from the floor surfaces and other horizontal tile termination locations, including above tub edges. This gap shall be free of adhesive and grout and filled with a flexible sealant. D. Boards shall be placed with a minimum 1/8 inch (3 mm) clearance from wall and cabinet bases, and other horizontal tile termination locations, including above tub edges. This gap shall be free of adhesive and grout and filled with a flexible sealant. E. Joints shall be reinforced with 2 inches (51 mm) wide, high-strength, coated, alkali-resistant, glass fiber reinforcing tape embedded into the wet mastic or modified thinset mortar and allowed to dry thoroughly. H&C CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD 09 30 13-5 F. For large tiled areas, movement/control joints shall be provided in accordance with ANSl A108, Section AN-3.7 or as indicated on drawings. G. Wall tiles complying with ANSl A137.1 are attached to the board with flexible Type I mastic adhesives complying with ANSl A136.1, or acrylic or latex-modified thinset mortars complying with ANSl A118.4, in accordance with ANSl A108. END OF SECTION 09 30 13 H&C ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 1 SECTION 09 51 23 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical tiles for ceilings. B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing complete layout of systems including attachments, intersections of members and edge conditions. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal grid system components and acoustical units. C. Samples: 1. Submit 2 samples of each type of unit specified, including color selection when applicable. 2. Submit samples of Manufacturer's full color selection for selection by Architect. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Installer shall be approved by Manufacturer of material or system. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. ASTM C635, "Standard Specification for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings." 2. ASTM C636, "Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels." 3. Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA) “Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings." H&C ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 2 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide an additional 5 percent of each type of acoustical unit installed, in unopened labeled cartons, to the Owner at completion of Work, for his maintenance use, at no additional cost. Provide, at minimum, one full carton of each type of acoustical unit.Q 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical tile ceiling installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL TILES A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Cirrus 551 Acoustical Ceiling Panels with Donn DX/DXL24 Suspension System as manufactured by Armstrong or approved equal. Typical, except at Kitchen areas and ceiling accents. 1. Characteristics: a. Size: 24 inch x 48 inch x 5/8 inch b. Color: White c. NRC: Up to 0.75 d. Light Reflectance: Up to 0.87 e. Edge: Tegular f. Humidity Resistant g. Mold Resistant h. Sag Resistant H&C ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 3 B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Cirrus Second Look 514 Acoustical Ceiling Panels with Donn DX/DXL24 Suspension System as manufactured by Armstrong or approved equal. Accent classroom and hallway spaces. 1. Characteristics: a. Size: 24 inch x 48 inch x 5/8 inch b. Color: White c. NRC: Up to 0.65 d. Light Reflectance: Up to 0.87 e. Edge: Tegular f. Humidity Resistant g. Mold Resistant h. Sag Resistant C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Optima 3252 Acoustical Ceiling Panels with Donn DX/DXL24 Suspension System as manufactured by Armstrong or approved equal. Band and Music areas. 1. Characteristics: a. Size: 24 inch x 48 inch x 5/8 inch b. Color: White c. NRC: Up to 0.95 d. Light Reflectance: Up to 0.87 e. Edge: Tegular f. Humidity Resistant g. Mold Resistant h. Sag Resistant D. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Optima Capz 3931 Acoustical Ceiling Panels with Donn DX/DXL24 Suspension System as manufactured by Armstrong or approved equal. Accent areas in library and conference room. 1. Characteristics: a. Size: 24 inch x 96 inch x 7/8 inch b. Color: White c. NRC: Up to 0.90 d. Light Reflectance: Up to 0.90 e. Edge: Reverse Tegular f. Humidity Resistant g. Mold Resistant h. Sag Resistant E. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Infusions 5913 Acoustical Ceiling Panels with Donn DX/DXL24 Suspension System as manufactured by Armstrong or approved equal. Breakout classroom areas. 1. Characteristics: H&C ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 4 a. Size: 24 inch x 72 inch x 1/4 inch b. Color: As Selected by Architect. c. NRC: N/A d. Material: Polycarbonate, Extruded e. Edge: Square f. Humidity Resistant g. Mold Resistant h. Sag Resistant F. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ecophon Solo Line Acoustical Ceiling Panels with Suspension System as manufactured by Saint-Gobain ECOPHAN or approved equal. Circular Cafetorium and Library circular accent ceiling and wall acoustical panels. 1. Manufacturers: a. Saint-Gobain ECOPHAN: Solo Line. b. Armstrong Building Products: Optima Canopy Acoustic ceiling clouds. c. Armstrong Building Products: Soundscapes Shapes. d. Buzzispace: Buzziland flat circular fabric. e. Knauf AMF Italia Controsoffitti: Thermatex Sonic Element. f. Tectum Inc.: Clouds Specialty Panels. 2. Characteristics: a. Size: As indicated on Drawings. b. Color: As Selected by Architect. c. NRC: Up to 0.85 d. Light Reflectance: Up to 0.85 e. Edge: Square f. Humidity Resistant g. Mold Resistant h. Sag Resistant 2.2 WASHABLE ACOUSTICAL TILES A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide clean room, Georgian High Washability acoustical ceiling panels by Armstrong with Donn DX/DXL24 Suspension System as manufactured by USG or approved equal intended for Kitchen/Food Prep area. Location: Culinary 622, Laundry 624, Dry Storage 623, Hall 600-C, and Serving 622-A. 1. Characteristics: a. Size: 24 inch x 48 inch x 5/8 inch b. Color: White c. NRC: Up to 0.55 d. Light Reflectance: Up to 0.79 e. Edge: Square Edge f. Humidity Resistant g. Mold Resistant h. Sag Resistant H&C ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 5 i. Texture: Fine j. Fire Rated k. Fire Class A 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Ceiling Suspension System: Heavy duty with components formed from commercial quality cold rolled steel electro-zinc coated. 1. Main-Runners: Minimum of 1-1/2 inch in height with an exposed capped face of 15/16 inch in width, nominally 12 feet long. 2. Cross-Tees: Minimum of 1-1/2 inch in height with an exposed capped face in a width to match main runners. 3. Finish: Exposed faces of main and cross runners shall be a baked enamel paint finish, color as selected by Architect. B. Hanger Wire: Galvanized steel conforming to Federal Specification FF-QQ-W-461, Finish 5, Class 1 annealed, and not less than 12 gauge). C. Suspension system shall support the ceiling system specified with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span. D. Wall and Penetration Moldings: 24 MSG painted steel with a minimum one inch wide lower flange, finish and configuration to match grid. For circular penetrations provide edge molding manufactured to exact diameter of circular penetration. E. Hold-Down Clips: Provide access type hold-down clips where required by Acoustical Ceiling Manufacturer for type and condition and where panels weigh less than one pound per square foot. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. H&C ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 6 3.2 PREPARATION A. Testing Substrates: Before installing adhesively applied tiles on wet-placed substrates such as cast-in-place concrete or plaster, test and verify that moisture level is below tile manufacturer's recommended limits. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance the following: 1. ASTM C636 and as supplemented in this Section. 2. CISCA’s Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA’s [“Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings-Seismic Zones 1-2” May 2004] [“Guidelines for Seismic Restraint for Direct Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies Seismic Zones 3-4” May 2004] [as modified by IBC Section 16 21 .2.5]. 3. U.B.C. “Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-in Panel Ceilings”: U.B.C. Standard 25-2. B. Install fire rated system in accordance with UL Design indicated on Drawings. C. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. D. Locate system on room axis according to reflected ceiling plan. E. Install after major above-ceiling Work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other Work. F. Supply hangers or inserts for installation in concrete with instructions for their correct placement. G. Provide hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. H. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. I. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. J. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently. K. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. H&C ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 7 L. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. M. Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1 inch movement. Maintain visual closure. N. Install protection over light fixtures in accordance with UL assembly requirements. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACCOUSTICAL LAY-IN UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above-ceiling Work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. F. Cut panels to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. Field rabbett panel edge. G. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closers to match edge molding. H. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system where required for fire-rated system. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Remove damaged or soiled panels and replace with new units, as directed by Architect. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09 51 23 Protect-All® Commercial Flooring Specification 09 66 60 Commercial Kitchen & Wet Area Specifications 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide and install commercial resilient vinyl flooring per manufacturer’s installation requirements and recommendations. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions for watertight application. B. Samples: Submit representative sample of each material specified, indicating visual characteristics and finish. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor will assure compliance with 2.3 Job Conditions to allow for proper installation. B. Comply with local governing codes and regulations. C. Use Protect-All factory trained installers provided by local distributor. D. Manufacturer provides a limited product warranty against manufacturing defects. Warranty does not in any way cover installation-related issues. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 NO SUBSTITUTIONS PERMITTED 2.2 PRE-APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Protect-All Commercial Flooring as manufactured by Oscoda Plastics®, Inc. 1. Protect-All sheets in 5’ x 8’ or 5’ x 5’ in ¼" thickness with color chosen from manufacturer's samples in matte finish. 2. Protect-All 2-part epoxy flooring adhesives. 3. Protect-All cove base system with a minimum height of 6". 3a. Protect-All Rapid Weld™ or corner rod for the cove base system. 4. Protect-All Rapid Weld or V-Rod for floor seams. 5. Protect-All aluminum or stainless steel cove base cap (Z-bar). 6. Protect-All stainless steel drain rings, corner guards, and transition strips as provided by Oscoda Plastics. 6a. Protect-All stainless steel fasteners and anchors for drain rings, corner guards, and transition strips 7. Protect-All E-6100 sealant. 8. Other installation materials as required and supplied by Protect-All. 2.3 INSTALLATION VERIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer installation instructions for watertight applications along with required accessories, located at www.protect-allflooring.com. B. Experience of installer pertaining to Protect-All Rapid Weld and heat welding the Protect-All system. C. Provide representative samples of product depicting color and finished surface of installed flooring material. Include range samples, if variation of finish is anticipated. D. Provide a mock-up showing cove base, corner, and drain details with welding example. E. Provide documentation attesting to the successful use of product in wet areas. F. Provide copy of manufacturer’s product warranty. 2.4 VERIFICATION OF JOB CONDITIONS A. Proper substrate 1. Assure that the substrate material is suitable for installation of flooring as indicated by manufacturer. Approved substrates include: marine-grade or underlayment grade plywood, cement board, and concrete (non-gypsum based only), properly cleaned and prepared per manufacturer’s guidelines. 1a. Protect-All is not to be installed over any existing finish, such as quarry tile, any paint, or any type of tile. 1b. Protect-All must not be installed in an “operating environment,” meaning an environment that is not prepared to close entirely for the duration of the installation. 2. Concrete substrates must be dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer. 3. Verify a clean, dry, and structurally sound surface to accept adhesive, free of cracks, ridges, depression, scales, and foreign deposits of any kind. 4. Use only cementitious patching and filling compounds (3500 PSI). Consult manufacturer for details. 5. Assure that the levelness (FL 15), and flatness (FF20 5/16 in 10 Ft.) of surface is in compliance with manufacturer’s guidelines. 6. Verify that sub-floor surfaces (concrete, marine-grade or underlayment grade plywood, cement board) are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing moisture emission rate and alkalinity, in accordance with ASTM F 710; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. Reference ASTM F 710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. 7. The following standards apply: • ASTM E 1745-97 – Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders • ASTM E 1643 – Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders used in contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs • ASTM E 96-00 – Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials • ACI 302.1R-04 – Guide for Floor and Concrete Slab Construction • ACI 302.2R-06 – Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials • ASTM F710-08 – Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring • ASTM F 1869 – Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride B. For wood sub-floors verify the following: 1. Underlayment over sub-floor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 “Rough Carpentry”. 2. Underlayment surface is free of surface irregularities and substances that have potential to interfere with adhesive bond, show through surface or stain floor coverings. Reference ASTM F1482 Standard Practice for Installing and Preparation of Panel Type Underlayments to Receive Resilient Flooring. C. Environmental Conditions 1. The contractor and installer of product are responsible for providing and maintaining a proper installation environment. 2. Installation area must be enclosed and watertight with all walls, wall finishes, doors, and floor penetrations in place. 3. Proper temperature acclimation of flooring material is required prior to installation at a minimum of 24 hours. 4. Assure confinement of space during installation and curing of adhesives to prevent other trades from damaging the product or compromising the adhesion. 5. Maintain a constant temperature during the installation and throughout the curing of adhesives. 6. Provide a secure area to store materials for installation. 7. Building must be completely enclosed and watertight. HVAC system must be on at least 7 days prior to installation beginning, keeping the interior temperature at 70°. This temperature should be maintained during the installation, and an additional 8 days after completion. 7a. Protect-All cannot have any heavy foot, or rolling load traffic until flooring adhesive has fully cured, 7-8 days. D. Proper Drain and Other Floor Penetration Elevations. 1. All drains to be installed level and 3/16” above the surface of the substrate with a proper slope of 1/8” – 1/4” per foot. 2. When sloping to the drain area is specified, the slope should not be less than 36" in diameter and more than 3/8" in depth. 3. All other penetrations should be installed 3/16” above the substrate. 4. Wall penetrations must be a minimum of 8” above the floor surface. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer recommendations for laying sheets out. B. Flooring must be cut tight to all penetrations. C. Adhere the floor material using manufacturer’s recommended adhesive for the particular substrate type, job conditions, and in compliance with spread rate and proper trowel size. D. Roll floor into adhesive with 100 lb. roller immediately and a second time one hour later, as per manufacturer directions. E. Install stainless steel drain rings around all drains and other surface penetrations. Drain rings are to be routed into the floor surface and mounted flush with the top of the flooring. Secure drain rings using Stainless Steel fasteners and anchors to provide a mechanical bond to the substrate. F. Install cove base as recommended by manufacturer with proper adhesive and top sealant. Protect-All Rapid Weld or heat-weld all seams. G. Install cove base cap fastening to wall a minimum of 8" on-center using stainless steel fasteners. H. Protect-All Rapid Weld or heat-weld all field material seams using manufacturer’s welding material, proper tools, and installation methods. I. Stainless steel transitions as provided by the manufacturer must be used in doorways and transition areas. Use stainless steel fasteners, and anchors to secure. J. All exposed edges are to be sealed with manufacturer’s E-6100 sealant. 3.2 CLEANING A. Refer to the manufacturer’s cleaning recommendations located at www.Protect-Allflooring.com. 4. CONTACT INFORMATION 800-544-9538 5585 N. Huron Ave. P.O. Box 189 Oscoda, MI 48750 989-739-1494 Fax csr@protect-allflooring.com www.Protect-Allflooring.com H&C TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 1 SECTION 09 68 13 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes modular carpet tile. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Rubber Base: Samples. D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. H&C TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association. B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. H&C TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 3 D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of face fiber, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE A. Carpet Tile (24”x24”) 1. Manufacturer: Mohawk Group 2. Collection: Renegade 3. Brand: Bigelow 4. Style: Mutineer Tile, BT366 5. Color: To be selected by Architect B. Carpet Tile - Walk Off 1. Manufacturer: Mohawk Group 2. Collection: Tuff Stuff II, Lees 3. Brand: Lees 4. Style: First Step II Tile, QL315 5. Color: To be selected by Architect H&C TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 4 2.2 WALL BASE A. Wall Base: Furnish products of one of the specified Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements. 1. Type TP - Thermoplastic Rubber: a. Armstrong World Industries b. Burke/Mercer c. Johnsonite d. Marley Flexco, Inc. e. Roppe 2. Color: To be selected by Architect. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with [mill] <Insert finish> finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: H&C TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 5 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive. E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. H&C TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 6 G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. H. Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09 68 13 H&C FRP WALL PANELS 09 77 33-1 SECTION 09 77 33 - FRP WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's Specifications and installation instructions for each material and accessory. B. Submit Manufacturer's full range of color and pattern samples of wall panels and trim pieces for Architect's selection. Submit two samples of selected products. C. Submit cleaning and maintenance instructions in accordance with Section 01 77 00. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials clearly labeled to identify Manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade and fire hazard classification. B. Store horizontally in original undamaged packages. 1.3 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Install materials when temperature and humidity conditions approximate conditions that will exist when building is occupied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the specified Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements. 1. Kemlite Company, Joliet, IL (800) 435-0080. www.kemlite.com 2. Marlite www.marlite.com 3. Crane Composites www.cranecomposites.com 4. Koroseal Wall Protection Systems, A Division of RKF International Corporation, www.korogard.com H&C FRP WALL PANELS 09 77 33-2 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Materials shall be new, of uniform quality, suitable and without defects affecting the strength or service of the structure. B. Location: 1. Culinary 622, Serving 622-A, Hall 600-C: full height to ceiling. 2. Custodial Rooms at mop sink & hot water heaters. 3. Laundry Rooms at Washing/Drying machines. 4. Hall 650-C @ Genuis Bar (Korogard, Wall Covering) C. FRP Panels: Fiberglass reinforced plastic panels complying with the following: 1. Class: Class I (A) FR panels. 2. Thickness: 0.090. 3. Texture: Textured, non-directional 4. Color: White. 5. Substrate: As indicated on Drawings or as selected by Architect. 6. Substrate thickness: 1/2 inch unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 7. Fabrication: The FRP laminate shall not delaminated from the substrate when edges are securely fastened to an adequate structural system, and when joints and edges are protected with a sealant as approved by the panel manufacturer and suitable vinyl or metal division bars. a. Dimensional Tolerances: 1) Width: +0 inch, -1/8 inch 2) Length +1/8 inch D. Wall Covering: Rigid high-impact sheet complying with the following: 1. Class: Class I (A) panels. 2. Thickness: 0.040. 3. Texture: Cashmere Textured 4. Color: As selected by Architect from Metallic Options 5. Substrate: As indicated on Drawings or as selected by Architect. 6. Substrate thickness: 1/2 inch unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 7. Fabrication: The wall covering laminate with decorative cap shall not delaminated from the substrate when edges are securely fastened to an adequate structural system, and when joints and edges are protected with a sealant as approved by the panel manufacturer and suitable vinyl or metal division bars. a. Dimensional Tolerances: 1) Width: +0 inch, -1/8 inch 2) Length +1/8 inch H&C FRP WALL PANELS 09 77 33-3 E. Adhesive for panel installation: Manufacturer's recommended type for use with selected materials, waterproof, mildew resistant nonstaining type. F. Edge Sealant: Type "E" clear mildew resistant silicone sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00, or mildew resistant sealant recommended by manufacturer for sealing panel edges and moldings, around all edges at walls, ceiling and base. G. Moldings: All molding shall be 1-piece vinyl of the following types, color to match FRP. 1. Panel Edges: "J" type Cap molding. 2. Panel to Panel: "H" type Division Bar molding. 3. Inside Corner: "J" type Inside Corner molding with radius edge. 4. Outside Corner: "J" type Outside Corner molding with extended leg. 5. Ceiling: "J" type Ceiling molding with radius edge, or use inside corner molding. H. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard nylon drive pins. I. Miscellaneous Items: Furnish and install supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation whether or not specified or indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine substrate and conditions under which the material is to be installed. 2. Verify that surfaces, when tested with moisture meter, have proper moisture content. 3. Verify that nails and screws are recessed, with joints and depressions taped, finish and sealed. 4. Remove contaminants from areas to be covered. 5. Do not proceed with Work until Work of other Trades which passes through wall covering has been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 6. Start of Work indicates acceptance of responsibility for performance and any required remedial Work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install panels in accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions using full sheet mastic coverage method plus nylon fasteners. B. Make joints with 1/8 inch space for expansion and use moldings designed for each condition for the Project. H&C FRP WALL PANELS 09 77 33-4 C. Bevel back edges of panels with block plane to permit proper fit into moldings. D. Place a continuous bead of sealant in the receiver channel of all moldings immediately prior to installation of FRP panels. Place continuous bead of sealant at all edges and tool to smooth, slightly concave shape. E. If one end of panel must be mechanically fastened, do not fasten the other end. F. Remove plumbing escutcheons, switchplates, wall plates, and surface-mounted fixtures, and cut wall paneling evenly to fit. Replace items after completion of Work. G. Where applicable, install paneling before installation of plumbing, casings, bases, cabinets and other items to be applied over paneling. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive and smudges with soft cloth and mineral spirits. END OF SECTION 09 77 33 H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-1 SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Painting as specified and as noted on Drawings. Surfaces requiring finishing and left unfinished by the requirements of other Sections shall be painted or finished as part of the Work of this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Touch-Up: Painting of items missed by painter at no additional cost to Owner. B. Re-Paint: Repairs to paint work for damages caused by other trades. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit schedule of manufacturers of products required for the Work, together with specifications recommended by each manufacturer. B. Samples: Submit samples of each type of finish specified. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor a color schedule of colors selected either from manufacturer's stock colors or specially requested color mixes before Work is begun. 2. Submit two 8 inch x 10 inch samples of each color, including the correct sheen and texture, on heavy cardboard or masonry. Submit sealer and stain finishes on material of the same quality and species of wood on which that particular finish shall be used. Rejected samples shall be resubmitted until approved. 3. Samples shall be submitted at least 30 days prior to the start of painting work. Label and identify each sample as to location and application. Upon submittal of color samples, minor variations or changes in color selection may be requested by the Architect and new samples ordered, until final color approval. C. Mock-up: Provide sample as part of mock-up construction per section 04 22 00. Coordinate with General Contractor and install all necessary finish accessories for exterior purposes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Preparation, application and workmanship shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and applicable provisions of the following: H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-2 1. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA) "Painting Specification Manual" and "Standards". a. PDCA P1-92, "Touch-Up Painting and Damage Repair - Financial Responsibility:" A properly painted surface shall be as defined in this Standard. b. PDCA P2-92, "Third Party Inspection Qualifications and Responsibilities." c. PDCA P3-93, "Designation of Paint Colors." d. PDCA P4-94, "Responsibilities for Inspection and Acceptance of Surfaces Prior to Painting and Decorating." e. PDCA P5-94, "Benchmark Sample Procedures for Paint and Other Decorative Coating Systems." 2. Gypsum Association - GA210, "Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's sealed containers, legends and labels, intact. B. Storage: 1. Adequately protect against damage while stored at site. 2. In no case shall the amount or method of materials stored exceed the amount permitted or the manner allowed by local ordinances, state laws, or fire underwriter regulations. 1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply exterior paint in damp or rainy weather or until after the surface has dried thoroughly from the effects of such weather. 1. Do not apply varnish or paint when temperature is below 50 degrees F.. Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sunlight. 2. During interior application, maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F. unless otherwise directed by Architect or manufacturer's printed instructions. Hold temperature as constant as possible. 3. Provide adequate ventilation at all times so the humidity cannot rise above the dew point of the coldest surface to be painted. 4. Moisture-containing surfaces, such as concrete, stucco and cement plaster shall have a moisture content of less than 8 percent as measured by moisture meter. Remove surface salt deposits prior to painting. Verify that pH is neutral, or within acceptable limits of Paint Manufacturer. Paint after thoroughly cured. H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-3 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of the Work, furnish Owner with one fresh gallon of each type and color of paint and finish used on this Project. Label containers with manufacturer's name, batch, color, shelf life, instructions, and cautions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following manufacturers, except as otherwise approved by Architect, subject to compliance with specification requirements. 1. Dunn-Edwards Corporation (Arizona Representative: Tim Garver, 602/714-7280) www.dunnedwards.com 2. Frazee Industries (Arizona Representative: Chris Cook, 623/606-1130) www.frazeepaint.com 3. ICI Paints (Arizona Representative: Marv Nance, 480/784-4000) www.icipaintstored.com 4. Kelly-Moore Paint Co. (Arizona Representative: Bob Kietzman, 602/272-7993) www.kellymoore.com 5. PPG (Arizona Representative: James Hicks, 602/956-1150) www.ppg.com 6. Sherwin Williams (Arizona Representative: Chris Cook, 623/606-1130) www.sherwin- williams.com 7. Tnemec (Arizona Representative: Teri Hand, 480/951-8686) www.tnemec.com 2.2 MATERIALS A. Provide materials in accordance with the Schedule of Paint Products at the end of this Section as applicable to project. Contractor shall provide either waterborne or solventborne products at contractor's option and as follows: 1. Waterborne: a. Provide where low odor and fast dry are desired. b. Non-blocking materials shall be used for doors, door jambs, railings and other locations subject to handling, or where surfaces will come into contact with other painted surfaces or belongings. 2. Solventborne: a. Provide where harder finish is required (such as "wet" areas) and odor will not create problems with occupants. b. These products shall not be used where color retention is a concern. Verify with Architect. H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-4 3. Materials used shall comply with applicable Federal and local air pollution regulations, lead content laws, and current VOC requirements. If products listed in Schedule of Paint Products located at the end of this Section are not in compliance with regulations, laws, or requirements, Contractor shall notify Architect and shall provide information regarding substitute products. B. Basic painting materials such as linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, thinners, driers, and other similar products, shall be of highest quality, made by reputable, recognized manufacturers, and have identifying labels on containers. Paint materials shall be factory fresh. C. Alternate materials submitted for prior approval shall have qualities and materials equal to the other listed manufacturer's scheduled, top of the line, first quality products. Materials selected for coating systems for each type of surface shall be the products of a single manufacturer. D. Standard Gloss Range: Provide paints in accordance with the following MPI standard ranges as measured in accordance with ASTM D523, and as indicated on the drawings: MPI Gloss and Sheen Standards Gloss @ 60º Sheen @ 85º Gloss Level 1 – traditional matte finish – flat max. 5 units, and max. 10 units Gloss Level 2 – high side sheen flat – ‘velvet-like’ finish max. 10 units, and 10-35 units Gloss Level 3 – traditional ‘eggshell-like’ finish 10-25 units, and 10-35 units Gloss Level 4 – ‘satin-like’ finish 20-35 units, and min. 35 units Gloss Level 5 – traditioinal semi-gloss 35-70 units Gloss Level 6 – traditional gloss 70-85 units Gloss Level 7 – a high gloss more than 85 units E. Paints shall be ready mixed except for field catalyzed coatings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report in writing with a copy to Architect, conditions detrimental to Work. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Before painting, remove hardware, accessories, electrical plates, lighting fixtures and similar items and protect. 1. Provide “Wet-Paint” signs and other barricades and protections as required to protect adjacent surfaces and work of other trades, whether being painted or not. 2. Mask permanent labels. 3. Provide, distribute, and maintain a sufficient supply of clean drop cloths and other protective coverings. H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-5 4. Protect foliage and other exterior finished surfaces from contact with cleaning materials and thoroughly flush with water after contact. 5. On completion of each space, replace above items. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: 1. Surfaces requiring painting or finishing shall be thoroughly dry and cured, free of dirt, dust, rust, stains, scale, mildew, wax, grease, oil, deteriorated substrates, bond-breakers, efflorescence and other foreign matter detrimental to the coating’s adhesion and performance. Repair voids, cracks, nicks and other surface defects with appropriate patching material. Finish flush with surrounding surfaces and match adjacent finish texture. 2. Spot prime marred or damaged shop coats on metal surfaces with appropriate metal primer. 3. Determine moisture content of plaster, stucco, cementitious materials, wood and other moisture-holding materials by use of a reliable electronic moisture meter. 4. Determine alkalinity of plaster, stucco and other cementitious materials by performing appropriate tests. 5. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content or alkalinity exceeds that which is allowed by paint manufacturer. B. Existing Surfaces: 1. Clean, sand, patch, repair and prepare existing surfaces to be painted so that such existing finished surfaces are indistinguishable from new surfaces. 2. Surfaces which cannot be prepared or painted as specified shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Architect in writing. 3. Remove loose peeling and checked paint. 4. Remove mildew by washing the surface with a commercially available mildew killer/remover. 5. Remove efflorescence by wire brushing, power brushing or washing. Thoroughly rinse surfaces wire brushed. After removal of efflorescence, wash the surface with a commercially available cleaner acceptable to the manufacturer of the substrate. 6. Remove existing wall covering and wash the surface to remove paste residue. Seal surface before making any surface repairs. 7. Dull and roughen glossy surfaces to obtain proper adhesion by either sanding, washing with a tri-sodium phosphate solution, or treating with a liquid deglossing compound. 8. Overlap and feather edge spot-primed areas. H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-6 C. Wood: 1. Sandpaper to smooth and even surface and then dust off. After primer or stain coat has been applied, thoroughly fill nail holes and other surface imperfections with putty tinted with primer or stain to match wood color. Sand woodwork between coats to a smooth surface. Cover knots and sap streaks with a thin coat of shellac, or seal with a suitable stain blocking sealer. 2. Finish door and window edges after final fitting. Finish interior of cabinets in the same manner as the exterior unless otherwise specified. Seal interior of drawers unless otherwise specified. 3. Backpriming: a. Backprime exterior woodwork, which is to receive paint finish, with exterior primer paint. b. Backprime interior woodwork, which is to receive paint or enamel finish, with enamel undercoater paint. c. Backprime interior and exterior woodwork, which is to receive stain and/or varnish finish with VOC compliant varnish acceptable to the Architect. d. Back-prime wood trim before installation. 4. Where existing stained surfaces are indicated to be coated with a transparent stain, test apply stain to small area where directed by Architect and obtain Architects approval of color. D. Steel and Iron: 1. Remove grease, oil, mill scale, rust and rust scale and touch-up chipped or abraded places on items that have been shop coated. Remove and reprime incompatible or damaged shop applied primers. Comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations for cleaning of uncoated steel and iron surfaces. 2. When area will be exposed to view, sandpaper the entire primed area smooth, feather the edge of surrounding undamaged prime coat and spot prime in a manner to eliminate evidence of repair. 3. Where steel or iron at existing Work have a heavy coating of scale, remove by sand blasting, sanding, descaling, grinding or wire brushing, as necessary, to produce a satisfactory surface for painting. E. Galvanized Metal and Aluminum: 1. Thoroughly clean by wiping surfaces with a non-hydrocarbon solvent that will not leave an oily residue. Apply surface conditioner or vinyl-wash pretreatment as required for proper adhesion if required by paint manufacturer. Prime galvanized metal with galvanized iron primer as recommended by paint manufacturer. A test sample of the complete painting system should be applied and checked for adhesion before final painting begins. 2. Clean visible portions of throats of galvanized steel ductwork with solvent; wipe dry with clean rags and paint flat black. H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-7 F. Concrete: 1. The method of surface preparation shall be at Contractor's discretion, provided the results are satisfactory to the Architect, and the method is in compliance with applicable codes and requirements. 2. Clean and prepare surfaces of tilt-up precast concrete wall panels to be painted by power washing surface to remove all efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils and release agents. 3. Repair surfaces to be painted prior to application of prime and finish coat(s). Apply a tinted primer to the substrate to help identify surface imperfections. After the primer has thoroughly dried, patch, fill and repair surface imperfections to match and flush-out with adjacent finish texture and profile. 4. Before first paint coat is applied, spot prime nails and other exposed metal occurring in the surfaces with a rust inhibitive primer as recommended by paint manufacturer. G. Plaster and Gypsum Board Surfaces: 1. Fill cracks, holes or imperfections with compatible patching material and smooth off to match adjoining surfaces. Before painting, surfaces shall be first tested for dryness with a moisture testing device. 2. Apply no paint or sealer on gypsum board or plaster when the moisture content exceeds 8 percent. Test sufficient areas in each space and as often as necessary to determine if the surface has the proper moisture content for painting. If the moisture content is between 8 percent and 12 percent, prime with alkali resistant primer. 3. If 8 percent or less, prime with specified primer. Remove the dry salt deposits from plaster surfaces by brushing with a stiff brush before painting. H. Acoustical Surfaces (Lay-in acoustical ceiling panels, acoustical wall panels, etc.): 1. Thoroughly vacuum clean surfaces to remove dust and debris from acoustical surface pores. Use a soft brush attachment that will not damage or loosen acoustical surface. 2. Seal surface stains with a suitable stain blocking sealer that will not fill pores of acoustical surface. 3.4 WORKMANSHIP A. Apply products to achieve paint manufacturer's printed specifications for dry mil thickness B. Apply each coat of paint evenly and comply with manufacturer's drying time before applying subsequent coats. C. Finished work shall be uniform, match approved color, texture and coverage, and free from runs, sags, clogging or excessive flooding. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors sharp and clean, without overlapping. Where varnishes or enamel is used, lightly sand, dust and clean undercoats to obtain a smooth finish coat. Sand carefully between each coat of finish on smooth surfaces for good adhesion of subsequent coats. H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-8 D. Where clear finishes are required, ensure tinted fillers match wood. Work fillers well into the grain before set. Wipe excess from the surface. E. Where specific mil thicknesses are required, check thickness by the following methods: 1. Over ferrous metal - Elecometer Film Gauge 2. Other surfaces - Tooke Dry Mil Inspection Gauge 3.5 APPLICATION A. The number of coats scheduled is the minimum number of coats required. Additional coat(s) shall be applied, at no additional cost to the Owner, to completely hide base material, provide uniform color and to produce satisfactory finish results. B. Apply coatings without thinning except as specifically required by label directions, or required by these specifications. In such cases, thinning shall be the minimum reduction permitted. C. Priming will not be required on items delivered with prime or shop coats, unless otherwise specified. Touch up prime coats applied by others as required to ensure an even primed surface before applying finish coat. D. Block Fillers: Provide level of block fill as scheduled to conform with the following: 1. Level 1 – Regular Fill: Minimum block fill, reduces irregularity in masonry profile. One coat, spray applied. 2. Level 2 – Medium Full Fill: Masonry profile slightly reduced. One coat, spray applied and back-rolled. 3. Level 3 – Full Fill: Minimum block fill required for semi-gloss and gloss finishes. Use where conformance with health regulations is required. Number of coats as required to conceal most of masonry texture, spray applied and back-rolled. 4. Level 4 – High Density Fill: Minimum of three coats. 1st coat massaged and forced into masonry texture to assure uniform high density. 2nd coat, with build sufficient to fully conceal masonry texture and joints. Additional coats as required to level. Spray apply coats, back-roll and squeegee final coat. Add sand to final coat to achieve light sand texture where indicated. E. Plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical: 1. Exterior and interior exposed water, gas, waste piping, sprinkler piping, conduit, lighting and electrical panels, telephone terminal boxes, galvanized ducts and insulated ducts, shall be painted in areas other than mechanical rooms, unless otherwise scheduled. 2. Paint exposed unfinished fixtures, metal ducts, switch boxes, control panels, devices, starters, junction boxes, vents, drains, and other similar items, as directed by Architect. F. Spray paint prime coated (not pre-finished) grilles and registers with enamel or lacquer to match walls and ceilings. Paint materials shall not sag, run or bind movable parts of grilles, registers, louvers, baffles and other similar items. H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-9 1. Throats of ducts shall be given one coat of flat black paint, wherever visibility of the interior of the duct is allowed through registers or other similar items. At fiber lined duct, use black latex paint. 2. Examine the Mechanical and Electrical Drawings and Specifications to determine the amount of exposed work to be painted. G. Paint exposed surfaces of every member, paint items inaccessible after installation before installation, if required to be painted. Paint all exposed surfaces of overhead roof or floor structures, including deck, except where specifically indicated not to be painted. H. Edges, tops, and bottoms of wood doors shall be sealed and finished with the same finish as the door faces, to meet door manufacturer's warranty requirements. Verify edge color with Architect as different colors may be selected for each face. I. Paint items fitted with finish hardware after hardware has been temporarily removed. J. Heating and other equipment on or adjacent to walls or surfaces scheduled for painting, shall be disconnected, using workmen skilled in appropriate trades and moved temporarily to permit painting of surface. Following completion of painting, replace and reconnect items. K. Each succeeding pigmented coat shall be distinguishably lighter than the previous coat. Tint prime and undercoats to a color similar to finish coat. Each coat of material applied must be inspected and approved by the Architect before the application of the succeeding specified coat; otherwise no credit for the concealed coat will be given, and the Contractor shall assume the responsibility to recoat work in question. Contractor shall notify the Architect when each coat is completed. L. Brush, wipe or roll stain in 2 coat application. Avoid lap marks by maintaining "wet-edge" continually being merged with existing liquid coverage and stop only at natural edges, turns and breaking places. M. Do not paint over Underwriters' Laboratory labels, fusible links, exposed sprinkler heads and other similar items. N. Paint piping, electrical or other equipment, conduit, vents and other similar items, on roof or other exterior locations as directed by Architect. O. Finish closets and the interior of cabinets with same color as adjoining rooms, unless otherwise specified. Finish other surfaces same as nearest or adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise shown or scheduled. P. Paint surface of walls which will be concealed by cabinets and other items mounted on or attached to walls. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. At completion, do touch-up and re-paint work and leave finish surfaces in good condition. H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-10 3.7 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work, remove misplaced paint and stain spots or spills. Leave Work in clean condition acceptable to Architect. B. Remove oily rags and waste daily, taking precaution to prevent fire. 3.8 SCHEDULES A. Color Schedule: 1. Architect will provide a complete schedule of colors. Colors may be selected from various manufacturer's color palettes. Manufacturer supplying paint shall match these colors. Contractor shall prepare duplicate set of samples of treatments for major surfaces. If a specific surface or item receiving a paint finish does not have a specific color indicated or selected by the Architect, obtain clarification from the Architect. Do not assume the confirmation of the same color on the adjacent surfaces. 2. Final coat of paint shall be not be applied until colors have been approved by the Architect. B. Schedule of Finishes: Refer to the "Finish Schedule" on the Drawing for designated finishes of areas. C. Finishing of the following listed items and materials will not be required and shall be protected: 1. Stainless Steel, brass, bronze, copper, monel, chromium, anodized aluminum; specially finished articles such as porcelain enamel, plastic coated fabrics, and baked enamel, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Finished products such as ceramic tile, glass, brick, resilient flooring and acoustical tiles, board and metal tees. 3. Pre-finished products such as wood folding partitions and doors, wood classroom and laboratory casework, bleachers and elevator cabs. 3.9 EXTERIOR PAINT FINISHES A. This schedule uses the generic names listed in the Schedule of Paint Products. B. System 101 (Ferrous Metals): Apply to exposed steel such as beams and column connectors, metal doors and frames, grilles, light fixture standards in parking areas, metal handrails, sectional and coiling doors, canopy overhangs and other exposed miscellaneous ferrous metals that are not pre-finished. H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-11 1. 1st Coat: Ferrous Metal Primer (Red or White color as applicable to finish coats). Sherwin-Williams ProCryl Primer, B66W310 applied 5.0-10.0 mils wet. 2. 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd coat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. 3rd Coat: a. Flat: Paint - Waterborne (100% Acrylic) (if noted on Drawings). Sheen shall be 4 to 6% per a 86 degree gloss meter. Sherwin-Williams A-100 Flat, A6-150 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. b. Semi-Gloss unless noted otherwise. Enamel, Semi-Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non-Blocking). Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic, B66-650 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. c. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non- Blocking). Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Actylic, B66-600 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. C. System 102 (Galvanized Metals): Apply to exposed galvanized metal such as copings, louvers and metal flashings. 1. Clean metal to remove foreign matter or any coating applied by the metal manufacturer. Apply Surface Conditioner or Vinyl Wash Pretreatment (if required by paint manufacturer). 2. 1st Coat: Galvanized Metal Primer. Sherwin-Williams ProCryl Primer, B66W310 applied 5.0-10.0 mils wet. 3. 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd coat as recommended by manufacturer. 4. 3rd Coat: a. Flat: Paint, Flat - Waterborne (100% Acrylic) unless noted otherwise. Sherwin-Williams A-100 Flat, A6-150 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. b. Semi-Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi-Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non-Blocking). Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic, B66-650 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. c. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non- Blocking). Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Actylic, B66-600 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. D. System 103 (Aluminum): Apply to exterior louvers and other miscellaneous exposed exterior unfinished aluminum surfaces. 1. Clean metal to remove foreign matter or any coating applied by the metal manufacturer. Apply Surface Conditioner or Vinyl Wash Pretreatment. 2. 1st Coat: Aluminum Primer. Sherwin-Williams ProCryl Primer, B66W310 applied 5.0-10.0 mils wet. 3. 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd coat as recommended by manufacturer. 4. 3rd Coat: H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-12 a. Flat: Paint, Flat - Waterborne (100% Acrylic) (if noted on Drawings) Sheen shall be 4 to 6% per a 85 degree gloss meter. Sherwin-Williams A-100 Flat, A6-150 Series applied 4.0 mils wet b. Semi-Gloss unless noted otherwise. Enamel, Semi-Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non-Blocking). Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic, B66-650 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. c. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non- Blocking). Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Actylic, B66-600 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. E. System 104 (Concrete Masonry Units): Apply to exterior concrete masonry unit construction indicated to be painted. (Refer to Section 07 19 00 “Water Repellents and Masonry Stains” for use on concrete masonry units indicated to be stained.) Roller apply 2nd or 3rd coat. 1. 1st Coat: Concrete Masonry Block Filler. Provide Level 2 or 3 Fill as required by gloss. Sherwin-Williams Block Filler, B25W25 applied 16.0 mils wet. 2. 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd Coat as recommended by manufacturer. 3. 3rd Coat: a. Flat: Paint, Flat - Waterborne (100% Acrylic) unless noted otherwise. Sheen shall be 4 to 6% per a 85 degree gloss meter. One of the coats shall be roller applied. Sherwin-Williams A-100 Flat, A6-150 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. b. Semi-Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi-Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non-Blocking). Sherwin-Williams A-100 Satin, A82-100 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. c. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Gloss – Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non- Blocking). Sherwin-Williams A-100 Gloss, A8 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. F. System 105 (Concrete and Stucco): Apply to exterior cementitious surfaces as indicated or noted, including tilt-up precast concrete. Precast concrete lintels, beams, caps, sills, etc. at exterior of buildings shall not be painted, unless specifically noted. Roller apply 2nd or 3rd coat. 1. 1st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer. Sherwin-Williams Loxon Primer, A24W8300 applied 5.3-8.0 mils wet. 2. 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd coat as recommended by manufacturer. 3. 3rd Coat: a. Flat: Paint, Flat - Waterborne (100% Acrylic) unless noted otherwise. Sheen shall be 4 to 6% per a 85 degree gloss meter. One of the coats shall be roller applied. Sherwin-Williams A-100 Flat, A6-150 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. b. Semi-Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi-Gloss - Waterborne (100% H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-13 Acrylic - Non-Blocking). Sherwin-Williams A-100 Satin, A82-100 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. c. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Gloss – Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non- Blocking). Sherwin-Williams A-100 Gloss, A8 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. G. System 106 (Exterior Wood): Apply to wood fascias, soffits, trim, wood posts, columns, beams and exposed trim and framing where indicated to be painted. 1. 1st Coat: Exterior Wood Primer - Waterborne (100% Acrylic) unless noted otherwise. 2. 2nd and 3rd Coats: Sherwin-Williams Exterior Latex Wood Primer, B42W8041 applied at 4.0 mils wet. a. Flat - Rough-Sawn Wood: Paint, Flat - Waterborne (100% Acrylic) unless noted otherwise. Sheen shall be 4 to 6% per a 60 degree gloss meter. Sherwin-Williams A-100 Flat, A6-150 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. b. Semi-Gloss - Smooth Surface Wood (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi-Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non-Blocking). Sherwin-Williams A-100 Satin, A82-100 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. c. Gloss - Smooth Surface Wood (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non-Blocking). Sherwin-Williams A-100 Gloss, A8 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. H. System 107 (Exterior Gypsum Board): Apply to exterior grade gypsum board soffits. 1. 1st Coat: Exterior Gypsum Board Primer/Undercoater – Waterborne unless noted otherwise. Sherwin-Williams ProBlock 0 Latex Primer, B51-600 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. 2. 2nd and 3rd Coats: Flat Paint - Waterborne (100% Acrylic) unless noted otherwise. Sheen shall be 4 to 6% per a 85 degree gloss meter. One of the coats shall be roller applied. Sherwin-Williams A-100 Flat, A6-150 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. I. System 108 (Sealer - Masonry Parapet Top Surfaces): Apply in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 1. 1st Coat: Tamms Industries "Tammolastic" elastomeric acrylic resin based coating, or VIP Ter Polymer Sealants 5000 series. (These products are not listed in the Schedule of Paint Products located at the end of this Section.) 2. 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd coat. 3. 3rd Coat: VIP Last-O-Coat 8000 series. 3.10 INTERIOR PAINT FINISHES A. This schedule uses the generic names listed in the Schedule of Paint Products. H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-14 B. System 201 (Ferrous Metals): Apply to exposed metals such as steel doors, hollow metal frames, metal beam saddles, columns, grilles and registers, stair and hand railings, ladders, and other exposed miscellaneous metals. 1. 1st Coat: Ferrous Metal Primer (Red or White color as applicable to finish coats). Sherwin-Williams ProCryl Primer, B66W310 applied 5.0-10.0 mils wet. 2. 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd Coat as recommended by manufacturer. 3. 3rd Coat: a. Eggshell: Enamel, Eggshell. Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic, B66-656 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. b. Semi-Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi-Gloss. Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic, B66-650 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet.c. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel Gloss. Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Actylic, B66-600 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. C. System 202 (Interior Wood Finishes - Enamel): Apply to wood door frames, columns, exposed and concealed casework and millwork, wood-window wall construction, medium density plywood surfaces, shelving, roll-up wood doors, perforated and plain type hardboard, particleboard and other exposed miscellaneous wood and trim, except wood specified for a transparent or stain finish. 1. 1st Coat: Enamel Undercoater. Sherwin-Williams ProBlock 0 Latex Primer, B51-600 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. 2. 2nd and 3rd Coat: a. Eggshell: Enamel, Eggshell Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Actylic, B66-660 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. b. Semi-Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi-Gloss Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic, B66-650 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. c. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Gloss Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Actylic, B66-600 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. D. System 203 (Interior Wood Finish - Flat): Apply to plywood telephone backing boards and other miscellaneous softwood as noted, specified or scheduled. 1. 1st Coat: Enamel Undercoater/Primer. Sherwin-Williams ProBlock Latex, B51-600 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. 2. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Flat Paint, - Waterborne (Vinyl Acrylic) Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 0 VOC, B30-2600 Series applied 4.0 mils wet per coat. H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-15 E. System 204 (Galvanized Metals): Apply to exposed galvanized metal. 1. Clean metal to remove foreign matter or any coating applied by the metal manufacturer. Apply Surface Conditioner or Vinyl Wash Pretreatment (if required by paint manufacturer) 2. 1st Coat: Galvanized Metal Primer Sherwin-Williams ProCryl Primer, B66W310 applied 5.0-10.0 mils wet. 3. 2nd and 3rd Coats: a. Eggshell: Enamel, Eggshell Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Actylic, B66-660 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. b. Semi-Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi-Gloss Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic, B66-650 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. c. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel Gloss Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Actylic, B66-600 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. F. System 205 (Aluminum): Apply to interior louvers and other miscellaneous exposed unfinished aluminum surfaces. 1. Clean metal to remove foreign matter or any coating applied by the metal manufacturer. Apply Surface Conditioner or Vinyl Wash Pretreatment. 2. 1st Coat: Aluminum Primer Sherwin-Williams ProCryl Primer, B66W310 applied 5.0-10.0 mils wet. 3. 2nd and 3rd Coats: a. Eggshell: Enamel, Eggshell Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Actylic, B66-660 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. b. Semi-Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi-Gloss Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic, B66-650 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. c. Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Gloss Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Actylic, B66-600 Series applied 6.0-12.0 mils wet. G. System 206 (Gypsum Board, Plaster and Concrete - Wet Areas): Apply to gypsum board, plaster and concrete surfaces in toilet rooms, janitor rooms, kitchens, and other areas as scheduled. 1. 1st Coat: Enamel Undercoater - Solventborne, unless noted otherwise. Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 0 Primer, B28-2600 applied 4.0 mils wet. 2. 2nd and 3rd Coats: a. Eggshell (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Eggshell - Solventborne. H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-16 b. Semi-Gloss: Enamel, Semi-Gloss - Solventborne or Enamel - Solventborne (Epoxy-Polyester). Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646-100, B58-620 Series applied 7.0-13.5 mils wet. H. System 207 (Gypsum Board, Plaster and Concrete - Non-Wet Areas): Apply to gypsum board, plaster and concrete except for wet areas. 1. 1st Coat: Waterborne Primer/Sealer. (Solventborne {Alkyd} shall be used at new untextured smooth gypsum board surfaces covered with powdery or unstable soft top joint cement) Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 0 Primer, B28-2600 applied 4.0 mils wet2. 2nd and 3rd Coat: a. Eggshell: Enamel, Eggshell Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 0 Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. b. Semi-Gloss (if noted on Drawings): Enamel, Semi-Gloss Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 0 Semi-Gloss, B31-2600 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. c. Flat (if noted on Drawings): Paint, Flat Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 0 Flat, B30-2600 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. I. System 208 (Ferrous Metal - Chemical Resistant Finish): NOT USED J. System 209 (Interior Concrete Masonry - Wet Areas): Apply to concrete masonry block units in kitchen, toilet rooms, bathrooms, janitor rooms, vestibules and other walls noted for enamel finish. 1. 1st Coat: Block Filler, w/o Aggregate. Provide Level 4 Full Fill. Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Block Filler, B42W150 applied 16.0-21.0 mils wet. 2. 2nd Coat: Primer/Sealer or same material as 3rd Coat as recommended by manufacturer. 3. 3rd and 4th Coats: Enamel, Semi-Gloss - Solventborne or Enamel - Solventborne (Epoxy-Polyester). Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646-100, B58-620 Series applied 7.0-13.5 mils wet. K. System 210 (Interior Concrete Masonry or Plaster - Extremely Wet Areas): Apply to surfaces such as showers. 1. 1st Coat: Block Filler, w/o Aggregate - Solventborne (Polyamide-Epoxy) Provide Level 3 Full Fill. Sherwin-Williams Kem Cati-Coat HS Epoxy Filler/Sealer, B42W400 applied 14.0-28.0 mils wet. 2. 2nd and 3rd Coats: Enamel, Gloss - Solventborne (Polyamide-Epoxy). Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646-100, B58-620 Series applied 7.0-13.5 mils wet. L. System 211 (Interior Concrete Masonry - Non-Wet Areas): Apply to exposed interior concrete masonry block units except areas specified above for enamel finish. H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-17 1. 1st Coat: Block Filler, w/o Aggregate. Provide Level 1, 2 or 3 Fill as required by gloss. Sherwin-Williams Block Filler, B25W25 applied 16 mils wet. 2. 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd Coat as recommended by manufacturer. 3. 3rd Coat: Enamel, Semi-Gloss - Waterborne. Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 0 Semi-Gloss, B31-2600 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. M. System 212 (Acoustic Ceilings): Apply to existing acoustic panel or tile ceilings. 1. 1st and 2nd Coat: Acoustic Paint. Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 0 Flat, B20-2600 Series applied 4.0 mils wet. 3.11 CLEAR WOOD FINISHES A. This schedule uses the generic names listed in the Schedule of Paint Products. B. System 301 (Stained and Clear Finish): Apply to wood doors, handrails and chair rails. Fill open grain hardwood such as Oak. 1. Stained and Finished with Clear Satin or Gloss Varnish - Solventborne: a. 1st Coat: Semi-Transparent Stain - Solventborne (Oil) Sherwin-Williams Wood Classics 250, A49-800 Series. b. 2nd Coat: Varnish, Gloss – Polyurethane (Solventborne) c. 3rd Coat: 1) Satin: Varnish, Satin – Polyurethane (Solventborne) Sherwin-Williams Wood Classics Polyurethane Varnish, A67F1 applied 4.0 mils wet. 2) Gloss: Varnish, Gloss – Polyurethane (Solventborne) Sherwin-Williams Wood Classics Polyurethane Varnish, A67V1 applied 4.0 mils wet. 2. Stained and Finished with Clear Satin or Gloss Varnish– Waterborne: a. 1st Coat: Semi-Transparent Stain - Solventborne (Oil) Sherwin-Williams Wood Classics 250, A49-800 Series b. 2nd Coat: Varnish, Gloss – Polyurethane (Waterborne) c. 3rd Coat: 1) Satin: Varnish, Satin – Polyurethane (Waterborne) Sherwin-Williams Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish, A68F90 applied 3.2-4 mils wet. 2) Gloss: Varnish, Gloss – Polyurethane (Waterborne)r H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-18 Sherwin-Williams Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish, A68V91 applied 3.2-4 mils wet. 3.12 HIGH PERFORMANCE FINISH SYSTEMS A. General: Products included in the following high performance systems are not listed in the Schedule of Paint Products located at the end of this Section. B. System 401 (Exterior Steel): Apply to cleaned bare exterior steel or lightly rusted, but clean, exterior steel ornamentation, trellis and canopies indicated to be coated with a clear protective coating. 1. Single Clear Coat Protective Gloss Finish: Ameron PSX 700 Engineered Siloxane clear coating applied in one or two coats at 5 to 7 mils DFT. C. System 402 (Exterior Steel): Apply one of the following to cleaned bare exterior steel ornamentation, trellis and canopies indicated to be coated with a clear protective coating. 1. Single Clear Coat Protective Gloss Finish: Sherwin Williams Fast Clad DTM Urethane, Clear Base, B65T854/B65V850, applied in one or two coats at 5 to 7 mils DFT. 2. Clear Protective Gloss Finish: XIM Products, Inc. 903 Super Clear #2132 water reducible 3 part acrylic polyurethane coating, including #2133 Activator and #2134 Reducer. Mix in strict accordance with manufacturer’s directions and apply by brush or spray to thickness as recommended. 3. Clear Protective Gloss Finish: PPG Durethane DTM urethane mastic 95-3300, applied in one or two coats at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT per coat. D. System 403 (Exterior Steel): Apply to exterior steel ornamentation, trellis, and canopies indicated to be painted. 1. 1st Coat: Sherwin Williams DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish or International PC Intercryl 520 Primer/Finish applied at 2.5 mils DFT or PPG Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial DTM Primer/Finish Enamel 90-712 Series, applied at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT. 2. 2nd Coat: Sherwin Williams DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish or International PC Intercryl 520 Primer/ Finish applied at 4 to 5 mils DFT or PPG Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial DTM Primer/Finish Enamel 90-712 Series, applied at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT. E. System 403 (Exterior Steel): Apply to exterior structural steel, pipes, etc. that are indicated to be painted. 1. Clean steel to SSPC-SP6 (Commercial Blast Cleaning). 2. Single Coat: Tnemec Series 30 Spra-Saf EN Hydrophobic Acrylic Polymer at 4 mils DFT or more as required to achieve full cover. H&C PAINTING 09 91 00-19 Sherwin-Williams SprayLastic Exterior Semi-Gloss, B42W17 Series applied 4.5-9.0 mils wet per coat. END OF SECTION 09 91 00 Specifications and Special Bidding Instructions June 13, 2017 New Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 VOLUME 2 H&C #: 2016-003 For: Town of Fountain Hills HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com H&C MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10 00 00 - 1 SECTION 10 00 00 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Electric Power Cord Reels B. Slip Resistant Tape C. Ansul Pull Station Covers 1.2 DEFINITIONS: A. Furnish and install: Section 01010, Summary of the Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300. B. Indicate condition of substrate, method of attachment, materials, finishes, details of construction, and dimensions. C. Submit manufacturers comprehensive product description including specifications and installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Appliances (1) Kitchen Range: 6.3. ft Capacity Electric Single Oven Range with ZTrue Convection and Easy Clean. (Stainless Steel) (2) Ventilation Fan: Discovery 30" Chimney Hood, wall-mounted in Stainless Steel (3) Refrigerator:22 cu.ft ultra large capacity side by side counter depth refrigetator with ice and water dispenser. (Stainless Steel) (4) Microwave: 1.5 cu. Ft. counter top Microwave Oven with Easyclean (Stainless Steel) (5) Washing Machine: 4.5 cu. Ft. high efficiency front load washer with steam (6) Dryer: 7.4 cu. Ft Electric Dryer with Steam B. Tables (1) Dinning Table: Provided by Owner (2) Out Door Table: Woodard Deluxe 42”D x 74”W Oval Table W/ Trellis Top (3) Community Room Tables: Goodmans (4) Entry Coffee Table: Goodmans C. Chairs H&C MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10 00 00 - 2 (1) Community Room Chairs: WC 420N, Capers Stacking Chair, Flexnet Seat, No Arms (2) Entry Chair: WC 410N, Caper Stacking Chair, Molded Seat, no Arms (3) Dining Chairs: WC 420P, Caper Stacking Chair, Flexnet Seat, fixed Arms (4) Out Door Chairs: PICNIC (5) Reclining Chairs: Goodmans D. Office (1) Office Chairs: AE113AWB (2) Office Desk: Goodmans E. Dorm (1) Dorm Room Desk: Goodmans (2) Dorm Room Chairs: WC 121P, Multi- Purpose Chair, F;exnet Seat, Fixed Arms (3) Mattress Cal-The Sturdy Bed-Chief 12” (WorkingFire) F. Work Out Equipment (1) Tred Mill: Provided by Owner (2) Bench Press: Provided by Owner (3) Exercise Bike: Provided by Owner G. Wall Mounted (1) Dry-erase Board: Goodmans (2) Flat Screen TV: Samsung Flat 32” TV J5003 LED H. Other (1) Wire Shelving: Goodmans (2) SCBA: Goodmans (3) Ice Machine: Manitowoc Ice 530-lb/Day Full Cube Ice Maker w/ 430-lb Bin. Air Cooled, 115v (4) Wash Station: Goodmans (5) Extractor: UW Series hardmount washer extractor - UniMac (6) Geargrid Standard Lockers 20” W X 20” D x 74-1/2” H (7) Alumin Window Awnings: Superior Screens 3’-6” x 2’-0” Alum. Powercoated Slat (8) Kitchen Sink: Kohler “Vault” K3838-3NA Double bowl kitchen sink (9) Breathing Air Cylinder: Eagle Air BH10F3 6000 PSIG air compressor, 2550 Lbs.(kg) (10) Cord Reels: Coxreel, powe cord reels “EZ-PC” series, Model Ex-PC13-5012-4, EZ- COIL w “Quad” 4 plug industrial receptacle (back to back), 10’-15’ cord length, 4conductor with dual circuits. (11) Generator: Generac Generator SD050, 50kW, 3 Phase, 120/208V, 60Hz at 1800 RPM and 400A Automatic Transfer Switch. Number Name QTY Model# Contractor Buy Owner Buy Contractor Install Owner Install A.1 Kitchen Range 1 LRE3193ST X X A.2 Ventilation Fan 1 DHW301 X X A.3 Refrigerator 3 LSXC22426S X X A.4 Microwave 1 LCRT1513ST X X A.5 Dishwasher 1 LDT5665ST A.6 Washing Machine 1 WM3670HVA X A.7 Dryer DLEX3370V X X B.1 Dining 1 Provided by Owner X X H&C MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10 00 00 - 3 Table B.2 Out Door Table 1 Goodmans X X B.3 Community Room Tables 4 Goodmans X X B.4 Entry Coffee Table 1 Goodmans X X C.1 Community Chairs 12 WC 420N X X C.2 Entry Chairs 3 WC 410N X X C.3 Dinning Chairs 10 WC 420P X X C.4 Out Door Chairs 8 PICNIC X X C.5 Reclining Chair 6 Provided by Owner X X D.1 Office Chair 4 AE113AWB X X D.2 Office Desk 2 Goodmans X X E.1 Dorm Room Desks 6 Goodmans E.2 Dorm Chairs 6 WC 121P E.3 Mattress 6 TwinXL-Working Fire X X F.1 Treadmill 2 Provided by Owner X X F.2 Bench Press 1 Provided by Owner X X F.3 Exercise Bike 2 Provided by Owner X X G.1 Dry-erase Board 16 Goodmans X X G.2 TV 8 Samsung- J5003 LED TV X X H.1 Wire Shelving 4 Goodmans X X H.2 SCBA Goodmans H.3 Ice Machine 1 ID0502A161B570 X X H.4 Wash Station Goodmans X X H.5 Extractor 1 UWN045T4V X X H.6 Lockers 20” W X 20” D x 74-1/2” H 1 GearGrid X X H.7 Alumin Window 6 Superior Screens: 3’6”x2’ X X H&C MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10 00 00 - 4 Awnings Alum.Powdercoated Slat H.8 Kitchen Sink 1 K3838-3-NA X X H.9 Breathing Air Cylinder 1 BH10F3 X X H.10 Cord Reels 8 EZ-PC13-5012-4 X X H.11 Generator 1 SD050 & 400A TS X X PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Install miscellaneous items in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and as detailed. B. Generac Generator: Existing generator is located and installed at the current facility. Contractor to disconnect generator and 400A Automatic Transfer Switch, relocate to new fire station, and install existing system within new as indicated on drawings and specifications. Contractor to coordinate time and schedule of removal and installation with Owner. Contractor to protect existing generator during removal and installation. Damage to the generator shall be repaired or replaced with new as directed by Owner. END OF SECTION 10 00 00 H&C VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 10 11 00 - 1 SECTION 10 11 00 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Markerboards. 2. Tackboards. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Tackboard: Framed or unframed, tackable, visual display board assembly. B. Visual Display Board Assembly: Visual display surface that is factory fabricated into composite panel form, either with or without a perimeter frame; includes markerboards, and tackboards. C. Visual Display Surface: Surfaces that are used to convey information visually, including surfaces of markerboards and tackboards. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for visual display surfaces. B. Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations of panel joints. 2. Include sections of typical trim members. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. H&C VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 10 11 00 - 2 B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of fabrics. C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of motor-operated, sliding visual display units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain visual display surfaces from single source from single manufacturer. C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver factory-built visual display surfaces, including factory applied trim, completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured panel size, provide two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site. B. Store visual display surfaces vertically with packing materials between each unit. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display surfaces until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking. H&C VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 10 11 00 - 3 2. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MARKERBOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboards: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of three-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material, and 0.013-inch- thick, porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish. 1. Basis of Design: P3, as manufactured by Alliance Ceramicseel or approved equal by one of the following: a. AARCO Products, Inc. b. ADP Lemco, Inc. c. Aywon. d. Bangor Cork Company, Inc. e. Best-Rite Manufacturing. f. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. g. Egan Visual Inc. h. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc. i. Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group. j. Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc. k. PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company. l. Tri-Best Visual Display Products. 2. Base Metal: 24 or 28 gage coiled enameling steel; alloy type suitable for architectural porcelain application. 3. Porcelain: Specially formulated, glass substances for machine application; Type A, acid resistant or better. Color cover coat as selected by Architect. 4. Steel sheet for porcelain enameling: ASTM A424. 5. Aluminum extrusions: ASTM B221. 6. Related components: Standard with the manufacturer. B. Markerboards: 3/8 inch particleboard or 1/4 inch thick tempered hardboard with aluminum foil backing; 24 or 28 gauge porcelain enameled steel writing surface designed for use with LCS markers; white color. Fasteners to be concealed with removable strip. Trim shall be Naco 990 as manufactured by Nelson-Adams or Revealine as manufactured by Tri-Adco. Continuous map rail at head. C. Clean, treat and nickel dip sheet steel prior to porcelain application. D. Machine apply ground coat of porcelain enamel to both faces of sheet steel. Fuse by firing at not less than 1500 degrees F. E. Machine apply color cover coat to one surface and fuse by firing. F. Fabricate markerboards to 4’-0” high x width (maximum length 10’) and location shown on drawings. H&C VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 10 11 00 - 4 2.2 ACCESSORIES: A. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than .062 inch (1.57mm) thick, extruded aluminum; of size and shape indicated on drawings. B. Field Applied Trim: Manufacturer’s standard snap-on trim with no visible screws or exposed joints. C. Factory Applied Trim: Manufacturer’s standard. D. Chalktray: Manufacturer’s standard, continuous. E. Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast-aluminum end closures. F. Solid Type: Extruded aluminum with ribbed section and smoothly curved exposed ends. G. Map Rail: Provide the following accessories: 1” cork embedded to run full length H. Display rail: Continuous and integral with map rail, fabricated from cork, 1” wide. I. End Stops: located at each end of rail. J. Map Hooks: 6 map hooks for 10’ length boards, 4 hooks for 4’ length boards. K. Flag Holder: Provide (1) per room. L. Paper Holder: Extruded Aluminum, designed to hold paper by clamping action. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of connections before installation of motor-operated, sliding visual display units. C. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display surfaces. D. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth where sliding visual display units will be installed. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. H&C VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 10 11 00 - 5 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards, including dirt, mold, and mildew. C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display surfaces and wall surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation per Manufacturer recommendations. 1. Mounting Height for Grades Pre-K: 24 inches above finished floor to top of chalktray. 2. Mounting Height for Grades 7 and Higher: 36 inches above finished floor to top of chalktray. 3. Provide locking screw at top corner of visual display board at each standard. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one cleaning label to visual display surface in each room. B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. C. Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning. END OF SECTION 10 11 00 H&C TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13 - 1 SECTION 10 21 13 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Metal toilet compartments and urinal screens as shown on Drawings and as specified of the following type: 1. Compartment Style: Floor mounted overhead braced. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing plans, elevations, details of construction, fin- ish color, hardware fittings and fastenings. Indicate locations of blocking or materials by others for proper attachment to supporting finished Work. B. Samples: Submit 2 samples of Manufacturer's standard colors and hardware for selection and approval by Architect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. ANSI A117.1, 1998 "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities." 2. Public Law 101-336 "The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA). 3. ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). 4. The Arizonans with Disabilities Act of 1992 Administrative Rules (AzDAAG) 5. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS). 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurements; proper fit and attachment of parts is required. H&C TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements. 1. Accurate Partition Corp. www.accuratepartitions.com 2.2 MATERIALS A. Doors and Partition Panels: 1 inch thick, sound insulated. 1. Panel plates: 2 sheets of galvanized-bonderized steel not less than 22 gauge for doors, or 20 gauge for partitions, with formed edges sealed with a continuous oval crown locking strip. 2. Door edges: Electrically welded with welds spaced not over 18 inches apart around the entire perimeter. 3. Locking strips on doors and partitions: Mitered, welded and finished at the corners. 4. Core material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of impregnated Kraft paper. B. Pilasters: 1. 1-1/4 inch (thick made of 2 sheets of 20 gauge galvanized-bonderized steel, welded and finished as specified above. 2. Secure to concrete floor with cadmium plated steel bolts, lock washers and expansion shields. 3. Make adjustments by means of jack screw fastening through heavy gauge steel saddle in- tegral with pilaster. 4. Conceal anchoring device with a 3 inch high, one-piece slip-on type No. 302 polished stainless steel plinth without exposed fasteners. C. Headrail (Overhead Bracing): 1. Heavy 6463-T5 alloy aluminum extrusion with satin finish in anti-grip configuration weighing not less than 1.188 lbs. per linear foot. 2. Headrail bracket: 18 gage stainless steel. D. Stirrup Brackets: Heat-treated, polished and anodized extruded aluminum alloy. Provide for attachment of dividing partitions and pilasters to one another and to the walls Provide theft proof trim in place with concealed anchor slips without the use of exposed screws. E. Hinges: Concealed, controlled gravity hinge, with upper and lower hinge brackets factory mounted on the pilaster. 1. Bracket: Flush with external surfaces of pilaster face sheets and finished to match the pi- laster. H&C TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13 - 3 2. Recess top hinge pivot door fitting and insert into door edge approximately 2 inches be- low the top. Mount stainless steel Delrin pivot pin within the door structure supported both above and below the pivot bracket. 3. A thrust bearing fixed in place by a stationary vertical pintle concealed within the door shall carry the door weight. 4 Control operation of the door by opposing cams under spring tension mounted on the fixed pintle. 5. Adjust hinge to permit door to rest at an angle, or to hold door open or closed when not latched. 6. Hinge shall avert momentum stresses by permitting free movement without raising or lowering door. 7. Moving parts shall be self-lubricating and completely concealed within the 1 inch door thickness. 8 Top and Bottom Door Hinge Fittings: Non-ferrous alloy. Door hinge fittings to permit the outer face of the castings to be fully flush with the face plates of the door. Interlock corner door fittings with oval-crown locking strip around the door perimeter. F. Equip each door with a cast alloy chrome-plated coat hook and bumper on the inside face of doors attached by one-way head screws, and with concealed latch with face mortised flush with edge locking strip. Working parts completely concealed within door thickness. 1. Latch bolts: Accessibility compliant, slide latch, stainless steel with exposed escutcheon plate and button, polished chrome plated, non-ferrous metal. Furnish for all doors. 2. Stop and keeper: One-piece heavy cast, non-ferrous alloy. Polished chrome plated finish with 3/4 inch diameter rubber bumper, locked in place, made theft-proof and through- bolted to pilaster with one-way head shoulder screw and sex nuts. G. Accessibility Provisions: Where shown on the Drawings, provide accessible compartments, in- terior space as required by ADA, with outswinging doors, size as indicated. 1. Door opening size minimum 2 feet 10 inches clear, or greater where required by applica- ble codes. 2. At outswinging doors, install an additional bumper on the outside of the door. H. Urinal Partitions: 1. Pilaster braced, of same material and construction used for toilet partitions. 2. Size: Approximately 58 inches high, 24 inches deep, mounted 12 inches above the floor. 2.3 DOOR, PARTITION PANEL AND PILASTER FINISH A. Preparation: Mechanically cleaned surfaces to be finished by means of automatic vapor de- greasing equipment. B. Finish: Electrostatic applied prime coat and finish color coat of thermal-setting acrylic enamel, baked on to produce a uniform, smooth, lustrous protective finish. C. Color: #930 Black Powder coated baked enamel. H&C TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental condi- tions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of sub- surfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet compartments in strict accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions, at lo- cations indicated. Erect straight and plumb, with horizontal lines level. B. Overhead Bracing: Fasten headrail to tops of pilasters and headrail brackets by thru-bolting with one-way stainless steel sex bolts. Cadmium plated sex bolts shall not be allowed. C. Installed Clearances: 1. Provide clearance at the wall of approximately 1 inch or less for panels and 1 inch or less for pilasters. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting and fitting to room finish in the finish Work. 2. Provide uniform clearance at vertical edges of doors from top to bottom not to exceed 3/16 inch. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Adjust hardware for satisfactory operation. Adjust door hinges to hold door open at approxi- mately 30 degrees. Upon completion of the installation, put each operating component through at least ten operating cycles. Adjust to achieve optimum operation. B. Upon completion of the installation, visually check exposed surfaces, and touch up scratches and abrasives to be completely invisible to the unaided eye from a distance of five feet. 3.4 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. END OF SECTION 10 21 13 H&C CORNER GUARDS 10 26 00 - 1 SECTION 10 26 00 – CORNER GUARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall protection unit. B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit showing locations and extent. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall protection unit indicated.. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer B. Material Certificates: For each impact-resistant plastic material, from manufacturer. C. Material Test Reports: For each impact-resistant plastic material. D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit to include in maintenance manuals. 1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to plastic finishes and performance. H&C CORNER GUARDS 10 26 00 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from single manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) during the period plastic materials are stored. 2. Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight. 3. Store plastic wall protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C). a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F (21 deg C) for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. H&C CORNER GUARDS 10 26 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface-Mounted, Stainless Steel Corner Guards: Assembly consisting of stainless steel corner guard; including mounting screw and cup washer hardware; fabricated with 90-degree turn to match wall condition. B. Locations: Provide 90-degree corner guard at all corridors, halls, vestibules, stairs, ramps, Auditorium, Community Room and Media Center. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: a. American Floor Products Co., Inc. b. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc. c. Balco, Inc. d. Construction Specialties, Inc. e. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation. f. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International Corporation. g. Musson Rubber Company. h. Pawling Corporation. i. Tepromark International, Inc. j. WallGuard.com. 2. Guard: 48 inches high; stainless steel; ASTM D-256 impact rating, 24.1; ASTM D-635 burn rate, self extinguishing; ASTM E-84 flame spread, 25 or less; U.L. fire hazard classification, flame spread/smoke developed, 25/450; color as selected by Architect; Type 304; manufactured by Wall Guard. 3. Accessories, Anchors: Manufacturers standard; suitable for use; all fasteners concealed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. 1. For impact-resistant wall protection units attached with screw and cup washer, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. H&C CORNER GUARDS 10 26 00 - 4 3.2 PREPARATION A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall protection system components. B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions per Manufacturer’s installation instructions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. 1. Install impact-resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below: 2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation. 3.4 CLEANING A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent. B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10 26 00 H&C TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 1 SECTION 10 28 00 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. B. Owner-Furnished Material: Soap and Paper Towel Dispensers 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. H&C TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES (All Products to be verified with Owner Standards) A. Folding Shower Seat: 1. Bobrick No. B-5181 B. Grab Bars: 1. Bobrick No. B-5507 Series C. Grab Bar Anchors (Stud Wall): 1. Bobrick No. 256 2. Bradley No. 899-015 D. Grab Bar Anchors (Solid Wall): 1. Bobrick No. 257 2. Bradley No. 899-016 E. Electric Hand Dryer: 1. Palmer Fixture BluStorm HD0950-09/HD0951-09, Stainless Steel Cover (Verify w/ elec.) F. Toilet Paper Dispenser: 1. Royce Rolls Standard TB Series (4 Rolls) G. Sanitary Napkin Dispenser: Provide at all Women and Unisex Restrooms 1. Bobrick B-2706 H&C TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 3 H. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Provide at all Women and Unisex Restrooms 1. Owner supplied, Contractor installed I. Stainless Steel Framed Mirror: Provide 24” x 36” framed mirror at all single hole, staff and family restrooms. 1. Bobrick Model B165-2436 J. Frameless Stainless Steel Mirror: Provide 16” x 24” all stainless steel mirror (no glass) at the following restrooms: Gang Restrooms. 1. Bobrick Model B1556-2436 K. Double Robe Hook: Bobrick B-672. L. Soap Dispenser: Owner supplied, Contractor Installed M. Trash receptacles: Owner supplied, Contractor Installed N. Paper Towel Dispenser: Owner supplied, Contractor Installed PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 10 28 00 H&C SIGNAGE 10 40 00 - 1 SECTION 10 40 00 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes the following: 1. Plaques 2. Dimension illuminated characters 3. Extruded Aluminum Letters 1.2 DEFINITIONS: A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board’s “American with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines.” 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors available for the following: 1. Zinc 2. Aluminum 3. Acrylic sheet D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated: 1. Plaque Casting: 6 inches (150 mm) square including border. 2. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional character (letter, number, and graphic element). 3. Aluminum: For each form, finish, and color, on 6-inch- (150- mm-) long sections of extrusions and squares of sheet at least 4 by 4 inches (100 by 100 mm). 4. Acrylic Sheet: 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for each color required. 5. Polycarbonate Sheet: 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for each color required. 6. Fiberglass Sheet: 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for each color required. 7. Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches (305 mm) square including border. H&C SIGNAGE 10 40 00 - 2 8. Photoluminescent Signs: Full-size sign. 9. Trim Frame: 6-inch (152- mm-) long sections of each profile. 10. Accessories: Manufacturer’s full-size unit. E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. F. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. G. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. C. Source Limitations for Sign: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturers’ written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs. 1.7 WARRANTY: A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. H&C SIGNAGE 10 40 00 - 3 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, of alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32. C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B221M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of Alloy 6063-T5. D. Brass Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C85200 (high-copper yellow brass). E. Brass, Yellow, Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36 M, Alloy UNS No. C62000. F. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No, C86500 (No. 1 manganese bronze). G. Bronze Plate: ASTM B 36/B 36 M. 1. Steel: a. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653 M, G90 (Z275) coating, either commercial or forming steel. b. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed or electrolytic zinc-coated , ASTM A 591/A 591M, with steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, exposed. c. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. d. Steel Members Fabricated from Plate or Bar Stock: ASTM A 529/A 529 M or ASTM A 572/A 572M, 42,000-psi (290-MPa) minimum yield strength. e. For steel exposed to view on completion, provide materials having flat, smooth surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials whose surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. H. Fiberglass Sheet: Molded, seamless, thermosetting, glass-fiber-reinforced polyester panels with a minimum tensile strength of 15,000 psi (103 MPa) when tested according to ASTM D 638 and with a minimum flexural strength of 30,000 psi (207 MPa) when tested according to ASTM D 790. I. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing). H&C SIGNAGE 10 40 00 - 4 J. Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufacturer by extrusion process, coated on both surfaces with abrasion-resistant coating. 1. Impact Resistance: 16 ft-lbf/in. (854 J/m) per ASTM D 256, Method A. 2. Tensile Strength: 9000 lbf/sq. in. (62 MPa) per ASTM D 638. 3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 340,000 lbf/sq. in. (2345 MPa) per ASTM D 790. 4. Heat Deflection: 265 deg F (129 deg C) at 264 lbf/sq. in (1.82 MPa) per ASTM D 648. 5. Abrasion Resistance: 1.5 percent maximum haze increase for 100 revolutions of a Taber abraser with a load of 500 g per ASTM D 1044. K. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils (0.076 mm) with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior applications. 2.2 PLAQUES: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements by Mountain States Specialties, Inc. Tempe, Arizona. D. Etched Interior Signage: Provide metal sheet or plate for etching, as follows: 1. Plaque Material: Zinc with aluminum curved bottom half. 2. Custom Paint Colors: Match Pantone color matching system. 3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 4. Edge Style: Square, polished, with rounded aluminum edges. 5. Mounting: Concealed studs for substrates encountered. 6. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.18 mm) thick. 2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mountain States Specialties. Inc. 2.4 ACCESSORIES: A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. H&C SIGNAGE 10 40 00 - 5 2.5 FABRICATION: A. General: Provide manufacturer’s standard signs of configurations indicated. 1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide weld behind finishes surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. 3. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly. 4. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL: A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES: A. Clean Anodic Finish: Manufacturer’s standard Class 1 clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES: A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, “White Metal Blast Cleaning” or SSPC-SP 8, “Pickling”. B. Factory Priming for Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s standard , fast curing, lead-and chromate-free, universal primer, selected for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with substrate and field-applied finish paint sysem indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. C. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer’s standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer’s written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm). H&C SIGNAGE 10 40 00 - 6 2.9 ARCYLIC SHEET FINISHES: A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for three years for application intended. 2.10 DESCRIPTIONS/LOCATIONS: 1. EXTERIOR SIGNS: a. SIGN TYPE EXT-1: Handicapped Parking Signs: Mounting height: As indicated on drawings. Sign Size: 9 inches by 9 inches. Symbol: International handicapped symbol. Size: 7 inches. b. SIGN TYPE EXT-2: Building Stair Screenwall sign; 30” high cast or cut aluminum letters attached to cast in place concrete low wall per drawings. Sign to read: LEARNING CENTER(30”) c. SIGN TYPE EXT-3: Cast aluminum letters, height as required by local building codes for building addressing. Signs to read: 945 and located on new building 600 respectively. Provided (2) at exterior of building. See drawings for locations. d. SIGN TYPE EXT-4: Internal illumination, no halo illumination cut aluminum letters, 84” high at Building 600 North elevation. Sign to read: WESTWOOD (7’- 8” H) Halo illumination, no internal illumination cut aluminum letters, 2’ high at Building 600 North elevation. Sign to read: WARRIORS (2’-0” H) e. SIGN TYPE EXT-5: Cast aluminum letters 38” H mounted with manufacturer’s standard fastening hardware, located at large metal screen South of the new building. Signs to read: WESTWOOD & WARRIORS. f. SIGN TYPE EXT-6: Cut ¼” thick aluminum letters (varying heights) mounted with manufacturer’s standard fastening hardware, located at 8’ high curved metal screen walls at Palm walk, Social Canopy & Media Center remodel. Signs to read: See exterior elevations for words. g. SIGN TYPE EXT-7: Backlit cast or cut aluminum school logo 18’ H mounted with manufactuers’s standard standoff fastening hardware (at 2 depths, 3” & 6” standoffs), located on North Elevation of new building. See exterior elevations for design. h. SIGN TYPE EXT-8: Cast or cut aluminum school logo 8’ H mounted with manufactuers’s standard standoff fastening hardware (at 2 depths, 3” & 6” standoffs), located at large metal screen South of the new building. See exterior elevations for design. i. SIGN TYPE EXT-9: Digital display board 4’ wide x 18’ long, 19mm prefinished metal box mounted with manufactuers’s standard fastening hardware, located at North elevation of the new building. 2. INTERIOR SIGNS: MANUFACTURERS: ASI Sign Systems H&C SIGNAGE 10 40 00 - 7 a. SIGN TYPE INT-1: 8” high cast aluminum letters mounted to metal screen with manufacturers standard fastening hardware. Signs to read: See interior elevations for symbols/equations. “Math Club, etc.” b. SIGN TYPE INT-2: Varying sized painted stenciled letters/images located on gyp. interior partitions as directed by architect. See interior elevations for wording and locations. Colors to be selected by architect. c. SIGN TYPE INT-3: Varying sized vinyl or translucent film letters located on glass doors as directed by architect. See interior elevations for wording and locations.Color/ Opacity to be selected by architect. Total coverage 25%. d. SIGN TYPE INT-4: Building directory located first floor buildings 600. Non- illuminated directory to incorporate building floor plans, color coded and labeled. Graphics to be protected with non-glare polished edge Plexiglas and attached to anodized aluminum frame/ plate with owners logo. To be located in breezeway, coordinate location with architect. (2) 18’x24” w/ 1” s.s. standoffs in corners. e. SIGN TYPE INT-7: Elevator cab aluminum plaque with exploded axonometric building floor plan graphic. (2) 9”x12” w/ 1” s.s. standoffs in corners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, and electrical power are sized and located to accommodate signs. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of type described and complying with manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on wall adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer’s written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. 2. Hook-and-Loop Tapes: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. 3. Magnetic Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. 4. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. H&C SIGNAGE 10 40 00 - 8 5. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8 inch-(3-mm-) thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using method specified above. 6. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer. 7. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials. C. Bracket-Mounted Signs: Provide manufacturer’s standard brackets, fittings, and hardware for mounting signs that project at right angels from walls and ceilings. Attach brackets and fittings securely to walls and ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions. D. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 1. Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface. 2. Projected Mounting: Mount characters at projection distance from wall surface indicated. E. Cast-Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for type of wall surface indicated. 1. Concealed Mounting: Mount plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on back of plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick-setting cement. 2. Face Mounting: Mount plaques using exposed fasteners with rosettes attached through face of plaque into wall surface. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECITON: A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 10 40 00 H&C FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 1 SECTION 10 44 16 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers and fire protection cabinets. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets. B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fire- protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." H&C FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 2 B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated. c. Badger Fire Protection. d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. e. Fire End & Croker Corporation. f. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. g. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. h. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. i. Larsens Manufacturing Company. j. Moon American. k. Nystrom Building Products. l. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp. m. Potter Roemer LLC. n. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products. o. Strike First Corporation of America. B. Dry Chemical type Ammonium Phosphate Base: UL 2A-10B:C C. Wet Chemical type potassium acetate base with spray applications wand. Must meet K-Class listing for Culinary Studio, specifically for kitchen grease fires. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinet: Semi-Recessed and Flush Mounted Cabinets. Box to be heavy gauge steel with a white baked enamel finish. Door and trim shall be #4 finish, 304 stainless steel, solid door style and include a die-cast “fire” handle with a red finish. Doors shall have continuous piano hinges and a self-adjusting roller-catch. C. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. H&C FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION 10 44 16 H&C PROJECTION SCREENS 11 52 13 - 1 SECTION 11 52 13 - PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated, front-projection screens and controls. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for metal support framing for front-projection screens. 2. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood backing for screen installation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gain: Ratio of light reflected from screen material to that reflected perpendicularly from a magnesium carbonate surface as determined per SMPTE RP 94. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts and types of front-projection screens. Include the following: 1. Drop lengths. 2. Location of seams in viewing surfaces. 3. Location of screen centerline relative to ends of screen case. 4. Anchorage details, including connection to supporting structure for suspended units. 5. Details of juncture of exposed surfaces with adjacent finishes. 6. Location of wiring connections for electrically operated units. 7. Wiring diagrams for electrically operated units. 8. Accessories. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes of surface-mounted screen cases. H&C PROJECTION SCREENS 11 52 13 - 2 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For front-projection screens to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install front-projection screens until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of front-projection screens with adjacent construction, including ceiling suspension systems, light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partitions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Projection Screens: Obtain from single manufacturer. Obtain accessories, including necessary mounting hardware, from screen manufacturer. Provide products by one of the following manufacturers or approved equal: 1. Da-Lite Screen Company, Inc. 2. Draper Screen Co. 3. Bretford 4. Claridge Paramount 2.2 MATERIALS A. Manually operated, U.L or FM listed projection screens, specified models to be confirmed compatible format with projector specified by others prior to ordering and installation. 1. Model 206005, Luma 2 with AR as manufactured by Draper Inc. a. Locations: Auditorium 106 (2), Hallway 100-C (1), Career Center R 201 (1), Video Production 103 (1), Public 608 (1), Community Center 621 (1) & Culinary 622 (1) 2. Model 197064, Access/Series M with AR as manufactured by Draper Inc. a. Locations: Learning Pod 650-D (1) B. Sizes: 79” H x 140” W (Model 206005), 92 1/2” H x 144”W (197064) H&C PROJECTION SCREENS 11 52 13 - 3 C. Roller: Rigid metal, 3 inch diameter mounted on two vibration and noise absorbing supports. D. Screen Fabric: Rear protection screen fabric screen. Flame retardant and mildew resistant fiberglass with glass beaded picture surface with black masking borders. Bottom of fabric shall be formed into a pocket holding a 3/8 inch metal rod. End of rod shall be protected by heavy duty plastic caps. No seams allowed. Fabric shall be seamless. E. Mounting: Recessed mount at lay-in ceiling location at both sides of stage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install front-projection screens at locations indicated to comply with screen manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install front-projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces a smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when screen is lowered. 1. Install low-voltage controls according to NFPA 70 and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. a. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use UL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 2. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen controls, limit switches, closures, and other operating components are in optimum functioning condition. 3. Test manually operated units to verify that screen-operating components are in optimum functioning condition. END OF SECTION 11 52 13 H&C ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13 - 1 SECTION 12 24 13 – ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manually operated sunscreen roller shades. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. B. NFPA 701-99 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles, features, finishes and operating instructions. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Mounting details and installation methods. B. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, product details, installation details, operational clearances, and relationship to adjacent work. C. Window Treatment Schedule: For all roller shades. Use same room designations as indicated on the Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one set of shade cloth options and aluminum finish color samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning materials and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls. H&C ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13 - 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use. D. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC 9644, ATCC9645. E. Environmental Certification: Submit written certification from the manufacturer, including third party evaluation, recycling characteristics, and perpetual use certification as specified below. Initial submittals, which do not include the Environmental Certification, below will be rejected. Materials that are simply 'PVC free' without identifying their inputs shall not qualify as meeting the intent of this specification and shall be rejected. F. Third Party Evaluation: Provide documentation stating the shade cloth has undergone third party evaluation for all chemical inputs, down to a scale of 100 parts per million, that have been evaluated for human and environmental safety. Identify any and all inputs, which are known to be carcinogenic, mutagenic, teratogenic, reproductively toxic, or endocrine disrupting. Also identify items that are toxic to aquatic systems, contain heavy metals, or organohalogens. The material shall contain no inputs that are known problems to human or environmental health per the above major criteria, except for an input that is required to meet local fire codes. G. Recycling Characteristics: Provide documentation that the shade cloth can and is part of a closed loop of perpetual use and not be required to be down cycled, incinerated or otherwise thrown away. Scrap material can be sent back to the mill for reprocessing and recycling into the same quality yarn and woven into new material, without down cycling. Certify that this process is currently underway and will be utilized for this project. H. Perpetual Use Certification: Certify that at the end of the useful life of the shade cloth, that the material can be sent back to the manufacturer for recapture as part of a closed loop of perpetual use and that the material can and will be reconstituted into new yarn, for weaving into new shade cloth. Provide information on each shade band indicating that the shade band can be sent back to the manufacturer for this purpose. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire- test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in the Window Treatment Schedule. H&C ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13 - 3 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Roller Shade Hardware, Chain and Shadecloth: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating twenty-five year limited warranty. B. Roller Shade Installation: Two years from date of Substantial Completion, not including scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Roller Window Shades: Manually operated, vertical roll-up, fabric window shades fit to windows to provide maximum protection from light streaks. Assembly to include clutch operator, controls, mounting hardware and other components necessary for complete installation. 1. Basis of Design: Provide FlexShade XD™ as manufactured by Draper, Inc. or approved equal. B. Rollers: Extruded aluminum roller tube of appropriate diameter to support shade fabric with minimal deflection. 1. Minimum Roller Tube Diameter: 1.56 inches. 2. Fabric Connection to Roller Tube: Spline fabric/roller attachment system to allow shade fabric to be removed from roller without having to remove roller from brackets. 3. Fabric Length: 6 inches greater than window height minimum. 4. Bottom Slat: 13/16 inch aluminum dowel, encased in bottom hem with heat sealed ends. 5. Orientation: Regular from back of roller. C. Clutch Operator: POM thermoplastic with welded 0.354 inch (9mm) primary steel post with rotational bearing, overrunning design, and positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to tube. Clutch mechanism never needs adjustment or lubrication. Center bead chain placement allows for right or left hand operation and accommodates side channel with no need for adjustment of chain location. D. Location: 1. Exterior window locations & Door Sidelites: Mecho 3% shade a. All Windows at Learning Center, Media Center Remodel & Career Center @ Academic Remodel H&C ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13 - 4 2. Interior window locations: Black out shades b. Workroom 671 @ Learning Center c. Study 609 @ Learning Center d. Office 614 @ Learning Center e. Office 628 @ Learning Center f. Offices 101, 102, 119 & 120 @ Media Center Remodel g. Control 104 (Window to Auditorium) @ Media Center Remodel h. Testing 117, 118 & 122 @ Media Center Remodel i. Office R102A (Corridor & Door Sidelite) @ Academic Remodel j. All Classroom door/sidelite locations @ Media Center & Learning Center k. No Shades – Window Type L, P, Q, R, S, T & U (Learning Center) l. No shades – Window/Sidelite at stair window Type E, F & G (Learning Center) m. Exclude window Type C, F & G (Media Center) E. Color: As selected by Architect. F. Bead Chain: #10 stainless steel chain with 120 pound breaking strength 1. Bead Chain Hold Down: Spring loaded G. Hardware 1. Fascia: L-shaped 0.125 inch thick extruded aluminum cover to conceal shade roller and hardware. Assembly snaps into endcaps without exposed fasteners. 2. Hardware Finish: Clear anodized (standard) 2.2 FABRIC A. Light-Filtering Fabric 1. Basis-of-Design: SheerWeave® Series SW2703, as manufactured by Phifer. a. Fabric Content and Structure: Duplex twill fabric, light outer panel color combined with dark interior color for thermal comfort and view-through. b. Performance Characteristics: 1) Flame retardant per NFPA 101 (Class A), NFPA 701 (TM#1, small scale), NFPA 701 (TM#2, large scale), California U.S. Title 19 (small scale), and BS 5867-2 2) Bacteria and Fungi Resistant per ASTM E2180. 3) GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified®. 4) GREENGUARD Children & Schools (SM) Certified. c. Openness Factor: 3 percent & blackout in accordance with ASHRAE 74. d. Thickness: 0.028 inches. e. Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd. H&C ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13 - 5 1) Flame retardant per NFPA 101 (Class A), NFPA 701 (TM#1, small scale) and NFPA (TM#2, large scale). 2) Bacteria and Fungi Resistant per ASTM D3273, ASTM D6329, ASTM E2180 and ASTM G21. 3) GREENGUARD Children & Schools (SM) Certified. 4) GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified®. 5) Lead free certified per RoHS. 6) Chemical compliant per REACH (EC 1907/2006). B. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range C. If seams are required place seams even with mullions and note on submittals PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify field dimensions of windows prior to fabrication of roller window shades. B. Coordinate blocking, and structural support requirements of roller window shades to ensure proper attachment and support. C. Coordinate roller window shade size, mounted depth, and required edge tolerances with construction of wall and ceiling. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install roller window shades at locations indicated on Drawings and approved Window Shade Schedule. B. Provide fasteners appropriate for installation conditions. C. Comply with roller window shade manufacturer's written instructions and shop drawings. 1. Adjust shades to correct tracking. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Clean and protect roller window shades after installation from damage during construction operations. If damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in their original, undamaged condition. END OF SECTION 12 24 13 H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 Flashing Beacon Transmitter Control 13 17 10-1 13 17 10 Specifications for AC Fire Station Flashing Beacon Transmitter Control with Radio Activation General The goal of this document is to assist traffic professionals in preparing minimum specifications for fire station exit signal activation transmitter units. This covers units that are fixed wall mounted transmitters with an AC power source. Equipment Enclosure: The unit will be housed in NEMA 1 or 12 wall mount enclosure made of steel or aluminum. The unit will have a hinged door with a latch. The enclosure will be a powder coated or painted finish in light gray. The enclosure will be labeled to clearly show the function of each indicator or button on the unit. Typical size will be 12”x12”x 6”. A suitable painted steel or aluminum back plate will be included with the unit to allow for the mounting of the components. Power Supply: The unit will be powered by a user furnished 115VAC source from a user furnished AC wiring connection. The unit will include a 6’ UL approved AC 3-wire power cord. Terminal blocks for connecting to the power will be provided and will be an enclosed Euro style to minimize contact by users. The 115VAC will be input to a switching power supply of not less than 30W that has a 12VDC regulated output. It will include a status LED to show when DC output is present. The output will be routed through a 2.5A fuse block that features a status LED to indicate when it is blown. Radio Transmitter: The radio transmitter for this application will be extended range FM contact closure radio operating at 27.255Mhz. The unit will include a digitally coded address, which will be one of up to 65,000 possible combinations, to secure the communications link from the power system to the slave units. The unit will use a dry contact closure input from either the local or a remote button to generate the signal to the slave units. When transmitting, the radio will display a red light on the bottom of the unit. When power is applied to the unit a green status light will continuously show in the bottom status window. The radio will produce an FM signal as its output. Minimum rated RF power output from the radio will be a minimum of 4W and will not require a license to operate. Each radio transmitter will be capable of controlling multiple receivers that are coded the same. The transmitter package will also include a No-Ground-Plane (NGP) antenna kit, which features a tunable 5/8 wave antenna, mounting kit and tuned 18’ cable, as well as 20’ of additional RG58 RF cables and related fittings to complete the antenna kit. The NGP antenna kit will be pre-tuned at the factory using an MFJ-259 meter so that the antenna and the tuned cable have an VSWR of 1.8 or less when shipped. An internal fuse in the radio will be included as a safety device. The radio will also have a supervisory function setting that produces periodic status transmissions to the receivers in the network. All receivers will be configured to look for this signal or indicate that the transmitter has failed via an open collector output. The radio will be equipped with an RF jumper to connect it to a UHF bulkhead fitting mounted to the top wall of the enclosure. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 Flashing Beacon Transmitter Control 13 17 10-2 Push Button: The unit will be equipped with a minimum of a 1.5” red mushroom switch centered on the face of the unit. The button will include two poles, one to connect to the radio input and one to connect to an audible confirmation device in the transmitter unit. Wiring: All wiring to the panel will be via euro style terminal blocks for incoming AC. Connections from the back plate to the front of the enclosure will be via a color-coded wiring harness with keyed connectors. Status Lamps: The face of the enclosure will include status lamps for the following functions: -AC power on -DC power on The AC lamp may be a neon type indicator and the DC lamp will be a green LED. Audible Confirmation: The unit will be equipped with an audible device such as a piezo buzzer to confirm depression of the mushroom switch. When the push button is fully engaged the audio buzzer will sound. Terminal Blocks and Connectors: The unit will be equipped with terminal blocks for connection of the AC power source. A separate DC terminal block will also be included to allow for connection of the button and remote buttons to the internal control panel. All connections between the internal control panel and the front panel button and indicators will be made through a keyed connector to allow for quick change out of the internal control panel. Documentation: Each system will come with a complete installation and user’s guide. Minimum information to be covered is as follows: -Basic system theory and system overview. -Description of all the system components and their basic function. -Installation of a typical unit. -Troubleshooting and maintenance of the system/unit. -Complete drawings or illustrations throughout to support and clarify the text. -Phone/FAX numbers for technical support of the system H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 Photovoltaic Powered Fire Station Sensor/Transmitter 13 17 15-1 13 17 15 Specification for Photovoltaic Powered Fire Station Sensor/ Transmitter Package for Flashing Beacon Systems General The goal of this document is to assist traffic professionals in preparing minimum specifications for a stand-alone photovoltaic (solar) powered Optical Detection Transmitters (ODTX) for activation of flashing beacons located in advance of the station or nearby the intersection pre-emption equipment. Typical equipment placement will be at the end of the fire station driveway or directly across the street from the driveway. The ODTX system will use a Tomar StrobeswitchTM detector unit, the same as used on fire entry points for gated communities, to detect an optical Emergency Vehicle (EV) pre-emption signal. The output of the optical detector is then used to transmit a radio signal sending the ON signal to the flashers and/or pre-emption equipment. The flashers then run for their pre- programmed time or a controller cabinet interface generates a pre-emption contact closure. To show the fire truck driver that the system has detected his EV signal there is a 2.5” amber truck taillight, which acts as a detection confirmation lamp, mounted on the pole immediately below the detector unit. The site-specific data for this project is as follows: Location: (nearest major city) Number of detectors: 1; 2; Average anticipated activations per day: Assumed transmit cycle is 5 seconds/activation Photovoltaic Power System Solar Electric System: The solar electric system will be designed to act as a stand alone power source for the system. Any response to bid will include a system sizing report. The sizing report will feature the following information: -Site information that includes average monthly insolation on a horizontal surface, insolation at tilt, average monthly temperature at the site, elevation, latitude and longitude. The data shall reflect the information for the site or the nearest geographical point for which data is available. In the event that no data point exists in the vicinity of the site, sizings will be prepared for the three nearest data points available around the application site. -Load tabulation will be included to detail the number, type and duty cycle of all loads in the system. If manufacturers give a range of power consumption for standard items such as LED lamps, the largest possible value of the load shall be used for design purposes. Operating voltage will be specified and days of the week the system is to be used. -Type of solar module to be used by model and manufacturer. Key technical data on the module such as open circuit voltage (VOC), peak power voltage (V-peak), short circuit current (Isc), and peak power current (I-peak) shall be provided. The electrical configuration of series and parallel modules will also be specified as well as the array tilt angle through the year. -Type of battery will be given by model and brand name. Technical data on the battery such as voltage and the capacity at the 100 hour discharge (C/100) rate will be given. The electrical configuration of the batteries (number of series and parallel) will be given. Projected days of autonomy will be given with the battery information. -The array to load ratio and projected battery state-of-charge (SOC) will also be given. Minimum acceptable array to load ratio is 1.1. A projected battery SOC will be included in the report and will show an SOC of 80%-100% throughout the year. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 Photovoltaic Powered Fire Station Sensor/Transmitter 13 17 15-2 -System deratings will appear in the program to cover any losses from module output mismatch loss, dirt/dust accumulation losses and wiring losses. Losses may appear as a lumped derating value but a thorough discussion of the losses must be provided. Failure to provide a sizing report will be considered non-responsive and result in disqualification. Solar Electric Modules and Mounting Structures: The modules shall consist of 36 crystalline or polycrystalline cells in series. Cells will feature an antireflective coating and a low iron glass covering. Cells will be encapsulated to protect them from the environment. Each module will feature a weather tight junction box for connecting the array output cable to the module terminals. Modules will feature a minimum warranty of 2 years for power output on modules 10W or less and a minimum of 5 years for modules larger than 20W. Modules greater than 16W will feature an anodized aluminum frame for mechanical support. Solar modules will be securely mounted to a suitable top-of-pole or side-of-pole mounting structure that has been specifically designed to hold solar modules. All of the necessary hardware to install the modules to the mounts and the mount to a typical 4.5” O.D. pole will be included. Security hardware for securing the module to the mount will be included along with any special tools required for the hardware. Mounts will be powder coated or hot dip galvanized steel. Mill finish aluminum construction, structural aluminum, is also acceptable for mounting structures with arrays of 30W or less. Modules with frames will include a weather resistant sticker at the back of the module showing the system manufacturer’s name and contact information for product support. Modules without frames shall have the sticker securely attached to the mounting structure. A data sheet for the module to be provided with the system will be part of the bid response. Failure to provide this data will be considered non-responsive and will result in disqualification of the response. System Batteries: The system will come equipped with the number and type of batteries detailed in the sizing report. The battery type will be a sealed-maintenance free valve-regulated design. The battery will use an Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) to suspend the electrolyte making it immobile. Gel batteries using a thixotropic gel to suspend the electrolyte will also be considered an acceptable choice. Acceptable battery sizes will be group U1, 22, 24 and group 27. Minimum capacity of the batteries at 25oC will be 36, 56, 80Ah and 97Ah at the C/100 rate respectively. Batteries will use a copolymer polypropylene case and cover. Non-removable pressure regulated flame arresting safety valves will be standard. Rated operating temperature will be from –40oC to 72oC. Batteries will also feature a low self-discharge rate of approximately 1% per month at 25o. In some low duty cycle applications it may be necessary to look at smaller batteries on a case-by-case basis. Any deviation from the above spec will be substantiated with calculations in the event battery data does not exist in standard sizing programs. Solar Charge/Load Controls: In general, systems will feature an integrated control unit. The controller shall be solid-state unit capable of managing battery charging and load control functions in a single unit. In general, charge control/load circuitry built from multiple components will not be allowed thereby reducing maintenance costs and spares inventories. However, for certain higher powered systems, in excess of 20A solar array current, it may be necessary to build systems from a charge controller and a separate load/timing control unit. The solar charge control portion will use an ambient temperature sensor to adjust the charge termination point thus prolonging battery life (temperature compensated charging). The charge circuit will also employ a pulse-width- modulation algorithm for charging the batteries and be a solid-state series switch type configuration. Systems using integrated control units will have a solar control rating capable of managing a minimum of 6A of charge current at a nominal 12VDC operating voltage. Larger power systems will be capable of managing up to 30A of solar array current. Load control will be accomplished using a low-voltage-disconnect (LVD) circuit to disconnect power to the load when battery voltage falls to a low state-of-charge (typically 20%). The integrated controller load circuit will be H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 Photovoltaic Powered Fire Station Sensor/Transmitter 13 17 15-3 capable of providing up to 6A of load current through a solid-state load switch. Higher power systems will be capable of controlling up to 15A of load current through either a solid-state relay or an electromechanical relay. A data sheet on the integrated charge/load control unit will be provided with the bid response or the submission will be considered incomplete. Other Equipment Optical Detector: The optical detector unit shall operate from a nominal 12VDC and be capable to detect the optical signal from a vehicle-mounted preemption emitter. The detector unit will be installed on a two gang, outdoor box. If the optical signal format is correct the detector will provide an open collector output to activate the circuit. This signal is then tied to the radio transmitter circuit and causes it to send the ON signal to the flashers and/or control cabinet pre- emption radio receiver interface. The typical range of the optical detector shall be 200 ft, but depends on intensity of strobe emitter. The field of view shall be 10° vertical and 90° horizontal. The optical detector shall operate be between the following frequencies: 10.000Hz-14.035Hz ± .25Hz. The detector will mount to the pole using a one-way hub for 4.5” O.D. pole installation or a universal hub for installation on larger O.D. poles. A data sheet on the optical detection unit will be provided with the bid response of the submission will be considered incomplete. Confirmation Lamp: The confirmation lamp will be a 2.5” LED amber taillight (nominal 12VDC) installed in the same two gang, outdoor box as the optical detector unit. The confirmation lamp will only be activated when the optical detector unit receives a valid optical signal to show the fire truck driver that the system has detected his EV signal. Test Button: A TEST button will be included to allow the system to be activated without an optical signal and test the link to the solar powered flashers and/or pre-emption equipment located in the traffic control cabinet configured with the pre- emption receiver interface panel. Radio Transmitter: The standard radio transmitter will be an extended range FM contact closure radio operating at 27.255Mhz. The unit will include a digitally coded address, which will be one of up to 65,000 possible combinations, to secure the communications link from the power system to the flashers or the pre-emption radio receiver interface. The unit will use a dry contact closure input from an interposing relay to generate input to the radio. When transmitting, the radio will display a red LED indicator on the bottom of the unit. Minimum rated RF power output from the radio will be a minimum of 3W and will not require a license to operate. Each radio transmitter will be capable of controlling multiple receivers that are coded the same. The transmitter package will also include a No-Ground- Plane antenna kit and any necessary RF cables as well as RF fittings to enable the radio to operate as desired. An internal fuse in the radio will be included as a safety device. The radio will be equipped with an RF jumper to connect it to a UHF bulkhead fitting mounted to the top wall of the enclosure. Data on the radio and antenna to be used will be included as part of the bid or it will be considered incomplete and subject to disqualification. System Enclosure: The system will include a single pre-wired enclosure for ease of installation. The unit shall be an aluminum enclosure with a minimum material thickness of 0.125” and an equivalent NEMA rating of 3R. The physical size of the cabinet will be approximately 15.5” x 15.5” x 26” for a two battery enclosure and 15.5” x 15.5” x 40” for a four battery enclosure and either size will have a mill finish. Mounts will be included as part of the enclosure and will be suitable for mounting to a 4.5” outer diameter pole. The enclosure will also be capable of accepting band style H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 Photovoltaic Powered Fire Station Sensor/Transmitter 13 17 15-4 mounts, and conduit fittings typical to such installations, if needed and disclosed at the time or order. The enclosure will feature a minimum of one police lock with key. The keyhole for the lock will have a cover attached to the door with a rivet and will swing away from the keyhole so as to allow access when needed. The door will be attached to the unit using a continuous stainless steel hinge that is riveted to the door using stainless steel pop-rivets and to the enclosure body. The hinges will be installed such that the rivets are not exposed when the door is closed. An integral rigid stainless steel rod type door stop will be included in the unit so that the door can be fixed in the open position during maintenance. The door shall cover the entire front side of the cabinet and be constructed of a single piece of aluminum. It will have a neoprene gasket around the entire edge of the door. Enclosures shall have three screened louvered vents on each side of each compartment. The louver screening will be aluminum for longevity. An integral rain lip will also be provided at the top of the main cabinet body to minimize entry of rain. An adjustable latch striker will be included in the side of the main cabinet body to allow the user to adjust the pressure between the door gasket and the body of the cabinet. All wiring passing in/out of the enclosure or through the shelf will pass through a bushing, chase nipple or appropriate conduit fitting to eliminate the possibility of damage to the wiring as it passes a barrier. The 2B enclosure will include a single aluminum shelf of 0.125” thick material to separate the batteries from the controls thus creating two separate compartments in this style of enclosure. The 4B enclosure will feature two shelves to for three compartments in the enclosure, two for batteries and one for control electronics. Each battery compartment will have a minimum of ½” of styrofoam sheeting around three of the inside walls to minimize heat transfer between the battery and the wall of the enclosure. A minimum of one key will be required per enclosure. System Wiring: All systems will feature a color-coded wiring harness for the optical detector, the confirmation lamp, battery wiring and the solar array output. A nine-pin keyed MolexTM connector will be included in the harness as the main disconnect on systems that have a 40W or smaller solar array. A six-pin keyed MolexTM connector will be included in the harness to connect the optical detector and the confirmation lamp. The connectors main disconnect will be located approximately 13” from the end of the harness that connects to the electronics. An integral fuse assembly will be included in the Load positive wire of the harness. All battery and solar connections will be terminated with a crimped spade terminal for easy installation. Wire for the harness will be TEW or MTW, 300V, as a minimum. The solar array output harness will consist of a jacketed pair of conductors. The size of the conductors will be dependent on the solar array output current. Typical wire gauge will be 12, 10 or 8. The jacket will be a UV resistant PVC or XLP material on the portion of the cable exposed to the elements. Spade terminals will be included for ease of installation. Minimum length will be 15’. The internal conductors will be a minimum of a PVC jacketed conductor with a 300V rating. Where appropriate the inner insulation will be XHHW. Documentation: Each system will come with a complete installation and user’s guide. Minimum information to be covered is as follows: -Basic solar system theory and system overview. -Description of all the system components and their basic function. -Installation of a typical system including sections specifically covering pole installation, all aspects of installation of the solar power system and optical detector/confirmation lamp installation. -Troubleshooting and maintenance of the system. -Complete appendices on all of the components used in the system. -Complete drawings or illustrations throughout to support and clarify the text. -Phone/FAX numbers for technical support of the system H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 Photovoltaic Powered Fire Station Sensor/Transmitter 13 17 15-5 Figure 1 – Typical block diagram of Optical Detection Transmitter system Figure 2 – Typical wiring diagram of Optical Detection Transmitter system H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 Photovoltaic Powered Flashing Beacon 13 17 20-1 13 17 20 Specifications for Photovoltaic Powered Flashing Beacon Systems with Radio Activation General The goal of this document is to assist traffic professionals in preparing minimum specifications for photovoltaic (solar) powered flashing roadway beacon systems. This specification covers beacon systems employing LED flashing lamps designed for on-demand applications using license free radio for activation of the beacon system. Typical applications include Type 1 Fire station beacons with amber flashing beacons, high water warning flashers in advance of the flooded area, and advance warning flashing beacons for crosswalks. To properly specify flashing beacon system requires three things: Location- Approximate geographical area where the equipment will be used (nearest town) Load- Listing of all of the equipment that will draw power and how much power each draws Duty Cycle- How long each load will draw power, on average, per day For this project The following information is provided from which to prepare a response: Location: Load: __Single 12” lamp __ Dual 12” lamp Lamp Color: ___Amber ___Red Projected Duty Cycle (time flashing):_____Hrs/day or Activations/day______ seconds/minutes of operation/activation_________ Minimum Vendor Response Solar Electric System Design: The solar electric system will be designed to act as a stand alone power source for the system. Any response to bid will include a system sizing report. The sizing report will feature the following information: -Site information that includes average monthly insolation on a horizontal surface, insolation at tilt, average monthly temperature at the site, elevation, latitude and longitude. The data shall reflect the information for the site or the nearest geographical point for which data is available. In the event that no data point exists in the vicinity of the site, sizings will be prepared for the three nearest data points available around the application site. -Load tabulation will be included to detail the number, type and duty cycle of all loads in the system. If manufacturers give a range of power consumption for standard items such as LED lamps, the largest possible value of the load shall be used for design purposes. Operating voltage will be specified and days of the week the system is to be used. -Type of solar module to be used by model and manufacturer. Key technical data on the module such as open circuit voltage (VOC), peak power voltage (V-peak), short circuit current (Isc), and peak power H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 Photovoltaic Powered Flashing Beacon 13 17 20-2 current (I-peak) shall be provided. The electrical configuration of series and parallel modules will also be specified as well as the array tilt angle through the year. -Type of battery will be given by model and brand name. Technical data on the battery such as voltage and the capacity at the 100 hour discharge (C/100) rate will be given. The electrical configuration of the batteries (number of series and parallel) will be given. Projected days of autonomy will be given with the battery information. All school zone systems will show a minimum autonomy of 8 days if no other specification is given. -The array to load ratio and projected battery state-of-charge (SOC) will also be given. Minimum acceptable array to load ratio for a school zone system is 1.02 in December. A projected battery SOC will be included in the report and will show an SOC of 80%-100% throughout the year. -System deratings will appear in the program to cover any losses from module output mismatch loss, dirt/dust accumulation losses and wiring losses. Losses may appear as a lumped derating value but a thorough discussion of the losses must be provided. Failure to provide a sizing report will be considered non-responsive and result in disqualification. Solar Electric Modules and Mounting Structures: The modules shall consist of 36 crystalline cells in series. Cells will feature an antireflective coating and a low iron glass covering. Cells will be encapsulated to protect them from the environment. Each module will feature a weather tight junction box for connecting the array output cable to the module terminals. Modules will feature a minimum warranty of 5 years for power output. All modules will feature an anodized aluminum frame for mechanical support. Alternate solar materials such as thin film silicon, or CIS materials may be offered as suitable alternate solar materials for the modules. Solar modules will be securely mounted to a suitable top of pole or side of pole mount structure that has been specifically designed to hold solar modules. All of the necessary hardware to install the modules to the mounts and the mount to the pole will be included. Security hardware for securing the module to the mount will be included along with any special tools required for the hardware. Mounts will be powder coated or hot dip galvanized steel. A data sheet for the module to be provided with the system will be part of the bid response. Failure to provide this data will be considered non-responsive and will result in disqualification of the response. System Controls Solar/Flasher Controls: The system will feature an integrated control unit. The controller shall be solid-state unit capable of managing battery charging and load/flasher control in a single unit. Charge control/flasher circuitry built from multiple components will not be allowed thereby reducing maintenance costs and spares inventories. The charge control portion will use an ambient temperature sensor to adjust the charge termination point thus prolonging battery life (temperature compensated charging). The charge circuit will also employ a pulse-width-modulation algorithm for charging the batteries and be a solid-state series switch type configuration. Load/flasher control will be accomplished using a low-voltage-disconnect (LVD) circuit to disconnect power to the flasher control circuit when battery voltage falls to a low state-of-charge (typically 20%). The flasher circuitry will be all solid-state and provide two flasher outputs of at least 5A each. When flashing, the unit will have an output duty cycle of 50% per lamp and will be capable of 50-60 flashes per minute for each lamp. On board short circuit protection shall be provided. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 Photovoltaic Powered Flashing Beacon 13 17 20-3 The controller will have built in night dimming circuitry available and will be programmable through the use of a removable jumper. An 8-position terminal block with all positions labeled for ease of maintenance will be included. Manual switches shall be provided to select the lamp activation source as either Off, On or control from an external source. A switch to select between night run only and auto tracking of external light levels will be included to allow continuous operation or night operation only. A status LED for charging and LVD will be included on the face of the controller. The controller will include an integral aluminum heat sink. Systems designed for areas requiring larger arrays will include electronics panels designed to accommodate the higher charging currents expected. A data sheet on the integrated charge/flasher control unit will be provided with the bid response or the submission will be considered incomplete. Logic Control Device: The system will include a logic control device designed to run all timing parameters, keep count of the number of valid activations received and monitor the system for basic faults such as loss of radio link. The logic device will include a four line by 12-character back lit LCD display. The device will be capable of displaying a minimum of five different messages to help the user determine the status of the system. Messages are displayed on the screen based on the priority that they are given in the software. If two logic states exist that have user messages occur at once, then the highest priority message will be displayed. The user will be able to view all of the messages currently being displayed by scrolling through the displays with the up down arrows to the right of the screen as this moves through the messages based on their priority level. The device will allow the user to modify the timing parameters for run time by using the LCD screen and the six user buttons on the face of the device. Short term activations for applications such as fire station and crosswalk advance beacons will allow for the programming of run times from 1-99 seconds in duration and the timer will be retriggerable. The device will provide two 10A form A contact closure outputs to drive the flasher circuit and an auxiliary load. The device will also include one analog input channel that will disable operation of all loads in the event of a low battery condition or an improper ON-OFF switch setting on the integrated charge/flasher control. The device will also include an input to monitor radio loss- of-link options that may be configured in the radios and provide a fault flash mode for such a failure. The device will also be capable of accepting a memory module for field upgrade of the software. For crosswalk applications the unit will be capable of incorporating time clock based operation of the flashers for applications such as school crossings. The upgraded software will allow for a basic program to be run that provides up to 6 on cycles per day. The clock function will allow up to 8 holiday skip periods per year ranging from a single day to several months. Also included in the software will be up to 6 alternate schedule periods ranging from one day to several months. Alternate schedule periods will allow up to 3 on cycles per day. Alternate schedules are used for functions such as early release days. A data sheet on the device will be included with the bid submission or the response will be considered incomplete. System Radio Receiver: The system will be equipped with a wireless contact closure radio receiver. The receiver for this application will be extended range FM contact closure radio operating at 27.255Mhz. The unit will include a digitally coded address, which will be one of up to 65,000 possible combinations, to secure the communications link from the transmitting location to the beacon unit. The receiver will produce a contact closure output that will be fed to the logic device to activate the flasher circuit. The contacts will be NO, NC and a COM connection. When receiving, the radio will display a solid red light on the bottom of the unit in addition to a green Power LED. Each radio receiver will be capable of being controlled from multiple transmitters that are coded the same (Wireless OR gate function). The radio will have and relative signal strength voltage test point to allow for field testing of the radio signal strength using an voltmeter. The receiver package will also include a 3 foot whip antenna kit and any necessary RF cables as well as RF H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 Photovoltaic Powered Flashing Beacon 13 17 20-4 fittings to complete this feature. The whip antenna will include a tuning screw in the top to allow for on site tuning. The unit will also have an option to set a status report required feature when used with a fixed transmitter. This feature ensures that the RF link between the transmitter and receiver is intact by forcing a fixed transmitter to send out a periodic heartbeat to the receiver. If the heartbeat is not received the receiver will express an open collector output that is tied to an input on the logic control unit. A data sheet on the radio will be included with the bid response or the submission will be considered incomplete. System Batteries: The system will come equipped with the number and type of batteries detailed in the sizing report. The battery type will be a sealed-maintenance free valve-regulated design. The battery will use an Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) to suspend the electrolyte making it immobile. Gel batteries using a thixotropic gel to suspend the electrolyte will also be considered an acceptable alternate. Acceptable battery sizes will be group U1, 22, 24 and group 27. Minimum capacity of the batteries at 25oC will be 36, 56, 80Ah and 97Ah at the C/100 rate respectively. Batteries will use a copolymer polypropylene case and cover. Non- removable pressure regulated flame arresting safety valves will be standard. Rated operating temperature will be from –40oC to 72oC. Batteries will also feature a low self-discharge rate of approximately 1% per month at 25oC. Batteries must be recyclable. System Enclosure: The system will include a single pre-wired enclosure for ease of installation. The unit shall be an aluminum enclosure with a minimum material thickness of 0.125” and an equivalent NEMA rating of 3R. The physical size of the cabinet will be approximately 15.5” x 15.5” x 26” for a 2 battery enclosure and 15.5” x 15.5” x 40” for a four battery enclosure and either size will have a mill finish. Mounts will be included as part of the enclosure and will be suitable for mounting to a 4.5” outer diameter pole. The enclosure will also be capable of accepting band style mounts, and conduit fittings typical to such installations, if needed. The enclosure will feature a minimum of one #2 lock with key. The keyhole for the lock will have a cover attached to the lock cylinder and will swing away from the keyhole so as to allow access when needed. The door will be attached to the unit using a continuous stainless steel hinge that is riveted to the door using solid (not pop-rivets) and the enclosure body. The hinges will be installed such that the rivets are not exposed when the door is closed. An integral rigid stainless steel rod type door stop will be included in the unit so that the door can be fixed in the open position during maintenance. The door shall cover the entire front side of the cabinet and be constructed of a single piece of aluminum. It will have a neoprene gasket around the entire edge of the door. Enclosures shall have three screened louvered vents on each side of each compartment. The louver screening will be aluminum or perforated aluminum sheet for longevity. An integral rain lip will also be provided at the top of the main cabinet body to minimize entry of rain. An adjustable latch striker will be included in the side of the main cabinet body to allow the user to adjust the pressure between the door gasket and the body of the cabinet. All wiring passing in/out of the enclosure or through the shelf will pass through a bushing, chase nipple or appropriate conduit fitting to eliminate the possibility of damage to the wiring as it passes a barrier. The 2B enclosure will include a single aluminum shelf of 0.125” thick material to separate the batteries from the controls thus creating two separate compartments in this style of enclosure. The 4B enclosure will feature two shelves to divide the enclosure into three compartments in the enclosure, two for batteries and one for control electronics. Each battery compartment will have a minimum of ½” of styrofoam sheeting around the battery to minimize heat transfer between the battery and the wall of the enclosure. A metallic label with the name of the system manufacturer will be affixed on the inside of the enclosure door along with a phone number for troubleshooting assistance. A minimum of one key will be required per enclosure. System Wiring: All systems will feature a color-coded wiring harness for both the lamps and the solar array output. The lamp harness will consist of a wiring assembly suitable for use with a two-lamp system to be installed on a H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 Photovoltaic Powered Flashing Beacon 13 17 20-5 typical 15’ pole. The harness will be color coded for ease of connection to the lamps. A seven pin keyed locking connector will be included in the harness to allow the lamps to be disconnected from the control electronics. The connector will be located approximately 13” from the end of the harness that connects to the electronics. An integral fuse assembly will be included in the Lamp positive wire of the harness. All connections will be terminated with a crimped spade terminal for easy installation. Wire for the harness will be TEW or MTW, 300V, as a minimum. The solar array output harness will consist of a jacketed pair of conductors. The size of the conductors will be dependent on the solar array output current. Typical wire gauge will be 12, 10 or 8. The jacket will be a UV resistant PVC or XLP material. Spade terminals will be included for ease of installation. Minimum length will be 15’. The internal conductors will be a minimum of a PVC jacketed conductor with a 300V rating. Where appropriate the inner insulation will be XHHW. Systems using solar arrays over 240-watts will include supplemental harnesses for any additional electronics needed for power control. Supplemental harness assemblies will also be keyed to prevent confusion in the connector orientation. LED Lamp Elements: All systems will feature LED lamps. One or two lamps will be provided with the system depending on the project requirements. Size of the lamps will be either 8” or 12” depending on the project requirements. All LED lamps will feature optically matched LED elements for uniform color output of 590-594 nanometers for amber or 620-622 nanometers for red. LED lamp elements will be made from TSAlInGaP material. Lamps shall incorporate multiple main circuits comprised of 4 LED elements in series. All Lamps shall incorporate a self-regulating circuit to accommodate input voltages from 10.5-18VDC. Surge and spike protection will be included in the lamp circuit. 8” lamps shall contain a minimum of 148 LEDs and have a minimum optical output of 600Cd at turn on at 2.5x2.5 deg. 12” lamps will have 196 LED elements and have an optical output at 2.5x2.5 deg of not less than 1000Cd at turn on. Red 8” LED lamps will have minimum optical output of 400Cd and 12” red LED lamps will have a minimum optical output of 450Cd at turn on at 2.5x2.5 deg. Lamps shall have either a clear or tinted UV stabilized acrylic lens, which shall be removable for field repairs. Lamps shall have a viewing angle of 17.5 x 55 degrees to meet ITE specifications for beam spread (pre June 2006 standards). Lamps will be made in USA from both foreign and domestic parts and include a 3 year limited warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. Data sheets will be provided with the bid response or it will be rejected as incomplete. Signal Head Assembly: All signal head assemblies will be constructed of either aluminum or polycarbonate and will include a tunnel visor of the same material. Signal heads will be finished in yellow as the standard color. The signal head assembly will be supported by an upper arm assembly and include both a one-way hub and a universal hub to allow for ease of installation in the field. A lamp closure kit matching the color of the head will be included as well. Signal head assemblies will include a 5” louvered back plate with hardware and will be installed at the discretion of the project engineer. Documentation: Each system will come with a complete installation and user’s guide. Minimum information to be covered is as follows: -Basic solar system theory and system overview. -Description of all the system components and their basic function. -Installation of a typical system including sections specifically covering pole installation, all aspects of installation of the solar power system and LED lamp installation. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 Photovoltaic Powered Flashing Beacon 13 17 20-6 -Troubleshooting and maintenance of the system. -Complete appendices on all of the components used in the system. -Quick start timer programming instructions. -Complete drawings or illustrations throughout to support and clarify the text. -Phone/FAX numbers for technical support of the system H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 27 20 00-1 Fire Station Alerting System Performance SECTION 27 20 00 Fire Station Alerting System Performance Specifications 1.0 Overview This specification is for a Fire Station Alerting system to be installed in one or more fire stations. It shall be capable of interfacing to, and receiving alerts from a data network, radio network, and two-tone paging system. The system shall be based on standard EIA/TIA 568-B Category 5 data network cabling and shall be installable by a low voltage cabling contractor. The alerting system shall accommodate connections to systems such as lighting control, telephone paging, voice radios, doorbell buttons, and other devices. These systems and their installation will be specified in other sections and provided by the owner or other trades. 1.1 Section Includes: Fire Station Alerting system equipment with Fire Station Controller along with an optional expansion unit installed in a central location and peripherals consisting of Room Remotes, Message Remotes and message signs, Turnout Timers and audio speakers located throughout the Fire Station. 1.2 References A. Underwriter's Laboratories UL-1069. B. Electronics Industry Association / Telecommunications Industry Association. C. National Electrical Code. D. U.S. Dept. of Labor / Occupational Safety and Health Administration. E. National Fire Protection Association 1221. 1.3 Qualifications A. Certified low-voltage system installer. B. Applicable state licenses. C. Certificate of successful completion of manufacturer's installation/training school for the equipment being proposed. 1.4 Related Work Provided in Other Specification Sections A. Unless noted otherwise, the following work is to be provided under other specification sections: 1. Installation of conduits, raceways and electrical junction boxes. 2. 120 VAC power wiring and outlets. 3. Overhead lighting. 4. Rough openings and framing for equipment cabinets and Room Remotes. 1.5 System Description A. System hardware shall consist of a Station Alerting Controller and multiple peripheral units. These peripherals shall be one or more Message Remotes with BetaBrite message signs; Room Remotes and Turnout Timers. System speakers shall be Bogen S86 or equivalent speakers for non-lighted applications, US Digital Designs Jupiter low-voltage lighted speakers for lighted applications, and Bogen NEAR A2 speakers for apparatus bay and outside applications. B. All necessary equipment required meeting the intent of these specifications, whether or not enumerated within these specifications, shall be supplied and installed to provide a complete and operating fire station alerting system. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 27 20 00-2 Fire Station Alerting System Performance C. System firmware shall be the product of the station alerting system manufacturer with sole control over revisions and/or changes. Manufacturer shall provide, free of charge, product firmware/software upgrades for a period of one year from date of installation for any product feature enhancements. System firmware upgrades shall not require any exchange of parts and shall be capable of being executed via a laptop computer connection, a web browser, and the SSL protocol. 1.6 Submittals A. Any supplying contractor proposing equipment which is not the base standard for this specification, must provide full submittals at the time of bid. This option shall be exercised at the discretion of the owner/specifying authority. B. In the event the specifying authority decides to reject the submittals of a supplying contractor, the specifying authority may ask the contractor to re-submit if the discrepancies are minor. Otherwise rejection of submittals means the specified product must be supplied. Part 2—Products 2.1 Manufacturers The products specified shall be new and of the standard manufacture of a single reputable manufacturer. As a reference of standard and quality, functionality and operation, it is the request of the owner that bids be based only on equipment manufactured by US Digital Designs, Tempe, Arizona or approved equal. 2.2 Cabling Cabling shall be in strict accordance with local codes and to the cable specifications found in the manufacturer’s installation manual. All peripheral network cabling shall be ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B Category 5 UTP plenum rated cable run as shown on drawings. Cable jacket shall be YELLOW in color. Certification documents shall be provided for all cabling runs. Message Remote to BetaBrite message sign data cable shall be flat grey 6 conductor telephone device cable with 6 conductor modular plugs attached on both ends. Wiring shall be straight through. All speaker cabling shall be 18 gauge, 2 conductor stranded jacketed cable for speakers only and 18 gauge, 4 conductor stranded jacketed cable for Jupiter speaker lights. Optionally, contractors can run two 18 gauge, 2 conductor cables for Jupiter speaker lights. 2.3 Fire Station Controller Equipment NOTE TO SPECIFIERS: Select one of the two controller option sections below. Option 1 Furnish a Phoenix G2 Fire Station Alerting Controller mounted in a 19” rack cabinet located in a central location. Each unit shall have the following equipment factory installed and interconnected: A. Fire Station Controller. B. Audio Tone Unit – ATU. C. 24 Port Ethernet Switch. D. 24 Port Power Audio Ethernet Mixer. E. Uninterruptible Power Supply. F. Cabling Patch Panel. F. Radio Mounting Bracket. Option 2 H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 27 20 00-3 Fire Station Alerting System Performance Furnish a Fire Station Alerting Controller [19” rack mounted, wall mounted, desktop mounted]. Each unit shall have the following features built into a single cabinet: A. Fire Station Controller B. 3 Configurable Audio Inputs and Audio Switching System C. 8 Port Power Audio Ethernet Mixer D. 4 x 20 Watt Audio Amplifiers E. 48 vdc low-voltage lighting control F. Auxiliary Inputs and Outputs G. External UPS 2.4 Message Remotes Furnish as shown on plans, Message Remotes capable of the following functions: A. Dual Message Sign control. B. Independently Controlled Dual 15 Watt Audio Amplifiers. C. Lighting Control. D. Panel or wall-mountable. E. Single cable connection. 2.5 Double-Sided Message Remotes Furnish as shown on plans, Double-Sided Message Remotes w/ 2 Beta-Brite signs attached capable of the following functions: A. Dual Message Sign control. B. Independently Controlled Dual 15 Watt Audio Amplifiers. C. Lighting Control. D. Cantilever support with attached mounting bracket. E. Single cable connection. 2.6 Room Remotes Furnish as shown on plans, Room Remotes capable of the following functions (Future connection and stub to be provided only.): A. Integrated Message Display. B. 15 Watt Audio Amplifier. C. Lighting Control. D. Flush or surface mountable. E. Single cable connection. 2.7 Turnout Timers Furnish as shown on plans, Turnout Timers capable of the following functions: A. 2.25” LED Digit Display B. Count up display showing Minutes and Seconds elapsed during alert C. Dry Contact triggers to start/stop and reset counter 2.8 Speaker Systems Speaker systems shall be either 8 ohm or 70 volt, as per design documents. Speakers shall be grouped into “areas” of similar sound level and unit alerting requirements. 2.9 Hallway / Room Speakers Speakers may be provided by Alerting System manufacturer, or contractor. Check with System manufacturer for details. Speakers shall be Bogen S86T725PG8W or as called out on plans. For suspended ceiling applications, provide appropriate speaker support tile bridge. For hard ceiling applications provide appropriate speaker back box. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 27 20 00-4 Fire Station Alerting System Performance 2.10 Apparatus Room and Outdoor Speakers Provide as shown on plans, Bogen Communications NEAR A2 loudspeakers. 2.11 LED Lighted Speakers Provide Jupiter low-voltage LED lighted speakers. This low-voltage lighting shall be 48 VDC and operated by dry contact closure. 2.12 System Diagnostics A. All active components in the system shall be continuously supervised for both power and data to ensure proper operation and in the case of system faults to aid in troubleshooting. B. All faults shall be displayed immediately on the associated Communications Gateway. Part 3—Execution 3.1 Supervision Only factory trained installers shall install, service, and maintain the specified system. 3.2 Rough Openings NOTE TO SPECIFIERS: Select one of the two controller option sections below. A. The Station Alerting Controller only requires a rough opening if mounted exposed in a 19” rack cabinet. The Station Alerting Controller is normally surface wall mounted. B. Provide access hatches in finished drywall ceiling areas where access is restricted to devices mounted above ceiling. 3.3 Wiring A. All peripheral network cables terminate on patch panel located in the Station Controller Cabinet and on a single telecommunications outlet on the peripheral end. Telecommunications Outlet jack shall be Panduit CJ5E88TGWH Mini-Com or equivalent. B. All speaker cabling shall be 18 gauge, 2 conductor stranded, jacketed cable for speakers only and 18 gauge, 4 conductor stranded jacketed cable for Jupiter speaker lights. Optionally, contractors can run two 18 gauge, 2 conductor cables for Jupiter speaker lights. C. Contractor shall terminate all four (4) pairs of Category 5 cable on manufacturer-approved connectors, and shall test and certify all connections to 100MHz. Provide all cabling test certifications after testing. D. All wiring shall be free from shorts and faults. Wiring shall be UL listed, NEC and NFPA 70, Article 25 approved. E. Terminate all network cabling on approved patch panels. Label each jack panel with the room number of each terminating jack and the end of the corresponding cable with the jack panel number and jack number. F. Message Sign cabling to Message Remote shall be 6 conductor flat “silver satin” type cable or equivalent. Terminate both ends with 6 conductor modular plugs utilizing straight thru wiring (DO NOT turn over conductors). Message Sign to Message Remote cabling shall not be longer than 25 feet to observe proper serial operation. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 27 20 00-5 Fire Station Alerting System Performance G. 8 ohm speakers shall have cabling run to nearest speaker, Message Remote, or Room Remote as noted on plans. 70 Volt speakers shall have cabling run to the nearest speaker, Message Remote with 70 volt transformer, or home run back to Station Controller cabinet as noted on plans. H. Label both ends of all network cabling and the Station Controller Cabinet end of all speaker and lighting cables. Label patch panels in the Station Controller location. 3.4 Outlet Boxes and Conduit General – Provide pull string in all empty conduit installed in this section. Label conduit ends with conduit usage when practical. A. Message Remote – In suspended ceiling locations, provide 4” metal J-box with mud ring, as indicated, above finished ceiling. Stub up 3/4” empty conduit from each Message Remote J-box to nearest accessible ceiling, cable tray, or other location as shown. In hard ceiling locations, locate J- box at nearest accessible ceiling location. Provide 4” metal J-box with duplex mud ring as indicated for each associated message sign at +7'6” AFF typical (+13' AFF for apparatus bay). Center J-box above doorways and align with other architectural features as directed. Orient mud ring opening horizontally. Provide 3/4” empty conduit between the Message Remote J-box and each of the associated message sign J-boxes (maximum of two). Provide duplex stainless steel J-box covers with 3/4” dia. hole centered in the cover with a Heyco #2840 bushing for all junction boxes. B. Double-sided Message Remote – Provide 4” metal J-box with mud ring, as indicated, on wall behind sign mounting location. Stub up 3/4” empty conduit from J-box to nearest accessible ceiling, cable tray, or other location as shown. Provide suitable mounting (3/4” plywood typical) behind drywall surface for mounting Double-sided Message Remote bracket. NOTE: The mounting bracket must support the entire weight of the Message Remote and attached signs. C. Room Remote – Provide 3/4” empty conduit from rough opening to nearest accessible ceiling, cable tray, or as shown on drawings. Rough opening to be located +48” AFF typical and no more than +64” AFF. D. Ceiling Speakers (Hard Ceiling) – Provide Bogen RE84 Ceiling Speaker Enclosures in all hard ceiling applications. Provide 3/4” empty conduit to enclosure and run to nearest accessible ceiling location, cable tray or equipment as shown. Conduit shall also be used to interconnect with other enclosures as shown on construction drawings. E. Ceiling Speakers (Suspended Ceiling) – Provide Bogen TB8 as appropriate for specified speakers. Provide RE84 ceiling speaker enclosures as required by specifying engineer or client. F. Apparatus Bay and Outside Speakers – Provide 4” metal J-box with mud ring and cover at each speaker location with 3/4” empty conduit to Message Remote or other location as indicated. Provide a 3/4” dia. hole centered in the J-box cover with a Heyco #2840 bushing to allow speaker cable to run to speaker. Apparatus bay speakers are typically located +13' AFF, outside speakers are typically located +11' AFF. Other heights as noted on drawings. 3.5 Speakers A. Ceiling Speakers (Suspended Ceiling) – Install Bogen S86T725PG8W speakers through ceiling tiles and tile bridge per manufacturer's specifications. Connect speakers to Room Remotes and Message Remotes as shown. 8 ohm speaker systems require that the 70 volt transformer be bypassed by the installer. All 8 ohm speakers shall be installed using parallel or series/parallel connections with no less than 4 ohms impedance. B. Ceiling Speakers (Hard Ceiling) – Install Bogen S86T725PG8W speakers into enclosures and connect to Room Remotes or Message Remotes as shown. C. Apparatus Bay Speakers – Install Bogen NEAR A2 speakers to structure per manufacturer's specifications. Connect speakers to Message Remote amplifier via cable in conduit as shown. Dress cabling neatly to minimize visibility. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 27 20 00-6 Fire Station Alerting System Performance D. Exterior Speakers – Install Bogen NEAR A2 speakers to structure per manufacturer's specifications. Connect speakers to correct Message Remote amplifier as shown. Provide Bogen model ASTB4 cable boot and install drip loop in cable prior to entry into J-box. Seal entry using appropriate sealant. 3.6 Equipment Mounting All equipment mounted to drywall shall use appropriate fasteners and drywall anchors. Equipment shall not be directly screwed into drywall using unapproved fasteners such as drywall or wood screws. 3.7 Electrical Power Connections A. It shall be the responsibility of other trades to provide the appropriate number of dedicated 120 VAC, 20A duplex outlets into the equipment cabinet rough opening. This power feed shall not have any other devices connected directly to it and shall be labeled “Station Alerting”. This electrical circuit shall be connected to the fire station's emergency power system for automatic power provision during loss of utility power. B. Provide single 120 VAC 15A outlet for each Turnout Timer location. Outlet shall be located to accept standard plug-in wall transformer. C. Connect all system power supplies and equipment cabinets to a common earth ground utilizing a 14 AWG, or larger, solid conductor which is at minimum the same conductor size as the AC feed wires. 3.8 Environmental Protection Make certain that all central equipment is accessible for service. Contractor shall notify specifying authority if designated equipment closet does not meet manufacturer's requirements for heat, radiation or static electricity. 3.9 Connections to Other Equipment A. Lighting Controller – Connect low voltage dry contact lighting controls (provided by others) to Room Remote, Message Remote or ATU outputs. Low voltage outputs are non-inductive load, 24VDC 1A maximum. Provide an interposing relay or contactor between the low voltage output and any 120/277 VAC lighting or other load. B. Local Area Network - Connect the Fire Station Controller to the general purpose LAN (provided by others) located in the Fire Station. This connection shall be connected back to the central Communications Gateway to allow alerting commands to be sent from the Communications Gateway to the Fire Station Controller. In addition, the connection shall allow remote diagnostics and configuration. C. Radio System– Connect Audio Input #1 to the dispatch voice radio system (provided by others) as necessary to provide dispatch audio. This connection shall provide a 600 ohm impedance 0 dBm level signal. D. Telephone System Intercom – Connect Audio Input #3 to an Intercom output from the building telephone system (provided by others). This line shall be provided via a jack box located directly adjacent to the Station Alerting system equipment. E. Other Audio Source– Connect Audio Input #4 to an audio source (provided by others). This line shall be provided via a jack box located directly adjacent to the Station Alerting system equipment. F. Telephone System Ringdown – Connect the Ring Detector input to a telephone line (provided by others) for telephone ringing and backup alerting. This line shall be provided via a jack box located directly adjacent to the Station Alerting equipment. 3.10 Drawings Provide as-built drawings of all installed components and associated wiring on building plans. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 1 SECTION 28 31 00 - NETWORKED FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Expandable emergency evacuation fire alarm system. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 12 – Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems. 2. NFPA 13 – Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 3. NFPA 15 – Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection. 4. NFPA 16 – Standard for the Installation of Foam – Water Sprinkler and Foam-Water Spray Systems. 5. NFPA 16A – Standard for the Installation of Closed Head Foam – Water Sprinkler Systems. 6. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code (NEC). 7. NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm Code. 8. NFPA 90A – Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 9. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code. 10. NFPA 750 – Standard on Water Mist Fire Protection Systems. 11. NFPA 5000 – Building Construction and Safety Code B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 268 - Standard for Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems. 2. UL 864 - Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems. 3. UL 1971 - Standard for Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired. 4. UL 2572 - Standard for Control and Communication Units For Mass Notification Systems. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. A new intelligent reporting, Style 7 networked, fully peer-to-peer, microprocessor-controlled fire detection and emergency voice alarm communication system shall be installed in accordance with the specifications and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Each Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) and Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC): Limited to only 80 percent of its total capacity during initial installation. C. Basic Performance: 1. Network Communications Circuit (NetSOLO) Serving Network Nodes: Wired using single twisted non-shielded 2-conductor cable or connected using approved fiber optic cable between nodes in Class A configuration. 2. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) Serving Addressable Devices: Wired Class A. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 2 3. Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) Serving Non-addressable Devices Connected to Addressable Monitor Modules: Wired Class A. 4. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) Serving Strobes, Horns and Speakers: Wired Class A. 5. On Class A Configurations: Single ground fault or open circuit on Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power, or ability to report alarm. 6. Alarm Signals Arriving at INCC COMMAND CENTER: Not be lost following primary power failure until alarm signal is processed and recorded. 7. Transponders: a. Operate in peer-to-peer fashion with other panels and transponders in system. b. Each transponder shall store copy of audio evacuation messages and tones. c. Systems that use centralized message storage and control at main fire alarm control panel shall not be acceptable. 8. Network Node Communications, Audio Evacuation Channels and Fire Phone Communications: a. Communicated between panels and transponders on single twisted pair of copper wires or fiber optic cables. b. To enhance system survivability, ability to operate on loss of INCC Command Center, short or open of entire riser at INCC Command Center shall be demonstrated at time of system acceptance testing. c. Systems that are not capable of providing true Class A performance for fire fighter's phone communications shall not be acceptable. 9. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC): a. Reside in remote transponders with associated audio zones. b. SLC modules shall operate in peer-to-peer fashion with all other panels and transponders in system. c. On loss of INCC Command Center, each transponder shall continue to communicate with remainder of system, including all SLC functions and audio messages located in all transponders. d. Systems that provide a "Degraded" mode of operation upon loss of INCC Command Center or short in riser shall not be acceptable. 10. Audio Amplifiers and Tone-Generating Equipment: Electrically supervised for normal and abnormal conditions. 11. Amplifiers: Located in transponder cabinets serving no more that 3 floors per transponder to enhance system survivability, reduce required riser wiring, simplify installation, and reduce power losses in length of speaker circuits. 12. Speaker NAC Circuits: Arranged such that there is a minimum of 1 speaker circuit per fire alarm zone. 13. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC), Speaker Circuits, and Control Equipment: Arranged such that loss of any 1 speaker circuit will not cause loss of any other speaker circuit in system. 14. Speaker Circuits: a. Electrically supervised for open and short circuit conditions. b. If short circuit exists on speaker circuit, it shall not be possible to activate that circuit. c. Arranged for 25 or 70 VRMS and shall be power limited in accordance with H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 3 NEC d. 20 percent spare capacity for future expansion or increased power output requirements. 15. Speaker Circuits and Control Equipment: a. Arranged such that loss of any 1 speaker circuit will not cause loss of any other speaker circuit in system. b. Systems utilizing "bulk" audio configurations shall not be acceptable. 16. 2-W ay Telephone Communication Circuits: a. Shall communicate digitally over the network between transponders. b. Supervised for open and short circuit conditions. c. Short circuit condition on 2-way telephone communications circuit shall result in trouble condition and not result in call-in condition. 17. Voice Communication: a. Connect telephone circuits to speaker circuits to allow voice communication over speaker circuit from telephone handset. b. Capable of remote phone-to-phone conversations and party-line communications as required. D. Basic System Functional Operation: When fire alarm condition is detected and reported by 1 of the system alarm initiating devices, the following functions shall immediately occur: 1. System Alarm LEDs: Flash. 2. Local Piezo-Electric Signal in Control Panel: Sound at a pulse rate. 3. 80-Character LCD Display: Indicate all information associated with fire alarm condition, including type of alarm point and its location within protected premises. 4. Historical Log: Record information associated with fire alarm control panel condition, along with time and date of occurrence. History Log shall have capacity for recording up to 4,100 events. 5. System output programs assigned via control-by-event equations to be activated by particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (alarm notification appliances and/or relays) shall be activated. a. Close Fire Doors b. Shot down air handlers as required by code c. Notify the Central Station or Municipal Tie. 6. Strobes flash synchronized continuously. 7. Audio Portion of System: Sound alert tone followed by pre-recorded message determined by event and this scenario repeating or other message as approved by local authority until system is reset. E. Fire Alarm System Functionality: 1. Provide complete, electrically supervised distributed, Class A networked analog/addressable fire alarm and control system, with analog initiating devices, integral multiple-channel voice evacuation, and fire fighter's phone system. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 4 2. Fire Alarm System: a. Consist of multiple-voice channels with no additional hardware required for total of 4 channels. b. Incorporate multiprocessor-based control panels, including model E3 Series modules includes Intelligent Network INCC Command Center(s) (INCC), Intelligent Loop Interface (ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3), Intelligent Network Transponders (INX), communicating over peer-to-peer token ring network with standard capacity of up to 64 nodes expandable to 122. 3. Each ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3 Node: Incorporate 2 Signaling Line Circuits (SLC), with capacity to support in Velociti ® mode up to 159 analog addressable detectors and 159 addressable modules per ILI-MB-E3 SLC or support in Apollo mode up to 126 detectors and modules per ILI95-MB-E3 SLC. 4. Voice, Data, and Fire Fighter's Phone Riser: Transmit over single pair of wires or fiber optic cable. 5. Each Intelligent Network Transponder: Capable of providing 16 distributed voice messages, fire fighter phones connections, SLC loop for audio control devices, and integral network interface. 6. Each Network Node: Incorporate Boolean control-by-event programming, including as a minimum AND, OR, NOT, and Timer functions. 7. Control Panels: Capability to accept firmware upgrades via connection with laptop computer, without requirement of replacing microchips. 8. Network: a. Based on peer-to-peer token ring technology operating at 625 K baud, using Class A configuration. b. Capability of using twisted-pair wiring, pair of fiber optic Multi-mode cable strands up to 200 microns or Single-mode optimized for 9/125 microns, or any combination, to maximize flexibility in system configuration. 9. Each Network Node: a. Capability of being programmed off-line using Windows-based software supplied by fire alarm system manufacturer. Capability of being downloaded by connecting laptop computer into any other node in system. Systems that require system software to be downloaded to each transponder at each transponder location shall not be acceptable. b. Capability of being grouped with any number of additional nodes to produce a "Region", allowing that group of nodes to act as 1, while retaining peer-to-peer functionality. Systems utilizing "Master/Slave" configurations shall not be acceptable. c. Capability of annunciating all events within its "Region" or annunciating all events from entire network, on front panel LCD or touchscreen display without additional equipment. 10. Each SLC Network Node: Capability of having integral DACT (digital alarm communicator transmitter) that can report events in either its region, or entire network to single central station monitoring account. 11. Each Control Panel: Capability of storing its entire program, and allow installer to activate only devices that are installed during construction, without further downloading of system. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 5 12. Password Protection: Each system shall be provided with 4 levels of password protection with up to 16 passwords. 13. Have the capacity for multiple pre-recorded messages (at least sixteen (16), but more if required by local AHJ) and address a list of subjects. a. Fire evacuation and relocation b. Intruder or hostile person sighted within or around the building grounds c. Directions to occupants to take cover within building d. Emergency weather conditions appropriate for local area e. All Clear 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01330 (01 33 00) - Submittal Procedures. B. Include sufficient information, clearly presented, to determine compliance with the specifications and the Drawings. C. Equipment Submittals: 1. Cover Page: Indicate the following: a. Project name and address. b. Engineered systems distributor's name and other contact information. c. Installing contractor's name and other contact information. d. Date of equipment submittals. Indicate on revised submittals the original submittal date and revised submittal date. 2. Table of Contents: Lists each section of equipment submittal. 3. Scope of Work Narrative: Detail indented scope of work. 4. Sequence of Operations: Use matrix or written text format, detailing activation of each type of device and associated resulting activation of the following: a. Control panel. b. Annunciator panels. c. Notification appliances. d. Building fire safety functions, including elevator recall, elevator power shutdown, door lock release, door holder release, HVAC unit shutdown, smoke evacuation system activation, and stair pressurization fan activation. 5. Bill of Material: Indicate for each component of system the following: a. Quantity. b. Model number. c. Description. 6. SLC Circuit Schedule: Detail address and associated description of each addressable device. Clearly provide information that indicates number of both active and spare addresses. 7. Battery Calculations: Show load of each of, and total of, components of system along with standby and alarm times that calculations are based on. Show calculated spare capacity and size of intended battery. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 6 D. Shop Drawings: 1. Cover Page: Indicate the following: a. Project name and address. b. Engineered systems distributor's name and other contact information. c. Installing contractor's name and other contact information. d. Date of equipment submittals. Indicate on revised submittals the original submittal date and revised submittal date. 2. Floor Plans: a. Provide separate floor plan for each floor. b. If a floor plan must be split using match lines to fit on the page, provide match lines and match line references that refer to sheet number that shows area on opposite side of match line. c. Prepare using AutoCAD. d. Prepare to scale 1/8 inch = 1'-0", unless otherwise required by the Architect or Engineer. e. Show equipment and device locations. f. Show wiring information in point-to-point format. g. Show conduit routing, if required by the AHJ. 3. Title Block: Provide on each sheet and include, at a minimum, the following: a. Project name. b. Project address. c. Sheet name. d. Sheet number. e. Scale of drawing. f. Date of drawing. g. Revision dates, if applicable. 4. Control Panel: Provide sheet that details exterior and interior views of control panel and clearly shows associated wiring information. 5. Annunciator Panels: Provide sheet that details exterior and interior views of annunciator panels and clearly shows associated wiring information. E. Certification: Submit with equipment submittals and shop drawings, letter of certification from major equipment manufacturer, indicating proposed engineered system distributor is an authorized representative of major equipment manufacturer. F. Project Record Drawings: 1. Submit complete project record drawings within 14 calendar days after acceptance test. 2. Project record drawings shall be similar to shop drawings, but revised to reflect changes made during construction. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 7 G. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Submit complete operation and maintenance manuals within 14 calendar days after acceptance test. 2. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be similar to equipment submittals, but revised to reflect changes made during construction. 3. Include factory's standard installation and operating instructions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. NFPA: System shall comply with the following NFPA codes and standards: a. NFPA 12. b. NFPA 13. c. NFPA 15. d. NFPA 16. e. NFPA 16A. f. NFPA 70. g. NFPA 72. h. NFPA 90A. i. NFPA 101. j. NFPA 750. k. NFPA 5000. 2. ADA: System shall conform to American with Disabilities Act (ADA). B. To ensure reliability and complete compatibility, all items of fire alarm system, including control panels, power supplies, initiating devices, and notification appliances, shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) and shall bear "UL" label. C. Alarm Control Panel Equipment: UL-listed under UL 864 Ninth Edition and UL 2572. D. Equipment, Programming, and Installation Supervision: 1. Provide services of approved Platinum Level engineered systems distributor of Gamewell- FCI for equipment, programming, and installation supervision. 2. Provide proof of factory training within 14 calendar days of award of the Contract. E. Software Modifications: 1. Provide services of Platinum Level Gamewell-FCI factory-trained and authorized technician to perform system software modifications, upgrades, or changes. 2. Provide use of all hardware, software, programming tools, and documentation necessary to modify fire alarm system software on-site. 3. Modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones, and changes to system operation and custom label changes for devices or zones. 4. System structure and software shall place no limit on type or extent of software modifications on-site. 5. Modification of software shall not require power-down of system or loss of system fire protection while modifications are being made. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 8 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Handling: Protect materials from damage during handling and installation. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work of this section with the Work of other sections, including sprinkler systems as specified in Section , elevators as specified in Section , HVAC systems as specified in Section , and security/door locking systems as specified in Section . 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warranty Period for System Equipment: 1 year from date of final acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Gamewell-FCI, Honeywell Fire Systems, 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472. Phone (203) 484-7161. Fax (203) 484-7118. Website: <www.gamewell-fci.com>. B. References to manufacturer's model numbers and other information is intended to establish minimum standards of performance, function, and quality. Equivalent equipment from Gamewell may be substituted for the specified equipment, as long as minimum standards are met. No other manufacturers, other than Gamewell-FCI, FCI, and Gamewell will be considered for use on this project. C. Substitute equipment proposed as equal to equipment specified shall meet or exceed requirements of this section. For equipment other than Gamewell-FCI E3 Series Expandable Emergency Evacuation Fire Alarm System, provide proof that such substitute equipment equals or exceeds features, functions, performance, and quality of specified equipment. This proof shall be provided by submission of a copy of specification with each copy of the submittals that has had each paragraph marked as either compliant or non-compliant along with a letter from engineering manager or product manager at factory that certifies information presented as either compliant or non-compliant including a detailed explanation of each paragraph identified as non-compliant. In order to ensure that the Owner is provided with a system that incorporates required survivability features, this letter shall also specifically certify that the system is capable of complying with the test requirements of this section. 2.2 DISTRIBUTED NETWORKED FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Distributed Networked Fire Alarm System: Gamewell-FCI E3 Series Expandable Emergency Evacuation Fire Alarm System. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 9 2.3 INTELLIGENT NETWORK INCC COMMAND CENTER HARDWARE A. Intelligent Network INCC Command Center (INCC): Supply user interface, including LCD or touch-screen 1/4 VGA display Intelligent Loop Interface Modules (ILI-MB-E3/ILI95-MB-E3), manual switching, phone, and microphone inputs to the network. INCC shall consist of the following units and components: 1. System Cabinet (B-, C-, or D-Size Cabinet) with associated inner door. 2. Power Supply Module (PM-9) with batteries. 3. Intelligent Network Interface Voice Gateway (INI-VG). 4. 80-Character LCD Display (LCD-E3). 5. Intelligent Loop Main Board Interface (ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3). 6. Intelligent Loop Supplemental Interface (ILI-S-E3 or ILI95-S-E3). 7. DACT (DACT-E3). 8. ARCNET Repeater (RPT-E3) with fiber optic modules (FSL-E3 or FML-E3). 9. 1/4 VGA touch-screen display (NGA). 10. Auxiliary Switch Module (ASM-16). 11. Optional LED Driver Module (ANU-48) 12. Microphone Assembly (INCC-MIC). 13. Optional Telephone Assembly (INCC-TEL). 14. AM-50 Series amplifiers (AM-50, AM-50-70). 15. Optional Addressable Node Expander (ANX-SR, ANX-MR-FO, ANX-MR-UTP). B. System Cabinet: 1. Surface or semi-flush mounted with texture finish. 2. Consist of back box, inner door, and door. 3. Available in at least 3 sizes to best fit project configuration. 4. Houses 1 or more PM-9 Power Supply Modules, INI-VG Intelligent Network Interface Voice Gateway, 1 or more ILI-MB-E3/ILI95-MB-E3 assemblies, and other optional modules as specified. 5. Construction: Dead-front steel construction with inner door to conceal internal circuitry and wiring. 6. Wiring Gutter Space: A minimum of 1-inch wiring gutter space behind mounting plate. 7. Wiring: Terminated on removable terminal blocks to allow field servicing of modules without disrupting system wiring. C. Power Supply Module (PM-9): Use latest technologies to provide system power, incorporates the following features: 1. Power-saving switching technology using no step-down transformers. 2. 9-amp continuous-rated output to supply up to all power necessary under normal and emergency conditions for INCC Command Center Modules. 3. Integral battery charger with capacity to charge up to 55 amp-hour batteries while under full load. D. Batteries: 1. Sufficient capacity to provide power for entire system upon loss of normal AC power for a period of 60 hours with 15 minutes of alarm signaling at end of this 60-hour period, as required by NFPA 72, Auxiliary Systems. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 10 E. Intelligent Network Interface Voice Gateway INCC Command Center (INI-VG): INI-VG shall be a multi-function board interchangeable in both INCC and INX. Functions of board shall have the following features as a minimum: 1. Microprocessor shall monitor all system events and perform all system programs, for all control-by-event (CBE) functions. System program shall not be lost upon failure of both primary and secondary power. Programming shall supporting Boolean logic including AND, OR, NOT, TIMING functions for maximum flexibility. 2. Network Interface: Operate at 625 K baud configurable with any combination of wire and/or fiber topologies. Interface shall communicate with up to122 nodes in peer-to-peer fashion. 3. Fire Fighter Phone Riser: INI-VG shall generate local phone riser for use with AOM-TEL phone modules for connection to fire fighter phone stations and/or for connection of local phone when used as INCC Command Center, including phone circuits. INI-VG shall mix its local phone riser to network in true Class A fashion. Systems not capable of true Class A communications for fire fighter's phone risers shall not be acceptable. 4. Advanced Processing: INI-VG shall incorporate latest in digital signaling processing technology with supporting Boolean logic including AND, OR, NOT, TIMING, COUNT, SCHEDULE functions. 5. Microphone Input: On-board and allow for addition of local microphone when used as INCC Command Center, including speaker circuit control. 6. Signal Processing: INCC shall use advanced Digital Signal Processing (DSP) technology to allow maximum flexibility of digital audio and control capabilities and operation. Signals to and from INCC shall be transmitted over single pair of twisted unshielded wire or fiber optic pair. 7. Field Programmable: INCC shall be capable of being fully programmed or modified by Field Configuration Program (FCP), to be downloaded via portable computer from any node in system. 8. Control-by-Event Programming (CBE): INCC shall be capable of programming using Boolean logic including AND, OR, NOT, COUNT, TIMING, and SCHEDULE functions to provide complete programming flexibility. 9. Remote INCC Command Center Options: System shall have capability of adding remote INCC Command Centers or re-locating INCC Command Centers utilizing only single pair of twisted unshielded wire or fiber optic pair for all functions. 10. RS-485 Serial Output: System shall incorporate RS-485 bus via ribbon harness for connection of modules inside same cabinet, and via 4-wire quick connector for connection of modules up to 3,000 feet from cabinet. 11. Riser Wiring: All data, voice, and fire fighter phone riser shall transmit over single pair of twisted unshielded wire or fiber optic pair for all functions configured in Class A format. Any short or open in data, voice, or phone sections shall not affect transmission over remainder of network. 12. Class A Network: All communication between control panels and transponders shall be through supervised Style 7 token passing network. In event of single short, open, or ground, all system communication shall operate as normal and report fault. This protection shall incorporate all data, voice, and fire fighter phone transmissions. Upon single short, open, or ground of either system data, live voice, pre-recorded channels, or phone risers, the function of each of these items shall continue to operate. "Degrade" functionality shall not be acceptable. This shall be demonstrated at system acceptance. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 11 F. LCD Display Module (LCD-E3): 1. LCD Display: 80-character RS-485 based textual annunciator with capability of being mounted locally or remotely. Provides audible and visual annunciation of all alarms and trouble signals. Provide dedicated LEDs for: a. AC Power On: Green. b. Alarm: Red. c. Supervisory: Yellow. d. System Trouble: Yellow. e. Power Fault: Yellow. f. Ground Fault: Yellow. g. System Silenced: Yellow. 2. 80-Character Alphanumeric Display: Provide status of all analog/addressable sensors, monitor and control modules. Display shall be liquid crystal type (LCD), clearly visible in dark and under all light conditions. 3. Panel shall contain 4 functional keys: a. Alarm Acknowledge. b. Trouble Acknowledge. c. Signal Silence. d. System Reset/Lamp Test. 4. Panel shall contain 3 configuration buttons: a. Menu/Back. b. Back Space/Edit. c. OK/Enter. 5. Panel shall have 12-key telephone-style keypad to permit selection of functions. G. Intelligent Loop Interface (ILI-MB-E3/ILI95-MB-E3): System shall be of multiprocessor design to allow maximum flexibility of capabilities and operation. Intelligent Loop Interface shall be capable of mounting in stand-alone enclosure or integrated with Intelligent Network INCC Command Center (INCC) as specified. 1. Field Programmable: System shall be capable of being programmed by Field Configuration Program (FCP), allowing programming to be downloaded via portable computer from any node on network. 2. RS-232C Serial Output: Supervised RS-232C serial port shall be provided to operate remote printers and/or video terminals, accept downloaded program from portable computer, or provide 80-column readout of all alarms, troubles, location descriptions, time, and date. Communication shall be standard ASCII code operating from 1,200 to 115,200 baud rate. 3. RS-485 Serial Output: Each ILI-MB-E3/ILI95-MB-E3 shall incorporate RS-485 bus via ribbon harness for connection of modules inside same cabinet, and via 4-wire quick connector for connection of modules up to 3,000 feet from cabinet. RS-485 bus shall support up to 16 ASM-16 auxiliary switch modules, 6 LCD-E3 main annunciators, and 5 LCD-7100 annunciators. 4. Peer-to-Peer Panel Configuration: All Loop Interface Modules shall incorporate own programming, log functions, Central Processor Unit, and control-by-event (CBE) H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 12 programming. If any loop becomes disabled, each remaining loop driver shall continue to communicate with remainder of network and maintain normal operation. "Degrade" configurations under these conditions shall not be acceptable. 5. Control-by-Event (CBE) Program: ILI-MB-E3/ILI95-MB-E3 shall be capable of programming using Boolean logic including AND, OR, NOT, TIMING, COUNT, SCHEDULE functions to provide complete programming flexibility. 6. Alarm Verification: Smoke detector alarm verification shall be standard option while allowing other devices such as manual stations and sprinkler flow to create immediate alarm. This feature shall be selectable for smoke sensors that are installed in environments prone to nuisance or unwanted alarms. 7. Alarm Signals: All alarm signals shall be automatically latched or "locked in" at control panel until operated device is returned to normal and control panel is manually reset. When used for sprinkler flow, "SIGNAL SILENCE" switch may be bypassed, if required by AHJ. 8. Electrically Supervised: a. Each SLC and NAC circuit shall be electrically supervised for opens, shorts, and ground faults. Occurrence of fault shall activate system trouble circuitry, but shall not interfere with proper operation of other circuits. b. Yellow "SYSTEM TROUBLE" LEDs shall light and system audible sounder shall steadily sound when trouble is detected in system. Failure of power, open or short circuits on SLC or NAC circuits, disarrangement in system wiring, failure of microprocessor or any identification module, or system ground faults shall activate this trouble circuit. Trouble signal shall be acknowledged by operating "TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE" switch. This shall silence sounder. If subsequent trouble conditions occur, trouble circuitry shall resound. During alarm, all trouble signals shall be suppressed with exception of lighting yellow "SYSTEM TROUBLE" LEDs. 9. Drift Compensation - Analog Smoke Sensors: System software shall automatically adjust each analog smoke sensor approximately once each week for changes in sensitivity due to effects of component aging or environment, including dust. Each sensor shall maintain its actual sensitivity under adverse conditions to respond to alarm conditions while ignoring factors which generally contribute to nuisance alarms. System trouble circuitry shall activate, display "DIRTY DETECTOR" and "VERY DIRTY DETECTOR" indications and identify individual unit that requires maintenance. 10. Analog Smoke Sensor Test: System software shall automatically test each analog smoke sensor a minimum of 3 times daily. Test shall be recognized functional test of each photocell (analog photoelectric sensors) and ionization chamber (analog ionization sensors) as required annually by NFPA 72. Failure of sensor shall activate system trouble circuitry, display "Test Failed" indication, and identify individual device that failed. 11. Off-Premises Connection: a. Fire Alarm System: Connect via Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) and telephone lines to central station or remote station. Panel shall contain disconnect switch to allow testing of system without notifying fire department. 12. Central Station Option: Fire alarm control panel shall provide integral Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) for signaling to central station. DACT shall contain "Dialer-Runaway" feature preventing unnecessary transmissions as result of intermittent faults in system and shall be Carrier Access Code (CAC) compliant, accepting up to 20- digit central station telephone numbers. Fire department shall be consulted as to authorized central station companies serving municipality. Fire alarm system shall H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 13 transmit both alarm and trouble signals, with alarm having priority over trouble signal. Contractor shall be responsible for all installation charges and Owner will be responsible for line lease charges. 13. Network Annunciator Option: Each ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3 and associated display shall provide option of being configured as network annunciator. Options for annunciation shall default as regional annunciator with capability of selecting global annunciation to provide system-wide protection and Acknowledge, Silence, and Reset capabilities. 14. Redundant History Log: Each ILI-MB-E3 or ILI95-MB-E3 shall contain full 4100 event history log supporting local and network functions. If a main processor or network node is lost the entire log shall be accessible at any other Loop Interface board. This shall be demonstrated by removing power from INCC Command Center followed by extraction of history log from any loop driver location, including INCC Command Center or Transponder. 15. LEDs Indicator and Outputs: Each ILI-MB-E3/ILI95-MB-E3 Loop Interface shall incorporate as a minimum the following diagnostic LED indicators: a. Power: Green. b. Alarm: Red. c. Supervisory: Yellow. d. General Trouble: Yellow. e. Ground Fault: Yellow. f. Transmit: Green. g. Receive: Green. 16. Auxiliary Power Outputs: Each ILI-MB-E3/ILI95-MB-E3 Loop Interface shall provide the following supply outputs: a. 24 VDC non-resettable, 1 amp. maximum, power limited. b. 24 VDC resettable, 1 amp. maximum, power limited. 17. Microprocessor: Loop interface shall incorporate 32-bit RISC processor. Isolated "watchdog" circuit shall monitor microprocessor and upon failure shall activate system trouble circuits on display. Microprocessor shall access system program for all control-by- event (CBE) functions. System program shall not be lost upon failure of both primary and secondary power. Programming shall support Boolean logic including AND, OR, NOT, TIME DELAY functions for maximum flexibility. 18. Auto Programming: System shall provide for all SLC devices on any SLC loop to be pre- programmed into system. Upon activation of auto programming, only devices that are present shall activate. This allows for system to be commissioned in phases without need of additional downloads. 19. Environmental Drift Compensation: System shall provide for setting Environmental Drift Compensation by device. When detector accumulates dust in chamber and reaches unacceptable level but yet still below allowed limit, control panel shall indicate maintenance alert warning. When detector accumulates dust in chamber above allowed limit, control panel shall indicate maintenance urgent warning. 20. NON-FIRE Alarm Module Reporting: Non-reporting type ID shall be available for use for energy management or other non-fire situations. NON-FIRE point operation shall not affect control panel operation nor shall it display message at panel LDC. Activation of NON-FIRE point shall activate control by event logic, but shall not cause indication on control panel. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 14 21. 1-Man Walk Test: a. System shall provide both basic and advanced walk test for testing entire fire alarm system. Basic walk test shall allow single operator to run audible tests on panel. All logic equation automation shall be suspended during test and while annunciators can be enabled for test, all shall default to disabled state. During advanced walk test, field-supplied output point programming shall react to input stimuli, such as CBE and logic equations. When points are activated in advanced test mode, each initiating event shall latch input. Advanced test shall be audible and shall be used for pull station verification, magnet activated tests on input devices, input and output device, and wiring operation/verification. b. Test feature is intended to provide for certain random spot testing of system and is not intended to comply with requirements of testing fire alarm systems in accordance with NFPA 72, as it is impossible to test all functions and verify items such as annunciation with only 1 person. 22. Signaling Line Circuits: Each ILI-MB-E3 module shall provide communication with analog/addressable (initiation/control) devices via 2 signaling line circuits. Each signaling line circuit shall be capable of being wired Class B, Style 4 or Class A, Style 6. Circuits shall be capable of operating in NFPA Style 7 configuration when equipped with isolator modules between each module type device and isolator sensor bases. Each circuit shall communicate with a maximum of 159 analog sensors and 159 addressable monitor/control devices. Unique 40-character identifier shall be available for each device. Devices shall be of the Velocity series with capability to poll 10 devices at a time with a maximum polling time of 2 seconds when both SLCs are fully loaded. 23. Notification Appliance Circuits: 2 independent NAC circuits shall be provided on ILI- MB, polarized and rated at 2 amperes DC per circuit, individually over current protected and supervised for opens, grounds, and short circuits. They shall be capable of being wired Class B, Style Y or Class A, Style Z. 24. Alarm Dry Contacts: Provide alarm dry contacts (Form C) rated 2 amps at 30 VDC (resistive) and transfer whenever system alarm occurs. 25. Supervisory Dry Contacts: Provide supervisory dry contacts (Form C) rated 2 amps at 30 VDC (resistive) and transfer whenever system supervisory condition occurs. 26. Trouble Dry Contacts: Provide trouble dry contacts (Form C) rated 2 amps at 30 VDC (resistive) and transfer whenever system trouble occurs. H. Auxiliary Switch Module (ASM-16): 1. Each ASM-16 has 16 programmable push-button switches. 2. Each push-button switch has 3 associated status LEDs (red, yellow, and green), configurable to indicate any combination of functions. 3. Flexible switch configurations to allow flexible set-up of phone, speaker, and auxiliary function circuits. 4. An insertable label to identify function of each switch and LEDs combination. 5. Provide capability to communicate with up to 16 ASM-16 modules locally, up to 3,000 feet from INCC Command Center. 6. Specialty modules that only perform 1 task such as speaker, phone, or auxiliary shall not be acceptable. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 15 I. Network Repeater Module (RPT-E3): 1. Intelligent Network Interface shall provide interconnection and protection of remote INCC Command Centers and Transponders. Repeater shall regenerate and condition token passing, 625 K baud signal between units. Repeater shall be available in wire, or wire/fiber configurations as determined by field conditions. 2. Interface shall have jumper to allow selection of ground detection of wiring when used in wire mode. Interface shall have integral LEDs to display current status of board. 3. Fiber configurations shall use: a. Multi-Mode ST-type connectors with a maximum attenuation of 8db with 62.5/125 micron cable. b. Single-Mode LC-style connector with a maximum attenuation of 30db with 9/125 micron cable. J. Microphone Assembly: Include the following items: 1. Mounting cabinet which occupies 1 module location on inner door of INCC. 2. Interconnect cable for connection of microphone to INI-VG. 3. 1 noise canceling microphone with push-to-talk button. K. Intelligent Network Interface Voice Gateway (INI-VG): INI-VG shall be a multi-function board interchangeable in both INCC and INX. Functions of board shall include the following features as a minimum: 1. Network interface operating at 625 K baud configurable with any combination of wire and/or fiber topologies. Interface shall communicate with up to 122 total INCC, INX, and E3 and S3 control panels in peer-to-peer fashion. 2. Fire Fighter Phone Riser: INI-VG shall generate local phone riser for use with AOM-TEL phone modules for connection to fire fighter phone. INI-VG shall mix its local phone riser to network in true Style 7 fashion. 3. Signaling Line Circuit (SLC): INI-VG shall generate local SLC to communicate with and control up to 16 AOM-TEL modules and 32 AOM-2S or AOM-MUX circuits for fire phone interfacing and additional split-speaker circuits. 4. RS-485: Provide capability to communicate with up to 16 ASM-16 modules, when used in INX mode up to 3,000 feet. 5. Advanced Processing: INI-VG shall incorporate latest in digital signaling processing technology with supporting Boolean logic including AND, OR, NOT, TIME DELAY functions. 6. Voice Generation: INI-VG shall incorporate all processing to allow for 16 distinct pre- recorded messages used in priority fashion with message 1 as highest priority. Total length for 1 to 16 messages shall be up to 3 minutes. L. Power Supply Module (PM-9): PM-9 power supply shall supply all power necessary under normal and emergency conditions. Power supply shall provide capacity to charge up to 55 amp- hour batteries while under full load. Technology used shall be of power-saving switching configuration, eliminating need of stepping transformer. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 16 M. Audio Amplifier (AM-50): Include as a minimum, the following features: 1. 50-watt switching audio amplifier: a. AM-50-25 amplifier produces 25VRMS at 50 watts digital audio output. b. AM-50-70.7 amplifier produces 70VRMS at 50 watts digital audio output. 2. 2 individually addressable speaker circuits, each with capability of handling part or all of 50-watt supplied power. 3. Power shall be 24 VDC supplied via terminal block from local PM-9 power supply. 4. Ability to select from 1 of 16 pre-programmed messages in INI-VG, and paging from locally or from INCC Command Center. 5. Back-up amplification configurable so 1 AM-50 can perform back-up or 3, or perform 1 -to- 1 back-up if configured to do so in programming. 6. Status LEDs to indicate normal operation and trouble condition. 2.4 SUPPLEMENTAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT (HPFF) A. Supplemental Notification Appliance Circuit (HPFF) shall be Model HPFF8 offering up to 8.0 amps (8.0 amps continuous) of regulated 24-volt power. HPFF shall include the following features: 1. Integral Charger: Charge up to 18.0 amp-hour batteries and support 60-hour standby. 2. 2 Input Triggers. Input trigger shall be Notification Appliance Circuit (from fire alarm control panel) or relay. 3. Surface-mount back box. 4. Ability to delay AC fail delay in accordance with applicable NFPA requirements. 5. Power limited circuitry in accordance with applicable UL standards. 6. Operates as sync follower or a sync generator. 2.5 SYSTEM PERIPHERALS - Velociti A. Addressable Devices - General: 1. Provide address-setting means using rotary-decimal switches. 2. Use simple to install and maintain decade-type (numbered 0 to 9) address switches by using standard screwdriver to rotate 2 dials on device to set address. Devices which use binary address set via dipswitch packages, handheld device programmer, or other special tools for setting device address shall not be acceptable. 3. Detectors: Analog and addressable. Connect to fire alarm control panel's Signaling Line Circuits. 4. Addressable Thermal and Smoke Detectors: Provide 2 status LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating detector is operational and in regular communication with control panel, and both LEDs shall be placed into steady illumination by control panel, indicating alarm condition has been detected. If required, flashing mode operation of detector LEDs can be programmed off via fire control panel program. 5. Fire Alarm Control Panel: Permit detector sensitivity adjustment through field programming of system. Sensitivity can be automatically adjusted by panel on time-of- day basis. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 17 6. Using software in INCC Command Center, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. Detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA 72, Chapter 7. 7. Detectors shall be ceiling-mounted and shall include separate twist-lock base with tamper- proof feature. 8. Following bases and auxiliary functions shall be available: a. Standard base with remote LED output. b. Sounder base rated at 85 dBA minimum. c. Form-C relay base rated 30 VDC, 2.0 A. d. Isolator base. 9. Detectors shall provide test means whereby they will simulate alarm condition and report that condition to control panel. Such test shall be initiated at detector itself by activating magnetic switch or initiated remotely on command from control panel. 10. Detectors shall store internal identifying type code that control panel shall use to identify type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL). B. Addressable Manual Stations (MS-7AF): 1. Manual Fire Alarm Stations: Non-code, non-break glass type, equipped with key lock so they may be tested without operating handle. 2. Operated Station: Visually apparent, as operated, at a minimum distance of 100 feet (30.5 m) from front or side. 3. Stations shall be designed so after actual activation, they cannot be restored to normal except by key reset. 4. Manual stations shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions provided on cover. The word FIRE shall appear on front of stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm) or larger. 5. Addressable manual stations shall, on command from control panel, send data to panel representing state of manual switch and addressable communication module status. C. Intelligent Thermal Detectors (ATD-RL2F): Intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees F (58 degrees C) and have rate-of-rise element rated at 15 degrees F (9.4 degrees C) per minute. Connect via 2 wires to fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit. D. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detectors (ASD-PL2F): Use photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from control panel, send data to panel representing analog level of smoke density. E. Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector Base (DNR, DNRW): 1. In-Duct Smoke Detector Housing: Use ASD-PL2F intelligent photoelectric detector, ASD-PL2FR intelligent remote test photoelectric detector or ASD-IL2F intelligent ionization detector, which provides continuous analog monitoring and alarm verification from panel. 2. When sufficient smoke is sensed, alarm signal is initiated and appropriate action taken to shut down or change over air handling systems to help prevent rapid distribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout areas served by duct system. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 18 3. Duct Smoke Detectors Mounted Above Ceiling or Otherwise Obstructed from Normal View: Provide an (RTS151KEY) Remote test station accessory, designed to test a remotely located Intelligent Duct Smoke detector with remote alarm indicator. 4. Each Detector: Install in either supply side or return side duct in accordance with local mechanical code. 5. DST Sampling Tube a. No tools needed for installation or removal b. Installs/removes from front or back of detector c. Available in 1 ft, 1.5ft, 3 ft, 5 ft, and 10 ft lengths F. Addressable Projected Beam Detectors (ABD-2F,ABD-RT2F): 1. Single-ended, reflective design. 2. Six user-selectable sensitivity levels. 3. Operates in a range from 16 feet to 328 feet. 4. Temperature Range of Device: Minus 22 degrees F to 131 degrees F. 5. Beam Detector: Automatic gain control to compensate for gradual signal deterioration from dirt accumulation on lenses. 6. UL Listed. 7. Ability to be tested using calibrated test filters or magnet-activated remote test station. G. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Modules (AMM-4F): 1. Provide to connect 1 supervised IDC zone of conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to 1 of the fire alarm control panel SLCs. 2. Mount in 4-inch (102-mm) square, 2-1/8-inch (54-mm) deep electrical box. 3. IDC Zone: Suitable for Style D or Style B operation. 4. LEDs: Flash under normal conditions, indicating monitor module is operational and in regular communication with control panel. H. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Modules (AMM-2IF): 1. Provide to connect 2 supervised IDC zones of conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to 1 of the fire alarm control panel SLCs. 2. Mount in 4-inch (101.6-mm) square, 2-1/8-inch (54-mm) deep electrical box. 3. IDC Zones: Suitable for Style B operation. 4. LEDs: Flash under normal conditions, indicating monitor module is operational and in regular communication with control panel. I. Addressable Control Modules (AOM-2SF): 1. Provide to supervise and control operation of 1 conventional NAC of compatible, 24-VDC powered, polarized audio/visual notification appliances or UL-listed polarized relays for fan shutdown and other auxiliary control functions. 2. Mount in standard 4-inch (101.6-mm) square, 2-1/8-inch (54-mm) deep electrical box or to surface-mounted back box. 3. Control Module NAC: Wire for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) with up to 1 amp of inductive signal or 2 amps of resistive signal operation. Relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements and to ensure 100 percent of all auxiliary relay or NACs shall be energized at same time on same pair of wires. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 19 4. Audio/Visual Power: Provide by separate supervised power circuit from main fire alarm control panel or from supervised, UL-listed remote power supply. J. Addressable Relay Modules (AOM-2RF): 1. Provide two isolated sets of Form-C contacts, which operate as a double pole double throw switch. The module shall allow the control panel to switch these contacts on command. The module shall not provide supervision for the notification appliance circuit (NAC). Module shall have both normally open and normally closed connections available for field wiring. 2. Available for HVAC control and other building functions. Relay shall have 2 Form C sets of contacts that operate in tandem and are rated for a minimum of 2.0 amps resistive or 1.0 amps inductive. Relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements and to ensure 100 percent of all auxiliary relay or NACs shall be energized at same time on same pair of wires. 3. Mount in standard 4-inch (101.6-mm) square, 2-1/8-inch (54-mm) deep electrical box or to surface-mounted back box. 4. LEDs: Flash under normal conditions, indicating monitor module is operational and in regular communication with control panel. 2.6 SYSTEM PERIPHERALS - E3 SERIES A. NGA Network Graphic Annunciator 1. Main Menu a. Configure allows Auto-configuration of ILI-MB-S/ and ILI95-MB-E3/ILI95-S-E3 and NGA or ANX. b. Walk/Drill enables Walk Test and Fire Drill function. c. I/O Allows enable/disable input and output devices. d. Clock system real-time clock. e. View system configuration information f. NGA log displays, stores, prints and clears the 4100 event history log. g. Service provides Network Query functions. h. Text messaging, custom logo, custom screensaver, max amount of text on screen at one time) B. Speakers: 1. Operate on 25 VRMS or with field-selectable output taps from 0.5 to 2.0 watts. 2. Speakers in Corridors and Public Spaces: Produce nominal sound output of 84 dBA at 10 feet (3 m). 3. Frequency Response: Minimum of 400 Hz to 4,000 Hz. 4. Back of Each Speaker: Sealed to protect speaker cone from damage and dust. C. Strobes: 1. Compliance: ADA and UL 1971. 2. Maximum Pulse Duration: 0.2 second. 3. Strobe Intensity: UL 1971. 4. Flash Rate: UL 1971. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 20 5. Strobe Candela Rating: Determine by positioning selector switch on back of device. D. Speaker/Strobes: 1. Operate on 25 VRMS or with field-selectable output taps from 0.5 to 2.0 watt 2. Speakers in Corridors and Public Spaces: Produce nominal sound output of 84 dBA at 10 feet (3 m). 3. Frequency Response: Minimum of 400 Hz to 4,000 Hz. 4. Back of Each Speaker: Sealed to protect speaker cone from damage and dust. 5. Audibility: NFPA 72. 6. Maximum Pulse Duration: 0.2 second. 7. Strobe Intensity: UL 1971. 8. Flash Rate: UL 1971. 9. Strobe Candela Rating: Determine by positioning selector switch on back of device. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive fire alarm system. 1. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. 2. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fire alarm system in accordance with NFPA 72, NFPA 70, state and local codes, manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Conceal conduit, junction boxes, and conduit supports and hangers in finished areas. Conceal or expose conduit, junction boxes, and conduit supports and hangers in unfinished areas. C. Do not install smoke detectors before system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, take measures to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage. D. Flush-mount fire detection and alarm s ystem devices, control panels, and remote annunciators in finished areas. Flush-mount or surface-mount fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels, and remote annunciators in unfinished areas. E. Ensure manual stations are suitable for surface mounting or semi-flush mounting as indicated on the Drawings. Install not less than 42 inches, nor more than 48 inches, above finished floor measured to operating handle. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide service of competent, factory-trained technician authorized by manufacturer to technically supervise and participate during pre-testing and acceptance testing of system. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 21 B. Testing: 1. Conduct complete visual inspection of control panel connections and test wiring for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation before energizing cables and wires. 2. Close each sprinkler system control valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at INCC Command Center. 3. Verify activation of flow switches. 4. Open initiating device circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates. 5. Open signaling line circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates. 6. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates. 7. Ground initiating device circuits and verify response of trouble signals. 8. Ground signaling line circuits and verify response of trouble signals. 9. Ground notification appliance circuits and verify response of trouble signals. 10. Check alert tone and prerecorded voice message to alarm notification devices. 11. Check installation, supervision, and operation of intelligent smoke detectors. 12. Introduce on system each of the alarm conditions that system is required to detect. Verify proper receipt and proper processing of signal at INCC Command Center and correct activation of control points. 13. Consult manufacturer's manual to determine proper testing procedures when system is equipped with optional features. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality, and similar. C. Acceptance Testing: 1. Before installation shall be considered completed and acceptable by AHJ, a complete test using as a minimum, the following scenarios shall be performed and witnessed by representative approved by Engineer. Monitoring company and/or fire department shall be notified before final test in accordance with local requirements. 2. Contractor's job foreman, in presence of representative of manufacturer, representative of Owner, and fire department shall operate every installed device to verify proper operation and correct annunciation at control panel. 3. Open signaling line circuits and notification appliance circuits in at least 2 locations to verify presence of supervision. 4. Completely disconnect INCC Command Center from rest of network, including Voice INCC Command Center. Activate initiating device from transponder. All speaker circuits activated from each transponder shall transmit the correct evacuation or alert message. These messages shall be same messages transmitted with INCC Command Center activated. Default tones or messages shall not be acceptable. 5. Completely disconnect INCC Command Center from rest of network. Activate initiating device. All control outputs supported by transponder SLC circuits shall operate under project programming mode. Default or degrade mode programming shall not be acceptable. 6. Fire fighter phone riser shall be directly shorted between INCC Command Center and first transponder, followed by test of fire phones between INCC Command Center and farthest transponder. Phones shall operate in normal fashion. 7. All audio risers shall be directly shorted between INCC Command Center and first audio transponder, followed by activation of alarm initiating device. Correct pre-recorded messages shall transmit from all speakers, including evacuation and alert channels. Default or degrade messages shall not be acceptable. H&C FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - 22 8. When testing has been completed to satisfaction of both Contractor's job foreman and representatives of manufacturer and Owner, a notarized letter co-signed by each attesting to satisfactory completion of said testing shall be forwarded to Owner and fire department. 9. Leave fire alarm system in proper working order and, without additional expense to Owner, replace defective materials and equipment provided within 1 year (365 days) from date of final acceptance by the owner. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide instruction as required for operating fire alarm system. B. Provide hands-on demonstrations of operation of fire alarm system components and functions. END OF SECTION 28 31 00 H&C SITE PREPARATION 31 00 00 - 1 SECTION 31 00 00 - SITE PREPARATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Complete Site Preparation as shown on Drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Procure necessary permits or certificates required by Town of Gilbert, State of Arizona and Maricopa County. Comply with applicable Federal, State and local ordinances, including MAG Standard Specifications and Details. Owner to pay for permits. PART 2 – PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Contractor shall verify surface and subsurface condition to receive Work and report in writing, with a copy to Architect, detrimental conditions. Failure to observe this requirement constitutes a waiver to subsequent claims to the contrary and holds Contractor responsible for correction(s) Architect may require. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of surface and subsurface conditions. 1. Verify before proceeding with this Work, that required inspections of existing conditions have been completed. 2. Protect any adjacent property and improvements from damage and replace any portions damaged through this operation. B. Coordination with other work: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Execute Work in an orderly and careful manner with due consideration for any surrounding areas, plantings or structures which are to remain. H&C SITE PREPARATION 31 00 00 - 2 B. Apply water as required to allay dust and dirt, and comply with regulatory requirements. C. Clear and grub the premises of subterranean or surface material, growth and the like as required to remove any obstruction to the Work indicated on the Drawing within the clearing and grading limits. D. Grub the entire ground surface of any grass, weeds and plants until the surface is free from ruts, debris or other uneven features and roots. E. Under building areas, sidewalks, playcourts, fire lanes, parking area and drives, when encountered, remove any stones larger than six inches (6) in diameter to a depth not less than 18 inches below the original grade level or ten inches (10”) below finish grade level. F. In landscape areas, when encountered, remove any stones larger than six inches (6) in diameter to a depth not less than eighteen inches (18”) below original grade level or ten inches (10”) below finish grade level. G. Maintain trees indicated on Drawings and/or tagged on site. Protect with barriers during construction in a manner acceptable to Architect; remove barriers on completion of Contract. H. Where trees are to be left in place in areas to be graded, natural surface of ground shall be left undisturbed for a distance of 10 feet from tree on all sides except as approved by Architect. I. Stumps shall be removed to a depth of three feet (3’) minimum. Fill and compact any holes left by removal of trees or larger stones per requirements of Section 31 01 00: Earthwork. J. Remove unused or abandoned piping, conduit or similar existing materials found within two feet (2’) of the existing grade. K. When encountered, remove existing abandoned footings, foundations or other construction under the building pad unless written permission is provided to allow tit to remain is provided by Architect. 3.3 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition END OF SECTION 31 00 00 H&C EARTHWORK 31 01 00 - 1 SECTION 31 01 00 - EARTHWORK PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Perform Earthwork as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Procure necessary permits or certificates required by City or Town, State of Arizona and Maricopa County. Comply with applicable Federal, State and local ordinances, including MAG Standard Specifications and Details. Owner to pay for permits. B. Layout of all work under this Section shall be made by a licensed Engineer/Surveyor acceptable to the Architect. C. General contractor shall give the work his personal supervision. In his absence, he shall leave a responsible representative in charge who shall have the authority to receive and execute orders from the Architect and/or his representative. D. All construction shall be in conformance with recommendations per Soils Report as prepared by Western Technologies Inc. (#2124JY142) dated September 25, 2014. In cases of discrepancies between the Soils Report and this Specification Section, the Soils Report shall supersede. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: No fill materials shall be placed, spread or rolled during unfavorable weather conditions. When the work is interrupted by rain, fill operations shall not be resumed until it can be shown to the Civil Engineers/Architect’s satisfaction that the moisture content and density of the previously placed fill are as specified. B. Visit the site. Examine and note conditions as to the character and extent of work involved. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL A. Onsite cleaned soils may be used for fills in all areas of the site provided that they are placed and compacted at optimum to 3% above optimum in building, exterior slab and basketball court areas. H&C EARTHWORK 31 01 00 - 2 B. Fill materials shall be approved by the Geotechnical Engineer and Civil Engineer and shall have low swell potential and be free of organic or deleterious material and per the recommendations outlined in the Geotechnical Report. C. Any import must meet current A.D.E.Q. soil remediation levels (SRL’s) for schools. The import shall be certified acceptable (meeting the SRL’s) to the Architect and Civil Engineer by a licensed professional consultant. D. Imported fill of low or non-expansive soils shall conform to MAG Uniform Standard Specifications section 211. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Layout: 1. Maintain all bench marks, control monuments and stakes, whether newly established by surveyor or existing. Protect from damage and dislocation. If necessary to disturb existing bench marks, have Surveyor re-establish in a safe place. 2. If any discrepancies are found by Surveyor between the Drawings and actual conditions at the site, Architect reserves the right to make such minor adjustments in work specified as necessary to accomplish the intent of the contract Documents, without increased cost to Owner. 3.2 GRADING A. General Contractor shall provide supervision for the work. A responsible representative in charge shall be present at all times and shall have the authority to receive and execute instructions from the Architect or his representative. B. The following requirements are for site grading under, within and extending five (5) feet beyond the building area, sidewalks, exterior concrete slabs, concrete paving, and curbing and pavement. The contractor shall reference the Soils Report for specific recommendations under the building. C. Prior to commencement of grading operations, the site shall be cleared as per Section 31 00 00, Site Preparation. Care shall be taken to protect areas and/or landscape materials noted to remain undisturbed. D. Widen any resulting depressions as necessary to accommodate compaction equipment and provide a level base for placing fill. E. Prepare the ground surface in fill areas and in areas cut to grade by scarifying, moisture conditioning and compacting the exposed surface soils as specified in the Soils Report. F. Moisture condition and place engineering fill material required to elevate areas to specified subgrade elevations. H&C EARTHWORK 31 01 00 - 3 G. Placing, Spreading and Compacting Fill Materials: Fill materials shall be placed and compacted in horizontal lifts of thickness compatible with the compaction equipment used. Each layer shall be spread evenly, moisture conditioned and compacted per Soils Report. The contractor shall widen any depressions as necessary to accommodate compaction equipment and provide a level base for placing fill. Compaction of each layer shall make sufficient trips to insure that the required density has been obtained. No lift shall be placed until the previous lift has been approved. Fill operation shall be continued until the fill has been brought to the finished slopes and elevations shown on the Drawings. Imported fill shall conform to the requirements previously defined. H. Compacted subgrade shall be maintained in a moist state and shall not be allowed to significantly dry prior to placing more fill or base course. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of materials encountered to obtain required subgrade elevations. B. Material to be excavated shall be non-classified and shall include all earth or other materials encountered in excavating and grading. Where material encountered within the limits of work is considered unsuitable by the Architect, such material shall be excavated below the grade shown on the Drawings as directed, and replaced with suitable material. C. Prior to commencement of grading operations, the site shall be cleared as per Section 31 00 00, Site Preparation. Care shall be taken to protect areas and/or landscape materials noted to remain undisturbed. D. In footing areas, remove all soils from beneath per the Soils Report. The zone of removal must also extend a minimum depth specified in the Soils Report below the bottom of footings. The exposed surface after removal should be moistened and compacted prior to backfilling. E. Unauthorized excavation consists of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Architect. Under footing, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavations by extending the indicated bottom elevations of footing or base at the excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Clean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, only when acceptable to the Architect. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavation as specified for authorized excavations, unless otherwise directed by the Architect. Costs for testing, if required, shall be borne by the Contractor. F. Stockpile satisfactory materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Locate and retain materials away from edge of excavations, even though such excavations are sheeted and braced to prevent such material falling or sliding into the excavations. G. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling, by scaling, benching, shelving or bracing. Take precautions to prevent slide or cave-ins. H&C EARTHWORK 31 01 00 - 4 3.4 BACKFILLING A. Backfilling against concrete work shall be done only when approved and directed. Backfill shall be deposited in layers as specified in MAG Uniform Standard Specifications section 206, and for the full width of the cross section. The material shall be carefully watered during placing by means of a fine spray or other approved method, so that each layer shall be thoroughly and uniformly wetted as directed by the Architect. The moisture content of all the material shall be carefully controlled at all times, and shall be checked at proper intervals to insure correct moisture content for compaction specified. B. Backfilling of trenches shall progress as rapidly as the construction and testing of the work will permit. Backfilling shall be completed as specified in MAG Uniform Standard Specifications section 601. 3.5 COMPACTION A. Compaction of cleaned exposed soil, imported soils, each lift of backfill, subbase fill, imported fill and base course materials shall be completed as specified in the Soils Report. 3.6 LANDSCAPE GRADING A. Landscape areas shall be cut or filled to finish elevation. B. The top ten inches (10”) of soils shall be scarified and recompacted to between 85-90 percent of maximum ASTM D698 density. C. Any areas over compacted shall be ripped and reworked to the specified densities. D. The finished surface shall be free from stones and all debris and shall be true to grade and cross section. 3.7 FINISH GRADING A. Perform finish grading required as indicated to permit installation of work of others as shown on Drawings. After final clean-up of exterior and removal of trash and construction of the buildings, the site shall be graded to slopes and elevations as indicated on the Drawings and as directed by the Architect. Additional material required for finish grading shall be of topsoil quality, provided, placed and graded by the Contractor. Lawn areas around walks, playcourt and parking lot shall provide good slope drainage away from buildings as indicated. Rake indicated site and lawn areas smooth and level to a tolerance of plus or minus 0.1 foot from elevations indicated. B. Existing clean site soils free of debris and rocks over ¼ inch in diameter may be used for fills in landscape areas. H&C EARTHWORK 31 01 00 - 5 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test: Field density tests shall be made by an approved independent soils testing laboratory, as defined herein, or at the request of the Architect and paid for with the testing allowance. When these tests indicate that the density of any area(s) is below the required density, that particular area(s) shall be reworked until the required density has been obtained. B. Restore any damage to adjacent properties, street and the like, caused by operations of this Section to original condition without additional cost to Owner. 3.9 “AS-BUILT” DRAWINGS A. The surveyor shall provide certified, signed and sealed as-builts for all elevations including ground elevations, retention basins, pavement, curb and gutter and sidewalks indicated on the drawings on 4 mil mylar and AutoCAD electronic formatted compact disc (CD). The contractor shall schedule the work to allow the surveyor to obtain the as-builts. Certification of the retention volumes shall also be performed by contractor’s surveyor/civil engineer. This work will not be accepted until as-builts are approved by the Design Civil Engineer and Town. 3.10 CLEANING A. Conduct work in an orderly and workmanlike manner and so as not to create a nuisance. Dirt shall not be permitted to accumulate on streets or sidewalks or to be washed into sewers. B. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of legally away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 31 01 00 H&C CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 11 00-1 SECTION 31 11 00 – CLEARING AND GRUBBING SITE CLEARING Strip and remove existing vegetation, concrete debris, asphalt pavement debris, and any other deleterious materials from the building and pavement areas. The building area is defined as that area within the building footprint plus 5 feet beyond the perimeter of the footprint. All exposed surfaces should be free of mounds and depressions that could prevent uniform compaction. Sloping areas steeper than 5:1 (horizontal: vertical) should be benched to reduce the potential for slippage between existing slopes and fills. Benches should be level and wide enough to accommodate compaction and earth moving equipment. END OF SECTION 31 11 00 H&C TERMIT CONTROL 31 31 16 - 1 SECTION 31 31 16 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Soil treatment with termiticide. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of termite control product. 1. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Product Certificates: For termite control products, from manufacturer. C. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's records and include the following: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is regularly engaged in termite control work for at least the past three years; licensed by Arizona Structural Pest Control Board and under direction of applicator certified by that board. H&C TERMIT CONTROL 31 31 16 - 2 B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the EPA-Registered Label. C. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products from single manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction. 1.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Chemical Analysis Tests: One test for each 10,000 square feet of treated area. Sames and test may be taken of both concentrates and the dilute materials as being applied. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Corporation, Agricultural Products; Termidor. b. Bayer Environmental Science; Premise 75. c. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; Talstar, Prevail or Dragnet SFR. d. Syngenta; Demon TC, Prelude or Probuild TC. H&C TERMIT CONTROL 31 31 16 - 3 2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for[ moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements,] interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. 3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly. 1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. H&C TERMIT CONTROL 31 31 16 - 4 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat adj acent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. 4. Masonry: Treat voids. 5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground- supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 31 31 16 H&C ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 32 12 16 - 1 SECTION 32 12 16 - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Asphaltic Concrete Paving work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Procure necessary permits or certificates required by Town, State of Arizona and Maricopa County. Comply with applicable Federal, State and local ordinances, including MAG Standard Specifications and Details. Owner to pay for permits. B. Contractor shall obtain all necessary construction permits and shall coordinate all necessary inspections with the Town of Gilbert. Owner to pay for permits. C. Layout of all work under this Section shall be made by a licensed Engineer/Surveyor acceptable to the Architect. D. General contractor shall give the work his personal supervision. In his absence, he shall leave a responsible representative in charge who shall have the authority to receive and execute orders from the Architect and/or his representative. E. All construction shall be in conformance with recommendations per Soils Report as prepared by Western Technologies, Inc. (#2124JY142) dated September 25, 2014. In cases of discrepancies between the Soils Report and this Specification Section, the Soils Report shall supersede. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Asphalt mix design shall be submitted to the Design Civil Engineer through the Architect for approval a minimum of seven (7) working days prior to paving. 1.4 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not place pavement mixture when the subgrade, sub-base or base courses are below 40 degrees F. or show any evidence of excess moisture nor when moisture on the surface to be paved would prevent proper bond. 2. Do not place pavement mixture when air temperature is less than 40 degrees F. nor when temperature of the surface on which mixture is to be placed is below 40 degrees F. H&C ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 32 12 16 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Asphaltic Concrete Type: Onsite, MAG Type ½ inch with course/fine aggregate requirements for light volume traffic. B. Traffic Paint: Conform to Federal Specifications TTP-1952, such as Sherwin-Williams Company “Setfast” Waterborne Traffic Marking Paint TM 266, white. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Failure to observe this requirement constitutes a waiver to subsequent claims to the contrary and holds Contractor responsible for correction(s) Architect/Civil Engineer may require. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 1. Make careful inspection of excavated surface on which paving is to be placed and a check on bottom and top grades of paving throughout the paved area prior to starting Work under this Section. Report immediately to the Civil Engineer any deviation and/or conflicts. B. Coordination with other work: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.2 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Subgrade Preparation: The work under this item shall consist of excavating and grading the areas at the locations specified and to the grades indicated on the Drawings and to the compaction densities specified in Earthwork Section 31 01 00. Subgrade shall be scarified to a minimum ten inch (10”) depth, moisture conditioned and recompacted within one week of placing A.B.C. and Asphaltic Concrete Surface. Tolerances are +0.00 feet and -0.10 feet. B. Prior to paving, the contractor shall sawcut, remove and replace any cracked or damaged concrete curb or sidewalk. Full sections shall be removed between joints. No patching will be allowed. 3.3 BASE COURSE A. Place the compacted thickness of crushed aggregate base course as indicated on the drawings at the locations and to the grades indicated on the Drawings, conforming to the applicable requirements of MAG Specifications, Section 310 and 702, prior to the placement of the Asphaltic Concrete. Tolerance for A.B.C. thickness is ±0.02 feet. H&C ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 32 12 16 - 3 B. Compact aggregate base course to a minimum 100% of maximum Standard Proctor density per ASTM D698. 3.4 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT A. Conform to the applicable requirements of MAG Specifications, Section 321, Asphaltic Concrete Pavement. Place the compacted thickness of asphaltic concrete at the locations and to the grades as indicated on the Drawings. B. Tolerances: The finished asphalt grade shall be within ±0.02 foot of the design elevation and shall not deviate by more than ±0.02 foot measured with a ten foot long straight edge placed in any direction. 3.5 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Provide and apply water required in the compacting of the subgrade, base and surfacing materials, and the control of the dust nuisance to adjacent property. B. Conform to the applicable requirements of MAG Specifications, Section 255, Watering. 3.6 DAMAGE A. Any damage to finished pavement surface that may result from subsequent construction shall be restored to a smooth, true and uniform surface at no extra cost to Owner and per method approved by the Design Civil Engineer. 3.7 DEFICIENCY CORRECTIONS A. Pavement found to be deficient or not constructed to the elevations shown on the Drawings shall be saw cut, removed and replaced. The entire lot shall receive an overlay after replacement. The Owner’s Civil Engineer will be solely responsible for determining the proper corrective measures or overlay thickness. Corrections and replacements shall be done at the Contractor’s expense. 3.8 PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Traffic Markings: After completion of asphaltic concrete paving, paint parking stalls and other markings as shown on the Drawings with traffic paint. Curbing shall be painted as indicated on the drawings. Width of stripes and markings shall be 4 inches except as otherwise noted on Drawings. Do not stripe any asphalt until it has cured at least 10 days. H&C ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 32 12 16 - 4 3.9 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. The surveyor shall provide certified, signed and sealed as-builts for all pavement, curb and gutter and sidewalk elevations indicated on the drawings on 4 mil mylar and AutoCADD disk (2004 version or later). The contractor shall schedule the work to allow the surveyor to obtain the as-builts. This work will not be accepted until as-builts are approved by the Civil Engineer and Town. 3.10 CLEANING A. During the course of the work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of legally away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 32 12 16 H&C CONCRETE FIRE LANE AND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 32 13 00 - 1 SECTION 32 13 00 - CONCRETE FIRE LANE AND CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Concrete Fire Lane and Concrete Pavement construction as shown on the Drawing and as specified herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Procure necessary permits or certificates required by local authorities having jurisdiction over this Work. Comply with applicable Federal, State and local ordinances, including MAG Standard Specifications and Details. B. Construction staking shall be performed by a licensed Civil Engineer of Surveyor acceptable to the Architect and Owner. C. General Contractor shall give the Work his personal supervision. In his absence, he shall leave a responsible representative in charge who shall have the authority to receive and execute orders from the Architect and/or his representative. D. All phases of the concrete fire lane and concrete pavement shall be performed under the observation and testing of an independent Geotechnical Engineer approved by the Architect. The testing laboratory shall provide written verification, including test results, that the concrete fire lane and concrete pavement was constructed in compliance with these specifications. 1.3 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not place concrete fire lane or concrete pavement mixture when the subgrade is below 40 degrees F. or show any evidence of excess moisture nor when moisture on the surface to be paved would prevent proper bond. 2. Do not place concrete fire lane or concrete pavement mixture when air temperature is less than 40 degrees F. nor when temperature of the surface on which mixture is to be placed is below 40 degrees F. B. Visit the site. Examine and note conditions as to the character and extent of Work involved. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Concrete mix design shall be submitted to the Architect for approval a minimum of seven (7) working days prior to construction. H&C CONCRETE FIRE LANE AND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 32 13 00 - 2 B. Joint layout plan shall be submitted to the Architect for approval a minimum of seven (7) working days prior to construction. 1.5 STANDARDS A. Cement, aggregate, concrete proportioning, mixing, and admixtures shall conform to ASTM Standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Concrete shall conform to MAG specifications, Section 725, Portland Cement Concrete, Class AA. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Failure to observe this requirement constitutes a waiver to subsequent claims to the contrary and holds Contractor responsible for correction(s) Architect/Civil Engineer may require. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 1. Make careful inspection of subgrade surface on which concrete fire lane or concrete paving is to be placed and a check on bottom and top grades of concrete throughout the construction areas prior to starting Work under this Section. Report immediately to the Civil Engineer any deviation and/or conflicts. B. Coordination with other work: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. Before proceeding with this Work, make certain all required inspections have been made. C. Layout: 1. Maintain all bench marks, control monuments and stakes, whether newly established by Surveyor or previously existing. Protect from damage and dislocation. If necessary to disturb existing bench marks, have Surveyor reestablish in a safe place. 2. If any discrepancies are found by Surveyor between the Drawings and actual conditions at the site, Architect reserves the right to make such minor adjustments in Work specified as necessary to accomplish the intent of the Contract Documents, without increased cost to Owner. H&C CONCRETE FIRE LANE AND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 32 13 00 - 3 3.2 PREPARATION A. Subgrade Preparation: This Work consists of excavating and grading the areas at the locations specified and to the grades indicated on the Drawings and to the requirements of Section 31 01 00, EARTHWORK. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Concrete Proportioning and Mixing: The concrete shall have compressive strength of not less than 4,000 psi at 28 days after casting. Maximum slump shall be five inches (5”). NO water may be added after the truck leaves the plant. All ready mix concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with ASTM C94, Standard Specifications for Ready Mixed Concrete. Concrete shall be deposited and placed within 90 minutes from the time the water is added to the mix. Concrete that has a slump greater than five inches (5”) or that is more than 90 minutes old will be rejected. B. Concrete Thickness: The concrete shall be the thickness as indicated on the Drawings. C. Concrete Placement: 1. Before placing concrete, all water, clods, waste concrete and other foreign materials shall be removed from the subgrade. All forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and secured in position and coated with a form-release agent. Prior to placement of the concrete the Contractor shall lightly moisten the top surface of the aggregate base course. 2. Forms and screeds shall be accurately set to the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. The concrete shall be placed, struck off, and consolidated with a mechanical finishing machine, vibrating screed or by hand finishing methods when accepted by the Civil Engineer. If a screed is used it shall be for the full width of the slab. 3. The concrete fire lane shall be poured in 25 foot square sections. The sections shall be isolated with expansion joints with dowels to provide load transfer at 2 feet on center. The intent is to pour every other 25 foot square section and then come back and pour the skipped sections. 4. Reinforcing: Concrete will be reinforced with 4 X 4 - W3.4 X W3.4 welded wire fabric conforming to MAG Specifications Section 727, Steel Reinforcement. The welded wire fabric shall be installed on chairs to keep the fabric at mid-height of the slab. D. Finishing: After the concrete has been struck off and consolidated, a bullfloat shall be used to remove any high or low spots. A final skid resistant medium broom finish shall be made. All finishes shall be reviewed and approved by the Architect. E. Curing: Moist curing, by covering the concrete with a black polyethylene material for a minimum of seven (7) days, shall be used. F. Concrete Temperature: Concrete will not be allowed to be placed if its temperature exceeds 90°F. H&C CONCRETE FIRE LANE AND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 32 13 00 - 4 G. Surface Tolerances: The concrete surface shall be finished to a tolerance of 1/4 inch measured as the departure from the testing edge of a 10 foot straight edge held parallel to and in contact with the surface. H. Control Joints: All control joints shall be designed to provide load transfer. Control joints shall be either keyed cold joints or tooled joints with a 1/2-inch radius on the edges. Maximum control joint spacing shall be 12.5 feet, smaller joint patterns shall be used where indicated on the architectural Drawings. Transverse joints shall be continuous across the slab and radial within curves. The depth of all control joints shall be a minimum of 1/4 of the thickness of the slab. All joints over 1/4 inch in width shall be filled with an elastomeric sealing compound approved by the Architect. Contractor shall submit a joint layout to the Architect for approval a minimum of seven days prior to the placing of concrete. No saw cutting will be allowed. I. Expansion Joints: Expansion joints shall extend the full depth of the slab and shall be used to isolate fixed objects abutting or within the slab area. Expansion joints shall be placed adjacent to all curbs, building, existing or proposed concrete slabs, sidewalks and around all manholes, cleanouts, water valves, etc. All expansion joint filler shall be 1 inch thick. The top edges of all expansion joints in and adjacent to the fire lane shall be held 1/2 inch below the surface of the slab by a zip strip or tack strip of wood with its top flush with the finished surface. After the concrete has cured, the tack strips shall be removed and the joints sealed with an elastomeric sealing compound (type to be approved by the Architect) to within 1/16 inch of the surface. 18" long, number four smooth dowels at 2 feet on center shall be installed at all expansion joints to provide load transfer. Grease or tape one end of the dowel to prevent adhesion. Flat or diamond shape bars may be used in addition to round dowels. J. Any concrete cracking outside of control joints shall be removed and replaced at no expense to the owner. 3.4 FINISH GRADING A. Perform finish grading required as indicated or reasonably inferred to permit installation of Work of others as shown on Drawings. After completion of the fire lane, topsoil free of rock and debris shall be placed adjacent to and two inches (2") below the top slab and sloped away at the ratio indicated on the Drawings to the elevations indicated on the Drawings. Grading shall be performed so as to leave the slopes in a neat clean plane. Areas shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus 0.1 foot from elevations indicated. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: 1. Tests shall be performed to determine the slump and strength of the concrete. Slump tests may be performed (at the discretion of the Civil Engineer) on each truckload of concrete before placing. If slump exceeds five inches (5"), the entire truckload of concrete will be rejected. H&C CONCRETE FIRE LANE AND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 32 13 00 - 5 2. Strength tests will be performed to determine 7 and 28 day compression strength. Four (4) test cylinders will be made by the Geotechnical Engineer or his representative for each 50 cubic yards of concrete when placed in large continuous pours, and for each pour of less than 50 cubic yards of concrete or for any size pour as required by the Civil Engineer. 3.6 CLEANING A. Conduct Work in an orderly and workmanlike manner and so as not to create a nuisance. Concrete waste and dirt shall not be permitted to accumulate on streets or sidewalks nor to be washed into sewers. B. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 32 13 00 H&C CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS, SIDEWALK, DRIVEWAYS 32 16 00 - 1 SECTION 32 16 00 - CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTER, SIDEWALK, DRIVEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Complete concrete curbs, gutter, sidewalk and driveways as shown on Drawings and as specified herein. Excavate and compact subgrade. Finish and cure concrete. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Tests: Submit three certified copies of test results, samples and suppliers certification that materials conform to the specified criteria. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Procure necessary permits or certificates required by Town, State of Arizona and Maricopa County. Comply with applicable Federal, State and local ordinances, including MAG Standard Specifications and Details. Owner to pay for permits. B. Contractor shall obtain all necessary construction permits and shall coordinate all necessary inspections with the Town. Owner to pay for permits. C. Layout of all work under this Section shall be made by a licensed Engineer/Surveyor acceptable to the Architect. D. General contractor shall give the work his personal supervision. In his absence, he shall leave a responsible representative in charge who shall have the authority to receive and execute orders from the Architect and/or his representative. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Concrete curb, gutter, sidewalk and driveway: 3,000 psi (28 day strength), MAG Specifications Section 725. B. Concrete driveways and adjacent curbing: 4,000 psi (28 day strength), MAG Specifications Section 725. H&C CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS, SIDEWALK, DRIVEWAYS 32 16 00 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Contractor shall verify surface and subsurface condition to receive Work and report in writing, with a copy to Architect, detrimental conditions. Failure to observe this requirement constitutes a waiver to subsequent claims to the contrary and holds Contractor responsible for correction(s) Architect may require. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of surface and subsurface conditions. 1. Verify before proceeding with this Work, that required inspections of existing conditions have been completed. 2. Protect any adjacent property and improvements from damage and replace any portions damaged through this operation. B. Coordination with other work: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. C. Execute work in accordance with MAG Specifications Section 340 and 725 plus applicable Town standards. D. Sawcut existing pavements and concrete joined by new construction to a true line with straight vertical edges free from irregularities. E. Construct and compact true to grades and line shown on the Drawings. Do not place material displaced in the construction on the base and/or surfacing material already in place on the roadway nor the excavated material in such a manner as to interfere with access to property or traffic flow in the street. F. Any cracked, chipped or damaged concrete curb or sidewalk shall be removed and replaced. Full sections shall be removed, between joints. No patching will be allowed. 3.2 TESTING A. All inspection and testing of Work shall be performed by an independent testing agency employed and paid for by Contractor. B. Provide free access to work and cooperate with appointed testing firm. C. Submit 3 copies of proposed mix design of each class of concrete including water/cement strength and all supporting data to testing agency and Civil Engineer/Geotechnical Engineer through the Architect for review a minimum seven (7) working days prior to commencement of work. D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with requirements stated herein. H&C CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS, SIDEWALK, DRIVEWAYS 32 16 00 - 3 E. Four (4) concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 100 or less cubic yards of each class of concrete placed. Make and cure concrete compressive strength test specimens in accordance with ASTM C31. Construct storage box of sufficient size and design to provide protection required by paragraph 7 (a). F. One (1) additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting, and be cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. One (1) slump test will be taken in accordance with ASTM C-143 of each set of compressive strength test cylinders taken. H. Where concrete is placed by pumping, tests shall be taken at the truck before concrete is placed in pump. I. Tests shall be performed by testing agency personnel in accordance with ASTM C39. 3.3 “AS-BUILT” DRAWINGS A. The surveyor shall provide certified, signed and sealed as-builts for all pavement, curb and gutter and sidewalk elevations indicated on the drawings on 4 mil mylar and AutoCAD electronic formatted compact disc (CD). The contractor shall schedule the work to allow the surveyor to obtain the as-builts. This work will not be accepted until as-builts are approved by the Design Civil Engineer and Town. 3.4 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of legally away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 32 16 00 H&C DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19 - 1 SECTION 32 31 19 - DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fence panels and posts. 2. Pivoting gate and posts. 3. Anchorage for posts. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" 2. Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrications” 3. Section 09 91 00 “Interior and Exterior Painting” 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For gates. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For gate operators to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DECORATIVE STEEL FENCES A. Decorative Steel Fence and Fence Posts: Steel shall conform to ASTM A500, cold-rolled, primed and painted. H&C DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19 - 2 1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following manufacturers or approved equal: a. ACME Fence Company, Phoenix, Arizona b. American Security Fence Company, Phoenix, Arizona c. BFC Builders Fence Company, Sun Valley, California B. Line Posts: 3 inches square, .091” wall thickness. C. Corner and Terminal Posts: 4” square, .091” wall thickness. D. Pickets: 1” square, .091” wall thickness. (4” o.c.) E. Rails: 2” square, .091” wall thickness. F. Gate Hinges: Min 4 blank plate heavy duty hinges with grease inserts shall be welded t date frame and 4” square post (or hinges as detailed on drawings) G. Concrete: In accordance with the General Notes. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Gates and fences shall be as detailed. B. Components shall be shop fabricated using ac-gas shielded process. C. Construct in a rigid substantial manner, plumb and true to line and level. D. Grind all welds smooth. E. Factory prime with zinc chromate primer ready for field applied finish as specified in 09 91 00. F. Posts and pickets shall be provided with metal caps welded in place. G. At all gates: 1” diameter galvanized steel pipe cane bolt secured in 2” I.D. pipe sleeve keeper cast in concrete at both full open and full closed positions. 1.4” thick plate handle with padlock hole matches 1.4” thick tab on gate to padlock in down position. 2.3 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. H&C DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19 - 3 2.4 PREPARATION A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments. 1. Construction layout and field engineering are specified in Section 01 73 00 "Execution." 2.5 ADJUSTING A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. 2.6 INSTALLATION A. Set posts in concrete footing. Slope top of footing for drainage. B. Construct in a rigid substantial manner, plumb and true to line and level. C. Grind field welds smooth and prime with zinc primer and finish with flat color per Architect’s selected enamel equal to shop finish, see Section 09 91 00, “Interior and Exterior Painting”. END OF SECTION 32 31 19 H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-84-00-1 Fountain Hills, AZ. SECTION 32 84 00 IRRIGATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This Section covers the complete installation of lawn sprinkler system. 1. Sprinkler equipment shall be furnished as indicated on the Drawings, manufactured by Hunter Company, San Diego, California, and Bowsmith Company, Exeter, California. 2. All Work shall be in conformance with the requirements of local codes, ordinances and utility companies. 3. Irrigation system shall be metered separately from other services. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Refer to all Sections in Division 0, CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 2. Electrical materials as specified hereinafter and in Division 26, ELECTRICAL. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Workmanship: 1. Layout work as accurately as possible to the Drawings. The Drawings are generally diagrammatic to the extent that swing joints, offsets and all fittings are not shown. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for full and complete coverage of all irrigated areas and make any necessary minor adjustments at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. All surfaces shall be leveled to finish grade and compacted to 90% prior to irrigation trenching. 4. The Landscape Architect shall approve all finish grading. B. Testing: 1. General. Furnish all equipment, material, and personnel necessary for the satisfactory conduct of the tests. Expel all air from the system prior to testing. Remove and replace any defective materials or installations discovered in the testing, and repeat the test until satisfactory to the Architect. Make tests on portions of the line as completed. However, the final acceptance test shall be made on the entire system or integral valved portions thereof. The tests shall be witnessed by the Landscape Architect. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-84-00-2 Fountain Hills, AZ. 2. Pressure and Leakage Tests. After the pipe is laid, the joints completed, and the trench partially backfilled to prevent displacement of the pipe, risers are in place, and prior to installation of sprinkler heads, open each control valve and flush the system thoroughly. After flushing, cap the risers, and subject the system or valved section of piping to a maximum hydrostatic pressure of 150 percent of working pressure at a point of test, but not less than 125 percent of normal working pressure at highest elevation. The duration of the test shall be at least two hours. The leakage shall not exceed 0.2 gallons per hour per inch of pipe diameter per 1,000 feet of length. Leakage is defined as the quantity of water that must be supplied into the newly laid pipe, or any valved section thereof, to maintain pressure within 5 psi of the specified leakage test pressure after the pipe has been filled with water and the air in the pipe has been expelled. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protect the existing service lines and utility structures indicated on the Drawings, the location of which are known prior to construction operations. If damaged, such lines shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner. B. Any existing lines or utility structures which are not shown on the Drawings or the location of which is not made known to the Contractor in sufficient time to avoid damage, if inadvertently damaged, shall be repaired by the Contractor, and an adjustment in payment will be made by the Owner at rates determined and reviewed by the Landscape Architect. C. Protect surrounding areas, surfaces and plantings to prevent damage during installation of the lawn sprinkler system. D. The system shall be a complete automatic operative system giving 100% coverage to all plant material. E. Irrigation system is designed for PSI shown in plans; Contractor shall verify water pressure in field prior to construction. Should a discrepancy exist between design pressure and the field pressure, this office shall be notified immediately. 1.04 APPROVAL A. Wherever the terms "approve" or "approval" or "approved" are used in the specifications, they mean approval of the Landscape Architect in writing. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-84-00-3 Fountain Hills, AZ. 1.05 WORK SCHEDULE A. Submit a proposed work schedule which will coincide with the dates as given in Landscape Architect's schedule to the Landscape Architect at least thirty (30) days prior to start of work. After approval, no modification shall be made to this schedule without written authorization by the Landscape Architect. 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS A. No substitutions will be permitted without written permission of the Landscape Architect. 1.07 PROTECTION OF EXISTING CONDITION A. Contractor shall acquaint himself with all site conditions. Should utilities or other work not shown on the architectural or engineering plans be found during excavations, Contractor failure to do so will make the Contractor liable for any and all damage arising from his operations subsequent to discovery of such utilities not shown on architectural or engineering plans. B. Contractor shall take necessary precautions to protect site conditions and plants to remain. Should damage be incurred, this Contractor shall repair damage to its original condition or furnish and install equal replacement at his expense. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate and cooperate with other Contractors to enable the work to proceed as rapidly and efficiently as possible. 1.09 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Schedule a pre-construction conference with the Landscape Architect at least seven (7) days before beginning work under this Section. Purpose of this conference is to review any questions the Contractor may have regarding the work, administrative procedures during construction and project work schedule. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-84-00-4 Fountain Hills, AZ. 1.10 SAMPLES A. Landscape Architect reserves the right to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity to specifications at any time. Contractor shall furnish samples upon request by Architect. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced at Contractor's expense. Cost of testing materials not meeting specifications shall be paid by Contractor. 1.11 SUBMITTALS A. Prepare "as-built" drawings on plans which show deviations from the bid documents made during construction affecting main line pipe, controller locations, remote control valves, quick coupling valves and all sprinkler heads. Drawings shall indicate and show approved substitutions of size, material and manufacturer's name and catalog number. Drawings shall be delivered to Landscape Architect before final acceptance of Work. B. Provide the Owner with the following, in addition to what is shown on the drawings: 1. Any Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions. 2. Project record drawings of the system. 3. Schedule showing the length of time each value is to be open to produce a given amount of precipitation. 4. Two extra sprinkler heads of each size and type. 5. Two valve keys for manual valves. 6. Wrench for each type head core. 7. Wrench for removing and installing each type head. 8. A permanent identification of valve stations and areas irrigated on the 8-1/2" x 11" chart to be placed on the inside door to the appropriate. The chart shall be plasticized and sealed for permanency. Xerox reduction of print, sealed in plastic will be acceptable. Training shall be included in contract for district personnel. This shall be a minimum of 4 hours with every operable system demonstrated. 1.12 INSPECTION OF CONDITIONS A. Examine related work and surfaces before starting work. Report to the Landscape Architect, in writing, conditions which will prevent the proper provision of this work. Beginning the work of this section without reporting constitutes acceptance of conditions by the Contractor. Any required removal, repair or replacement of this work caused by unsuitable conditions to be done at no additional cost to Owner. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-84-00-5 Fountain Hills, AZ. 1.13 PRODUCTS A. Materials throughout the system shall be as shown and shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed. The decision of the Landscape Architect shall be final in the determination of the quality of materials and equipment. 1.14 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protect work and materials from damage during construction and storage. Protect polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and related fittings from direct sunlight. Beds on which pipe is stored must be full length of pipe. Do not use any pipe or fitting that has been damaged or dented. 1.15 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Work under this Section will be accepted by Architect upon satisfactory completion of all work. Upon final acceptance, owner shall assume responsibility for maintenance of the work. Said assumption does not relieve Contractor of obligations under warranty. 1.16 WARRANTY A. In additional to manufacturer's guarantees or warranties, all work shall be warranted for two (2) year from the date of final acceptance against defects in material, equipment and workmanship by Contractor. Warranty shall also cover reviewing the operation of the system on a monthly basis, repairing any damage to any part of the premises resulting from leaks or other defects in materials, equipment and workmanship to the satisfaction of the Owner. Submit written warranty. Contractor to instruct the owner on how to set the controller and when to reset for changes in the seasons for the first year. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Pipe. 1. Polyvinyl chloride pipe shall conform to ASTI D 2241, min. 160 psi (1103 kpa) SDR 26. Pipe may have solvent-welded or elastomeric gasketed bell-and-spigot joints. All bell and spigot pipes in sizes 1-1/2 H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-84-00-6 Fountain Hills, AZ. to 4 inches shall be joined with elastomeric-gasket or rubber sealing ring to provide tight joints. All pipe in size smaller than 1-1/4 inches shall be joined with separate couplings using solvent cement which conforms to ASTI D 2564. 2. All fittings from mainline to be Mechanical Joint Ductile Iron Fittings. Fittings shall be designed to withstand a minimum of 630 psi quick burst pressure at 73 degrees f., tested in accordance with ASTM D1599. Bell shall be gasketed joint conforming to ASTM D3139 with gaskets conforming to ASTM F477. B. Flexible Risers. 1. Flexible risers to be used below each sprinkler head shall be Flex- riser by King Bros., Ind., Valencia, California or PVC Flex-Nipple by Global Water Systems, Inc., Whittier, California. C. Fittings - PVC fittings - Schedule 40, polyvinyl chloride, standard weight, as manufactured by Sloane, Lasco or approval equal. D. Fillings and Galvanized Steel Pipe - Schedule 40, standard weight as manufactured by Grinnel or approval equal. E. Emitters – Emitter Heads shall be by ‘Bowsmith’ of the types and sizes with the discharge as shown on the Drawings. All heads and parts shall be interchangeable and renewable. They shall be constructed of high-impact plastic. All heads shall be marked with the manufacturer's name and identification. F. Valves. 1. Pressure Reducing Valve. Pressure reducing valve shall be provided separately when remote control valve without pressure regulator is used. Separate pressure reducing valves shall be used in conjunction with either electric solenoid or motor operated control valves. Valves shall maintain a constant downstream pressure regardless of fluctuations in demand. Valves shall be suitable for the distribution system operating pressure on the inlet side, with outlet pressure set for the pressure required by the sprinkler irrigation system. The valves shall be of the hydraulically operated, pilot controlled, globe or angle type, and may be actuated either by diaphragm operated, adjustable, spring-loaded type, designed to permit flow when controlling pressure exceeding the spring setting. Pilot control ends shall be threaded. Valve bodies shall be bronze, cast iron or cast steel with bronze trim. Valve stem shall be stainless steel. Valve discs and diaphragms shall be synthetic rubber. Valve seats shall be bronze. Pilot controls shall H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-84-00-7 Fountain Hills, AZ. be bronze with stainless steel working parts. Place only one valve per valve box. Brass labeling for on valves, controllers and “As-Built” or Record” drawings to be the same. This labeling shall include the Group, zone and controller numbers. Two sets of zone drawings shall be laminated on both sides and included with close-out documents. 2. Remote Control Valves. Solenoid Remote Control Valve. Solenoid remote control valves shall be Hunter heavy duty all plastic construction suitable for 150 psi working pressure and shall be a globe type diaphragm valve or normally-closed design. Operation shall be accomplished by means of an integrally-mounted heavy-duty 24V AC solenoid. Solenoid shall be completely waterproof, suitable for direct underground burial. Maximum operating current shall be compatible with the controller. Hydraulic action shall be accomplished internally without external bleeding or external tubing. Internal orifice shall be accessible for cleaning without dismantling the body of the valve. Valve shall have a manually-operated flow adjustment stem for throttling. Stem shall be so constructed as to permanently throttle the flow at any desired point or to manually seat the valve and hold it in the closed position. Place only on valve per valve box. 3. Manual Ball Valve. Manual ball valves shall be of the double disc, taper seat, construction with plastic body and plastic bonnet designed for 150 psi cold water working pressure. Equip the valves placed underground with non- rising stem and 2 inch square nut on stem. Valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to AWWA C500. Valves smaller than 3 inches shall conform to Fed. Spec. WW -V-S4, Type I, Class B and shall be all bronze. G. Valve Boxes. Plastic or equal valve boxes with colored covers shall be manufactured by NDS, Lindsay, California or Carson, Glendora, California of the sizes required to house each system valve. Place only one valve per valve box. H. Valve Wrenches. 1. Valve wrenches shall be constructed of steel pipe or rod with tee handles, welded connections and a socket wrench to fit the valve stem nut. Furnish one valve wrench for each size gate valve stem nut installed in the system, and two valve wrenches for each size drain stop installed in the system. The wrenches shall be 8 feet in length. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-84-00-8 Fountain Hills, AZ. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION/PERFORMANCE/ERECTION A. Layout - Contractor shall install sprinkler layout as shown on plans. Where connections to existing stubouts are required, make necessary adjustments in layout to connect as necessary to install around existing work. Guarantee full coverage upon completion of job. System is designed for a minimum of static pressure at water meter as noted. Verify static pressure prior to starting any work if the static pressure is lower than the design pressure noted. B. Irrigation system shall be metered separately from other services. C. Excavation and Backfill. 1. Excavation. a. Perform all excavations as required for the installation of the work including shoring of earth banks to prevent cave-ins. Restore all surfaces, existing underground installations, etc., damaged or cut as a result of the excavations to their original condition and in a manner approved by the Landscape Architect. b. Before starting work, carefully check all grades from known elevation, (see landscape construction or civil plans) to be sure that rough grades are properly established and that all pipeline will be at the proper grade or lower upon the completion of final grading. c. Trenches shall be made wide enough to allow a minimum of 6 inches between parallel pipe lines. Trenches for pipe lines shall be made of sufficient depths to provide the minimum cover from finish grade as follows: 1) 18 inches over main lines. 2) 12 inches cover over control wires from controller to valves. 3) 12 inches over lateral lines to heads. d. Provide a minimum slope towards the drain valves of not less than 3 inches per hundred lineal feet of pipe . e. Where rock, boulders or other unyielding material is encountered, carry the excavation to a depth at least 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe. Backfill the trench to proper grade with selected loose moist earth compacted to provide proper bedding for the pipe. f. Provide sufficient trench width to permit proper installation of pipe and fittings, and to permit proper placement and compaction of backfill material. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-84-00-9 Fountain Hills, AZ. g. Conduits for control wires and sleeves for irrigation piping shall be installed by this Contractor unless notified by the Architect and the General Contractor. Do all work necessary for completion of irrigation system. 2. Backfill. a. Do not backfill the trenches and excavations until all required inspections are made and tests are performed. The backfilling shall be done with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel or other selected materials, free from large clods of earth or stones. Place the first 6 inches of material by hand and carefully tamp around the pipe to assure against displacement of pipe and fittings. Place the remainder of the backfill in layers and each layer shall be thoroughly compacted. Backfill the trench to finish grade, with proper allowance for topsoil as specified elsewhere. Dispose of any excess excavated material as directed. Compaction min. 90 percent density. D. Pipe. 1. Install all pipe in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with ASTI D 2774. Keep the interior of the pipe clean and free from dirt and other foreign material. Plug all open ends of pipe and fittings securely when work is not actually in progress on the line. Support firmly each section of pipe throughout its length. Take particular care to prevent low points, except at drains, so that every section of pipe is placed with positive gravity drainage flow towards a drain valve. Pipe with solvent cemented joints shall be made in accordance with ASTI D 2885. 2. Make all sharp changes in alignment or grade with appropriate fittings. Install all elbows, tees and fittings with a reaction block bearing against undisturbed soil to prevent breakage or separation of the joint. All piping under walks shall be in PVC, Schedule 40 sleeves. All sprinkler pipes under areas subject to vehicular traffic shall be encased in cast iron pipe diameter of which shall be at least 2 inches greater than sprinkler pipe diameter. 3. Pipe may be assembled and welded on the surface. Snake pipe from side to side of trench bottom to allow for expansion and contraction. 4. Make all connections between plastic pipe and metal valves or steel pipe with threaded fittings using plastic male adapters. 5. All tie-ins into the existing mainline shall done with Ductile Iron Fittings. These tie-ins will be for new remote control valves and isolation valves. E. Sprinkler Heads. 32 84 00 IRRIGATION H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-84-00-10 Fountain Hills, AZ. 1. Install the sprinkler heads in accordance with the recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer. Flush the underground piping thoroughly before mounting the sprinkler heads. 2. Set sprinkler heads adjacent to existing walks, curbs, or other paved areas to grade. Sprinkler heads which are to be installed in lawn areas where the turf has not yet been established shall be set in 4 inches above the proposed finished grade. Lower heads installed in this manner to grade when the turf is sufficiently established to allow walking on it without appreciable destruction. 3. Adjust the pins into the stream for adequate distribution of all sprinklers containing adjustable pin nozzle. 4. Tighten all nozzles of stationary pop-up sprinklers after installation. Adjust all sprinklers having an adjustment stem on a lateral line for the proper radius, diameter and/or gallonage. F. Emitter Head Risers. 1. Emitter Heads. Emitter heads shall have risers made up of 4 inch flex-riser connected directly to fitting in the lateral and an appropriately sized schedule 40 threaded PVC pipe. G. Valves. 1. Install remote control valves at the locations shown on drawings. 2. Irrigation Zoning Irrigation shall be arranged with isolation valves to allow sections to be shut off for repairs without shutting water off for entire field. 3. Place only one valve per valve box. 4. Place ¾” minus gravel, 6 inches deep in the bottom of the valve box below the valve assembly to provide drainage. H. Controller. 1. Contractor to review operation of the existing controller and verify that all valves operate properly. 2. Connect remote control valves to controller in a clockwise sequence to correspond with station setting beginning with stations 1, 2, 3, etc. I. Electric Wiring. 1. Electric Wiring. Provide all low voltage wiring installed in rigid PVC conduit, a minimum of 18 inches (450 mm) below finished grade and graded to drain toward valve location. Conduit termination at valve shall be a bushing. 2. Conductors shall be color coded in accordance with IPCEA S-19-81, Table 5-1 and sized as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. All wiring to be used for connecting the automatic controller to the electric solenoid actuated remote control valve shall be Type UF- 600V, 7 strand or solid copper, PVC insulation, single conductor, UL 32 84 00 IRRIGATION H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-84-00-11 Fountain Hills, AZ. approved underground feeder cable. 4. Install control wires, sprinkler mains and laterals in common trenches wherever possible. 5. Install control wires at least 18 inches below finish grade and lay to the side and below main line. Provide looped slack at valves and snake wires in trench to allow for contraction of wires. Tie wires in bundles at 10 feet intervals. 6. Control wire splices will be allowed only runs more than 500 feet. Connections shall be as detailed. 7. All wire passing under existing or future paving, construction, etc., shall be encased in galvanized steel conduit extending at least 12 inches beyond edges of paving or construction. 8. Irrigation Control Valves - install control valves in valve boxes where shown on group together where practical. Place no closer than 12" in walk edges, buildings and walls. Valve boxes shall be flush with finish grade. Place 1/2 cu. ft. PEA gravel below all valves. 9. Closing of Pipe and Flushing of Lines: Cap or plug all openings as soon as lines have been installed to prevent entrance of materials that would obstruct the pipe. Leave in place until removal is necessary for completion of installation. 10. Thoroughly flush out all water lines before installing heads, valves and other hydrants. 11. Upon completion of testing, complete assembly and adjust sprinkler heads for proper distribution. 12. Clean-Up: Keep all areas of work clean, neat and orderly at all times. Keep paved areas clean during installation. Clean up and remove all debris from the entire work area prior to final acceptance to satisfaction of the Architect. END OF SECTION H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-90-00-1 Fountain Hills, AZ. 32 90 00 LANDSCAPE PLANTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes all planting work. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Refer to all Sections in Division 0, CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 2. See Section 31 22 19, SITE GRADING for spreading of top soil and finished grading. 3. See Section 32 92 01, TURF GRASSES for sodding and/ or hydro seeding for the Project. C. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Schedule a pre-construction conference with the General Contractor and the Landscape Architect at least seven (7) days before beginning work under this Section. Purpose of this conference is to review questions the Contractor may have regarding the work, administrative procedures during construction and project work schedule. D. Samples, Tests and Inspections: 1. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity to specifications at any time. Contractor shall furnish samples upon request by the Landscape Architect. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Cost of testing of materials not meeting specifications shall be paid by the Contractor. E. Make known sources of topsoil and sod to allow for field inspection by the Landscape Architect. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality Control: 1. General. Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection when required by governmental authorities. Comply with governing regulations applicable to landscape materials. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-90-00-2 Fountain Hills, AZ. 2. Packaged Materials. Package standard products with manufacturer's certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists, wherever applicable, or as further specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: 1. File with the Landscape Architect all necessary State, Federal and other inspection certificates as may be required by law. 2. Submit two (2) copies to the Landscape Architect of manufacturers' or vendors' certified analysis for soil treatments and fertilizer materials. 3. The Contractor shall certify and guarantee that all plant material is true to name and in conformance with these specifications. 4. The invoice or a written statement shall show the size and grade of materials received or shipped, together with the source of origin and the health of the plant materials. a. The Contractor shall specify which plant material he furnished from his own stock and which plant material he obtained from others. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: 1. Packaged Materials. Deliver packaged materials in unopened bags or containers, each bearing the name, warranty, and trademark of the producer and the composition, analysis and the weight of the material. B. Storage of Materials, Equipment, and Fixtures: 1. Plant Protection. Plant all nursery stocks at once upon delivery. However, if this is not feasible, they shall be heeled in, (e.g. all bundles open, the plants spread out into a spade-depth trench, the roots fully covered with damp soil, and protected from the sun and wind). a. Protect all plants from the drying action of the sun and wind until planted. Protect container plants, which cannot be planted immediately upon delivery, with shade cover or other protective material. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Planting. Perform actual planting when conditions are suitable which will not adversely affect materials nor will it be permitted when soil is in muddy conditions. Notify the Landscape Architect before H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-90-00-3 Fountain Hills, AZ. proceeding with any planting operations. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. Plant Guarantee and Replacements. 1. Guarantee. All new trees planted shall have a replacement guarantee for a period of one year and shrubs for 120 days, beginning at the date of substantial completion of the Project. There will be no separate measurement and payment for the Plant Establishment. Guarantee and Maintenance Period. The cost shall be incidental to the cost of the plant materials. 2. Replacement. At the end of the guarantee period, and upon the written request, an inspection will be made by the Landscape Architect. Any plant material that is dead or not showing satisfactory growth, as determined by the Landscape Architect, shall be promptly removed and replaced by the Contractor during a normal planting season. The replacement shall be of the same variety, size and character as specified for the original planting. 3. The replacements shall have the same guarantee as specified under "Guarantee." 4. Check site at least once every two (2) weeks during guarantee period for proper maintenance and notify Owner, in writing, of any advised changes. 5. Notify Landscape Architect seven (7) days prior to the end of the guarantee period that final inspection is requested. The Landscape Architect will make notice of any items not acceptable or requiring correction and such corrections shall be made immediately. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fertilizer. 1. Commercial fertilizer 10-6-4 shall be uniform in composition, free- flowing material and shall conform to state fertilizer laws. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-90-00-4 Fountain Hills, AZ. 2. All plants with the exception of ground covers and turf areas to receive Agriform (20-10-5) plant tabs at the following rates: 1 Gallon 1-02 Gram Tablets 5 Gallon 2-21 Gram Tablets 15 Gallon 4-21 Gram Tablets 24" Box 6-21 Gram Tablets 30" Box 7-21 Gram Tablets 36" Box 8-21 Gram Tablets 3. Set tablets 3" below finished grade and space evenly around plant's perimeter. B. Plant Materials. Furnish all plant materials shown and specified on plans. The Landscape Contractor to submit proof of source prior to planting and acceptance. Plant materials must be true to names and size and conform with the following standard: 1. American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature, "Standardized Plant Names" (Published by Mount Pleasant Press J. Horace McFarland Company, Harrisburg, PA.) 2. American Association of Nurserymen, "Horticultural Standards" (Published by American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., 635-636 Southern Building, Washington, D.C.) C. Plants shall be quality material having the habit of growth which is normal for the species; sound, vigorous, health, free from insects, plant diseases and injury. Caliper and height and spread dimensions shall be measured according to accepted standards and good practice. D. Container plants shall have been in the containers for a sufficient length of time for the root system to hold the earth when taken from the container, but not long enough to become root-bound of use "hardening-off". E. Organic Mulch. Commercially prepared composed and treated consisting of 95% organic matter with water absorption not less than 500% of dry weight of two cubic yards per ton. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-90-00-5 Fountain Hills, AZ. F. Topsoil. Topsoil shall be screened, fertile, friable soil from well drained arable land and free from nut grass, refuse, roots, heavy clay, noxious weeds or any material toxic to plant growth. Topsoil content shall be as follows: silt 20-45%; clay 15-20%; sand 30-60% with a minimum of 5% organic material (natural or added). Topsoil existing in the site may be used if it meets the above specification. PH shall not be lower than 5.5 nor exceed 8.3 and soluble salts not exceed 1500 PPM. G. Stakes. Provide straight, sound wood stakes, 2 x 2-1/2-inch diameter (50 x 50 mm or 63 mm diameter) in size. H. Wires for Guying. Pliable zinc-coated 12 gage iron with zinc-coated turnbuckles. J. Protectors. Use 5-ply rubber garden hose or equivalent for guying protectors around the trunk of a tree. Protectors shall be of uniform neutral color throughout the Project Site. K. Source of Material. With the "Materials for Project" submittal, specify which plant material will be furnished from bidders stock and which plant material will be obtained from other growers along with the source of origin. 1. Trees and Shrubs. Quality of all plants shall conform to the State of California grading code of nursery stock #1 grade and be full sized. They shall be vigorous, of normal growth, free of disease, insects and latent defects. Trees 15 gallon and larger shall conform to the Standards of Container Size to caliper, height and spread established or on plans. Pruning shall not be done prior to delivery except by specified written approval from the Landscape Architect. Inspection of plant materials required by City, Count, State or Federal authorities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and he shall have secured permits or certificates prior to delivery of plants to site. Should any conflict arise as to the quality of any material, the decision of the Landscape Architect is final. 2. Container-grown plants shall have been grown in pots, cans, tubs, or boxes and shall have sufficient roots to hold earth together intact after removal from containers, before planting without being root-bound. Plants grown as sod or bedding may be planted under this category upon direction of the Landscape Architect. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-90-00-6 Fountain Hills, AZ. 3. Decomposed Granite: Decomposed granite shall be of the size and color as indicated on plans, shall be free from lumps or balls of clay and shall not contain calcareous coating, chalice, organic matter deleterious substances. Color and source of decomposed granite shall be approved by the Landscape Architect. All material shall be from a single production source and shall present a uniform appearance. Material containing clumps which will not disintegrate with a shovel blow shall be rejected. 4. Weed Control Chemicals. Non-selective contact herbicide(s) and/or non-selective systemic herbicide(s) compatible with seen mixture(s) and vegetatively planted materials are all that are permitted. a. Use pre-emergent herbicide(s) compatible with seed mixture(s) and vegetatively planted materials. b. Use only approved weed control materials and a licensed applicator. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Selection and Review. All plant material is subject to inspection and review by the Landscape Architect. The Landscape Architect shall have free access to the places where the plant materials are grown for inspection and selection of materials. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject at any time or place prior to acceptance of the work, any and all plants which, fail to meet this specification. All deciduous trees and evergreen trees will be selected and tagged by the Landscape Architect at the place where the plant material is grown. 1. Provide maintenance for a period of one (1) year from final completion of the project and acceptance by the Owner of the entire construction. Contractor shall provide full maintenance for all plantings including, material, bedding, watering, pruning and adjusting edge for the full duration of the maintenance period." 2. All plant materials shall be well branched, and well proportioned. Provide full-foliaged evergreens. Make sure all plants are vigorous and healthy and free from insects, their eggs and larvae, and diseases. All plants shall be of the size or larger than that specified. All plants must also be free from mechanical injury, cultural injury, injury by animals and free of noticeable after effects of insect attack or blight. 3.02 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION/PERFORMANCE/ERECTION H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-90-00-7 Fountain Hills, AZ. A. Workmanship. 1. Complete all work in the best manner, so that the work as a whole is of uniform quality and appearance. B. Installation: 1. Planting Operations. a. Layout. Stake the location for all plants and outlines or planting areas for review by the Landscape Architect before excavation is begun. 1) Place no plantings closer than 2 feet (600 mm) to pavements or structures, unless otherwise indicated. b. Excavation for planting shall be circular with vertical sides. Their diameter shall exceed by at least 24 inches the diameter of the ball in container the plant material has been grown in. The diameter of the planting pits for vines shall be l foot greater than their root spread. Sixteen inches is the minimum depth of pits for all shrubs and vines and increase this depth sufficiently to accommodate the ball or roots, plus not less than 6 inches of mixed backfill placed below the plants when the plant is set to grade. c. Obstructions below ground. Remove any rock, rubble or other underground obstructions to the depth necessary to permit proper planting. d. Backfill. Soil shall be conditioned with 3 cubic yards organic mulch, 10 pounds of 16-20-0 Ammonia Phosphate fertilizer and 50 pound Gypsum per 1,000 square feet. e. Conditioning material shall be tilled into the topsoil to a depth of 3". Limit preparation to areas immediately available for planting. Fine grade to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll, rake, remove ridges and fill depressions, as required to meet finish grades. f. Moisten area before planting if soil is very dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry off before planting. Do not create a muddy soil condition. Restore replanted areas to specific condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to planting. g. Remove all roots, plants, sod, store one inch or larger, clay lumps and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth. h. Disposal. Remove and dispose of all excess excavations and unsuitable materials. i. Planting Beds. Plant ground covers, perennials, and annuals in beds in which the soil is smooth, friable of uniformly fine texture and loosened to a depth of 6 inches . j. Setting Plants. Plant all plants to the same depth as the H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-90-00-8 Fountain Hills, AZ. preceding planting. Center the plants in their planting pits and set in the natural upright position. Be careful not to exert any pressure that will damage any portion of the plant. k. Planting. Stake plant locations and obtain approval from the Landscape Architect before excavating pits, making necessary adjustments as directed. 1) Plants not dimensioned as to precise locations shall be scaled from the drawings and the plant placed in the appropriate relationship indicated. 2) Import soil shall match the native soils texture, density and particle size. Backfill mix shall be prepared at one time at a controlled location on the site. Mixing of amendments with a tractor driven rototill at the site will be an acceptable method of blending backfill. 3) Test drainage of plant beds and pits by filling with water. Conditions permitting the retention of water in planting beds for more than 24 hours shall be brought to the attention of the Landscape Architect prior to any planting. 4) Cut plant containers (cans) on two sides without injuring root ball and carefully remove the plant. Do not cut container with spade. Any plant injured or root ball broken during planting operations will be rejected. 2. Guying. Trees shall be staked as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Architect. 3. Mulching. All plant pits shall be mulched with 2 inches thick well- rotted manure or 1 inch thick for peat moss. Planting beds shall be uniformly mulched with vermiculite spread to a depth of 1 to 1-1/2 inches. 4. Commercial Fertilizer. Apply commercial fertilizer at the rate recommended by the manufacturer for the type of landscape work. C. Fertilizing: 1. Final fertilization shall be completed two (2) days prior to completion of the maintenance period prior to final acceptance. D. Chemical Weed Control: 1. Prior to the completion of the one (1) year maintenance period, the Landscape Contractor shall apply a chemical pre-emergent herbicide to any planting areas designated by the Landscape Architect. The pre-emergent must be applied in accordance with the plant varieties, plant maturity and manufacturer's recommendations. 2. All pre-emergent herbicides to be as suggested by the pest control advisor and must be compatible with all plant varieties and shall control the week varieties prevalent in the local area. 3. The pest control advisor's recommendations must be submitted to the H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-90-00-9 Fountain Hills, AZ. Landscape Architect prior to the start of the maintenance period. E. Decomposed Granite. Furnish and place decomposed granite in accordance with the details shown and the requirements of the specifications. 1. Prior to placing, the area shall be totally free to weeds, using chemical control if necessary. Apply a pre-emergency control according to manufacturer's recommendations. The decomposed granite shall be evenly distributed at the designated areas to a depth of not less than 2". 2. After placing and grading lightly, water to remove fine material from the surface and water settle or roll to an extent satisfactory to the Owner. Apply a second application of pre-emergence control according to manufacturer's recommendation. F. Grading. Bring all planting areas to finish grade after soil prepping which shall be 1" minimum below paving and curbs or as noted by spot elevations. Special attention shall be given to maintaining continuous and even flowlines, drainage away from structures and providing positive drainage to inlets and from outlets. 1. Grades shall be established to drain all water away from structures and behind walls. When drainage is difficult to achieve, notify the Landscape Architect and request a solution before continuing. Grades in shrub areas shall be established prior to plating to insure proper final planting heights. Final grading shall include the knocking down of watering basins prior to planting of ground cover. On hillside planting water basins shall be retained. 2. Earth berms shall take the form indicated on the plans. The Landscape Architect shall inspect and approve all finished grades prior to any plantings. 3. Landscape Contractor to coordinate with the General Contractor, Superintendent or assure himself, that all trenches in the landscape areas are properly compacted, brought to grade and completed prior to completion of grading and planting areas. G. Start of Maintenance Period. 1. When all landscape improvements have been installed in accordance with the plans and specifications, notify the Architect and request a "start of maintenance" inspection. If the Architect determines the work to be substantially complete and in conformance with the plans and specifications, the Contractor will be advised in writing that the basic maintenance period is started. In order to be substantially complete at least the following must have been finished: a. All fine grading, including elimination of low points that hold runoff. b. A complete and operable irrigation system. c. Installation of all plant materials. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 April 17, 2017 32-90-00-10 Fountain Hills, AZ. d. Minor pick-up items may be completed during the basic maintenance. 1) Replacement of damaged or non-conforming plant material. 2) Re-staking or tying of trees. 3) Removal of watering basins. 4) Filling of settled areas caused by application of normal watering. 5) Removal of all weeds through chemical eradication. 6) Removal of all debris on a weekly bases. 7) Fertilize and cultivate all planting areas. 2. At the end of 120 day minimum and when ground covers and turf have become established and all pick-up items have been completed, request a final inspection. Within three (3) days, Contractor will be advised by the Landscape Architect, in writing, work is or is not satisfactory. 3. If the work is satisfactory, the basic maintenance period will end. 4. If the work is unsatisfactory, the basic maintenance period will continue at no additional expense to the Owner until the work has been completed, inspected and approved by the Landscape Architect. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Protection and Maintenance. 1. Planting. Following the completion of planting operations, provide maintenance for all plantings, i.e., material, bedding, watering, adjusting guys, etc., until substantial completion of the Project. END OF SECTION 32 90 00 H&C WATER LINE & FIRE LINE CONSTRUCTION 33 10 00 - 1 SECTION 33 10 00 - WATER LINE AND FIRE LINE CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Water Line and Fire Line Construction as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for review manufacturer’s data. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. On all pipe types and sizes, fittings, tees, valves, bends, etc. 2. Fire hydrants. 3. Backflow prevention assemblies. 1.3 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Visit. Examine and note conditions as to the character and extent of work involved. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall obtain all necessary construction permits and shall coordinate all necessary inspections with the Town. Owner to pay for permits. B. Construction staking, as-builts and certification shall be performed by a licensed Engineer/Surveyor acceptable to the Architect and Owner. C. Contractor shall conform to applicable requirements of MAG Standard Specifications and Details including Town supplements and of all regulatory agencies. D. Town and State Fire Marshall’s Offices shall inspect fire line prior to backfill. Flow tests and other tests they may require shall be performed in their presence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. As allowed per MAG. Specifications, City or Town codes and requirements and for fire lines Town and State Fire Marshall’s Offices and as indicated on the drawings. H&C WATER LINE & FIRE LINE CONSTRUCTION 33 10 00 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Failure to observe this requirement constitutes a waiver to subsequent claims to the contrary and holds Contractor responsible for correction(s) Architect may require. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of site conditions. B. Coordination with other work: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.2 WATER LINE AND FIRE LINE CONSTRUCTION A. Water line and fire line construction shall conform to the applicable requirements of MAG Specifications, Section 610, Water Line Construction and the Town Design Standards thereto, and applicable Plumbing and Fire Codes. Maricopa County and State health codes, Town and State Fire Marshall’s Offices requirements shall apply to installation of all water lines, fire lines, valves, valve boxes, fire hydrants, backflow preventers, F.D.C.’s, water meters, valve boxes, rims and covers, tees, bends, etc., as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Onsite backfill and compaction shall be performed per requirements in Specifications, Section 31 01 00, Earthwork. 3.3 “AS-BUILT” DRAWINGS A. The contractor’s surveyor shall provide as-builts for all site water and fire lines (outside building areas). The contractor shall schedule the work to allow the surveyors to obtain as- builts for the actual locations and elevations of the completed water and fire line. As-built drawing shall clearly show the exact location of all new water lines and fire lines with bends, tees, crosses, taps, fire hydrants, valves, etc., accurately dimensioned. As-builts shall be provided on 4 mil mylar and AutoCAD electronic formatted compact disc (CD), certified, sealed and signed by the surveyor. This work will not be accepted until as-builts are approved by the Design Civil Engineer and Town. 3.4 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of legally away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 33 10 00 H&C SEWER SYSTEM 33 30 00 - 1 SECTION 33 30 00 - SEWER LINE CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Sewer Line Construction as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for review manufacturer’s data. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Sewer pipe type and size, fittings, etc. 2. Cleanouts 3. Manholes 1.3 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Visit the site. Examine and note conditions as to the character and extent of work involved. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall obtain all necessary construction permits and shall coordinate all necessary inspections with the Design Civil Engineer and Town. Owner to pay for permits. B. Construction staking, as-builts and certification for the sewer lines shall be performed by a licensed Engineer/Surveyor acceptable to the Architect and Owner. C. Contractor shall conform to applicable requirements of MAG Standard Specifications and Details including Town supplements and of all regulatory agencies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. As allowed per MAG. Specifications, Town codes and requirements and as indicated on the drawings. H&C SEWER SYSTEM 33 30 00 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Failure to observe this requirement constitutes a waiver to subsequent claims to the contrary and holds Contractor responsible for correction(s) Architect may require. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of site conditions. B. Coordination with other work: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.2 SEWER LINE CONSTRUCTION A. Sewer line construction shall conform to the applicable requirements of MAG Specifications, Section 615, Sewer Line Construction, Section 743, Section 745, P.V.C. Sewer Pipe and Fittings, applicable Town Standards, Town Adopted Plumbing Code and Maricopa County Department of Environmental Quality (MCESD) and requirements, if in conflict, MCESD codes and requirements shall govern, and shall consist of installing all sewer lines, fittings, etc. as shown on the drawings and herein. Onsite backfill and compaction shall be performed per Specifications, Section 31 01 00, Earthwork. 3.3 SEWER CLEANOUTS A. Sewer cleanouts shall be constructed and conform to the applicable requirements of MAG. Specifications, Section 615, Sewer Line construction and MAG. Standard Detail No. 441, Sewer Cleanout and per the detail on the drawings. Covers shall be equipped with chain attachments to frame per the applicable requirements of MAG. Standard Detail No. 270, Frame & Cover Grade Adjustment. End of cleanout pipe shall have a threaded watertight cap. 3.4 SEWER MANHOLES A. Sewer manholes shall be constructed from and conform to the applicable requirements of MAG. Specifications Section 615, Sewer Line Construction and MAG. Standard Detail No. 420-1, -2. Cover shall be lockable. Key to unlock cover shall be provided to Owner. 3.5 “AS-BUILT” DRAWINGS A. The Contractor’s surveyor shall provide as-builts for all site sewer (outside building areas). The contractor shall schedule the work to allow the surveyor to obtain as-builts for the actual locations and elevations of the completed sewer lines. As-built drawings shall clearly show by dimensions the exact location of all sewer lines, cleanouts and taps. As-builts shall be provided on 4 mil mylars and AutoCAD electronic formatted compact disc (CD), certified, sealed and signed by the surveyor. This work will not be accepted until as-builts are approved by the Design Civil Engineer and Town. H&C SEWER SYSTEM 33 30 00 - 3 3.6 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of legally away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 33 30 00 H&C STORM DRAIN CONSTRUCTION 33 40 00 - 1 SECTION 33 40 00 - STORM DRAIN CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Storm Drain Construction as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittal requirements are specified in Section 013300: SUBMITTALS. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Storm drainage pipe, fittings, etc. 2. Area drains, catch basins 3. Drywells, oil/grease interceptors 1.3 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Visit the site. Examine and note conditions as to the character and extent of Work involved. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall obtain, at his expense, all necessary construction permits and shall coordinate all necessary inspections with the Town of Gilbert. B. Construction staking shall be performed by a licensed Civil Engineer of Surveyor acceptable to the Architect and Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. High Density Polyethylene Pipe with smooth interior and 10.8 p.s.i. joints. B. P.V.C. (D3034, SDR-35) Storm Drain Pipe. H&C STORM DRAIN CONSTRUCTION 33 40 00 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Failure to observe this requirement constitutes a waiver to subsequent claims to the contrary and holds Contractor responsible for correction(s) Architect or Civil Engineer may require. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination with other work: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.2 STORM DRAIN CONSTRUCTION A. Storm drain construction shall conform to the applicable requirements of MAG Specifications, Section 601, Trench Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction, Section 745, P.V.C. Sewer Pipe and Fittings and Section 603, Installation for High Density Polyethylene Pipe. B. Storm Drain pipe shall consist of installing P.V.C. and H.D.P.E. pipe to the alignments and grades indicated on the Drawings. C. Granular bedding will be required from four inches (4") below the bottom of the pipe to one foot (1') above the pipe. All clean dirt spoils generated from the installation of the storm drain lines shall be removed from the site and disposed of legally, if not used on the site. D. The allowable water loss shall be 1.0 gallon per hour per 100 feet of pipe per inch of diameter of pipe under a minimum test head of 4 feet above the top of pipe at the upper end E. All pipe shall be subject to a field leakage test. Prior to backfill, the Engineer will inspect the pipeline either under normal operating conditions or the maximum static head available. The Contractor shall repair any leaks or other deficiencies revealed by the field test as directed by the Engineer prior to final acceptance of the pipe line. 3.3 AREA DRAINS AND CATCH BASINS A. Area drains and catch basins shall be installed per the details on the Drawings and per the MAG Standard Details referenced on the Drawings. 3.4 OIL/GREASE INTERCEPTORS AND DRYWELL A. Oil/grease Interceptors and Drywells shall be installed per the details on the Drawings. H&C STORM DRAIN CONSTRUCTION 33 40 00 - 3 3.5 “AS-BUILT” DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall provide certified, signed and sealed as-builts for all site storm drain lines (outside building areas). The Contractor shall schedule the Work to allow the Surveyor to obtain as-builts for the actual location and elevation of the completed storm drain line including location, invert elevation and rim elevation of all area drains, catch basins, bends, drywells, oil/grease interceptors, etc. 3.6 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of legally away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION 33 40 00 NNHunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comABBREVIATIONSDINING ROOMD/R.EXPANSION JOINTELECTROSTATIC PAINTFINISH SYSTEMEXTERIOR INSULATIONEXPANSION BOLTEIFSEQUIPEXTEXPEXISTEWESPELEVELEQEJEQUIPMENTEXTERIOREXPOSEDEACH WAYEXISTINGELEVATORELEVATIONEQUALDRKEFDWGEBEADNDRESSDRAPDRDISPDARKEACH FACEEACHDRAWINGDOWNDRESSINGDRAPERYDOORDISPENSERO.F.O.I.O.F.C.I.OFOCNTSNONICNCNFMISCMTLMTDMTMRMECHMAINTMACHMINMAXCONSTRUCTION JOINTCONCRETE MASONRY UNITDRINKING FOUNTAINCONT. FURN/OWNER INST.CONTR. FURN./CONT. INST.CERAMIC TILEDIMDIADIAGDFDBLDETCF/OICF/CICONTCTDETAILDIAGONALDIMENSIONDIAMETERCONTINUOUSDOUBLECONCCOL.COCMUCLRCLGCERCLCJCONCRETECLEAN OUTCOLUMNCENTERLINECLEARCEILINGCERAMICIFLOUVLNDRYLAVLTINSULJANINTJTHORIZIDHTHMHDWRHBHCH.D.HDAPPROXIMATEBARRIER FREEBUILDINGABOVE FINISH FLOORACOUSTICALAIR CONDITIONINGANCHOR BOLTALUM.CPTCABBOTBLDGARCHBFAPPROXCARPETCABINETBOTTOMARCHICTECT(URAL)ALUMINUMADJA.F.F.ACOUSA/CAB@&ADJUSTABLEANDATGWBGLGRGAF.V.GIF/RFLRFGF.O.C.F.O.CMUFDFFF.O.B.FECFETOW TOP OF WALLUNLESS NOTED OTHERWISEOWNER FURNISHED/OWNER INSTALLEDWWFWRWCWHWIWDW.C.VWCW/UNOVCTVESTULTVTRTPCONTRACTOR INSTALLEDOWNER FURNISHED/ON CENTEROUTSIDE FACENON COMBUSTIBLENOT IN CONTACTNEAR FACENOT TO SCALENUMBERWMOISTURE RESISTANTMISCELLANEOUSMETAL THRESHOLDMOUNTEDMETALMECHANICALMAINTENENCEMINIMUMMAXIMUMMACHINEVERTWELDED WIRE FABRICWROUGHT IRONWATER RESISTANTWALL HYDRANTWALL COVERINGWATER CLOSETWOODWITHWIDTHVINYL WALL COVERINGTELEVISIONUNDERWRITER'S LABORATORYVESTIBULEVINYL COMPOSITION TILEVERTICALTREADTOILET PAPERGYPSUM WALL BOARDSQTODTELTOPTHKTEXTTCSTLSPSUSPSTORSTNSSSPLSPKLRSPECSIMSCSHTSBINSIDE FACELAVATORYLAUNDRYLIGHTLOUVERINSULATIONJOINTJANITORINTERIORHARDWAREHORIZONTALINSIDE DIAMETERHOLLOW METALHEIGHTHOSE BIBHOLLOW COREHUB DRAINHANDSTEELTELEPHONETHICKTEXTURETOP OF PARAPETTOP OF DECKTEXTURED COATINGSTANDPIPESUSPENDEDSTORAGESQUARESTAINLESS STEELSOLID CORESPRINKLERSIMILIARSPECIFICATIONSUPPORT BARSSPLASHSHEETSTAINROWRSRDRESILREFLREFRBRLPFPLYWDQTPTPREHPLTPLPTDGALVANIZED IRONGUEST ROOMFIELD VERIFYGLASSGAUGEFIRE RESISTANTFINISH GRADEFLOORRFACE OF CONCRETEFIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETFACE OF CMUFINISH FLOORFLOOR DRAINFIRE EXTINGUISHERFACE OF BRICKRIGHT OF WAYREFLECTEDREFERENCERAIN LEADERRUBBER BASEROOF DRAINRELIEF SCUPPERRESILIENTRISERPREFINISHEDPREHUNGQUARRY TILEPLYWOODPRESSURE TREATEDPROPERTY LINEPLATEPAINTCENTERLINECLNUMBER#AGGREGATE BASE COURSEABCAPC ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGAUTO AUTOMATICBARRIER FREE ACCESSIBLEBFABOARDBDBLOCKBLKBLOCKINGBLKGBEAMBMCEM CEMENTCONST CONSTRUCTIONCENTERCTRELEC ELECTRIC(AL)EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLERFDTN FOUNDATIONFF EL FINISH(ED) FLOOR ELEVATIONFHC FIRE HOSE CABINETFF EL FINISH(ED) FLOOR ELEVATIONFIN FINISHFLUOR FLUORESCENTFM FACTORY MUTUALFO FINISHED OPENINGF.O.M. FACE OF MASONRYF.O.S. FACE OF STUDSFR FRAMEFT FOOT OR FEETFTG FOOTINGV.I.F. VERIFY IN FIELDGLZG GLAZINGGALV GALVANIZEDGYP GYPSUMHCMU HOLLOW CLAY MASONRY UNITHR HOURHDWD HARDWOODKDKO KNOCKOUTKNOCK DOWNLAM LAMINATELAV LAVATORYLT WT LIGHT WEIGHTMASMATLMASONRYMATERIALMCJ MASONRY CONTROL JOINTMFR MANUFACTURERMO MASONRY OPENINGN/A NOT APPLICABLENOM NOMINALOD OUTSIDE DIAMETEROPNG OPENINGOPP OPPOSITEPC PORTLAND CEMENTPLAM PLASTIC LAMINATEPLAS PLASTERPLBG PLUMBINGPRCST PRECASTPTN PARTITIONPVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDEQTY QUANTITYRAD RADIUSREC RECESSEDREINF REINFOERCE)D)RESIST RESISTANTREQD REQUIREDRM ROOMRO ROUGH OPENINGSCHED SCHEDULESECT SECTIONSF SQUARE FEETSJ SCORED JOINTSTDL STANDARDSTRUCT STRUCTURALSV SHEET VINYLSYMM SYMMETRICALTHR THRESHOLDTOCTOP OF CURBTOFTOP OF FRAMINGTOS TOP OF STEELTYP TYPICALUF UPHOLSTERY FABRICWIN WINDOWW/O WITHOUTXFMR TRANSFORMER123REFERENCE SYMBOLS123TITLEDETAIL# ON THIS SHEETSCALESHOWN ONTHIS SHEETDETAIL#THIS SHEETSHOWN ONTHIS SHEETSHOWN ONDETAIL NUMBERDETAIL NUMBERELEVATIONSHOWN3ELEVATION#THIS SHEETSHOWN ONTHIS SHEETSHOWN ON141ST FLOORREFERENCE SYMBOLS1ROOM NUMBERDOOR NUMBERWINDOW NUMBERAWALL TYPE INDICATORCOLUMN GRIDNORTH ARROWEXTERIOR ELEVATIONSINTERIOR ELEVATIONSBUILDING SECTIONWALL SECTIONDETAIL REFERENCEDRAWING TITLEDATUM ELEVATION1OFFICE101AVICINITY MAPPROJECT ADDRESS:--FOUNTAIN HILLSFIRE STATIONNO. 2PROJECT:Revisions:Checked by:Scale:Date:Drawn by:Issue:6/2/17SESAs ShownHCA Project Number 16-003JSS2nd City SubmittalHCA Job # 16-003Fountain Hills Fire Station No. 2PROJECT TEAMDRAWING INDEXGENERAL NOTESGENERAL NOTESDEFERRED SUBMITTALSSUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS FOR DEFERRED SUBMITTAL ITEMS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TOTHE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER OF RECORD WHO SHALL REVIEW THEM AND PROVIDEBACK TO CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR IS TO THEN FORWARD THEM TO THEBUILDING OFFICIAL WITH A NOTATION INDICATING THAT THEY HAVE BEEN FOUNDTO BE IN GENERAL CONFORMANCE WITH THE DESIGN OF THE BUILDING. THEDEFERRED SUBMITTAL ITEMS SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED UNTIL THEIR DESIGN ANDSUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN APPROVED BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL.DEFERRED SUBMITTAL ITEMS:FIRE MARSHAL SUBMITTALCONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT THE REQUIRED DOCUMENTS,SPECIFICATIONS, AND CUTSHEETS TO THE TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLSFIRE DEPARTMENT FOR REVIEW OF FIRE SPRINKLER, FIRELANE, FIRE LINE, FIRE CONNECTION, FIRE ALARM ANDASSOCIATED SUBMITTALS FOR APPROVAL. ENGINEERINGAND DESIGN OF FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS SHALL BECOMPLETED BY THE CONTRACTOR WITH THE PROPER SEALAND SIGNATURE OF A LICENSED ENGINEER. GENERAL SITEAND BUILDING CONFORMANCE SHALL BE SUBMITTED BY THEARCHITECT FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL BY THE FIREMARSHAL.BUILDING DATAPROJECT SCOPE OF WORKSPECIAL INSPECTIONSPECIAL INSPECTION BY SPECIAL INSPECTORS SATISFACTORY TO THE BUILDINGOFFICIAL IS REQUIRED FOR THE FOLLOWING TYPES OF WORK INCONFORMANCE WITH SECTION 109 AND CHAPTER 17 OF THE BUILDING CODE:SPECIAL INSPECTION ITEMS:THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.CONCRETE TILT-UP PANELSWELDINGEPOXY INSTALLATIONHIGH STRENGTH BOLTINGREINFORCING STEELSTRUCTURAL MASONRYCONCRETESOILS/GEOTECHNICALANCHOR BOLTS IN CONCRETEWOOD LATERAL FORCE RESISTING SYSTEMSTEEL JOISTSPREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSESPREFABRICATED WOOD I-JOISTSFIRE SPRINKLER1. ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES AND ORDINANCES.ALL WORK SHALL BE EXECUTED IN A WORKMANLIKE MANNER, IN ACCORDANCEWITH GENERALLY ACCEPTED INDUSTRY STANDARDS, AND AS DEEMEDACCEPTABLE BY THE OWNER OR HIS REPRESENTATIVE.2. THIS PROJECT COMPLIES WITH ALL HANDICAP REQUIREMENTS AS SET FORTH BYGOVERNING CODES AND ORDINANCES.3. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF EXISTING WALLSTO REMAIN AND TO THE CENTER LINE OF NEW PARTITIONS. DO NOT SCALEDRAWINGS.4. PATCH AND FINISH EXISTING WALL SURFACES TO REMAIN AT AREAS OFDEMOLISHED WALLS, MILLWORK, ELECTRICAL DEVICES, ETC. TO A UNIFORMAPPEARANCE AS REQUIRED. WHERE NEW WALL SURFACES ARE FLUSH WITHEXISTING, BLEND FINISH SURFACES TOGETHER TO ACHIEVE A UNIFORMAPPEARANCE.5. VERIFY EXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS. IN THE EVENT ANY CONDITIONS AREDISCOVERED WHICH IN THE CONTRACTOR'S OPINION, WOULD IMPEDE HISWORK OR PREVENT A SUCCESSFUL AND TIMELY COMPLETION OF HIS WORK, ORIF ANY CONDITIONS ARE IN CONFLICT WITH THE INTENT OF THECONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, THEN SUCH CONDITIONS SHALL BE IMMEDIATELYREPORTED TO THE ARCHITECT.6. VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS IN THE FIELD AND NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT OF ANYDISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND FIELDCONDITIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCING THE AFFECTED PORTION(S) OF THEWORK.7. THE START OF WORK BY ANY CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTORCONSTITUTES ACCEPTANCE OF EXISTING JOB CONDITIONS AS BEINGSATISFACTORY FOR THE PERFORMANCE OF HIS WORK.8. ALL ELECTRICAL CONDUITS, WIRING, PLUMBING LINES, ETC. SHALL BE RUNCONCEALED, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.9. ANY NEW PARTITIONS SHALL BE ABLE TO RESIST A LATERAL LOAD OF 5 P.S.F.REFER TO DETAILS FOR ANCHORING AND BRACING DETAILS IF APPLICABLE ONTHIS PROJECT.10. ALL WOOD BLOCKING SHALL BE FIRE RETARDANT TREATED. AT PENETRATIONSOF FIREWALLS AND FLOOR, SEAL VOIDS SURROUNDING DUCTS, PIPES, CONDUIT,ETC. WITH THE CITY OF MESA APPROVED FIREPROOF MATERIALS. ALLINTERIOR FINISHES SHALL HAVE A MAXIMUM FLAME SPREAD RATING OF 200. ALLINSULATION MATERIALS INSTALLED WITHIN WALLS, PLENUMS, ETC. SHALL BEUNFACED AND SHALL HAVE A FLAME SPREAD RATING NOT TO EXCEED 25, WITHA SMOKE DENSITY NOT TO EXCEED 450 WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITHI.B.C. STANDARDS.11. PROVIDE BLOCKING BEHIND WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOPS AND AS REQUIREDFOR MILLWORK. ALL MILLWORK SHALL COMPLY WITH A.W.I. "PREMIUMGRADE" STANDARDS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.12. ALL WORK (WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS) SHALL BE GUARANTEED (INWRITING) FOR PERIOD OF TWO YEARS AFTER DATE OF SUBSTANTIALARCHITECT :Hunt & Caraway Architects1747 E. Morten AvenueSuite# 306Phoenix, Arizona 85020 PH: (602) 595-8200CIVIL :Montgomery Engineering andManagement, L.L.C.16716 E. Parkview Ave.Suite 204Fountain Hills, Arizona 85268PH: (480) 837-1845FX: (480) 837-8668MPE :Maven Engineering230 W. Baseline #103Tempe, Arizona 85283PH: (480) 303-0180 ext. 102STRUCT. :Broderick Engineering6859 E. Rembrandt Ave., Ste 124Mesa, Arizona 85212PH: (480) 926-6333LANDSCAPE :Campbell Collaborative111 E Dunlap, Suite 1-278Phoenix, Arizona 85020PH: (602) 266-1644APPLICABLE CODES:2012 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC)2011 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC)2006 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE (IECC)2012 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE (IFC)2012 INTERNATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE (IFGC)2012 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE (IMC)2012 INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE (IPC)2010 A.D.A. ACCESSIBILITY GUILDLINES2006 ICCEXTENT OF WORK INCLUDES CONSTRUCTION OF A NEW FIRE STATION FORTHE TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS. THIS PROJECT INCLUDED NEW SITE GRADING,SLAB ON GRADE, METAL STUD WALLS WITH COMBINATION OF EIFS ANDHARDIE BOARD SYSTEMS. INTERIOR WALLS ARE METAL STUDS WITH GYPSUMBOARD AND GYPSUM BOARD OR SUSPENDED TILE CEILINGS. THE ROOF ISSPRAY FOAM ON FLAT ROOF LOCATIONS AND 3 PLY BUILT-UP AT SLOPEDROOF LOCATIONS. PREFINISHED METAL PANELS ARE USED AT SOFFITS ANDFASCIA LOCATIONS. NEW FINISHES, CASE WORK, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL,PLUMBING, FIRE SPRINKLER, AND SPECIAL SYSTEMS ARE INCLUDED. SEEPLANS FOR DETAILS.WORK PERFORMED OUTSIDE THE BUILDING WILL INCLUDE NEWLANDSCAPING, PARKING, FIRE LANE, AND SITE WALLS AND SIGNAGE.CIVIL DRAWINGSL2.0 IRRIGATION PLANL3.0 IRRIGATION DETAILSCOVER SHEETCOVER SHEETC1A7.1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONSENLARGED FLOOR PLANSA7.0SCHEDULESA8.0TRANSITION/DETAILSA8.5BUILDING SECTIONSA6.0LANDSCAPE DRAWINGSLANDSCAPE PLANL1.0ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGSANNOTATED FLOOR PLANA2.0DIMENSIONED FLOOR PLANA2.1REFLECTED CEILING PLANA3.0SITE PLANA1.0STRUCTURAL DRAWINGSFOUNDATION PLANS2.0ROOF FRAMING PLANS3.0MECHANICAL DRAWINGSMECHANICAL SCHEDULESM3.0MECHANICAL ROOF PLANM1.0MECHANICAL FLOOR PLANM2.0PLUMBING DRAWINGSPLUMBING ROOF PLANP0.1SCHEM. & PLUMBING SCHED.P2.0ELECTRICAL DRAWINGSELECTRIC SPECIFICATIONSE4.0C2C3TURN LANE PAVING PLANC5TURN LANE STRIPING PLANC4ROOF PLANA4.0EXTERIOR BUILDING ELEVATIONSA5.0Owner :Town of Fountain Hills16705 E. Avenue of FountainsFountain Hills, AZ 85268 PH: (480) 816-5100 FX: (480) 837-3145ELECTRIC SITE PLANE0.0ELECTRIC POWER PLANE2.0ELECTRIC ONE-LINE DIAGRAME3.0FIRE :EJ Engineering Group, Inc.21505 N. 78th Ave, Suite 125Peoria, Arizona 85382PH: (623) 362-1400 ext. 100SITE PLAN ENLARGEDOVERALL SITE PLANNATIVE PLANTNP 1.0STRUCTURAL NOTESS1.0STRUCTURAL NOTESS1.1TYPICAL DETAILSS1.2TYPICAL DETAILSS1.3TYPICAL DETAILSS1.4FOUNDATION DETAILSS4.0FOUNDATION DETAILSS5.0FRAMING DETAILSS5.1MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSM4.0PLUMBING DETAILP3.0PHOTOMETIC PLANE0.1LIGHTING CUT SHEETSE0.2ELECTRIC LIGHTING PLANE1.0LIFE SAFETY PLANA0.1SITE DETAILSA1.1REFLECTED CEILING DETAILSA3.1ROOF PLAN DETAILSA4.1EXTERIOR BUILDING ELEVATIONSA5.1WALL TYPES AND DETAILSA6.3STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLANSWPPP1STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLANSWPPP2THIS BUILDING COMPLIES WITH THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT AND IS DESIGNED TO BEACCESIBLE TO AND USABLE BY PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES.MAX. TRAVEL DISTANCE FOR FULLY FIRE -SPRINKLED BUILDING IS 250 FEET MAX.USE: FIRE STATIONOCCUPANCY: B, R-2 & S-2CONSTRUCTION TYPE: V-BMAX BUILDING HEIGHT: 2 STORY, 40'-0" HSEPARATION REQUIRED: ZERO; NON-SEPARATED USES, FULLY FIRE SPRINKLED PER 508.3.2ALLOWABLE BUILDING AREA: GROUP B = 9,000FRONTAGE INCREASE & + 4,500SPRINKLER INCREASE + 27,000TOTAL= 40,500 PER FLOORTOTAL BLDG AREA : = 9,424 < 40,500 = OKPROPOSED BUILDING HEIGHT: 1 STORY, 26'-6"MAXIMUM FLOOR AREA ALLOWANCES PER TABLE 1004.1.1TOTAL66 OCCUPANTSEGRESS WIDTH PER OCCUPANT SERVED PER TABLE 1005.1TOTAL OCCUPANT LOAD= 66 OCCUPANTS X 0.15 = 10 INCH REQ'D ; 288 INCH PROVIDEExit required per table 1019.1= 1 Emergency Exits Provided=7SITE DETAILSA1.2ROOF PLAN DETAILSA4.2WALL SECTIONSA6.2WALL SECTIONSA6.1FINISH PLANA8.1DOOR AND WINDOW ELEVATIONSA8.2DOOR AND FRAME DETAILSA8.3WINDOW DETAILSA8.4ADA DETAILSA9.0ELECTRIC POWER PLANE2.1SPECIAL SYSTEM PLANE2.2ELECTRIC ONE-LINE DIAGRAME3.1PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONSP4.0FOUNDATION DETAILSS4.1FRAMING DETAILSS5.2FIRE PROTECTIONFP COVER SHEETFP1.0FP FIRELINE REFERENCEFP1.1FP PIPING PLANFP2.0A7.2 INTERIOR ELEVATIONSPLUMBING FLOOR PLANP1.0GOODMANS FURNITUREOVERALL PLANSRP DRAWINGSMAIN LINE PLAN1DETAILS2FP RCPFP2.1FP SECTION & DETAILSFP3.0E. SHEA BLVDN . F OU N T A INHILLS B L V DN. FOUNTAIN HILLS BLVDPROJECT SITEFIREROCK COUNTRYE VILLAS DRN MUSKRAT LNBUFFALO DRN PINTO DRE MUSTANG DRE TREVINO DRE VENETIAN LNGENOA WAYE PALOMINO BLVD22CityComments6/14/17 WOODARD DELUXE 42D 74WOVAL TABLE W/ TRELLIS TOPPICNICC1C1C1C1C1C1 - WC121P MULTI-PURPOSE CHAIR, FLEXNET SEAT, FIXED ARMSC2 - WC420N CAPER STACKING CHAIR, FLEXNET SEAT, NO ARMSC2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C3C3C3C3 - WC410N CAPER STACKING CHAIR, MOLDED SEAT, NO ARMSC4 - WC420P CAPER STACKING CHAIR, FLEXTNET SEAT, FIXED ARMSC4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4CAPER CHAIRKEYPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICC1C1C1C1TABLE NICTTT T TTTTTTT TTTTTT TT TT TTTTTTTTTTTBBFTTTTBBFTBBFTTT BBF T T T T BBF T T T BBF T T T BBF T T T BBF T T T R EF .R EF .R EF .OCCUPANT 1S2A1-HOURESES1-HOUR1R-2B13KB36'-0"ESESESESES27 '-0"60'-0"OCCUPANT2SOCCUPANT164611OCCUPANTS1OCCUPANT1OCCUPANT 44OCCUPANT3OCCUPANT1620ES ESESBFEFEFEFEFEFEBB1186 SFApparatus Bay 11341221 SFApparatus Bay 21351250 SFApparatus Bay 3136156 SFStorage14059 SFMed Storage139150 SFSCBA138125 SFBiohazard137218 SFTurnouts13278 SFUnisex Restroom13180 SFLaundry13076 SFUnisex Restroom12972 SFUnisex Restroom128391 SFCorridor12729 SFEntry133110 SFDorm1237 SFST1257 SFST1247 SFST126114 SFDorm122114 SFDorm121114 SFDorm120114 SFDorm119113 SFDorm118409 SFFitness111100 SFOffice104102 SFOffice102166 SFEntry10060 SFUnisex Restroom10149 SFUnisex Restroom105247 SFCommunityRoom103167 SFTraining10618 SFFR10742 SFMechanical10834 SFIT109264 SFCorridor110529 SFKitchen113316 SFDayroom11211 SFST11411 SFST11511 SFST116316 SFCorridor117OCCUPANTS3OCCUPANT3OCCUPANT10OCCUPANT1OCCUPANT1OCCUPANT1OCCUPANT1OCCUPANT1OCCUPANT4OCCUPANT4OCCUPANT4TOTAL OCCUPANT LOAD66OCCUPANT 1OCCUPANT 1SSKEYPAD/ACCESSCONTROLKEYPAD/ACCESSCONTROLKEYPAD/ACCESSCONTROLKEYPAD/ACCESSCONTROLKEYPAD/ACCESSCONTROLSEMI RECESSED FIRE EXTINGUISHERCABINET W/ FIRE RATED TUB - HOURRATING SHALL BE AS REQUIRED BYWALLRATING - INSTALL PER MFRSRECOMMENDATIONSRECESSED FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETW/ FIRE RATED TUB - HOUR RATINGSHALLBE AS REQUIRED BY WALL RATING -INSTALL PER MFRS RECOMMENDATIONSRECESSED FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET-INSTALL PER MFRS RECOMMENDATIONSSEMI RECESSED FIREEXTINGUISHERCABINET - INSTALL PER MFRSRECOMMENDATIONSDETAIL "A"DETAIL "B"DETAIL "C"DETAIL "D"2x4 BLOCKINGSEE PLANS AND WALLTYPESFIRE EXTINGUISHERCABINET ATTACHEDTO BLOCKINGPER MANUFACTURERSRECOMENDATIONS2x4 BLOCKINGSEE FLOOR PLANS AND WALLTYPESFIRE EXTINGUISHERCABINET ATTACHEDTO BLOCKINGPER MANUFACTURERSRECOMENDATIONSSECTIONPLAN VIEW54" MAX. A.F.F.ALL MOUNTING HOLES ARE5/16" ALARM WIRE OPENING(3) REAR TAMPER SWITCHMOUNTING HOLESRAPID ENTRY SYSTEMBACK ATTACHMENT PANELGRADE 8 BOLT OR EQUAL6"H x 6"W x 5"D RMK SHELL W/ MOUNTINGSTUDS TO ACCOMMODATE VAULTTAMPER SWITCH & WIRE TOBUILDING ALARM SYSTEMKNOX BOX VAULT OR EQUALNOTE: MOUNTING HEIGHT PER MANUFACTURERSEE FLOOR PLAN FOR WALL TYPEFACE WALLFACE WALLREINFORCING PER MANUF.RECOMMENDATIONS4"5"3 1/4"NOTE:1. BOX WITHOUT TAMPERSWITCHES, USE ALL HOLESFOR MOUNTING.2. KNOX BOX INSTALLATIONPER MESA FIRE DEPARTMENTDETAIL FPD 506.1 AND 506.1.13. HIEGHT MOUNTED NOLOWER THAN 5' AND NOHIGHER THAN 6'SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:17:17 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA0.1LIFE SAFETY16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2BUILDINGS DATA:SPACE DESIGNATED AS "S-2" OCCUPANCYMEANS OF EGRESS, PATH OF TRAVELFELEGEND: EXIT SIGN -SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS1. FIRE ALARM DRAWINGS & SPRINKLER SYSTEMS HAVE BEEN PROVIDED IN THIS BUILDINGDESIGN & CALCULATIONS. FIRE SUBMITTAL TO BE MADE BY CONTRACTOR FOR REVIEW BYTHE BUILDING OFFICIAL FOR THE CITY FIRE MARSHAL FOR APPROVAL.2. EXIT SIGN AND TACTILE EXIT SIGNAGE LOCATED IN THE FIELD SHALL BE VERIFIED BY THEARCHITECT AND ENGINEER BEFORE PLACEMENT AND IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE BASED ONEXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS PER 2006 IBC SECTION 1011.GENERAL NOTES:EXIT W/ MAXIMUM 240 OCCUPANT ALLOWABLE DISCHARGE -SINGLE 3'-0" X 7'-0" DOORWAY WITH PANIC HARDWAREEXIT W/ MAXIMUM 480 OCCUPANT ALLOWABLE DISCHARGE -DOUBLE 6'-0" X 7'-0" DOORWAY WITH PANIC HARDWARENEW FIRE EXTINGUISHER & CABINET TO BESEMI-RECESSED -SEE DETAIL 1 & 2/A0.1KBKNOX BOX -SEE DETAIL 3/A0.1SPACE DESIGNATED AS "B" OCCUPANCYSMOKE BARRIER @ STORAGE ROOMS OVER 100 S.F & VOCATIONALLABS1 HR SEPARATION NOT REQUIRED - AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHINGSYSTEM PROVIDED. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE CAPABLE OFRESISTING THE PASSAGE OF SMOKE. THE PARTITIONS SHALL EXTENDFROM THE FLOOR TO UNDERSIDE OF FLOOR/ROOF DECK ABOVE, SEEDETAIL 2/A6.5. DOORS SHALL BE SELF-CLOSING UPON DETECTION OFSMOKE & SHALL NOT HAVE AIR TRANSFER OPENINGS.1" HIGH RED LETTERS ON 4"X12" WHITE PLASTIC BACKGROUND.ROOM CAPACITY SIGNS:PUBLIC AREA MAXIMUMOCCUPANCY - 18 OCCUPANTSAES TACTILE SIGN STATING "EXIT" AND COMPLYING W/ ICC A117.11" HIGH RED LETTERS ON 4"X12" WHITE PLASTIC BACKGROUND.S DOOR CLOSURE AND SMOKE SEAL 3/4" = 1'-0"1Fire Extinguisher Cabinet 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2Fire Extinguisher Mounting 3" = 1'-0"3Knox Box ConnectionTHIS BUILDING COMPLIES WITH THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT AND IS DESIGNED TO BEACCESIBLE TO AND USABLE BY PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES.MAX. TRAVEL DISTANCE FOR FULLY FIRE -SPRINKLED BUILDING IS 250 FEET MAX.USE: FIRE STATIONOCCUPANCY: B, R-2 & S-2CONSTRUCTION TYPE: V-BMAX BUILDING HEIGHT: 2 STORY, 40'-0" HSEPARATION REQUIRED: ZERO; NON-SEPARATED USES, FULLY FIRE SPRINKLED PER 508.3.2ALLOWABLE BUILDING AREA: GROUP B = 9,000FRONTAGE INCREASE & + 4,500SPRINKLER INCREASE + 27,000TOTAL= 40,500 PER FLOORTOTAL BLDG AREA : = 9,424 < 40,500 = OKPROPOSED BUILDING HEIGHT: 1 STORY, 26'-6"MAXIMUM FLOOR AREA ALLOWANCES PER TABLE 1004.1.1TOTAL66 OCCUPANTSEGRESS WIDTH PER OCCUPANT SERVED PER TABLE 1005.1TOTAL OCCUPANT LOAD= 66 OCCUPANTS X 0.15 = 10 INCH REQ'D ; 288 INCH PROVIDEExit required per table 1019.1= 1Emergency Exits Provided=7SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"LIFE SAFETY FLOOR PLANNSPACE DESIGNATED AS "R-2" OCCUPANCY11 City Comments 6/2/17 WOODARD DELUXE 42D 74WOVAL TABLE W/ TRELLIS TOPPICNICC1C1C1C1C1C1 - WC121P MULTI-PURPOSE CHAIR, FLEXNET SEAT, FIXED ARMSC2 - WC420N CAPER STACKING CHAIR, FLEXNET SEAT, NO ARMSC2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C3C3C3C3 - WC410N CAPER STACKING CHAIR, MOLDED SEAT, NO ARMSC4 - WC420P CAPER STACKING CHAIR, FLEXTNET SEAT, FIXED ARMSC4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4CAPER CHAIRKEYPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICC1C1C1C1TABLE NICTTT T TTTTTTT TT T TT TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTBBFTTTTBBFT BBFTTT BBF T T T T BBF T T T BBF T T T BBF T T T BBF T T T R EF .R EF .R EF .OCCUPANT 1S2A1-HOURESES1-HOUR1R-2B13KB36'-0"ESESESESES27 '-0"60'-0"OCCUPANT2SOCCUPANT164611OCCUPANTS1OCCUPANT1OCCUPANT 44OCCUPANT3OCCUPANT1620ES ESESBFEFEFEFEFEFEBB1186 SFApparatus Bay 11341221 SFApparatus Bay 21351250 SFApparatus Bay 3136157 SFStorage14059 SFMed Storage139150 SFSCBA138125 SFTurnout Laundry137218 SFTurnouts13278 SFUnisex Restroom13180 SFLaundry13076 SFUnisex Restroom12972 SFUnisex Restroom128391 SFCorridor12729 SFEntry133110 SFDorm1237 SFST1257 SFST1247 SFST126114 SFDorm122114 SFDorm121114 SFDorm120114 SFDorm119113 SFDorm118409 SFFitness111100 SFOffice104102 SFOffice102166 SFEntry10060 SFUnisex Restroom10149 SFUnisex Restroom105247 SFCommunityRoom103167 SFTraining10618 SFFR10742 SFMechanical10834 SFIT109264 SFCorridor110529 SFKitchen113316 SFDayroom11211 SFST11411 SFST11511 SFST116316 SFCorridor117OCCUPANTS3OCCUPANT3OCCUPANT10OCCUPANT1OCCUPANT1OCCUPANT1OCCUPANT1OCCUPANT1OCCUPANT4OCCUPANT4OCCUPANT4TOTAL OCCUPANT LOAD66OCCUPANT 1OCCUPANT 1SSKEYPAD/ACCESSCONTROLKEYPAD/ACCESSCONTROLKEYPAD/ACCESSCONTROLKEYPAD/ACCESSCONTROLKEYPAD/ACCESSCONTROLSEMI RECESSED FIRE EXTINGUISHERCABINET W/ FIRE RATED TUB - HOURRATING SHALL BE AS REQUIRED BYWALLRATING - INSTALL PER MFRSRECOMMENDATIONSRECESSED FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETW/ FIRE RATED TUB - HOUR RATINGSHALLBE AS REQUIRED BY WALL RATING -INSTALL PER MFRS RECOMMENDATIONSRECESSED FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET-INSTALL PER MFRS RECOMMENDATIONSSEMI RECESSED FIREEXTINGUISHERCABINET - INSTALL PER MFRSRECOMMENDATIONSDETAIL "A"DETAIL "B"DETAIL "C"DETAIL "D"2x4 BLOCKINGSEE PLANS AND WALLTYPESFIRE EXTINGUISHERCABINET ATTACHEDTO BLOCKINGPER MANUFACTURERSRECOMENDATIONS2x4 BLOCKINGSEE FLOOR PLANS AND WALLTYPESFIRE EXTINGUISHERCABINET ATTACHEDTO BLOCKINGPER MANUFACTURERSRECOMENDATIONSSECTIONPLAN VIEW54" MAX. A.F.F.ALL MOUNTING HOLES ARE5/16" ALARM WIRE OPENING(3) REAR TAMPER SWITCHMOUNTING HOLESRAPID ENTRY SYSTEMBACK ATTACHMENT PANELGRADE 8 BOLT OR EQUAL6"H x 6"W x 5"D RMK SHELL W/ MOUNTINGSTUDS TO ACCOMMODATE VAULTTAMPER SWITCH & WIRE TOBUILDING ALARM SYSTEMKNOX BOX VAULT OR EQUALNOTE: MOUNTING HEIGHT PER MANUFACTURERSEE FLOOR PLAN FOR WALL TYPEFACE WALLFACE WALLREINFORCING PER MANUF.RECOMMENDATIONS4"5"3 1/4"NOTE:1. BOX WITHOUT TAMPERSWITCHES, USE ALL HOLESFOR MOUNTING.2. KNOX BOX INSTALLATIONPER MESA FIRE DEPARTMENTDETAIL FPD 506.1 AND 506.1.13. HIEGHT MOUNTED NOLOWER THAN 5' AND NOHIGHER THAN 6'SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/14/2017 4:09:46 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA0.1LIFE SAFETY16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/14/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2BUILDINGS DATA:SPACE DESIGNATED AS "S-2" OCCUPANCYMEANS OF EGRESS, PATH OF TRAVELFELEGEND: EXIT SIGN -SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS1. FIRE ALARM DRAWINGS & SPRINKLER SYSTEMS HAVE BEEN PROVIDED IN THIS BUILDINGDESIGN & CALCULATIONS. FIRE SUBMITTAL TO BE MADE BY CONTRACTOR FOR REVIEW BYTHE BUILDING OFFICIAL FOR THE CITY FIRE MARSHAL FOR APPROVAL.2. EXIT SIGN AND TACTILE EXIT SIGNAGE LOCATED IN THE FIELD SHALL BE VERIFIED BY THEARCHITECT AND ENGINEER BEFORE PLACEMENT AND IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE BASED ONEXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS PER 2006 IBC SECTION 1011.GENERAL NOTES:EXIT W/ MAXIMUM 240 OCCUPANT ALLOWABLE DISCHARGE -SINGLE 3'-0" X 7'-0" DOORWAY WITH PANIC HARDWAREEXIT W/ MAXIMUM 480 OCCUPANT ALLOWABLE DISCHARGE -DOUBLE 6'-0" X 7'-0" DOORWAY WITH PANIC HARDWARENEW FIRE EXTINGUISHER & CABINET TO BESEMI-RECESSED -SEE DETAIL 1 & 2/A0.1KBKNOX BOX -SEE DETAIL 3/A0.1SPACE DESIGNATED AS "B" OCCUPANCYSMOKE BARRIER @ STORAGE ROOMS OVER 100 S.F & VOCATIONALLABS1 HR SEPARATION NOT REQUIRED - AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHINGSYSTEM PROVIDED. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE CAPABLE OFRESISTING THE PASSAGE OF SMOKE. THE PARTITIONS SHALL EXTENDFROM THE FLOOR TO UNDERSIDE OF FLOOR/ROOF DECK ABOVE, SEEDETAIL 2/A6.5. DOORS SHALL BE SELF-CLOSING UPON DETECTION OFSMOKE & SHALL NOT HAVE AIR TRANSFER OPENINGS.1" HIGH RED LETTERS ON 4"X12" WHITE PLASTIC BACKGROUND.ROOM CAPACITY SIGNS:PUBLIC AREA MAXIMUMOCCUPANCY - 18 OCCUPANTSAES TACTILE SIGN STATING "EXIT" AND COMPLYING W/ ICC A117.11" HIGH RED LETTERS ON 4"X12" WHITE PLASTIC BACKGROUND.S DOOR CLOSURE AND SMOKE SEAL 3/4" = 1'-0"1Fire Extinguisher Cabinet 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2Fire Extinguisher Mounting 3" = 1'-0"3Knox Box ConnectionTHIS BUILDING COMPLIES WITH THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT AND IS DESIGNED TO BEACCESIBLE TO AND USABLE BY PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES.MAX. TRAVEL DISTANCE FOR FULLY FIRE -SPRINKLED BUILDING IS 250 FEET MAX.USE: FIRE STATIONOCCUPANCY: B, R-2 & S-2CONSTRUCTION TYPE: V-BMAX BUILDING HEIGHT: 2 STORY, 40'-0" HSEPARATION REQUIRED: ZERO; NON-SEPARATED USES, FULLY FIRE SPRINKLED PER 508.3.2ALLOWABLE BUILDING AREA: GROUP B = 9,000FRONTAGE INCREASE & + 4,500SPRINKLER INCREASE + 27,000TOTAL= 40,500 PER FLOORTOTAL BLDG AREA : = 9,424 < 40,500 = OKPROPOSED BUILDING HEIGHT: 1 STORY, 26'-6"MAXIMUM FLOOR AREA ALLOWANCES PER TABLE 1004.1.1TOTAL66 OCCUPANTSEGRESS WIDTH PER OCCUPANT SERVED PER TABLE 1005.1TOTAL OCCUPANT LOAD= 66 OCCUPANTS X 0.15 = 10 INCH REQ'D ; 288 INCH PROVIDEExit required per table 1019.1= 1 Emergency Exits Provided=7SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"LIFE SAFETY FLOOR PLANNSPACE DESIGNATED AS "R-2" OCCUPANCY11 City Comments 6/2/172 City Comments 6/14/172 NNPROPOSED 6" DIP W53 51515249505048464442GBLOT 9ENDPVMT0+000+501+001+502+002+503+003+5030'S.B.40' B.S.B. EX GATE & POSTS S T O R A G E80' S S S S S S TELTELCOXEE17301 740 173017261 7 3 4 1 7 2 8 1732173417361738EX 6"WW1 2" W4" W16"W1 6 ' W 24" WWWVWVWV20.0'15.0'L4L2C1108.41'(R)N33°52'02"WW6"FF 1740176017601750TOET OP GBGBGBTOP GB GBTO P GBGBTOPGB G BTOPGB1748 174617541756175817561758 176217641764 17621752175417561 75 8 17481746174417421742 1742545454535260625856GB6050.0PROPOSEDWOODARD DELUXE 42D 74WOVAL TABLE W/ TRELLIS TOPPICNICC1C1C1C1C1C1 - WC121P MULTI-PURPOSE CHAIR, FLEXNET SEAT, FIXED ARMSC2 - WC420N CAPER STACKING CHAIR, FLEXNET SEAT, NO ARMSC2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C3C3C3C3 - WC410N CAPER STACKING CHAIR, MOLDED SEAT, NO ARMSC4 - WC420P CAPER STACKING CHAIR, FLEXTNET SEAT, FIXED ARMSC4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4CAPER CHAIRKEYPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICC1C1C1C1TABLE NICTTT T T TTTTTT T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T TTTTTBBFTTTTBBFTBBF T T T BBF T T TT BBF T T T BBF T T T BBF T T T BBF T T T---A5.0A5.01449101210' - 5"TSCSCS E S GEN14141717252510' - 0"23' - 1 1/4"A1.112A7.120A7.119A7.125A7.118A7.117A7.2A7.2A7.2A7.2A7.2A7.289A7.265111210A7.2141312347SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:18:50 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA1.0SITE PLAN16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #20SCALE: 1:2020' 40' 80'160'SCALE: 1" = 20'-0"Site Plan OverallELECTRICAL TRANSFORMERUTILITY EQUIPMENT. PROVID 4"CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PAD6" LARGER THAN EQUIP.FOOTPRINTWATER / IRRIGATION EQUIPMENTSITE / FIRE LANE SIGNAGE PERREGULATORY REQUIREMENTSPARKING / SITE LIGHTING POLEW/ 2' DIA. X 30" HIGH RAISED CONCRETEBASE - SEE ELEC. PLANSFIRE HYDRANT LOCATIONLIGHT BOLLARD FIXTURE - SEE ELEC. SITEPLANSFIRE LANE ACCESS ROAD.SHADE WIDTH 12'.ACCESSIBLE EGRESS AND EXIT WAYNEW 20'-0" ACCESS GATEFIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION -SEE CIVIL PLANSFDCKNOX BOX LOCATION -COORDINATE WITH FIRE MARSHALKBPANIC DEVICE AT ACCESS GATE- SEE DETAIL 6/AS1.4PLEGENDNEW ASPHALT PARKING ANDDRIVEWAYNEW CONCRETE SIDEWALK / SITE AMENITIESKEYNOTES - SEE THIS SHEETXNEW DECOMPOSED GRANITE AND DESERTLANDSCAPINGPROPERTY LINE AND PRELIM SET BACKNEW BUILDINGE. SHEA BLVDN . F OU N T A IN H IL L S B L V DN. FOUNTAIN HILLS BLVDPROJECT SITEFIREROCK COUNTRYE VILLAS DRN MUSKRAT LNBUFFALO DRN PINTO DRE MUSTANG DRE TREVINO DRE VENETIAN LNGENOA WAYE PALOMINO BLVDVICINITY MAPKEYNOTES:1234567891011161718192015212223121314GENERAL NOTES:CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS ANDCONDITIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION AND/OR FABRICATION.1.2. CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT FIRE ALARM SYSTEM TOTOWN FIRE DEPARTMENT FOR APPROVAL.CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ADA SLOPE FOR SIDEWALKCONNECTING ENTRY POINTS TO EXISTING SIDEWALK.CONTRACTOR IS TO PROVIDE WRITTEN NOTIFICATION IFGRADES ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. CONTRACTOR TOREFERENCE CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR GRADING AND DRAINAGE.3.SEE SHEET AS1.4 - AS1.9 FOR SITE DETAILS. PLACECONSTRUCTION SIGN AT FRONT ENTRY TO THE PROJECTFOR VIEWING.4.LOCK BOX (KNOX BOX) SHALL BE PROVIDED AT ALL EXTERIORGATES THAT ARE LOCKABLE. SEE HARDWARESPECIFICATIONS FOR LOCK BOX TYPE. PROVIDE TOTAL OF(12). CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE SPECIFIC LOCATIONSWITH FIRE MARSHAL PRIOR TO FINAL CITY INSPECTION. SEENOTE 10/AS1.65.ALL FIRE LANE GATES ARE MANUAL AND MUST HAVEMINIMUM OF 20 FEET (UNOBSTRUCTED) WIDTH IN THE 90DEGREE OPEN POSITION. SEE HARDWARE SET 55 FORPADLOCKS.6.INSTALL ALL STRIPING/PAVEMENT PAINTING/ SIGNAGE PERGOVERNING ORDINANCES. COORDINATE W/ CIVIL PLANS.7.SPECIAL SITE SOIL CONDITIONS EXIST. REFER TO CIVILSPECIFICATIONS & PLANS FOR SPECIFIC SITE CONCRETETHICKNESS & REINFORCEMENT METHODS. SEE STRUCT.PLANS FOR SLAB ON GRADE CONDITIONS, TYP.8.EXISTING PLANTS - SEE LANDSCAPEDG - SEE LANDSCAPE DRAWINGSPROPERTY LINE - SEE CIVILCAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE STAIR W/ PAINTEDSTEEL RAILING/HANDRAIL - SEE DETAIL 1/A1.1PARKING LOT W/ PAINTED STRIPING - SEE CIVILDRAWINGS8'-0" C.M.U. WALL - SEE DETAIL 9/A1.1FLAG POLE - SEE DETAIL 12/A1.1ASPHALT DRIVEWAY - SEE CIVIL DRAWINGSCONCRETE SIDEWALK AND MEDIUM BROOM FINISH TYP- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGSSITE BUILDINGS - SEE PLANS12'-0" METAL PERF. TRASH ENCLOSURE GATEHW - SEE DETAIL 10/A1.1CONCRETE SIGN AND GABION WALL - 12'-0" X 1'-0" X 1'-0"6" CONCRETE VERTICAL CURB - SEE CIVILDRAWINGS - SEE DETAIL4'-0" CMU RETAINING WALL - SEE DETAIL9/A1.1 - SEE STRUCTURAL6'-0" CMU RETAINING WALL - SEE DETAIL9/A1.1 - SEE STRUCTURALADA PARKING STALL - SEE DETAIL 2/A1.16" CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER - SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS- SEE DETAILFIRE HYDRANT - SEE CIVIL DRAWINGSCONCRETE WALK EDGE AT ASPHALT - SEE DETAIL2442" TUBE STEEL GUARD RAIL W/ WELDED WIRE MESHINSET PANELS AT 5'-0" O.C. -SEE DETAIL 5/A1.2ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT - SEE ELECTRICAL2'-0" CMU RETAINING WALL W/ 4'-0" CMU SITERETAINING WALL - SEE DETAIL 9/A1.1 AND STRUCT.CONCRETE DRIVEWAY - SEE CIVILCONCRETE BUMPER - SEE CIVIL256" PIPE BOLLARDS - SEE DETAIL 11/A1.126HANDRAIL - SEE CIVIL11111111111 City Comments 6/2/17 A1.13A1.123'-0"1'-6"2'-0"TYP5'-0" 6'-0"6'-0"6'-0"EQ. EQ.4'-0"18'-0"5'-0"9'-0" 10'-0"CONCRETE SIDEWALK ATPAVEMENT LEVEL4" YELLOW PAINTSTRIPE (TYP.)PAVEMENTSYMBOL OFACCESSIBILITYPAINTED ONPAVEMENTSLOPED SURFACEWITH TRUNCATEDDOMES PER ADAAG4.29.5CONCRETESIDEWALK ATPAVEMENT LEVEL2% MAXSLOPE2% MAXSLOPEEQ.ACCESSIBLEPARKING SIGNAGENOTESSYMBOL TO BE LOCATED IN THECENTER OF THE PARKING SPACENEAR STALL ENTRANCEPAINTED BLUE BACKGROUNDTWO COATS TRAFFICWHITEPAINTINTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OFACCESSIBILITY PAINTEDWHITE5'-0"3"3"5'-0"1.516".625"4"MIN.1.250"60" MIN.30"5/16" x 2" CADPLATED BOLT(2 PER SIGN)U-CHANNEL POST IMBED INPIPE BOLLARD -PER TOWNOF FOUNTAIN HILLSSTANDARDPAVEMENTINSTALL ONLY ONVANACCESSIBLE SPACESPARKINGRESERVEDPARKINGRESERVEDSECTION A-A2" LEGEND, 4" SYMBOLGREEN LEGEND ANDBORDER, WHITE SYMBOL ONBLUE BACKGROUND ONWHITE MAJORBACKGROUND.ACCESSIBLE12"x6"VAN12"x18"AVANAACCESSIBLE6" DIA. X 3' H SCHE. 40STEEL PIPE BOLLARD - GROUTSOLID. POWDER COAT PAINT FINISHW/ 6" RETROREFLECTIVE ENG. TAPE* NOTE :1. ALL EXPOSED STEEL TO BE POWDER COAT WITH APPROVED TNEMEC PAINTOR TIGER DRYLAC IN DARK BRONZE OR STAINLESS STEEL INCLUDING BACK OFSIGNAGE.2. UNDER SEPERATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL3. HANDICAPPED PARKING SIGN TO BE PER THE 2003 ICC/ANSI A117.1 SECTION307.3.2" LEGEND, 4" SYMBOLGREEN LEGEND ANDBORDER, WHITE SYMBOL ONBLUE BACKGROUND ONWHITE MAJORBACKGROUND.18"x12"18"x24"NO SMOKINGPROVIDE VERBIAGE INENGLISH ANDSPANISH.NO FUMARNO DRUGSNO DROGASNO WEAPONSNO ARMASNOTE: CONTRACTOR TO LOCATE (4) SIGNS AS INDICATED BY OWNER* NOTE :1. ALL EXPOSED STEEL TO BE POWDER COAT WITH APPROVED TNEMEC PAINT OR TIGER DRYLAC IN DARK BRONZE OR STAINLESS STEEL INCLUDING BACK OF SIGNAGE.2. UNDER SEPERATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL3. WALL MOUNTED - VERIFY LOCATION W/ ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION4. PROVIDE NO SMOKING SIGN AT ALL PUBLIC ENTRANCES PROVIDE 3" LETTERSOR SYMBOL PER TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLSMIN 12" DIA.CONCRETEENCASEMENTTRAFFIC DUTY SEALANT &EXPANSION JOINTMATERIALMIN 3" CONCRETE COVER6" DIA. x 10'-0" SCHEDULE 40 STEELPIPE BOLLARD - GROUT SOLIDPOWDER COAT PAINT FINISHADJACENT CONCRETESLABOVER ABCGROUTED CROWN6" RETROREFLECTIVEENGINEER'S TAPE PERMAG DETAIL 1404'-0"3" CLR6'-0"6"1'-0"CENTERINGWEDGESSTEEL PLATEGROUNDINGROD30' HIGH FLAG POLE - SEESPECIFICATIONSWATERPROOF CEMENTSEALANTSLOPE 1/2" PER FOOT FROMCOLLARFLASHCOLLARSCREENEDDRY SANDFINISH GRADENOTE:1. CONTRACTOR TO SUBMITSEALED ENGINEEREDDRAWINGS AND DETAILSFOR APPROVAL. COORDINATE POLEW/ ELEC. REQUIREMENTS FOR POLEMOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE.2. LED LIGHTING ONLY3. POWDER COAT FINISH W/APPROVED TNEMEC PAINT OR TIGERDRYLAC IN DARK BRONZE ORSTAINLESS STEEL PAINT FINISH4. INTERNAL HALYARD SYSTEMMIN 2"PER. PRODUCT SPEC.VERIFYW/ MANUF9' - 4".11' - 4"1' - 0".2' - 8" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" .2' - 8"8"8"30' CLEAR APPROACH12'-6" CLEAR OPENING6' - 0"12' - 6"2' - 0"8"8"8" CMU BLOCK OR STUCCO TO MATCH BUILDING4" DIA. STEEL BOLLARDS1/2" EXPANSION JOINT5' - 0"A1.38(3) HEAVY DUTY(GUARDIAN) GATEHINGES PER SIDE. SEESPEC 02447.4"x4" TUBE STEEL GATEFRAME (TOP, BOTTOMANDSIDES).POST FOOTINGS.18 GAUGE CORRUGATED, PEFORATEDMETAL PANELS - WELD WITHIN FRAMEOF T.S. GATE.2"x2" TUBE STEELINTERMEDIATE POSTWELD FLUSH W/YARDSIDE OF GATE4"x4" TUBE STEELGATEPOST W/ WELDED CAP.1. AT FIRELANES: PROVIDE 2 LENGTHS OF VINYL-CLAD CHAIN PER PAIR OF GATES, 2 PADLOCKSHARDWARE 43 - ONE KEYED TO OWNERS KEYING SYSTEM AND ONE KEYED TO FIREDEPARTMENT SYSTEM. INSTALL KEY BOX, WITH FIRE DEPT. SPECS. AT EACH GATELOCATION.2. ALL EXPOSED STEEL TO BE POWDER COAT WITH APPROVED TNEMEC PAINT OR TIGERDRYLAC IN DARK BRONZE OR STAINLESS STEEL PAINT FINISHNOTE:0' - 6"6' - 0".11' - 4"Fountain HillsFire Station #2Fountain Hills, ArizonaXXXMemberXXXMemberHunt & Caraway ArchitectsGeneral ContractorArchitects and Planners General ContractorMonth 2017VERIFY DATE FOR PLAQUE ATCONSTRUCTION.ALUMINUM PLAQUE:BACKGROUND: SATIN FINISHLETTERSTYLE: BLACK -PALATINO BOLDBORDER & LOGO: POLISHEDALUMINUMMOUNTING: CONCEALED STUDSFOR STUCCORAISED BORDERNOTE:1. CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT SIGNAGE TO TOWNOF FOUNTAIN HILLS FOR APPROVAL AND PERMIT.SIGNAGE INDICATED HEREWITHIN IS NOTINCLUDED IN BUILDING PERMIT.2. PROVIDE SUBMITTALS FOR APPROVAL PRIORTO FABRICATION.DIM. TO TOP OF LETTER TYP.XXXMemberCONTRACTOR TO VERIFY WITHOWNER3"2"1"1"4"1"2'-0"2'-0"3/4"3/8 3/86"1 1/2"1 1/2"3"HEAVY DUTY (GUARDIAN)GATE HINGES.TUBE STEEL GATE POSTPER GATE TYPE - SEEMETAL PANEL FILLERTUBE STEEL GATESITE PLAN AND DETAILSW/ WELDED CAP.4' - 0"4"SEE STRUCT.7' - 6"10' - 0"8" CMU WALL W/ STONEVENEER AND CAP ALLSIDES -SEESTRUCTURAL7" HIGH 2" RAISEDALUMINUM LETTERS -COLOR AS SELECTEDBY OWNER1' - 0"1' - 4"1' - 8"2' - 6"2' - 0"14" WIDE CAST-INPLACE DECORATIVECONCRETE ELEMENT-SEE STRUCTURALCONCRETE FOOTINGS-SEE STRUCTURAL6'-0" & 8'-0"T.O.M. - SEE CIVILPAINTED 8x8x16 CMUCONCRETE FOOTING &MASONRY STEM WALL-SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGSFOR DETAILS4" SOLID CAP BLOCKDOWELLED AT ENDSWEEP HOLES AS REQUIREDPER STRUCTURALSEE CIVILSEE STRUCTURALSEE STRUCTURALSEE STRUCTURALSEE STRUCTURALSEE STRUCTURALSHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:20:20 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA1.1Site Details16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 1/8" = 1'-0"1SITE-ADA PARKING STALLTYPICAL 3/4" = 1'-0"2SITE-SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY 1/2" = 1'-0"3SITE-RESERVED PARKINGSIGNAGE 1/2" = 1'-0"4SITE-NODRUGS-TOBACCO-WEAPONS 3/4" = 1'-0"10SITE-PIPE BOLLARD 1 1/2" = 1'-0"11SITE-FLAG POLE BASE 1/8" = 1'-0"7SITE-REFUSE ENCLOSURE 1/4" = 1'-0"9SITE - REFUSE GATE 1 1/2" = 1'-0"5SITE-COMMEMORATIVE CASTPLAQUE 3" = 1'-0"6SITE-GATE POST DETAIL 1/4" = 1'-0"12Entry Sign Detail 1/2" = 1'-0"8SITE- RETAINING WALL111 City Comments 6/2/17 TOP BENT STEELGUIDE PLATE1/8" THICK OPENFRAME AND POST.3/8" CLEAR FORSLIDING STRAP.OR POST TOGATE FRAME ANDWELDED TO EACHBENT STEEL TAB1/4x2 1/2x0'-2 1/2"TO GRADE4'-0"FROM CITY FIREKNOX PADLOCKPROVIDE BY2"PICKETGATE GATEFRAME FRAME (OR POST)GATEPICKET FENCEGATE OR2 1/2"1 1/2"PADLOCK2 3/16"1/4"1"1/4"WELDED TO THE2 1/2"TO 1 1/4" AND GRIND SMOOTH.STRAP WITH 3/4" DIAM HOLE1/4" THICK STEEL SLIDINGAT EACH END. RADIUS ENDSDEPARTMENTCONTRACTOR.RECEIVE LOCK.BEYOND.ANGLED TABRADIUS ANDDRILL TAB TOMATCH STRAP.NOTE: PROVIDE HAND OPENING AT GATES FORPASS THRU ACCESS @ BOTH LOCKS, TYP.T.S. TRAFFIC GATE INCLOSED POSITION.4"x4" TUBE STEEL POST.HEAVY DUTY GATE HINGESPIPE BOLLARDWITH CHAIN AND LOCKCONT. WELD AT EDGESALLOWING 180° GATE SWING.T.S. TRAFFIC GATE INOPEN POSITION.CANE BOLTSTEEL SLEEVE 1" INSIDE DIA.GUIDE BRACKETGUIDE STAPLE & HASPCANE BOLT 3/4" DIA.5/16" HOLDING PLATE W/HOLE TO RECEIVE PADLOCKWELD TO GATEGATE WHEELVERIFY W/WHEEL MFR.PIVOTING RUBBER WHEEL - TYP.EACH GATE PANEL PROVIDE WITHSWIVEL PER MFR'S SPECS.3"GATE PANEL FRAMENOTE:PROVIDE SLEEVE FOR CANE BOLT INPAVEMENT FOR CLOSED AND 120°OPEN POSITIONS - TYPICALBOLT REST1/2" DIA. PADLOCK HOLE2'-0"4 1/2"4"4"3"2"3"3/4"* PROVIDE HAND OPENING @GATES FOR PASS THRUACCESS TO LOCKS1/2" RADIUS -TYP.CONCRETE STAIRONGRADE - REFER TOSTRUCTURAL1/2" EXPANSIONJOINT FILLERMATERIALCONCRETE WITHNONSLIP METALINSERTS - TYP.CONCRETESIDEWALK2 TREADS AT 1'-0" EA. - SEE CIVIL1'-0"1"0' - 6"0' - 6"0' - 6"1' - 0" MIN.34"-38".1 1/2" DIA. METALPIPE HANDRAIL -TYP.3" SQ. TUBE INTERMEDIATEPOST- PAINTED2" SQ. TUBE RAILS - TOP ANDBOTTOM - PAINTED2" SQ. TUBE RAILS - TOP ANDBOTTOM - PAINTEDNOTE: PROVIDE WELDEDPAINTED CAPS AT ALLPOSTS4"42" @ GUARDRAIL8'-0" O.C. MAX1.5" STEEL ANGLE WELDED TO POSTWELDED WIRE AT CENTERW/ 1" STEEL BAR WELDED OPPOSITESIDEPAINTED WELDED WIREGALVANIZED FENCE1.5X1.5" 14 GA.1" STEEL BAR WELDED FOR CENTERSUPPORT2' - 3"3"3" TYP.SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:20:55 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA1.2Site Details16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 3" = 1'-0"2SITE-DOUBLE PADLOCK DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3SITE - SECTION @ GATE POST 1" = 1'-0"4SITE - CANE BOLT & GATEWHEEL 3/4" = 1'-0"1Site - Concrete Steps 1/4" = 1'-0"5WELDED WIRE MESH FENCE WOODARD DELUXE 42D 74WOVAL TABLE W/ TRELLIS TOPPICNICC1C1C1C1C1C1 - WC121P MULTI-PURPOSE CHAIR, FLEXNET SEAT, FIXED ARMSC2 - WC420N CAPER STACKING CHAIR, FLEXNET SEAT, NO ARMSC2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C3 - WC410N CAPER STACKING CHAIR, MOLDED SEAT, NO ARMSC4 - WC420P CAPER STACKING CHAIR, FLEXTNET SEAT, FIXED ARMSC4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4CAPER CHAIRKEYPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICC1C1C1C1TABLE NICTTT T TTTTTTT TT T TTTT TTTTT TTTTTTBBFTTTTBBFTBBF T T T BBF T T T T BBF T T T BBF T T T BBF T T T BBF T T T R EF .R EF .R EF .A5.03A5.02A5.041A6.01A6.02A6.03A6.03A6.04A6.04A6.031333322222311111445789A7.113161514A7.01A7.02A7.03A7.04A7.0566103121191111111112131414151617161629172917171817171920202020202022232525262728292929292929292929292929292929292929136A137A138A139A136B136C135B135A134B134C131A130A129A128A117B134A132A127B117A123A122A121A120A119A118A113B113A110A109A108A107A103A105A101B104A111A102A100A101A112A111B110B127AA5.14A5.12292929292530303030A5.11A5.13A5.15A5.161186 SFApparatus Bay 11341221 SFApparatus Bay 21351250 SFApparatus Bay 3136156 SFStorage14059 SFMed Storage139150 SFSCBA138125 SFBiohazard137218 SFTurnouts13278 SFUnisex Restroom13180 SFLaundry13076 SFUnisex Restroom12972 SFUnisex Restroom128391 SFCorridor12729 SFEntry133110 SFDorm1237 SFST1257 SFST1247 SFST126114 SFDorm122114 SFDorm121114 SFDorm120114 SFDorm119113 SFDorm118409 SFFitness111100 SFOffice104102 SFOffice102166 SFEntry10060 SFUnisex Restroom10149 SFUnisex Restroom105247 SFCommunityRoom103167 SFTraining10618 SFFR10742 SFMechanical10834 SFIT109264 SFCorridor110529 SFKitchen113316 SFDayroom11211 SFST11411 SFST11511 SFST116316 SFCorridor117126A125A124A5A6.05A6.0132B137BAAABBBBBBJJACCDFFAAA3216161818181818181818186A6.025303030303030303030303030-A7.12341A7.19121110A7.1567832323232323226262626A7.13412A7.13412112B1 :1 2 S L O P E 116A115A114A12A1.112A7.120A7.119A7.125A7.118A7.117A7.2A7.2A7.2A7.25A6.2A7.2A7.289A7.2651112106A6.2A7.214134A6.2123477A6.02929SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:21:45 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA2.0ANNOTATEDFLOOR PLAN16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"ANNOTATED FLOOR PLANNGENERAL NOTES:1LEGEND:KEYNOTEWALL TYPE - SEE SHEETA6.6WINDOW TAG -SEE SHEET A8.7, A8.8 & A8.10DOOR TAG -SEE SHEET A8.5, A8.6 & A8.91AA100CORNER GUARD -SEE DETAIL 5/A8.11 AND SPECSECTION 10 26 001. ALL DIMENSIONS TO BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD BEFORE FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION.2. DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN TO CENTER OF STUD WALL OR FACE OF CMU WALL AT ALLLOCATIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.3. ADA ACCESSIBLE CLEARANCES ARE CLEAR DIMENSIONS. PROVIDE FINISHED OPENINGS ATRESTROOMS, SHOWERS, & ACCESSIBLE AREAS PER REQUIREMENTS OF THE ADAACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY OPENINGS IN ORDER TO MEET ALLREQUIREMENTS INDICATED BEFOREHAND.4. DISCREPENCIES IN DIMENSIONS ARE TO BE GIVEN IN WRITING TO ARCHITECT BEFOREFABRICATION AND INSTALLATION.5. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION OF WATER HEATER WITH SIZE OF ROOMBEFORE INSTALLATION.6. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ELECTRICAL & SPECIAL SYSTEM OUTLET LOCATIONS BEFOREINSTALLATION OF CASEWORK & FINISHES TO CONFIRM HEIGHTS AND LOCATIONS ASINDICATED.7.CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE BLOCKING IN ALL RESTROOMS FOR TOILET PARTITIONS, PAPERTOWEL DISPENSER, COAT HOOK, CHANGING STATIONS, ETC. WHERE SHOWN AND INCLUDINGOWNER PROVIDED ITEMS. CONTRACTOR PROVIDE ALL SUPPORT SYSTEMS AS NEEDEDTHROUGHOUT THE BUILDING.8. SEE THIS SHEET, A7.0, & A9.0 FOR ASSOCIATED DETAILS.9. SEE CODE SHEET A0.1 FOR RATED WALL LOCATIONS AND DETAILS, TYPICAL.10. ADJUST AND PROVIDE ADDITIONAL FURRING AT WALL SYSTEMS AS REQUIRED TO CONCEALSTRUCTURAL AND PLUMBING/MECHANICAL COMPONENTS. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFYLOCATIONS IN THE FIELD AND PROVIDE ADJUSTMENT AS REQUIRED.11. ALL CLOSED DOORS AND DRAWERS AT CASEWORK TO BE LOCKABLE.12. SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS AT SECOND LEVEL IN RESTROOMS AND FLOOR DRAINLOCATIONS.13. SEAL ALL EXPOSED CONTROL JOINT GAPS AT INTERIOR CONCRETE FLOOR SLABS, STAIRS,RISERS AND RAMPS, TYP.11121314151617181920212223242627282925KEYNOTES12356789104CAPTAIN'S BUNK AND MATTRESS W/ UNDER STORAGE -SEE GOODMANS' FURNITURE PLANSLOCKABLE STORAGE LOCKERS W/ SITTING BENCH ANDFOOT LOCKER - SEE GOODMANS' FURNITURE PLANSDESK W/ UPPER STORAGE - SEE GOODMANS'FURNITURE PLANSGEAR GRID HEAVY DUTY LOCKERS -SEE SPECSKITCHEN ISLAND, STAINLESS STEEL W/ CASTERSRECLINER CHAIRS PROVIDED BY OWNER34"H SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP AND 4" BACKSPLASHW/ CASEWORK - SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS30"H SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP WORKCOUNTER - SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS34"H SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP W/ CASEWORK W/POWER AND DATA CONNECTIONS FOR TV -SEEINTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND ELECTRICAL PLANS55" TV PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR W/WALL BRACKET. VERIFY DATA AND POWER CONNECTIONSOFFICE FURNITURE - SEE GOODMANS' FURNITUREPLANSWATER HEATER - SEE PLUMBING PLANSWATER HEATER BASE W/ STAINLESS STEEL PAN - SEEPLUMBING PLANSHI/LOW DRINKING FOUNTAIN W/ CHILLER - SEEPLUMBING PLANS36"H COUNTERTOP AND CASEWORK W/ POWER ANDDATA CONNECTION - SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONSAND ELECTRICAL PLANSFLOOR DRAIN LOCATIONS. SLOPE CONCRETE FLOOR1/8" PER FOOT TO DRAIN IN ALL DIRECTIONS - SEEPLUMBING PLANSTRENCH DRAIN LOCATIONS. SLOPE CONCRETEFLOOR 1/8" PER FOOT TO DRAIN IN ALL DIRECTIONS -SEE PLUMBING PLANSCORD REELS - SEE RCP AND SPECIFICATIONSWALL HYDRANT - SEE PLUMBINGAPPARATUS BAY OVERHEAD DOOR CLEAR AREA -SEE DOOR SCHEDULEFREE-STANDING RANGE - SEE SPECIFICATIONSSECTION 11 31 00FABRIC WASHING MACHINE - SEE SPECIFICATIONSSECTION 11 31 00FABRIC DRYING MACHINE - SEE SPECIFICATIONSSECTION 11 31 00LAUNDRY SINK - SEE PLUMBING PLANSROOF ACCESS WALL MOUNTED LADDER - SEESPECIFICATIONS SECTION 05 51 10 - PROVIDEDRYWALLED CHASE FROM CEILING GRID THROUGHROOF TERMINATE SUSPENDED CEILING AT THISOPENINGFITNESS EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY OWNER.CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY POWER CONNECTIONS FOREACH UNIT AND INSTALLBIO-HAZARD EXTRACTOR. VERIFY INSTALLATIONREQUIRMENTS WITH EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERAND INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTENINSTRUCTIONS.BIO-HAZARD S.S. DRAINAGE TABLE, RACK, ANDFLOOR SINK - SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONSCONCRETE PIPE BOLLARD30WALL MOUNTED, MAGNETIC DRY-ERASE BOARD3165" TV PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR W/WALL BRACKET. VERIFY DATA AND POWER CONNECTIONS.32TVS PROVIDED BY OWNER. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFYDATA AND POWER CONNECTIONS.111111111111 City Comments 6/2/17 WOODARD DELUXE 42D 74WOVAL TABLE W/ TRELLIS TOPPICNICC1C1C1C1C1C1 - WC121P MULTI-PURPOSE CHAIR, FLEXNET SEAT, FIXED ARMSC2 - WC420N CAPER STACKING CHAIR, FLEXNET SEAT, NO ARMSC2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C3C3C3C3 - WC410N CAPER STACKING CHAIR, MOLDED SEAT, NO ARMSC4 - WC420P CAPER STACKING CHAIR, FLEXTNET SEAT, FIXED ARMSC4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4CAPER CHAIRKEYPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICC1C1C1C1TABLE NICTTT T TTTTTTTT TTT TTTTT TT T T TTTTTTTTBBFTTTTBBFTBBF T T T BBF T T T T BBF T T T BBF T T T BBF T T T BBF T T T R EF .R EF .R EF .1 2 ' - 0 " 2 ' - 6 " 9 1 /2 "4' - 3"3' - 6"3' - 6"3' - 6"3' - 6"3' - 6"4' - 3"2' - 0"5' - 8"3' - 8"5' - 8"2' - 0"9' - 0"2' - 3"3' - 0"3' - 2"8' - 8"4' - 8"6' - 0"5' - 0"6' - 0"3' - 10"3' - 4"8"6' - 0"5' - 7"3' - 1 1/4"3' - 1 1/4"8' - 4" 3' - 4" 6' - 8"6' - 4"7' - 0" 3' - 4"9' - 4"3' - 4" 3' - 4"3' - 6" 1' - 9"8" 3' - 4" 3' - 4" 2' - 8" 4' - 0" 2' - 8" 3' - 4"43' - 4"2' - 0"8"1' - 6"29' - 6"17' - 1"1' - 10"4' - 8"1' - 10"9' - 0"9' - 10"9' - 5 1/4"8' - 0 3/4"3' - 0"14' - 8"6' - 0"1' - 6"3' - 6"1' - 0"45' - 0"55.00°75.00°98.00°4' - 4"3' - 6"3' - 4"6' - 8"5' - 6"26' - 0"49' - 4"5' - 6"1' - 6"8"3' - 4"1' - 6"6"4' - 3" 4' - 0"5' - 6"5' - 0"6' - 8"3' - 6"3' - 4"5' - 6"2' - 0"12' - 0"0"2' - 10"9' - 5 1/4"3' - 6"3' - 6"3' - 6"3' - 9 3/4"90.00°90.00°6' - 3 1/2"64' - 7"10' - 2"10' - 2"8' - 9"60' - 7"14' - 0"3' - 0"3' - 0"14' - 0"3' - 0"3' - 0"14' - 0"3' - 0"3' - 7"15' - 8"2' - 8"12' - 8"2' - 8"3' - 4"14' - 0"2' - 8" 3' - 4"14' - 0"3' - 4"14' - 0"2' - 8" 7 1/2" 9' - 9"9' - 6 1/2"57' - 11 1/2"27' - 2 3/4" 14' - 1 1/2"14' - 0"3' - 4"3 3/4"1' - 8"1' - 0"15' - 4"1' - 0"1' - 0"15' - 4"1' - 0"1' - 0"8"4' - 6"2' - 8" 1' - 9" 3' - 6"2' - 8" 1' - 9" 3' - 6"4' - 6"1' - 9" 3' - 6"4' - 6"1' - 3"56' - 9 1/2"7' - 11 1/2"9' - 4"14' - 0 1/2"2' - 2 3/4"18' - 0 1/2"7' - 0"17' - 1"14' - 8"9' - 6 1/2" 3' - 4"14' - 0"3' - 4" 2' - 8"14' - 0"3' - 4"14' - 0"3' - 4"4' - 3"67' - 6 1/2"9' - 4"8' - 5 1/4"4' - 6"3' - 6" 1' - 9" 2' - 8"4' - 6"1' - 0" 1' - 0" 15' - 4" 1' - 0" 1' - 0"15' - 4" 1' - 0" 1' - 0" 8"3' - 6" 1' - 9" 2' - 8"4' - 6"3' - 1"7' - 3 1/4"10' - 0"10' - 0"10' - 0"10' - 0"10' - 2 3/4"12' - 8"12' - 8"15' - 0"3' - 9"3' - 3"3' - 3"5' - 9 3/4"22' - 4"9' - 0"9' - 2"9' - 0"9' - 3"2' - 4"6' - 4 1/4"5' - 2"4' - 0"4' - 0"4' - 0"6' - 9"15' - 0"1' - 7"4' - 7"5' - 7"7' - 4"6' - 1 1/4"3' - 5 3/4"14' - 0"2' - 3"3' - 6"7' - 0 1/2"10' - 4 1/4"13' - 11"7' - 6"6' - 4"11' - 11"2' - 11"6' - 4"3' - 5"3"16' - 7"3"4' - 7 1/4"7' - 0 3/4"5' - 10"222222222244421118881111111111111911919191111899111111911988888888118444444444444444444444444444441145622226661188421HIGH449111427' - 4"6' - 4"3"3"2' - 8"3"1' - 4"54' - 0"8"0"2' - 0"3"3"2' - 0" 2' - 8"2' - 0" 2' - 8"3"2' - 8" 2' - 0"3"2' - 8" 2' - 0"3"3"3"3"5' - 3"3"3"2' - 0"3' - 4"7' - 7"SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:24:19 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA2.1DIMENSIONEDFLOOR PLANOVERALL16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN OVERALLN1LEGEND:KEYNOTEWALL TYPE - SEE SHEET A6.3111 City Comments 6/2/17 C19' - 0"C59' - 0"C59' - 0"C4 9' - 0"C49' - 0"C4 9' - 0"C4 9' - 0"C49' - 0"C49' - 0"C59' - 0"C49' - 0"C59' - 0"C19' - 0"C19' - 0"C19' - 0"C59' - 0"C59' - 0"C1 9' - 0"C19' - 0"C19' - 0"C110' -10"C4 9' - 0"C49' - 0"C49' - 0"9' - 0"C49' - 0"C49' - 0"C49' - 0"C59' - 0"C59' - 0"C59' - 0"C19' - 0"C19' - 0"C4 9' - 0"C318' - 0"C315' - 0"C215' - 6"C215' - 6"--C410' - 6"1112222233344445555510121213141415151512121111111111111111111111111ESESESESESESESESESES-18C215' - 6"1818111811HHHHHHH1' - 9" 6' - 0"1' - 9"6' - 0"4' - 2"6' - 0"5' - 6"6' - 0"22' - 0"7' - 3"23' - 6"R11' - 0"11' - 0"C49' - 0"C49' - 0"SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:25:38 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA3.0REFLECTEDCEILING PLAN16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"REFLECTED CEILING PLANNREFLECTED CEILING PLAN KEYNOTES:123456789101112131415GENERAL NOTES:1. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY FINAL PLACEMENT OF AUDIO DEVICES WITH OWNER.INFRARED SENSORS AND OR OTHER AUDIO OR WIRELESS DEVICES MAY REQUIRE TOBE STRATEGICALLY LOCATED FOR PROPER OPERATION. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFYFINAL LOCATION FOR SUCH SYSTEMS WITH SPECIAL SYSTEMS COMPANY ORINDIVIDUAL AS APPOINTED BY THE OWNER .2. REFERENCE GENERAL CEILING DETAILS ON SHEET A3.1 PRIOR TO INSTALLATIONOF NEW SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM.3. REFERENCE MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND SPECIAL SYSTEMS PLANS FOR LIGHTFIXTURE , SUPPLY AND RETURN CEILING DIFFUSERS, SMOKE DETECTORS, FIREALARM, ALARM SIGNALING DEVICES AND ANY AUDIO VIDEO CEILING MOUNTEDCOMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS.4. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONSBEFORE INSTALLATION AND/OR FABRICATION.5. SEE CODE SHEETS FOR RATED WALL AND CEILING INFORMATION.6. SEE ELECTRICAL DWGS AND CODE SHEETS FOR EXIT SIGNS AND LIGHTINGINFORMATION.7. ALL EXPOSED MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE FREE OF BAR CODES, STICKERS,SIGNAGE, ETC. PAINT FINISH. HANG ALL EQUIPMENT WITH ALL THREAD & FASTENERS.8. ALL CAN FIXTURES TO BE CENTERED IN GYP. BOARD CEILING IN WHICH THEY ARELOCATED, U.N.O.9. ALL EXPOSED STRUCTURE TO HAVE PAINTED FINISH. RUN CONDUIT & PIPING TIGHT10. PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS FOR ALL HARDLID CEILING SPACES. WHERECONDITIONS PERMIT, USE ADJACENT ROOM ACCESS CEILING AND LOCATE ACCESSPANEL AT SHARED PARTITION. ALL VISIBLE ACCESS DOORS TO BE PAINTED TOMATCH SURFACE FINISH.11. ALL STUD WALLS SYSTEMS AND WALL FURRING SYSTEMS SHALL EXTEND TOBOTTOM OF SHEATHING UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. REFERENCE DETAILS 01 THRU05 ON SHEET A6.1 AND A6.2.12. INTERIOR WALL AND CEILING FINISH SHALL HAVE A FLAME SPREAD INDEX NOTGREATER THAN THAT SPECIFIED IN TABLE 803.5 FOR THE GROUP AND LOCATIONDESIGNATED. IN ADDITION, DECORATIVE MATERIALS AND TRIM SHALL BERESTRICTED BY COMBUSTIBILITY AND THE FLAME PROPAGATION PERFORMANCECRITERIA OF NFPA 701, IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 806.TO DECK. REMOVE ALL FABRICATION ID TAGS & STICKERS PRIOR TO PAINT, TYP.13. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS SHAL COMPLY WITH ASTM C635 AND C636SEE SPECIFICATIONSLEGEND: SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER -SEE MECHANICAL PLANSRETURN AIR DIFFUSER -SEE MECHANICAL PLANSLAY-IN FIXTURE -SEE ELECTRICAL PLANSEXIT SIGN -SEE ELECTRICAL PLANSEXHAUST FAN -SEE MECHANICAL PLANSRECESSED CAN FIXTURE - SEE ELECTRICAL PLANSC1 0'-0"CEILING HEIGHTPAINTED GWB CEILING/SOFFIT PER FINISH SCHEDULECEILING TYPE PER FINISH SCHEDULE A8.01'X4' SUSPENDED LED LIGHT FIXTURE - SEE ELECTRICAL PLANSSURFACE MOUNT LINEAR FLUORESCENT FIXTURE- SEE ELECTRICAL PLANSCEILING GRID SYSTEM - 2X4 STANDARD - SEE CEILING DETAILSC E I L I N G L E G E N DC1C224"x48" SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING, TEGULARC3C4C5C6GWB W/ SEMI-GLOSS PAINTC7W.R. GWB W/ GLOSS ENAMEL PAINTGWB HEADER/BULKHEAD, PAINTEDDIRECT APPLIED SYNTHETIC STUCCO SOFFITEXPOSED CEILING TRUSSES WITH GWB AT DECKPAINTED EXTERIOR STEEL TRUSSES -SEE STRUCTURALEXPOSED DECORATIVE WOOD TRUSSES -SEESTRUCTURALPAINTED EXPOSED TRUSSES -SEE STRUCTURALSTUD WALL TO EXTEND 6" ABOVE HIGHEST ADJACENTCEILING SYSTEM - SEE DETAIL 01/A6.3INSULATED OVERHEAD APPARATUS BAY DOORS -SEESPECSMECHANICAL SYSTEM-SEE MECHANICAL PLANSABOVE CEILING MECHANICAL UNIT LOCATION- SEE MECHANICALACOUSTIC CEILING PANELS MOUNTED TO UNDERSIDE OFTRUSSES -SEE DETAIL 9/A3.1STAINLESS STEEL EXHAUST HOOD W/ S.S. CLOSURETRIM AT LAY-IN CEILING OPENINGLIGHT FIXTURES - SEE ELECTRICALWALL MOUNTED TELEVISION W/ WALL BRACKETSUSPENDED LIGHT FIXTURE - SEE ELECTRICALROOF HATCH LOCATION W/ GYP. BRD. SOFFITSURROUND -SEE SPECSGWB. SOFFIT EXTENDED TO BOTTOM OF DECK - SEEDETAIL 15/A3.1ELECTRICAL CORD REEL TO BE MOUNTED TOSTRUCTURE, CORD TO HANG BETWEEN LAY-IN CEILINGSYSTEM -SEE ELECTRICAL AND SPECSPAINTED EXPOSED CEILING.16CEILING FAN FIXTURE - SEE ELECTRICAL173'-6" x 2'-0" TUBE STEEL SHADE CANOPY W/ PERFORATEDSHEETING - SEE STRUCTURAL FOR SUPPORT SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER -SEE MECHANICAL PLANSPENDANT FIXTURE - SEE ELECTRICAL PLANSCEILING FAN - SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS18GWB W/ SEMI-GLOSS PAINT19GWB HEADER/BULKHEAD, PAINTED - SEE DETAIL 8/A3.1111111 City Comments 6/2/17 ATTACH FURRING CHANNELS WITHSADDLE TIE WITH (1) 16 GAUGE OR(2) 18 GAUGE AND (2) TIGHT TURNSAT EACH MAIN RUNNERMAIN RUNNER; 1 1/2" COLDROLLED CHANNEL AT 48" OC MAXSECURE BRACING WIRESPARALLEL TO MAIN RUNNERSWITH #8 x 3/4" SHEET METALSCREWS4"x20 GA METAL STUD BRACE TOSTRUCTURE ABOVE, AS REQUIRED#12 WIRE 48" OC MAX AND WITHIN8" OF PERIMETER WALL SADDLETIE WITH MINIMUM (3) TIGHTTURNS IN 4" BOTH ENDS OF WIRE7/8" 25 GAUGE DRYWALL FURRINGCHANNELS AT 16" OC MAXNOTE:COMPLY WITH ASTMC635 AND C636 SEE SPECS.NOTE: BRACING WIRES MAY BE DELETEDAT CONTINUOUS LEVEL CEILING WITHFOUR PERIMETER WALLS AND POSITIVEATTACHMENT TO WALLS96 SQ/FTMAIN RUNNER: COLDROLLED CHANNEL; 1 1/2"(0.475 LBS/FT MIN) AT 48"OC MAX; PROVIDE #9VERTICAL HANGER WIRESAT 36" OC WITH SADDLETIE AND 3 TIGHT TURNSMETAL FURRING; 7/8" AT16" OC MAX; ATTACH GYPBD WITH 1 1/4" HI-LO TYPE"S" BUGLE HEAD SCREWSAT 12" OC MAX AND 3/8"MIN EDGE DISTANCEPROVIDE #12 BRACINGWIRES AT EVERY 96 SQ/FTPERIMETER WALL, TYP12'-0" MAXBRACING WIRE4'-0"MAX6"4'-0"MAX3"8'-0" MAX BRACING WIRE4'-0"MAX3"6" MAXATWALL4'-0"MAXNOTE:COMPLY WITH ASTMC635 AND C636 SEE SPECS.MAIN RUNNER#12 GA. HANGERWIRE AT PERIMETER WALLS TYP.NAIL OR SCREW (PROVIDECONTINUOUS METALBLOCKING AT CLG. HEIGHTTYP. ALL LOCATIONS)PERIMETERWALL ANGLE(TYP.)ACOUSTICAL TILE8" MAX.NOTE:COMPLY WITH ASTMC635 AND C636 SEE SPECS.ACOUSTICAL TILEMAIN RUNNERSLOT ENDOVER RUNNER#12 GA. HANGER WIRE AT 4'-0" O.C. TYP.2" MAX45° MAXNOTE:COMPLY WITH ASTMC635 AND C636 SEE SPECS.PERIMETER WALL ORCEILING HEIGHT CHANGE96 S.F.NOTE:BRACING WIRES AND COMP. STRUT SHALLOCCUR @ EVERY 96 SF MAX. IN ROOMSOVER 100SFBRACING WIRE LOCATION(TYP)CROSS RUNNERSMAIN RUNNERS ATPERIMETER WALLSMAIN RUNNERS12'-0"MAX4'-0"MAX4'-0"MAX8'-0"MAXNOTE:COMPLY WITH ASTMC635 AND C636 SEE SPECS.FOUR (4) 12 GA. SPLAYED LATERALBRACING WIRES @ 12'-0" O.C. ANDPARALLEL TO COMPONENTSINTERSECTING AT THE BRACELOCATION.CROSS RUNNERMAIN RUNNER12 GA. VERTICALHANGER WIRE @ 4'-0"O.C. (TYP)NOTE: CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT CALCULATIONS AND TEST REPORTS FOR METALSUSPENSION SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH IBC STANDARDS TO THE BUILDING OFFICALFOR APPROVAL.45° MAXMAX.4'-0" MAX.EA. WAY2"4'-0" MAX.EA. WAYNOTE:COMPLY WITH ASTMC635 AND C636 SEE SPECS.SUSPENDED CEILINGSUSPENDEDCEILING5/8" TYPE GYPSUM WALLBOARD4" METAL FRAMINGSEE RCPDOOR WHERE IT OCCURS5/8" TYPE GYPSUMWALL BOARDNOTE:COMPLY WITH ASTMC635 AND C636 SEE SPECS.DIAGONAL SUPPORT TOUNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURE@ 24" O.C.5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARD4" METAL STUD TOUNDERSIDE OFSTRUCTUREPROVIDE 2x BLOCKING@ SUSPENDED CEILINGSEE RCP PLANSUSPENDEDCEILINGSEE RCP PLANREFERENCE RCPNOTE:COMPLY WITH ASTMC635 AND C636 SEE SPECS.AT STEEL DECKAT STEEL DECKAT OPEN-WEB STEEL JOIST OR TRUSSAND WOOD JOIST OR TRUSS AT STEEL BEAMSNOTE: SPLAY WIRESPARALLEL TO JOIST.SPLAYED WIRESCANNOT BEPERPENDICULAR TOJOISTS.SPLAYED SEISMICBRACING WIRE W/ 4TIGHT TURNSBOTTOM CHORD"HILTI" CEILING CLIP(OR EQUAL) 13GAUGE X 3/4" WIDEVERTICAL HANGERWIRE - TEST FOR200 LBS.SPLAYED SEISMIC BRACINGWIRE - TEST FOR 440 LBS.VERTICALHANGER WIREW/ 3 TIGHTTURNSWEB MEMBERSSTEEL BEAMSTEEL DECKBRACING WIRESTEEL DECKHANGER WIREBADCSHOT-IN ANCHOR"HILTI - DN27P87"SHOT-IN ANCHOR"HILTI - DN27P87""HILTI" CEILING CLIP(OR EQUAL) 13GAUGE X 3/4" WIDESHOT-IN ANCHOR"HILTI - DN27P87""HILTI" CEILING CLIP(OR EQUAL) 13GAUGE X 3/4" WIDE1 1/2"1 1/2"NOTE:COMPLY WITH ASTMC635 AND C636 SEE SPECS.SUSPENDED ACOUSTICALCEILING GRID AND PANELSYSTEMMETAL STUD TOSTRUCTURE ABOVEWALL ANGLE TO RECEIVESUSPENDED CEILING GRIDAND TILES5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARD(2) 1" TYPE S-12 PANHEAD SCREWS AT EACHSTUD1 1/4" TYPE 'S' BUGLEHEAD SCREWS AT 12" O.C.7/8" DRYWALL FURRINGCHANNEL, ATTACH TOCHANNEL WITH #12 WIREOR FURRING CHANNELCLIPWIRE HANGERS AT 48"O.C.1 1/2" COLD ROLLEDCHANNEL AT 48" O.C.2 1/2"x20 GAUGE TRACKCONTINUOUS ATPERIMETERCORNER BEAD CONTINUOUSVARIES - SEE CEILING PLAN6"VARIESSEE CEILING PLAN8" MAX.3" MAX.NOTE:COMPLY WITH ASTMC635 AND C636 SEE SPECS.HANGER WIREACOUSTICALCEILING TILE8" PREFAB, PREFINISHEDPERIMETER TRIM ALLAROUNDNOTE:COMPLY WITH ASTMC635 AND C636 SEE SPECS.CONCRETE OR MASONRYPREFINISHED PERFORATEDB-DECK METAL SOFFIT16 Ga. SUBFRAMINGCONT. 16 Ga. TRACK W/1/2" A.B. @32" O.C. INSOLID GROUTED CELLS@ 24" O.C.0' - 1"6" STUD WALL W/PREFINISHED PERFORATEDB-DECK METAL SOFFIT16 Ga. SUBFRAMINGCONT. 16 Ga. TRACK W/MECHANICAL FASTENERS@ 24" O.C.@ 24" O.C.R-19 BATT INSULATION-SEE WALL TYPESEIFS STUCCO SYSTEMOVER 30# FELT AND1/2" DENSGLASS6" STUD WALL W/PREFINISHED PERFORATEDB-DECK METAL SOFFIT16 Ga. SUBFRAMINGCONT. 16 Ga. TRACK W/MECHANICAL FASTENERS@ 24" O.C.@ 24" O.C.R-19 BATT INSULATION-SEE WALL TYPESEIFS STUCCO SYSTEMOVER 30# FELT AND1/2" DENSGLASSDRIP EDGE AT EXTERIORSTUCCO SOFFIT EDGESEE CEILING PLANDIAGONAL SUPPORT TOUNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURE@ 24" O.C.PERFORATED METAL PANELW/ HEMMED EDGE-SEE SPECS6" 22 GA. METAL STUDATTACHED TO UNDERSIDE OFSTRUCTURE-EXPOSED GALV. FINISHPROVIDE 2x BLOCKING@ PERFORATED METALPANEL0' - 6"3' - 0"SEE RCP PLANSHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:26:12 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA3.1RCP DETAILS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 3" = 1'-0"1Ceiling-Suspended Gypsum CeilingSupport 1/8" = 1'-0"2Ceiling-Suspended Gypsum CeilingPlan 6" = 1'-0"3Ceiling-Suspended Ceiling Grid toWall 6" = 1'-0"4Ceiling-Suspended Ceiling GridRunner 1/8" = 1'-0"5Ceiling-Suspended Ceiling Grid Plan 1 1/2" = 1'-0"6Ceiling-Suspended Ceiling GridIsometric 1" = 1'-0"7Ceiling-Office Soffit Detail 1" = 1'-0"8Ceiling-New Typical CeilingBulkhead 3" = 1'-0"10Ceiling-Hanger Attachments 3" = 1'-0"11Ceiling-Ceiling Transition 3" = 1'-0"9Ceiling-Lay-in Trim 3" = 1'-0"12Ceiling-Soffit Connection 3" = 1'-0"13Ceiling-Soffit Connection at Stucco 3" = 1'-0"14Ceiling-Soffit Connection at StuccoEdge 1" = 1'-0"15Ceiling-New Typical Ceiling MetalBulkhead 1A6.01A6.02A6.03A6.04A6.011111111112211122333444444444556666614141477RIDGE LINERIDGE LINERIDGE LINERIDGE LINER ID G E LIN E RIDGE LINERIDGE LINERIDGE LINE5A6.05A6.06A6.017' - 9"10101011111111HIPHIPHIPHIPVALLEY LINEVALLEY LINE111111R I D G E L I NEVALLEY LINE1111114:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH1/2:12 PITCH1/2:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH4 :12 P IT C H 4:12 P ITC H 4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH1/2:12 P IT C H 4:12 P ITC H4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH1281281288121211284:12 PITCH2:12 PITCH2:12 P ITC H2:12 PITCH2:12 PITCHVALLEY LINEVALLEY LINEVALLEY LINE771/2:12 PITCH1/2:12 PITCH999999999135A6.24A6.21SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:28:49 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA4.0ROOF PLAN16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"ROOF PLANN1. REFERENCE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PLANS FOR FINAL UNIT LOCATION,ROOF PENETRATIONS AND CURB SIZES.2. SEE SHEETS A4.1 & A4.2 FOR DETAILS.3. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION AND/OR FABRICATION.4. PARAPET WALL NEEDS TO SCREEN ROOFTOP UNITS ENTIRELY.GENERAL NOTES:LEGEND:KEYNOTES122" FOAM ROOFING SYSTEMOVER PLYWOOD SHEATHING -SEE SPECSBELOW ROOF DRAIN LEADER PATH.HOLD TIGHT TO DECK - SEE PLUMB.MISSION STYLE CONCRETE TILE -SEE SPECSCONCRETE MISSION STYLE ROOF TILE W/ UNDERLAYMENTOVER ROOF SYSTEM -SEE SPECS2" FOAM ROOF SYSTEM SLOPED TO ROOF DRAIN -SEESPECS3STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF SYSTEM W/ UNDERLAYMENTOVER ROOF SYSTEM -SEE SPECS4PREFINISHED METAL COPING AND COUNTER FLASHING5PAINTED METAL AWNING FRAMING -SEE STRUCTURAL6ROOF DRAIN AND OVERFLOW W/ DOWNSPOUT, CONNECT INTOUNDERGROUND STORMWATER SYSTEM - SEE DETAIL 3/A4.1 - SEE CIVIL7PREFINISHED HEAVY DUTY GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUTSYSTEM, CONNECT INTO UNDERGROUND STORMWATERSYSTEM -SEE CIVIL8DOWNSPOUT AND BRASS DAYLIGHT OVERFLOW DRAIN,CONNECT DOWNSPOUT INTO UNDERGROUNDSTORMWATER SYSTEM -SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS9MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT W/ 8" CURB -SEE MECHANICALSYSTEM10ROOF ACCESS HATCH AND GUARD RAIL SYSTEM -SEESPECS11PLYWOOD CRICKET -SLOPE AT MIN. 1/2:1212ROOF DRAIN AND OVERFLOW LINES -SEE PLUMBING FORSIZES13WALL MOUNTED ANTENNA BRACKET, ANTENNA PROVIDED BYOWNER AND CONTRACTOR INSTALLED -COORDINATECONDUIT STUB ON ROOF14DAYLIGHT W/ DOWNSPOUT AND RIPRAP111 City Comments 6/2/17STRUCTURAL STANDING SEAMMETAL ROOF -SEE SPECS 24 GA. METAL COPINGSYSTEM - INSTALL PERMANUFACTURERFR.SPECIFICATIONS ANDWRITTENINSTRUCTIONSEXTEND ROOFINGUNDER TOPCOPING1" FOAM ROOFINGSYSTEM TO EXTENDUP PARAPET WALL1/2" T&G DENSGLASSSHEATHING -SEESPECS2" FOAM ROOFINGSYSTEM ONPLYWOOD DECKPERSTRUCTURALEXTERIOR METALSTUD WALL -REFERTO WALL TYPESSYNTHETIC STUCCOSYSTEMW/ 1-1/2" FOAM -SEE SPECSMASONRY OR CONCRETE.FOAM ROOFING SYSTEM.PLYWOOD DECK - SEESTRUCTURALDRAWINGSWOOD LEDGER.INSULATION.SEE FINISH SCHEDULE FORFURRING AND FINISH.FOAM ROOFING SYSTEM CONT.UPPARAPET WALL.EXTEND ROOFING UNDERTOPCOPING24 GA. METAL COPING SYSTEM-INSTALL PER MANUFACTURERSPECIFICATIONS & WRITTENINSTRUCTIONS8" MIN.12" MIN.SEALED DUCTCONNECTION; SEEMECHANICAL PLANS8" MIN. HIGH INSULATEDMETAL CURB TO RECEIVECANT STRIP, FLASHINGANDFOAM ROOFING SYSTEMHVAC UNIT; SEEMECHANICAL PLANSA4.06SPRAY FOAM VOID SPACESTRUCTURAL SUPPORT;SEE STRUCTURALPLANSTOP OF PARAPET WALLFOAM ROOFING SYSTEM.PLYWOOD DECK.REFRIGERANTLINEOF CONDUIT.BATT INSULATION6" 6"1/4"NOTE: LOCATE COPING SPLICES AT CONTROL JOINTSPREFINISHED METAL COPING, COLORSEALANTCONTROL JOINTSPLICETO MATCH METAL ROOF FINISH.OVERFLOW DRAINNOTE: SLOPE ALL SURROUNDINGSURFACES TOWARD DRAIN - MIN 1/4"PER FOOT - FOLLOWSPECIFICATIONS ANDMANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONSFORINSTALLATION OF ROOFINGMATERIALS AT DRAINSELF LOCKING DOME STRAINER2" HIGH WATER DAM FLASHING RINGAT OVERFLOW DRAINCLAMPING RING EXTENSIONFLASHING RING5/8" PLYWOOD SHEATHING - SHAPEEND TO IT DRAIN ASSEMBLY FOR SOLIDBEARINGDRAIN PIPE - SEEPLUMBINGDRAWINGSSUMP BODYDECK CLAMPGASKET3/16" BENT PLATE 4 SIDES3/16" x 2" BAR 4 SIDES6"2"1'-4"2"6"6"2"1'-6"2"6"1' - 6"FROMWALL/CURBTYP.SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAMSHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:29:35 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA4.1ROOF DETAILS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 1 1/2" = 1'-0"1ROOF - FOAM ROOF @ STUCCO 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2ROOF - FOAM ROOF @ CMU 1 1/2" = 1'-0"4ROOF - MECH. CURB @ FOAM 3" = 1'-0"5ROOF - PITCH POCKET @ FOAM 3" = 1'-0"6ROOF - COPING SPLICE JOINT 3/4" = 1'-0"3ROOF - ROOF DRAIN 3'-0" MIN. CLEARANCE3'-0" MIN. AROUND PERIMETEROF OPENING WHERE CEILING ISEXPOSED STRUCTURE - SEERCP AND ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE.PLYWOOD DECK,PER STRUCTURALFOAM ROOFING,TYPICALOPENING.STEEL/WOOD FRAMECONCRETE FLOORSEE ROOM FINISHPERMANENTLY FIXED STEEL LADDER.LADDER FABRICATION2'-6" x 4'-6" MIN.ROOF HATCH PERRIGID CANTTYPICALFOAM ROOFING,PROVIDE MIN. 1-1/2"CLEARANCE BETWEENHANDRAIL AND WALL.SPECIFICATIONOVER METAL5/8" GYP. BDSTUD FRAMING.SCHEDULE.TO MEET IMC SEC. 306.5VERIFY LOCATIONS WITHROOF JOIST BEYOND -STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS.EXTEND GYP. BD. OVERANY STEEL/WOOD STRUCTUREWITHIN 3'-0" OF GYP. BD.PERIMETER.AND ALL OSHA REQUIREMENTS.2'-6"HANDRAIL \SAFTEYPOST EXTENSION.2' - 0"CONCRETE MISSIONTILE ROOFING SYSTEM-SEE SPECSUNDERLAYMENT ANDWEATHER BARRIERPER MANUF. REQ.PREFINISHED METALFLASHINGPREFINISHED METALTILE CLOSURE PANEL2X8 W/ PREFINISHEDBREAK METAL FASCIAPANELTUBE STEEL 2x6"OUTRIGGER W/ ENDCLOSURE PANEL @ 48"O.C., PAINTED TOMATCH WOOD FINISH-SEE STRUCTURALDIRECT APPLIEDSYNTHETIC STUCCOOVER 1/2" DENSGLASSSHEATHINGSYNTHETIC STUCCOSYSTEM OVER 2" FOAMINSULATION ANDBUILDING WRAPPLYWOOD SHEATHING-SEE STRUCTURAL2X BLOCKINGPLYWOOD SHEATHING-SEE STRUCTURAL6"STRUCTURALLY INSULATEDPANELS W/ INTEGRAL ELECTRICALCONDUIT CHASES -SEESTRUCTURAL3' - 0"INTEGRAL BLOCKING PER MANUF.CONCRETE MISSION TILE ROOFINGSYSTEM -SEE SPECSUNDERLAYMENT AND WEATHERBARRIER PER MANUF. REQ.PREFINISHED METAL TILECLOSURE PANELPREFINISHED METAL FLASHINGPREFINISHED METAL FASCIA PANEL,SIZE PER SIPS MANUF.DIRECT APPLIED SYNTHETICSTUCCO SYSTEMSYNTHETIC STUCCO SYSTEM OVER2" FOAM INSULATION AND BUILDINGWRAPPLYWOOD SHEATHING -SEESTRUCTURALDENSGLASS SOFFIT SHEATHING W/2X WOOD FRAMING AT 24" O.C.4"4"1' - 8"6"4"1' - 8"6"4"TUBE STEEL OUTRIGGER 4X4" W/END CLOSURE PANELS @ 48" O.C.PAINTED TO MATCH WOOD FINISH -SEE STRUCTURAL2' - 6"PLYWOOD SHEATHING-SEE STRUCTURALCONCRETE MISSIONTILE ROOFING SYSTEM-SEE SPECSPREFINISHED METALTILE CLOSURE PANELPREFINISHED METALFLASHING ANDCOUNTER FLASHING2" FOAM ROOFINGSYSTEM TO EXTENDBELOW UNDERLAYMENTPLYWOOD SHEATHING-SEE STRUCTURAL.2' - 0" MIN.4"1X BLOCKING FOAMROOF STOPBUILDINGUNDERLAYMENTPAINTED CMU WALL -SEE WALL TYPES2" FOAM ROOFSYSTEM1" FOAM ROOF SYSTEMEXTENDED BELOWUNDERLAYMENT ATCOPINGPREFINISHED METALCOPINGWOOD NAILERPREFINISHED METALFLASHING AND COUNTERFLASHINGMORTAR END CAP PERMANUF. REQ.PLYWOOD SHEATHING -SEE STRUCTURALCONCRETE MISSION TILEROOFING SYSTEM -SEESPECSUNDERLAYMENT ANDWEATHER BARRIER PERMANUF. REQ.R-38 BATT INSULATION,VINYL FACED ATEXPOSED AREASFOAM INSULATE CMUCELL AT EXTERIORWALLS1X WOOD STRIPPREFINISHED METALFLASHINGPREFINISHED METAL WEEPSCREED AT SYNTHETICSTUCCO SYSTEMSYNTHETIC STUCCO SYSTEMOVER 2" FOAM INSULATION2" FOAM ROOFING SYSTEMTO EXTEND TO WOOD STRIP.8 " MI N.PLYWOOD SHEATHING -SEESTRUCTURALCMU WALL W/ BLOCK FILLAND PAINT AT APPARATUSBAYWOOD LEDGER -SEESTRUCTURAL.8" MIN..2'-8" MIN.CONCRETE MISSION TILEROOFING SYSTEM -SEESPECSUNDERLAYMENTADHEARED TOPREFINISHED METALFLASHINGPREFINISHED METALFLASHING W/ WELDEDSEEMS, EXTEND 2'-0"BEYOND TILE EDGEPLYWOOD CRICKETSLOPED AT 1/2:12UNDERLAYMENT ANDWEATHER BARRIER PERMANUF. REQ.R-38 BATT INSULATIONROOF TRUSS -SEESTRUCTURALSHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/5/2017 12:03:41 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA4.2ROOF DETAILS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 3/4" = 1'-0"2ROOF - ROOF HATCH @ FOAM 1 1/2" = 1'-0"1Roof Edge Detail 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3SIPS Roof Edge Detail 1 1/2" = 1'-0"5Roof Edge Transition 1 1/2" = 1'-0"4Parapet Transition Detail 1 1/2" = 1'-0"6CMU Wall at Foam Roof Detail 1 1/2" = 1'-0"7Valley Roof Detail 35510418101015451927' - 6" T.O. ROOF17' - 0" T.O. WALL16' - 8" T.O. WALL1' - 6" F.F. ELEVATION0' - 0" F.F. ELEVATION11115' - 6" T.O. WALL9' - 6" T.O. WALL12' - 2" T.O. BEARING18' - 5" T.O. BEARING24' - 3" T.O. ROOF3' - 6" T.O. VENEER10' - 8" T.O. BEARING10131913131355135214410113173211254612191933443381010106201995144310510217779510111827' - 6" T.O. ROOF22' - 0" T.O. WALL24' - 3" T.O. ROOF16' - 8" T.O. WALL0' - 0" F.F. ELEVATION1' - 6" F.F. ELEVATION12' - 8" T.O. BEARING18' - 4" T.O. BEARING18' - 4" T.O. BEARING12' - 2" T.O. BEARING1011433613121351713441 3 ' - 3 "R 1 3 ' - 3 "R 42113512FOUNTAIN HILLSFIRE STATION #2BUILDINGADDRESS16162019201233441810612620991512121910811044511111010416' - 8" T.O. WALL27' - 6" T.O. ROOF27' - 6" T.O. ROOF17' - 0" T.O. WALL21' - 5" T.O. WALL0' - 0" F.F. ELEVATION0' - 0" F.F. ELEVATION17' - 6" T.O. BEARING12' - 2" T.O. BEARING5' - 6" T.O. WALL10' - 8" T.O. BEARING12136142120321113182' - 8"4' - 4"38133451013131220202027' - 6" T.O. ROOF22' - 0" T.O. WALL12212417117778821355559992144431010101016' - 8" T.O. WALL1' - 6" F.F. ELEVATION24' - 3" T.O. ROOF0' - 0" F.F. ELEVATION1112' - 8" T.O. BEARING19' - 8" T.O. BEARING12' - 2" T.O. BEARING17' - 6" T.O. BEARING131317113444136113513' - 3 "R 1 3 ' - 3 "R 122019201719961419202013202020SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/5/2017 1:13:24 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA5.0ELEVATIONS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 1/8" = 1'-0"1North Elevation 1/8" = 1'-0"2East Elevation 1/8" = 1'-0"3South Elevation 1/8" = 1'-0"4West ElevationGENERAL NOTES:1. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONSBEFORE INSTALLATION AND/OR FABRICATION.2. SEE SHEET AL3.3, AL4.1, AL5.1, AL5.2, AL5.3, AL6.2, AL8.3, AL8.4,AL8.6, AL8.7, AL8.8, AL8.9, AL8.10, & AL9.0 FOR ALL REFERENCEDETAILS NOT CALLED OUT.3. REFERENCE SHEET AL8.10 FOR ALL TRANSITION WALL TYPEDETAILS AND FLASHING SYSTEM DETAILS.KEYNOTES12356789104PAINTED 8x8x16 STANDARD CMU -SEE WALL TYPES,PAINTED P6 PER COLOR SCHEDULE8x8x16 STANDARD CMU W/ 2" EFIS SYNTHETIC STUCCOSYSTEM -SEE WALL TYPES, PAINTED P5 PER COLORSCHEDULE2" EIFS SYNTHETIC STUCCO SYSTEM OVER WOOD STUDWALL SYSTEM -SEE WALL TYPES, PAINTED P5 PERCOLOR SCHEDULEARTIFICIAL STONE VENEER (SV1) OVER 1/2" DENSGLASSSHEATHING W/ 4" STUCCO CAP -SEE WALL SECTIONS,STONE VENEER 1 PER COLOR SCHEDULECONCRETE MISSION STYLE ROOF TILE W/ UNDERLAYMENTOVER ROOF SYSTEM -SEE SPECSEXTERIOR PAINTED TUBE STEEL ACCENT SUPPORTFRAMING @ 48" O.C. - SEE DETAIL 1/A4.2, PAINTED P7 PERCOLOR SCHEDULE14'x14' OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOOR W/ VISION WINDOW- SEE DOOR/WINDOW SCHEDULE A8.0, PAINTED P7 PERCOLOR SCHEDULE8" RETAINING WALL SYSTEM -SEE CIVIL AND STRUCTURALDRAWINGS, PAINTED P6 PER COLOR SCHEDULE8" DIA. BOLLARDS -SEE DETAIL 11/A1.1HOLLOW METAL WINDOW AND DOOR SYSTEM - SEE DOORAND WINDOW SCHEDULE A8.011PAINTED TUBE STEEL AWNING STRUCTURE, PAINTED P7PER COLOR SCHEDULE12PREFINISHED METAL COPING, EXTEND ROOFINGSYSTEM BELOW COPING13PREFINISHED METAL FLASHING W/ PREFINISHED METALFASCIA, PAINTED P7 PER COLOR SCHEDULE14PREFINISHED STANDING SEEM METAL ROOFING WITHOUTSUBSTRATE SYSTEM -SEE STRUCTURAL15PREFINISHED STANDING SEEM METAL ROOFING -SEESPECS1610" HIGH 2" RAISE ALUMINUM LETTERS "FOUNTAIN HILLSFIRE STATION #3" AND 18" HIGH 2" RAISE ALUMINUMLETTERS INDICATING BUILDING ADDRESS AS AQUIREDFROM THE TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS11117EXTERIOR PAINTED TUBE STEEL DECORATIVE TRUSSES -SEE STRUCTURAL, PAINTED P7 PER COLOR SCHEDULE18EXTERIOR PAINTED TUBE STEEL ACCENT SUPPORTFRAMING @ 48" O.C. - SEE DETAIL 3/A4.219EXTERIOR PAINTED TUBE STEEL ACCENT SUPPORTFRAMING - SEE STRUCTURAL, PAINTED P7 PER COLORSCHEDULE20EXTERIOR PAINTED TUBE STEEL POST - SEE STRUCTURAL,PAINTED P7 PER COLOR SCHEDULEPAINT #P5(EIFS)MNFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: PRACTICAL BEIGE (SW 6100)LOCATION: EIFS AS INDICATED ON ELEVATIONPAINT #P6(EIFS &MASONRY)PAINT #P7(ACCENT &TRIM)PAINT & WALL FINISH LEGEND:MNFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: HALF-CAFF (SW 9091)LOCATION: ALL HARD-LID CEILING, U.N.OSTONEVENEER #SV1MNFR: ELDORADO STONESTYLE: SHADOW ROCKCOLOR: SOMERSETLOCATION: AS INDICATED ON ELEVATIONMNFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: UTAUPEIA (SW 9088)LOCATION: EIFS AS INDICATED ON ELEVTIONAND ALL EXTERIOR MASONRY212" EIFS SYNTHETIC STUCCO SYSTEM OVER WOOD STUDWALL SYSTEM -SEE WALL TYPES, PAINTED P6 PER COLORSCHEDULE1 City Comments 6/2/17 0' - 0" F.F. ELEVATION3' - 6" T.O. VENEER10' - 8" T.O. BEARING15' - 2" T.O. ROOF413196194413613191010103335556A6.01' - 6" F.F. ELEVATION4' - 6" T.O. VENEER5' - 0" T.O. VENEER12' - 2" T.O. BEARING16' - 1" T.O. ROOF16' - 8" T.O. WALL24' - 3" T.O. ROOF18' - 4" T.O. BEARING445613121021101051314133410111111331818201' - 6" F.F. ELEVATION18' - 4" T.O. BEARING24' - 3" T.O. ROOF12' - 2" T.O. BEARING16' - 8" T.O. WALL10' - 6" T.O. VENEER1' - 6" F.F. ELEVATION132144455173101010101011114131213131119206316' - 8" T.O. WALL18' - 4" T.O. BEARING.9' - 0"10' - 6" B.O. SOFFIT1' - 6" F.F. ELEVATION8344213511115610101010121314204201820131' - 6" F.F. ELEVATION10' - 6" T.O. VENEER18' - 4" T.O. BEARING24' - 3" T.O. ROOF4101111313533101041011113151010101011141118105A6.03' - 6" T.O. VENEER0' - 0" F.F. ELEVATION10' - 0" T.O. BEARING15' - 2" T.O. ROOF421151335136SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/5/2017 2:20:30 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA5.1ELEVATIONS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 1/8" = 1'-0"1Dorm Elevation 1/8" = 1'-0"2Admin Elevations 1/8" = 1'-0"3Entry Elevation 1/8" = 1'-0"4Patio Awning Elevation 1/8" = 1'-0"5Patio Cover Elevation 1/8" = 1'-0"6Alcove ElevationGENERAL NOTES:1. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONSBEFORE INSTALLATION AND/OR FABRICATION.2. SEE SHEET AL3.3, AL4.1, AL5.1, AL5.2, AL5.3, AL6.2, AL8.3, AL8.4,AL8.6, AL8.7, AL8.8, AL8.9, AL8.10, & AL9.0 FOR ALL REFERENCEDETAILS NOT CALLED OUT.3. REFERENCE SHEET AL8.10 FOR ALL TRANSITION WALL TYPEDETAILS AND FLASHING SYSTEM DETAILS.1KEYNOTES12356789104PAINTED 8x8x16 STANDARD CMU -SEE WALL TYPES,PAINTED P6 PER COLOR SCHEDULE8x8x16 STANDARD CMU W/ 2" EFIS SYNTHETIC STUCCOSYSTEM -SEE WALL TYPES, PAINTED P5 PER COLORSCHEDULE2" EIFS SYNTHETIC STUCCO SYSTEM OVER WOOD STUDWALL SYSTEM -SEE WALL TYPES, PAINTED P5 PERCOLOR SCHEDULEARTIFICIAL STONE VENEER (SV1) OVER 1/2" DENSGLASSSHEATHING W/ 4" STUCCO CAP -SEE WALL SECTIONS,STONE VENEER 1 PER COLOR SCHEDULECONCRETE MISSION STYLE ROOF TILE W/UNDERLAYMENT OVER ROOF SYSTEM -SEE SPECSEXTERIOR PAINTED TUBE STEEL ACCENT SUPPORTFRAMING @ 48" O.C. - SEE DETAIL 1/A4.2, PAINTED P7 PERCOLOR SCHEDULE14'x14' OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOOR W/ VISION WINDOW-SEE DOOR/WINDOW SCHEDULE A8.2, PAINTED P7 PERCOLOR SCHEDULE8" RETAINING WALL SYSTEM -SEE CIVIL AND STRUCTURALDRAWINGS8" DIA. BOLLARDS -SEE DETAIL 11/A1.1HOLLOW METAL WINDOW AND DOOR SYSTEM -SEE DOORAND WINDOW SCHEDULE11PAINTED TUBE STEEL AWNING STRUCTURE, PAINTED P7PER COLOR SCHEDULE12PREFINISHED METAL COPING, EXTEND ROOFINGSYSTEM BELOW COPING13PREFINISHED METAL FLASHING W/ PREFINISHED METALFASCIA, PAINTED P7 PER COLOR SCHEDULE14PREFINISHED STANDING SEEM METAL ROOFING WITHOUTSUBSTRATE SYSTEM -SEE STRUCTURAL15PREFINISHED STANDING SEEM METAL ROOFING -SEESPECS1610" HIGH 2" RAISE ALUMINUM LETTERS "FOUNTAIN HILLSFIRE STATION #3" AND 18" HIGH 2" RAISE ALUMINUMLETTERS INDICATING BUILDING ADDRESS AS AQUIREDFROM THE TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS1117EXTERIOR PAINTED TUBE STEEL DECORATIVE TRUSSES -SEE STRUCTURAL, PAINTED P7 PER COLOR SCHEDULE18EXTERIOR PAINTED TUBE STEEL ACCENT SUPPORTFRAMING @ 48" O.C. - SEE DETAIL 3/A4.219EXTERIOR PAINTED TUBE STEEL ACCENT SUPPORTFRAMING - SEE STRUCTURAL, PAINTED P7 PER COLORSCHEDULE20EXTERIOR PAINTED TUBE STEEL POST - SEE STRUCTURAL,PAINTED P7 PER COLOR SCHEDULEPAINT #P5(EIFS)MNFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: PRACTICAL BEIGE (SW 6100)LOCATION: EIFS AS INDICATED ON ELEVATIONPAINT #P6(EIFS &MASONRY)PAINT #P7(ACCENT &TRIM)PAINT & WALL FINISH LEGEND:MNFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: HALF-CAFF (SW 9091)LOCATION: ALL HARD-LID CEILING, U.N.OSTONEVENEER #SV1MNFR: ELDORADO STONESTYLE: SHADOW ROCKCOLOR: SOMERSETLOCATION: AS INDICATED ON ELEVATIONMNFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: UTAUPEIA (SW 9088)LOCATION: EIFS AS INDICATED ON ELEVTIONAND ALL EXTERIOR MASONRY212" EIFS SYNTHETIC STUCCO SYSTEM OVER WOOD STUDWALL SYSTEM -SEE WALL TYPES, PAINTED P6 PERCOLOR SCHEDULE1 City Comments 6/2/17 2A6.00' - 0" F.F. ELEVATIONA6.11A6.12A6.13A6.1412' - 8" T.O. WALL22' - 0" T.O. WALL20' - 4" T.O. WALL17' - 0" T.O. WALL1A6.0A6.1517' - 0" T.O. WALL27' - 6" T.O. ROOF0' - 0" F.F. ELEVATION8' - 0" OPENING16' - 8" B.O. FIXTURE4' - 6"2"2' - 8"4"14' - 0"4A6.0A6.211' - 6" F.F. ELEVATION18' - 4" T.O. BEARING11' - 6" T.O. ROOF5' - 6" T.O. WALL12' - 4" B.O. FIXTURE3A6.01' - 6" F.F. ELEVATIONA6.2212' - 8" T.O. BEARING22' - 0" T.O. WALL27' - 6" T.O. ROOF17' - 6" T.O. BEARING16' - 1" T.O. ROOF24' - 3" T.O. ROOF0' - 0" F.F. ELEVATION0' - 0" F.F. ELEVATION14' - 9" T.O. TRUSSA6.23A4.27TYP.1' - 6" F.F. ELEVATION12' - 2" T.O. BEARING15' - 8" T.O. TRUSS3' - 6".2' - 0"34" - 38" - SEE CIVILWINDOW FRAME - SEE SCHEDULEGWB - SEE WALL TYPES1 1/2" DIA. METAL PIPEHANDRAIL - TYP.1' - 0" MIN.1' - 0" MIN.34" - 38" - SEE CIVIL10' - 6" B.O. CEILING18' - 0"112EXTERIOR DAMPPROOFING AT ALL AREASBELOW GRADE -TYP.4" THICK CONCRETE RAMOW/ 4" ABC -SEESTRUCTURAL48" O.C.9' - 0"SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/5/2017 2:21:59 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA6.0SECTIONS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 1/8" = 1'-0"1Building Section 1 1/8" = 1'-0"2Building Section 2 1/8" = 1'-0"3Building Section 3 1/8" = 1'-0"4Building Section 4 1/8" = 1'-0"5Building Section 5 1/4" = 1'-0"6Building Section 6WOOD TRUSSES -SEESTRUCTURAL DRAWINGSFOAM POPOOUT W/PREFINISHED FLASHINGARTIFICIAL STONEVENEER OVER STUCCOSYSTEM -SEE SPECSCONCRETE SLAB OVERABC -SEE STRUCTURALCONCRETE FOOTING -SEE STRUCTURALPREFINISHED METALFLASHING, 2X8 FASCIABOARD AND TILE ROOFCLOSURE PANELDIRECT APPLIED STUCCOSYSTEMSYNETHIC STUCCOSYSTEM OVER 1" FOAMAND BUILDING WRAP-SEE SPECSR-19 BATT INSULATIONCONCRETE ROOF TILESW/ PLYWOODSHEATHING -SEE SPECSHARD LID CEILINGSYSTEM -SEE RCPR-38 BATT INSULATIONTUBE STEEL OUTRIGGERSAT 48" O.C. -SEESTRUCTURAL 1/4" = 1'-0"7Ramp Section 12' - 8" T.O. WALL2' - 0"A4.2112' - 8" T.O. BEARING22' - 0" T.O. WALLA4.2414' - 10" T.O. BEARINGA4.2514' - 10" T.O. BEARING20' - 4" T.O. BEARING20' - 4" T.O. BEARINGA4.2612' - 2" T.O. BEARING14' - 0" T.O. OVERHEAD0' - 0" F.F. ELEVATION19' - 8" T.O. BEARING4' - 6"1' - 8"2"2' - 8"4"14' - 0"5A6.2SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/5/2017 2:13:01 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA6.1WALLSECTIONS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 1/2" = 1'-0"1Building Section 1 - Callout 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2Building Section 1 - Callout 2 1/2" = 1'-0"3Building Section 1 - Callout 3 1/2" = 1'-0"4Building Section 1 - Callout 4 1/2" = 1'-0"5Building Section 2 - Callout 1R-19 BATT INSULATIONDIRECT APPLIED STUCCOSYSTEM TO BOTTOM OFDENSGLASS SHEATHINGDECORATIVE TUBE STEELOUTRIGGERS AT 4'-0" O.C.SYNETHIC STUCCOSYSTEM OVER 1" FOAMAND BUILDING WRAP-SEE SPECSFOAM ACCENT POPOUTABOVE ARTIFICIAL STONEVENEERARTIFICIAL STONE VENEER-SEE SPECSARTIFICIAL STONE VENEER-SEE SPECSCONCRETE FOUNDATIONWALL AND RETAININGWALL -SEE STRUCTURALAND CIVIL FOR SIZEPREFINISHED WEEPSCREED PER MANUF. 8"ABOVE FINISH GRADEFINISH GRADECONCRETE FOOTING -SEE STRUCTURALCONCRETE ROOF TILESW/ PLYWOODSHEATHING -SEE SPECSR-38 BATT INSULATIONPREFINISHED COPING,EXTEND ROOFINGBELOWCEILING SYSTEM -SEESPECSCMU WALL -SEE WALLTYPES AND STRUCTURALCONCRETE SLAB OVERABC -SEE STRUCTURALCONCRETE FOOTING -SEE STRUCTURALCONCRETE ROOF TILESW/ PLYWOODSHEATHING -SEE SPECSWOOD TRUSS SYSTEM -SEE STRUCTURAL2" FOAM ROOFING SYSTEMW/ 2" RIGID INSULATIONAND PLYWOOD SHEATHING-SEE SPECSEXPANSION JOINT W/TRAFFIC SEALANTROUND PERIMETEREXPANSION JOINT W/TRAFFIC SEALANTAROUND PERIMETERR-38 BATT INSULATIONPREFINISHED FLASHING,EXTEND UNDERLAYMENTBELOWCONCRETE SLAB OVERABC -SEE STRUCTURALCONCRETE ROOF TILESW/ PLYWOODSHEATHING -SEE SPECSPAINTED WOOD TRUSSSYSTEM -SEESTRUCTURALPAINTED WOOD TRUSSSYSTEM -SEESTRUCTURALR-38 VINYL FACED BATTINSULATIONCEILING SYSTEM -SEESPECSCMU WALL -SEE WALLTYPES AND STRUCTURALCONCRETE SLAB OVERABC -SEE STRUCTURALCONCRETE FOOTING -SEE STRUCTURALCONCRETE ROOF TILESW/ PLYWOODSHEATHING -SEE SPECSWOOD TRUSS SYSTEM -SEE STRUCTURAL2" FOAM ROOFING SYSTEMW/ 2" RIGID INSULATIONAND PLYWOOD SHEATHING-SEE SPECSEXPANSION JOINT W/TRAFFIC SEALANTROUND PERIMETERPAINTED WOOD TRUSSSYSTEM -SEESTRUCTURALSYNETHIC STUCCOSYSTEM OVER 1" FOAMAND BUILDING WRAP-SEE SPECSR-38 BATT INSULATION2" FOAM ROOFING SYSTEMW/ 2" RIGID INSULATIONAND PLYWOOD SHEATHING-SEE SPECSPAINTED 8" CMU WALL -SEE WALL TYPESPAINTED STEEL BEAM -SEE STRUCTURALR-38 VINYL FACE BATTINSULATIONPAINTED TUBE STEELTRUSS -SEE STRUCTURALCMU WALL -SEE WALLTYPES AND STRUCTURALCONCRETE SLAB OVERABC -SEE STRUCTURALCONCRETE FOOTING -SEE STRUCTURALCONCRETE ROOF TILESW/ PLYWOODSHEATHING -SEE SPECSPAINTED WOOD TRUSSSYSTEM -SEESTRUCTURALSYNETHIC STUCCOSYSTEM OVER 1" FOAMAND BUILDING WRAP-SEE SPECSARTIFICIAL STONEVENEER OVER WOODFRAMED COLUMNFOAM ACCENT POPOUTABOVE ARTIFICIAL STONEVENEER2X8 PREFINISHED BREAKMETAL FASCIA W/ EDGEFLASHINGDIRECT APPLIED STUCCOSYSTEM TO BOTTOM OFDENSGLASS SHEATHING 18' - 5" T.O. BEARING1' - 6" F.F. ELEVATION.3' - 0"A4.23.2' - 0"12' - 6" T.O. BEARING16' - 6" T.O. WALL12' - 0" B.O. BEAM1' - 6" F.F. ELEVATION10' - 8" T.O. BEARING.2' - 0"0' - 0" F.F. ELEVATIONSEE STRUCTURAL4"SEE ELEVATIONS1" MIN.STEEL POST - SEE STRUCTURAL1/2" PLYWOOD W/ UNDERLAYMENT2X FRAMING 2X CROSS BRACING @ 24" O.C. -SEE STRUCTURALSTONE VENEER W/ MORTAREDJOINTS - SEE SPECS.PREFINISHED METAL FLASHINGW/ WEEP HOLES PER. MANUF.1/2" EXPANSION JOINT W/TRAFFIC SEALANTCONCRETE FOOTING - SEESTRUCTURALFINISH GRADEFOAM INSULLATION W/SYNTHETIC STUCCO4"CAULKING AROUNDPERIMETER OF TUBE STEELSTEEL POST - SEE STRUCTURAL1/2" PLYWOOD W/ UNDERLAYMENT2X FRAMING 2X CROSS BRACING @ 1'-6" O.C.- SEE STRUCTURALSTONE VENEER W/ MORTAREDJOINTS - SEE SPECS.PREFINISHED METAL FLASHINGW/ WEEP HOLES PER. MANUF.1/2" EXPANSION JOINT W/TRAFFIC SEALANTCONCRETE FOOTING - SEESTRUCTURALFINISH GRADEFOAM INSULLATION W/SYNTHETIC STUCCOCAULKING AROUND PERIMETEROF TUBE STEELSEE STRUCTURALSEE ELEVATIONS2"1" MIN.4"2' - 0 1/4"10' - 7"12' - 9"SEALANT AROUND PERIMETEROF WINDOW ASSEMBLYPREFINISHED WINDOWFLASHING2 X 8 PREFINISHEDMETAL FASCIASTRUCTURALSTANDING SEAM METALROOF SYSTEM - SEESPECS.PAINTED TUBE STEELPURLIN -SEE STRUCT.PAINTED TUBE STEELPOST W/ FOOTING - SEESTRUCTURALPAINTED CMURETAINING WALL W/SOLID CAP BLOCK4" CONCRETESIDEWALK TO DRAINAWAY FROM BUILDINGEXPANSION JOINT W/TRAFFIC SEALANTEXTERIOR WALL - SEEWALL TYPESPAINTED TUBE STEELJOIST -SEE STRUCT.4' - 0"12" PREFINISHEDVERTICAL FLASHING W/EXPANSION JOINT ANDTRAFFIC SEALANT1" WEEP HOLES AT 48"O.C. -TYP.CONCRETE STEM ANDFOOTING -SEESTRUCTURALSHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/5/2017 2:12:08 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA6.2WALLSECTIONS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 1/2" = 1'-0"1Building Section 3 - Callout 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2Building Section 4 - Callout 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3Building Section 5 - Callout 1SIPS INSULATED PANELSYSTEMFOAM POPOOUT ATWINDOW SILL W/PREFINISHED FLASHINGARTIFICIAL STONEVENEER OVER STUCCOSYSTEM -SEE SPECSCONCRETE SLAB OVERABC -SEE STRUCTURALCONCRETE FOOTING -SEE STRUCTURALPREFINISHED METALFLASHING, FASCIABOARD AND TILE ROOFCLOSURE PANEL2X4 FRAMING W/DENSGLASS SHEATHINGAND DIRECT APPLIEDSTUCCO SYSTEMSYNETHIC STUCCOSYSTEM OVER 1" FOAMAND BUILDING WRAP-SEE SPECSR-19 BATT INSULATIONFOAM POPOOUT ATWINDOW SILL W/PREFINISHED FLASHINGARTIFICIAL STONEVENEER OVER STUCCOSYSTEM -SEE SPECSSTEEL WINDOW AWNINGW/ PERFORATED FINISH -SEE STRUCTURALHM WINDOW ASSEMBLY -SEE WINDOW SCHEDULECONCRETE ROOF TILESW/ PLYWOODSHEATHING -SEE SPECS2" FOAM ROOFINGSYSTEM OVER PLYWOODSHEATHING -SEE SPECSFOAM POPOOUT ATWINDOW SILL W/PREFINISHED FLASHINGCONCRETE SLAB OVERABC -SEE STRUCTURALCONCRETE FOOTING -SEE STRUCTURALPREFINISHED METALFLASHINGR-38 BATT INSULATIONSYNETHIC STUCCOSYSTEM OVER 1" FOAMAND BUILDING WRAP-SEE SPECSR-19 BATT INSULATIONPREFINISHED METALFLASHING ABOVEWINDOWHM WINDOW ASSEMBLY -SEE WINDOW SCHEDULECONCRETE ROOF TILESW/ PLYWOOD SHEATHING-SEE SPECSWOOD TRUSSES -SEESTRUCTURAL DRAWINGSFOAM POPOOUT W/PREFINISHED FLASHINGARTIFICIAL STONEVENEER OVER STUCCOSYSTEM -SEE SPECSCONCRETE SLAB OVERABC -SEE STRUCTURALCONCRETE FOOTING -SEE STRUCTURALPREFINISHED METALFLASHING, 2X8 FASCIABOARD AND TILE ROOFCLOSURE PANELDIRECT APPLIED STUCCOSYSTEMSYNETHIC STUCCOSYSTEM OVER 1" FOAMAND BUILDING WRAP-SEE SPECSR-19 BATT INSULATIONCONCRETE ROOF TILESW/ PLYWOODSHEATHING -SEE SPECSPREFINISHED WEEPSCREEDSTRUCTURAL BEAM -SEESTRUCTURAL2X8 PREFINISHED METALFASCIA AND METALFLASHINGDIRECT APPLIEDSYNTHETIC STUCCOOVER 1/2" DENSGLASSEXTEMD ROOFINGUNDER PARAPET COPINGPREFINISHED METALCOPINGPREFINISHED METALWEEP SCREEDPREFINISHED METALWINDOW SILL FLASHING,CAULK PERIMETER OFWINDOW -TYP.HARD LID CEILINGSYSTEM -SEE RCPR-19 BATT INSULATION11 1/2" = 1'-0"5BAY COLUMN DETAIL 1/2" = 1'-0"6ENTRY COLUMN DETAIL 1/2" = 1'-0"4CANOPY SECTION1 City Comments 6/2/17PREFINISHED STUCCOWEEP SCREED 4" WOOD STUD @ 16" O.C.NEW 5/8" GYPSUM WALLBOARD SHEATHING - EXTENDSHEATHING 1/2" FROM FLOORTO SHEATHING -SEE BUILDINGSECTIONSUSE MOISTURE RESISTANCE GYP. BOARD AT ALL PLUMBINGWALLS; REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE FOR FINAL WALL FINISHNOTE: PROVIDE W.R. G.W.B.AT WET AREAS ANDRESTROOMSSOUND BATT INSULATIONWITH FLAME SPREAD RATINGOF 25 OR LESS AND SMOKEDENSITY OF 450 OR LOWER8"x8"x16" MASONRYUNIT W/ FOAM FILLEDCELLSPAINT FINISH GRAYBOTH SIDES6" WOOD STUD FRAMING AT 16"O.C. -SEE STRUCTURALR19 BATT INSULATION WITHFLAME SPREAD RATING OF 25 ORLESS AND SMOKE DENSITY OF450 OR LOWER5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARDSHEATHING -EXTEND 1/2" FROMFLOOR TO SHEATHING8" REVEAL CEMENT BOARDSIDING -SEE SPECIFICATIONS1/2" EXTERIOR GYPBOARD.(DENSGLASS GOLD)USE MOISTURE RESISTANCE GYP. BOARD AT ALL PLUMBINGWALLS; REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE FOR FINAL WALL FINISH30# FELT BUILDING PAPER6" WOOD STUD FRAMING AT 16"O.C. -SEE STRUCTURALR19 BATT INSULATION WITHFLAME SPREAD RATING OF 25 ORLESS AND SMOKE DENSITY OF450 OR LOWER5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARDSHEATHING -EXTEND 1/2" FROMFLOOR TO SHEATHINGONE COAT W/ SYNTHETICSTUCCO SYSTEM -SEESPECIFICATIONS1/2" EXTERIOR GYPBOARD.(DENSGLASS GOLD)USE MOISTURE RESISTANCE GYP. BOARD AT ALL PLUMBINGWALLS; REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE FOR FINAL WALL FINISH30# FELT BUILDING PAPER4" WOOD STUD FURRING5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARDSHEATHING - EXTENDSHEATHING1_2" FROM FLOORTO SHEATHING TYP. U.N.O.8"x8"x16" MASONRY UNIT W/FOAM FILLED CELLSR-15 BATT INSULATION -EXTEND TO SHEATHINGGYP. BOARD; SEE FINISHSCHEDULESUSE MOISTURE RESISTANCE GYP. BOARD AT ALL PLUMBINGWALLS; REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE FOR FINAL WALL FINISHNEW 4" WOOD STUD @ 16"O.C.NEW 5/8" GYPSUM WALLBOARD SHEATHING - EXTENDSHEATHING 1/2" FROM FLOORTO SHEATHING -SEE BUILDINGSECTIONSUSE MOISTURE RESISTANCE GYP. BOARD AT ALL PLUMBINGWALLS; REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE FOR FINAL WALL FINISHNOTE: PROVIDE W.R. G.W.B.AT WET AREAS ANDRESTROOMS6" WOOD STUD @ 16" O.C.NEW 5/8" GYPSUM WALLBOARD SHEATHING - EXTENDSHEATHING 1/2" FROM FLOORTO SHEATHING -SEE BUILDINGSECTIONSUSE MOISTURE RESISTANCE GYP. BOARD AT ALL PLUMBINGWALLS; REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE FOR FINAL WALL FINISHNOTE: PROVIDE W.R. G.W.B.AT WET AREAS ANDRESTROOMSSOUND BATT INSULATIONWITH FLAME SPREAD RATINGOF 25 OR LESS AND SMOKEDENSITY OF 450 OR LOWER6" WOOD STUD FRAMING AT 16"O.C. -SEE STRUCTURALSOUND BATT INSULATION WITHFLAME SPREAD RATING OF 25 ORLESS AND SMOKE DENSITY OF450 OR LOWER5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARDSHEATHING -EXTEND 1/2" FROMFLOOR TO SHEATHINGUSE MOISTURE RESISTANCE GYP. BOARD AT ALL PLUMBINGWALLS; REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE FOR FINAL WALL FINISHSEE FLOOR PLANINTERIOR GYPSUM WALL BOARD OVERMETAL STUDS - REFER TO WALLTYPESINTERIOR WALL - REFER TO WALL TYPESTERMINATION EDGE AND SEALANTCONTINUOUS AT BOTH SIDES OFWALLACOUSTICAL INSULATION BLANKET WHERESCHEDULEDMETAL STUD; AT 24" O.C. U.N.O.GYPSUM BOARD; 5/8" TYPE 'X'CMU WALLTERMINATION EDGE AND SEALANTCONTINUOUS AT BOTH SIDES OFWALLPARTITION TO CMUPARTITION TO PARTITION2 LAYERS 5/8" TYPE 'X'GYPSUM WALL BOARD -EXTEND TO STRUCTUREABOVESUSPENDEDACOUSTICAL PANELCEILING SYSTEMCONCRETE SLABPNEUMATIC OR POWDERDRIVEN FASTENERSEALANT;CONTINUOUS BEADWOOD STUD;CONTINUOUSROOF/FLOOR DECKABOVEFASTENER ATSTRUCTURE -SEESTRUCTURALENGINEERWOOD STUDS AT 24" O.C.U.N.O. - EXTEND TOSTRUCTURE ABOVESEALANT;CONTINUOUS BEAD2 LAYERS 5/8" TYPE'X' GYPSUM WALLBOARD - EXTENDTO STRUCTUREABOVESUSPENDEDACOUSTICAL PANELCEILING SYSTEM4" ACOUSTIC BATTINSULATION.AT CORRIDOR SIDEADJUST WALLFRAMING FORADDITIONAL GYP.BOARD LAYER.ACOUSTICAL BATT INSULATIONWOOD STUD;CONTINUOUSGYPSUM BOARD; 5/8"TYPE 'X'BASE PER FINISHSCHEDULEFLOOR COVERINGPER FINISH SCH.CORNER TAPE ANDJOINT COMPOUNDSUSPENDED GYPSUMBOARD CEILINGSYSTEMSUSPENDED ACOUSTICALPANEL CEILING SYSTEMCONCRETE SLABWOOD STUDS AT 24"O.C. U.N.O.PNEUMATIC ORPOWDER DRIVENFASTENERSEALANT;CONTINUOUS BEADWOOD STUD;CONTINUOUSWOOD STUD BRACE;ALTERNATE DIRECTIONPERPENDICULAR TOPARTITION AT 48" O.C.TYPICALSTRUCTURE ABOVE45°±5°6"PROVIDE JOINT IN DRYWALLWHERE OCCURING AT MASONRYCONTROL JOINTSMIN. 1/2" DEEP TREMCOTREMSTOP ACRYLIC SEALANTSTEEL ROOF DECK - SEESTRUCTURAL DRAWINGS.UNFACED BATT INSULATIONPACKED TIGHT INTO DECKFLUTES.5/8" GYPSUM BOARD ATTACHEDTO MASONRY WALL. PROVIDESEALANT ALL SIDES AT DECKAND MASONRY WALL.MASONRY WALL - SEE FLOOR PLANAND RCP SHEETS. VERIFY STUCCOFINISH WITH EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS.8"x8"x16" MASONRY UNITW/ FOAM FILLED CELLSONE COAT W/ SYNTHETICSTUCCO SYSTEM -SEESPECIFICATIONS2" FOAM INSULATION W/BUILDING WRAP30# FELT BUILDING PAPERSHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/5/2017 2:16:28 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA6.3WALL TYPESAND DETAILS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 1 1/2" = 1'-0"1Wall Type - 4" Interior Stud Wall 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2Wall Type- Interior CMU wall 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3Wall Type-Exterior 6" cement boardwall 1 1/2" = 1'-0"4Wall Type-Exterior 6" Stucco wall 1 1/2" = 1'-0"5Wall Type-Exterior CMU withfurring 1 1/2" = 1'-0"8Wall Type-Interior 4" stud wall 1 1/2" = 1'-0"9Wall Type-Interior 6" stud wall 1 1/2" = 1'-0"7Wall Type-Interior chase wall 1 1/2" = 1'-0"03WALL - WALL CONNECTIONS 1 1/2" = 1'-0"04WALL - SOUND PARTITION 1 1/2" = 1'-0"01WALL - PARTITION THRUCEILING 1 1/2" = 1'-0"02WALL - NON-RATED CONTROLJOINT 1 1/2" = 1'-0"05WALL - MASONRY TO DECKCLOSURE 1 1/2" = 1'-0"6Wall Type- Exterior Stucco FinishWall11 City Comments 6/2/171 C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4TABLE NICTTTTT T T TTT1' - 8"5' - 4 1/4"1' - 6"SDLAVMIRAWCGBTPDHD4 3/4"8' - 6 1/4"6 3/4"4 3/4"8' - 7 3/4"1' - 2 1/4"ø 5' - 0"-A7.123414' - 0"3' - 0"SHRHRHRHADASIGNGB1' - 6"3' - 0" CLR.GBFDFD1' - 8"5' - 4 1/4"1' - 6"1' - 8"5' - 3 1/4"1' - 6"SDAWCMIRHDGBTPDLAVSDAWCMIRHDGBTPDLAV4 3/4"8' - 6 1/4"6 1/2"8' - 5 1/4"6 3/4"4 3/4"9' - 1 3/4"8"1 1/4"4 3/4"8' - 7 3/4"6 3/4"ø 5' - 0"ø 5' - 0"A7.134124' - 0"3' - 0"4' - 0"3' - 0"A7.13412ADASIGNADASIGN1' - 6"1' - 6"3' - 0" CLR.3' - 0" CLR.RHRHRHSHRHRHRHSH FDFDFD FDGBGB GBGB4 3/4"1' - 6"4' - 0 1/4"1' - 6"6 3/4"ø 5' - 0"GBAWCTPDSDLAVMIRHD7' - 11 3/4"4 3/4"6' - 11 1/4"4 3/4"A7.15678GBGBDRINKINGFOUNTAIN1' - 10"LOWHIADASIGN6 3/4"1' - 6"5' - 5"1' - 6"6 3/4"ø 5' - 0"TPDAWCGBSDMIRLAVHD9' - 6 1/4"6 3/4"7' - 1"4 3/4"A7.19121110GBGBADASIGNA7.1131615144' - 11 1/4"4' - 0"4' - 0"4' - 0"3' - 6"22' - 0 1/2"REFRIGERATOR REFRIGERATOR REFRIGERATORRANGEDISHWASHERMICROWAVESTAINLESS STEELISLAND W/ CASTERS4'X4' DRY ERASEMARKERBOARDHOOD3' - 5"9' - 5 1/4"3' - 3 3/4"2' - 6" PER MANUF.2' - 1"7' - 0"3' - 0"SINKSHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:33:37 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA7.0ENLARGEDPLANS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #21. ALL DIMENSIONS TO BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD BEFORE FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION.2. ADA ACCESSIBLE CLEARANCES ARE CLEAR DIMENSIONS. PROVIDE FINISHED OPENINGS AT RESTROOMS, SHOWERS & ACCESSIBLE AREAS PER REQUIREMENTS OF THE ADA ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY OPENING IN ORDER TO MEET ALL REQUIREMENTS INDICATED BEFOREHAND.3. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE BLOCKING IN ALL RESTROOMS FOR PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER, COAT HOOK, CHANGING STATIONS, ETC. WHERE SHOWN AND INCLUDING OWNER PROVIDED ITEMS. CONTRACTOR PROVIDE ALL SUPPORT SYSTEMS AS NEEDED THROUGHOUT THE BUILDING.4. REFERENCE A9.0 FOR TOILET ACCESSORY ADA MOUNTING HEIGHTS.GENERAL NOTES: 1/4" = 1'-0"1ENLARGED RESTROOM 131 1/4" = 1'-0"2ENLARGED RESTROOM 128 &129 1/4" = 1'-0"3ENLARGED RESTROOM 105 1/4" = 1'-0"4ENLARGED RESTROOM 101 1/4" = 1'-0"5ENLARGED KITCHEN11 City Comments 6/2/17 4" X 12" STACKED TILEPANTRYPAINTED AND TEXTUREDGYP. WALL BOARDDOOR AND FRAME -SEE DOOR SCHEDULESCHLUTER STRIPTRANSITIONREFRIGERATOR (3)SEE SPECIFICATION3' - 0"32-15-2436-27-1242-24-241' - 6" 3' - 0" 0' - 6"PANTRY SHELVINGDRY ERASE BOARDBASEBOARDATTACHED TOCABINET DOORADA 48" ACCESSIBLECABINET1' - 6"1' - 6"1' - 6"1' - 7"9' - 6"3' - 0"DWPAINTED AND TEXTUREDGYP. WALL BOARDDOOR AND FRAME -SEE DOOR SCHEDULESCHLUTER STRIPTRANSITION4" X 12" TILE RUNNINGREFRIGERATOR (3)OPEN SPACEDRY ERASE BOARDEXTERIOR METAL DOORW/ GLASS 2" FRAMESINK KITCHEN DOUBLE42" x 21"48" ADA BASE CABINETBASEBOARD ATTACHEDTO CABINET DOORSWINDOW AND FRAME -SEE WINDOW DETAILS0' - 6"3' - 0"1' - 8"2' - 10"32-48-2432-48-2436-36-124"X16" TILE RUNNINGRANGE HOODSEE SPEC.EXHAUST VENTTHROUGH WALL TOEXTERIORMICROWAVESEE SPEC.RANGESEE SPEC.REFRIGERATOR (3)32-39-245' - 0"3' - 0"0' - 6"3' - 0"4' - 6"WINDOW ANDFRAME -SEEWINDOW DETAILS8' - 0"FROSTED GLASSCABINET DOORS32-24-2434-24-2437-30-1236-39-1236-36-12C-24-38-1224-36-12C-24-38-1236-21-1236-21-1242-24-2434-36-36ADA GRAB BARSADA WATER CLOSETSOAP DISPENSER -SEESPECS24"X36" WALL MOUNTEDMIRROR -SEE SPECSADA ACCESSIBLELAVATORY W/WRAPPED PIPESFULL HEIGHT 4"X16"RUNNING BOND TILE -SEE SPECS2' - 10"3' - 4"4' - 0"SCHLUTER STRIP COVEBASEHANDDRYER4' - 0"LAVATORY -SEEPLUMBINGFULL HEIGHT 4"X16"RUNNING BOND TILE -SEE SPECS8" HIGH 4"X16" RUNNINGTILE BASE -SEE SPECSSCHLUTER STRIP COVEBASESCHLUTER STRIPTRANSITIONPAINTED AND TEXTUREDGYP. WALL BOARDFULL HEIGHT 4"X16"RUNNING TILE -SEESPECSSHOWER CURTAINAND RODADA SHOWER HEADAND CONTROLS8" HIGH 4"X16"RUNNING TILE BASE -SEE SPECSSCHLUTER STRIPTRANSITIONSCHLUTER STRIPCOVE BASE4' - 0"ADA GRAB BARSTOILET PAPERDISPENSERADA WATER CLOSET -SEEPLUMBINGADA SHOWER HEADAND CONTROLSSCHLUTER STRIP COVEBASEADA WATER CLOSETADA GRAB BARS24"X36" WALL MOUNTEDMIRROR -SEE SPECSSOAP DISPENSER -SEESPECSADA ACCESSIBLELAVATORY W/WRAPPED PIPES2' - 10"3' - 2"4' - 0"2' - 10"FULL HEIGHT 4"X16"RUNNING BOND TILE-SEE SPECSSCHLUTER STRIPCOVE BASEHAND DRYER4' - 0"FULL HEIGHT 4"X16"RUNNING BOND TILE-SEE SPECSSCHLUTER STRIPTRANSITIONLAVATORY -SEEPLUMBING8" HIGH 4"X16"RUNNING BOND TILEBASE -SEE SPECSSCHLUTER STRIPCOVE BASEPAINTED AND TEXTUREDGYP. WALL BOARD4' - 0"PAINTED AND TEXTUREDGYP. WALL BOARDDOOR AND FRAME -SEEDOOR SCHEDULE8" HIGH 4"X16" RUNNINGBOND TILE BASE -SEESPECSSCHLUTER STRIPTRANSITIONSCHLUTER STRIP COVEBASEADA GRAB BARSTOILET PAPERDISPENSER -SEE SPECSFULL HEIGHT 4"X16"RUNNING BOND TILE-SEE SPECSADA WATER CLOSET -SEE PLUMBINGSCHLUTER STRIP COVEBASEADA GRAB BARSADA WATERCLOSET -SEEPLUMBING24"X36" WALLMOUNTED MIRROR -SEE SPECSADA ACCESSIBLELAVATORY W/WRAPPED PIPESSOAP DISPENSER -SEE SPECS3' - 2"2' - 10"4' - 0"2' - 10"FULL HEIGHT4"X16" RUNNINGBOND TILE -SEESPECSSCHLUTER STRIPCOVE BASEHAND DRYERFULL HEIGHT 4"X16"RUNNING BOND TILE-SEE SPECSPAINTED AND TEXTUREDGYP. WALL BOARDSCHLUTER STRIPTRANSITION8" HIGH 4"X16"RUNNING BOND TILEBASE -SEE SPECS4' - 0"PAINTED AND TEXTUREDGYP. WALL BOARD8" HIGH 4"X16"RUNNING BOND TILEBASE -SEE SPECSSCHLUTER STRIPCOVE BASESCHLUTER STRIPTRANSITIONDOOR AND FRAME -SEEDOOR SCHEDULEADA GRAB BARSTOILET PAPERDISPENSER -SEESPECS2' - 10"3' - 5"2' - 6"3' - 5"3' - 0"1' - 3"4' - 6"SCHLUTER STRIPCOVE BASEFULL HEIGHT 4"X16"RUNNING BOND TILE -SEE SPECSFOLDING COUNTERTOP 24"DDRY ERASE BOARD34"AFFFLAT SCREEN TV55"WINDOW ANDFRAME -SEEWINDOW DETAILS2' - 6"DRY ERASE BOARD34" AFF2' - 10"4' - 0 1/4"COUNTER TOPCELING FANHEAVY DUTYSUPPORTS @ 48"O.C.(5) GROMMETS ALOCATED BYOWNERFLAT SCREEN TV65"TRANSPARENTGLASS CABINETDOORS34-36-2434-36-2434-36-2434-36-2434-36-241" SHELVES,PLACED 7" O.C.COUNTERTOP1' - 2"3' - 0"FOLDING COUNTERTOP 24"DDRY ERASE BOARD34" AFFFLAT SCREENTV 55"4' - 0 1/4"2' - 10"SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:32:27 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA7.1INTERIORELEVATIONS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES06/02/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 1/4" = 1'-0"13Kitchen - A 1/4" = 1'-0"14Kitchen - B 1/4" = 1'-0"15Kitchen - C 1/4" = 1'-0"16Kitchen - D 1/4" = 1'-0"1Restrooms 128, 129, 131 - A 1/4" = 1'-0"2Restrooms 128, 129, 131 - B 1/4" = 1'-0"3Restrooms 128, 129, 131 - C 1/4" = 1'-0"4Restrooms 128, 129, 131 - D 1/4" = 1'-0"5Restroom 105 - A 1/4" = 1'-0"6Restroom 105 - B 1/4" = 1'-0"7Restroom 105 - C 1/4" = 1'-0"8Restroom 105 - D 1/4" = 1'-0"9Restroom 101 - A 1/4" = 1'-0"10Restroom 101 - B 1/4" = 1'-0"11Restroom 101 - C 1/4" = 1'-0"12Restroom 101 - D1 1/4" = 1'-0"17Community Room 103-A 1/4" = 1'-0"19Training Room 106-A 1/4" = 1'-0"20Training Room 106-B 1/4" = 1'-0"25Day Room 112-A 1/4" = 1'-0"18Community Room 103-B1 City Comments 6/2/171 PLASTICLAMINATE BASECABINETPLASTICLAMINATECOUNTER TOP3 1/2"2' - 8 1/2"2' - 0"1' - 6"2' - 0"PLASTICLAMINATE BASECABINETPLASTICLAMINATECOUNTER TOPICE MACHINE-SEE SPECIFICATIONDOOR AND FRAME -SEE DOORSCHEDULE8" MASONRYPAINTED3 1/2"2' - 8 1/2"2' - 0"2' - 0"PLASTICLAMINATE BACECABINETPLASTICLAMINATECOUNTER TOP2' - 0"2' - 0"3 1/2" 2' - 8 1/2"4' - 1"PLASTICLAMINATE BACECABINETPLASTICLAMINATECOUNTER TOP3 1/2" 2' - 8 1/2"1' - 6"2' - 0"3 1/2"2' - 8 1/2"2' - 0"9' - 0"PLASTICLAMINATE BACECABINETCOUNTER TOPDOOR AND FRAME -SEE DOORSCHEDULE8" MASONRYPAINTED2' - 0"2' - 0"2' - 8 1/2"3 1/2"5' - 9"BBQ GRILL SEESPEC. SHEET8" PAINTEDMASONRYBLOCK4" CONCRETECOUNTER TOP7 1/2"3' - 1 1/4"4' - 0"3' - 0"5' - 6"BBQ GRILL SEESPEC. SHEET8" MASONRYBLOCKCOUNTER TOPDRYER AND WASHINGMACHINE-SEE SPECIFICATIONUTILITY SINK -SEEPLUMINGMOP SINK -SEEPLUMBINGMOP SINK -SEESPECIFICATION5"1' - 5"2' - 0"METAL TABLE -SEESPECIFICATION6' - 1"PLASTIC LAMINATEDORM BUNK WITHLOCKABLE DRAWERSVERIFY MATTRESS SIZEPRIOR TO FABRICATION36" FLATSCREEN TVCOMPUTERWORKDESKTASK LIGHT-SEEELECTRICALTACKABLE WALLPANEL8"2' - 6"2' - 1"6' - 0"36" FLATSCREEN TVPLASTIC LAMINATEDORM BUNK WITHLOCKABLE DRAWERSVERIFY MATTRESSSIZE PRIOR TOFABRICATIONPLASTICLAMINATECOMPUTERWORK DESKTASK LIGHT-SEE ELECTRICALTACKABLE WALLPANEL4' - 0 3/4"2' - 6"2' - 1"DOOR AND FRAME -SEE DOORSCHEDULEDRY ERASE BOARED-SEE SPECIFICATION36" FLAT SCREEN TV-SEE SPECIFICATIONTASK LIGHT-SEE ELECTRICALPLASTIC LAMINATECOMPUTER/ WORKDESKTACKABLE WALLPANEL2' - 2"1' - 0"EMERGENCYNOTIFICATIONSYSTEM -SEE DETAIL2' - 6"4' - 7"2' - 1"DRY ERASEBOARD36" FLATSCREEN TVADJUSTABLESHELVESCLOTHINGHOOKPLASTICLAMINATELOCKERSPLASTIC LAMINATELOCKABLE STORAGECLOTHINGHOOKUPHOLSTERED BENCH18" AFFWITH VELCRO PLACEHOLDERS18X30X65 18X30X65 18X30X6536X30X1936X30X1936X30X191' - 6 3/4"5' - 5"6' - 11 3/4"3 1/2" 2' - 8 1/2"2' - 0"2' - 0"PANTRYSHELVING48"X24" (X3)PLASTICLAMINATE BASECABINETPLASTICLAMINATECOUNTER TOPSHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:30:45 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA7.2INTERIORELEVATIONS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 1/4" = 1'-0"8Storage 140-B 1/4" = 1'-0"9Storage 140-C 1/4" = 1'-0"12SCBA 138-C 1/4" = 1'-0"11SCBA 138-B 1/4" = 1'-0"10SCBA 138-A 1/4" = 1'-0"13Elevation Grill-A 1/4" = 1'-0"14Elevation Grill-B 1/4" = 1'-0"5Loundry 130-A 1/4" = 1'-0"6Bio Hazard 137-A 1/4" = 1'-0"1CAP. Dorm 123-A 1/4" = 1'-0"2Dorm 122-A 1/4" = 1'-0"3Dorm 122-B 1/4" = 1'-0"4Dorm 122-C 1/4" = 1'-0"7S SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:29:35 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA8.0SCHEDULES16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2Room Finish ScheduleNumber NameFloorFinishBaseFinishWallsCeiling FinishCommentsNorth East South West100EntryF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C1101Unisex RestroomF2 B2 WF4 WF4 WF4 WF4 C5102OfficeF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C1103Community RoomF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C1104OfficeF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C1105Unisex RestroomF2 B2 WF4 WF4 WF4 WF4 C5106TrainingF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C1107FRF1 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C4108MechanicalF1 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C4109ITF1 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C4110CorridorF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C1111FitnessF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C4, C2112DayroomF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C4, C2113KitchenF2 B1 WF1, WF4 WF1 WF1, WF4 WF4 C4, C2114STF2 B1 WF4 WF4 WF4 WF4 C4115STF2 B1 WF4 WF4 WF4 WF4 C4116STF2 B1 WF4 WF4 WF4 WF4 C4117CorridorF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C1, C6118DormF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C4119DormF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C4120DormF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C4121DormF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C4122DormF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C4123DormF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C4124STF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C4125STF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C4126STF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C4127CorridorF2 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C1128Unisex RestroomF2 B2 WF4 WF4 WF4 WF4 C5129Unisex RestroomF2 B2 WF4 WF4 WF4 WF4 C5130LaundryF2 B1 WF2 WF2 WF3 WF3 C5131Unisex RestroomF2 B2 WF4 WF4 WF4 WF4 C5132TurnoutsF2 B1 WF2 WF2 WF2 WF2 C5133EntryF2 B1 WF2 WF2 WF2 WF2 C5134Apparatus Bay 1F3 B1 WF5 WF5 WF5 WF5 C3135Apparatus Bay 2F3 B1 WF5 WF5 WF5 WF5 C3136Apparatus Bay 3F3 B1 WF5 WF5 WF5 WF5 C3137BiohazardF2 B1 WF3 WF3 WF3 WF3 C5138SCBAF2 B1 WF2 WF2 WF2 WF2 C1139Med StorageF1 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C1140StorageF1 B1 WF1 WF1 WF1 WF1 C4FOR PURPOSES OF THIS SCHEDULE, PLAN NORTH IS TOBE USED FOR PARTITION ORIENTATION..CEILING HEIGHT MAY VARY - SEE SECTIONS ANDREFLECTED CEILING PLAN.SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR DESIGNATEDPARTITIONS WHICH EXTEND FULL HEIGHT ABOVECEILINGS TO UNDERSIDE OF FLOOR OR ROOF DECK FORACOUSTIC SEPARATION. GYP. BD. ABOVE CLG. REQUIRESTAPING BUT NO PAINT.ROOMS THAT ARE TURNED AT A 45° ANGLE TO THENORTH-SOUTH ORIENTATION, THE TOP LEFT WALL SHALLBE CONSIDERED THE NORTH WALL AS IT RELATES TO THEFINISH SCHEDULE.ROOMS THAT HAVE MORE THAN FOUR WALLS, FINISH THEEXTRA WALL AS IT RELATES TO NOTE "D" ABOVE OR PERTHE DIRECT NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST ORIENTATION.SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR MORE INFORMATION W/ FINISHPRODUCTS AND PROCEDURES.USE MOISTURE RESISTANT GYP. BD. AT KITCHEN,,RESTROOMS, AND ANY SINK/DRINKING FOUNTAINLOCATIONS. TYP.REFERENCE SHEET A8.1 - A8.4 FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION REGARDING FLOORING FINISHES ANDWALL PAINTING.ALL OUTLET AND LIGHT SWITCH FACE PLATES SHALL BESTAINLESS STEEL FINISH. RECEPTACLES AND SWITCHESSHALL BE WHITE FINISH.ALL ACCESS PANELS PROVIDED SHALL BE PAINTED TOMATCH ADJACENT WALL/CEILING COLOR OR STAINLESSSTEEL FINISH AT CLOCK AND CERAMIC TILED WALLS.ALL WALL DEVICES MOUNTED IN CENTER OF BLOCK ANDUSE SMOOTH FACE BLOCK AT ALL LOCATIONSSEE FINISH FLOOR PLANS FOR LOCATIONS OF RECESSEDWALK-OFF MATS AND WALK OFF CARPET TILES.ALL JANITOR, RESTROOM, LOCKER, SHOWER, KITCHEN,LAUNDRY AND DRINKING FOUNTAIN AREAS TO RECEIVECERAMIC TILE BASE, B2. ALL OTHER AREAS TO RECEIVEB1, U.N.O. IN FINISH SCHEDULE NOTES.INTERIOR WALL AND CEILING FINISH SHALL HAVE A FLAMESPREAD INDEX NOT GREATER THAN THAT SPECIFIED INTABLE 803.5 FOR THE GROUP AND LOCATIONDESIGNATED. IN ADDITION, DECORATIVE MATERIALS ANDTRIM SHALL BE RESTRICTED BY COMBUSTIBILITY AND THEFLAME PROPAGATION PERFORMANCE CRITERIA OF NFPA701, IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 806.SEE TABLE THIS SHEET.E.D.B.C.GENERAL FINISH NOTESA.F.G.H.I.J.K.L.M.N.TABLE 803.5 (PARTIAL)INTERIOR WALL AND CEILING FINISHREQUIREMENTS BY OCCUPANCYSPRINKLEREDA-1 & A-2BGROUPEXIT ENCLOSURES &EXIT PASSAGEWAYSCORRIDORS ROOMS ANDENCLOSED SPACESA-3,A-4,A-5B,E,M,R-1,R-4BBBBCCCCROOM FINISH& MATERIALSF L O O R I N GF1SEALED CONCRETEF L O O R B A S EB14" RUBBER BASEW A L L F I N I S HWF1WF2C E I L I N GC1F2B2F324"x48" SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILESGWB WITH SEMI-GLOSS PAINTC2C3GWB WITH SEMI-GLOSS PAINTC4WR. GWB WITH GLOSS ENAMEL PAINTWF3C6DIRECT APPLIED SYNTHETIC STUCCO SOFFITC7C5GWB HEADER/BULKHEAD, PAINTEDWF4GLAZED CERAMIC TILE. SEE INTERIORELEVATIONS FOR TYPICAL PATTERNS ATRESTROOMSWF5FRP PANELS, SMOOTH TEXTURE OVER WR GBMASONRY WITH BLOCK FILL AND GLOSS ENAMEL PAINT1.SEE FINISH FLOOR PLANS FOR LOCATIONSOF ACCENT CARPET TILES F6, F7, F8 & F9.SEE RCP'S FOR DELINATION OF CEILINGMATERIALS AND HEIGHTS.SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR EXTENTSOF PLASTIC LAMINATE PANELS.SEE EXTERIOR BUILDING ELEVATIONS ANDRCPS FOR INFO THIS AREA.TILE WRAPS ALL EXPOSED FACES OFELEVATOR.SEE SPECS FOR MOVEABLE PARTITIONTHIS ROOM.SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR ACOUSTICWALL PANEL EXTENTS THIS ROOM.PLASTIC LAMINATE INTERIOR FINISH THISAREA INCLUDING DISPLAY BOTTOM.ELEVATOR INTERIOR WALL PANELS ANDCEILING PER MANUFACTURER.PROVIDE 2" ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE ANGLETRIM AT AREA OPEN TO DECK.NO GYP. BOARD RQUIRED ON SIDE OFMECH/PLUMBING CHASE.SEE FOOD SERVICE DRAWINGS FORREF/FREEZER SPECIFICATIONS.SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 1,2,3,4/A7.10FOR TYPICAL ACOUSTICAL PANEL LAYOUTTHIS ROOM.SEE SPECS FOR WALL & FLOOR MATS ANDMOBILE DANCE FLOOR FOR THIS ROOM.WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER TO HAVESEALED CONCRETE FLOORS WITH 3M GRIPSTRIPPING. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 6"STAINLESS STEEL COVE BASE &THRESHOLD.PROVIDE IMPACT RESISTANT GYP. BOARDTO 8'-0" AT HALLS/CORRIDORS TYP.2.3.ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE4.5.6.7.8.9.10.11.12.13.14.NOTES15.16.8" HIGH 4"X12" CERAMIC TILE W/ SCHLUTER STRIP TOP ANDBOTTOMPAINT COLORSP1INTERIOR FIELD - SHERWIN WILLIAMS: SAND DUNE (SW 6086)P2P3P4POLISHED CONCRETE - SALT AND PEPPER FINISH W/ SEALERPOLISHED CONCRETE - SALT AND PEPPER FINISH W/ SEALERAND DENSIFIERWR GWB WITH GLOSS PAINTEXPOSED CEILING W/ STAINED WOOD TRUSSES ASSELECTED BY ARCHITECTSPAINTED EXPOSED CEILINGNOTE:ADD SIGNAGE AT DOORS CONTAINING CONTROLS FOR AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS, SPRINKLER RISERS ANDVALVES, FIRE DETECTION , SUPPRESSION OR CONTROL ELEMENTS. APPROVED SIGNS REQUIRED TO IDENTIFYFIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT AND EQUIPMENT LOCATION, SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF DURABLE MATERIALS,PERMANENTLY INSTALLED AND READILY VISIBLE PER IFC 510.1Door ScheduleDoor FrameFireRatingLabelHardwareSet No.NotesMarkSizeThickness Material Finish ElevationGlazingTypeMaterial FinishWidth Height100A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM SEE NOTE101A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4101B 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4102A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4103A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4104A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4105A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4107A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P7108A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P7109A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P7110A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM SEE NOTE110B 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4111A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4111B 4' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4112A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4112B 12' - 0" 7' - 2" 0' - 2 11/32"HM P4113A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4113B 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM SEE NOTE114A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4115A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4116A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4117A 6' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM SEE NOTE117B 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4118A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4119A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4120A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4121A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4122A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4123A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4124A 2' - 4" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4125A 2' - 4" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4126A 2' - 4" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4127A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM SEE NOTE127B 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4128A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4129A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4130A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4131A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P4132A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM SEE NOTE132B 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM SEE NOTE134A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P7134B 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"STEEL P7134C 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"STEEL P7135A 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"STEEL P7135B 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"STEEL P7136A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM P7136B 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"STEEL P7136C 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"STEEL P7137A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM SEE NOTE137B 6' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM SEE NOTE138A 6' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM SEE NOTE139A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4"HM SEE NOTEWindow ScheduleType MarkSizeHeadHeightDetailElevation CommentsWidth HeightDetailHeadDetailJambDetail SillDetailMullionA 3' - 0" 4' - 0" 7' - 0"A 3' - 0" 4' - 0" 7' - 4"A 3' - 0" 4' - 0" 7' - 4"A 3' - 0" 4' - 0" 7' - 0"A 3' - 0" 4' - 0" 7' - 4"A 3' - 0" 4' - 0" 7' - 4"A 3' - 0" 4' - 0" 7' - 4"B 3' - 6" 5' - 0" 7' - 2"B 3' - 6" 5' - 0" 7' - 2"B 3' - 6" 5' - 0" 7' - 2"B 3' - 6" 5' - 0" 7' - 2"B 3' - 6" 5' - 0" 7' - 2"B 3' - 6" 5' - 0" 7' - 2"C 6' - 0" 5' - 0" 9' - 0"C 6' - 0" 5' - 0" 9' - 0"D 6' - 8" 4' - 0" 7' - 4"F 12' - 0" 7' - 2" 7' - 2"F 12' - 0" 7' - 2" 9' - 0"H 6' - 0" 3' - 0" 16' - 6"H 6' - 0" 3' - 0" 16' - 6"H 6' - 0" 3' - 0" 16' - 6"H 6' - 0" 3' - 0" 16' - 6"H 6' - 0" 3' - 0" 16' - 6"H 6' - 0" 3' - 0" 16' - 6"H 6' - 0" 3' - 0" 16' - 6"H 6' - 0" 3' - 0" 16' - 6"J 5' - 8" 5' - 0" 7' - 2"J 5' - 8" 5' - 0" 9' - 0"2.02.017.03.04.18.05.06.07.08.08.02.012.08.09.010.010.111.011.011.011.012.017.013.013.014.01.015.016.016.016.016.016.016.017.08.018.020.021.01BGGGKKKOOOCKKDGHKAGGGEAGGGGGGLLLOGGGGMNIIIIIIFFGFMJJ2342315231523423423423423423423423423423423423423423423423423423423423423423423423423423455555555555555AAAAAAABBBBBBCCDFFHHHJJHHHHHH22223223333333222222HMBIRCH SCHMBIRCH SCBIRCH SCBIRCH SCHMHMHMHMHMHMBIRCH SCBIRCH SCHMHMBIRCH SCBIRCH SCHMHMBIRCH SCBIRCH SCBIRCH SCBIRCH SCBIRCH SCBIRCH SCHMBIRCH SCBIRCH SCBIRCH SCBIRCH SCHMHMHMHMHMHMHMHMEXTERIOR PAINT P7, INTERIOR PAINT P4EXTERIOR PAINT P7, INTERIOR PAINT P4EXTERIOR PAINT P7, INTERIOR PAINT P4EXTERIOR PAINT P7, INTERIOR PAINT P4EXTERIOR PAINT P7, INTERIOR PAINT P4SEE NOTESEE NOTESEE NOTESEE NOTESEE NOTEEXTERIOR PAINT P7, INTERIOR PAINT P4SEE NOTEEXTERIOR PAINT P7, INTERIOR PAINT P4SEE NOTEEXTERIOR PAINT P7, INTERIOR PAINT P4SEE NOTEEXTERIOR PAINT P7, INTERIOR PAINT P4SEE NOTEEXTERIOR PAINT P7, INTERIOR PAINT P4SEE NOTEEXTERIOR PAINT P7, INTERIOR PAINT P4SEE NOTEBIRCH SCHMBIRCH SCBIRCH SCBIRCH SCBIRCH SCBIRCH SCP7STEELP7STEELP7STEELP7STEELP7STEELP7STEELP7P7P7P7P7P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4P4 45 MIN 45 MIN 45 MINP5P6P7INTERIOR ACCENT - SHERWIN WILLIAMS: LIESURE BLUE (SW6515)INTERIOR ACCENT - SHERWIN WILLIAMS: SIMPLE WHITE (SW7021)INTERIOR ACCENT - SHERWIN WILLIAMS: ELEPHANT EAR (SW9168)EXTERIOR FIELD - SHERWIN WILLIAMS: PRACTICAL BEIGE (SW6100)EXTERIOR FIELD - SHERWIN WILLIAMS: UTAUPEIA (SW 9088)EXTERIOR ACCENT - SHERWIN WILLIAMS: HALF-CAFF (SW 9091)11.019.019.04.010.010.010.031 City Comments 6/2/171 WOODARD DELUXE 42D 74WOVAL TABLE W/ TRELLIS TOPPICNICC1C1C1C1C1C1 - WC121P MULTI-PURPOSE CHAIR, FLEXNET SEAT, FIXED ARMSC2 - WC420N CAPER STACKING CHAIR, FLEXNET SEAT, NO ARMSC2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C3 - WC410N CAPER STACKING CHAIR, MOLDED SEAT, NO ARMSC4 - WC420P CAPER STACKING CHAIR, FLEXTNET SEAT, FIXED ARMSC4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4C4CAPER CHAIRKEYPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICPICNICC1C1C1C1TABLE NICTTT T TTTTTTTT T T T T TTTTTTTTTTTTTBBFTTTTBBFT BBFTTT BBF T T T T BBFTTT BBF T T T BBF T T T BBF T T T R EF .R EF .R EF .5555444444444444444444444444443333333333333333366667788888812222222222225A6.26A6.24A6.2910109999999999101010107A6.0NOTE:CONTRACTOR TO UTILIZE OWNER GRAPHIC FOR LAYOUT AND FINALDESIGN CONCEPT. SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR APPROVALLINEWORK TO BE ALUMINUM BANDINGLETTERS TO BE ALUMINUMRED TERRAZZOYELLOW TERRAZOWHITE TERRAZZOLIGHT BLUE TERRAZZOLIGHT BLUE TERRAZZOLETTERS TO BE ALUMINUMLINEWORK TO BEALUMINUM BANDINGRED TERRAZZOYELLOW TERRAZOWHITE TERRAZZO4' - 0"4' - 0"SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:25:44 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA8.1FLOOR FINISHPLAN16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2GENERAL NOTES:1. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND FINISH SCHEDULE FORADDITIONAL FINISH INFORMATION.KEYNOTES:SEALED CONCRETEFLOOR FINISH LEGEND:PAINT #P1(FIELD)MNFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: SAND DUNE (SW 6086)LOCATION: ALL GYP. BOARD PARTITIONS &SOFFITS, U.N.O.PAINT #P2(ACCENT)MNFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: LEISURE BLUE (SW 6515)LOCATION: AS INDICATED ON PLANPAINT #P3(CEILING)PAINT & WALL FINISH LEGEND:MNFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: SIMPLE WHITE (SW 7021)LOCATION: ALL HARD-LID CEILING, U.N.OCERAMICWALLTILE(FIELD)MNFR: DAL TILESERIES: SEMI-GLOSSCOLOR: WHITENUMBER: 0100SIZE: 4" X 12"LOCATION: RESTROOMSFLOOR DRAIN. SLOPE CONCRETE TO DRAIN, TYP.4' X 4' COLORED LOGO AS SELECTED BY OWNER & ARCHITECT -SEE DETAIL 1/A8.11234567CERAMICWALLTILE(ACCENT)CASEWORK FINISHES:FINISH #1SOLIDSURFACEMNFR: WILSONARTCOLOR: BLUESTONE 9074EA(5)LOCATION: KITCHENSIZE: 1/2" THICKNESSFINISH #2LAMINATEFINISH #3LAMINATEMNFR: WILSONARTCOLOR: VERANDA TEAK 8209K-28LOCATION: UPPER CABINETSFINISH #4LAMINATEMNFR: WILSONARTCOLOR: WHITE TIGRIS 4783-60LOCATION: COUNTERTOPS, U.N.O.TILE TRIMMNFR: SCHLUTERSTYLE: JOLLY (TOP, SIDE / CORNER)/ DILEX AHKA (COVE BASE)COLOR: ANODIZED ALUMINUMLOCATION: RESTROOMSPOLISHED CONCRETE - SALT & PEPPER HONED FINISH W/ SEALERMNFR: WILSONARTCOLOR: PORTICO TEAK 8210K-28LOCATION: BASE CABINETSMNFR: DAL TILESERIES: SEMI GLOSSCOLOR: GALAXYNUMBER: 1469SIZE: 4" X 12"LOCATION: RESTROOMSACCENT PAINT P2CERAMIC TILE WALL, FULL HEIGHT - SEE ELEVATIONS FORPLACEMENT OF ACCENT TILECERAMIC TILE BACKSPLASHFULL HEIGHT FRP ALL WALLS THIS ROOM4'-0" HIGH FRP 4'-0" EITHER DIRECTION FROM MOP SINK8POLISHED CONCRETE W/ DENSIFIER IN APPARATUS BAYSRUBBERIZED FLOORINGMNFR: ULTIMATE RB, INC.COLOR: 616LOCATION: FITNESS ROOMPAINT #P4(TRIM)MNFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: ELEPHANT EAR (SW 9168)LOCATION: HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMES, U.N.O.1SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"FLOOR FINISH PLANN 1 1/2" = 1'-0"1Interior - Floor LogoPAINT #P6(MASONRY)MNFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMSCOLOR: UTAUPEIA (SW 9088)LOCATION: ALL INTERIOR MASONRY, U.N.O9BLOCK FILL PRIOR TO PAINTING, ONLY UP TO 10'-0" INSIDEAPPARATUS BAYS10MASONRY TO BE PAINTED P11 City Comments 6/2/17 SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:SCALE:F R A M E S & G L A Z I N GS C H E D U L EN O T E SGLAZING TYPES7.)"GLAZING IN THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS SHOULD BE OF SAFETY GLAZING MATERIALIN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 2406.4:A). FIXED OR OPERABLE PANELS ADJACENT TO A DOOR WHERE THE NEARESTEXPOSED EDGE OF THE GLAZING IS WITHIN A 24" ARC OF EITHER VERTICAL EDGE OFTHE DOOR IN A CLOSED POSITION AND WHERE THE BOTTOM EXPOSED EDGEOF THE GLAZING IS LESS THAN 60" ABOVE THE WALKING SURFACE.B). INDIVIDUAL FIXED OR OPERABLE PANELS, OTHER THAN THOSE LOCATIONSDESCRIBED ABOVE, THAT MEET ALL THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS: I) EXPOSED AREA OF AN INDIVIDUAL PANEL IS GREATER THAN 9 SQUARE FEET,AND: II) EXPOSED BOTTOM EDGE IS LESS THAN 18 INCHES ABOVE THE FLOOR, AND: III) EXPOSED TOP EDGE IS GREATER THAN 36 INCHES ABOVE THE FLOOR, AND: IV) ONE OR MORE WALKING SURFACES ARE WITHIN 36 INCHESHORIZONTALLY OF THE PLANE OF THE GLAZING.FRAME AND GLAZING REQUIRED RATED IF IN RATED AREA5.)FRAMES OCCURING IN MORE THAN ONE LOCATION MAY HAVE ALTERNATEINSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS AS ADJACENT WALL CONSTRUCTION MAY DIFFER.4.)GLASS STOPS SHALL OCCUR AT EXTERIOR SIDE OF FRAME.PROVIDE TAMPER PROOF SCREWS.3.)DOORS IN FRAMES WITH GLAZING SHALL HAVE TEMPERED GLAZING. DOORS SHALLCARRY SAME RATING AS FRAME SEE OPENING SCHEDULE.2.)1.)ALL FIRE RATED DOORS, DOOR FRAMES, WINDOWS, WINDOW FRAMES, ANDHARDWARE SHALL HAVE A U.L. LABEL STATING THE REQUIRED FIRE RATING.6.)GLAZING SHALL BE DESIGNED AND SHALLBE COMPLY WITH IBC-2006 CHAPTER 24.SAFETY GLAZING SHALL BE INACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 2406.11" INSULATED GLASS(1/4" COLOR 1/2" AIR SPACE1/4" CLEAR GLASS)(PPG INDUSTRIES, INC.SOLARBAN 70XL (2) + SOLARGRAY +CLEAR)21" INSULATED GLASS(1/4" TEMPERED COLOR/ 1/2"AIR/1/4" TEMPERED CLEAR)31/4" TEMPERED CLEARGLASS(PPG INDUSTRIES, INC.SOLARBAN 70XL (2) + SOLARGRAY +CLEAR)7' - 2"14' - 0"2' - 0"2"1' - 8"2"2' - 0"2' - 0"2"1' - 8"2"2' - 0"2' - 0"2' - 0"2' - 0"2' - 0"2' - 0"2' - 0"2' - 0"2' - 0"ADOOR ELEVATIONDDOOR ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"EDOOR ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"DOOR ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"DOOR ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"FHDOOR ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"I1"TYPICALAROUNDPERIMETERGDOOR ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"AWINDOW ELEVATIONCWINDOW ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"EXTERIOROPERABLE EXTERIORDWINDOW ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"EXTERIORBWINDOW ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"EXTERIOR4' - 0"2" 2' - 8" 2"3' - 0"5' - 0"2"2' - 3"2"2' - 3"2"2" 3' - 2" 2"3' - 6"4' - 0"2"1' - 9"2"1' - 9"2"2" 3' - 1" 2" 3' - 1" 2"6' - 8"5' - 0"2"2' - 3"2"2' - 3"2"2" 2' - 9" 2" 2' - 9" 2"6' - 0"7' - 2"2" 2' - 9" 2" 3' - 11"BDOOR ELEVATIONCDOOR ELEVATIONSOLID WOOD DOOR,BIRCH PLAIN SLICEDHOLLOW METAL WITH FOAMINSULATIONDOOR GLAZING TYPE WILL BE THE STANDARD THROUGHOUT DOOR FRAME. SEEDOOR SCHEDULE FOR "SAFETY GLAZING"1/4"=1'-0"FWINDOW ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"EXTERIOR7' - 2"12' - 0"2" 2' - 9 1/2" 2" 2' - 9 1/2" 2" 2' - 9 1/2" 2" 2' - 9 1/2" 2"2"3' - 4"2"3' - 4"2"HWINDOW ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"EXTERIOR3' - 0"2"1' - 3"2"1' - 3"2"2" 2' - 9" 2" 2' - 9" 2"6' - 0"JWINDOW ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"EXTERIOR5' - 0"2"2' - 3"2"2' - 3"2"2" 2' - 7" 2" 2' - 7" 2"5' - 8"11111112" 2' - 9" 2" 3' - 11" 2"1' - 0" 1' - 11" 2" 3' - 5" 6"2"2"6"3' - 5"2"1' - 11"1' - 0"2"3' - 11"2"2' - 9"2"1' - 0" 1' - 11" 2" 3' - 5" 6"2"2"6" 3' - 0" 6"2" 3' - 8" 2"8' - 2"2"6" 2' - 0" 6"2"1' - 2"2"4' - 8"2" 2' - 8" 2"6" 2' - 0" 6"2"6' - 2"2"6"3' - 5"2"1' - 11"1' - 0"7' - 2"2"6" 2' - 0" 6"2"3' - 4"222232322"6"3' - 5"2"1' - 11"1' - 0"7' - 2"2"6" 2' - 0" 6" 6" 2' - 0" 6"2"6' - 4"7' - 0"2"2" 3' - 0" 2"3' - 4"7' - 2"7' - 0"2"7' - 2"2" 3' - 0" 2"3' - 4"DOOR ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"JHOLLOW METAL WITH FOAMINSULATION7' - 0"2"2" 3' - 0"7' - 2"3' - 0" 2"6' - 4"KDOOR ELEVATION2"6"3' - 5"2"1' - 11"1' - 0"7' - 2"2"6" 2' - 0" 6"2"3' - 4"31"TYPICALAROUNDPERIMETERLDOOR ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"SOLID WOOD DOOR,BIRCH PLAIN SLICED7' - 0"2"7' - 2"2" 2' - 4" 2"2' - 8"MDOOR ELEVATION2"6"2' - 0"4' - 6"7' - 2"2" 1' - 10" 8" 6"2"3' - 4"322" 3' - 2" 4" 3' - 2" 4" 3' - 2" 4" 3' - 2" 2"14' - 0"3' - 0"3' - 0"3' - 0"3' - 0"3' - 0"3' - 0"3' - 0"PANIC DEVICE -SEE LIFE SAFETYPANIC DEVICE -SEE LIFE SAFETYPANIC DEVICE -SEE LIFE SAFETY7' - 2"PANIC DEVICE -SEE LIFE SAFETYPANIC DEVICE -SEE LIFE SAFETYPANIC DEVICE -SEE LIFE SAFETY222223322232' - 0" 2' - 0"2DOOR ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"NHOLLOW METAL WITH FOAMINSULATION7' - 0"2"2" 3' - 0" 2"3' - 4"7' - 2"3' - 0"PANIC DEVICE -SEE LIFE SAFETYDOOR ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"OHOLLOW METAL WITH FOAMINSULATION7' - 0"2"2" 3' - 0" 2"3' - 4"7' - 2"3' - 0"PANIC DEVICE -SEE LIFE SAFETY2A8.31A8.34A8.33A8.36A8.35A8.32A8.31A8.32A8.31A8.39A8.37A8.38A8.36A8.35A8.36A8.35A8.35A8.36A8.36A8.35A8.312A8.38A8.37A8.38A8.37A8.38A8.36A8.47A8.42222"2"6' - 8"2"7' - 2"1"2"2' - 7 1/2"2" 2"2' - 7 1/2"2" 2"2' - 7 1/2"2" 2"2' - 7 1/2"2" 1"12' - 0"10A8.311A8.3INTERIORCONCRETERAMP -SEEFLOOR PLANCONCRETERAISED STEMAT INTERIORFINISHEDEXTERIORGRADESHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:23:03 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA8.2DOOR ANDWINDOWELEVATIONS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2111 City Comments 6/2/17 DOOR - REFER TO SCHEDULEEXTERIOR WALL - REFER TOWALLTYPESHOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMESEALANT - CONTINUOUS ATPERIMETR OF FRAME BOTH SIDESSTUCCO SYSTEM1/2" EXTERIOR GYPSUMWALLBOARD SHEATHINGMETAL STUD BOX HEADEREXTEND GYP BD MIN 1/2" INTODOOR FRAMEINSULATION WHERE OCCURS,SEEWALL IDENTIFICATIONSPRAY-IN POLYURETHANEFOAMINSULATION TYP.2"1"VERIFY1 15/16"1 9/16"THROAT OPENING+1/8"5/8"DOOR - REFER TO SCHEDULEEXTERIOR WALL - REFER TOWALLTYPESHOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMEFRAME SUPPORTSEALANT - CONTINUOUS ATPERIMETR OF FRAME BOTH SIDESSTUCCO SYSTEM1/2" EXTERIOR GYPSUMWALLBOARD SHEATHINGSPRAY-IN POLYURETHANEFOAMINSULATION TYP.2"1"1 9/16"VERIFY 1 15/16"THROATOPENING+1/8"5/8"HOLLOW METAL FRAME BEYONDDOOR - SEE DOOR SCHEDULEEXTEND GYP BD MIN 1/2" INTO DOORFRAMESEALANT CONTINUOUS AT PERIMETEREACH SIDE OF FRAMEINSULATION WHERE OCCURS, SEEWALL IDENTIFICATIONMETAL STUD WITH 5/8" TYPE "X"GYPSUM BOARD EACH SIDEMETAL RUNNER CHANNELMETAL STUD BOX HEADERHOLLOW METAL FRAME2"1 9/16"VERIFY1 15/16"THROAT OPENING+1/8"5/8"DOOR - SEE SCHEDULEMETAL STUD WITH5/8" TYPE 'X'GYPSUM BOARD AT EACH SIDEHOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMEFRAME SUPPORTINSULATION WHERE OCCURS;SEEWALL IDENTIFICATIONSEALANT CONTINUOUS ATPERIMETEREACH SIDE OF FRAME2"1 9/16"VERIFY1 15/16"THROAT OPENING+1/8"DOUBLE METAL STUD;STITCH WELDEDSEALANT CONTINUOUS AT PERIMETEROFFRAME EACH SIDEINSULATION WHERE OCCURS, SEEWALLIDENTIFICATIONMETAL STUD WITH 5/8"TYPE"X" GYPSUMBOARD EACH SIDEWINDOW FRAMEANCHORGLAZING - SEE SCHEDULEHOLLOW METAL FRAME5/8" METAL STOPSURFACE MOUNTED ROLLER SHADE5/8"1/2" MIN.1/2"THROATOPENING+1/8"2"VARIES 1 15/16"1/2"VARIESSEE FRAME TYPES2"1 15/16"VARIES1 9/16"2"1 9/16"HOLLOW METAL DOOR - SEE SCHEDULEHOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAME -SEESCHEDULENEW SPRAY-IN POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION TYP.CMU WALLSEALANT CONTINUOUS AT PERIMETEROF EACH SIDE OF FRAMEMASONRY T-STRAPNOTE:FOAM FRAME INSULATIONON EXTERIOR LOCATIONS ONLYVERIFY115/16"19/16"INSULLATED FOAMSTUCCO SYSTEMSEALANT CONTINUOUS ATPERIMETER OF EACH SIDE OFFRAMECMU BLOCK WALLHOLLOW METAL DOOR - SEESCHEDULEHOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAME -SEE SCHEDULESTEEL LINTELCORNER BEADGROUTED BOND BEAMNOTE:FOAM FRAME INSULATIONON EXTERIOR LOCATIONSONLYVERIFY1 15/16"1 9/16"EQ.EQ.4"5/8"INSULLATED FOAMSTUCCO SYSTEMSEALANT CONTINUOUS ATPERIMETER OF EACH SIDE OFFRAMECMU BLOCK WALLHOLLOW METAL DOOR - SEESCHEDULEHOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAME -SEE SCHEDULESTEEL LINTELCORNER BEADGROUTED BOND BEAMNOTE:FOAM FRAME INSULATIONON EXTERIOR LOCATIONSONLYVERIFY1 15/16"1 9/16"EQ.EQ.4"5/8"HOLLOW METAL DOOR - SEE SCHEDULEHOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAME -SEESCHEDULENEW SPRAY-IN POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION TYP.CMU WALLSEALANT CONTINUOUS AT PERIMETEROF EACH SIDE OF FRAMEMASONRY T-STRAPNOTE:FOAM FRAME INSULATIONON EXTERIOR LOCATIONS ONLYVERIFY115/16"19/16"FOLDING GLASS DOOR - REFER TO SCHEDULEGYP. WALL BOARD SHEATHINGHOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMESTUD FRAMING WALL -SEE STRUCTURALSEALANT - CONTINUOUS ATPERIMETR OF FRAME BOTH SIDESSYNTHETIC STUCCO SYSTEM1/2" PLYWOOD SHEATHING -SEESTRUCTURALBATT INSULATION -SEE WALLTYPESBUILDING WRAP UNDERLAYMENTEXTENDED BELOW DOOR ASSEMBLYALUMINUM WINDOW SILLBOTTOM TRACK SET INTOCONCRETE SLABEXTERIORINTERIORALUMINUM WINDOWW/ GLAZING-SEE SCHEDULESEALANT - CONTINUOUS ATPERIMETR OF FRAME BOTH SIDES4" CONCRETE SLABPER MANUF.2"PER MANUF.2 3/4"FOLDING GLASS DOOR -REFER TO SCHEDULEGYP. WALL BOARDSHEATHINGHOLLOW METALDOOR FRAMESTRUCTURAL HEADER-SEE STRUCTURALDRAWINGSSEALANT - CONTINUOUSAT PERIMETR OF FRAMEBOTH SIDESSYNTHETIC STUCCOSYSTEM1/2" PLYWOODSHEATHING -SEESTRUCTURALBATT INSULATION -SEE WALL TYPESBUILDING WRAPUNDERLAYMENTEXTENDED BELOW DOORASSEMBLYSHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:23:13 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA8.3DOOR ANDFRAME DETAILS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 3" = 1'-0"5Door - Exterior Door at Head Stucco 3" = 1'-0"6Door - Exterior Door Jamb at Stucco 3" = 1'-0"7Door - Interior Door at Head 3" = 1'-0"8Door - Interior Door at Jamb 3" = 1'-0"9Door - Interior Sidelight at Jamb 3" = 1'-0"4Door - Door Jamb at CMU withStucco 3" = 1'-0"3Door - Door Head at CMU withStucco 3" = 1'-0"1Door - Door Head at CMU 3" = 1'-0"2Door - Door Jamb at CMU 3" = 1'-0"10Door - Nanwall Jamb 3" = 1'-0"11Door - Nanawall Sill 3" = 1'-0"12Door - Nanawall Head WINDOW DIMENSIONSEE SCHEDULEANCHOR BOLT PER MANUF. SPEC.CONCRETE STEMWALLOR SLABGLAZING - SEE SCHEDULEALUMINUM WINDOWW/ GLAZINGSEE SCHEDULE0' - 4"EXTERIORINTERIOR6"DRIP EDGEALUMINUM WINDOWW/ GLAZINGSEE SCHEDULESEALANT - ALL AROUNDSTUCCO SYSTEM or HARDIE BOARD1/2" EXTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD SHEATHINGMETAL BOX HEADEREXTERIORINTERIOR6"ALUMINUM WINDOWW/ GLAZINGSEE SCHEDULESTUCCO SYSTEM or HARDIE BOARD1/2" EXTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD SHEATHINGALUMINUM WINDOW SILLFLASHING TO MACH WINDOWSEE SPECSEXTERIORINTERIORALUMINUM WINDOWW/ GLAZINGSEE SCHEDULESEALANT - CONTINUOUS ATPERIMETR OF FRAME BOTH SIDESSTUCCO SYSTEMEXTERIOR SHEATHINGEXTERIOR WALL - REFER TO WALLTYPES4 1/2"6"METAL STUD WITH 5/8" TYPE "X" GYPSUMBOARD EACH SIDEINSULATION WHERE OCCURS, SEE WALLIDENTIFICATIONSEALANT CONTINUOUS AT PERIMETER OFFRAME EACH SIDEEXTEND GYP. BD. MIN. 1/2" INTO DOORFRAMEHOLLOW METAL FRAME BEYONDHOLLOW METAL FRAMEGLAZING - SEE SCHEDULEMETAL STUD BOX HEADERMETAL RUNNER CHANNELHOLLOW METAL FRAME TRANSOMEXPOSED CENTER NOT TOEXCEED 2" WIDTH1/2" MIN.5/8"2"1/2"1 9/16"THROAT OPENNG+1/8"1 15/16"VARIES1/2"WINDOW DIMENSIONSEE SCHEDULEHOLLOW METAL FRAME BEYONDSEALANT CONTINUOUS AT PERIMETER OFFRAME EACH SIDEGLAZING - SEE SCHEDULEHOLLOW METAL FRAMEEXPANSION BOLTEXISTING CONCRETE STEMWALLor slab1 15/16"5/8"4"1 9/16"VARIESALUMINUM WINDOWW/ GLAZINGSEE SCHEDULEALUMINUM MULLIONSHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:23:23 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA8.4WINDOWDETAILS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 3" = 1'-0"1Window - Exterior Window at FloorAL 3" = 1'-0"2Window - Exterior Stucco with ALHead 3" = 1'-0"3Window - Exterior Window JambAL at Stucco 3" = 1'-0"4Window - Exterior Window Sill ALat Stucco 3" = 1'-0"6Window - Interior Window at Head 3" = 1'-0"7Window - Interior Window at Floor 3" = 1'-0"5Window - Aluminum WindowMullion DOOR PER SCHEDULE-SEE SHEET A8.6CARPET-BOTH SIDESDOOR DIMENSION9/16" MAX.JAMB BEYONDPROVIDE BLOCKINGAT TOP ANDBOTTOMOF MIRRORCERAMIC TILE SEEFINISH SCHEDULECAULKING TO MIRRORPERIMETERMIRROR SEE PLANSBULLNOSE TILE EDGINGCAULKING TO MIRRORPERIMETER96" HIGH VINYL CORNER GUARD W/ TOPAND BOTTOM CAPS - SEESPECIFICATIONSMECHANICAL FASTENERS; ALTERNATETO AVOID CONFLICT WITH GYP. BOARDSCREWSCONTINUOUS ALUMINUM RETAINERGYP. BOARD; SEE WALL TYPESMETAL STUD; SEE WALL TYPESNOTE:PLACE AT ALL INTERIOR GYPBOARDCORNER LOCATIONS EXPOSED TOTRAFFICSEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONSPROVIDE BULLNOSEEDGE- TYP.ACCENT COLOR TILEPATTERNG.W.B. TEXTURE &PAINT(SEE ROOM FIN. SCHED.)4"x4" CER. TILETYPCALWASHROOMACCESSORYNO TILE BEHIND ACCESSORIES±8'-61/2"±4"±6"CER. TILE BULLNOSEEDGINGACCENT COLOR TILEPATTERNG.W.B. TEXTURE &PAINT(SEE ROOM FIN. SCHED.)4"x4" CER. TILE4x4" TILEW/ COVE BASECORNER GUARD-REFERTO FINSH PLANALL TILE SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE HANDBOOK FOR CERAMICTILEINSTALLATION BY THE TILE COUNCIL OF AMERICA INC. (LATEST EDITION).1.CERAMIC TILE GENERAL NOTESWALL AND FLOOR TILE SHALL BE LAID OUT SO THAT THERE IS NO LESS THAN HALF(1/2)TILE AT ALL INTERSECTIONS. START AT CENTER OF SPACE AND WORK TOWARD THEPERIMETER.2.AT TOP OF WAINSCOT WHERE TOILET ACCESSORIES ARE MOUNTED, EITHER PROVIDE(FURNISH AND INSTALL) A FOUR INCH (4") BAND OF CERAMIC TILE WITH A BULLNOSEEDGE OR QUARTER ROUND TRIM PIECE OR RECESS ACCESSORY INTO CERAMIC TILE.NOSPACE UNDER ACCESSORY FLANGE SHALL BE LEFT EXPOSED.3.CERAMIC TILE FEATURE STRIP (PATTERN) SHALL BE TERMINATED FOUR (4") TO SIX (6")INCHES FROM EITHER AN INSIDE OR OUTSIDE CORNER. DO NOT USE FEATURE STRIP INANY WALL SEGEMENT WHERE CORNER TO CORNER IS LESS THAN SIXTEEN (16")INCHES.4.WHERE PLANS INDICATE CERAMIC TILE THAT WOULD END AT AN OUTSIDE CORNER,TILESHALL BE TERMINATED TWO (2") TO FOUR (4") INCHES FROM THE CORNER. PROVIDE(FURNISH AND INSTALL) BULLNOSE OR QUARTER ROUND CORNERS.5.CERAMIC TILE FEATURE STRIP (LINE OR LINES OF ACCENT GRADE TILE) SHALL BECONTINOUS AROUND THE ENTIRE ROOM OR SPACE. PROVIDE (FURNISH ANDINSTALL)ALL NECESSARY SHAPES FOR A COMPLETE JOB.6.CERAMIC TILE SHALL BE "FULL HEIGHT", EXCEPT AS INDICATED OTHERWISE.7.WHEN TILE IS PROVIDED MOUNTED ON BACKING MATERIAL, SHEETS SHALL BEPLACEDSO THAT JOINTS BETWEEN SHEETS ARE NO GREATER THAN THE REST OF THE FIELD.USE SPACERS TO ASSURE UNIFORMITY.8.GROUT ALL CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATIONS.9.TACK BOARD-SEE SPEC. FOR MANUF.BLOCKING -ATTACHTACK BOARD PERMANUF. RECOMMENDATIONSBLOCKING -ATTACHTACK BOARD PERMANUF. RECOMMENDATIONSGENERAL NOTE:1. SEE FLOOR PLAN FORSIZE AND LOCATION2. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONSFOR MOUNTING HEIGHT3. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FORAPPROVED MANUF.3'-0"MARKER BOARD OR TACKBOARD - REFER TO PLAN FORSIZEMARKER BOARD-SEE SPEC. FORMANUF.BLOCKING -ATTACHMARKER BOARD PERMANUF. RECOMMENDATIONSBLOCKING -ATTACHMARKER BOARD PERMANUF. RECOMMENDATIONSGENERAL NOTE:1. SEE FLOOR PLAN FORSIZE AND LOCATION2. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONSFOR MOUNTING HEIGHT3. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FORAPPROVED MANUF.2 STEEL STUDSBLOCKING TYP.FINISHED FLOORAND/OR STAIRNOSINGMETAL FLANGEHANDRAILSUPPORT@ 4'-0" O.C. MAX.1-1/2" DIA. PIPEHANDRAILWALL FINISH1/8" GAP MAX.HANDRAIL EXTENSION TO BE 1TREAD + 12" MIN. AT BOTTOMOFSTAIRS OR RAMP.SECTIONPLAN1 1/2" 1 1/2"1 1/2" 1 1/2"34" MIN.36" MAX.12" + 1 TREAD12A8.10CONCRETE STAIR ONGRADE - REFER TOSTRUCTURAL1/2" EXPANSIONJOINT FILLERMATERIAL1 1/2" METAL PIPEHANDRAIL - TYP.POLISHEDCONC. FLOORRUBBER STAIR TREADAND RISER COVERINGOVER CONCRETESTAIR (TYP.)RETURN HANDRAIL TOWALL PER 2010 ADA505.10.1, TYPICAL.RETURN HANDRAIL TOWALL PER 2010 ADA505.10.1, TYPICAL.34"-38"34"-38"34"-38"4 RISERS AT 6" EA.3 TREADS AT 1'-0" EA.1'-0"1"1'-6"RUBBER TREAD1'-0" MIN.EQ. TO TREAD DEPTH1'-0" MIN.NOTE:ROOF ACCESS LADDER SHALL MEET OSHA/ANSI STANDARDS. ALL PRODUCT SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS FORAPPROVAL SHALL MEET OSHA/ANSI DESIGN STANDARDS. LADDER PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT BUILDING COLOR.22" x 30" 24 GA. SHEET METAL ROOF HATCHPROVIDE BILCO "LADDER UP" (OR EQUAL) TOEXTEND MIN. 30" ABOVE ROOF HATCH4" CANT STRIPSINGLE PLY ROOF SYSTEM W/ 5"RIDGID INSULATION OVER 5/8PLYWOODPROVIDE WALL SUPPORT AS REQUIRED BYLADDER MANUFACTURERLINE OF WALLFINISH FLOORJAMB BEYOND1/2"DOOR PER SCHEDULEMETAL THRESHOLDCONCRETE SLABEXTERIOR-SEE SHEET A8.6POLISHED CONCRETE(MAX 2% SLOPE)INTERIORSHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:21:04 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA8.5TRANSITION /DETAILS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 3" = 1'-0"2Interior - Carpet to Carpet 3" = 1'-0"3Interior - Tile to Mirror Perimeter 3" = 1'-0"4Interior - Corner Guard at InteriorWall 1/2" = 1'-0"5Interior - Typical Tile Pattern 1/2" = 1'-0"6Interior - Typical Tile Pattern FullHeight1" = 0'-1"7Interior - Ceramic Tile Notes 3" = 1'-0"8Interior - Tack Board Mounting 1/2" = 1'-0"9Interior - Marker Board and TackBoard Height 3" = 1'-0"10Interior - Marker Board Mounting 3" = 1'-0"12Interior - Handrail Attachment 3/4" = 1'-0"1Interior - Metal Handrail at Stairs 1/4" = 1'-0"11Interior - Wall Mounted Ladder1 3" = 1'-0"13Interior - Concrete to Exterior1 City Comments 6/2/17 SYMBOL DESCRIPTION:NEXT TO DOORWAYS TO MEN'S SANITARY FACILITIES AN EQUALATERAL TRIANGLE 1/4"THICK WITH EDGES 12" LONG AND A VERTEX POINTING UPWARD SHALL BE INSTALLED.THEWOMEN'S FACILITIES SHALL HAVE INSTALLED A CIRCLE 1/4" THICK AND 12" IN DIAMETER.THESE GEOMETRIC SYMBOLS SHALL BE PLACED ON THE ADJACENT WALL OR ON THEDOORAT A HEIGHT OF 60" AND THEIR COLOR AND CONTRAST SHALL BE DISTINCTLY DIFFERENTFROM THE COLOR AND CONTRAST OF THE WALL. FOR THE WALLS AT DOORS LEADING TOAUNISEX REST ROOM A COMBINED CIRCLE AND TRIANGLE SIGN SHALL BE USED AS SHOWNABOVE. ALSO, IMMEDIATELY BELOW EACH SYMBOL SHALL BE APPROPRIATE GRADE 2BRAILLE.RESTROOMSMENWOMEN1'-0"1'-0"1'-0"FINISH FLOORNOTE: PROVIDE TACTILE EXIT SIGN AT ALL EXITLOCATIONS AND BOTH SIDES OF CORRIDOREXIT DOORS AS REQUIRED BY 2006 IBCSECTION 1011.3.PREFABRICATEDSIGNAGE SYSTEM;LOCATE AT THISLOCATION OR AT DOORWHERE SHOWNLATCH SIDE OFDOOR OPENING"DOOR TO REMAINUNLOCK" MOUNTING AREADOOR/FRAME,REF. DOOR SCHEDULE5'-0"12"max.LCNOTE: Y=48" MIN. IFDOOR HAS BOTHLATCH ANDCLOSERPULL SIDENOTE: X=12" IFDOOR HAS BOTHCLOSER ANDLATCHPUSH SIDENOTE: IF Y=60", THEN X=36" IF Y=54", THEN X=42"PULL SIDEPULL SIDENOTE: Y=48" MIN.IF DOOR HAS CLOSERPUSH SIDE PUSH SIDENOTE: Y=54"IF DOOR HAS CLOSER4'-0"'X"54"42""Y"42""Y"2'-0"60" MIN.18"MIN"X""Y"2'-0"48" MIN."Y"SEE ROOM FINISHSCHEDULE FORWALLFINISH AND PATTERNPARAPHERNALIA SHELFNOTE:ALL GRAB BARS TOHAVE TEXTUREDFINISH17" MIN.19" MAX.19" MIN.28" MAX.33" MIN.36" MAX.SEE PLAN1'-0"42" MIN.54" MIN.32" MIN36" MAX.6"1'-6"3'-43_4"39" MIN.41" MAX.6"15" MIN.ACCESSIBLE STALL-54"TO TOP OF UNIT VERIFY W/MFR36" MAX.ADA 28"73" MAX.ADA 59 1/2"33" MIN.36" MAX.33" MIN.36" MAX.38" MAX.38" OR NOTEDOTHERWISE16" - 24"3'-0" 3'-6"36" MIRROR W/STAINLESS STEELFRAME20 1/2"TO BACK WALL47" MAX.ADA 32"1'-3"36" MAX.ADA 28"38" OR NOTEDOTHERWISE2'-8"48" OR NOTEDOTHERWISE30"39" MIN.41" MAX.1'-6"74" MAX.ADA 60 1/2"34"TO COUNTERTOP4'-0"COAT HOOKTYPICALSTALL-60" TOTOP OF UNITVERIFY W/MFR.SURFACE PAPERTOWELDISPENSER AND WASTERECEPTACLERECESSEDMULTI-ROLLTOILET TISSUEDISPENSERTYPICAL ACCESSIBLEGRAB BAR;STAINLESSSTEEL (U.N.0)STAINLESSSTEELMIRRORFLOOR LINETYPICAL ACCESSIBLEGRAB BAR;STAINLESSSTEEL (U.N.0)VERIFY INSTALLATION HEIGHTS AND PROCEEDURES W/MANUFACTURE TYPICAL.1.MOUNTING HEIGHT NOTES:2. PROVIDE SOLID BLOCKING FOR GRAB BARS AND ALLEQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED BY MFR.MIRBOBRICKB165-2436B1556-2436SDOWNERPROVIDEDGBBOBRICKB-5507 SERIESGBBOBRICKB-5507 SERIESPTDOWNERPROVIDEDTPDBOBRICKB-2840CHBOBRICKB-672SOAPDISPENSERTISSUE DISPENSERS -WALL SURFACE MOUNTSINGLE PARTITION MOUNTDOUBLE PARTITION MOUNTTPD#2TPD#1PARAPHERNALIA SHELFPSSURFACEMOUNTEDMULTI-ROLLTOILET TISSUEDISPENSERSOAPDISPENSERCLOTHESHOOK5'-0"BROOM/MOPHOLDERSDMPHCTKOALA KARET9A241087SURFACEMOUNTEDELECTRICHAND DRYERHDDAYTON5W632ASURFACE MOUNTEDSANITARY NAPKINDISPOSALSNDBOBRICKB-254TYPICAL ACCESSIBLEGRAB BAR;STAINLESSSTEEL (U.N.0)GBBOBRICKB-5507 SERIESRECESSED NAPKIN/TAMPON VENDORSNVDBOBRICKB-2706FOLDING CHANGINGTABLELAVREFERENCEPLUMBINGLAVATORY17' - MIN.19" MAX.17' - MIN.19" MAX.WATER CLOSET -FLUSH HANDLE ONWIDE SIDE OFSTALLURREFERENCEPLUMBINGWCADA WCREFERENCEPLUMBINGACCESSIBLEURINAL40" MAX34" MAX29" MIN.0'-0" F.F.MIRRORWRAP EXPOSEDPLUMBINGSEE SCHEDULE FORWALL FINISH27"MIN.17" MIN.19:MAX.PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPPLASTIC LAMINATE ENDSPLASHWHERE OCCURSREMOVABLE PLASTICLAMINATEPANELIN WALL COUNTER SUPPORTGUSSET/DIVIDER BRACELAVATORY; VERIFYINSTALLATIONREQUIREMENTSPLASTIC LAMINATE APRONNOTE: CONTRACTOR TO VERIFYADAACCESSIBILITY OF ALL CASEWORKBEFORE FABRICATION ANDINSTALLATION WITH SHOPDRAWINGS SUBMITTED TOARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL.2'-0" U.N.O.4"2'-10"*8"*1'-4"1'-0"*8"1'-6"4"CLEARSPACE2'-6"MIN.4'-0"MIN.17"MIN.K-2007KINGSTONC_LAVATORYVITREOUS CHINA 19"MAX.NOTE:SPOUT SHALL BE WITHIN 3" OFFRONTAND SHALL DIRECT FLOW PARALLELTO FRONT - FLOW SHALL BE AMINIMUM OF 4" HIGH.36" MAX.27" MIN.9" MIN.0'-0" F.F.42" MAX.HIGHLOW48"30" MIN. CLEAR ACCESSSPACE9"9"30"MIN.19"MIN.17" - 19"8"6"SHOWER DRAINHAND-HELDSHWR. HEADCORNERGRAB BARFLOOR SLOPETO DRAIN - MAXIMUMSLOPE 2%SEE ROOM FIN.SCHEDULE FORFLOOR FINISHCLEAR FLOORSPACEHANDHELDSHOWER UNIT(ADA COMPLIANT)GRAB BARSHOWER SEATSHOWER CONTROLSCER. TILE MUDSET@ SHOWER FLOORSEALANTDEPRESS SLAB 2"18"14"1"1"2'-8"1'-11_2"6"18"36"36"36" MIN.48" MIN.33" MIN.36" MAX.18"38" MAX48" MAXSHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:21:17 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaA9.0ADA DETAILS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 1 1/2" = 1'-0"1ADA Signage 1/2" = 1'-0"2ADA-IDENTIFICATION/REGULATORYSIGN MOUNTING DETAIL 1/4" = 1'-0"3ADA-Door Clearances 1/2" = 1'-0"4ADA-Adult Side Stall 1/2" = 1'-0"5Mounting Heights 1/2" = 1'-0"6ADA-Adult Lavatory Height 3/4" = 1'-0"8ADA Accessable Counter 3/4" = 1'-0"9Lavatory Clearances 1/2" = 1'-0"11ADA-Drinking Fountain ClearancesADA 1/2" = 1'-0"12ADA Shower roderick ngineering LC. Broderick Engineering LLC. B.E. job no. 6859 E. Rembrandt Ave, Suite 124 Mesa, Az 85212 PH 480-926-6333 FAX 480-926-3999 3275 W. Ina Rd. Suite 211 Tucson, AZ 85741 PH 520-887-9416 FAX 520-887-948616230 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.16-003 Design Development Set GSB JG 01/11/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #2CITY COMMENTS 5/26/171 S1.0STRUCTURALNOTES roderick ngineering LC. Broderick Engineering LLC. B.E. job no. 6859 E. Rembrandt Ave, Suite 124 Mesa, Az 85212 PH 480-926-6333 FAX 480-926-3999 3275 W. Ina Rd. Suite 211 Tucson, AZ 85741 PH 520-887-9416 FAX 520-887-948616230 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.16-003 Design Development Set GSB JG 01/11/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #2CITY COMMENTS 5/26/171 S1.1STRUCTURALNOTES ANDTYPICAL DETAILS roderick ngineering LC. Broderick Engineering LLC. B.E. job no. 6859 E. Rembrandt Ave, Suite 124 Mesa, Az 85212 PH 480-926-6333 FAX 480-926-3999 3275 W. Ina Rd. Suite 211 Tucson, AZ 85741 PH 520-887-9416 FAX 520-887-948616230 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.16-003 Design Development Set GSB JG 01/11/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #2CITY COMMENTS 5/26/171 S1.2TYPICALDETAILS roderick ngineering LC. Broderick Engineering LLC. B.E. job no. 6859 E. Rembrandt Ave, Suite 124 Mesa, Az 85212 PH 480-926-6333 FAX 480-926-3999 3275 W. Ina Rd. Suite 211 Tucson, AZ 85741 PH 520-887-9416 FAX 520-887-948616230 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.16-003 Design Development Set GSB JG 01/11/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #2CITY COMMENTS 5/26/171 S1.3TYPICALDETAILS roderick ngineering LC. Broderick Engineering LLC. B.E. job no. 6859 E. Rembrandt Ave, Suite 124 Mesa, Az 85212 PH 480-926-6333 FAX 480-926-3999 3275 W. Ina Rd. Suite 211 Tucson, AZ 85741 PH 520-887-9416 FAX 520-887-948616230 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.16-003 Design Development Set GSB JG 01/11/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #2CITY COMMENTS 5/26/171 S1.4TYPICALDETAILS roderick ngineering LC. Broderick Engineering LLC. B.E. job no. 6859 E. Rembrandt Ave, Suite 124 Mesa, Az 85212 PH 480-926-6333 FAX 480-926-3999 3275 W. Ina Rd. Suite 211 Tucson, AZ 85741 PH 520-887-9416 FAX 520-887-948616230 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.16-003 Design Development Set GSB JG 01/11/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #2CITY COMMENTS 5/26/171 S2.0FOUNDATIONPLAN roderick ngineering LC. Broderick Engineering LLC. B.E. job no. 6859 E. Rembrandt Ave, Suite 124 Mesa, Az 85212 PH 480-926-6333 FAX 480-926-3999 3275 W. Ina Rd. Suite 211 Tucson, AZ 85741 PH 520-887-9416 FAX 520-887-948616230 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.16-003 Design Development Set GSB JG 01/11/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #2CITY COMMENTS 5/26/171 S3.0ROOFFRAMING PLAN roderick ngineering LC. Broderick Engineering LLC. B.E. job no. 6859 E. Rembrandt Ave, Suite 124 Mesa, Az 85212 PH 480-926-6333 FAX 480-926-3999 3275 W. Ina Rd. Suite 211 Tucson, AZ 85741 PH 520-887-9416 FAX 520-887-948616230 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.16-003 Design Development Set GSB JG 01/11/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #2CITY COMMENTS 5/26/171 S4.0FOUNDATIONDETAILS roderick ngineering LC. Broderick Engineering LLC. B.E. job no. 6859 E. Rembrandt Ave, Suite 124 Mesa, Az 85212 PH 480-926-6333 FAX 480-926-3999 3275 W. Ina Rd. Suite 211 Tucson, AZ 85741 PH 520-887-9416 FAX 520-887-948616230 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.16-003 Design Development Set GSB JG 01/11/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #2CITY COMMENTS 5/26/171 S4.1FOUNDATIONDETAILS roderick ngineering LC. Broderick Engineering LLC. B.E. job no. 6859 E. Rembrandt Ave, Suite 124 Mesa, Az 85212 PH 480-926-6333 FAX 480-926-3999 3275 W. Ina Rd. Suite 211 Tucson, AZ 85741 PH 520-887-9416 FAX 520-887-948616230 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.16-003 Design Development Set GSB JG 01/11/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #2CITY COMMENTS 5/26/171 S5.0FRAMINGDETAILS roderick ngineering LC. Broderick Engineering LLC. B.E. job no. 6859 E. Rembrandt Ave, Suite 124 Mesa, Az 85212 PH 480-926-6333 FAX 480-926-3999 3275 W. Ina Rd. Suite 211 Tucson, AZ 85741 PH 520-887-9416 FAX 520-887-948616230 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.16-003 Design Development Set GSB JG 01/11/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #2CITY COMMENTS 5/26/171 S5.1FRAMINGDETAILS roderick ngineering LC. Broderick Engineering LLC. B.E. job no. 6859 E. Rembrandt Ave, Suite 124 Mesa, Az 85212 PH 480-926-6333 FAX 480-926-3999 3275 W. Ina Rd. Suite 211 Tucson, AZ 85741 PH 520-887-9416 FAX 520-887-948616230 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.16-003 Design Development Set GSB JG 01/11/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #2CITY COMMENTS 5/26/171 S5.2FRAMINGDETAILS RIDGE LINE RIDGE LINERIDGE LINERIDGE LINERIDGE LINERIDGE LINERIDGE LINERIDGE LINEHIP HIPHIPHIP VALLEY LINEVALLEY LINERIDGE LINEVALLEY LINE4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH1/2:12 PITCH1/2:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH 4:12 PITCH 4:12 PITCH 4:12 PITCH 4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH1/2:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH2:12 PITCH2:12 PITCH2:12 PITCH 2:12 PITCHVALLEY LINEVALLEY LINEVALLEY LINE1/2:12 PITCH1/2:12 PITCHSHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #20 6 -0 2-17 M1.0MECHANICALFLOOR PLANKJH AJW SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" MECHANICAL ROOF PLANN Apparatus Bay 1 Apparatus Bay 2 Apparatus Bay 3 Storage Med Storage SCBA Biohazard Turnouts RR Laundry RR RR Corridor Entry DormST ST ST Dorm Dorm Dorm Dorm Dorm Fitness Office Office Entry Unisex Restroom Unisex Restroom Community Room Training FR Mechanical IT Corridor Kitchen Dayroom ST ST ST Corridor 9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents--Fountain Hills, ArizonaVALUE ENG. 06/19/17 M2.0MECHANICALFLOOR PLAN M3.0MECHANICALSCHEDULE &DETAILS9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents--Fountain Hills, ArizonaVALUE ENG. 06/19/17 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #20 6 -0 2 -17M4.0MECHANICALSPECS KJH AJW ” RIDGE LINE RIDGE LINE RIDG E LI N E RIDGE LI N E R IDG E L IN E RIDGE LINERIDGE LINERIDGE LINEHIP HIPHIPHIP VALLEY LINEVALLEY LINERIDGE L INE VALLEY LINE4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH1/2:12 PITCH1/2:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH 4:12 PITCH 4:12 PITCH 4:12 PITCH 4:12 PITCH4:12 PITCH 4 : 1 2 P I TCH 4 : 1 2 P I T CH 4:12 PITC H 4:12 PITC H 1 / 2 : 1 2 P I TCH 4 : 1 2 P I TC H 4:12 PITC H 4:12 PITC H 4:12 PITCH2:12 PITC H 2 : 1 2 P I T CH 2:12 PITCH 2:12 PITCHVALLEY LINEVALLEY LINEVALLEY LINE1/2:12 PITCH1/2:12 PITCHSHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #20 6 -2 2 -17VALUE ENG. 06/19/17 P0.1PLUMBINGROOF PLANAJW KEF SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" PLUMBING ROOF PLANN RE F .RE F .RE F . Apparatus Bay 1 134 Apparatus Bay 2 135 Apparatus Bay 3 136 Storage 140 Med Storage 139 SCBA 138 Biohazard 137 Turnouts 132 RR 131 Laundry 130 RR 129 RR 128 Corridor 127 Entry 133 Dorm 123 ST 125 ST 124 ST 126 Dorm 122 Dorm 121 Dorm 120 Dorm 119 Dorm 118 Fitness 111 Office 104 Office 102 Entry 100 Unisex Restroom 101 Unisex Restroom 105 Community Room 103 Training 106 FR 107 Mechanical 108 IT 109 Corridor 110 Kitchen 113 Dayroom 112 ST 114ST 115ST 116 Corridor 117 RE F .RE F .RE F . Apparatus Bay 1 134 Apparatus Bay 2 135 Apparatus Bay 3 136 Storage 140 Med Storage 139 SCBA 138 Biohazard 137 Turnouts 132 RR 131 Laundry 130 RR 129 RR 128 Corridor 127 Entry 133 Dorm 123 ST 125 ST 124 ST 126 Dorm 122 Dorm 121 Dorm 120 Dorm 119 Dorm 118 Fitness 111 Office 104 Office 102 Entry 100 Unisex Restroom 101 Unisex Restroom 105 Community Room 103 Training 106 FR 107 Mechanical 108 IT 109 Corridor 110 Kitchen 113 Dayroom 112 ST 114ST 115ST 116 Corridor 117 RR 131 Laundry 130 RR 129 RR 128 RR 131 Laundry 130 RR 129 RR 128 P1.0PLUMBINGFLOOR PLANAJW KEF SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #20 6 -2 2 -17VALUE ENG. 06/19/17 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" PLUMBING FLOOR PLANN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" ENLARGED FLOOR PLANN SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #20 6 -2 2 -17VALUE ENG. 06/19/17 P2.0SCHEMATICS &PLUMB. SCHEDULEAJW KEF SCALE: N.T.S. WASTE & VENT SCHEM. SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #20 6 -2 2 -17VALUE ENG. 06/19/17 P3.0PLUMBINGDETAILS AJW KEF SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #20 6 -2 2 -17VALUE ENG. 06/19/17 P4.0PLUMBING SPECSAJW KEF R E F .RE F .RE F . Apparatus Bay 1 134 Apparatus Bay 2 135 Apparatus Bay 3 136 Storage 140 Med Storage 139 SCBA 138 Biohazard 137 Turnouts 132 RR 131 Laundry 130 RR 129 RR 128 Corridor 127 Entry 133 Dorm 123 ST 125 ST 124 ST 126 Dorm 122 Dorm 121 Dorm 120 Dorm 119 Dorm 118 Fitness 111 Office 104 Office 102 Entry 100 Unisex Restroom 101 Unisex Restroom 105 Community Room 103 Training 106 FR 107 Mechanical 108 IT 109 Corridor 110 Kitchen 113 Dayroom 112 ST 114ST 115ST 116 Corridor 117 R E F .RE F .RE F . Apparatus Bay 1 134 Apparatus Bay 2 135 Apparatus Bay 3 136 Storage 140 Med Storage 139 SCBA 138 Biohazard 137 Turnouts 132 RR 131 Laundry 130 RR 129 RR 128 Corridor 127 Entry 133 Dorm 123 ST 125 ST 124 ST 126 Dorm 122 Dorm 121 Dorm 120 Dorm 119 Dorm 118 Fitness 111 Office 104 Office 102 Entry 100 Unisex Restroom 101 Unisex Restroom 105 Community Room 103 Training 106 FR 107 Mechanical 108 IT 109 Corridor 110 Kitchen 113 Dayroom 112 ST 114ST 115ST 116 Corridor 117 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #26 - 2 2 -1 7VALUE ENG. 06/19/17 E0.0ELECTRICAL SITEPLANKJH ERC SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0" ELECTRICAL SITE PLANN RE F .RE F .RE F . Apparatus Bay 1 134 Apparatus Bay 2 135 Apparatus Bay 3 136 Storage 140 Med Storage 139 SCBA 138 Biohazard 137 Turnouts 132 RR 131 Laundry 130 RR 129 RR 128 Corridor 127 Entry 133 Dorm 123 ST 125 ST 124 ST 126 Dorm 122 Dorm 121 Dorm 120 Dorm 119 Dorm 118 Fitness 111 Office 104 Office 102 Entry 100 Unisex Restroom 101 Unisex Restroom 105 Community Room 103 Training 106 FR 107 Mechanical 108 IT 109 Corridor 110 Kitchen 113 Dayroom 112 ST 114ST 115ST 116 Corridor 117 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #26 - 2 2 -1 7VALUE ENG. 06/19/17 E0.1ELECTRICALPHOTOMETRIC PLANKJH ERC SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0" PHOTOMETRIC PLANN SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #26 - 2 2 -1 7VALUE ENG. 06/19/17 E0.2EXTERIORLIGHTING CUTSHEETSKJH ERC REF.REF.REF.Apparatus Bay 1 134 Apparatus Bay 2 135 Apparatus Bay 3 136 Storage 140 Med Storage 139 SCBA 138 Biohazard 137 Turnouts 132 RR 131 Laundry 130 RR 129 RR 128 Corridor 127 Entry 133 Dorm 123 ST 125 ST 124 ST 126 Dorm 122 Dorm 121 Dorm 120 Dorm 119 Dorm 118 Fitness 111 Office 104 Office 102 Entry 100 Unisex Restroom 101 Unisex Restroom 105 Community Room 103 Training 106 FR 107 Mechanical 108 IT 109 Corridor 110 Kitchen 113 Dayroom 112 ST 114ST 115ST 116 Corridor 117 E1.0ELECTRICALLIGHTING PLANKJH ERC SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #26 - 2 2 -1 7VALUE ENG. 06/19/17 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLANN Symbol Manufacturer Catalog Number Description nLIGHT nPODM WH nLIGHT LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH SENSOR SWITCH WSX PDT SA WH nLIGHT nPODM-2P WH nLIGHT 2 POLE SWITCH nPP16 nLIGHT POWER PACK-MULTI VOLT nLIGHT nRM PDT 10 nLIGHT RECESSED MOUNT DUAL TECH MOTION SENSOR PROGRAM TO DEFAULT VACANCY SENSING MODE W/ AUTOMATIC DIMMING DAYLIGHT PHOTOCELL CONTROL. SENSOR SWITCH LINE VOLTAGE WALL SWITCH DUAL TECH VACANCY SENSOR nLIGHT RECESSED MOUNT DUAL TECH MOTION SENSOR W/ DAYLIGHT PHOTOCELL CONTROL SENSOR SWITCH nRM PDT 10 ADCX (PROVIDE IN DAYLIGHT ZONES UP TO 15' FROM WINDOW) nLIGHT nWSX-PDT-DX-LV-WH (PROVIDE IN SMALL ROOMS WITH WINDOWS) nLIGHT (x) - DESIGNATION FOR ZONE CONTROLLED nLIGHT nSP5 PCD ELV nLIGHT DIMMING PACK- ELECTRONIC LOW VOLTAGE RE F .RE F .RE F . Apparatus Bay 1 134 Apparatus Bay 2 135 Apparatus Bay 3 136 Storage 140 Med Storage 139 SCBA 138 Biohazard 137 Turnouts 132 RR 131 Laundry 130 RR 129 RR 128 Corridor 127 Entry 133 Dorm 123 ST 125 ST 124 ST 126 Dorm 122 Dorm 121 Dorm 120 Dorm 119 Dorm 118 Fitness 111 Office 104 Office 102 Entry 100 Unisex Restroom 101 Unisex Restroom 105 Community Room 103 Training 106 FR 107 Mechanical 108 IT 109 Corridor 110 Kitchen 113 Dayroom 112 ST 114ST 115ST 116 Corridor 117 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #26 - 2 2 -1 7VALUE ENG. 06/19/17 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" ROOF POWER PLANN E2.0ROOF POWER PLANKJH ERC RE F .RE F .RE F . Apparatus Bay 1 134 Apparatus Bay 2 135 Apparatus Bay 3 136 Storage 140 Med Storage 139 SCBA 138 Biohazard 137 Turnouts 132 RR 131 Laundry 130 RR 129 RR 128 Corridor 127 Entry 133 Dorm 123 ST 125 ST 124 ST 126 Dorm 122 Dorm 121 Dorm 120 Dorm 119 Dorm 118 Fitness 111 Office 104 Office 102 Entry 100 Unisex Restroom 101 Unisex Restroom 105 Community Room 103 Training 106 FR 107 Mechanical 108 IT 109 Corridor 110 Kitchen 113 Dayroom 112 ST 114ST 115ST 116 Corridor 117 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #26 - 2 2 -1 7VALUE ENG. 06/19/17 E2.1ELECTRICALPOWER PLANKJH ERC SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" ELECTRICAL POWER PLANN RE F .RE F .RE F . Apparatus Bay 1 134 Apparatus Bay 2 135 Apparatus Bay 3 136 Storage 140 Med Storage 139 SCBA 138 Biohazard 137 Turnouts 132 RR 131 Laundry 130 RR 129 RR 128 Corridor 127 Entry 133 Dorm 123 ST 125 ST 124 ST 126 Dorm 122 Dorm 121 Dorm 120 Dorm 119 Dorm 118 Fitness 111 Office 104 Office 102 Entry 100 Unisex Restroom 101 Unisex Restroom 105 Community Room 103 Training 106 FR 107 Mechanical 108 IT 109 Corridor 110 Kitchen 113 Dayroom 112 ST 114ST 115ST 116 Corridor 117 SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #26 - 2 2 -1 7VALUE ENG. 06/19/17 E2.2SPECIAL SYSTEMPLANKJH ERC SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" SPECIAL SYSTEMS PLANN SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #26 - 2 2 -1 7VALUE ENG. 06/19/17 E3.0ELECTRICALONE-LINEKJH ERC SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #26 - 2 2 -1 7VALUE ENG. 06/19/17 E3.1ELECTRICALONE-LINEKJH ERC SHEET JOB # Checked by: Scale: Date: Revisions: As Shown Drawn by: Issue: Revisions: Hunt & Caraway Architects 1747 East Morten Avenue #306 Phoenix, Arizona 85020 Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399 www.huntcaraway.com THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/13/2016 10:31:47 AM16-003 Construction Documents 06/02/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain HillsFire Station #26 - 2 2 -1 7VALUE ENG. 06/19/17 E4.0ELECTRICALSPECIFICATIONS KJH ERC 16-003 Construction Documents--Fountain Hills, ArizonaE JE J 06.06.2017 FP1.1FIRE PROTECTIONFIRELINE REFERENCE 1 FP3.0 2 FP3.0 16-003 Construction Documents--Fountain Hills, ArizonaE JE J 06.06.2017 FP2.0FIRE PROTECTIONPIPING PLAN NNHunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comABBREVIATIONSDINING ROOMD/R.EXPANSION JOINTELECTROSTATIC PAINTFINISH SYSTEMEXTERIOR INSULATIONEXPANSION BOLTEIFSEQUIPEXTEXPEXISTEWESPELEVELEQEJEQUIPMENTEXTERIOREXPOSEDEACH WAYEXISTINGELEVATORELEVATIONEQUALDRKEFDWGEBEADNDRESSDRAPDRDISPDARKEACH FACEEACHDRAWINGDOWNDRESSINGDRAPERYDOORDISPENSERO.F.O.I.O.F.C.I.OFOCNTSNONICNCNFMISCMTLMTDMTMRMECHMAINTMACHMINMAXCONSTRUCTION JOINTCONCRETE MASONRY UNITDRINKING FOUNTAINCONT. FURN/OWNER INST.CONTR. FURN./CONT. INST.CERAMIC TILEDIMDIADIAGDFDBLDETCF/OICF/CICONTCTDETAILDIAGONALDIMENSIONDIAMETERCONTINUOUSDOUBLECONCCOL.COCMUCLRCLGCERCLCJCONCRETECLEAN OUTCOLUMNCENTERLINECLEARCEILINGCERAMICIFLOUVLNDRYLAVLTINSULJANINTJTHORIZIDHTHMHDWRHBHCH.D.HDAPPROXIMATEBARRIER FREEBUILDINGABOVE FINISH FLOORACOUSTICALAIR CONDITIONINGANCHOR BOLTALUM.CPTCABBOTBLDGARCHBFAPPROXCARPETCABINETBOTTOMARCHICTECT(URAL)ALUMINUMADJA.F.F.ACOUSA/CAB@&ADJUSTABLEANDATGWBGLGRGAF.V.GIF/RFLRFGF.O.C.F.O.CMUFDFFF.O.B.FECFETOW TOP OF WALLUNLESS NOTED OTHERWISEOWNER FURNISHED/OWNER INSTALLEDWWFWRWCWHWIWDW.C.VWCW/UNOVCTVESTULTVTRTPCONTRACTOR INSTALLEDOWNER FURNISHED/ON CENTEROUTSIDE FACENON COMBUSTIBLENOT IN CONTACTNEAR FACENOT TO SCALENUMBERWMOISTURE RESISTANTMISCELLANEOUSMETAL THRESHOLDMOUNTEDMETALMECHANICALMAINTENENCEMINIMUMMAXIMUMMACHINEVERTWELDED WIRE FABRICWROUGHT IRONWATER RESISTANTWALL HYDRANTWALL COVERINGWATER CLOSETWOODWITHWIDTHVINYL WALL COVERINGTELEVISIONUNDERWRITER'S LABORATORYVESTIBULEVINYL COMPOSITION TILEVERTICALTREADTOILET PAPERGYPSUM WALL BOARDSQTODTELTOPTHKTEXTTCSTLSPSUSPSTORSTNSSSPLSPKLRSPECSIMSCSHTSBINSIDE FACELAVATORYLAUNDRYLIGHTLOUVERINSULATIONJOINTJANITORINTERIORHARDWAREHORIZONTALINSIDE DIAMETERHOLLOW METALHEIGHTHOSE BIBHOLLOW COREHUB DRAINHANDSTEELTELEPHONETHICKTEXTURETOP OF PARAPETTOP OF DECKTEXTURED COATINGSTANDPIPESUSPENDEDSTORAGESQUARESTAINLESS STEELSOLID CORESPRINKLERSIMILIARSPECIFICATIONSUPPORT BARSSPLASHSHEETSTAINROWRSRDRESILREFLREFRBRLPFPLYWDQTPTPREHPLTPLPTDGALVANIZED IRONGUEST ROOMFIELD VERIFYGLASSGAUGEFIRE RESISTANTFINISH GRADEFLOORRFACE OF CONCRETEFIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETFACE OF CMUFINISH FLOORFLOOR DRAINFIRE EXTINGUISHERFACE OF BRICKRIGHT OF WAYREFLECTEDREFERENCERAIN LEADERRUBBER BASEROOF DRAINRELIEF SCUPPERRESILIENTRISERPREFINISHEDPREHUNGQUARRY TILEPLYWOODPRESSURE TREATEDPROPERTY LINEPLATEPAINTCENTERLINECLNUMBER#AGGREGATE BASE COURSEABCAPC ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGAUTO AUTOMATICBARRIER FREE ACCESSIBLEBFABOARDBDBLOCKBLKBLOCKINGBLKGBEAMBMCEM CEMENTCONST CONSTRUCTIONCENTERCTRELEC ELECTRIC(AL)EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLERFDTN FOUNDATIONFF EL FINISH(ED) FLOOR ELEVATIONFHC FIRE HOSE CABINETFF EL FINISH(ED) FLOOR ELEVATIONFIN FINISHFLUOR FLUORESCENTFM FACTORY MUTUALFO FINISHED OPENINGF.O.M. FACE OF MASONRYF.O.S. FACE OF STUDSFR FRAMEFT FOOT OR FEETFTG FOOTINGV.I.F. VERIFY IN FIELDGLZG GLAZINGGALV GALVANIZEDGYP GYPSUMHCMU HOLLOW CLAY MASONRY UNITHR HOURHDWD HARDWOODKDKO KNOCKOUTKNOCK DOWNLAM LAMINATELAV LAVATORYLT WT LIGHT WEIGHTMASMATLMASONRYMATERIALMCJ MASONRY CONTROL JOINTMFR MANUFACTURERMO MASONRY OPENINGN/A NOT APPLICABLENOM NOMINALOD OUTSIDE DIAMETEROPNG OPENINGOPP OPPOSITEPC PORTLAND CEMENTPLAM PLASTIC LAMINATEPLAS PLASTERPLBG PLUMBINGPRCST PRECASTPTN PARTITIONPVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDEQTY QUANTITYRAD RADIUSREC RECESSEDREINF REINFOERCE)D)RESIST RESISTANTREQD REQUIREDRM ROOMRO ROUGH OPENINGSCHED SCHEDULESECT SECTIONSF SQUARE FEETSJ SCORED JOINTSTDL STANDARDSTRUCT STRUCTURALSV SHEET VINYLSYMM SYMMETRICALTHR THRESHOLDTOCTOP OF CURBTOFTOP OF FRAMINGTOS TOP OF STEELTYP TYPICALUF UPHOLSTERY FABRICWIN WINDOWW/O WITHOUTXFMR TRANSFORMER123REFERENCE SYMBOLS123TITLEDETAIL# ON THIS SHEETSCALESHOWN ONTHIS SHEETDETAIL#THIS SHEETSHOWN ONTHIS SHEETSHOWN ONDETAIL NUMBERDETAIL NUMBERELEVATIONSHOWN3ELEVATION#THIS SHEETSHOWN ONTHIS SHEETSHOWN ON141ST FLOORREFERENCE SYMBOLS1ROOM NUMBERDOOR NUMBERWINDOW NUMBERAWALL TYPE INDICATORCOLUMN GRIDNORTH ARROWEXTERIOR ELEVATIONSINTERIOR ELEVATIONSBUILDING SECTIONWALL SECTIONDETAIL REFERENCEDRAWING TITLEDATUM ELEVATION1OFFICE101AVICINITY MAPPROJECT ADDRESS:--EPCOR DRIVEWAYPROJECT:Revisions:Checked by:Scale:Date:Drawn by:Issue:6/2/17SESAs ShownHCA Project Number 16-003JSSConstruction Document SetHCA Job # 16-003EPCOR DRIVEWAYPROJECT TEAMDRAWING INDEXGENERAL NOTESGENERAL NOTESDEFERRED SUBMITTALSSUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS FOR DEFERRED SUBMITTAL ITEMS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TOTHE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER OF RECORD WHO SHALL REVIEW THEM AND PROVIDEBACK TO CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR IS TO THEN FORWARD THEM TO THEBUILDING OFFICIAL WITH A NOTATION INDICATING THAT THEY HAVE BEEN FOUNDTO BE IN GENERAL CONFORMANCE WITH THE DESIGN OF THE BUILDING. THEDEFERRED SUBMITTAL ITEMS SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED UNTIL THEIR DESIGN ANDSUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN APPROVED BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL.DEFERRED SUBMITTAL ITEMS:FIRE MARSHAL SUBMITTALCONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT THE REQUIRED DOCUMENTS,SPECIFICATIONS, AND CUTSHEETS TO THE CITY OF MESAFIRE DEPARTMENT FOR REVIEW OF FIRE SPRINKLER, FIRELANE, FIRE LINE, FIRE CONNECTION, FIRE ALARM ANDASSOCIATED SUBMITTALS FOR APPROVAL. ENGINEERINGAND DESIGN OF FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS SHALL BECOMPLETED BY THE CONTRACTOR WITH THE PROPER SEALAND SIGNATURE OF A LICENSED ENGINEER. GENERAL SITEAND BUILDING CONFORMANCE SHALL BE SUBMITTED BY THEARCHITECT FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL BY THE FIREMARSHAL.PROJECT DATAPROJECT SCOPE OF WORKSPECIAL INSPECTIONSPECIAL INSPECTION BY SPECIAL INSPECTORS SATISFACTORY TO THE BUILDINGOFFICIAL IS REQUIRED FOR THE FOLLOWING TYPES OF WORK INCONFORMANCE WITH SECTION 109 AND CHAPTER 17 OF THE BUILDING CODE:SPECIAL INSPECTION ITEMS:THIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.CONCRETE TILT-UP PANELSWELDINGEPOXY INSTALLATIONHIGH STRENGTH BOLTINGREINFORCING STEELSTRUCTURAL MASONRYCONCRETESOILS/GEOTECHNICALANCHOR BOLTS IN CONCRETEWOOD LATERAL FORCE RESISTING SYSTEMSTEEL JOISTSPREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSESPREFABRICATED WOOD I-JOISTS1. ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES AND ORDINANCES.ALL WORK SHALL BE EXECUTED IN A WORKMANLIKE MANNER, IN ACCORDANCEWITH GENERALLY ACCEPTED INDUSTRY STANDARDS, AND AS DEEMEDACCEPTABLE BY THE OWNER OR HIS REPRESENTATIVE.2. THIS PROJECT COMPLIES WITH ALL HANDICAP REQUIREMENTS AS SET FORTH BYGOVERNING CODES AND ORDINANCES.3. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF EXISTING WALLSTO REMAIN AND TO THE CENTER LINE OF NEW PARTITIONS. DO NOT SCALEDRAWINGS.4. PATCH AND FINISH EXISTING WALL SURFACES TO REMAIN AT AREAS OFDEMOLISHED WALLS, MILLWORK, ELECTRICAL DEVICES, ETC. TO A UNIFORMAPPEARANCE AS REQUIRED. WHERE NEW WALL SURFACES ARE FLUSH WITHEXISTING, BLEND FINISH SURFACES TOGETHER TO ACHIEVE A UNIFORMAPPEARANCE.5. VERIFY EXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS. IN THE EVENT ANY CONDITIONS AREDISCOVERED WHICH IN THE CONTRACTOR'S OPINION, WOULD IMPEDE HISWORK OR PREVENT A SUCCESSFUL AND TIMELY COMPLETION OF HIS WORK, ORIF ANY CONDITIONS ARE IN CONFLICT WITH THE INTENT OF THECONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, THEN SUCH CONDITIONS SHALL BE IMMEDIATELYREPORTED TO THE ARCHITECT.6. VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS IN THE FIELD AND NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT OF ANYDISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND FIELDCONDITIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCING THE AFFECTED PORTION(S) OF THEWORK.7. THE START OF WORK BY ANY CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTORCONSTITUTES ACCEPTANCE OF EXISTING JOB CONDITIONS AS BEINGSATISFACTORY FOR THE PERFORMANCE OF HIS WORK.8. ALL ELECTRICAL CONDUITS, WIRING, PLUMBING LINES, ETC. SHALL BE RUNCONCEALED, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.9. ANY NEW PARTITIONS SHALL BE ABLE TO RESIST A LATERAL LOAD OF 5 P.S.F.REFER TO DETAILS FOR ANCHORING AND BRACING DETAILS IF APPLICABLE ONTHIS PROJECT.10. ALL WOOD BLOCKING SHALL BE FIRE RETARDANT TREATED. AT PENETRATIONSOF FIREWALLS AND FLOOR, SEAL VOIDS SURROUNDING DUCTS, PIPES, CONDUIT,ETC. WITH THE CITY OF MESA APPROVED FIREPROOF MATERIALS. ALLINTERIOR FINISHES SHALL HAVE A MAXIMUM FLAME SPREAD RATING OF 200. ALLINSULATION MATERIALS INSTALLED WITHIN WALLS, PLENUMS, ETC. SHALL BEUNFACED AND SHALL HAVE A FLAME SPREAD RATING NOT TO EXCEED 25, WITHA SMOKE DENSITY NOT TO EXCEED 450 WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITHI.B.C. STANDARDS.11. PROVIDE BLOCKING BEHIND WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOPS AND AS REQUIREDFOR MILLWORK. ALL MILLWORK SHALL COMPLY WITH A.W.I. "PREMIUMGRADE" STANDARDS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.12. ALL WORK (WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS) SHALL BE GUARANTEED (INWRITING) FOR PERIOD OF TWO YEARS AFTER DATE OF SUBSTANTIALARCHITECT :Hunt & Caraway Architects1747 E. Morten AvenueSuite 306Phoenix, Arizona 85020 PH: (602) 595-8200CIVIL :Montgomery Engineering andManagement, L.L.C.16716 E. Parkview Ave.Suite 204Fountain Hills, Arizona 85268PH: (480) 837-1845FX: (480) 837-8668MPE :Maven Engineering230 W. Baseline #103Tempe, Arizona 85283PH: (480) 303-0180 ext. 102STRUCT. :Broderick Engineering6859 E. Rembrandt Ave., Ste 124Mesa, Arizona 85212PH: (480) 926-6333LANDSCAPE :Campbell Callaborative111 E Dunlap, Suite 1-278Phoenix, Arizona 85020PH: (602) 266-1644APPLICABLE CODES:2012 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC)2011 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC)2006 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE (IECC)2012 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE (IFC)2012 INTERNATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE (IFGC)2012 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE (IMC)2012 INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE (IPC)2010 A.D.A. ACCESSIBILITY GUILDLINES2015 ICCEXTENT OF WORK INCLUDES CONSTRUCTION OF A DRIVEWAY FOR JOINTUSE WITH NEW FIRE STATION FOR THE TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS ANDEPCOR. THIS PROJECT INCLUDED NEW SITE GRADING, ASPHALTDRIVEWAY, CONCRETE CURB, CONCRTE PAVING, CONCRETEPROTECTION CAP, ELECTRICAL MAIN LINES ARE INCLUDED. SEE PLANSFOR DETAILS.CIVIL DRAWINGSCOVER SHEETEPCOR DRIVEC-1LANDSCAPE DRAWINGSARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGSSITE PLANAS1.0STRUCTURAL DRAWINGSEPCOR DRIVEC-2Owner :Town of Fountain Hills16705 E. Avenue of FountainsFountain Hills, AZ 85268 PH: (480) 816-5100 FX: (480) 837-3145FIRE :EJ Engineering Group, Inc.21505 N. 78th Ave, Suite 125Peoria, Arizona 85382PH: (623) 362-1400 ext. 100EPCOR WATERW-1EPCOR WATERW-2LANDSCAPE PLANL1.1IRRIGATION PLANL2.1STRUCTURAL NOTES AND DETAILSS1.0SITE DETAILSAS1.1EPCOR WATERW-3E. SHEA BLVDN . F OU N T A INHILLS B L V DN. FOUNTAIN HILLS BLVDPROJECT SITEFIREROCK COUNTRYE VILLAS DRN MUSKRAT LNBUFFALO DRN PINTO DRE MUSTANG DRE TREVINO DRE VENETIAN LNGENOA WAYE PALOMINO BLVD NNPROPOSED 6" DIP W53 515152505048464442GBLOT 9ENDPVMT0+000+501+001+502+002+503+003+50S S TELTELCOXEEEX 6"WW4" W16"W24" WWWVWVWV20.0'15.0'L4108.41'(R)N33°52'02"WW6"FF F 1740176017601TOET OP GBTO PTOP G BTOPGB1748175417561758175617581762176417641762 1752175417561 75 8 545454535260625856GB60PROPOSEDC1C1C1 - WC121P MULTI-PURPOSE CHAIR, FLEXNET SEAT, FIXED ARMSC2 - WC420N CAPER STACKING CHAIR, FLEXNET SEAT, NO ARMSC2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C3C3C3C3 - WC410N CAPER STACKING CHAIR, MOLDED SEAT, NO ARMSC4 - WC420P CAPER STACKING CHAIR, FLEXTNET SEAT, FIXED ARMSC4C4C4C4CAPER CHAIRKEYT T T T T T T T T T T TTT T TT TTTTTBBFTTTTBBFT5 55SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:14:47 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaAS1.0SITE PLAN16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #20SCALE: 1:2020' 40' 80'160'SCALE: 1" = 20'-0"Site Plan OverallELECTRICAL TRANSFORMERUTILITY EQUIPMENT. PROVID 4"CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PAD6" LARGER THAN EQUIP.FOOTPRINTWATER / IRRIGATION EQUIPMENTSITE / FIRE LANE SIGNAGE PERREGULATORY REQUIREMENTSPARKING / SITE LIGHTING POLEW/ 2' DIA. X 30" HIGH RAISED CONCRETEBASE - SEE ELEC. PLANSFIRE HYDRANT LOCATIONHEAVY SALT FINISH CONCRETE SIDEWALKMEDIUM BROOM FINISH CONCRETESIDEWALKLIGHT BOLLARD FIXTURE - SEE ELEC. SITEPLANSFIRE LANE ACCESS ROAD.SHADE WIDTH 12'.ACCESSIBLE EGRESS AND EXIT WAYNEW 20'-0" ACCESS GATEFIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION -SEE CIVIL PLANSFDCKNOX BOX LOCATION -COORDINATE WITH FIRE MARSHALKBSYMBOLS LEGEND:SITE BUILDINGSPANIC DEVICE AT ACCESS GATE- SEE DETAIL 6/AS1.4PLEGENDNEW ASPHALT PARKING ANDDRIVEWAYNEW CONCRETE SIDEWALK / SITE AMENITIESKEYNOTES - SEE THIS SHEETXNEW DECOMPOSED GRANITE AND DESERTLANDSCAPINGPROPERTY LINE AND PRELIM SET BACKNEW TURFE. SHEA BLVDN . F OU N T A IN H IL L S B L V DN. FOUNTAIN HILLS BLVDPROJECT SITEFIREROCK COUNTRYE VILLAS DRN MUSKRAT LNBUFFALO DRN PINTO DRE MUSTANG DRE TREVINO DRE VENETIAN LNGENOA WAYE PALOMINO BLVDVICINITY MAPKEYNOTES:12345678GENERAL NOTES:CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS ANDCONDITIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION AND/OR FABRICATION.1.2.CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT FIRE ALARM SYSTEM TOTOWN FIRE DEPARTMENT FOR APPROVAL.CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ADA SLOPE FOR SIDEWALKCONNECTING ENTRY POINTS TO EXISTING SIDEWALK.CONTRACTOR IS TO PROVIDE WRITTEN NOTIFICATION IFGRADES ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. CONTRACTOR TOREFERENCE CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR GRADING AND DRAINAGE.3.SEE SHEET AS1.4 - AS1.9 FOR SITE DETAILS. PLACECONSTRUCTION SIGN AT FRONT ENTRY TO THE PROJECTFOR VIEWING.4.LOCK BOX (KNOX BOX) SHALL BE PROVIDED AT ALL EXTERIORGATES THAT ARE LOCKABLE. SEE HARDWARESPECIFICATIONS FOR LOCK BOX TYPE. PROVIDE TOTAL OF(12). CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE SPECIFIC LOCATIONSWITH FIRE MARSHAL PRIOR TO FINAL CITY INSPECTION. SEENOTE 10/AS1.65.ALL FIRE LANE GATES ARE MANUAL AND MUST HAVEMINIMUM OF 20 FEET (UNOBSTRUCTED) WIDTH IN THE 90DEGREE OPEN POSITION. SEE HARDWARE SET 55 FORPADLOCKS.6.INSTALL ALL STRIPING/PAVEMENT PAINTING/ SIGNAGE PERGOVERNING ORDINANCES. COORDINATE W/ CIVIL PLANS.7.SPECIAL SITE SOIL CONDITIONS EXIST. REFER TO CIVILSPECIFICATIONS & PLANS FOR SPECIFIC SITE CONCRETETHICKNESS & REINFORCEMENT METHODS. SEE STRUCT.PLANS FOR SLAB ON GRADE CONDITIONS, TYP.8.PLANTS - SEE LANDSCAPEDG - SEE LANDSCAPE DRAWINGSPROPERTY LINE - SEE CIVILASPHALT DRIVEWAY - SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS8'-0" CMU RETAINING WALL - SEE DETAIL6" CONCRETE VERTICAL CURB - SEE CIVILDRAWINGS - SEE DETAIL 2/AS1.1BUILDING AND SITE UNDER SEPERATE PERMITEPCORE DRIVEWAY6' HIGH WROUGHT IRON ACCESS GATE -SEE DETAIL1/AS1.1 6"6"3"VERIFY W/ CIVIL1 1/2" RADIUSCONCRETE EXTRUDEDCURBFINISH GRADENOTE: CONTROL JOINTS TO BE SPACED 6'-0" MIN. O.C.SEE CIVIL SHEETSFOR REINFORCINGSOIL COMPACTIONPER CIVIL DRAWINGSABC FILLPER CIVIL DRAWINGS1' - 6"A1.38(3) HEAVY DUTY(GUARDIAN) GATEHINGES PER SIDE. SEESPEC 02447.4"x4" TUBE STEEL GATEFRAME (TOP, BOTTOMANDSIDES).POST FOOTINGS.18 GAUGE CORRUGATED, PEFORATEDMETAL PANELS - WELD WITHIN FRAMEOF T.S. GATE.2"x2" TUBE STEELINTERMEDIATE POSTWELD FLUSH W/YARDSIDE OF GATE4"x4" TUBE STEELGATEPOST W/ WELDED CAP.1. AT FIRELANES: PROVIDE 2 LENGTHS OF VINYL-CLAD CHAIN PER PAIR OF GATES, 2 PADLOCKSHARDWARE 43 - ONE KEYED TO OWNERS KEYING SYSTEM AND ONE KEYED TO FIREDEPARTMENT SYSTEM. INSTALL KEY BOX, WITH FIRE DEPT. SPECS. AT EACH GATELOCATION.2. ALL EXPOSED STEEL TO BE POWDER COAT WITH APPROVED TNEMEC PAINT OR TIGERDRYLAC IN DARK BRONZE OR STAINLESS STEEL PAINT FINISHNOTE:0' - 6"6' - 0".14' - 0"SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.6/2/2017 3:11:51 PM--Fountain Hills, ArizonaAS1.1SITE DETAILS16-0032nd City Submittal SetJSSSES6/2/17Fountain HillsFire Station #2 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2SITE-CURB AT ASPHALT 1/4" = 1'-0"1SITE - ACCESS GATEEPCORE DRIVEWAY COST CENTER22640 ROUTING CODESHEET NUMBER OF 22AMP WOFIS JO BILLING ACCT NO.CONTACTADDRESS/LOCATIONPHONESE 21 3N 6E CCE PAC- TOFH FIRE STN NO 2 602-595-8200JON SCHMID 40/ACRECOORDSAMP VERSIONT2203042 32 5/8 E - 14 1/16 N CF-21-15 MAP 1/4 S T RCall at least two full working daysbefore you begin excavation.Dial 8-1-1 or 1-800-STAKE-IT (782-5348)In Maricopa County: (602)263-1100Arizona Blue Stake, Inc.ARIZONA811JOB NAME22x34.JD2 05/01/2016SWC FOUNTAIN HILLS BLVD. & MUSKRAT LN.(602)500-9017JEFF BLAND(602)236-6346::CONSULTANTDESIGNPHONEOFFICEPHONEMOBILE:LEADERPROJECT:PHONEMOBILE::PHONEINSPECTIONS:CONSULTANTCONSTRUCTIONPHONEMOBILE:CONTACTS: (602)236-6300RUBY VALDEZ(602)503-6067(602)818-1836DAVE ZALOMSKIwith required width and depth dimensions given. trench, either UTP for primary or UTS for secondary, street light, or 6-11-1NOTES:54"UTP42"UTSMEASUREMENT DISTANCEFOR UTPX CALCULATIONBOTTOM OF TRENCHUTP TRENCHUTP TRENCHFINAL GRADETRENCHINGEXCAVATION CODESUTPX3. The total trench footage length will be shown in the grid as standardAll trench depths or conduit cover requirements specified on a job drawing service. When trench is provided by customer, this is the only codingrequired on the job grid.4. Non standard trench locations will be identified on the job order sketch 5. When trenching is provided by SRP, non standard trenches shall have 2 compatible unit codes in the grid, UTP plus the UTPX, to adjust the time for digging.7. Use example shown to figure length of UTPX trench, unless the entire trench is non standard.6. When specified depth cannot be obtained because of solid rock, a minimum8513E135.DGN01/15/8724"6"UTPCUTSC9. Provides 1.5 times regular man-hours.UTPCXin conjunction with UTPin conjunction with UTPCPROPRIETARY MATERIALISSUE DATE: REV. DATE: 03/06/13RAPPROVAL: B.PRIESTPage 1 of 2STANDARD SECONDARY/SERVICEUTPX quantity = the factor from the UT-X Chart multiplied by thetrench footage length which is non-standard, as calculated initem 4. If multiple calculations for non-standard trench aremade, add all totals together, only one entry is needed for UTPXquantity in the grid. REV. CORRECTED TRENCH DEPTH TYPO.TRENCHUNIVERSALANY CONDUCTORTRENCH WITH CONFLICTSOR DIFFICULTIES(NOTE 9)OR STREET LIGHT WHEN OUTSIDEP.U.E. OR R.O.W.48" MINIMUM COVER WHEN USED IN P.U.E. OR R.O.W.To adjust manhours for a trenchof a different size than shown use:SEE P.4-2-1TO VERIFY 48" MIN. COVER8. If secondary/service or street light must be placed in P.U.E. or road R.O.W.,use UTP trench dimensions and enter UTS as the compatible unit.10. Trench bottom to be smooth and free of sharp rocks. Where excavation is in rock, bottom of trench to have protective layer of clean, level, tamped backfill or sand.Underground DistributionConstruction StandardsSEE P.4-2-1TO VERIFY 36" MIN. COVERshall be followed.1. Trench depths and conduit cover are to be measured from final grade stakes. 2. These trench codes provide man-hours for excavation only and do notprovide for trench backfill. earth cover of 24" is acceptable, provided a minimum 2" encasement of concrete surrounds the conduit.MID-POINT OFSLOPE CHANGE8509E149.DGN5-14NOTES:3. Horizontal clearance for parallel structures (NESC Rule 320B):6. Municipals and other utilities may have additional requirements.Electric ConduitElectric ConduitElectric ConduitTelco, Cable TV, Pilot Wire, etc.Utility or StructureMin. 12" of 85-90% Compacted EarthPROPRIETARY MATERIALREV. REFORMATREV. DATE: 10/25/12R5. Conduit should be installed as far as practical from a water main to protect it from being undermined if the main breaks.ISSUE DATE: 04/15/86APPROVAL: WEL2. Minimum clearance between an electric conduit system and other existing underground structures or utilities (note 4):4. An alternative to 12" of 85-90% compacted earth is a rigid support for the upper structure to prevent it from transferring any direct load to lower structure.3" of Concrete4" of Masonry12" of 85-90% Compacted EarthSewers (Sanitary & Storm), Water Lines,Gas Lines or Communications3" of Concrete4" of Masonry12" of 85-90% Compacted Earth1. Minimum vertical or horizontal separations between electric conduit systems and communications conduit systems (NESC Rule 320B2):Electric ServiceSpecificationsCLEARANCESUNDERGROUND CONDUIT8509E125.DGN9-10Page 2 of 2222 S.ANY STREETPROPRIETARY MATERIALREV. DATE: 11/02/12RSERVICE ENTRANCE SECTIONSES5'+- 6"REV: ADDED COMMERCIAL METER PEDESTAL.ISSUE DATE: 04/15/86APPROVAL: WELPLATEI.D.2.6 The identifying Labelling for SESs shall be metal riveted to the meter cover, See chapter 11 "Labelling, SES",detail titled "Labelling SES, Meter Cover Panel". If the main breakers are not installed directly adjacent to the meter, both the meter and the main breaker shall be identified with individual labels. SRP may require the customer or their contractor to open the apartments or suites at the time the meters are set in order to verify that each meter socket serves the apartment or suite indicated by the marking labels.DEMAND RESETCOVERI.D. PLATELOCATIONCOMMERCIALMETERPEDESTALMETER COVERPANELCUSTOMERSECTIONSee chapter 11,labelling,SES pull section,multiple buildingsElectric ServiceSpecificationsMETERING & SESSERVICE ENTRANCE SECTIONADDRESSING & IDENTIFICATIONpull section in the manner described below.2.7 In the case of multiple buildings, the building or unit number and street addres shall be identified on theNOTE: DRAINAGE AWAY FROM CABINET8509E100.DGN9-37SWITCHBOARD SERVICE SECTION DEFINEDbussing for the termination of service entrance conductors, bussing for the connection andmounting of current transformers, panels for the installation of the test switch and metersocket, a service main disconnect switch or breaker, and in many cases, distribution feederbreakers or switches.built to the standards developed by the Electric Utility Service Equipment RequirementsCommittee (EUSERC), which are available to the customer and contractor through electric in each conduit, (i.e.ABC of a three-wire service or ABCN of a four-wire service). Ifoverhead service risers are to be paralleled, there shall be a maximum of two (2) conductorsper phase.MCM conductors per phase shall be bus bar construction. SWITCHBOARD SERVICE SECTION ILLUSTRATIONSconduits. The only acceptable method is to install one of each phase conductor and neutralwholesale distributors.from either the Customer's section or exterior.CONCRETE IN FRONT OF THE SES DEDICATED THREE (3) FEET OF PARKING NOT ALLOWED WITHIN 5' OF SES.BE AT THE SAME ELEVATION AS SES PAD.EXCEPT FOR DRAINAGE SLOPE, PAD SHALL (SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY CUSTOMER).3'-0"222 S.ANY STREETCONCRETEFLOOR1. Pages 9-38 thru 9-61 are EUSERC drawings illustsrating the metering and pull section requirements.PROPRIETARY MATERIALREV. DATE: 10/09/12R7. The above requirements apply to both overhead and underground service entry sections.6. All service entrance sections shall be braced for the total available fault current.8. Barriers shall be constructed from 16 ga. (min.) steel and secured so as not to be removable9. See page 9-41 for door locking requirements.4. Overhead service entrance conductor requirements exceeding 800 amps or exceeding two (2) 750ISSUE DATE: 04/15/88REV: REFORMAT.APPROVAL: WEL the Customer's name, job address, SRP job number or account, Contractor's name and contact phone number.METERING & SESSWITCHBOARDSGENERAL INFORMATIONElectric ServiceSpecifications5. Submit electronic copies of the plans (PDF format preferred) for all proposed service entrance sections, 400 amp or1. A standard switchboard service section is a free-standing unit of switchgear which contains2. Switchboard service sections, approved for use in the area served by SRP are to be3. If service riser conductors are to be paralleled, they shall be paralleled in separate larger, to shopdraw@srpnet.com for approval prior to construction of the service section. Such Drawings shall indicateSM-63716012" 90"12"16" 66" 3" 6"PLAN VIEWELEVATIONREBAR:1 1/2" FROMEDGES & OPENING16"18"9"9"12"31 3/4" REBAR: (7) #4 x 87"12344(TRIM AT OPENING) 2"38509E94.DGN7-2NOTE: WEIGHT=2,870 lbs.PROPRIETARY MATERIALREV. DATE: 12/12/12RABCABC1234567893. 5/8" X 8'- 0" COPPER CLAD GROUND ROD 2" ABOVE TOP OF TRANSFORMER PAD.LEGEND:PLAN VIEWREV. EXTENSIVE REVISIONS.ISSUE DATE: 12/31/92APPROVAL: WELINSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND PAD SPECIFICATIONS ON PAGE 7-71. HIGH VOLTAGE OPENING. LETTERS IN CONDUIT REPRESENT PHASING. 3" CONDUIT ONE CONDUCTOR EACH.Electric ServiceSpecificationsTRANSFORMER PADSPRECAST OR CAST-IN-PLACE PADFOR THREE PHASE TRANSFORMER0-500kVA2. LOW VOLTAGE OPENING, 4" CONDUIT. MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CONDUIT STUB UPS SHOWN. NUMBERS IN SECONDARY CONDUITS INDICATE ORDER OF FILL. SES SHOULD MATCH TRANSFORMER FILL SEQUENCE.4. PAD LIFTING ANCHOR (2 PLACES FOR PRECAST PAD; SEE ITEM #10, PAGE 7-7; NOT REQUIRED IF POURED IN PLACE). REINFORCING ATCENTER OF PADON REBAR CHAIRSREBAR: (9) #4 x 63"(TRIM AT OPENING)8509E352.DGN7-7Page 2 of 2PROPRIETARY MATERIALREV. DATE: 09/03/14RISSUE DATE: 12/31/92APPROVAL: S.DURANINSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS - PAD SPECIFICATIONSB. SRP inspectors shall approve the subgrade before the concrete pad is poured.2. Top of pad shall be 4" minimum above surrounding grade and at sufficient elevation to prevent flooding.7. When pad is cast in place DO NOT ENCASE CONDUIT IN CONCRETE.11. Reinforcing shall be per ASTM A615, gr. 60, #4 bars spaced as shown (equally).12. Surface shall be flat to within 1/16" across top surface. Top edge to be 45 chamfer.8. For cast-in-place: Concrete shall be MAG Class B (f 'c = 2,500 psi @ 28 days).REV: REDRAWN ON CAD, UPDATED STOCK CODES.9. For percast: Concrete shall be MAG Class AA (f 'c = 4,000 psi @ 28 days, SRP Stock Code #0000240*).* No stock stock equivalent in SAP.1. The subgrade and trench backfill shall be compacted to 95% minimum of the standard proctor density.ABC backfill shall not be used under the pad.A. 1/2 sack CLSM (controlled low-strength material), which is slurry backfill consisting of washed gravel(#57 aggregate per ASTM C33) and sand slurry stabilized with Portland cement (1/2 sack Portland cement per cubic yard) shall be in accordance with MAG section 728. SRP Stock Code #0000104* is an approved alternate.3. Pad shall be located to allow access and oriented to provide a minimum of 12 feet of clear working spaceat front of unit. Maintain minimum clearance of 3 feet at sides and 18" at back of pad (see page 5-11, items 6-8).4. In "high and low voltage" opening/windows, stub-up conduit 2" above final top surface of pad. See SRPelectrical plans for size and number of conduits.6. In the "low voltage" opening, see SRP electrical plans for size and number of conduits. For more than 13for Three Phase Transformer, 750 - 3000 kVA page 7-8.5. Install 5/8" x 8' copper clad ground rod in the "high voltage" opening of the transformer pad. The top ofthe ground rod shall be 2" above top of transformer pad. If the Customer provides the pad, then they will alsosupply and install the ground rod.10. For precast: Pad lifting anchors shall be Dayton Superior P-52 SL 4 ton X 4 3/4" length. Use round recesswhen casting pad. Top of anchor shall be 9/16" below pad surface.13. Install conduit plug to keep debris out of all conduits. (See section 11, Contractor - Supplied Material,Conduit Plug 1 1/2", 3" and 4".)TRANSFORMER PADSPRECAST OR CAST-IN-PLACE PADFOR THREE PHASE TRANSFORMER0 - 2,500 kVAElectric ServiceSpecificationssecondary conduit a pull-box is required under the pad secondary window. See Secondary Pull-Box Placement0-500 kVA TRANSFORMER PADDETAIL ADETAIL B16"16"9"12"5'6"9"4" CONDUIT7'6"ABCABC4" CONDUIT8'12"16"8'15"DETAIL ADETAIL B4" CONDUIT4"CONDUITDETAIL ADETAIL BAABCCDETAIL ADETAIL ANOTES:DETAIL B4" CONDUITSDETAIL B10'15"10'37-1/2"22"12-1/2"24"16"DETAIL ADETAIL BDETAIL BDETAIL BDENOTES 8' GROUND ROD28"12"24"35"18"INSTALLATION NOTES.2 1/2" OR 3" CONDUIT2 1/2" OR 3" CONDUIT8513E141.DGN9-22-1THREE PHASE PAD INSTALLATION DETAILS TRANSFORMERS4" CONDUITAABBCC2 1/2" OR 3" CONDUITDETAIL ADENOTES 8' GROUND RODPREFERREDPREFERREDCONDUIT SYSTEMSFOR EXISTING 4"CONDUIT SYSTEMSFOR EXISTING 4"CONDUIT SYSTEMSFOR EXISTING 4"PREFERRED5069778ABCABCABCABCABCABCNOTE 1NOTE 1NOTE 1NOTES:7"6"7"9"6"9"BNOTE 2NOTE 2NOTE 2750 kVA TRANSFORMER PADNOTE 3 NOTE 31. IN AREAS SERVED BY DIRECT BURIED CABLE ONLY, INSTALL 2 EXTRA 4" CONDUIT IN THE FRONT POSITIONS.2. NUMBERS IN SECONDARY CONDUITS INDICATE ORDER OF FILL SEQUENCE. SES SHOULD MATCH TRANSFORMER FILL SEQUENCE.506977950348003. THE GAP IS COVERED BY A METAL PLATE PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER.1234567891234567891011121312345678910(FOR MORE THAN 13 CONDUITSConstruction StandardsUnderground DistributionRPROPRIETARY MATERIALAPPROVAL:N.SABBAHREV. DATE: 02/01/17SEE PAGE 9-22-2 FORSHOWN ON PAGE 9-23-1)USE PAD WITH SECONDARY PIT- OR -- OR -- OR -1 CONDUCTOR EACH3 CONDUCTORS EACH1 CONDUCTOR EACH3 CONDUCTORS EACH1 CONDUCTOR EACH3 CONDUCTORS EACHDETAIL A12"12"ISSUE DATE: 01/15/87750-2500 kVA TRANSFORMER PAD**10 SERVICE CONDUITS MAX, SEE NOTE 2.PAD 5069778 WILL ALSO ACCOMODATE A 1000 KVA TRANSFORMER. USE 10' X 10' PAD)(FOR 11 TO 13 CONDUITSREV: REVISED NOTE FOR 750kVA TRANSFORMER PAD MULE TAPE FOR ALL SERVICE CONDUITS 2500 LB TENSILE STRENGTH 5/8" PRE-LUBRICATED 2. CUSTOMER SHALL PROVIDE & INSTALL MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM F5121. CONDUIT WILL BE PVC DB120 RATED 90 C CABLECONDUIT AND MULE TAPE SPECS°COST OR LIABILITY INVOLVED.CUSTOMER'S OWN RISK AND SRP DOES NOT ASSUME ANYTO SRP EASEMENTS BEING SECURED, IT IS AT THEBEEN SECURED. SHOULD THE CUSTOMER TRENCH PRIORTRENCHING BE DONE UNTIL ALL SRP EASEMENTS HAVEMORE THAN ONE PROPERTY OWNER. SRP ADVISES NOTHIS JOB MAY INVOLVE ACQUIRING EASEMENTS FROMNOTE:EASEMENTSDDY+14 PROPOSED SINGLE-PHASE TRANSFORMERPROPOSED THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMERPROPOSED FUSING ENCLOSUREPROPOSED SWITCHING ENCLOSUREPROPOSED CAPACITOR BANK3PROPOSED 1 PHASE PULLING ENCLOSUREPROPOSED 4/0 PRIMARY TAP ENCLOSUREA SHADED BAR INDICATES FACILITY IS EXISTINGBAR INDICATES FRONT OF DEVICEPROPOSED 3 PHASE / FEEDER PULLING ENCLOSURENO BAR ABOVE THE LETTER INDICATES AN EXIST.FACILITYFOR MOST PRIMARY DEVICES OTHER THAN TRANSFORMERS,EEEMAKELECTRONIC MARKERPROPOSED POLE AND RISERCONDUITMATCH POINTS FOR MULTIPLE SHEETS OF DRAWINGPROPOSED PRIVATE LIGHT (STAKED BY CUSTOMER)DOUBLE SLASH LINES INDICATE REMOVALAPROPOSED STREET LIGHTPROPOSED FLUSH-MOUNTED J-BOXPROPOSED ABOVE-GROUND J-BOXEE-ELECTRICEXISTING UNDERGROUND TRENCH/BOREPROPOSED UNDERGROUND TRENCH/BOREUNDERGROUND SECONDARY CONDUCTORUNDERGROUND SERVICE CONDUCTORUNDERGROUND STREETLIGHT CONDUCTOR SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION (S.E.S.)"E" WITH CIRCLE INDICATES PROPOSED TRENCH"E" WITHOUT CIRCLE INDICATES EXISTING TRENCH(SHADED SYMBOL INDICATES EXISTING FACILITY)PROPOSED MANHOLEPROPOSED PULL BOXPROPOSED SPLICE POINTINDICATES ABANDONMENTTYPICAL SRP ABBREVIATIONSC = CONSTRUCTT = TRANSFERF/SW = FRONT OF SIDEWALKE/P = EDGE OF PAVEMENTL/G = LIP OF GUTTERR/W = RIGHT OF WAYB/SW = BACK OF SIDEWALKF/C = FRONT OF CURBB/C = BACK OF CURBR = REMOVEA = ABANDONWGSDSW-WATERG-GASS-SEWER DRAINSD-STORM C-COMMUNICATIONCCONDUIT ONELINENTSNTSFIELD INSTALLATION STAMPVICINITY MAP GRAPHIC SYMBOLSCOST CENTER22640 ROUTING CODESHEET NUMBER OF 1AMP WOFIS JO BILLING ACCT NO.CONTACTADDRESS/LOCATIONPHONENATURAL GAS YES NO X40/ACRECOORDSAMP VERSION 0REVREVISED BYDATEREVISION DESCRIPTION 1 Call at least two full working daysbefore you begin excavation.Dial 8-1-1 or 1-800-STAKE-IT (782-5348)In Maricopa County: (602)263-1100Arizona Blue Stake, Inc.ARIZONA811PROJECT NOTESHTTP://WWW.SRPNET.COM/ELECTRIC/BUSINESS/SPECSSRP ELECTRIC SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS ARE AVAILABLE ON-LINE AT:SURVEY AND PERMIT INFORMATIONJOBNAME SRP SURVEY TO STAKE FOR LOCATION, NO EASEMENT REQUIRED.NO SURVEY REQUIRED. CUSTOMER CONTROL POINTS REQUIRED: YES NOSRP SURVEY TO STAKE FOR LOCATION AND TIE FOR EASEMENTS.CUSTOMER’S SURVEYOR MUST ATTEND PRE-CON MEETING.CUSTOMER’S SURVEY TO STAKE FOR LOCATION/CONSTRUCTION AND TIE FOR EASEMENTS. 3RD PARTY EASEMENT REQUIRED.NO PERMIT REQ.204/11/17 REVISED PRIMARY TRENCH AND PULL BOX LOCATION ACTRUJIL 3 4 OTHER PERMIT NO. First Page 22x34.JD2 02/01/2016X 1. CUSTOMER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR:c. INSTALLATION OF 3 PHASE TRANSFORMER PAD(S), TEMPLATES(S) AND GROUND ROD(S).e. REVIEWING AND SIGNING OFF ON MATERIALS DELIVERED TO THE JOB SITE.f. ALL SURFACE RESTORATIONS AND LANDSCAPE REPAIRS. SUBMIT TO: SHOPDRAW@SRPNET.COM NAME, SRP JOB NUMBER, JOB ADDRESS, CONTRACTORS NAME AND PHONE NUMBERS. AND/OR MANUFACTURING. SUCH DRAWINGS SHALL INDICATE THE PROJECT AND CUSTOMER SOCKET PEDESTALS TO COMMERCIAL NEW BUSINESS FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO PURCHASE ENTRANCE SECTION, DOUBLE RESIDENTIAL METER PEDESTALS, AND COMMERCIAL SAFETY ELECTRONIC COPY OF SHOP DRAWINGS FOR ALL PROPOSED 400AMP OR LARGER SERVICE4. METERING PER EUSERC, SRP SPECIFICATIONS AND MUNICIPAL CODES. SUBMIT ONE SUBMITTAL IS MADE FOR NOTIFICATION PURPOSES ONLY.5. FOR THAT PORTION OF THE FACILITY LOCATED WITHIN PUBLIC UTILITY EASEMENTS, THIS LOCATING AND EXPOSING EXISTING STUBBED CONDUIT. TRENCH AND CONDUIT UNTIL WIRE IS PULLED. CONTACT SRP AND SCHEDULE A HOT ID AFTER MATERIAL BACKFILL MAY BE PLACED IN LIEU OF COMPACTED BACKFILL) AND MAINTENANCE OF MOISTURE CONTENT) IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM D698. 1/2 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH SHALL BE COMPACTED TO AT LEAST 95% OF MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY (AT OR NEAR OPTIMUM SPECIFIED. ALL FILL BELOW AND AROUND ELECTRIC UTILITY FIXTURE FOUNDATION PADS BEING SCHEDULE 40 36" RADIUS), TRENCH, BACKFILL, COMPACTION, (UNLESS OTHERWISEb. ALL CONDUIT (PVC, DB120, RATED FOR 90 DEGREES C CABLE, ASTM F512 WITH ALL ELBOWS LOCATIONS.d. STAMPED AND REGISTERED PROPERTY PINS AND FINAL GRADE STAKES FOR PAD AND TRENCH EQUIPMENT PAD(S), COMPACTION AND SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION.3. SRP TO INSPECT THE FOLLOWING: TRENCHING, CONDUIT INSTALLATION, MANDREL (IF REQUIRED), VEHICLE ACCESS REQUIREMENTS. USED AS AN ARCHITECTURAL FEATURE, PROVIDED THE ACCESS ROUTE COMPLIES TO SRP WITH A MINIMUM WIDTH OF 12’, REMOVABLE SCREEN WALLS, PANELS, OR DOORS MAY BE METER ROOM ENTRANCE. THIS PROVIDES EQUIPMENT ACCESS FOR CABLE INSTALLATION. SERVICE ENTRANCE PULL SECTION SHALL OPEN DIRECTLY TOWARDS THE EXTERIOR ACCESS TO ALL SRP EQUIPMENT, ANY SES OR EXTERIOR METER ROOM ENTRANCE. EACHa. PROVIDING SRP VEHICLES WITH A MINIMUM 12’ WIDE AND 20’ HIGH PERMANENT TRUCK2. SRP’S POINT OF DELIVERY TO BE: S.E.S., JUNCTION BOX, TRANSFORMER.NO BAR IN PAD INDICATES FACILITY IS EXISTINGE = EXISTINGNTS(602)500-9017JEFF BLAND(602)236-6346::CONSULTANTDESIGNPHONEOFFICEPHONEMOBILE:LEADERPROJECT:PHONEMOBILE::PHONEINSPECTIONS:CONSULTANTCONSTRUCTIONPHONEMOBILE:CONTACTS: (602)236-6300RUBY VALDEZ(602)503-6067(602)818-1836DAVE ZALOMSKI600A GOSE-PD-15216600A GOSE-PD-1528TO PD-15 1 9TO PD-0206 614’R-3-UA750K670’C-3-UA750K600A GOSR-PD-15267E-3-UA750KE-3-UA750K520’C-3-UA750K479’R-3-UA750KE-3-UA750K584’R-3-UA40K850’C-3-UA40K(CUST)C-PBE-PB21550’C-3-UA40KTO P-1404SRP SPLICE POINTSRP SPLICE POINT900’R-3-UA40K8E-3-UA40KCCE - TOFH FS#2 PH 1 PRIMARY RELOCSWC FOUNTAIN HILLS BLVD & MUSKRAT LNJON SCHMID602-515-8200CF-21-1532 5/8E - 14 1/8NT2172873DDY+14MJROANHO10-25-16JOB CREATEDMAP 1/4 S T R213N6ESWXXSCHEMATIC TO PD-1521TO PD-1528TO PD-1521E-3-3"KE-3-3"KE-3-3"K600A GOSR-PD-15267A B C EM(CUST)C-PB2EMRED CONCRETEENCASED INE-6-3"K270’C-3-3"K(CUST)RED CONCRETEENCASED IN 210’A-6-3"K9300’C-3-3"K(CUST)30’C-UBK9(CUST)8’C-1-2.5"K(CUST)9A345PT.#3 TO PT.#2PTS.#4 & 5 TO PT.#9CUST.TO SPLICE & EXTEND.SRP TO REMOVE CONDUCTOR & PHASE I.D.CUST.TO EXPOSE E-9-3" CONDUITS.SPLICE POINTS BY CUST.3N F OUNT AI N HI L L S B L VDN MUSKRAT LNE SHEA BLVDSITEJOBE PALIMINO BLVDE MUSTANG DRE KEOTA DRN APPIAN WAY15N14N32E33E600A GOSC-PD-1501XPERMIT REQUIRED: CITY OF FOUNTAIN HILLS COUNTY (CUST)R-PBC-F.I.T-F.I.E-F.I.10(CUST)R-PB12’A-3-3"K3’A-6-3"KA B C PT.#3 INTO PB AT PT.#2CUST TO STUB 3-3"K FROM P-1404 INTO PB.CUST TO STUB 3-3"K FROMPHASE I.D.SRP TO REMOVE CONDUCTOR && EXTEND TO PT.#11.CUST TO SPLICE 3-3" SPARESSRP TO PHASE I.D.CUST TO EXPOSE E-6-3"KSPLICE POINT BY CUST.APOINT(SRP)R-SPLICER-F.I.7’C-3-3"K(CUST) P-1404TO PB9600A GOSC-PD-150110C-F.I.TO PD-152212A B C 1115’C-3-UA750KNO TAP600A GOSC-PD-150210NO TAP600A GOSC-PD-1502EM10A15’C-3-3"K(CUST)8’C-1-2.5"K(CUST)MJROANHO03-15-17NO TAP SWITCH ADDED PT.10 PER REVISED DESIGNIN SLURRYTO BE ENCASEDTO PD-1521FROM PD-1501TO PD-1528FROM PD-1501AUKB6TO PT.#11 STUBFROM PD-1501 COST CENTER22640 ROUTING CODESHEET NUMBER OF AMP WOFIS JO BILLING ACCT NO.CONTACTADDRESS/LOCATIONPHONE40/ACRECOORDSAMP VERSION Call at least two full working daysbefore you begin excavation.Dial 8-1-1 or 1-800-STAKE-IT (782-5348)In Maricopa County: (602)263-1100Arizona Blue Stake, Inc.ARIZONA811JOBNAMEFirst Page 22x34.JD2 02/01/2016(602)500-9017JEFF BLAND(602)236-6346::CONSULTANTDESIGNPHONEOFFICEPHONEMOBILE:LEADERPROJECT:PHONEMOBILE::PHONEINSPECTIONS:CONSULTANTCONSTRUCTIONPHONEMOBILE:CONTACTS: (602)236-6300RUBY VALDEZ(602)503-6067(602)818-1836DAVE ZALOMSKICCE - TOFH FS#2 PH 1 PRIMARY RELOCSWC FOUNTAIN HILLS BLVD & MUSKRAT LNJON SCHMID602-515-8200CF-21-1532 5/8E - 14 1/8NT2172873DDY+14MAP 1/4 S T R213N6ESWwith required width and depth dimensions given. trench, either UTP for primary or UTS for secondary, street light, or 6-11-1NOTES:54"UTP42"UTSMEASUREMENT DISTANCEFOR UTPX CALCULATIONBOTTOM OF TRENCHUTP TRENCHUTP TRENCHFINAL GRADETRENCHINGEXCAVATION CODESUTPX3. The total trench footage length will be shown in the grid as standardAll trench depths or conduit cover requirements specified on a job drawing service. When trench is provided by customer, this is the only codingrequired on the job grid.4. Non standard trench locations will be identified on the job order sketch 5. When trenching is provided by SRP, non standard trenches shall have 2 compatible unit codes in the grid, UTP plus the UTPX, to adjust the time for digging.7. Use example shown to figure length of UTPX trench, unless the entire trench is non standard.6. When specified depth cannot be obtained because of solid rock, a minimum8513E135.DGN01/15/8724"6"UTPCUTSC9. Provides 1.5 times regular man-hours.UTPCXin conjunction with UTPin conjunction with UTPCPROPRIETARY MATERIALISSUE DATE: REV. DATE: 03/06/13RAPPROVAL: B.PRIESTPage 1 of 2STANDARD SECONDARY/SERVICEUTPX quantity = the factor from the UT-X Chart multiplied by thetrench footage length which is non-standard, as calculated initem 4. If multiple calculations for non-standard trench aremade, add all totals together, only one entry is needed for UTPXquantity in the grid. REV. CORRECTED TRENCH DEPTH TYPO.TRENCHUNIVERSALANY CONDUCTORTRENCH WITH CONFLICTSOR DIFFICULTIES(NOTE 9)OR STREET LIGHT WHEN OUTSIDEP.U.E. OR R.O.W.48" MINIMUM COVER WHEN USED IN P.U.E. OR R.O.W.To adjust manhours for a trenchof a different size than shown use:SEE P.4-2-1TO VERIFY 48" MIN. COVER8. If secondary/service or street light must be placed in P.U.E. or road R.O.W.,use UTP trench dimensions and enter UTS as the compatible unit.10. Trench bottom to be smooth and free of sharp rocks. Where excavation is in rock, bottom of trench to have protective layer of clean, level, tamped backfill or sand.Underground DistributionConstruction StandardsSEE P.4-2-1TO VERIFY 36" MIN. COVERshall be followed.1. Trench depths and conduit cover are to be measured from final grade stakes. 2. These trench codes provide man-hours for excavation only and do notprovide for trench backfill. earth cover of 24" is acceptable, provided a minimum 2" encasement of concrete surrounds the conduit.MID-POINT OFSLOPE CHANGE8509E149.DGN5-14NOTES:3. Horizontal clearance for parallel structures (NESC Rule 320B):6. Municipals and other utilities may have additional requirements.Electric ConduitElectric ConduitElectric ConduitTelco, Cable TV, Pilot Wire, etc.Utility or StructureMin. 12" of 85-90% Compacted EarthPROPRIETARY MATERIALREV. REFORMATREV. DATE: 10/25/12R5. Conduit should be installed as far as practical from a water main to protect it from being undermined if the main breaks.ISSUE DATE: 04/15/86APPROVAL: WEL2. Minimum clearance between an electric conduit system and other existing underground structures or utilities (note 4):4. An alternative to 12" of 85-90% compacted earth is a rigid support for the upper structure to prevent it from transferring any direct load to lower structure.3" of Concrete4" of Masonry12" of 85-90% Compacted EarthSewers (Sanitary & Storm), Water Lines,Gas Lines or Communications3" of Concrete4" of Masonry12" of 85-90% Compacted Earth1. Minimum vertical or horizontal separations between electric conduit systems and communications conduit systems (NESC Rule 320B2):Electric ServiceSpecificationsCLEARANCESUNDERGROUND CONDUITCOST OR LIABILITY INVOLVED.CUSTOMER’S OWN RISK AND SRP DOES NOT ASSUME ANYTO SRP EASEMENTS BEING SECURED, IT IS AT THEBEEN SECURED. SHOULD THE CUSTOMER TRENCH PRIORTRENCHING BE DONE UNTIL ALL SRP EASEMENTS HAVEMORE THAN ONE PROPERTY OWNER. SRP ADVISES NOTHIS JOB MAY INVOLVE ACQUIRING EASEMENTS FROMNOTE:EASEMENTSVAULTS, MANHOLES AND BOXES5’ROAD SURFACE (SEE NOTE 4)1. THIS UNIT IS LOAD BEARING FOR USE IN AREAS SUBJECT TO LIGHT TRAFFIC.3. CARE SHALL BE TAKEN TO PROVIDE A SMOOTH, LEVEL, WELL COMPACTED BASE TO SET THE 4. WHEN INSTALLED IN CONCRETE, ASPHALT, OR A FIXED GRADE, THE BOX SHALL BE FLUSHOF 63-7151. 5. CUSTOMER SUPPLIED PULL BOX MUST MEET SPECIFICATIONS LISTED IN STOCK DESCRIPTION 6. CONDUITS MUST EXTEND A MINIMUM OF 4 INCHES INSIDE OF BOX.NOTES(NOTE 4)3’5’x 3’x 3’ PULL BOXFLUSH MOUNT (LOAD BEARING)MOUNTED WITH EXISTING GRADE PER DETAIL ON NEXT PAGE.UVPB263-7151SEE NOTE 3INSTALLATIONFOR DEVELOPERSEE NOTE 245ELBOW4"DETAIL8513E102.DGN7-7-1UVPB2G12"4"UVPB2S BOX ON. DIMENSIONS AT BOTTOM OF EXCAVATION SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 6 FEET BY 8 FEET. COMPACT AROUND SIDES OF BOX TO PREVENT SETTLING AROUND BOX.RPROPRIETARY MATERIALAPPROVAL:B.PRIESTREV. DATE: 05/16/10ISSUE DATE: 01/15/87ARMORCAST BOXUVPB2S1REV. CHANGED NOTE 8.Pg.1 of 2(MAX. OF 3-3 INCH CONDUIT PER KNOCKOUT)SEE NOTE 8 CONCERNING SUBSTITUTESTEEL LID AND FIBERBOARD BARRIER.STEEL LID AND BARRIERFOR MAINTENANCE USELAY FIBERBOARD ONTOP OF CABLEQUAZITE ORHUBBLE BOX2. ELBOWS INTO PULL BOX SHALL BE GROUTED IN (ELBOWS NOT INCLUDED IN THIS COMPATIBLE UNIT).8. A STEEL LID (#0637149 FOR A QUAZITE/HUBBLE BOX, OR #0637143 FOR AN ARMORCAST BOX) IS AVAILABLE FOR REPLACEMENT OF DAMAGED LIDS.NOT FOR STREET INSTALLATION. BEFORE STEEL LID IS SET,LAY FIBERBOARD (#0634914) ON TOP OF CABLE. ALL CABLE SHOULD BE BELOW THE FIBERBOARD BARRIER. 7. ABOVE GROUND PULL BOXES ARE PREFERRED. USE UVPB2 OR UVPB2G AS A LAST RESORT ONLY.Underground DistributionConstruction StandardsCONDUIT SECTIONENTERS PULLBOX336’-4" 2’-1" 4’-2" 11"FRONT3’-7" 1’-6" SEE NOTE 4ROAD R/WPL PL STUB-UP LOCATION DETAILA B C 1’-0" 1’-0" 1’-8" 3’-4"SM 63-7174 (APPROX.1500 lbs)24" 36" 8" 4’-3" 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 1’-3" 8"9"IDENTIFICATION OF SYMBOLS10"NOTES:2. PAD MUST BE LEVEL BEFORE SETTING ENCLOSURE.3. AREA UNDER PAD MUST BE COMPACTED PER TRENCH SPECIFICATIONS.6. MAINTAIN A MINIMUM OF 12 FT. CLEARANCE IN FRONT OF SWITCH DOORS.NOTE 9TOP123456TOP-TAPTOP-TAPBOTTOM-TAPTOP-TAPBOTTOMSYMBOL POSITION CABLE TERMINATION750MCM FEEDERBOTTOM TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM TOP TOP (IN) (OUT)3" CONDUIT FOR 4/0 AL CAPACITOR TAP (W/SYMBOL #6 BELOW REQUIRES PARKING STAND EXTENSION 63-0350)3" CONDUIT FOR EITHER: 500MCM FEEDER OR 750MCM FEEDER3" CONDUIT FOR EITHER: 500MCM FEEDER OR7GROUND ROD4" CONDUIT FOR 3-4/0 AL (NOTE 8) RPROPRIETARY MATERIALAPPROVAL:B.PRIESTREV. DATE: 02/10/11ISSUE DATE: 01/15/878513E524.DGNPg. 2 of 123-13-2TAP INTERNALLY FUSED. (A O TOP ONLY)2-1/2" CONDUIT FOR FUSED SINGLE PHASE TRANSFORMER (NOTE 10)REV. DELETED PREVIOUS NOTE 9 ADDRESSING SPEEDCRETE.3" CONDUIT FOR EITHER: 500MCM FEEDER, 750MCM FEEDER OR 4/0AL1. ALL PAD ELEVATIONS SHALL BE ESTABLISHED BY SURVEY (BLUE TOP), AND TOP OF PAD SHALL BE 4" ABOVE FINAL GRADE IN IMMEDIATE AREA.4. MAINTAIN A MINIMUM OF 3 FT. SEPARATION BETWEEN SWITCH PAD AND THE PAD OF ADJACENT EQUIPMENT.5. IF 3 FT. OF CLEAR SPACE ON THE RIGHT SIDE (NOTE 4) IS OBSTRUCTED, A SWITCH WITH THE OPERATING HANDLE ON THE LEFT SIDE IS AVAILABLE, STOCK CODE 063- 7305. BE AWARE THIS SWITCH DOES NOT HAVE THE SINGLE-PHASE FUSED TAP CAPABILITY.7. IF OBSTACLES ARE ANTICIPATED IN FRONT OF THE SWITCH (E.G. DESIGNATED PARKING), THE SWITCH SHALL BE ROTATED 90’ SO THE OPERATING HANDLE FACES ROAD RIGHT OF WAY. ADDITIONAL LABELING SHALL BE PLACED ON THE SIDE OF THE ENCLOSURE FACING ROAD RIGHT OF WAY.8. STUB UP ONE 4" CONDUIT AS SHOWN ABOVE WHEN TAPPING INTO AN EXISTING 3-4/0 AL IN ONE 4" CONDUIT. THIS AVOIDS THE NEED FOR A PULL BOX AT THE SWITCH TO SEPARATE THE 4/0 AL OUT INTO 3-3" CONDUIT. SYSTEM THAT WILL BE CONVERTED TO ALL CONDUIT SYSTEM IN THE FUTURE.10. 50KVA MAXIMUM. ONE 50KVA OR TWO 25KVA TRANSFORMERS. IF TWO 25KVA TRANSFORMERS ARE CONNECTED, TRAFFIC SIGNALS (AUTO OR RAIL) MAY ONLY BE SERVED FROM FIRST TRANSFORMER OUT.Underground DistributionConstruction StandardsSWITCHING AND FUSING DEAD FRONT SWITCHING ENCLOSUREOPERATING HANDLE THIS SIDE 8’ EASEM ENT M INIM UM M AIN LINE TRENCH LOCATE PER EST. SKETCH (TYPICAL 5’) W IDEN LATERAL TRENCH PER STUB-UP DETAIL9. SEE PAGE 3-13-3 AND 3-13-4 WHEN THIS SWITCH WILL BE TIED INTO DIRECT BURIED CABLE OR OVERHEAD 8. THE ABOVE DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL OVERALL FOR DETERMINING TRENCH DIMENSIONS.NOTES5. CONDUIT CONFIGURATIONS OTHER THAN THOSE SHOWN MUST BE SPECIFIED BY DESIGNER ON SKETCH.11. ON SUBSTATION GET-AWAYS DESIGNATE TOP ROW OF CONDUIT TO BE IN TOP WINDOW OF MANHOLE.8513E13.DGN4-13-101-15-8722"22"16"10"15"15"28"28"28"26"15"UKB3UKB3AUKB6UKB6AUKB9UKB12UKB1520"UKB3AGUKB6AGUKB15GUKB12GUKB3GUKB6GUKB9GUKB3NGUKB9NGUKB6NGUKB12NGUKB6ANGUKB15NGUKB3ANGPage 1 of 23. ADD "F" TO CONDUIT BANK CODE WHEN ENCASING WITH FULL STRENGTH CONCRETE.4. ADD SUFFIX "FE" TO GET ENCASING WITH FULL STRENGTH RED CONCRETE. (EL PASO GAS CROSSING)64-761064-763064-763564-761564-762064-763764-7625CKT 1&637"28"RPROPRIETARY MATERIALAPPROVAL:B.PRIESTISSUE DATE: REV. REFORMATREV. DATE: 05/16/10Underground DistributionConstruction StandardsCONDUITFEEDER OR PRIMARY3" CONDUIT BANK SPECIFICATION CODESSLURRY SUPPLIEDBY OTHERSSLURRY SUPPLIEDBY OTHERSFIVE CIRCUIT SUBSTATIONGETAWAY OR FEEDER/PRIMARYFOR SUBSTATION GETAWAY, IF EMPTY CONDUIT (TYPICALLYCIRCUIT 1&6) IS INSTALLED, ITSHALL BE IN THE TOP POSITION.("&" DESIGNATES BAY NUMBER)SLURRY SUPPLIEDBY OTHERSSLURRY SUPPLIEDBY OTHERSSLURRY SUPPLIEDBY OTHERSSLURRY SUPPLIEDBY OTHERS1. A 2/0 COPPER NEUTRAL WILL BE REQUIRED WITH DUCT BANKS FROM A SUBSTATION OUT TO THE TERMINATION OR SPLICE POINT AS SPECIFIED BY DESIGNER. SEE PAGE 4-13-2 FOR 2/0 COPPER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION.2. ALL UKB CONDUIT BANKS CONSIST OF 3" CONDUITS WITH A MINIMUM OF 2" CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (1- 1/2 SACKS CEMENT/YD.) ENCASEMENT AND WILL HAVE SPACERS LOCATED AT 6 FT. INTERVALS.6. THESE CONDUIT BANKS, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF SUBSTATION GET-AWAYS, MAY BE ROTATED 90 OR 180 DEGREES AS SPECIFIED BY DESIGNER.7. WHEN TRENCHING UNDER EXISTING CONDUIT BANKS REFER TO UKBS2 FOR SUPPORTING SPECIFICATIONS (PG. 4-16-1). 9. INDIVIDUAL CONDUITS ARE NOT TO BE ENCIRCLED WITH STEEL SUCH AS WIRE OR REBAR AS EXCESSIVE HEATING WILL RESULT. ENCIRCLEMENT AROUND ENTIRE DUCT BANK IS PERMISSIBLE.10. REFER TO CLEARANCE SECTION FOR MINIMUM COVER OF A DUCT BANK INSTALLED IN ROAD RIGHT OF WAYS. INNER SPACES OF UKB9, UKB12, & UKB15 ARE NOT TO BE USED, AS EXCESS HEATING WILL RESULT.SLURRY SUPPLIEDBY OTHERS 2942786.1 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS The following reference documents can be accessed from the “IFB PW2017-01 Reference Documents” file on the Town of Fountain Hills website: http://www.fh.az.gov/Bids.aspx 1. Geotechnical Evaluation Report 2. Calculations for Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 3. Calculations for Retaining Wall for Epcor Driveway 4. Drainage Report 5. 16149 Flow Test Summary 6. 16149 Hydraulic Calculations RA#1 7. 16149 Wet Pipe Sprinkler System Specs 21 1313 8. Annunciation Potter Electric Bell with EJ Notes 9. In-Building Risers - Pre-Assembled - Ames Mfr 10. Piping Bull Moose Sched 10 & Sched 40 11. Remote FDC - Chrome Potter-Roemer 2 way FDC Chrome_Model 5710-A-DI 12. Riser Check Valve 13. Sprinkler Tyco Model SW-20 11.2K March 2014 14. Sprinkler Pendent QR Tyco 3131 & 3231_Oct. 2013 15. Goodman's First Floor Overall Plan 4-3-2017 2942786.1 EXHIBIT B TO INVITATION FOR BIDS NO. PW2017-01 [Substitution/Equal Request Form] See following pages. 2942786.1 SUBSTITUTION/EQUAL REQUEST FORM Fire Station No. 2 Construction PW2017-01 Bidder _________________________________ hereby submits for Town’s consideration the following product, instead of the specified item, for the above Project. 1. Section Page Paragraph/Line Specified Item ___________ _______ __________________ _____________________________ Proposed Substitution: __________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ Statement indicating why specified product, fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable: _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ (NOTE: See Article II – Bid Process; Bid Award, Section 2.4(C), Approval of Substitutions, or Section 2.4(D), Use of Equals, as applicable, for additional criteria concerning prior approval for substitutions or use equals of material and equipment.) 2. Attach complete product description, drawings, photographs, performance and test data, and other information necessary for evaluation, indicating by highlighting all comparable data between specified item and proposed substitution or equal. Identify specific model numbers, finishes, options, etc. A. Will changes be required to Project design (architecturally, structurally, mechanically or electrically) in order to properly install proposed substitution? Yes _____ No _____ If Yes, explain: _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the Project design, including engineering and drawing costs, caused by requested substitution? Yes _____ No _____ C. List differences between proposed substitution and specified item. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Specified Item Proposed Substitution __________________________________ ___________________________________________ __________________________________ ___________________________________________ D. Does substitution affect Drawing dimensions? Yes _____ No _____ If Yes, explain: _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ E. What effect does substitution have on other trades? ______________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ F. Does manufacturer’s warranty of proposed substitution differ from that specified? Yes _____ No _____ If Yes, explain: _____________________________________________________ 2942786.1 B-2 G. Will substitution affect progress schedule? Yes _____ No _____ If Yes, explain: _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ H. Will substitution require more license fees or royalties than specified product? Yes _____ No _____ If Yes, explain: _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ I. Will maintenance and service parts be locally available for substitution? Yes _____ No _____ If Yes, explain: ______________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ J. Will substitution be compatible with all adjacent material and/or applications to or on the proposed substitution? Yes _____ No _____ If no, explain what material substitutions will be required to make your proposed substitution compatible: ________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ List materials that will be required to provide compatibility: _____________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 3. The undersigned hereby assumes all responsibility for all provisions indicated herein and agrees that, if adequate comparable information is not provided as required by Section 2.4(C), Approval of Substitutions, or Section 2.4(D), Use of Equals, as applicable, and this Form, the proposed substitution or equal shall be subject to rejection. 4. The undersigned understands and agrees that the substitution requested, including all supporting data, must be submitted to and be in the possession of the Town 10 full Days prior to the Bid Deadline, to be considered, including all supporting data for the substitution. Telegraphic (facsimile) or electronic (email) copies will not be considered. Submitted by: For Town’s Use Only: _________________________________________ Signature □Accepted _________________________________________ Print Name □Rejected _________________________________________ Title Remarks: __________________________________ __________________________________________ __________________________________________ _________________________________________ Company Name __________________________________________ _________________________________________ Address __________________________________________ Signature _________________________________________ City, State, Zip Code __________________________________________ Print Name _________________________________________ Date Telephone No. __________________________________________ Date 2942786.1 EXHIBIT C TO INVITATION FOR BIDS NO. PW2017-01 [Price Sheet] See following page. 2942786.1 PRICE SHEET Fire Station No. 2 Construction PW2017-01 NOTE: All pricing blanks must be filled in. Empty or unfilled spaces in the Bid Price Sheet shall result in a determination that a Bid is non-responsive. Item No. Description of Materials and/or Services Qty. Unit Unit Price Total Price 1. Fire Station #2 (HCA Job #16-003); SRP CCE PAC #T2203042 1 Lump Sum $ $ 2. Fire Station #2 Owner’s Allowance 1 Lump Sum $ 125,000.00 $ 125,000.00 3. Driveway for Fire Station #2 + EPCOR Water Grading, Paving & Wall Plans; SRP CCE PH 1 PRIMARY RELOC #T2203042 1 Lump Sum $ $ 4. Driveway for Fire Station #2 + EPCOR Water Grading, Paving and Wall Plans Owner’s Allowance 1 Lump Sum $ 25,000.00 $ 25,000.00 Total Construction Cost* $ ADD ALTERNATES (SECTION 01 23 00) Item No. Alternate Bid Description Total Price 1. Provide synthetic stone veneer $ 2. Include faux painted tube steel accent outriggers, rafter tails and outlookers $ 3. Bi-folding apparatus bay doors with full light $ 4. Full height interior ceramic tile walls $ 5. Tube steel BASE window awning cover $ 6. 6’-0” maximum height VERSA-LOK retaining wall system or approved equal $ 7. Goodmans furniture design $ Alternates Total* $ ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATE ITEMS No. 1 Yes _____ No _____ Authorized By: _______________________________________ No. 2 Yes _____ No _____ Authorized By: _______________________________________ No. 3 Yes _____ No _____ Authorized By: _______________________________________ No. 4 Yes _____ No _____ Authorized By: _______________________________________ No. 5 Yes _____ No _____ Authorized By: _______________________________________ No. 6 Yes _____ No _____ Authorized By: _______________________________________ No. 7 Yes _____ No _____ Authorized By: _______________________________________ * ALL BIDS ARE PRESUMED TO INCLUDE ALL APPLICABLE TAXES. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ENSURING THAT ALL MATERIALS CONTAINED IN THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE PROJECT ARE BID ON THE PRICE SHEET. 2942786.1 EXHIBIT D TO INVITATION FOR BIDS NO. PW2017-01 [Federal Requirements] See following page. Not applicable to this Project. 2942786.1 EXHIBIT E TO INVITATION FOR BIDS NO. PW2017-01 [Licenses; DBE/WBE Status] See following page. 2942786.1 LICENSES; DBE/WBE STATUS Fire Station No. 2 Construction PW2017-01 Attach a copy of your Contractor’s License to your bid submittal. Attach a copy of your Town of Fountain Hills Business License to your bid submittal. Attach a copy of your Arizona Transaction Privilege Tax License Has your firm been certified by any jurisdiction in Arizona as a minority or woman owned business enterprise? Yes__________, No____________. If yes, please provide details and documentation of the certification. 2942786.1 EXHIBIT F TO INVITATION FOR BIDS NO. PW2017-01 [References] See following page. 2942786.1 REFERENCES Fire Station No. 2 Construction PW2017-01 Provide the following information for three clients for whom Bidder has successfully completed similar projects as set forth in Section 2.16 within the past 60 months. Failure to provide three accurate and suitable references will result in disqualification. Bidder may also attach another sheet with additional references. 1. Company: Address City/State/Zip Code Contact: Telephone Number: Date of Contract Initiation: Date of Contract Expiration: Final Project Cost: Project Description: 2. Company: Address City/State/Zip Code Contact: Telephone Number: Date of Contract Initiation: Date of Contract Expiration: Final Project Cost: Project Description: 3. Company: Address City/State/Zip Code Contact: Telephone Number: Date of Contract Initiation: Date of Contract Expiration: Final Project Cost: Project Description: 2942786.1 EXHIBIT G TO INVITATION FOR BIDS NO. PW2017-01 [Bid Bond] See following page. 2942786.1 BID BOND Fire Station No. 2 Construction PW2017-01 KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: THAT, _____________________________________________________________________ (hereinafter called Principal), as Principal, and ___________________________________________________, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of _______________________________________________ with its principal office in the City of __________________________, (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Town of Fountain Hills, (hereinafter called the Obligee) in the penal sum of Ten Percent (10%) of Bid Amount, ______________________________ (Dollars) ($________________) lawful money of the United States of America, to be paid to the order of the Town of Fountain Hills, for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents and in conformance with A.R.S. Section 34-201. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid/proposal for:___________________________________. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee accepts the proposal of the Principal and the Principal enters into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of the proposal and gives the Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as specified in the Standard Specifications with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of the Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and materials furnished in the prosecution of the Contract, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter into the Contract and give the Bonds and Certificates of Insurance, if the Principal pays to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty of the Bond between the amount specified in the proposal and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by the proposal then this obligation is void. Otherwise it remains in full force and effect provided, however, that this Bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 34-201, Arizona Revised Statutes, and all liabilities on this Bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of the section to the extent as if it were copied at length herein. The prevailing party in a suit on this bond shall recover as part of the judgment reasonable attorney fees that may be fixed by a judge of the Court. Witness our hands this ___________ day of ___________________________________20____. ______________________________________________ Principal Seal By: __________________________________________ ______________________________________________ Surety Seal By: __________________________________________ ______________________________________________ Agency of Record 2942786.1 EXHIBIT H TO INVITATION FOR BIDS NO. PW2017-01 [Key Personnel/Subcontractor Listing] See following page. 2942786.1 KEY PERSONNEL/SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING Fire Station No. 2 Construction PW2017-01 Key Personnel and Subcontractors listed herein shall be utilized on this Project. Category: Personnel/ Subcontractor Name, Contact Information: _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 2942786.1 EXHIBIT I TO INVITATION FOR BIDS NO. PW2017-01 [Performance Bond] See following page. 2942786.1 PERFORMANCE BOND Fire Station No. 2 Construction PW2017-01 KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: THAT, ___________________________________________________________ (hereinafter called Principal), as Principal, and_________________________________________, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of ____________________________, with its principal office in the City of ________________________ (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Town of Fountain Hills (hereinafter called the Obligee) in the amount of ______________________________(Dollars) ($_____________________), for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written Contract with the Obligee, dated the ________ day of _________________ 20___, for the material, service or construction described as ___________________________________________________________________ is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the Principal faithfully performs and fulfills all of the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of the Contract during the original term of the Contract and any extension of the Contract, with or without notice to the Surety, and during the life of any guaranty required under the Contract, and also performs and fulfills all of the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of all duly authorized modifications of the Contract that may hereafter be made, notice of which modifications to the surety being hereby waived, the above obligation is void. Otherwise it remains in full force and effect. PROVIDED, however, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Title 34, Chapter 2, Article 2, Arizona Revised Statutes, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Title 34, Chapter 2, Article 2, Arizona Revised Statutes, to the extent as if it were copied at length in this agreement. The prevailing party in a suit on this bond shall recover as part of the judgment reasonable attorney fees that may be fixed by a judge of the Court. Witness our hands this _______ day of ________________________ 20___. ____________________________________________ Principal Seal By: ________________________________________ ____________________________________________ Surety Seal By: ________________________________________ ____________________________________________ Agency of Record 2942786.1 EXHIBIT J TO INVITATION FOR BIDS NO. PW2017-01 [Payment Bond] See following page. 2942786.1 PAYMENT BOND Fire Station No. 2 Construction PW2017-01 KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: THAT, __________________________________________ (hereinafter called Principal), as Principal, and _______________________________, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of __________________________, with its principal office in the City of ______________________ (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Town of Fountain Hills (hereinafter called the Obligee) in the amount of ____________________________________(Dollars) ($___________________), for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written Contract with the Obligee, dated the ___________ day of _________________ 20___, for the material, service or construction described as _________________________________________ which Contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the Principal promptly pays all monies due to all persons supplying labor or materials to the Principal or the Principal’s Subcontractors in the prosecution of the Work provided for in the Contract, this obligation is void. Otherwise it remains in full force and effect. PROVIDED, however, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Title 34, Chapter 2, Article 2, Arizona Revised Statutes, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions, conditions and limitations of Title 34, Chapter 2, Article 2, Arizona Revised Statutes, to the same extent as if they were copied at length in this agreement. The prevailing party in a suit on this bond shall recover as a part of the judgment reasonable attorney fees that may be fixed by a judge of the Court. Witness our hands this _______ day of _________________, 20___. ____________________________________________ Principal Seal By: ________________________________________ ____________________________________________ Surety Seal By:________________________________________ ____________________________________________ Agency of Record 2942786.1 EXHIBIT K TO INVITATION FOR BIDS NO. PW2017-01 [Acknowledgments of Addenda received] See following page(s). 3064409.1 TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT INVITATION FOR BIDS FIRE STATION NO. 2 CONSTRUCTION PW2017-01 Addendum No. 1 Date: August 30, 2017 From: Justin Weldy, Town Representative Subject: Addendum No. 1 to Solicitation No. PW2017-01 Bid Deadline: September 20, 2017 (REVISED DATE); 10:00 a.m. (local time, Phoenix, Arizona) SCOPE This Addendum forms a part of the Contract and clarifies, corrects, or modifies the original Invitation for Bids document prepared by the Town of Fountain Hills. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the attached “Acknowledgment of Addenda Received” form. This acknowledgement must accompany the submitted bid; failure to do so may subject the bidder to disqualification. This Addendum No. 1 consists of modifications to the solicitation schedule. ADDENDUM 1. The Bid Deadline and Bid Opening dates are deleted in their entirety and replaced with the following: September 20, 2017; 10:00 a.m. (local time, Phoenix, Arizona) 3064409.1 TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF ADDENDA RECEIVED INVITATION FOR BIDS FIRE STATION NO. 2 CONSTRUCTION PW2017-01 Addendum No. 1 _______________________________________________, affirms that ADDENDUM No. 1 has been (Name of Vendor/Designee) received and that the information contained in ADDENDUM No. 1 has been incorporated in formulating the Vendor’s Offer. , 2017 Signed Date Print Name Title Company Name Address City, State, Zip Code END OF ADDENDUM No. 1 3077623.1 TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT INVITATION FOR BIDS FIRE STATION NO. 2 CONSTRUCTION PW2017-01 Addendum No. 2 Date: September 19, 2017 From: Justin Weldy, Town Representative Subject: Addendum No. 2 to Solicitation No. PW2017-01 Bid Deadline: October 26, 2017 (REVISED DATE); 10:00 a.m. (local time, Phoenix, Arizona) SCOPE This Addendum forms a part of the Contract and clarifies, corrects, or modifies the original Invitation for Bids document prepared by the Town of Fountain Hills. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the attached “Acknowledgment of Addenda Received” form. This acknowledgement must accompany the submitted bid; failure to do so may subject the bidder to disqualification. This Addendum No. 2 consists of modifications to the solicitation schedule for the Invitation for Bids No. PW2017-01, released on July 26, 2017, as modified by Addendum No. 1, released on August 30, 2017. ADDENDUM 1. The Bid Deadline and Bid Opening dates are deleted in their entirety and replaced with the following: October 26, 2017; 10:00 a.m. (local time, Phoenix, Arizona) 3077623.1 2 TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF ADDENDA RECEIVED INVITATION FOR BIDS FIRE STATION NO. 2 CONSTRUCTION PW2017-01 Addendum No. 2 _______________________________________________, affirms that ADDENDUM No. 2 has been (Name of Vendor/Designee) received and that the information contained in ADDENDUM No. 2 has been incorporated in formulating the Vendor’s Offer. , 2017 Signed Date Print Name Title Company Name Address City, State, Zip Code END OF ADDENDUM No. 2 TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT INVITATION FOR BIDS FIRE STATION NO. 2 CONSTRUCTION PW2017-01 Addendum No. 3 Date: October 23, 2017 From: Justin Weldy, Town Representative Subject: Addendum No. 3 to Solicitation No. PW2017-01 Bid Deadline: November 16, 2017 (REVISED DATE); 10:00 a.m. (local time, Phoenix, Arizona) SCOPE This Addendum forms a part of the Contract and clarifies, corrects, or modifies the original Invitation for Bids document prepared by the Town of Fountain Hills. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the attached “Acknowledgment of Addenda Received” form. This acknowledgement must accompany the submitted bid; failure to do so may subject the bidder to disqualification. This Addendum No. 3 consists of modifications to the solicitation schedule for the Invitation for Bids No. PW2017-01, released on July 26, 2017, as modified by Addendum No. 1, released on August 30, 2017, and Addendum No.2, released on September 19, 2017. ADDENDUM 1. The Bid Deadline and Bid Opening dates are deleted in their entirety and replaced with the following: November 16, 2017; 10:00 a.m. (local time, Phoenix, Arizona) 3077623.1 TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF ADDENDA RECEIVED INVITATION FOR BIDS FIRE STATION NO. 3 CONSTRUCTION PW2017-01 Addendum No. 3 (Name of Vendor/Designee) , affirms that ADDENDUM No. 3 has been Received and that the information contained in ADDENDUM No. 3 has been incorporated in formulating the Vendor’s Offer. , 2017 Signed Date Print Name Title Company Name Address City, State, Zip Code END OF ADDENDUM No. 3 3077623.1 2 TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT INVITATION FOR BIDS FIRE STATION NO. 2 CONSTRUCTION PW2017-01 Addendum No. 4 Date: October 24, 2017 From: Justin Weldy, Town Representative Subject: Addendum No. 4 to Solicitation No. PW2017-01 Bid Deadline: November 16, 2017 (REVISED DATE); 10:00 a.m. (local time, Phoenix, Arizona) SCOPE This Addendum forms a part of the Contract and clarifies, corrects, or modifies the original Invitation for Bids document prepared by the Town of Fountain Hills. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the attached “Acknowledgment of Addenda Received” form. This acknowledgement must accompany the submitted bid; failure to do so may subject the bidder to disqualification. This Addendum No. 3 consists of modifications to the solicitation schedule for the Invitation for Bids No. PW2017-01, released on July 26, 2017, as modified by Addendum No. 1, released on August 30, 2017, Addendum No.2, released on September 19, 2017. Addendum No.3 released on October 23, 2017 ADDENDUM 1. The Bid Deadline and Bid Opening dates are deleted in their entirety and replaced with the following: November 16, 2017; 10:00 a.m. (local time, Phoenix, Arizona) 3077623.1 TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF ADDENDA RECEIVED INVITATION FOR BIDS FIRE STATION NO. 2 CONSTRUCTION PW2017-01 Addendum No. 4 (Name of Vendor/Designee) , affirms that ADDENDUM No. 4 has been Received and that the information contained in ADDENDUM No. 4 has been incorporated in formulating the Vendor’s Offer. , 2017 Signed Date Print Name Title Company Name Address City, State, Zip Code END OF ADDENDUM No. 4 3077623.1 2 H&C 2016-003 ADDENDUM 4-1 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 October 24, 2017 Addendum No. 4 ADDENDUM NO. 4 October 24, 2017 to the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS for Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 & EPCOR Driveway H & C Project No. 2016-003 The original Drawings dated June 2, 2017 are modified or interpreted as stated herein. Receipt of this Addendum shall be acknowledged by inserting its number and date in the space provided on the BID FOR LUMP SUM CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT form. Failure to acknowledge may subject bidder to disqualification. This addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies them as follows. This addendum consists of three (3) pages and any attachments. 1. SPECIFICATIONS: A. Section 02 23 00, ALTERNATES: 1. Delete in its entirety. Add “Section 02 23 00, ALTERNATES”, see attachments. B. Section 04 73 00 – SIMULATED STONE VENEER: 1. Delete in its entirety. Add “Section 04 73 00, SIMULATED STONE VENEER”, see attachments. C. Section 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS: 1. Delete in its entirety. Add “Section 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS”, see attachments. D. Section 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING: 1. Delete in its entirety. Add “Section 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING”, see attachments. E. Section 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES: 1. Delete in its entirety. Add “Section 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES”, see attachments. F. Section 08 36 00 SECTIONAL DOORS: 1. Delete in its entirety. Add “Section 08 36 00 SECTIONAL DOORS”, see attachments. G. Section 10 00 00 MISCELLANEOUS ACESSORIES: 1. Delete in its entirety. Add “Section 10 00 00 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES”, see attachments. H. Section 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES: 1. Delete in its entirety. Add “Section 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES”, see attachments. I. Section 10 40 00 SIGNAGE: 1. Delete in its entirety. Add “Section 10 40 00 SIGNAGE”, see attachments. J. Section 12 24 13 ROLLER SHADES: 1. Delete in its entirety. Add “Section 12 24 13 ROLLER SHADES”, see attachments. 2. DRAWINGS: A. ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS: 1. ADD, Sheet A1.0, General Note #9 “CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL FRAMING AND BLOCKING IN WOOD.” H&C 2016-003 ADDENDUM 4-2 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 October 24, 2017 Addendum No. 4 2. DELETE, “Sheet A1.0, dated 6/2/17” in its entirety. ADD “Sheet A1.0, dated 8/29/17”. 3. REPLACE, General Note 2, “2. SEE SHEET AL.3.3, AL4.1, AL5.1, AL5.2, AL 5.3, AL6.2, AL8.3, AL8.4, AL8.6, AL8.7, AL8.8, AL8.9, AL8.10, AL9.0 FOR ALL REFERENCE DETAILS NOT CALLED OUT.” TO “ 2. SEE SHEET A1.1, A1.2, A4.1, A4.2, A6.3, A8.3, A8.4, A8.5, A9.0 “ 4. DELETE “Sheet AS1.0, dated 6/2/17” in its entirety. ADD “Sheet A1.0, dated 9/8/17”. 5. ADD ASK-1.0, East Elevation dated 8/29/17, see attachments. 6. ADD ASK-1.1, North Elevation dated 8/29/17, see attachments. 7. ADD ASK-1.2, North Elevation dated 8/29/17, see attachments. 8. ADD ASK-1.3, West Elevation dated 8/29/17, see attachments. 9. ADD ASK-2.0, ROOF – Head Wall @ Tile Roof dated 8/29/17, see attachments. 10. ADD ASK-2.1, ROOF – Hip/Ridge @ Tile Roof dated 8/29/17, see attachments. 11. ADD ASK-2.2, ROOF – Eave Iso @ Tile Roof dated 8/29/17, see attachments. 12. ADD ASK-2.3, ROOF – Pan Flashing @ Tile Roof dated 8/29/17, see attachments. B. ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS: 1. ADD SKE-1, Electrical Power Plan dated 9/7/17, see attachments. 2. ADD SKE-2, Electrical Schedule dated 9/7/17, see attachments. 3. ADD SKE-3, Electrical Schedule dated 9/7/17, see attachments. 3. ATTACHMENTS: A. SPECIFICATIONS: 1. 02 23 00 – ALTERNATES 2. 04 73 00 – SIMULATED STONE VENEER 3. 07 25 00 – WEATHER BARRIERS 4. 07 61 00 – SHEET METAL ROOFING 5. 07 72 00 – ROOF ACCESSORIES 6. 08 36 00 – SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 7. 10 00 00 – MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 8. 10 28 00 – TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 9. 10 40 00 – SIGNAGE 10. 12 24 13 – ROLLER WINDOW SHADES B. ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS: 1. A1.0, SITE PLAN date 8/29/17. 2. AS1.0, Site Plan dated 9/8/17 3. ASK-1.0, East Elevation dated 8/29/17. 4. ASK-1.1, North Elevation dated 8/29/17. 5. ASK-1.2, North Elevation dated 8/29/17. 6. ASK-1.3, West Elevation dated 8/29/17. 7. ASK-2.0, ROOF - Head Wall @ Tile Roof dated 8/29/17. 8. ASK-2.1, ROOF – Hip/Ridge @ Tile Roof dated 8/29/17. 9. ASK-2.2, ROOF – Eave Iso @ Tile Roof dated 8/29/17. 10. ASK-2.3, ROOF – Pan Flashing @ Tile Roof dated 8/29/17. C. ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS: 1. SKE-1, Electrical Power Plan dated 9/7/17 2. SKE-2, Electrical Schedule dated 9/7/17 3. SKE-3, Electrical Schedule dated 9/7/17 D. PRE-BID QUESTION LOG: 1. Pre-Bid Question log dated 8/29/17. H&C 2016-003 ADDENDUM 4-3 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 October 24, 2017 Addendum No. 4 E. SUBSTITUTION REQUEST: 1. Typar, HouseWrap. Section 07 25 00 2. Fabral, Powerseam. Section 07 61 00 3. SafePro, Roof Hatch and Safety Rail, Section 07 72 00 4. SUBSTITUTION REQUEST: 1. Typar, HouseWrap, Substitution Approved. 2. Fabral, Powerseam, Substitution Approved. 3. SafePro, Roof Hatch and Safety Rail, Substitution Approved. Approved by: HUNT & CARAWAY Architects, Ltd. Tamara Caraway, Executive Vice President H&C ADD ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 1 SECTION 01 23 00 – ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. H&C ADD ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 2 1.5 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Add Alternate No. 1 1. Alternate Bid: Provide Synthetic Stone Veneer as indicated on drawings and specifications. 2. Base Bid: Include synthetic stone veneer at front entry elevation along Fountain Hills Blvd and entry sign. Include synthetic stucco system Color P6 as indicated on the interior elevations. B. Add Alternate No. 2 1. Alternate Bid: Include faux painted tube steel accent outriggers rafter tails and outlookers as indicated on drawings and specifications. 2. Base Bid: Exterior grade Faux Wood Square Cut Outlookers and Square Rafter Tails with sizes and style as indicated on drawings. a. Manufacturer: Faux Wood Beams or approved equal b. Material: Polyurethane c. Texture: Rough Sawn C. Add Alternate No. 3 1. Alternate Bid: Bi-folding apparatus bay doors with full light as indicated on the specifications. 2. Base Bid: Overhead sectional doors with vision panel as indicated on drawings and specifications. D. Add Alternate No. 4 1. Alternate Bid: Full height interior ceramic tile walls as indicated on drawings. 2. Base Bid: Five foot 4 inch height interior ceramic tile walls with accent bands located as approved by Architect. E. Add Alternate No. 5A 1. Alternate Bid: Tube steel window awning cover as indicated on drawings, reference Keynote 11/A5.0 & A5.1. 2. Base Bid: Aluminum prefabricated awning system as indicated within specification. F. Add Alternate No. 5B 1. Alternate Bid: Tube steel base patio awning cover and CMU base accent with synthetic stone veneer as indicated on drawings. 2. Base Bid: Aluminum patio cover system to match existing design. G. Deductive Alternate No. 6 1. Alternate Bid: 6’-0” maximum height VERSA-LOK retaining wall system or approved equal. a. Engineering: To be included b. Style: As selected by Architect. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 VENEER STONE 04 70 00 #-1 SECTION 04 70 00 MASONRY SIMULATED BRICK AND STONE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Waterproof coatings, setting materials, grouting materials and methods of installation for veneer and dimension stone. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry C. Section 04 70 00 – Masonry - Simulated Brick and Stone Masonry 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108.01 General Requirements: Subsurfaces and Preparations by Other Trades. B. ANSI A108.02 General Requirements: Materials, Environmental, and Workmanship. C. ANSI A108.10 Installation of Grout in Stonework. D. ANSI A108.13 Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Stone and Dimension Stone. E. ANSI A118.4 Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. F. ANSI A118.6 Specifications for Ceramic Stone Grouts. G. ANSI A118.10 Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile And Dimension Stone Installations 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Description: 1. Waterproof coating, setting materials, grouting materials and methods of installation for veneer and dimension stone over cement board. Cement board is installed over an approved sheathing and a code approved water resistant barrier B. Functional Criteria: 1. Performance Requirements a. Shall meet the testing requirements of the manufacturer’s Product Performance Sheet. 2. Substrate Systems: a. Shall be engineered to withstand applicable design loads including required safety factor. b. Maximum deflection of substrate system shall be as required by the veneer masonry manufacturer c. Substrate dimensional tolerance: Flat within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) in any 4 ft (122 cm) radius. d. Surface irregularities: Sheathing not over 1/8 in (3 mm); masonry not over 3/16 in (4.8 mm). 3. Install control joints and expansion joints in adhered masonry veneer work in accordance with TCNA Detail EJ171. 4. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and veneer units. Do not saw-cut joints after installing units. a. Locate joints in veneer surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. b. Joint width and spacing depends on application - follow TCA “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation” Detail "EJ-171 Expansion Joints" or consult sealant manufacturer for recommendation based on project parameters. c. Remove all contaminants and foreign material from joint spaces/surfaces, such as dirt, H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 VENEER STONE 04 70 00 #-2 dust, oil, water, frost, setting/grouting materials, sealers and old sealant/backer. Install appropriate Backing Material (e.g. closed cell backer rod) based on expansion joint design and as specified in Section 07920. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit Samples, and Certificates in accordance with Division 1 General Requirements Submittal Section. B. Samples: Submit samples for approval. Samples shall be of materials specified and of suitable size as required to accurately represent each color and texture used on project. Prepare each sample using same tools and techniques for actual project application. Maintain and make available, at job site, approved samples. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Shall have manufactured waterproofing products in United States for at least ten years. 2. Applicator: Completed veneer stone installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 3. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver manufacturer products in original packaging with manufacturer's identification. B. Storage: Store materials supplied by manufacturer in a cool, dry location, out of sunlight, protected from weather and other harmful environment, and at a temperature above 40 °F (4 °C) and below 110 °F (43 °C) in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.8 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS A. Installation Ambient Air Temperature: Minimum of 50 °F (10 °C) and rising, and remain so for 72 hours thereafter B. Substrate Temperature: Do not apply manufacturer materials to substrates whose temperature are below 40 °F (4 °C) or contain frost or ice. C. Inclement Weather: Do not apply manufacturer materials during inclement weather, unless appropriate protection is employed. D. Prior to installation, the wall shall be inspected for surface contamination, or other defects that may adversely affect the performance of the manufacturer materials and shall be free of residual moisture. E. Vent temporary heaters to outside to avoid carbon dioxide damage to new stonework. 1.9 WARRANTY Warranty: 5 year warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specifications requirements: B. Manufacturer: Eldorado Stone, LLC, 1370 Grand Avenue, San Marcos, CA 92078 or approved equal 1. Obtain components of manufacturer products from authorized distributors. No substitutions or additions of other materials are permitted without prior written H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 VENEER STONE 04 70 00 #-3 permission from manufacturer for this project. 2. Source Limitations for: Obtain each Veneer Stone color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of stone from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Manufacturer: Coronado Stone, 11191 Calabash Ave, Fontana CA 92337 or approved equal 1. Canyon Ledge – Golden Fall 2.2 MATERIALS A. Veneer Materials 1. Veneer, Type B: Veneer Stone; as follows: a. Manufacturer: Eldorado Stone b. Thickness: 1-5/8”. c. Pattern: Shadow Rock. d. Color: Somerset, to match approved sample range. B. Cement Board Waterproofing: Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membrane For Thin-Set Ceramic Tile And Dimension Stone Installations; ANSI A118.10: 1. SP1 HydroGuard Waterproofing Membrane; an elastomeric waterproofing and crack isolation membrane. C. Specialty Adhesive Mortar Latex-Portland Cement Stone Setting Mortar ANSI A118.4. 1. Mer-Lite 820; a lightweight medium bed latex modified Portland cement dry set mortar for installations requiring a medium bed mortar to compensate for irregularities in the substrate or veneer stone. D. Sanded Portland Cement Grout; ANSI A118.6 1. Sanded PaverGrout or approved equal; a sanded Portland cement grout, color as selected by Architect, a dense matrix grout for veneer stone with widths 1/4 inch to 1 inch. 2.3 RELAT ED MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Cement Board 1. Minimum ½ inch (13 mm) thick PermaBase® Brand Cement Board complying with ASTM C1325 or Cement Board complying with ASTM C1325 with fiber-mat reinforced edges other approved by manufacturer. B. Substrate Materials: 1. Sheathing shall be installed in accordance with its industry standards and applicable building code. 2. Gypsum Sheathing shall conform to ASTM C79, C1396, or C1177 glass mat gypsum sheathing, minimum thickness 1/2" (12.7 mm). 3. Plywood shall be not less than 15/32" (11 mm) thick, PS-1 Exposure 1 or Exterior grade. 4. Oriented strand board (OSB) shall be not less than 7/16" thick (11.1 mm), PS-2 Exposure 1. 5. For wood-based sheathing (Plywood and OSB), comply with APA-The Engineered Wood Association spacing recommendations for edge and end joints. Gap wood sheathing panels minimum 1/8". 6. Sheathing shall be protected from weather before, during and after application of Teifs NuTech Stucco. C. Water-resistive Barrier (applied over the substrate materials): 1. Water Resistive Barrier Coating a. Keyguard water H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 VENEER STONE 04 70 00 #-4 b. resistive barrier coating (2 coats required on OSB and Plywood) 1) Treat all sheathing joints with 495 KeyGuard roll on water-resistive barrier and embed Parex 396 Sheathing Tape. 2) Apply 495 KeyGuard roll on Water-resistive barrier to the surface of the appropriate substrate ( Minimum 2 coats on plywood, concrete and masonry). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify project site conditions under provisions of Section 01 00 00. B. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's instructions C. Substrate Examination: Examine prior to manufacturer product installation as follows: 1. Substrate shall be of a type approved by manufacturer. 2. Substrate shall be examined for soundness, and other harmful conditions. 3. Substrate shall be free of dust, dirt, laitance, efflorescence, and other harmful contaminants. 4. Substrate construction in accordance with substrate material manufacturer's specifications and applicable building codes. D. Sealants and Backer Rod: To be installed, where required, in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's specifications and published literature, and using the sealant manufacturer's recommended primers. E. Advise Contractor of discrepancies preventing installation of the manufacturer products. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect surrounding material surfaces and areas during installation of system. B. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Installation shall conform to this specification and manufacturer written instructions and drawing details. 1. Comply with applicable ANSI 108 series of the "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile." 2. Comply with TCA installation methods indicated or, if not other otherwise indicated, as applicable to installation conditions shown. 3. Extend stone work into recesses an under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown. 4. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of stone without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of stone abutting trim, finish or built-in items for straight aligned joints. 5. Unless otherwise shown, lay stone in grid pattern. Layout stone work and center stone fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize stone cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown. 6. Locate expansion joints and other sealant filled joints, including control, contraction and isolation joints, where indicated and approved by Architect. 7. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with referenced installation standards and sealant manufacturer's instructions. B. Cement Board Sheathing Joints, Cracks and Protrusions 1. Pre fill all substrate cracks, cold and control joints with Latex Modified Thinset’s or PUC caulking. 2. Fill all voids with Latex Modified Thin set’s to within a minimum of 1/8”. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station No.2 VENEER STONE 04 70 00 #-5 3. Apply a liberal coat of SP1 HydroGuard Waterproofing Membrane liquid around joints, crack and protrusions. 4. Embed 8” reinforcing fabric into the wet SP1 HydroGuard Waterproofing Membrane, cover with a second coat of SP1 HydroGuard Waterproofing Membrane, “sandwiching” the reinforcing fabric. When the membrane has dried to an emerald green color, apply an additional application to prevent pinholes. C. Waterproof Membrane: 1. Install SP1 HydroGuard waterproof membrane, where required, to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install waterproof membrane in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.1 (A-1 through A-3) and ANSI A108.13. 3. Review the installation and plan the application sequence. D. Expansion joints: 1. SP1 HydroGuard must not be applied unsupported to bridge across expansion joints. The joint must be cleaned to remove an loose debris and an opened or closed – cell backer rod is installed to the joint to the proper depth as specified by designer. 2. PUC sealant or manufacturer approved equal is pressed into the joint, coating the sides and leaving the joint flush with the surface. After the sealant is dry, the SP1 HydroGuard membrane is applied following the “Membrane application” instructions above. E. Veneer Stone 1. Install stone to comply with referenced TCA and ANSI installation standards, using setting materials indicated. 2. Install Mer-Lite 820 latex Portland cement mortar or approved equal in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.1 (A-1 through A-3) and ANSI A108.5 (A-4.3). 3. Use the appropriate trowel notch size to ensure proper bedding of the tile, brick or stone selected. Work the latex Portland cement mortar into good contact with the substrate and comb with notched side of trowel. 4. Spread only as much latex Portland cement mortar as can be covered while the mortar surface is still wet and tacky. 5. Fit thin brick units around corners, fitments, fixtures, drains and other built-in objects to maintain uniform joint appearance. 6. Make cut edges smooth, even and free from chipping. Do not split veneer units 7. Expansion Joints: The veneer brick or stones are installed over the membrane, leaving a gap over the joint as specified by the designer. After the veneer is set, the joint must be filled as specified by the designer. F. Curing set veneer brick/stone: 1. 72 hours before grouting when the temperature is low or the humidity is high. 2. 48 hours before grouting when hot, dry conditions exist. 3. Check the bond strength carefully before grouting. G. Grouting 1. Grout thin brick to comply with the requirements of the Cement Grout (ANSI A118.7) standards. 2. Verify grout joints are free of dirt, debris or tile spacers. Sponge or wipe dust/dirt off veneer face and remove any water standing in joints. Surface temperature must be between 40-90°F (4-32°C). 3. Measure the specified amount of clean potable water. Pack joints full and free of voids/pits. Initial cleaning can begin as soon as grout has become firm, typically 20-30 minutes after grouting depending on temperature. 4. Drag a clean towel dampened with water, or wipe a clean, dampened sponge, diagonally over the veneer face to remove any grout haze left after “squeegeeing.” Rinse towel/sponge frequently and change rinse water at least every 200 ft2 (19 m2). Repeat this cleaning sequence again if grout haze is still present. 5. Allow grout joints to become firm. Buff surface of grout with clean coarse cloth. Inspect joint for pinholes/voids and repair them with freshly mixed grout. H&C WEATHER BARRIER 07 25 00-1 SECTION 07 25 00 - WEATHER BARRIER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sheet applied weather barrier and related accessories for wall air/moisture barrier system. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing and bracing. B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Sheathing. C. Section 07210 - Insulation: Exterior wall insulation. D. Section 07460 - Siding: Wall finish and primary weather barrier. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC) 127 - Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E-96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D1117 - Standard Guide for Evaluating Nonwoven Fabrics. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D3330 - Standard Test Method for Peel Adhesion of Pressure-Sensitive Tape1. E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D3759 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength and Elongation of Pressure-Sensitive Tapes. F. PSTC-1 - Peel Adhesion of Single Coated Pressure-Sensitive Tapes at 180 Degree Angle. G. TAPPI T-460 - Porosity - Gurley. H&C WEATHER BARRIER 07 25 00-2 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The airtight components and secondary moisture protection of the building enclosure and the joints, junctures and transitions between materials, products, and assemblies forming the air-tightness and moisture barrier of the building enclosure are called "the air/moisture barrier system". Services include coordination between the trades, the proper scheduling and sequencing of the work, preconstruction meetings, inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect. B. Air Barrier Penetrations: All penetrations of the air/moisture barrier and paths of air infiltration / exfiltration through the air/moisture barrier system shall be made air-tight. C. Moisture Barrier Penetrations: All penetrations of the air/moisture barrier and paths of water migration through the air/moisture barrier system shall be made water shedding. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 2 years experience with installation of similar products. B. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation and sealing techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by Architect. 3. Repair mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Do not store in direct sunlight. Weather barrier shall be stored in a covered area. Do not expose to building site chemicals. C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. H&C WEATHER BARRIER 07 25 00-3 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Anticipate environmental conditions and schedule installation when conditions are within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Product Warranty: Limited product warranty against manufacturing defects. 1. HardieWrap Weather Barrier and related products for 10 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specifications requirements: B. Acceptable Manufacturer: James Hardie Building Products, Inc. C. Acceptable Manufacturer: Typar HouseWrap, Old Hickory, TN D. Substitutions: Or approved equal E. Requests for approval of equal substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 WEATHER BARRIER SYSTEM A. Moisture Air Barrier Sheet: 1. Product: HardieWrap Weather Barrier as manufactured by James Hardie Building Systems. 2. Composition: Non-woven, non-perforated polyolefin. 3. Film: MicroTech Coating with micropores to balance water holdout and breathability. 4. Thickness: 11 mil (0.28 mm). 5. UV Stability: Up to 180 days. 6. Water Holdout (AATCC127): 128 inches (3250 mm). 7. Breathability/Water Vapor Permeance (ÅSTM E-96A): 15 perms. 8. Air Resistance (TAPPI T-460): >1800 sec/100 cc. 9. Tear Strength (ÅSTM D1117): 15 to 18 lb (6.8 to 8.2 kg). 10. Basis Weight: 19.4 lbs/1000 sf (9.5 kgs/100 sm). 11. Sizes: 3 feet by 195 feet (914 mm by 59.4 m), 9 feet by 100 feet (2743 mm by 30.5 m), 9 feet by 150 feet (2743 mm by 45.7 m), 10 feet by 100 feet (3048 mm by 30.5 m), 10 feet by 150 feet (3048 mm by 45.7 m). H&C WEATHER BARRIER 07 25 00-4 B. Self-adhering Flashing: Designed for peel and stick application. 1. Product: HardieWrap Flashing as manufactured by James Hardie Building Systems. 2. Composition: Butyl rubber adhesive non-woven polyolefin backing; coated Kraft paper release. 3. Total Thickness: 25 mil (0.64 mm). 4. UV Stability: Up to 180 days. 5. Application Temperature: 30 degree F to 180 degree F (-1 degree C to 82 degree C). 6. Operating Temperature: -30 degree F to 200 degree F (-34 degree C to 93 degree C). 7. Packaging: Individually shrink-wrapped. 8. Roll Weight: 4 inch (102 mm) = 4.6 lb (2 kg)/roll, 6 inches (152 mm) = 6.9 lb (3 kg) /roll, 9 inches (229 mm) = 9.9 lb (4.5 kg)/roll. 9. Provide Width for Application Required: 4 inches by 100 feet (102 mm by 30.5 m) (2x4 construction), 6 inches by 100 feet (152 mm by 30.5 m) (2x4 construction), 9 inches by 100 feet (229 mm by 30.5) (2x6 construction). C. Flexible Flashing: 1. Product: HardieWrap Flex Flashing as manufactured by James Hardie Building Systems. 2. Composition: Butyl rubber adhesive; creped cross-laminated polyolefin backing; polyethylene film release. 3. Total Thickness: 60 mil (1.5 mm). 4. Tensile Strength (ÅSTM D3759): 18 lb/inch (3.2kg/cm). 5. UV Stability: Up to 180 days. 6. Water Vapor Transfer Rate (ÅSTM E96-94): <.2g/100 square inches/24hrs. 7. Application Temperature: 30 degree F to 180 degree F (-1 degree C to 82 degree C). 8. Operating Temperature: -30 degree F to 200 degree F (-34 degree C to 93 degree C). 9. Packaging: Each roll is packed in a convenient dispenser box 10. Roll Weight: 6 inches (152 mm) = 22.2 lb (10kg)/roll, 9 inches (229 mm) = 33.3 lb (15 kg)/roll. 11. Provide Width for Application Required: 6 inches by 75 feet (152 mm by 23.9 m) (2x4 construction), 9 inches by 75 feet (229 mm by 23.9) (2x6 construction). D. Seam Tape: 1. HardieWrap Seam Tape as manufactured by James Hardie Building Systems. 2. Composition: Polypropylene film coated with acrylic adhesive Total Thickness: 3.0 mil (.08 mm). 3. Adhesion Peel to HardieWrap (PSTC-1): 22 oz/inch (25 N/100 mm). 4. Tensile Strength (ÅSTM D3759): 32 lb/in (.58 kg/mm). 5. Elongation: 136 percent. 6. UV Stability: Up to 90 days. 7. Application Temperature: 30 degree F to 180 degree F (-1 degree C to 82 degree C). 8. Operating Temperature: -30 degree F to 200 degree F (-34 degree C to 93 degree C). 9. Packaging: Individually shrink-wrapped. H&C WEATHER BARRIER 07 25 00-5 10. Roll Weight: 1 lb(0.5 kg)/roll. 11. Roll Size: 1-7/8 inches (43 mm) by 165 feet (50 m). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If framing preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Weather barrier shall be installed before window and door installation. Do not install on saturated sheathing. Weather barrier can become slippery and should not be used in any application where it may be walked on. D. Weather barrier shall be installed on vertical wall applications only. E. Manufacturer warrants weather barrier sheet only when covered within 180 days of its installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Moisture Air Barrier Sheet: 1. Weather barrier shall be installed before window and door installation. Do not install on saturated sheathing. Weather barrier can become slippery and should not be used in any application where it may be walked on. 2. Begin by affixing weather barrier extending at least 6 inches (152 mm) around a building corner. Unroll horizontally (with print side facing out) around the building covering rough window and door openings. 3. Fasten to studs or nailable sheathing material with galvanized construction grade staples a maximum of 18 inches (457 mm) in the vertical and horizontal direction. 4. Attach weather barrier so that it is taut and flat. The vertical overlap shall have a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) and the vertical seam shall be taped. 5. Assure that the bottom edge of the weather barrier extends over the sill plate and SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING H&C SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 00 - 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Sheet metal roofing panels, metal trim, accessories, fasteners, closures, and sealants. [Specifier Note: Edit paragraph below to suit project requirements.] B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05120 Structural Steel 2. Section 05310 Steel Deck 3. Section 05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 4. Section 06150 Wood Decking 5. Section 07210 Building Insulation 6. Section 07220 Roof and Deck Insulation 7. Section 07260 Vapor Retarders 8. Section 07410 Metal Roof and Wall Panels 9. Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 10. Section 07920 Joint Sealants 11. Section 13120 Pre-engineered Structures 1.2 REFERENCES A. General: Reference latest edition of applicable codes and standards. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A792/A792M-Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc-Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM E1592-Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 3. ASTM E1646-Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 4. ASTM E1680-Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems C. AISI Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual, American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). D. AISC Manual of Steel Construction, American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). E. UL Roofing Materials Directory, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1. UL Standard 580-Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING H&C SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 00 - 2 [Specifier Note: Edit paragraphs below to suit project requirements] F. FM Approval Guide, Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM). 1. FM Approval Standard 4471 for Class 1 Panel Roofs. G. Building Codes and Design Standards: 1. ASCE-7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). 2. BOCA National Building Code, Building Officials and Code Administrators, International (BOCA). 3. Uniform Building Code (UBC), International Conference of Building Code Officials (ICBO). 4. Standard Building Code (SBC), Southern Building Code Congress International (SBCC). 5. International Building Code (IBC), International Code Council (ICC). 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Provide structural standing seam metal roof system with a min. 2" high "vertical" seam side joint, mechanically seamed, with factory applied sealant. 2. Attach roof panels to support substrate with concealed anchor clips designed to allow for thermal movement of the panels. There shall be no exposed fasteners except at panel fixing line and flashing details or as indicated on approved panel drawings. 3. Roll-forming of the panels at the job site must be performed with manufacturer owned and relocatable industrial type roll-forming mill having a minimum of (12) stands to gradually shape the sheet metal. Installer owned or rented roll-formers are not acceptable. 4. Provide metal roof panel system which has been manufactured and installed to withstand specified design loads and maintains performance requirements without defects, damage, or failure. B. Performance Requirements: [Specifier Note: Edit Paragraphs below to suit project requirements.] 1. Design Loads: Design loads shall be as specified below or as indicated on the contract drawings. a. The structural standing seam metal roof system shall be designed to safely resist the positive and negative wind loads as specified below or as indicated on the contract drawings: SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING H&C SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 00 - 3 2. Deflection Criteria: Roof panel deflection shall be limited to L/240 for positive loading. 3. Roof panels shall be free to move in response to the expansion and contraction forces resulting from a total temperature range of 120 degrees F during the life of the structure. 4. Roof systems that incorporate foam plastic insulation must be tested by the foam plastic manufacturer in accordance with NFPA-285. C. Performance Testing: Tests shall have been conducted or witnessed by a recognized independent laboratory or independent professional engineer. 1. Allowable uniform uplift load capacity shall be determined in accordance with ASTM E1592. a. The factor of safety against ultimate failure of panel, batten, or clip shall be 1.65, with no increase due to wind. b. Allowable uplift capacity for conditions of gage, span, or loading other than those tested may be determined by interpolation of the test results. Extrapolation of conditions outside the range of the tests is not acceptable. 2. Roof panel system shall be tested for resistance to water penetration in accordance with ASTM E 1646, at a static pressure of 12.0 psf. There shall be no uncontrolled water penetration through the panel side joints. 3. Roof panel system shall be tested for resistance to air leakage in accordance with ASTM E1680, at a static air pressure of 12.0 psf. Air infiltration shall not exceed .02 cfm per sq ft of panel area. 4. Roof panel system shall be tested in accordance with UL Standard 580 and have a Class 90 rating. 5. Roof panels shall withstand a 300 lb concentrated load applied to mid-span between supports with no panel deformation, rib buckling, or panel side joint separation which will adversely affect the weather tightness of the system. 6. Roof panel system shall be tested in accordance with FM Approval Standard 4471 and achieve a windstorm classification of I-90. SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING H&C SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 00 - 4 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data sheet and/or product design and installation manual. B. Shop Drawings: Submit panel shop drawings consisting of design and erection drawings, finish specifications, and other data necessary to clearly describe design, materials, sizes, layouts, construction details, fasteners, and erection. Submit small scale layouts of panels and large scale details of edge conditions, joints, fastener and sealant placement, flashings, penetrations and curbs, and special details. Distinction must be made between factory and field assembled work. Drawings must be approved and field verification of all dimensions must occur prior to fabrication. C. Samples: 1. Panel: Two (2) required, Full panel width by 12" long. 2. Anchor Clips: Two (2) required. 3. Fasteners: Two (2) of each type with a statement of intended use. 4. Closure: One metal closure with foam insert. 5. Sealants: One (1) sample of each type, with a statement of intended use. D. Warranties: Submit manufacturer's applicable sample warranties of products. E. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Calculations: Submit structural design calculations certified by a registered professional engineer to verify load carrying capacity of the panel system. 2. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing that the roof system has been tested and conforms to the specified performance testing requirements. 3. Certificates: a. A written statement from the manufacturer certifying conformance with the specified manufacturer’s qualifications listed in article1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE. b. A written statement from the installer certifying conformance with the specified installer qualifications listed in article 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall have had at least fifteen (15) years in SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING H&C SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 00 - 5 architectural metal roofing design and installation. The manufacturer shall have a permanent, stationary, indoor, production facility. 2. Installer Qualifications: a. The installer shall have had a minimum of five (5) years experience in the installation of metal roofing. b. The installer shall be manufacturer certified. B. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and manufacturer's warranty requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Material shall be delivered to the site in a dry and undamaged condition and unloaded per the manufacturers instructions. The installer shall inspect materials for damage and stains upon arrival at the site. B. Storage: Materials shall be stored out of contact with the ground in weather tight coverings to keep them dry per the manufacturer's recommendations. Storage accommodations shall provide good air circulation and protection from surface staining. C. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and handling of panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, or surface damage. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for material handling. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer's Warranties 1. Material Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant that the material furnished will remain free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from date of shipment. 2. Metal Substrate Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant that the metal roof panel substrate will not rupture or perforate due to corrosion within a period of twenty (20) years from date of shipment. 3. Finish Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant against fading, chalking, peeling, cracking, checking, chipping, or erosion to base metal of the roof panel paint finish for a period of twenty (20) years from date of shipment. 4. Weather Tight Warranty: a. Premium Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant against water penetration of the metal roof panel system, including panel side joint and trim conditions for a period of 20 years from date of substantial completion. During the first two (2) years of the warranty, the roofing contractor SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING H&C SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 00 - 6 shall be liable for all such costs and expenses of repair, refinishing, or replacement of the roofing system as covered by the warranty. Coverage shall be limited to material and installation. Liability shall be limited to repair of the metal panel roof system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specifications requirements: B. The CENTRIA SDP 200 structural standing seam metal roof system as manufactured by CENTRIA, 1099 US Highway 421 South, Frankfort, KY 40601. C. Fabral Powersteam, Lancaster PA D. Approved Equal. 1. Requests to use alternate systems must be submitted in writing at least ten (10) days prior to the bid date. Product data, samples, test reports, and required certificates shall be included for product review and approval. E. Being listed as a pre-qualified manufacturer does not release the manufacturer from providing complete and acceptable submittal requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Metal Panels: SDP 200 structural standing seam panel as manufactured by CENTRIA. 1. Fabricate metal panels from aluminum-zinc coated steel conforming to ASTM A792 Grade 50B with AZ50 coating when painted AZ50 coating when painted or AZ55 coating when unpainted. Thickness shall be minimum 22 gage. 2. Panels shall be a min. of 18" wide with a 2" vertical seam height. 3. Panels shall have longitudinal stiffening ribs in the pan to minimize "oil canning" effect, or be flat in the pan with no minor ribs. B. Concealed Anchor Panel Clips: Fasten metal roof panels to support substrate with concealed anchor clips eliminating all through fastener penetrations. 1. Panel Clips shall be one piece fixed clip, 22ga. SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING H&C SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 00 - 7 2.3 FINISHES A. Galvalume Plus: Aluminum-zinc coated steel conforming to ASTM A792, Grade 50B with AZ55 coating plus a thin acrylic coating applied to both sides. B. Texture: Panel finish shall be smooth . 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Use only high quality fasteners as recommended or approved by the roof system manufacturer. Follow fastener manufacturer's recommendations for fastener installation. 1. Screws: Self-drilling screws shall be min. #12 diameter. Self-tapping screws shall be min. #14 diameter. a. Exposed self-drilling and self-tapping screws shall have a zinc die-cast head with neoprene washer or be 300 series stainless steel with neoprene washer. All exposed fasteners shall be painted to match panel color. b. Concealed screws shall be carbon steel with corrosion resistant coating or 300 series stainless steel as required. 2. Rivets: a. Structural bulbed rivets shall be min.3/16" diameter, standard dome head, aluminum rivet and mandrel, with a weather tight EPDM washer under the head. Min. 5/16" diameter, large flange head, aluminum rivet and mandrel, with a weather tight EPDM washer under the head is required at panel endlaps. b. Trim rivets shall be min. 5/32" diameter, stainless steel body and stem with open end or aluminum body and stem with closed end. c. Rivets shall be painted to match panel color. B. Closures: 1. Pre-cut profile closure shall be cut from cross-linked, closed-cell foam. 2. All foam closures shall be protected and supported by a formed metal closure manufactured from the same material, color, and finish as the roofing. C. Sealants: Use only high quality sealants as recommended or approved by the roof system manufacturer. Sealants must not contain oils, asbestos, or asphalts. SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING H&C SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 00 - 8 1. Non-Curing Butyl: One-part, non-skinning, non-drying, synthetic butyl elastomer. Used for metal-to-metal sealing or bedding of panel and flashing seams or joints. 2. Butyl Tape (Webbed Mastic): Extruded polymeric butyl tape, non-skinning and not easily displaced under compression. Used for critical sealing of panel ends, endlaps, penetrations, closures, and flashings. 3. Urethane: One-part moisture curing, gun grade polyurethane sealant. Used for sealing in all exposed conditions. Color to be coordinated with that of panel. 2.5 FLASHING A. All flashing shall be of the same material, gage, finish, color, and texture as the panels unless otherwise noted. B. Flashing design shall conform to details submitted and approved by the Architect and, if required, the panel manufacturer. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Where possible panels shall be manufactured in continuous lengths, full length of panel runs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. The installer shall inspect the building to verify that the structure is ready for roofing installation. 1. All supports shall be in place with all bracing and connections tightened before work proceeds. 2. Field-check dimensions and check support alignment with a taut string or wire; panel misalignment may induce "oil canning" and potentially restrict panel movement. a. Panel/purlin erection tolerances: * Maximum out-of-plane deviation shall be limited to +/-3/16" from control. * Maximum deviation of 1/8" between adjacent purlins or L/500 which ever is less. 3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING H&C SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 00 - 9 A. Install metal roofing system in accordance with approved erection drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install metal roofing system so that it is weather-tight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stress or distortion. C. Hand-crimp at end of panels and any panel end lap(s) prior to seaming. Do not hand-crimp at each panel clip prior to seaming. Do not walk on panels until panels are mechanically seamed together. H&C ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-1 SECTION 07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's Specifications, design data and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing layout, dimensions and construction details. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurements; proper fit and attachment of parts is required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specifications requirements: 1. Bilco Co. www.bilco.com 2. Bristolite www.bristolite.com 3. Cierra Products www.cierraproducts.com 4. J.L. Industries www.jlindustries.com 5. Pate Co. www.patecurbs.com 6. Milcor, Inc. www.milcorinc.com 7. Nystrom Building Products www.nystrom.com 8. O'Keeffe's Inc. www.okeefes.com 9. Acralight International; Div. Of International Skylights (Roof Hatches) www.acralight.com 10. Safepro, Dallas TX H&C ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-2 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Roof Hatch: Bilco Type S-20, or as approved. www.bilco.com Galvanized steel, 14 gauge cover and curb, 22 gauge cover liner. 1 inch thick rigid insulation in curb and cover, 12 inch high curb. 1. Provide heavy duty padlock hasp. 2. Provide vandal resistant features as available. 3. Finish: Powder coat; standard color as selected. B. Roof Hatch Safety Railing System: 1. Regulatory requirements: a. Local building code. b. OSHA Standards CFR 29 1910.23 and CFR 29 1910.27. 2. Manufacturer(s), model(s) and description(s): a. Bilco model B-Guard RL-XX, top rail, mid rail, and self closing gate, 42 inch railing height. Bilco Co. www.bilco.com b. Nystrom Model No. RHSR-SS, Top rail, mid rail, and chain gate, with the hatch curb acting as the toe plate, 200-lb test load, 42 inch railing height (minimum). www.nystrom.com c. Nesea Corporation, Mt. Laurel, NJ (856) 235-3111, model as applicable to hatchway ladder mounting location. www.nesea-safetyproducts.com d. KeeHatch Railing System, top rail, mid rail, and chain gate designed for permanent bolt-on curb installation; The Safety Rail Source, Harleysville, PA www.thesafetyrailcource.com e. RailingReady, top rail, mid rail, and chain gate, 42 inch railing height. Acralight International www.acralight.com f. Safepro, Dallas TX 3. Materials: a. Pipe: Galvanized, 1-1/4 inch ID, A53 Grade B seamed pipe or galvanized, 1-5/8 inch OD A500 seamed tube with weather-resistant plugged ends. b. Flat bar: 2 x 3/8 inch thickness A36 mild steel. c. Weld filler: Metal NR211 E70XX (AWS). d. Chain system: 3/16-inch proof coil ASTM specification, zinc plated with quick link on fixed end. e. Pipe caps: Weather and light resistant vinyl, 1-1/2 inch deep and to fit snugly over pipe ends. f. Bolts and washers: 3/8 x 2-1/2 inch grade Z, zinc plated. Fender washers for inside of hatch curb and standard flat washers outside. g. Railing Clamps: Kee Klamp manufactured model 10-7 and 45-7 for 1-1/4 inch pipe. h. Sealant: As recommended by manufacturer. Brackets shall be sealed per roof manufacturer's approved methods. i. Factory finish: Hot dipped galvanized. H&C ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-3 4. Labels: Safety no hoisting warning label, model and serial # label, manufacturer identification label, patent or patent pending label. C. Curbs: Pate Style pc-1b, or as approved, box section design, heavy gauge galvanized steel construction, continuous mitered and welded corner seams, integral base plate, factory installed wood nailer, and insulated with 1-1/2 inch thick rigid fiberglass board insulation. D. Equipment Supports: Pate Style es-1 monolithic construction, heavy gauge galvanized steel, continuous mitered and welded corner seams, integral base plate, factory installed 2 inch x 4 inch wood nailer, and heavy gauge galvanized steel counterflashing. E. Pipe Curb Assemblies: Pate Style pca-1, with curb constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel with continuous welded corner seams, factory installed wood nailer insulated with 1-1/2 inch thick rigid fiberglass board insulation, cover of acrylic clad ABS thermoplastic, including graduated step PVC, boots, adjustable stainless steel clamps and cap fastening screws. Each assembly shall include curb, cap, boots and clamps. See Drawings for size and quantity of pipe penetrations. F. Ladder extension (for roof hatches): Bilco Model 1 LadderUP safety post, or Bristolite Grab Bar. G. Curb & Curb Frame: 14 gauge galvanized iron. 1. Lids and Lid Liner: 1 gauge aluminum. 2. Hinges: Heavy Duty aluminum 3/16 inch pivot hinges. 3. Insulation: Lid and curb to have glass fiber insulation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install roof specialties at locations shown or required in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and as detailed on Drawings. B. Install roof hatches, fire (smoke) vents, equipment supports and bases, curbs and curb assemblies, at locations indicated, fastening securely to deck through curb flange. H&C September 13, 2017 08 36 00-1 Sectional Overhead Doors SECTION 08 36 00 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Design doors to meet windload of 20 psf. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings indicating type of doors, operation, finishes and installation details. B. Samples: Submit 2 samples showing specified finish. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify existing conditions by taking field measurements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Overhead Door Corp. 2. Ceco/Windsor Door 3. Clopay Corp. B. Specifications are based on products as manufactured by Overhead Door Corp. 2.02 STEEL OVERHEAD DOORS A. Doors: Overhead 426 Series steel insulated sectional overhead doors. 1. Insulation: Polystyrene. B. Door Panels: 16 gage canter and end stiles with 24 gauge galvanized ribbed exterior and 26 gauge steel back cover. C. Finish: Epoxy prime with factory applied baked-on white polyester or epoxy coating. H&C September 13, 2017 08 36 00-2 Sectional Overhead Doors 2.03 VISION LITES A. Provide individually glazed panels with EDPM or PVC frame. B. Glazing: Insulated double strength glass. 2.04 TRACK SYSTEM A. Provide overhead section door track system with high lift - extra ceiling clearance as indicated. 2.05 WEATHERSTRIPPING A. Weatherseals: Provide double seal rubber strip at bottom edge of all doors. Provide air and water resistant joints at sectional edges. Equip door bottoms with tubular neoprene or vinyl astragal weather strip. 2.06 TRACKS AND HARDWARE A. Provide 3 inch tracks. B. Roller Brackets and Hinges: Heavy steel, galvanized. Rollers to have ball bearings with case hardened inner and outer races. C. Guides: Steel angles or sections. D. Counterbalance Springs: 100,000 cycle coil springs. Adequate to balance door. 2.07 OPERATION A. Motor Operator: 1. Coordinate requirements, installation and connection of equipment with mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Motor: High starting torque, 3/4 H.P. minimum, instant reversing motor with capacity to operate doors at 8 to 12 inches per second, using 115 volts, single phase (verify voltage requirements with Division 16). 3. Gear Reducer: Size to match motor size, using gears run in oil bath. 4. Brake: Design to stop and hold doors in any position. 5. Auxiliary Operator: Provide hand chain interlocked to disconnect motor mechanically and electrically when engaged. 6. Controller: Provide overhead door control as follows: a. Push Button Operation: Reversing magnetic and equip with limit switches and UP-DOWN-STOP pushbutton type control station. Pushbutton station shall be located by door where directed. Provide custom enclosures, with separate sets of switches for entry and exit doors. b. Radio Control Activation: Provide receiver which provides door-open or door close activation from radio signal transmitted from specified remote radio transmitters. Antenna wires connected to receivers located at interior and exterior of building where directed to ensure that signal is received from all locations within transmitter range. 7. HVAC Interlock: Provide with interlock switch at all doors for connection to HVAC system to exhaust vehicle fumes from space after door is closed. 8. Safety Equipment: Provide pressure sensitive pneumatic or electric safety edges installed on bottom bar. Provide safety photo eye switches at bottom of each door to prevent closure if door is blocked. Locate 6 inches above floor unless otherwise directed. H&C September 13, 2017 08 36 00-3 Sectional Overhead Doors 9. Radio Transmitters: Provide radio units designed to transmit a radio signal activating overhead door operation. Transmitters shall be designed and configured to permit separate operation of entry and exit doors. Provide four radio transmitters, one for each emergency vehicle to be stationed. In addition provide 2 spare transmitters. Transmitters shall be solid state with adjustable frequency settings, momentary contact type, operating in ultra-high frequency (UHF) radio range with delay circuits for maximum security. 2.08 LOCKING A. Automatic locking by motor brake. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Doors are to be installed by the Manufacturer or authorized representative in strict accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Fasten vertical track assembly to framing at not less than 24 inches on center. Hang horizontal track from structural overhead framing with angle or channel hangers, welded and bolt-fastened in place. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcing as required for rigid installation of track and door operating equipment. C. Upon completion of installation, including Work by other Trades, lubricate, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter. 3.03 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION H&C MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10 00 00 - 1 SECTION 10 00 00 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Appliances B. Tables C. Chairs D. Office E. Dorm F. Work Out Equipment G. Wall Mounted H. Other 1.2 DEFINITIONS: A. Furnish and install: Section 01010, Summary of the Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300. B. Indicate condition of substrate, method of attachment, materials, finishes, details of construction, and dimensions. C. Submit manufacturers comprehensive product description including specifications and installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Appliances (1) Kitchen Range: 6.3. ft Capacity Electric Single Oven Range with ZTrue Convection and Easy Clean. (Stainless Steel) (2) Ventilation Fan: Discovery 30" Chimney Hood, wall-mounted in Stainless Steel H&C MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10 00 00 - 2 (3) Refrigerator:22 cu.ft ultra large capacity side by side counter depth refrigetator with ice and water dispenser. (Stainless Steel) (4) Microwave: 1.5 cu. Ft. counter top Microwave Oven with Easyclean (Stainless Steel) (5) Dishwasher: LG 24” Built-in Dishwasher wih Stainless Steel Tub (6) Washing Machine: 4.5 cu. Ft. high efficiency front load washer with steam (7) Dryer: 7.4 cu. Ft Electric Dryer with Steam (8) Stainless Steel BBQ Grill ProFire Professional Series 48” PF48RIH-N B. Tables (1) Dinning Table: Provided by Owner (2) Out Door Table: Woodard Deluxe 42”D x 74”W Oval Table W/ Trellis Top (3) Community Room Tables: Goodmans (4) Entry Coffee Table: Goodmans C. Chairs (1) Community Room Chairs: WC 420N, Capers Stacking Chair, Flexnet Seat, No Arms (2) Entry Chairs: WC 410N, Caper Stacking Chair, Molded Seat, no Arms (3) Dining Chairs: WC 420P, Caper Stacking Chair, Flexnet Seat, fixed Arms (4) Out Door Chairs: PICNIC (5) Reclining Chairs: Goodmans D. Office (1) Office Chairs: AE113AWB (2) Office Desk: Goodmans E. Dorm (1) Dorm Room Desks: Goodmans (2) Dorm Room Chairs: WC 121P, Multi- Purpose Chair, F;exnet Seat, Fixed Arms (3) Mattress Cal-The Sturdy Bed-Chief 12” (WorkingFire) F. Work Out Equipment (1) Tread Mill: Provided by Owner (2) Bench Press: Provided by Owner (3) Exercise Bike: Provided by Owner G. Wall Mounted (1) Dry-erase Board: Goodmans (2) Flat Screen TV: Samsung Flat 55” TV Smart LED UN55KU6290 (3) Flat Screen TV: Samsung Flat 65” TV Smart LED UN65JU6400 (4) Flat Screen TV: Samsung Flat 32” TV J5003 LED H. Other (1) Wire Shelving: Goodmans (2) SCBA: Eagle Air Inc., Blackhawk BH10F3 6000 PSIG air compressor, 10 HP, 2550 Lbs.(kg) (3) Ice Machine: Manitowoc Ice 530-lb/Day Full Cube Ice Maker w/ 430-lb Bin. Air Cooled, 115v (4) Wash Station: Goodmans (5) Extractor: UW Series hardmount washer extractor - UniMac (6) Geargrid Standard Lockers 20” W X 20” D x 74-1/2” H (7) Aluminum Window Awnings: Superior Screens 3’-6” x 2’-0” Alum. Powercoated Slat (8) Kitchen Sink: Kohler “Vault” K3838-3NA Double bowl kitchen sink (9) Breathing Air Cylinder: BH10F3, BlackHawk CFS, (2) SCBA 5500 PSI tank and (1) SCUBA 3000 PSI tank. (10) Cord Reels: Coxreel, powe cord reels “EZ-PC” series, Model Ex-PC13-5012-4, EZ- COIL w “Quad” 4 plug industrial receptacle (back to back), 10’-15’ cord length, 4conductor with dual circuits. H&C MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10 00 00 - 3 (11) Generator: Generac Generator SD050, 50kW, 3 Phase, 120/208V, 60Hz at 1800 RPM and 400A Automatic Transfer Switch. Number Name QTY Model# Contractor Buy Owner Buy Contractor Install Owner Install A.1 Kitchen Range 1 LRE3193ST X X A.2 Ventilation Fan 1 DHW301 X X A.3 Refrigerator 3 LSXC22426S X X A.4 Microwave 1 LCRT1513ST X X A.5 Dishwasher 1 LDT5665ST A.6 Washing Machine 1 WM3670HVA X X A.7 Dryer DLEX3370V X X A.8 BBQ Grill ProFire Professional Series 48” PF48RIH-N X B.1 Dining Table 1 Provided by Owner X X B.2 Out Door Table 1 Goodmans X X B.3 Community Room Tables 4 Goodmans X X B.4 Entry Coffee Table 1 Goodmans X X C.1 Community Chairs 12 WC 420N X X C.2 Entry Chairs 3 WC 410N X X C.3 Dinning Chairs 10 WC 420P X X C.4 Out Door Chairs 8 PICNIC X X C.5 Reclining Chairs 6 Provided by Owner X X D.1 Office Chairs 4 AE113AWB X X D.2 Office Desk 2 Goodmans X X E.1 Dorm Room Desks 6 Goodmans X X E.2 Dorm Chairs 6 WC 121P X X E.3 Mattress 6 TwinXL-Working Fire X X H&C MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10 00 00 - 4 F.1 Treadmill 2 Provided by Owner X X F.2 Bench Press 1 Provided by Owner X X F.3 Exercise Bike 2 Provided by Owner X X G.1 Dry-erase Board 16 Goodmans X X G.2 TV (Keynote 10/A2.0) 1 Samsung Flat 55” TV Smart LED UN55KU6290 X X G.3 TV (Keynote 31/A2.0) 1 Samsung Flat 65” TV Smart LED UN65JU6400 X X G.4 TV (Keynote 32/A2.0) 7 Samsung Flat 32” TV J5003 LED X X H.1 Wire Shelving 4 Goodmans X X H.2 SCBA 1 Blackhawk, BH10F3 X X H.3 Ice Machine 1 ID0502A161B570 X X H.4 Wash Station 1 Goodmans X X H.5 Extractor 1 UWN045T4V X X H.6 Lockers 20” W X 20” D x 74-1/2” H 1 GearGrid X X H.7 Aluminum Window Awnings 6 Superior Screens: 3’6”x2’0” Alum.Powdercoated Slat X X H.8 Kitchen Sink 1 K3838-3-NA X X H.9 Breathing Air Cylinder 1 Eagle Air BH10F3, (2) 5500 PSI Tank, (1) 3000 PSI Tank X X H.10 Cord Reels 8 EZ-PC13-5012-4 X X H.11 Generator 1 SD050 & 400A TS X X PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Install miscellaneous items in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and as detailed. B. General Generator: Existing generator is located and installed at the current facility. Contractor to disconnect generator and 400A Automatic Transfer Switch, relocate to new fire H&C TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 1 SECTION 10 28 00 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. B. Owner-Furnished Material: Soap and Paper Towel Dispensers 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. H&C TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES (All Products to be verified with Owner Standards) A. Folding Shower Seat: 1. Bobrick No. B-5181 B. Grab Bars: 1. Bobrick No. B-5507 Series C. Grab Bar Anchors (Stud Wall): 1. Bobrick No. 256 2. Bradley No. 899-015 D. Grab Bar Anchors (Solid Wall): 1. Bobrick No. 257 2. Bradley No. 899-016 E. Electric Hand Dryer: 1. Palmer Fixture BluStorm HD0955, Stainless Steel Cover (Contractor to coordinate and provide electrical at location indicated on Enlarged Plans A7.0) F. Toilet Paper Dispenser: 1. Royce Rolls Standard TB Series (4 Rolls) G. Sanitary Napkin Dispenser: Provide at all Women and Unisex Restrooms 1. Bobrick B-2706 H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 SIGNAGE 10 40 00 - 1 SECTION 10 40 00 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes the following: 1. Plaques 2. Dimension illuminated characters 3. Extruded Aluminum Letters 1.2 DEFINITIONS: A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board’s “American with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines.” 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors available for the following: 1. Zinc 2. Aluminum 3. Acrylic sheet D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated: 1. Plaque Casting: 6 inches (150 mm) square including border. 2. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional character (letter, number, and graphic element). 3. Aluminum: For each form, finish, and color, on 6-inch- (150- mm-) long sections of extrusions and squares of sheet at least 4 by 4 inches (100 by 100 mm). 4. Acrylic Sheet: 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for each color required. 5. Polycarbonate Sheet: 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for each color required. 6. Fiberglass Sheet: 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for each color required. 7. Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches (305 mm) square including border. 8. Photoluminescent Signs: Full-size sign. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 SIGNAGE 10 40 00 - 2 9. Trim Frame: 6-inch (152- mm-) long sections of each profile. 10. Accessories: Manufacturer’s full-size unit. E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Verify room designation and signage layout with Owner. F. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. G. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. C. Source Limitations for Sign: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturers’ written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs. 1.7 WARRANTY: A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 SIGNAGE 10 40 00 - 3 a. Deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, of alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32. C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B221M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of Alloy 6063-T5. D. Brass Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C85200 (high-copper yellow brass). E. Brass, Yellow, Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36 M, Alloy UNS No. C62000. F. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No, C86500 (No. 1 manganese bronze). G. Bronze Plate: ASTM B 36/B 36 M. 1. Steel: a. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653 M, G90 (Z275) coating, either commercial or forming steel. b. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed or electrolytic zinc-coated , ASTM A 591/A 591M, with steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, exposed. c. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. d. Steel Members Fabricated from Plate or Bar Stock: ASTM A 529/A 529 M or ASTM A 572/A 572M, 42,000-psi (290-MPa) minimum yield strength. e. For steel exposed to view on completion, provide materials having flat, smooth surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials whose surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. H. Fiberglass Sheet: Molded, seamless, thermosetting, glass-fiber-reinforced polyester panels with a minimum tensile strength of 15,000 psi (103 MPa) when tested according to ASTM D 638 and with a minimum flexural strength of 30,000 psi (207 MPa) when tested according to ASTM D 790. I. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing). J. Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufacturer by extrusion process, coated on both surfaces with abrasion-resistant coating. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 SIGNAGE 10 40 00 - 4 1. Impact Resistance: 16 ft-lbf/in. (854 J/m) per ASTM D 256, Method A. 2. Tensile Strength: 9000 lbf/sq. in. (62 MPa) per ASTM D 638. 3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 340,000 lbf/sq. in. (2345 MPa) per ASTM D 790. 4. Heat Deflection: 265 deg F (129 deg C) at 264 lbf/sq. in (1.82 MPa) per ASTM D 648. 5. Abrasion Resistance: 1.5 percent maximum haze increase for 100 revolutions of a Taber abraser with a load of 500 g per ASTM D 1044. K. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils (0.076 mm) with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior applications. 2.2 PLAQUES: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements by Mountain States Specialties, Inc. Tempe, Arizona. D. Etched Interior Signage: Provide metal sheet or plate for etching, as follows: 1. Plaque Material: Zinc with aluminum curved bottom half. 2. Custom Paint Colors: Match Pantone color matching system. 3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 4. Edge Style: Square, polished, with rounded aluminum edges. 5. Mounting: Concealed studs for substrates encountered. 6. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.18 mm) thick. 2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mountain States Specialties. Inc. 2.4 ACCESSORIES: A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 2.5 FABRICATION: H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 SIGNAGE 10 40 00 - 5 A. General: Provide manufacturer’s standard signs of configurations indicated. 1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide weld behind finishes surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. 3. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly. 4. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL: A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES: A. Clean Anodic Finish: Manufacturer’s standard Class 1 clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES: A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, “White Metal Blast Cleaning” or SSPC-SP 8, “Pickling”. B. Factory Priming for Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s standard , fast curing, lead-and chromate-free, universal primer, selected for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with substrate and field-applied finish paint sysem indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. C. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer’s standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer’s written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm). H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 SIGNAGE 10 40 00 - 6 2.9 ARCYLIC SHEET FINISHES: A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for three years for application intended. 2.10 DESCRIPTIONS/LOCATIONS: A. EXTERIOR SIGNS: 1. SIGN TYPE EXT-1: Handicapped Parking Signs. a. Mounting height: As indicated on drawings. b. Sign Size: 9 inches by 9 inches. c. Symbol: International handicapped symbol. d. Size: 7 inches. 2. SIGN TYPE EXT-2: Fire Station Name Signage. a. Mounting height: As indicated on drawings. b. Letter Height: 10 inches. c. Material: Cast aluminum letters. d. Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard fastening hardware. e. Location: AS indicated on drawings. f. Sign Wording: “FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION NO. 2”. 3. SIGN TYPE EXT-3: Fire Station Symbol Signs. a. Mounting height: As indicated on drawings. b. Letter Height: 18 inches. c. Material: Cut ¼” thick aluminum letters. d. Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard fastening hardware. 4. SIGN TYPE EXT-4: Building Address Sign. a. Mounting height: As indicated on drawings. b. Letter Height: 14 inches. c. Material: Cut ¼” thick aluminum letters. d. Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard fastening hardware. e. Sign Wording: “BUILDING ADDRESS”. B. INTERIOR SIGNS: 1. SIGN TYPE INT-1: Building Signs. a. Mounting height: As indicated on drawings. b. Letter Height: 8 inches. c. Material: Cut ¼” thick aluminum letters. d. Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard fastening hardware. e. Sign Wording: “FOUNTAIN HILLS FIRE STATION NO. 2”. 2. SIGN TYPE INT-2: General Room Signs. All interior signage shall comply with applicable ADA requirements. a. Mounting height: As indicated on drawings. b. Base: Melamine plastic laminate, 1/8” inch thick, rated non-static, fire retardant and self extinguishing. c. Colors: As selected by Architect and in accordance with local and Federal requirements. d. Mounting: Screw attach to wall as indicated on drawings. Minimum 2 screws per sign. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 SIGNAGE 10 40 00 - 7 e. Finish and contrast: i. Matte finish. ii. Characters shall contrast with background by at least 20 percent. f. Letters and Braille characters: i. Raised 1/32 inch upper case, sana serif or simple serif, and accompanied with Grade 2 Braille. Raised characters shall be at least 5/8 inch high, but no higher than 2 inches. ii. Letters and numbers: Width-to-height ratio from 3:5 to 1:1, and stroke width-to-height ratio from 1:5 to 1:10. iii. Text: Required quantity of each sign shall be as directed by Architect. 3. SIGN TYPE INT-3: Exit Signs. All interior signage shall comply with applicable ADA requirements. a. Mounting height: As indicated on drawings. b. Base: Melamine plastic laminate, 1/8” inch thick, rated non-static, fire retardant and self extinguishing. c. Colors: As selected by Architect and in accordance with local and Federal requirements. d. Mounting: Screw attach to wall as indicated on drawings. Minimum 2 screws per sign. e. Finish and contrast: i. Matte finish. ii. Characters shall contrast with background by at least 20 percent. f. Letters and Braille characters: i. Raised 1/32 inch upper case, sana serif or simple serif, and accompanied with Grade 2 Braille. Raised characters shall be at least 5/8 inch high, but no higher than 2 inches. ii. Letters and numbers: Width-to-height ratio from 3:5 to 1:1, and stroke width-to-height ratio from 1:5 to 1:10. iii. Text: Required quantity of each sign shall be as directed by Architect. 4. SIGN TYPE INT-4: Recessed Ground Fire Station Symbol. a. Mounting height: As indicated on drawings. b. Letter Height: 48 inches diameter circle. c. Material: As indicated on drawings. d. Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard fastening hardware. e. Design: As indicated on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, and electrical power are sized and located to accommodate signs. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. H&C 16-003 Fountain Hills Fire Station #2 SIGNAGE 10 40 00 - 8 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of type described and complying with manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on wall adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer’s written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. 2. Hook-and-Loop Tapes: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. 3. Magnetic Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. 4. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. 5. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8 inch-(3-mm-) thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using method specified above. 6. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer. 7. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials. C. Bracket-Mounted Signs: Provide manufacturer’s standard brackets, fittings, and hardware for mounting signs that project at right angels from walls and ceilings. Attach brackets and fittings securely to walls and ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions. D. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 1. Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface. 2. Projected Mounting: Mount characters at projection distance from wall surface indicated. E. Cast-Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for type of wall surface indicated. 1. Concealed Mounting: Mount plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on back of plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick-setting cement. 2. Face Mounting: Mount plaques using exposed fasteners with rosettes attached through face of plaque into wall surface. F. Do not field cut any signage members. G. Securely fasten wall mounted items to solid backing. H. Seal, patch and paint all penetrations. H&C ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13 - 1 SECTION 12 24 13 – ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manually operated sunscreen roller shades. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. B. NFPA 701-99 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles, features, finishes and operating instructions. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Mounting details and installation methods. B. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, product details, installation details, operational clearances, and relationship to adjacent work. C. Window Treatment Schedule: For all roller shades. Use same room designations as indicated on the Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one set of shade cloth options and aluminum finish color samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning materials and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls. H&C ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13 - 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use. D. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC 9644, ATCC9645. E. Environmental Certification: Submit written certification from the manufacturer, including third party evaluation, recycling characteristics, and perpetual use certification as specified below. Initial submittals, which do not include the Environmental Certification, below will be rejected. Materials that are simply 'PVC free' without identifying their inputs shall not qualify as meeting the intent of this specification and shall be rejected. F. Third Party Evaluation: Provide documentation stating the shade cloth has undergone third party evaluation for all chemical inputs, down to a scale of 100 parts per million, that have been evaluated for human and environmental safety. Identify any and all inputs, which are known to be carcinogenic, mutagenic, teratogenic, reproductively toxic, or endocrine disrupting. Also identify items that are toxic to aquatic systems, contain heavy metals, or organohalogens. The material shall contain no inputs that are known problems to human or environmental health per the above major criteria, except for an input that is required to meet local fire codes. G. Recycling Characteristics: Provide documentation that the shade cloth can and is part of a closed loop of perpetual use and not be required to be down cycled, incinerated or otherwise thrown away. Scrap material can be sent back to the mill for reprocessing and recycling into the same quality yarn and woven into new material, without down cycling. Certify that this process is currently underway and will be utilized for this project. H. Perpetual Use Certification: Certify that at the end of the useful life of the shade cloth, that the material can be sent back to the manufacturer for recapture as part of a closed loop of perpetual use and that the material can and will be reconstituted into new yarn, for weaving into new shade cloth. Provide information on each shade band indicating that the shade band can be sent back to the manufacturer for this purpose. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire- test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in the Window Treatment Schedule. H&C ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13 - 3 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Roller Shade Hardware, Chain and Shadecloth: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating twenty-five year limited warranty. B. Roller Shade Installation: Two years from date of Substantial Completion, not including scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Roller Window Shades: Manually operated, vertical roll-up, fabric window shades fit to windows to provide maximum protection from light streaks. Assembly to include clutch operator, controls, mounting hardware and other components necessary for complete installation. 1. Basis of Design: Provide FlexShade XD™ as manufactured by Draper, Inc. or approved equal. B. Rollers: Extruded aluminum roller tube of appropriate diameter to support shade fabric with minimal deflection. 1. Minimum Roller Tube Diameter: 1.56 inches. 2. Fabric Connection to Roller Tube: Spline fabric/roller attachment system to allow shade fabric to be removed from roller without having to remove roller from brackets. 3. Fabric Length: 6 inches greater than window height minimum. 4. Bottom Slat: 13/16 inch aluminum dowel, encased in bottom hem with heat sealed ends. 5. Orientation: Regular from back of roller. C. Clutch Operator: POM thermoplastic with welded 0.354 inch (9mm) primary steel post with rotational bearing, overrunning design, and positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to tube. Clutch mechanism never needs adjustment or lubrication. Center bead chain placement allows for right or left hand operation and accommodates side channel with no need for adjustment of chain location. D. Location: 1. Exterior window locations & Door Sidelites: Mecho 3% shade a. All Windows at Learning Center, Media Center Remodel & Career Center @ Academic Remodel H&C ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13 - 4 2. Interior window locations: Black out shades b. Workroom 671 @ Learning Center c. Study 609 @ Learning Center d. Office 614 @ Learning Center e. Office 628 @ Learning Center f. Offices 101, 102, 119 & 120 @ Media Center Remodel g. Control 104 (Window to Auditorium) @ Media Center Remodel h. Testing 117, 118 & 122 @ Media Center Remodel i. Office R102A (Corridor & Door Sidelite) @ Academic Remodel j. All Classroom door/sidelite locations @ Media Center & Learning Center k. No Shades – Window Type L, P, Q, R, S, T & U (Learning Center) l. No shades – Window/Sidelite at stair window Type E, F & G (Learning Center) m. Exclude window Type C, F & G (Media Center) E. Color: As selected by Architect. F. Bead Chain: #10 stainless steel chain with 120 pound breaking strength 1. Bead Chain Hold Down: Spring loaded G. Hardware 1. Fascia: L-shaped 0.125 inch thick extruded aluminum cover to conceal shade roller and hardware. Assembly snaps into endcaps without exposed fasteners. 2. Hardware Finish: Clear anodized (standard) 2.2 FABRIC A. Light-Filtering Fabric 1. Basis-of-Design: SheerWeave® Series SW2703, as manufactured by Phifer. a. Fabric Content and Structure: Duplex twill fabric, light outer panel color combined with dark interior color for thermal comfort and view-through. b. Performance Characteristics: 1) Flame retardant per NFPA 101 (Class A), NFPA 701 (TM#1, small scale), NFPA 701 (TM#2, large scale), California U.S. Title 19 (small scale), and BS 5867-2 2) Bacteria and Fungi Resistant per ASTM E2180. 3) GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified®. 4) GREENGUARD Children & Schools (SM) Certified. c. Openness Factor: 3 percent & blackout in accordance with ASHRAE 74. d. Thickness: 0.028 inches. e. Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd. NNPROPOSED 6" DIP W53 51515249505048464442GBLOT 9ENDPVMT0+000+501+001+502+002+503+003+5030'S.B.40' B.S.B. EX GATE & POSTS S T O R A G E80' S S S S S S TELTELCOXEE17301740 173017261 7 3 4 1 7 2 8 1732173417361738EX 6"WW1 2" W4" W16"W1 6 ' W 24" WWWVWVWV20.0'15.0'L4L2C1108.41'(R)N33°52'02"WW6"FF F 1740176017601750TOET OP GBGBGBTOP GB GBTO P GBGBTOPGB G BTOPGB1748 174617541756175817561758 176217641764 17621752175417561 75 8 17481746174417421742 1742545454535260625856GB6050.0PROPOSED---A5.0A5.01410' - 5"TSCSCS E S GEN10' - 0".23' - 4"A1.112A7.120A7.119A7.125A7.118A7.117A7.2A7.2A7.2A7.2A7.2A7.289A7.265111210A7.2141312347ASK1.11ASK1.01ASK1.22ASK1.31261023214141494441721725252123224247217181313182011411231652381523.21' - 0"55' - 0"R14' - 6"R6' - 8"151591592316161616161515151579' - 6".54 ' - 0 "2' - 6"R19' - 8 1/2"10' - 8 1/2".18' - 0"5' - 6"20' - 0"89' - 0"R82' - 4"R75' - 8"R5' - 0"4' - 0"15' - 0"R37' - 0"R.6' - 2"13132822217' - 5"12' - 8"10' - 0"NOTE:1. CONTRACTOR TO SUBMITSIGNAGE TO LOCAL JUSITICTIONFOR APPROVAL AND PERMIT.SIGNAGE INDICATED HERE WITHINIS NOT INCLUDED IN BUILDINGPERMIT.2. ARTWORK PROVIDED BYARCHITECT3. PAINT POST AND EXPOSEDPLYWOOD DEA155 ARABIAN REDPlan View6' X 6' WOOD POSTSAND BRACING4'-0" X 8'-0" X 3/4" PLYWOODSIGNOwnerby ownerlogo providedPartnersby ownerlogo providedby ownerlogo providedby ownerlogo providedHunt & CarawayArchitectsby ownerlogo providedby ownerlogo providedAddress:Address:Phone:Fax:ContractorCOLORED PROJECTRENDERING PROVIDED BYARCHITECT(4) 6" X 6" WOOD POSTS4'-0" X 8'-0" X 3/4" PLYWOODSIGN6' X 6' WOOD POSTSCUT PLYWOOD 12"X28"OPENING3'-8" X 10" X 3/4" PLYWOODSIGN SCREW/ GLUE INTO SIGN BELOW6" X 6" WOOD FRAME6" X 6" WOOD FRAME(4) 6" X 6" CROSS BRACES1'-4"10'-0"5'-0"N.T.S.150°8"2'-8"10"8"10"3'-0"8'-0"6"6"2'-0"6"1'-0"6"2'-0"6"6"1'-0"4"3'-8"1'-0"Address:Address:Phone:Fax:Town of Fountain HillsFire Station #2building rendering provided by architectAddress:Address:Phone:Fax:SHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/14/2017 5:01:53 PMA1.0SITE PLAN16-003AddendumJSSBJE8/29/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain Hills Fire Station #2Fire Station #20SCALE: 1:2020' 40'80'160'SCALE: 1" = 20'-0"Site Plan OverallELECTRICAL TRANSFORMERUTILITY EQUIPMENT. PROVID 4"CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PAD6" LARGER THAN EQUIP. FOOTPRINTWATER / IRRIGATION EQUIPMENTSITE / FIRE LANE SIGNAGE PERREGULATORY REQUIREMENTSPARKING / SITE LIGHTING POLEW/ 2' DIA. X 30" HIGH RAISED CONCRETEBASE -SEE ELEC. PLANSFIRE HYDRANT LOCATIONLIGHT BOLLARD FIXTURE -SEE ELEC. SITE PLANSFIRE LANE ACCESS ROAD.SHADE WIDTH 12'.ACCESSIBLE EGRESS AND EXIT WAYNEW 20'-0" ACCESS GATEFIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION -SEE CIVIL PLANSFDCKNOX BOX LOCATION, COORDINATE WITH FIRE MARSHAL -SEE DETAIL 3/A0.1KBLEGENDNEW ASPHALT PARKING ANDDRIVEWAYNEW CONCRETE SIDEWALK / SITE AMENITIESKEYNOTES - SEE THIS SHEETXNEW DECOMPOSED GRANITE AND DESERTLANDSCAPINGPROPERTY LINE AND PRELIM SET BACKNEW BUILDINGE. SHEA BLVDN . FO U N T A IN H ILLS B LV DN. FOUNTAIN HILLS BLVDPROJECTSITEFIREROCK COUNTRYE VILLAS DRN MUSKRAT LNBUFFALO DRN PINTO DRE MUSTANG DRE TREVINO DRE VENETIAN LNGENOA WAYE PALOMINO BLVDVICINITY MAPKEYNOTES:1234567891011161718192015212223121314GENERAL NOTES:CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS ANDCONDITIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION AND/OR FABRICATION.1.2.CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT FIRE ALARM SYSTEM TO TOWN FIRE DEPARTMENT FOR APPROVAL.CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ADA SLOPE FOR SIDEWALKCONNECTING ENTRY POINTS TO EXISTING SIDEWALK.CONTRACTOR IS TO PROVIDE WRITTEN NOTIFICATION IFGRADES ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. CONTRACTOR TOREFERENCE CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR GRADING AND DRAINAGE.3.SEE SHEET A1.1 -A1.2 FOR SITE DETAILS. PLACE CONSTRUCTION SIGN AT FRONT ENTRY TO THE PROJECT FOR VIEWING, REFERENCE DETAIL 1/A1.0.4.LOCK BOX (KNOX BOX) SHALL BE PROVIDED AT ALL EXTERIOR GATES THAT ARE LOCKABLE. SEE HARDWARESPECIFICATIONS FOR LOCK BOX TYPE. PROVIDE TOTAL OF(3). CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE SPECIFIC LOCATIONSWITH FIRE MARSHAL PRIOR TO FINAL CITY INSPECTION. SEE NOTE 2/A1.2.5.ALL FIRE LANE GATES ARE MANUAL AND MUST HAVE MINIMUM OF 20 FEET (UNOBSTRUCTED) WIDTH IN THE 90 DEGREE OPEN POSITION. HARDWARE PADLOCK REQUIREMENTS AS SET FORTH BY EPCOR, CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE PADLOCK REQUIREMENTS.6.INSTALL ALL STRIPING/PAVEMENT PAINTING/ SIGNAGE PERGOVERNING ORDINANCES. COORDINATE W/ CIVIL PLANS.7.SPECIAL SITE SOIL CONDITIONS EXIST. REFER TO CIVILSPECIFICATIONS & PLANS FOR SPECIFIC SITE CONCRETETHICKNESS & REINFORCEMENT METHODS. SEE STRUCT.PLANS FOR SLAB ON GRADE CONDITIONS, TYP.8.EXISTING PLANTS - SEE LANDSCAPEDG - SEE LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS PROPERTY LINE - SEE CIVIL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE STAIR W/ PAINTED STEEL RAILING/HANDRAIL - SEE DETAIL 1/A1.2PARKING LOT W/ PAINTED STRIPING -SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS6'-0" C.M.U. WALL - SEE DETAIL 8/A1.1FLAG POLE - SEE DETAIL 11/A1.1 ASPHALT DRIVEWAY - SEE CIVIL DRAWINGSCONCRETE SIDEWALK AND MEDIUM BROOM FINISH TYP - SEE CIVIL DRAWINGSSITE BUILDINGS - SEE PLANS12'-0" METAL PERF. TRASH ENCLOSURE GATE -SEE DETAIL 6,7,9,10/A1.1 AND 4/A1.2CONCRETE SIGN AND GABION WALL - 12'-0" X 1'-0" X 1'-0" -SEE DETAIL 12/A1.16" CONCRETE VERTICAL CURB - SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS - SEE DETAIL4'-0" CMU RETAINING WALL - SEE DETAIL 8/A1.1 - SEE STRUCTURAL6'-0" CMU RETAINING WALL - SEE DETAIL 8/A1.1 - SEE STRUCTURALADA PARKING STALL - SEE DETAIL 1/A1.1 6" CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER - SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS - SEE DETAIL FIRE HYDRANT - SEE CIVIL DRAWINGSCONCRETE WALK EDGE AT ASPHALT - SEE DETAIL2442" TUBE STEEL GUARD RAIL W/ WELDED WIRE MESH INSET PANELS AT 5'-0" O.C. -SEE DETAIL 5/A1.2ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT - SEE ELECTRICAL2'-0" CMU RETAINING WALL W/ 4'-0" CMU SITE RETAINING WALL - SEE DETAIL 8/A1.1 AND STRUCT.CONCRETE DRIVEWAY - SEE CIVILCONCRETE BUMPER - SEE CIVIL256" PIPE BOLLARDS - SEE DETAIL 10/A1.126HANDRAIL - SEE CIVIL 1111111111 1/2" = 1'-0"1SITE-CONSTRUCTIONSIGNAGE1 City Comments 6/2/17CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL FRAMING AND BLOCKING IN WOOD.9. 11PROPOSED 6" DIP W53 515152505048464442GBLOT 9ENDPVMT0+000+501+001+502+002+503+003+50S S TELTELCOXEEEX 6"WW4" W16"W24" WWWVWVWV20.0'15.0'L4108.41'(R)N33°52'02"WW6"FF F 1740176017601TOET OP GBTO PTOP G BTOPGB1748175417561758175617581762176417641762 1752175417561 75 8 545454535260625856GB60PROPOSEDC1C1C1 - WC121P MULTI-PURPOSE CHAIR, FLEXNET SEAT, FIXED ARMSC2 - WC420N CAPER STACKING CHAIR, FLEXNET SEAT, NO ARMSC2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C2C3C3C3C3 - WC410N CAPER STACKING CHAIR, MOLDED SEAT, NO ARMSC4 - WC420P CAPER STACKING CHAIR, FLEXTNET SEAT, FIXED ARMSC4C4C4C4CAPER CHAIRKEYT T T T T T T T T T T TTT T TT TTTTTBBFTTTTBBFTSHEETJOB #Checked by:Scale:Date:Revisions:As ShownDrawn by:Issue:Revisions:Hunt & CarawayArchitects1747 East Morten Avenue #306Phoenix, Arizona 85020Voice 602.595.8200 Fax 602.595.8399www.huntcaraway.comTHIS DRAWING & THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HUNT & CARAWAY ARCHITECTS AND MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR TRANSFERRED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE PROPRIETOR AND/OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. NOR SHALL ANY DATA OR INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN BE USED IN PART OR IN FULL FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT DESCRIBED WITHIN THESE DOCUMENTS.9/11/2017 8:07:10 AMAS1.0SITE PLAN16-003AddendumJSSSES9/8/17--Fountain Hills, ArizonaFountain Hills Fire Station #2Fire Station #20SCALE: 1:2020' 40'80'160'SCALE: 1" = 20'-0"Site Plan Overall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aundry 130 RR 129 RR 128 Entry 100 Unisex Restroom 101 Unisex Restroom 105 Community Room 103 Corridor 110 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" ELECTRICAL POWER PLANN 9 -0 7 -1 7 9 -0 7 -1 7 9 -0 7 -1 7 Hunt & Caraway Architectsarchitectural design & planning - interiors - programming1747 East Morten Avenue, Suite 306 - Phoenix, AZ 85020Phone: 602.595.8200 - Fax: 602.595.8399Project Name:Fountain Hills Fire Station #2Pre-Bid Question LogProject Number:2016-003Date / Time Name / Company / Phone QuestionAnswerAdditional Request8/8/20179:12 AMJohn AlverezSun Eagle Corporation480-961-0004HVAC - 1. Why do we have ducts for each cooler into the bay space that is twice the size of the cooler drop? Cooler drop is 18x21 and the ducts drawn are 20x24 each.Ductwork needs to be upsized to handle required CFM. (2) Ducts have been provided to each bay to reduce the size which will allow them to fit in the structure.8/8/20179:12 AMJohn AlverezSun Eagle Corporation480-961-0004HVAC- 2. What type of trim are we to install on those cooler ducts?Provid united metal A3333 auto damper diffuser.10/24/2017Page 1 of 14 Date / Time Name / Company / Phone QuestionAnswerAdditional Request8/8/20179:12 AMJohn AlverezSun Eagle Corporation480-961-0004HVAC -3. What type of trim is required for the single cooler drop in the apparatus bay 3?Provide metal A4545 auto damper diffuser.8/8/20179:12 AMJohn AlverezSun Eagle Corporation480-961-0004HVAC -4. No thermostat is shown for units IU-C1, IU-D1 and IU-A2. Please clarify if this is correct. If a thermostat is needed, please provide the location.IU-C1 shall be located in Community Room 103 below return grille. IU-D1 shall be located in Corridor 127 directly below return grille on wing wall adjacent to Dorm 122.IU-A2 shall be located below return in SCBA 138.8/8/20179:12 AMJohn AlverezSun Eagle Corporation480-961-0004HVAC -5. There is no condensate drains shown for IU-D1, and IU-A2. Please clarify if this is correct. If a condensate drain is needed, please provide the location.IU-A2, extend 3/4" condesate drain mop sink in room 137 to terminate with air gap. IU-D1 extend to connect to lav tail piece in Room 131.10/24/2017Page 2 of 14 Date / Time Name / Company / Phone QuestionAnswerAdditional Request8/10/20172:22 PMRocky BoydstonRecreate Companies480-492-4771Does this project have a Small Building Enterprise (SBE) requirement as we are an SBE Masonry Company? I did not see one in the spec. and totally slipped my mind to ask at the meeting.No requirement has been set for SBE.8/10/20173:42 PMConnor PattersonPace Pacific480-406-3110Is there a specific pricing submittal sheet for this project or are we to use our own pricing sheet? If we are to use our own, how would the City like to see it be broken out?Reference Addendum #4, updated Price Sheet has been provided.8/10/20173:42 PMConnor PattersonPace Pacific480-406-3110On Sheet A1.0 there are some keynotes that are referring you to the wrong details. For example, Keynote 11 refers to detail 10 on A1.1 for the trash enclosure gate, and it's actually a site-pipe bollard. Keynote 9 refers to detail 9 on sheet A1.1 for the 8' CMU wall, and the detail is actually the Site-Refuse Gate.Keynote 10 on A/1.0 references Detail 12 on A1.1 revised to Detail 11 on A1.1. Replace A1.0 Keynote 9 "-SEE DETAIL 9/A1/1" to "-SEE DETAIL 8/A1.1".10/24/2017Page 3 of 14 Date / Time Name / Company / Phone QuestionAnswerAdditional Request8/10/20173:42 PMConnor PattersonPace Pacific480-406-3110Are the EPCOR drawings to be bid as a serperate line item? On the drawings it says they are not to be included in the contract.In the pricing there are two base bids for the fire station drawings and EPCOR drawings. Reference Addendum #4, updated Price Sheet has been provided.8/14/20178:16 AMMark LorenzenLOR Construction480-507-1954Can you tell me the keyeing system? The specs say to match facility/owner standard but does not provide information on what that is.Best Access systems (Stanley)8/22/20174:34 PMJohn AlverezSun Eagle Corporation480-961-0004Can you provide the R-Value or the required thickness of the SIPS Panels at Day Room?Minimum R-38 insulation value required.10/24/2017Page 4 of 14 Date / Time Name / Company / Phone QuestionAnswerAdditional Request8/22/20174:34 PMJohn AlverezSun Eagle Corporation480-961-0004Are the custom trusses at the Day Room built with rough sawn or S4S lumber?S4S lumber with minimum structural properties as indicated in the structural notes.8/10/20172:39 PMConnor PattersonPace Pacific480-406-3110In the plans for Fountain Hills Fire Station No. 2, on sheet A5.0 in General Notes it refers to "AL" sheets. There are no "AL" sheets located in the plans. Please Advise.Reference Addendum #4. Reference attached sheet number is A1.0 Site Plan, dated 8/29/17 and AS1.0 Site Plan dated 6/2/17.8/22/20171:00 PMZachary ScottSurface Shields708-745-5359Is Builder Board an equilvalent/replacement to "Kraft Paper" on page 7 of the 09 30 00 Tiling? Please let me know if you need any additional information.Yes, Builder Board is an acceptable alternate.10/24/2017Page 5 of 14 Date / Time Name / Company / Phone QuestionAnswerAdditional Request8/25/20171:36 PMAli-HaykiPath Construction Southwest602-397-1746Has there been any decision as to a project allowance for hard-dig on the site? Please advise.No, The soil conditions are covered on the Geotechnical Evaluation Report, and also covered on the IFB, 3.20 Soil and Subsurface Conditions. Each bidder will need to assume some risk on this.8/9/201710:00 AMPre-Bid Construction Meeting Do we need to complete the paperwork if we are using an EPCOR prequalified contractor?Paperwork is required as part of the submittal process and approved before work is started within EPCOR property.8/9/201710:00 AMPre-Bid Construction Meeting Shade screens for windows at the atios are both shown in alternate 5, are they both replicable?Reference Addendum #4. The Add Alternates Section of the Price Sheet has been changed to reflect the Shade Screens. Alternates 5A and 5B. Reference attached sketches ASK1.0, ASK1.1, ASK1.2, and ASK1.3. Reference specification section 10 00 00 Miscellaneous and section 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades.10/24/2017Page 6 of 14 Date / Time Name / Company / Phone QuestionAnswerAdditional Request8/9/201710:00 AMPre-Bid Construction Meeting Can you explain alternate 7 with Goodman's? Goodman's has provided a listing of all furniture and everything that is included within the project. As the base bid, the contractor is to provide everything within the matrix.8/9/201710:00 AMPre-Bid Construction Meeting Can you provide a list of approved EPCOR Contractors?List has been provided within the specifications.8/9/201710:00 AMPre-Bid Construction Meeting The invitation for bid ask to provide three similar projects in the last 120 months and the reference form within the specs states provide three similar projects within the last 60 months - can you clarify? Is a "similar project" considered a fire station? If so, would an applicant be disqualified if they do not have three fire station projects in the last five years?60 months is the answer. Similar project is considered a fire station. And yes, an applicant would be disqualified if they do not have three fire station projects in the last five years.10/24/2017Page 7 of 14 Date / Time Name / Company / Phone QuestionAnswerAdditional Request8/9/201710:00 AMPre-Bid Construction Meeting Is this a prevailing wage job? It is not required on this project.8/9/201710:00 AMPre-Bid Construction Meeting There is no dollar amount for the specifications for allowance, (testing and inspection allowances.)Please see Price Sheet. Line items 2 and 4 contain Owner's Allowance.8/9/201710:00 AMPre-Bid Construction Meeting Is it mandatory to have the Town of Fountain Hills Business License for the bid?We do not require a business license unless you do the work in town. The license would be needed after the awarded bid.10/24/2017Page 8 of 14 Date / Time Name / Company / Phone QuestionAnswerAdditional Request8/9/201710:00 AMPre-Bid Construction Meeting Requesting clarification on alternates - Ad Alternate 1 base bid vs. the alternate there is a lot of need for interpretation as well as alternate 2 - the size members called out on the documents could not be located on the website as well as any attachment regarding the base bid faux. Is the faux and tube steel to look like wood once completed? Alternate 3 - bi-fold doors, is that for all 6 doors or exits? Alternate 4 - documents show different elevations of the tile? Alternate 5 - tube steel awning cover, the documents show what is wanted for the tube steel but not what is needed for the base bid. No details of what needs to be attached or what is needed.Reference Addendum #4. Elevations sketches ASK1.0, ASK1.1, ASK1.2, and ASK1.3 indicate locations for Alernate Bid 1.Faux wood systems to be custom-sized to match design approved by Architect.Steel tube shall be painted to simulate wood finish.Bi-folding doors are to be provided at the Street View.Contractor is to provide aluminum awning engineering and design to match steel structure.8/17/201710:24 AMMatthew GrahamPace Pacific Corporation602-437-8729Samsung TV's - Pg. A2.0, note 10 and 31 say "TV provided and installed by contractor." Note 32 says "TV's provided by owner" ((6) in dorm rooms). Spec book, volume 2, page 10.00.00.3 shows (8) TV's provided and installed by contractor. Please advise.Reference Addendum #4, reference specification section 10 00 00 Miscellaneous.10/24/2017Page 9 of 14 Date / Time Name / Company / Phone QuestionAnswerAdditional Request8/16/20172:38 PMMatthew GrahamPace Pacific602-437-8729Alternate #5 is numbered twice. Is Alternate #5 to be combined (5a-5b) or should there be 9 separate alternate?Reference Addendum #4, 5A and 5B will be provided on the updated Price Sheet.8/16/20171:18 PMMatthew GrahamPace Pacific602-437-8729Has the Town of Fountain Hills determined a start date and duration for this project?The contract duration can be found in Section 3.3 of the IFB. The start date will be the First Monday after Town Councils approval of the IFB/Contract.8/16/201712:24 PMMatthew GrahamPace Pacific602-437-8729Architectural pages A3.1, 4.1, 4.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5 and note 3 on page A6.3, reference metal stud framing and bracing. The wall types shown on page A6.3 and all structural pages denote wood stud framing. Should we assume ALL framing, bracing and blocking to be wood?Yes, all framing is to be wood framing. See General Notes on Cover Sheet.10/24/2017Page 10 of 14 Date / Time Name / Company / Phone QuestionAnswerAdditional Request8/16/201710:29 AMMatthew GrahamPace Pacific602-437-8729Alternate #1 - a. Are we to include ALL stone veneer shown on drawings as an alternate EXCEPT the stone veneer shown on the entry elevations? Entry stone veneer to be inlcuded in base bid?b. Base bid - Are we to substitute stucco in lieu of stone veneer shown on exterior elevations EXCEPT where stone veneer is shown is shown pn the entry elevation?Reference Addendum #4, sketches ASK1.0, ASK1.1, ASK1.2 and ASK1.3. Base bid is to include stucco in lieu of stone veneer, except as shown on entry elevation.8/16/201710:29 AMMatthew GrahamPace Pacific602-437-8729Alternate #6 - a. 6' max. height VERSA-LOK retaining wall system - Is this for ALL retaining walls included on this project; retaining wall at north side of main access road (EPCOR plan pages)? Retaining wall(s) (curved walls) at south side of project (main building site plan)?The VERSA-LOK is for all retaining wall and should be designed by the manufacturer to meet current design requirements. Contractor to provide design and shop drawings to comply with current design intent.10/24/2017Page 11 of 14 Date / Time Name / Company / Phone QuestionAnswerAdditional Request8/16/201710:29 AMMatthew GrahamPace Pacific602-437-8729Appliances - pg. A7.2, Details 13 and 14 show BBQ grill - See spec. sheet. There is no mention of the BBQ grill in the specs nor any detail provided. MEP's shows no gas/electric service to BBQ grill. Please advise.Reference Addendum #4, specification secion 10 00 00 Miscellaneous. Bottle filled gas grill will be provided without gas and electrical service.8/16/201710:29 AMMatthew GrahamPace Pacific602-437-8729EPCOR Plan - Is the work within the Building site plan and EPCOR site plans to be on a sperate bid/contract? Civil drawing pg. 3 of 5 indicates EPCOR site work "N.I.C." and EPCOR plan pg. 2 of 2 indicates BUILDING SITE work 'N.I.C.". Please clarifyThere is a bid for the Fire Station and a seperate bid for the EPCOR Plan. Reference Addendum #4.10/24/2017Page 12 of 14 Date / Time Name / Company / Phone QuestionAnswerAdditional Request8/16/201710:29 AMConnor PattersonPace Pacific602-437-8729Missing/incorrect plan pages/details -a. Pg. A1.0, General Notes #4 and #5 reference AS 1.4-1.9 and note 10/AS 1.6. Current set has only pages AS 1.0 and AS 1.1.b. Pg. A1.0, Legend "P" references Details 6/AS 1.4. No such page inlcuded.c. Pg. A1.1, Keynote(s) 8,9,10,11,15,16,17,18,19,25 Detail and Page references are incorrect. d. Exterior elevation pages A5.0, A5.1, General notes reference "AL" pages. There are no "AL" pages. e. Nearly all pages referencing notes, details and pages are incorrect and/or missing. Too many to list. Please advise.Reference Addendum #4, updated A1.0 Site dated 9/8/17 has been provided. General notes have been updated on the Addendum.10/24/2017Page 13 of 14 Date / Time Name / Company / Phone QuestionAnswerAdditional Request8/15/20179:50 AMJennifer CallahanAllsteel602-908-9236Hi Justin,I wanted to reach out to you about your fire station project. I am the local Allsteel rep. - we provide a wide range of office furniture solutions. I wanted to see if you will be handling furniture and if so, could we set up a time to visit about your project? We are also on several contracts making purchasing easy for. I am attaching an overview document for your reference. I look forward to hearing from you soon.Warmest regards,JennReference Addendum #4, specification section 10 00 00 Miscellaneous for furniture information.10/24/2017Page 14 of 14 TOWN OF FOUNTAIN HILLS AGENDA ACTION FORM Meeting Date:12/19/2017 Meeting Type:Regular Session Agenda Type:Regular Submitting Department:Administration Staff Contact Information:Grady E.Miller,Town Manager REQUEST TO COUNCIL (Agenda Language):DISCUSSION WITH POSSIBLE DIRECTION TO STAFF regarding cul- de-sac concepts to address the closure of Technology Drive. Applicant:N/A Applicant Contact Information:N/A Owner:Town of Fountain Hills Owner Contact Information:N/A Property Location:Technology Drive and Saguaro Related Ordinance,Policy or Guiding Principle: Staff Summary (background):The Town Council voted at the October 17, 2017 Town Council meetingto keep the gate at Technology Drive closed and for staff to return to Councilwith cul-de-sac concepts for Council consideration. Atthe December 5, 2017, Town Council meeting, Public Works DirectorJustin Weldy presented two concepts for installing a cul-de-sac at the intersection of Technology Driveand Saguaro.The two concepts ranged in cost of $26,000 to $31,000.Both concepts were similar in that they included a decorative block wall,new pavement,curbing, a drainage scupper,and decomposed granite. The only difference in the design concepts was that one concept include a sidewalk infront of a decorative wall and the other did not. During the discussion on December 5, Mayor Kavanagh indicated a desire to make the cul-de-sac more attractive like Stancrest Drive which included trees and other landscaping.Vice Mayor Brown also suggested deleting the wall and adding a landscaped berm area with boulders to save money and provide screening for the neighborhood.Since there appeared to be a consensus with the more attractive alternatives recommended by the Mayor and Vice Mayor,staff moved forward in researching two new concepts for Council consideration at the December 19,2017,Town Council meeting. After taking the Council direction into account,staff developed the first concept which consists of two berms with boulders,desert vegetation,decomposed granite,and a drainage channel constructed of rip rap. This option would cost approximately $24,000. The second concept is identical to the first concept except it includes trees,shrubs,other vegetation,and irrigation.This option would cost approximately $30,000. In order to reduce costs for both options,staff is recommending that Public Works staff build the berms,utilize existing inventory of decomposed granite and boulders,and perform the finishing work.Based on the option selected,this will save the town between $4,600 to $5,300 which is already factored in the estimates above. Page 1 of 2